LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



ill I I 

000037D3447 









^°^v 









vV«* 



r * * • o 






















AT • 









A 
THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL 

GRAMMAR 

OF THE 

Jfttntfi KotiQUt ; 

IN WHICH 

THE PRESENT USAGE IS DISPLAYED, 

AGREEABLY TO THE DECISIONS OF 

THE FRENCH ACADEMY. 

J. . ■ B 

Br M. DE LEVIZAC. 



REVISED AND CORRECTED BY 

MR. STEPHEN PASGLUIER, M.A. 

OF THE UNIVER8ITY OF PARIS, AND TEACHER OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE 
TO^HE CHARTER-HOUSE SCHOOL. 

SEVENTH AMERIGAN EDITION, 

WITH THE VOLTARIAN ORTHOGRAPHY, ACCORDING TO THE DICTIONARY 
OF THE FRENCH ACADEMY. 



[Stereotyped by A. Chandler.] 



NEW'-YORK : 

W. E. DEAJT, PRINTER fy PUBLISHER, 32 AJVJV.STREET. 

COLLINS ft HANNAY ; N. ft J. WHITE ; J. B. COLLINS ; 
* ROE LOCKWOOD ; MON80N BANCROFT, AND 
CHARLES H. BANCROFT, NEW-ORLEANS. 



1834. 



■p 



=>c. 



^ 



o^ 



\A 



V s * 



Southern District of New-York, ss. 

BE IT REMEMBERED, That on the 27tb day of January, A. D. 1829, in 
the fifty-third year of the Independence of the United States of America, W- 
E.Dean, of the said district, hath deposited in this office the title of a book, 
the right whereof he claims as proprietor, in the words following, to wit: 

• 
■ A Theoretical and Practical Grammar of the French Tongue; in which 
the present usage is displayed, agreeably to the decisions of the French 
Academy. By M. De L6vizac. Revised and corrected by Mr. Stephen 
Pttsqmer, M. A. of the University of Paris, and teacher of the French Lan- 
guage to the Charter-house School. Seventh American Edition, with the 
Voltarian Orthography, according to the Dictionary of the French Acade- 
my." 

In conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled u An 
Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, 
and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, dining the time 
therein mentioned j" and also to an act, entitled u An act, supplementary to 
an act, entitled, an Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the 
copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of such co- 
pies during the times therein mentioned, and extending the benefits there- 
of to the arts of designing, engraving, and etching historical and other prints." 

FRED. J. BETTS, 
Clerk of the Soutturn District of ;Veu<- Fo; Jr. 



APR 7 1923 






PREFACE. 



The distinguished success that has attended the 
Grammar of M. de Levizac, which has been adopt- 
ed by the most celebrated Schools in England, is a 
sufficient proof that it is one of the most useful that 
has hitherto appeared : it has, indeed, one advan- 
tage, that will always secure it a preference above 
every other : all the principles it contains, as well 
as the Orthography of Voltaire, are sanctioned by, 
the authority of the French Academy, and by all 
the Grammarians of erftinence, who for nearly a 
century have laboured to ascertain and fix the true 
rules of the French Language. Another advan- 
tage, not less valuable, is, that almost all the phrases 
given as examples or exercises, being drawn from 
the Dictionary of the Academy, or the most approv- 
ed French writers, the Student of this Grammar 
will store his mind with none but pure and correct 
forms of speech, and will not be liable to contract 
vicious modes of expression, and imbibe error while 
aiming at instruction. The proprietors have been 
particularly careful with respect to the correctness 
and simplicity of the present Edition, which they 
have submitted to a strict revision, and which, on 
a comparison, will be found to surpass preceding 
Editions, both in the copiousness of its remarks and 
its general perspicuity. 






EXPLANATION 



"^■^•HR^ajm: 



EVIATIONS USED IN THE EXERCISES 



m. stands for 


masculine. 


L - 


- feminine. 


pi.*- - 


- plural. 


s. orbing. 


- singular. 


h m. 


- h mute. 


h asp. 


- h aspirated. 


pr. - 


- preposition. 


art. - 


- article. 


pr.-art. 


- article contracted. 


pron. 


- pronoun. 


inf-l 


- present of the infinitive. 


inf-2 


- the past. 


inf-3 


- participle present. 


inf-4 


- participle past. 


ind-1 


- present of the indicative. 


ind-2 


- imperfect. . 


ind-3 


- preterit definite. 


ind-4 


- preterit indefinite. 


ind-5 


- preterit anterior. 


ind-6 
ind-7 


- pluperfect. 

- future absolute. 


ind-8 


- future anterior. 


cond-1 


- present uf the conditional. 


cond-2 


- first conditional past. 


cond-3 


- second conditional past. 


imp. 


- imperative. 


subj-1 


- present of the subjunctive, 


subj-2 


- imperfect. 


subj-3 


- preterit. 


subj-4 


- pluperfect. 



* in the exercises denotes that the word under which it is 
placed, is not expressed in French. 

— denotes that the English word (see page 74) is spelt alike 
in French, or at least the part under which this sign is placed. 

=■ denotes that the French word differs from the English only 
by its termination, as directed page 75. 

Those French words which are followed by the above signs, 
are to take the form which they point out. 

In the Third part the * is no longer placed under the word, 
but after it. 

In filling the exercises, the order of the figures placed some- 
times in the phrases after the French words, is to be observed. 

In the exercises, when several English words are included be- 
tween a parenthesis, they must be translated by the only worcjs 
placed under. 



CONTENTS. 



Of Consonants 

Of Gender .... 

A V jcabular) , French and English 

GRAMMAR. 
Introduction .... 
Apostrophe and Elision 



PAGE. 

1 

2 
2 
3 
4 



The French Alphabet . 

General Observations . 

The Vowel? .... 

Accentuation and Punctuation . 

Tatlk I. The seventeen Simple Sounds 

Table II. Coalition of Letters, representing the 17 Simple Sounds 5 

Table III The Diphthongs . . . . . 6&7 

Observations upon the two first Tables 

Of the Y. ... 

Exercises on Monosyllables 

Dissyllables 

Words of three Syllables 



8 
9 
10 
12 
14 
17 
37 
46 



71 

73* and fol. 



PART I. 

OF WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE AND 
INFLECTIONS. 



Chapter I. 
Of the Substantive 
Substantive Common 
Proper 

Collective 

Of Masculine Gender 

Feminine Gender 

Of Singular Number 

Plural Number 

Of the Formation of the Plural 

General Rule .... 

Chapter II. 
Of the Article .... 

Elision of the Article . 

Contraction of the Article 

Cases in which contraction does not take place 

General Rules on the Article . 

Of the Article in a partitive sense 

a2 




76 
77 
77 
77 
77 
77 
77 
78 
78 
78 



80 
80 
81 
82 
83 
84 



CONTENTS. 



Chapter III. 

PAGH. 

Of the Adjective ...... 85 

Of the Formation of the Feminine of Adjectives . . 86 

Exceptions ....... 88 

Of the Formation of the Plural of Adjectives ... 89 

Degrees of Signification of Adjectives ... 91 

Positive ...... 91 

Comparative of Superiority .... 91 

Inferiority .... 92 

Equality .... 92 

On meillkur, moindre, and PIRE .... 93 

Of the Superlative . . . . . .94 

Agreement of the Adjective with the Substantive . • 95 

Nouns and Adjectives of Number . . 97 

Chapter IV. 

Of the Pronoun ...... 100 

1. Of the Personal Pronoun .... 100 

Pronouns of the First Person . . .101 

Second Person . . .101 

Third Person . . .102 

Reflected or Reciprocal Pronouns . . . 105 

Of ex and y. . . . . 106 and 107 

2. Possessive Pronouns . . . . .108 

Of those that always agree with a Noun expressed . 108 
with Nouns understood . 109 

3. Of Relative Pronouns . . . . .111 

4. Of Pronouns Absolute ..... 112 

5. Of Demonstrative Pronouns . . . .113 

6. Of Indefinite Pronouns . . . . .114 

First Class ...... 114 

Second Class ...... 116 

Third Class . . , . . .117 

Fourth Class . . . . . .118 

Chapter V. 

Of Verbs . . . . . . .118 

Characteristics of Verbs . . . . .118 

The Five Sorts of Verbs . . . . .120 

Ot Conjugations ...... 122 

0? the Auxiliary Verb avoir . . . . .128 

The same Verb with a Negative . . . 130 

interrogatively and affirmatively . . 131 

interrogatively and negatively . . 132 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb etre . . . 134 

1. Conjugation in er ..... 140 

2. ir 149 

3. oir ..... 156 

\ j 4. re . . . .160 

Conjugation of the Pronominal Verbs .... 166 
Passive Verbs . . . 1 74 



CONTENTS. 



Vll 



Conjugation of the Neuter Verbs 

Of the Impersonal Verbs .... 

Conjugation of the impersonal Verb falloir . 

y avoir . 

Of the Irregular Verbs ..... 
Irregular Verbs of the First Conjugation 

Second Conjugation 

Third Conjugation 

Fourth Conjugation 

Irregular Verbs of the First Branch of the Fourth Conjugation 
Second Branch 

- Third Branch . 

■ Fourth Branch . 



PAGE. 

175 
176 
177 
179 
180 
180 
182 
189 
194 
194 
200 
201 
202 
207 



Observations 

Table of the Primitive Tenses of the Four Regular Conjugations 208 

Irregular and Defective Verbs 208 



Of Prepositions. 
Of the Adverb . 
Of Conjunctions 
Of Interjections 



Chapter VI. 
Chapter VII. 

Chapter VIII. 
Chapter IX. 



211 
218 
223 
228 



PART II. 

SYNTAX, 

OR WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 

Chapter I. 

Of the Substantive ...... 229 

Of Compound Nouns ...... 229 

Chapter II. 
Of the Article ....... 231 

A comparative Table on the Use of the Article . f 232 

Chapter III. 
Of the Adjective. . . . 

Difference of Construction between the English and French Lan- 
guages ....... 237 



Vlll 



CONTENTS* 



Regimen of the Adjectives 
Promiscuous Exercises . 



PAGE. 

238 
239 



Chapter IV. 

Of the Pronouns 

1. Of Personal Pronouns . 

Of the Place of Personal Pronouns 
Of Personal Pronouns used as Subject 
Of Personal Pronouns used as Regimen 

2. Of the Relative Pronouns 

3. Of Pronouns Absolute . 

4. Of Demonstrative Pronouns 
i 5. Of Indefinite Pronouns 

First Class .... 

Second Class .... 

Third Class .... 

Fourth Class .... 

Chapter V. 

A general Exercise on the Pronouns 
Of the Verb . . . . 

Agreement of the Verb with the Subject 
Of the Regimen of Verbs 

Nature and Use of Moods and Tenses 

Indicative 

Conditional 

Imperative . . v . 

— - — Subjunctive 

Infinitive 

Participle 

Participle Present 

■Past 



Agreement of the Participle Past with its Subject 
■ with its Regimen 



Of the Adverbs 
Situation of Adverbs 



Chapter VI. 



Chapter VII. 



Of the Conjunctions 

Conjunction que 

Government of Conjunctions . 
Conjunctions that are followed by an Infinitive 

. govern the Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Promiscuous Exercises . 



CONTENTS. 



IX 



PART III. 

IDIOMS, OR WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR PARTICULAR 

RULES. 

Chapter I. 



Of the Substantive 

Chapter II. 
Of the Article . 

Cases in which the Article is to be used 
not used . 

Chapter III. 



Of the Adjective 



with the Article 



lui, leub, may 



a Noun express- 



320 
320 
326 

327 
330 
332 

335 



The Place of Adjectives 
Regimen of Adjectives 
Adjectives of Number . 

Chapter IV 
Of Pronouns .... 
Pronouns Personal . 
On ihe Pronoun soi 
Cases in which ihe Pronouns e-lle, elles, eux 

apply to things 
Difficulty respecting the Pronoun explained 
Repetition of the Personal Pronouns 
Relation of the Pronouns of the Third Person to 

ed before 
Explanation of some Difficulties attendant on the Possessive 

Pronouns . 
Relative Pronouns — Of qui 
Of que . 

Of lequel and dont . 
Of quoi and ou 

Absolute Pronouns. — Of qui, que, and quoi 
Demonstrative Pronouns 
Indefinite Pronouns. — Of on 
Of quinconque and chacun 

Of PERiONNE, L'UN ET l'aUTRE,&NI L'UN Nl l'a 
Of TOUT 

Of quelqur — que and quel que 

Chapter V. 

Of the Verb. — Agreement of the Verb with its Subject . 360 

Of the Collective Partitive ..... 361 

Plate of the Subject, with regard to the Verb . . 363 

Government ot Verbs . . . • . 367 

On the Use, proj er and accidental, of Moods and Tenses, Indicative 369 

the Conditional ...... 376 

Remark on the Use of the Conditional and Future . . 378 

Use of the Subjunctive ...... 379 



page. 
300 



203 
303 
308 



312 
312 
314 
317 
318 



337 
341 

344 
345 
346 and 347 
347 
349 
353 
354 

utre, tout,& rien 356 
357 
358 and 359 



CONTENTS. 



Relations between the Tenses of the Indicative 

Subjunctive and those ol the 

Indicative ...... 

Farther Observations upon the Conditional 3nd Subjunctive 
Relations between ihe Tenses of the different Moods . 

of the Indicative 

to the Conditional, &c. 

of the Present and Future Absolute, &,c. 

Principal Relations with the Subjunctive 
Of the Infinitive 

Chapter VI. 
Of Prepositions 

The Use of the Article with Prepositions 
Repetition of the Prepositions . 
Government of Prepositions 

CH4PTER VII. 
Of the Adverb — Of the Negative ne . 
Of the Place of the Negatives . 
Of the Use of pas and point . 
When may both pas and point be omitted ? 
When ou^ht both pas and point to be omitted 
On plus and datantage 
On si, aussi, tant, and autant 

Chapter VIII. 
Of Grammatical Construction . 
Of Inversion .... 
Of the Ellipsis .... 
Of the Pleonasm 
Of the Syllepsis 

Chapter IX. 
Of Grammatical Discordances, Amphibologies and Gallicisms 
Of Amphibologies 

Of Gallicisms .... 
Free Exercises 

Pnrases on some Difficulties of the French Language 
On the Collective Partitives 

Of some Verbs which cannot be conjugated with avoi 
On the Personal Pronouns 
On Words of Quantity 
On soi, lui, soi-meme, and lui-memb . 
On the Relative Pronouns 
On the Demonstrative Pronouns 
On the Verbs avoir employed impersonally 
Promiscuous Phrases 
Phrases in which the Article is used 

omitted 

On the Pronoun i,e 

On the Participle Past . 

On the Principal Relations of Moods and Tenses 

On the Negative ne 

On some Delicacies of the French Language 



pa«r. 

382 



FRENCH GRAMMAR. 



Grammar, in general, is the art of speaking and writing correctly. 

To speak — is to convey our thoughts by means of articulated sounds. 

To icrite — is to render ihose thoughts permanently visible by means 
of certain Signs, or Characters, called Letters, and their number dis- 
posed in order constitutes what is called the Alphabet. 



FRENCH ALPHABET. 

ROMA?.* LETTERS. ITALIC LETTERS. OLD PRO. XEW PRO. 



A 


a 


A 


a 


ah 


ah 


B 


b 


B 


b 


bay* 


be* 


c 


c 


C 


c 


say 


he 


D 


d 


D 


d 


day 


de 


E 


e 


E 


e 


a 


a 


F 


f 


F 


f 


eff 


fi 


G 


g 


G 


8 


></t 


ghe 


H 


h 


H 


h 


ahsh 


he 


I 


i 


I 


i 


e 


e 


J 


J 


J 


3 


jeej 


H 


K 


k 


K 


k 


hah 


ke 


L 


1 


L 


I 


ell 


le 


M 


in 


M 


m 


emm 


me 


N 


n 


N 


n 


enn 


ne 


o 

















P 


P 


P 


V 


pay 


pe 


Q 


q 


Q 


a 


kii^ 


ke 


R 


r 


R 


r 


heir 


re 


S 


s 


S 


s 


ess 


se 


T 


t 


T 


t 


lay 


te 


U 


u 


V 


u 


u% 


u% 


V 


V 


V 


V 


vay 


ve 


X 


X 


X 


X 


eeks 


kse 


Y 


y 


Y 


y 


e grec 


e grec 


Z 


z 


Z 


z 


zed 


ze 



* Here both Ibe old pronunciation and the new are expressed by English 
sounds, and in the new the letter e after each consonant is sounded as in the 
English word battery. 

f The two consonant* g and j are sounded in the Alphabet like * in plcarurt, 
•r z in azure. 

% See the second note, page 4. 



2 THE SOUNDS 

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 

The French Alphabet contains, as we see, twenty- 
jive letters, which are divided into Vowels and Conso* 
nants. 

A vowel is the simple emission of the voice forming 
an articulate sound by itself. 

A consonant, on the contrary, cannot be articulated 
without the assistance of a vowel. 

The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, and y, which sometimes 
has the sound of one i, and sometimes of two. 

The nineteen remaining letters, b, c, d,f,g, h,j, k, 
I, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, v, x, z, are consonants. 



THE VOWELS. 



The French language com- 
prehends more distinct simple 
sounds than are here represent- 
ed by the above five vowels ; 
for, according as these are pro- 
nounced close or broad, short 
or long, with the appropriate 
accentuation, they furnish — ten seventeen sim* 
simple sounds. pie sounds. — 

N.B. <! Add to these — three other i See Table L 
simple sounds, each represent- p. 4. 
ed by the combination of two 
vowels, and 

Lastly — four nasal simple 
sounds, which again, for want of 
more appropriate signs, are re- 
presented by the coalition of n 
or m with the above vowels, and 
^they complete the number of v 

The vowels are either long or short ; 
The long vowels require more, the sort vowels less 
time in pronouncing, thus : 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. * 

a b long in pate dough and short in patte paw 

e tempete storm trompelle trumpet 

i gite abode — petite little 

o note host hotte wicker basket 

u flute flute hutle hut 

Besides the simple there are also the compound 
sounds, in which two vowels are distinctly heard by a 
single emission of the voice ; these are the diphthongs. 
See Table III. p. 6 and 7. 

The sound of one or more letters, pronounced with 
a single emission of the voice, is called a syllable ; one 
or more syllables make a word. 



ACCENTUATION AND PUNCTUATION. 

In reading, due attention should be paid to the accents 
and cedilla, to the apostrophe, diceresis, hyphen, &c. the two 
former of which are peculiar to the French language. 

(acute (') never placed but on e, as 

I in bonte. 

grave C) placed over a, e, u, as in 

., <{ violu, proces, ou. 

accents, the • • n /a X if i 

1 circumflex ( ) employed over any long 

vowel, as pldire, reve* 

epUre, apotre, btiche, 

The cedilla is a kind of comma placed under c, giving 
it the sound of s before a, o, u, as in fa gade, facon, re$u. 

The apostrophe (') marks the suppression of a vowel 
before another vowel, or h mute, as in Veglise, Voiseau, 
Vhomme, sHl vient, for la eglise, le oiscau, le hornme, si il 
vient. 

The diceresis (") is placed over the vo\vel3 e, i, u, to in- 
timate that they are to be pronounced distinctly from the 
vowels by which they are accompanied. 

The hyphen (•) is particularly used in connecting com- 
pound words, as in Belles-lettres, tout-puissant, theft- 
d 9 ceuvres, arc-en-ciel, &c. 

All the other distinctive marks, as the comma, semi- 
colon, colon, period, interrogation, note of admiration 
and exclamation, parenthesis, &c. &c. are the same IB 
the French as in the English language. 

? 



or 2 



7 
1 

7 
4 

7 
5 



8 or 9 o 

7 i 

10 u 
7 i 

11 or 12 cu 
7 i 

13 ou 
7 t 

14 cm 
7 * 

1 5 ?'n 

7 t 

16 on 

8 o 
2 a 



8 
6 

8 
15 
10 

1 

10 
4 



leu 



len 



ion 



oj n 



ua 



THE SOUNDS 




TABLE III. 




Diphthongs, 
ids represented by 
fmcre 
galimatias 


examples. 

hackney-coach 
nonsense 


je deftai 
amiti'e 


J challenged 
friendship 


vous riez 
biais 


yon laugh 
bias 


biere 


beer 


del 


heaven 


je puriftais 
vwlon 


I purified 
violin 


miaulev 


to mew 


reltwre 


binding 


reb'ewr 


bookbinder 


mienx 


better 


chzowrme 
viande 


i crew of a 
} galley 
meat 


audience 


audience 


chreU'en 


christian 


passion 


passion 


hois 


wood 


boite 


box 


foie 


liver 


moelle 


marrow 


voz'sin 


'neighbour 


nag cone 


fn 


bescmi 


want 


nu ?ge 


cloud 


je remum 


I moved 


eternwcr 


to sneeze 


d6nue 
nuee 


stript 
cloud 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 



10 
5 

10 
7 
10 
8 
10 
11 
10 
12 
10 
14 
10 
15 
10 
16 
13 
1 

13 
4 

13 
5 
13 
7 
13 
11 
31 
12 
13 
14 
13 
15 
13 
16 



TABLE III. 

Diphthongs Continued. 
Compound Sounds represented by 
u } ue menuet 

d $ uai il auait 

i bui'sson 

io parapluze 



uo 



ueu 



ueu 



um 



uon 



oua 



oweu 



oueu 



on 



imp£t«osit£ 
lwewr 

majestwewx 

nwemee 
influence 



tuons 

rowffge 

d£nouev 
dejoue 
fllle enjowee 
je ]ouai 
fowctter 
je d£nouais 
combo wis 
Vou'ie 

boueuv 

noucux 

huangoi 
Rouen 

babowm 

jowons 
2* 



examples. 
minuet 
he perspired 
bush 
umbrella 

impetuosity 
glimmering 

majestic 

shade 
influence 

June 

let us kill 

wheel-work 

to untie 
frustrated 
cheerful girl 
I played 
to whip 
I untied 
cart grease . 
hearing 

scavenger 

knotty 

praise 
Rouen, a city 

baboon 
let vi play 



O THE SOUNDS 

OBSERVATIONS 

Upon the two first Tables. 

Am, an, do not take the nasal sound when morn are 
doubled, as in const amment, annee. Am is not nasal 
at the end of some foreign names, as Abram, Roboam, 
&C. ; except Adam, which has the nasal sound. 

Em and en are articulated as in the English words 
hem and men : 

1. In words taken from foreign languages ; as Je- 
rusalem, item, hymen, pollen, solen, amen, &c. and also 
in lemme, gemme, decemvirat, decemvirs > etrenner, enne- 
mi, moyennant, penne, pennage, and in the second sylla- 
ble of the compound word empenne. 

2. In some persons and tenses of the verbs, tenir, 
venir, prendre, and their compounds, as que je rienne, 
que tu soutiennes, qu y il comprenne, &c. in the pronouns 
feminine, la mienne, la tienne, les siennes, in many other 
words, as antienne, magicienne, Vienne, en Autriche, &c. 

3. In many nouns and persons of verbs ending in trie, 
erne, as in ar&ne, ebene, je me promene, il egrlne, il seme, 
where however the e is somewhat more open. 

But em in femme, and en in enorgueillir, cnnoblir, iind 
ennui, must be pronounced as if spelt with a,f«mme, 
anorgueillir, annoblir, &c. and len in the second syllable 
of so-Zcn-nel and derivatives has only the sound of la. 

Aen has the sound of the French nasal an in Caen, a 
town in Normandy. 

And aon has the same sound in Laon, another town 
in France, in faon a fawn, and in paon a peacock ; but 
these letters have the sound of on in taon an oxfly. 

N in the monosyllable en, both when a preposition 
and when a pronoun, in on, mon, ton, son, pronouns, and 
in bon, bien, and rien ceases to be nasal when these 
words are immediately followed by a vowel or an h mute, 
as en Italie, on en aura, mon ami, c^eti un bon homme, 
on a bien essay e, je suis bien-aise qu'il n' f ait rien oublie. 
But en and on remain nasal, when placed after the verbs 
to which they belong ; as donrrcz-en a votre sozur. A-t-or\ 
essayf ? va-V-cn au logis. 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUR. 9 

Im and in are not nasal, 

1. In the word interim, and in proper names taken 
from foreign languages, as Selim, Ephrdim, Ibrahim, 
However the nasal sound is preserved in Benjamin] Joa- 
chim, seraphin, chtrubin. 

2. In the beginning and middle of words, when ?n or 
n is followed by a vowel or an h mute, as inanime, ini- 
maginable, unanimiti, &c. 

3. Whenever m or n is doubled, as immoler, immer- 
sion, innover, inne, innocent, though in this latter word 
only one n is sounded. 

Un has the sound of u close in une, unieme, unanime, 
and of tun mjeune homme, when followed by a word be- 
ginning with a vowel or an h mute, as un homme, un es- 
prit, aucun\imi, commun accord. 

Um is pronounced omm in some words adopted from 
the Latin, as ceniumvirs, album, quinquennium, ladanum, 
laudanum, geranium. 

U after the consonants q and g is generally silent, as 
in quatre, guerre, &e. See those letters, p. 21 and 27. 



OF THE Y. 

This letter when alone, or when preceded, or fol- 
lowed by a consonant, is pronounced as simple i, ex- 
cept in pays, paysan, paysage, and even abbaye, which 
are pronounced pe-is, pe-isan, pe-isuge, abe-ie. Y be- 
tween two vowels is pronounced ii, and when preceded 
by a, it gives to this letter the sound of at, and when by 
u or u, it gives to them the sound of the diphthongs oi 
or ui. The vowel which follows the y is pronounced 
like one of the diphthongs ia, ie, &c. for which reason 
we have deferred speaking of the y till after the diph- 
thongs. 



Ab-ba-ye 


abbey 


nous e-ga-yons 


we enliven 


a-bo-yer 


to bark 


essu-yer 


to tcipe 


up-pu-yer 


to support 


mo-yen 


means 


ba-la-yer 


to sweep 


net-to-yer 


to clean 


be-ga-yer 


to stammer 


je pa-yais 


I was paying 


cra-yon 


pencil 


je ra-ye-rais 


I would erase 


cro-ya-ble 


credible 


ro-yau-me 


kingdom 


i-cu-yer 
it cf-tra-ya 


esquire 


vo-ya-ge 


voyage 


ht frightened 


vo-ya-ge ur 


traveller 



1U ! 


THE 


SOUNDS 




EXERCISES— On Monosyllables, or words 


of one syllable. 


Gras 


fat 


il rend 


he returns 


ma 


my 


il sent 


he smells, fogls 


ta 


thy 


je vends 


I sell 


sa 


his, her, its 


je 


I 


la 


the, her, it 


me 


me 


las 


tired 


n<§ 


not 


pas 


step 


te 


thee 


un plat 


a dish 


ce 


this, thai 


bac 


ferry-boat 


se 


himself, &e. 


sac 


sack, bag 


le 


the, him, it 


arc 


arch, bow 


de 


of 


pare 


park 


U 


breadth (of cloth) 


bal 


ball 


ne\ 


born 


cap 


cape 


mais 


but 


car 


for 


mes 


my, pi. 


par 


by y through 


tes 


thy, pi. 


part 


share 


ses 


his, her t its, pi. 


art 


art 


les 


the, them 


char 


chariot 


pre 


meadow 


dard 


dart 


pres 


near 


lard 


bacon 


pret 


ready 


tard 


late 


ver 


worm 


quand 


when 


vers 


toward, or versa 


rang 


rank 


vert 


green 


blanc 


while 


it perd 


he loses 


sans 


without 


il sert 


he serves 


dans 


in 


cerf 


stag 


gland 


acorn 


serf 


bondman 


pan 


skirt of a coat 


peur 


Jear 


cran 


notch 


il meurt 


he dies 


plant 


plantation 


pleurs 


tears 


plan 


plan 


leur 


their 


flanc 


flank 


sel 


salt 


grand 


great 


tel 


such 


en 


in 


quel 


which 


il fend 


he splits 


sec 


dry 


gens 


people 


bee 


beak 


lent * 


slow 


chef 


chief 


main 


hand 


bref 


short 


il ment 


he lies 


neuf 


new, or nine 


il pend 


he hangs 


Est 


East 


il prend 


he takes 


vingt 


twenty 


ceint 


girl 


crin 


horse-haw 


cinq 


five 


Jin 


flax 


sain 


wholesome 


brin 


sprig 


sein 


bosom 


pain 


bread 


saint 


holy 


pin 


pine 


Being 


signature 


vin 


wine 



©» THE FRENCH TONGCE 



11 



1 


fit 


front 


fiU 


son 


rond 


frit 


fried 


blond 


lis 


lily 


pont 


pris 


taken 


long 


prix 


price 


fond 


ris 


laugh 


ils font 


riz 


rice 


jonc 


ni 


neither, nor 


non 


nid 


nest 


gond 


si 


if 


iiom 


ilfit 


he did 


plomb 


mis 


put 


nu 


plis 


folds 


du 


ll 


thread 


il dut 


vil 


vile 


bru 


vif 


lively 


brut 


sot 


fool 


il but 


tot 


soon 


cru 


clos 


shut up 


il cru I 


DOS 


our 


je fus 


vos 


your 


jus 


gros 


big 


lu 


trop 


too much 


D lut 


trot 


trot 


plus 


croc 


hook 


tu 


or 


gold 


vu 


bord 


edge 


flux 


fort 


strong 


elu 
due 


tort 


wrong 


je sors 


I go out 


sue 


sort 


fate 


sur 


port 


port 


raur 


H mord 


he bites 


nul 


vol 


theft 


bout 


choc 


shock 


joug 


roc 


rock 


nous 


bloc 


block 


vous 


troc 


exchange 


clou 


dot 


dowry 


cou 


on 


one, people, they coup 


bon 


good 


trou 


bond 


bound 


mou 


ton 


thy 


tout 


son 


his, her, ils 


toux 


ils sont 


they are 


pou 


mon 


my 


cour 


don 


gift 


il pleut 


dont 


of which, &lc. 


peu 


done 


therefore 


il veut 



m. 



forehead 

round 

light (hair) 

bridge 

long 

bottom 

they do 

rush 

no 

hinge 

name 

lead 

naked 

of the, sing. 

he owed 

daughter-in-law 

10 ugh 

he drank 

raw 

he believed 

I was 
juice 

read- 
he read 

more 

thou 

seen 

fiux 

bird lime 

duke 

juice 

upon 

waU 

no, none 

end 

yoke 

we, us 

you 

nail 

neck 

blow, stroke 

hole 

soft 

all 

cough 

louse 

yard 

it rains 

little, few 

he is willing 



If 



A-bii3 

a-chat 

ac-teur 

a-ge 

a-me 

an-neau 

ar-deur 

ar-gent 

as-tre 

ati-cun 

a-veu 

a-vis 

au-trc 

bal-con 

ban-que 

bar-que 

ba-teau 

ba-ton 

beau-te 

be-gue 

bMe 

beur-re 

bi-ble 

bla-me 

bon-heur 

bon-te" 

bos-quet 

bou-quet 

bour-geon 

"bour-ru 

bras-seur 

bri-gand 

brus-que 

bru-te 

buf-fet 

bu-reau 

bus-te 

ca-deau 

ca-fe 

ca-hot 

ca-non 

ca-ve 

cau-se 

cer-cle 

oi-seau 

£i-seaux 



THE SOUNDS 




ON DISSYLLABLES, 




Or Words 


of Two Syllables 




abuse 


cle-ment 


clement 


purchase 


cli-mat 


climate 


actor 


cloi-son 


partition 


age 


co-hue 


throng 


soul 


cora-muQ 


common 


ring 


cora-pas 


comp asses 


ardour 


com-te 


earl 


money 


con-ge* 


holiday 


star 


con-te 


tale 


none 


co-quin 


rogue 


confession 


cor-deau 


line 


advice 


co-t^ 


side 


other 


cou-ple 


couple 


balcony 


cou-reur 


runner 


bank 


cous-sin 


cushion 


a bark 


cou-vent 


convent 


boat 


cr£-me 


cream 


stick 


cri-me 


crime 


beauty 


crot-te 


dirt 


stammerer 


crou-te 


crust 


beast 


da-me 


lady 


butler 


dan-seur 


dancer 


bible 


d£-bit 


sale 


blame 


de-bout 


erect 


happiness 


de-mi 


half 


goodness 


de-pot 


deposit 


grove 


de-sert 


wilderness 


nosegay 


des-sert 


dessert 


bud 


dis-cours 


speech 


surly 


dou-leur 


pain 


brewer 


e-cu 


crown 


robber 


en-clin 


inclined 


abrupt 


en-fant 


child 


brute 


«-poux 


spouse 


cupboard 


es-poir 


hope 


office 


£-tain 


pewter 


bust 


4 £tre 


being 


present 


ex-ces 


excess 


coffee 


festin 


feast 


jolt 


fe-to 


festival 


cannon 


fi-lou 


pickpocket 


cellar 


fla-con 


decanter 


cause 


flam-beau 


flambeau 


circle 


flu-te 


flute 


chisel 


fo-ret 


forest 


scissors 


fou-dre 


ihundtrboU 



OF TH« FRENCH TONGUE. 



IS 



fri-pon 
fu-reur 
gaie-te 
gar-^on 
ga-teau 
ga-zon 
gen-dre 
gen-re 
gi-got 
gla-£on 
gou-te 
gout-te 
gra-ce 
gron-deur 
gru-au 
gue-re 
guer-re 
gueu-le 
gui-de 
■ hai-ne 
4 hale 
• ■ hal-le 
1 har-pe 
* ha-te 
' hau-teur 
1 ha-sard 
1 he-tre 
hom-me 
hon-neur 
1 hon-te 
hor-reur 
ho-te 
hu-main 
im-pie 
ju-ge 
jour-n^e 
lai-teux 
la-qnais 
lar-cin 
lar-geur 
li-queur 
lo-gis 
lon-gueur 
mar-bre 
mar-chand 
ma-ri 
mdnre 



ant 

knave 

fury . 

cheerfulness 

boy 

cake 

turf 

son-in-law 

gender 

leg of mutton 

piece of ice • 

luncheon 

drop 

favour 

grumbler 

oatmeal 

little 

war 

mouth of a beast 

guide 

hatred 

sunburning 

market-hall 

harp 

haste 

height 

chance 

beech 

man 

honour 

shame 

horror 

landlord 

human 

impious 

judge 

day 

milky 

footman 

theft 

breadth 

liquor 

dwelling 

length 

marble 

tradesman 

husband 

mother 



meu-ble 

mon-de 

mons-tre 

mou-le 

mou-lin 

ni-gaud 

nou-veau 

ceu-vre 

on-guent 

or-dre 

ou-bli 

pa-rent 

par- rain 

pa-te 

pa-te 

pat-te 

pe-che 

p£-che 

pe-cheur 

pe-cheur 

pei-ne 

pein-tre 

pe-re 

peu-ple 

peu-reux 

pin-te 

plu-me 

por-lrait 

pour-pre 

prin-ce 

pru-neau 

ra-gout 

re-gle 

re-gne 

rei-ne 

ren-te 

re-ve 

ri-re 

rou-te 

ru-se 

sa-bre 

sa-lut 

6a-tin 

sauce 

sau-teur 

se-jour 

si-gnal 

si-gne 



furniture 
world 
monster 
mould 
mill 

silly fellow 
new 
work 
ointment 
order 
oblivion 
relation 
godfatlter 
dough 
pie 
paw 

fishing, peach 
sin 

fisherman 
sinner 
trouble 
painter 
father 
people 
fearful 
pint 
feather 
picture 
purple 
prince 
prune 
ragout 
rule 
reign 
queen 
annuity 
dream 
laughing 
road 
trick 
sabre 
salute 
satin 
sauce 
tumbler 
residence 
tignal 
sign 



14 

som-bre 

sou-hait 

sou-pe 

sou-ris 

su-cre 

sus-pect 

ta-che 

ta-che 

lam-bour 

tom-beau 



THS SOUNDS 


dark 


to-me 


wish 


tou-pie 


soup 


tour-near 


smile 


trai-neau 


sugar 


tro-ne 


suspicious 


trou-peau 


spot 


veu-ve 


task 


vi-gne 


drum 


ze-le 


grave 


ze-le 



volume 

top 

turner 

sledge 

throne 

flock 

loidow 

vine 

zeal 

zealous 



WORDS OF THREE SYLLABLES. 



A-bi-me 

a-bre-ge" 

a-bri-cot 

ab-so-lu 

ab-sur-de 

ac-tri-ce 

af-fai-re 

am-pou-le 

ap-pe-tit 

a-pre-te 

a-rai-gnee 

ar-raoi-re 

ar-tis-te 

as-si-du 

a-tro-ce 

au-ber-ge 

a-voi-ne 

aus-te-re 

ba-bio-Ie 

bas-ses-se 

ba-ti-ment 

beMe-ment 

ber-ge-re 

be-ti-se 

bien-fai-sant 

bien-se-ant 

bien-ve-nu 

blan-cha-tre 

bles-su-re 

boi-se-rie 

bor-du-re 

bou-lan-ger 

bou-ta-de 

bon-ti-que 

bras-ae-rie 



abyss 


bra-vou-re 


abridgment 


breu-va-ge 


apricot 


bro-de-rie 


absolute 


brou-et-te 


absurd 


brfi-lu-re 


actress 


brus-que-ment 


business 


ca-de>-nas 


blister 


cam-pa-gne 


appetite 


ca-rt-me 


asperity 


car-ros-se 


spider 


cein-tu-re 


cabinet 


ce-pen-dant 


artist 


cham-pi-gnon 


assiduous 


cha-pe-lier 


atrocious 


cha-pel-le 


inn 


cha-pi-tre 


oats 


char-la-tan 


austere 


char-ret-te 


bawble 


cha-ti-ment 


baseness 


chau-de-ment 


building 


chau-die-re 


bleating 


chauf-fa-ge 


shepherdess 


chaus-su-re 


stupidity 


ci-vie-re 


benevolent 


cla-ve-cin 


becoming 


clo-a-que 


welcome 


co-li-que 


whitish 


col-le-ge 


wound 


col -li-ne 


wainscot 


co-lon-ne 


edging 


co-lo-ris 


baker 


co-m^-die 


whim 


co-me-dien 


shop 


com-mer-cant 


bretchouse 


com-pa-gnie 



valour 
drink 

embroidery 
wheelbarrow 
burning 
bluntly 
padlock 
country 
tent 
coach 
girdle 
however 
mushroom 
hatter 
chapel 
chapter 
quack 
cart 

chastisement 
warmly 
copper 
fuel 

shoes, stockings 
hand-barrow 
harpsichord 
sewer 
colic 
college 
hill 
column 
colouring 
comedy 
comedian 
merchant 
company 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUE, 



15 



com-pa-gnon 

eon-<3ui-te 

con-que-rant 

con-que-te 

cons-tam-ment 

con-ti-gu 

cor-don-nier 

co-ri-a-ce 

cor-ni-chon 

cou-chet-te 

cou-ron-ne 

cou-te-las 

cou-te-lier 

cou-tu-re 

cra-moi-si 

cr£-du-le 

cri-ti-que 

cru-au-t£ 

cui-si-ne 

cul-bu-te 

cu-re-dent 

de-com-bres 

de-gou-tant 

de-jeu-ner 

de-meu-re 

des-hon-neur 

des-po-te 

dis-ci-ple 

dis-gra-ce 

dro-guis-te 

droi-ta-re 

6-cha-faud 

£-cbel-le 

e-chc-veau 

e-cu-me 

em-pereur 

em-pla-tre 

em-plet-te 

en-clu-me 

en-ga-geant 

en-ne-mi 

en-sei-gne 

e-pa-gneul 

£-pi-ce 

£-pi-cier 

6-pou-se 

e»-ca-lier 



companion 


es-pe-ce 


kind 


behaviour 


es-quis-se 


sketch 


conqueror 


es-tra-gon 


stragon 


conquest 


e-tei-gnoir 


extinguisher 


constantly 


e-tour-di 


thoughtless 


contiguous 


e-ve-che 


bishoprick 


shoemaker 


e-veil-i£ 


awake 


tough 


ex-ces-sif 


immoderate 


girkin 


ex-em-ple 


example 


couch 


fa-bu-leux 


fabulous 


crown 


fa-§a-de 


front 


hanger 


fa-'ien-ce 


delft-warn 


cutler 


fa-ri-neux 


mealy 


seam 


fa-rou-che 


fierce 


crimson 


fi-las-se 


flax 


credulous 


fleu-ris-te 


florist 


critic 


fai-bles-se 


weakness 


cruelty 


fo-la-tre 


playful 


kitchen 


fou-droy-ant 


thundering 


tumble 


four-bis-seur 


sword-cutler 


tooth-pick 


four-ru-re 


fur 


rubbish 


fram-boi-se 


raspberry 


disgusting 


fri-su-re 


curling 


breakfast 


frois-su-re 


bruising 


abode 


gi-ro-fle 


cloves 


dishonour 


go-be-let 


tumbler, goblet 


despot 


gou-lu-ment 


greedily 


pupil 


gue-ri-son 


cure 


disgrace 


gui-mau-ve 


marsh-mallow 


druggist 


ha-lei-ne 


breath 


uprightness 


' har-di-ment 


boldly 


scaffold 


c ha-ri-cot 


French bean 


ladder 


hor-lo-ge 


clock 


skein 


hor-ri-ble 


horrid 


froth 


ho-tes-se 


landlady 


emperor 


i-gno-rant 


ignorant 


plaster 


im-men-se 


immense 


purchase 


ira-pu-ni 


unpunished 


anvil 


in-cen-die 


conflagration 


tngaging 


in-con-nu 


unknown 


enemy 


in-ge-nu 


ingenuous 


sign 


in-hu-main 


inhuman 


spaniel 


in-sec-te 


insect 


spice 


ins-truc-tif 


instrudtve 


grocer 


i-voi-re 


ivory 


wife 


i-vro-gne 


drunkard 


stair-cast 


ja-quet-te 


jacket 


space 


jour-na-Her 
3 


journeyman 



16 


THE SOUNDS 




fei4ie 4 -re 


milk-woman 


puis-san-ce 


power 


lan-gou-reux 


languishing 


que-rel-le 


quarrel 


len-til-le 


lentil 


ra-pie-re 


rapier 


li-ma-5011 


snail 


ra-tie-re 


rat-trap 


ma-ga-sin 


warehouse 


r^-col-te 


crop 


mal-a-droit 


awkicard 


reiser- ve 


reserved 


ma-nceu-vre 


manoeuvre 


res-sour-ce 


resource 


mar-mi-ton 


scullion 


re-trai-te 


retirement 


mas-cu-lin 


masculine 


re-ve-rie 


meditation 


me-con-tent 


discontented 


rou-gea-tre 


reddish 


me-moi-re 


memory 


rus-ti-que 


rural 


me-na-ger 


thrifty 


scan-da-leux 


scandalous 


men-son-ge 


falsehood 


scru-pu-leux 


scrupulous 


me-pri-se 


mistake 


se-an-ce 


sitting 


m£-tho-de 


method 


ser-ru-re 


lock 


modes-tie 


modesty 


sif-fle-mcnt 


whistling 


mon-ta-gnard 


highlander 


sim-ple-ment 


plainly 


mou-tar-de 


mustard 


so-bri-quet 


nick name 


mur-mu-re 


murmur 


so-len-nel 


solemn 


na-tu-rel 


natural 


son-net-te 


little bell 


nau-fra-ge 


shipwreck 


so-no-re 


sonorous 


ne*-an-moins 


nevertheless 


sou-cou-pe 


saucer 


no-bles-se 


nobility 


soup-con-neux 


auspicious 


noi-ra-tre 


blackish 


spec-ta-cle 


sight 


o-bli-geant 


obliging 


splen-di-de 


splendid 


om-bra-ge 


shade 


suc-ces-seur 


successor 


op-pro-bre 


disgrace 


su-pre-me 


supreme 


o-ra-geux 


stormy 


symp-to-me 


symptom 


or-fe-vre 


goldsmith 


tein-tu-re 


dying 


or-phe-lin 


orphan 


ten-dres-se 


tenderness 


pa-moi-son 


faintingfit 


t£-ne-breux 


dark 


pan-tou-fle 


slipper 


the-a-tre 


theatre 


pa-pe-tier 


stationer 


the-ie-re 


tea-pot 


pa-ra-sol 


umbrella 


toi-let-te 


toilet 


pa-re n-te 


kinswoma 


tour-ne-vis 


screwdriver 


pa-rois-se 
pas-sa-ble 


parish 


tou-te-fois 


nevertheless 


tolerable 


tri-che-rie 


cheat 


pois-sar-de 


fishwoman 


tri-om-phe 


triumph 


poi-tri-ne 


breast 


trom-pet-te 


trumpet 


por-tie-re 


coach door 


tu-mul-te 


tumult 


pes-tu-re 


posture 


va-can-ces 


holidays 


pota-ge 


porridge 


ver-get-te 


brush 


pous-sie-re 


dust 


ver-mis-seau 


small icon* 


pr£-tex-te 


pretence 


vic-toi-re 


victory 


prin-ces-se 


princess 


vi-gou-reux 


vigorous 


pro-mes-se 


promise 


vil-la-geois 


countryman 


Dro-tec-teur 


protector 


Toi-tu-re 


carriage 


*-<-ril 


childish 


z^-plii-re 


zephyrus 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUE, 

OF CONSONANTS. 



17 



B, b, this letter has the same sound as in English. 

Bal ball bo-bi-ne bobbin 

Ba-bel Babel bar-ba-ris-me barbarism 

ba-bil prating bi-bli-o-the-que library 

ba-bouin baboon bur-les-que burlesque 

B is always pronounced in the middle of words, as 
ab-di-quer, sub-ve-nir, ob-vi-er ; and at the end of pro- 
per names, as Job, Caleb, Moab ; also in the words 
radoub, the refitting of a ship, rumb, point of the com- 
pass ; but it is never sounded in plomb, lead. 

When double, as in able, abbot ; rabbin, rabbin ; 
sabbat, sabbath ; and their derivatives, only one of 
these letters is sounded ; however, in Abbeville and 
abbatial the sound of the double b is distinctly heard. 



C, c, has the sound of < 



C sounded as k. 



" k, or English c in cart, before 
a, o, u, I, n, r, but 
of 
s, or c in cedar, cider, cymbal, 
before e, i, and y. 

C sounded as s. 



Cal-cul 

ca-co-pho-nie 

©te-ri-cal 

Cra-co-vie 

co-que-li-cot 

cro-co-di-le 

cris-tal 

cu-cur-bi-te 



calculation 

cacophony 

clerical 

Cracow 

wild-poppy 

crocodile 

crystal 

cucurbite 



ce-ci 


this 


c£-ci-t£ 


blindness 


c£-ta-c£e 


cetaceous 


cer-ceau 


hoop 


Cir-cd 


Circe 


ci-li-ce 


hair-cloth 


cy-ni-que 


cynic 


cy-pres 


cypress 


iddle of words before q, oa, 



co, cu, cl, cr, as socque, acquerir, accabler, acclimater, 
acclamation, accomplir, acoutrer, acfoe'diter, ecclisias- 
tique, which are pronounced so-que, a-querir, a-cabler, 
&c. except, however, in the words pec-cable, pee-cant f 



18 THE SOUNDS 

pec-cadille, pec-cam, sac-cholatique, in which the sound 
of the double c is distinctly heard. — It has the sound of 
k before ce and ci, as in suc-ces, ac-cident, vac-cine, &c« 
and takes the sound of s before a, o, u, when there is a 
cedilla under it, as in fagade, j agon, regu. 

C is sounded as g hard in second, and its derivatives, 
and by many in Claude, and Reine-Claude, and even by 
some, but improperly, in secret. 

C, at the end of words, is usually pronounced k, as 
in cognac, lac (a lake), avec, bee, pic, syndic, roc, froc, 
e&toc, due, aqueduc, agaric, arc, zinc, &c. and in the 
singular of echec ; but it is not sounded in croc, ctc-croc, 
arc-boutant, banc, broc, clerc, marc d'argent, eric, esto~ 
mac,flanc,jonc, lacs (toils), tabar^ (rone, echecs, nor in 
done before a consonant ; but 

It is always sounded in croc-en-jambe, franc itourdi, 
du blanc au noir, and in both syllables of mic-mac, trio 
trac, cric-crac, ric-a^ric, and pore-epic. 

In words ending in ci, both consonants are generally 
sounded, as in tact, contact, intact, exact, inexact, ab» 
ject, correct, direct, infect, strict, succinct ; but neithet 
of them in aspect, suspect, circonspect, amict, i?istinct, 
distinct ; and only c in respect, though both letters are 
always heard in suspecte, circonspecte, respecte, distincte, 
as well as in the middle of other similar words, as reo 
teur, vecteur, seducteur, redacleur, humecter, injecttr, dac» 
tyle, ductile, tactique, &c. 



'one, which is most general, like 



~, . j j sh in she, shake ; 

Ch has two sounds, < ., ,, i • u i 

' ) the other, which very rarely 



oc- 
curs, is that of A: in chimera. 



Examples of sh. 

Chat cat ar-chi-tra-ve arcliilrave 

che-val horse chou-et-te screech-owl 

cher-cher to seek chii-te fall 

chi-che stingy chu-cho-ter to tchisper 

ur-chi-tec-te architect chy-le, &c. &c. chyh 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 



19 



and in many proper names, as Achille, Joachim, &i£ru» 
bin, Zachee, &c. 



Examples of ch as k. 



A-chab 

A-ch£-lo-us 

An-ti-o-chus 

A-ohaie 

A-na-char-sis 

a-na-cho-re-te 

ar-chan-ge 

Ar-chan-gel 

ar-ch£-ty-pe 

ar-chon-tes 

ar-chi-e-pis-co- 

pal 
chal-ca-doi-ne 
eu-cha-ris-tie 



Cham 

Cha-na-an 

Chi-o 

Cho*re-be 

Chos-ro-es 

Chal-da-i-que 

Chal-dee 

cha-os 

cbeMi-doi-ne 

Cher-so-ne-se 

chi-li-ar-que 

chal-co-gra- 

phie 
ca-te-chu-me-ne 



Za-cha-rie 

Ma-chi-a-vel 

Mi-chel-an-ge 

Pul-che-rie 

Ti-cho-Bra-b^ 

Dyr-ra-chi-um 

cbt-ro-man-cie 

cboeur 

cho-ris-te 

or-ches-tre 

i-cho-reux 

cbo-re-ge 

Na-bu-cho-do- 



Cal-chas 
Bac-chus 
Cha-ron 
Ci-vi-ta-Veo- 

cbia 
Zu-rich 
£-cho 
scbo-lie 
cha-li-be" 
chon-dril-le 
chi-ra-gre 
ar-cha-is-me 



Examples of chl as k. 



Tacht 

U-trecht 

Maes-tricht 



► are pronounced- 



Yak 

Utrek 

Mastrik 



without sounding 
thef. 



Ch takes the sound of a hard g in drachme, and is 
dropped in almanack ; and on account of their Italian 
origin in vermicelle and violoncelle, c, without h, takes the 
sound of the English sh. 

Ch has uniformly the sound of fc, in all words where 
it is followed by a consonant, as Christy chretien, Chloris, 
chronique, isochrone, chronometre, Arachne, ichneumon, 
technique, &c. 



D, d, has the same sound as in English. 

De'-da-le labyrinth Dry-a-de Dryad 

do-du plump dro-ma-dai-re dromedary 

din-don turkey de-di-ca-toi-re dedicatory 

D is always sounded in the middle of words, as adjeo- 
tify adverb e, admirable. 

It is likewise heard at the end of proper names, as £n 
David, Obedy Gady Alfred, &c. and in some other 

3* 



10 THE SOUNDS 

words, as Cid, Sud, Sund, Talmud, ephod, lamed. At 
the end of many words before a vowel, or h mute, d 
takes the sound of t, as, quand il viendra ; un grand 
homme ; vend-il ? &c. however, it is never sounded in 
bond, gond,fond, nid, nozud, muid, and pied ; except in de 
fond-en-comble, de pied-en-cap, tenir pied-a-boule, avoir 
un pied-a-terre, where it is sounded as t. 

D is sounded double in some few words derived from 
the Latin, as in ad-dition, ad-ducteur , red-dition. 



F,f, is sounded like the same letter in English. 

Example. 

Far-fa-det hobgoblin f£-bri-fu-ge febrifuge 

fau-fi-ler to baste (in sewing) f ruc-ti-fi-er to fructify 

fet-fa edict of the Mufti fi-fre fifer 

fan-fa-ron boaster for-fait crime 

Final / is sounded in all words ending in if, whieh 
amount to nearly 260, mostly adjectives, and in raf bref, 
brief, chef, fief, nef nerf, grief, serf, relief, mechef, 
Azof I of tof tuf, ouf, pouf ceuf, veuf bosuf and neuf, 
(new) ; but not in clef, cerf eteuf chef-oVozuvre, ceuf 
frais, nor in the plural of nerf ozuf, bceuf and neuf 
(new). In neuf (nine), when alone, or when it termi- 
nates the sentence,/ is distinctly sounded, but it takes 
the sound of v before a vowel, and is silent before a con- 
sonant. 

When it is doubled, only one of these letters is sound- 
ed : however, in some few words, as effusion, affadir, 
effraction, it seems more proper to sound both. 



'before a, o, u, the hard sound of g in tke 
> English word go, 

f6> J and before e, i, y^ the soft sound of s in 

pleasure. 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 11 

Examples of g hard. 

Gan-gre-ne gangrene gut-tu-ral guttural 

Gro-nin-gue Groningen gom-me gum^ 

gai cheerful gla-ce looking-glass 

go-gue-nard joker Gor-go-ne Gorgon 

Examples of g soft, 

Geai jay ge-n^-ral general 

ge-or-gi-ques georgics gens people 

gen-re gender gin-gem-bre ginger 

ge-mir to groan gym-ni-que gymnastic 

G final has the hard sound in joug, and in proper 
names, as Agag, Doeg, but it takes ths sound of k in 
rang, sang, and long masculine before a vowel ; and 
also in bourg. It is silent in faubourg, Luxembourg, 
&c. and in Bourg-Vabbe, Bourg-la-Reine, &c. ; and 
likewise in sang-sue, de sang-froid, sang-de-dragon, in 
rang, sang 9 long, before a consonant, and always in 
doigt, legs, poing, vieux-oing, hareng, etang, seing, and 
vingt. 

Bourg-mestre is pronounced bourgue-mestre, and bj 
some persons it is now, and not improperly, written in 
the latter manner. 

Gu forms a distinct syllable in the inflections of the 
yerb ar-gu-er ; is strongly sounded in aigu'e, suraigu'e, 
cigu'e, ambigue, contigu'e, exigu'e, and besaigue ; has a 
mixed sound with the following i in aiguille, aiguillade, 
aiguillonner, aiguiser, and derivatives, and in the pro- 
per names, d'Aiguillon, de Gnise, le Guide. But the 
u in the inflections of more than forty verbs ending in 
guer, and in many other words, where it stands before 
e and i, being intended only to give g the hard sound, 
is entirely silent, as in bague, begue, Jigue, dogue, fou- 
gue, fugue, onguent, langue, longue, nargue, vergue, mor- 
gue, distingue, gue, gui, guerir, guinder, guise, languir, 
guinguette, &c. 

Gua takes the mixt sound of the diphthong goua in 
some few words, as lingual, paraguante, Gaudeloupt, 
Guadalquivir, Guatimala, Guastalla. 



THE SOUNDS 



When g is doubled, only one is sounded, except be- 
fore e and i, then the first g retains the hard, and the 
second adopts the soft sound, as in sug-gerer, sug-ge*> 
iion, 

G before h, and before several consonants in thB 
middle of words, retains its hard sound, as in Berghen, 
Enghien, eglise, enigme, segment, amygdales. Before 
I there are two exceptions, in the words, imbroglio and 
de Broglio, where it is sounded liquid, as in seraglio, 
and these words are generally pronounced as if written 
imbroille, de Broille. 

jT one hard, as in the English word 

Vd tlfe"otheJ'liquid, as in the last 
syllable of onion. 



Gni-de 

Gnome 

gno-mi-de 

gno-mi-que 

gnomon 

gno-mo-ni-que cog-na-ti-on 



Examples of the hard sound. 

gna-phali-um 

gnos-ti-que 

ag-nat 

ag-na-ti-on 

cog-nat 



ag-na-ti-que reg-ni-cole 

cog-na-ti-que mag-nd-sie 

ag-nus stag-nant 

ig-nee stag-na-ti-OB 

ig-ni-cole di-ag-nos-tique 

ig-ni-ti-on mag-nat 

G is silent in signet, and Regnard, a French writer of 
comedies, pronounced sinet, Renard. 



H, h, when aspirated, is sounded with a strong guttu- 
ral impulse, and when mute, it has no power but that of 
showing etymology. 



H 


aspirated in 


H is mute in 


'Habler 


to romance 


ha-bit 


coat 


'ha-che 


axe 


her-be 


grass 


4ia-ir 


to hate 


heu-re 


hour 


'har-pe 


harp 


heu-reux 


happy 


'haut 


high 


he-ro-'i-ne* 


heroine 


^-ros* 


hero 


he-ro-i-que* 


heroic 


*he-ris-son 


hedge-hog 


he-ro-is-rne* 


heroism 


'hi-deux 


hideous 


his-toi-re 


history 


'hon-te 


shame 


hi-ver 


winter 


hui-ler 


to howl 


hor-reur 


horror 


and about 160 more words. 


and about 135 other caaes* 



All generally noted in my dictionary and others. 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUE, 23 

* Observe, that h is aspirated in ^heros, but not in its 
derivatives. 

//is never aspirated in the middle of a word, except 
when that word is the compound of another beginning 
with an h aspirated, as in s'aheurter, dehdler, dehanche, 
deharnacher, enharnacher, s y e?ihurdir, dehors. 

A*. B. Though there is no aspirated h before ome, 
onzieme, and oui, we pronounce and write more gene- 
rally le onze, le onzieme, than Vouze, V onzieme, and say 
always le oui et le non without elision, and final s in tnes, 
Us, ses, nos, vos, leurs, ces, and les, is never sounded 
when placed before any of these words, as tons vos out 
et vos non ; sur les onze heures, and even before une in 
sur les une heure. 

For what concerns h placed after c or g, see the re- 
marks on those two letters, p. 1 8 and 22. 

H, after r or t, is always silent, as rheteur, Rhone, rhw* 
barbe, the, Thomas, ihym. 



J, j, has constantly the sound of z in azure, or * in 
pleasure. 

EXAMPLE. 

Jus g^avy jou-jou toy 

ja-mais never ju-ju-be jujube 

jo-vi-al jovial jeu-nes-se youth 



K, L has always a hard sound, as in the English word 
king. 

This letter can hardly be considered as belonging to 
the French alphabet, as it is found only in some few 
words borrowed from foreign languages, as 

Kan-gu-rou kanguroo ki-os-que Turkish pavilion 

kcr-mes cochineal ky-ri-el-le tedious enumtratiQ<\ 



24 



THE SOUNDS 



L, l^ has two sounds, the 



'first, is precisely the same as 
I in the English words li- 
ly, law, &c. 
second, resembles that of ill 
in brilliant. 



Example of the First. 



La-te-ral 


lateral 


li-las lilach 


le-gis-la-teur 


legislator 


lo-cal local 


U-bel-le 


libel 


lu-ni-so-lai-re lunisolar 




Example 


of the Second. 




Bail 


lease 


cail-lou-ta-ge 


pebble-work 


aom-meil 


sleep 


mer-veiUeux 


wonderful 


ceil 


eye 


ceil-la-de 


glance 


6-cu-reuil 


squirrel 


Guil-lau-me 


William 


or-gueil* 


pride 


or-gueil-leux* 


proud 


fe-nouil 


fennel 


gri-bouil-let-te 


scramble 


tail-le 


shape 


ga-zouil-le-ment 


warbling 


tail-la 


he did cut 


bar-bouil-lage 


scrawl 


tail-te 


cut 


cha-mail-lis 


squabble 


tail-lis 


copse 


o-reiMe 


ear 


tail-Ions 


let us cut 


p£-ril 


danger 


tail-leur 


tailor 


pe-ril-leux 


dangerous 


tail-lu-re 


kind of embroidery oil-le 


olio 


Neuil-ly 


Neul-ly 


im-bro-glio 


intricacy 



As the pronunciation of this letter is attended with 
some difficulty, observe that the final syllables, ail, eil, 
ceil, euil, ueil, and ouil, are always liquid ; so are in any 
situation aill, till, mill, euill, ueill, and ouill, followed by 
a vowel, as is seen in the list of examples just given. 

* There is a perceptible difference between the vowel 
sound of the second syllable of orgueil and orgueilleux : 
the former is pronounced like mil, and the latter like the 
second syllable of sommeil. 

L final, preceded simply by i, is liquid in some few 
words, of which the following is nearly a list ; avril, 
&abil, Bresil, cil, gril % gresil, peril, and gentil, when 
before a vowel, though in some even of these the / is 
occasionally dropped m familiar conversation ; in other 



OV THE FRENCH TONGUE. 25 

words of this termination, the I is usually suppressed, as 
in fusil, outil, chenil, &c. pronounced fusi, outi, chenu 

Injils a son, or sons, the I is mute ; but in Jil, Jits, 
thread, threads, it is always heard, but is not liquid. 

The same remark applies to foil, pronounced poel, the 
hair of an animal, and to il the personal pronoun ; in 
the plural of this latter Us the I is sometimes rejected 
and sometimes pronounced, though the first mode is pre- 
ferable. 

Observe that Milhaut, Pardalhac, and Sully, proper 
names, are pronounced liquid, contrary to the establish- 
ed rule, and that the two latter are nearly the only known 
instances of an I or // sounded liquid, without being im- 
mediately preceded by the vowel L 

III, in the middle of a word, is generally liquid, thers 
being no exceptions of this rule but those words which 
begin immediately by ill, as illegal, illuminer, &c. and 
the following, distiller, instiller, osciller, scintiller, titil- 
ler, vaciller, fritillaire, imbecille, mille, tranquille, with 
their derivatives and inflections when verbs, and ville with 
its compounds, as also Achille, campanille, codicille, fi- 
brille, Gille, maxillaire, pupille, la Sibylle, and sille. 

In most of these exceptions // are both sounded, as 
well as in several other words, in which these letters are 
preceded by other vowels, as allegorie, allusion, appel- 
latif, appellation, belligerant, belliqueur, collation cle 
benefices, follicule, malleole, velieite, collusion, constella- 
tion, constelle, ebullition, Gallican, Gallicisme, intellect, 
&c. malleable, medullaire, palliaiif, pellicule, equipoller, 
hellenisms, and in proper names, as Apollon, Bellone, Do- 
labella, Pallas, Sylla, &c. 



M, m, corresponds in sound with the same letter in 
English. 

EXAMPLES. 



Mar-me-la-de 


marmalade 


rao-mie 


mummy 


raar-mot-te 


marmot 


moment 


moment 


m£-mo-ra-ble 


memorable 


Mus-sul-man 


Mussulman 


mir- mi-don 


myrmidon 


mur-mu-re 


murmur 


mi-mi-que 


mimic 


mys-tt-re 


mystery 



96 



THE SOUNDS 



Jif, though usually sounded in the middle of words 
before n, as in amnistie, calomnie, hymne, insomnie, som- 
nambule, automnal, is yet mute in dainner, and its deri- 
vatives, and in the substantive automne. 

When double, only one of these letters is usually 
sounded, except, 1st. in proper names, as, Em-manuel ; 
2dly, in words beginning with imin y as im-rnortel. 

In words in which em is followed by m, as emmencher, 
it is pronounced like an, with the nasal sound. 

When this letter is final, see tables first and second 
(p. 4 and 5), and the accompanying observations (p. 8 
and 9), where we necessarily, in part, discussed the na- 
ture of this letter. 

•TV, n, has the same sound as in English. 
EXAMPLES 

A-na-nas pine-apple non-ne nun 

Ne-nu-far Nenuphar non-obs-tant nohvithstandivg 

na-ti-o-nal national Ni-ni-ve Nineveh 

no-mi-nal nominal noc-tur-ne nocturnal 

no-na-ge-nai-re a man of ninety nym-phe nymph 

When n follows the letter g, see gn (p. 22). 

JVis often nasal, see table I. (p. 4), and table II. 
(p. 5), and our observations (p. 8 and 9). 

JV* takes the sound of s in monsieur, pronounced mos- 
sieu* 

N after e before t final in the third person plural of 
any French verb is constantly silent, and the e is mute, 
as Us consentent au marche, Us aimaient a rire 9 Us lurent 
un chapitre ; here the final t i* only sounded before a 
vowel. 

When n is doubled, one oniy is generally pronounced, 
except in an-nexe, an-nal, an-nuel, an-notation, an-niiler, 
in-ne, in-nove, in~novation, and a few other cases. 

P, p, is sounded as in English. 
EXAMPLES. 

Pa-pil-lon butterfly pou-pee doll 

pe-pin pippin po-pu-lai-re popular 

pied-plat mean fellow pour-pre purple 

prin-ci-pe principle pur-pu-rin pwplish 

pro-pos discourse py-ra-mi-de pyramid 



OP THE FRENCH TONGUE, 27 

P followed by h has the sound of/, as philosopher pho$- 
phore, physique, 

P preserves its sound in the middle of a word, as in 
adapter, adopter, capter, captieux, baptismal, aptitude, 
exception^ exemption, inepte, contempteur, gypse, Sep- 
tembre, Septuagesime, corruption, rupture, apsides, rap- 
sodies, symptome. 

But it is not heard in bapteme, baptiser, baptistaire. 
Baptiste, cheptel, exempt, exempt er, sculpter, sculpteu^ 
sculpture, je romps, il corromp, sept, septieme, temps, et 
printemps, nor • in prompt, prompte, and its derivatives. 

Final p is always sounded in Alep, cap, Gap, jalap, 
and julep, it is also heard in trop, beaucoup, when be- 
fore a vowel, but never in champ, camp, drop, loup, si- 
rop, and galop. 

In laps, relaps, and rapt, both the final consonants are 
pronounced, but neither in ceps de vigne. 

When p is doubled, only one is generally sounded ; 
however, in such words as lippitude, hippocentaure, hip- 
popotame, Hippomene, Agrippa, Agrippine, Philippiqucs, 
and Hippias, both are distinctly heard. 

Q, q, has generally the hard sound of k in king. 
As this letter is constantly followed by the vowel u, ex- 
cept in cinq, and coq, we shall simply remark, that 

f k, by far the most general before 

Qu has three sounds, I . , a ^ vowel - ,. T 

th ♦ r { kou before a in some particular 

words. 

[ku before e, or i in some others. 

Examples of &. 

Quai wharf ques-tion question 

qua-li t£ quality sd-ques-tre sequestration 

quel-que some queue tail 

qui-con-que whosoever a-queux watery 

qui-pro-quo blunder a-que-duc aqueduct 

quoli-bet pun d-qui-vo-que ambiguity 

quin-qui-na Peruvian bark se re-quin- >( to trick ontaJJ 

que-nouil le distaff quer ] \ out 
&c. &c. &.C. 
4 



28 



THE SOUNDS 



Examples of kon. 



A-qua-ti-que 

e-qua-teur 

6-qua-ti-on 

qua-kre 

qua-dra-tu-re 

qua-dri-ge 

qua-dru-pe-de 
qua-dru-ple 



aquatic 

equator 

equalibn 

quaktr 

quadrature 

C ancient cha- 

< riol with 

I four horses 

quadruped 

quadruple 



qua-ter-ne 
qua-dra-ge- 

nai-re 
qua-dra-ge- ) 

si-mai } 
a-qua-ti-le 
a-qua-rel-le 
li-qua-ti-on 
in-quar-to 
lo-qua-ci-te 



quaternion 
a man of forty 

quadragesimal 

aquatile 
oquatir.ta 
liquation 
quarto size 
loquacity 



Examples of ku. 



equestrian 
liquefaction 
questor 
questure 



e-qui-mtil-ti-ple equimultiple 
e-qui-ta-ti-on horsemanship 

quin-tu-ple quintuple 

quin-li-le quint He 

quin-quen-nal quinquennial 
quin-de cem-virs qu in decemviri 
quin-que-re-me ancient gullet 

) a term of the 
quin-quer-ce > indent gyn- 

) nasium 

In quinquagSnaire , a man of fifty, and quinquagesime, 
quinquagesima, the first syllable corresponds with the 
sound of qu in iqvestre, and the second corresponds with 
the sound of qu in aquatique. This letter is never 
doubled. 



E qiies-tre 

li-^ue-fac-ti-on 

qucs-teur 

ques-lu-re 

qiiin-quen-nium quenquennium 

^qui-Ia-t^-re \of^ualdi,nen- 

1 I SIGHS 

e-qui-la-te-ral equilateral 
e-qui-aii-gle equiangular 

e-qui-dis-tant equidistant 



R, r, is sounded as in English, but much stronger. 
EXAMPLES. 



Ra-re-t6 

ras-su-rer 

ra-bou-gri 

re-brous-ser 

ri-gou-reax 

rom-pre 

rou-vrir 

ru-gir 

ru-ral 

rus-tre 



scarcity 

to hearten 

stunted 

to turn back 

rigorous 

to break 

to open again 

to roar 

rural 

a boor 



rhytb-me 

sour-die 
cour-roux 
il-cou-ra 
cor-ro-de-ra 

cor-ro-bo-re-ra 

ir-ra-di-a-ti-on 
ir-ro r.i-ti-ou 
tor-re-fac-ti-on 



rhyih m 
to spring 

irra h 

he wilt run 

it will corrode 

corre- 
ale 
irradiation 
irrigation 
tor ■<fur lien 



j it will 
\ bo alt 



ft is always sounded at the end of words after the 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 



29 



vowels, er, i, o, u, except in Monsieur, pronounced, as we 
have said, Mos-sieu. 

Er, in the following adjectives and substantives, con- 
stantly rhymes with air, which is pronounced alike in 
both languages. 



EXAMPLES. 



Cher 

cuil-ler 

fer 

ver 

mer 

fier 

gas-ter 

hi-er 

hi- ver 

a-roer 

cancer 

en-fer 

either 

a-vant-hier 



aear 

spoon 

iron 

worm 

sea 

haughty 

stomach 

yesterday 

iv inter 

bitter 

cancer 

hell 

ether 
( the day before 
I yesterday 



ou-tre-mer 
bel-ve-der 
Lu-ci-fer 
Pa-ter 

fra-ter 

ma-gister 

Stat-kou-der 

Ju-pi-ter 

Al-ger 

Gess-Her 

> T i-ger 

Sad-der 



ultramarine 

belvideie 

Lucifer 

the Lord's prayer 
C ignorant medical 
I practitioner 
( village school-mas' 
I ter 

Stadtholder 

Jupiltr 

Algiers 
Gessner 

Niger, a river 
( Sadder, a holy book 
I of the Persians 



In all other substantives, ending in er, the r is silent, 
and the e pronounced close and short as in clarte. 

When the following adjectives and a few others pre- 
cede immediately a substantive which they qualify, if 
this begins with a vowel, the r is pronounced, but in no 
other case. 



' Le premier acte 
i son dernier ouvrage 
R sounded < un eingulier evcriement 
1 no en tier abandon 
un i^ger obstacle 



the first act 
his last work 
a singular event 
an entire cession 
a slight obstacle 



Knot sounded. 



.11 est le premier a vous permcttre et le dernier a 
vous tenir parole. — He is the first lo promise 
and the last to keep his word. 
C'est un horame leger et inconstant, enlier en 
tout ce qu'il veut, et ringulier en tout ce qu'H 
fait- — He is a light versatile character, positive 
tn all he undertakes, and singular in all he 
does. 

Final r in the present of the infinitive of all the verbs 
of the first conjugation, is always pronounced when im- 



30 THE SOUNDS 

mediately followed by a word beginning with a vowel, 
when the style is dignified, but in conversation this dis- 
tinction is seldom observed. 

Rh. See h (p. 23). 

When this letter is double, only one is pronounced, 
except, 1st. in aberration, abhorrer, horreur, errer, tor- 
refier, and their derivatives ; 2dly, in words beginning 
with irr, as irrevocable, irregulier , irruption, &c. ; 3dly, 
in the future and conditional of the verbs acquerir. com- 
rir, rnourir, and their derivatives — facquer-rai, je mour- 
mis, nous cour-ri-ons, &c. 



5', 5, has two ) hard, as in the English word sister. 
sounds, the $ soft, as in rose and please. 
In the following list of words the first s has the hard, 
and the second the soft sound. 

EXAMPLES OF BOTH SOUNDS 



Sai-son 


season 


sour-noi-se 


a sullen woman 


sai-sie 


seizure 


sup-po-sez 


suppose 


se-sa-me 


sesamum 


se-dui-sant 


alluring 


si-se 


situate 


Su-se 


Susa 


Sou-bi-se 


Soubise 


su-sin 


quarter-deck 


sot-ti-se 


silly action 


Sy-ra-cu-se 


Syracuse 


sous-en-ten-te 


( mental reserva- 
> Hon 


Syn-the-se 


Synthesis 



S has uniformly the hard sound at the beginning of 
words, except in Shire, Svelte, Sganare'le and Sdili for 
Delos, where it has the soft sound ; and in familiar con- 
versation aider a Sedan ; il est le second de sa classe, are 
pronounced as if these words were written azdan, h 
zgon. Before ch, s is mute, as in Schall, Schaffhouse, 
Schelling, Schis-e, Schorl. 

Sh in sherif, a sheriff, is sounded as in English. 

When s is followed by ce, ci, cy, the sound of only 
one of these consonants is heard, as in scene, science, 
Scythie, &c. except, however, in aces-cence, convales- 
cence, efferves-cence, efftores-cencc, turges-cence, incan- 
descence, r&minis-cence, rcsipis-cence, mis-cible, res 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 31 

cinder, sus-ception, sus-citer, sus-citation, vis~c£re, w- 
ciral, trons-cendance, and a few others, where s cannot 
be rescinded without altering the pronunciation. In all 
other combinations, sc takes the sound of sk, as scapu- 
laire, scolie, sclerotique, scribe, esclave, scrupule, &c. 

S preserves the hard sound in the middle of a word, 
when preceded or followed by a consonant, as in transe, 
transir, Transulvanie, convulsion, valse, espace, usteti- 
sile, statistique, &c. &c. However it takes the soft 
sound, or that of z in Alsace, Arsace, Asdrubal, asbeste, 
balsamine, balsamique, bisbille, Israel, Israelite, Esdras, 
Thisbe, presbitere, transaction, transiger, transitoire, 
intransitif, transalpin, Lesbos, Isboseih, Brisgaw, Rys~ 
wick, Louisbourg, Augsbourg, Presbourg, Philipsbourg, 
and some few others. 

S takes the soft sound when between two vowels, as 
in base, these, bise, rose, ruse, &c. Except in com- 
pound words, where it preserves the hard sound of the 
initial s of its root ; as in desuetude, entresol, mono- 
syllabc, polysyllube, parasol, tournesol, preseance, pre- 
supposer, resaisir, resaluer, vraisemblable, and some de- 
rivatives. 

St final, see final t (p. 33.) 

Final s is always heard in as, atlas, argus, bibus, 
blocus, bolus, agnus, foetus, calus, sinus, Phebus, les us, 
virus, en sus, aloes, bis, jadis, iris, gratis, lapis, le lis, 
la Lys (a river), ma'is, metis, vis, tournevis, Amadit, 
Adonis, Paris, (the shepherd), pathos, Alhos, Lesbos, 
Ahiio*, I )£Jos } Paros, Brutus, Venus, Regulus, Protesilas, 
Bias, Gil Bias, Las Casas, and many more foreign pro- 
per names. 

In almost all other cases final s is silent when the next 
word begins with a consonant, as au moins vous ne feoti- 
vez pas dire, que je vous repete ton jours les menus 
ch'oses ; but it generally takes the soft sound of z before 
another word, beginning with a vowel or h mute, as aurez 
vous au moins alors assez de j>atience, pour, &c. 

Though there is no s, in quatre, yet, before yeaux it is, 
in conversation, pronounced as if ending in that letter, 

4* 



32 



THE SOUNDS 



Finally, ss have generally the sound of a single s pro* 
nounced hard, as in je ressassasse, assassinasse, Mis- 
sissippi, &c. ; except in some few words, where both 
are heard, assertion, assonance, dissonance, accessible, 
inaocessible, admissible, inadmissible, missive, scissile, 
scission, scissure, fissure, fissipede, assentiment, asservir. 
Thus there is a difference in pronunciation between 
these phrases: C'est un homme a sentimens; il aime 
a servir ses amis ; and il faut son assentiment ; 
cet ambitieux voudrait asservir Vunivers ; and again 
between Palun de plume est scissile and la sicile est 
une tie triangulaire, &c. the double ss must be distinctly 
heard. 



{first, hard, as in the English 
T 9 t, has two sounds, i word tit, 

the \ second, soft, like c in cedar and 

\ civil. 

FIRST SOUND. 



Examples of t hard before vowels and diphthongs. 



Tac-ti-que 


tactics 


ti-are 


tes-ta-teur 


testator 


bas-ti-on 


thd-a-tre 


theatre 


ques-ti-on 


to-ta-li t6 


totality 


mix-ti-on 


tour-te-rel-Ie 


turtle- dove 


com-bus-ti-on 


ti-tu-lai-re 


titulary 


bi-jou-tier 


ti-thy-ma-Ie 


tithymal 


Ma-thi-as 


chr£-tien 


christian 


Pon-thieu 


dy-nas-tie 


dynasty 


tu sou-tiens 


le tien 


thine 


&c. Szc. &c. 




SECOND 


i SOUND. 



tiara 

bastion 

question 

mixture 

combustw?i 

jeweller 

Mat hi as 

Ponthieu 

thou supported 



Tis soft before i, connected with some other follow- 
ing vowel or vowels, in some particular words, that are 
given as exceptions to t\i?, first sound of t. 



OP THE FRENCH TONGUE, 



EXAMPLES. 




partial 


ac-ti-on 


action 


partiality 


bal-bu-ti-er 


to slammer 


partial 


in-i-ti-er 


to initiate 


patience 


bal-bu-ti-a 


he stuttered 


impatience 


bal-bu-tie-ment 


stammering 


quotient 


in-i-ti-e 


initialed 


captious 


in-i-ti-a-ti-on 


initiation 


cavil 


Ve-ni-ti-en 


Venetian 


bail 


se pre-cau-ti-on- 
ner 


to be cautious 



Par-ti-a! 

par-ti-a-li-te 

par-ti-el 

pa-ti-en-ce 

im-pa-ti-en-ce 

quo-ti-ent 

cap-ti-eux 

ar-gu-tie 

cau-ti-on-ne-ment bail 



Sti, xti, thi, preserve invariably thejlrst sound -of t be- 
fore any letter. 

To complete this second list, observe that t always 
takes the sound of c. — 1st. In all adjectives ending in 
-tial, -tiel, -tient, -tieux, and their derivatives ; — 2dly. 
In all the inflexions of the two verbs quoted, balbutier, 
and initier ; — 3dly, in several hundred words ending in 
tion, when tion is not immediately preceded by an s, or 
an x ; and finally, in the following additional list of 
words, ending in -tie and 4ien, viz. the substantives 
calvitie, facetie, impentie, ineriie, minutie, peripetie, 
primatie, prophStie, suprematie, aristocratie, democra- 
tie, theocratie ; in the names of countries, as Beotie, 
Croatie, Dalmatie, Galatie ; and of nations, or per- 
sons, as Beotien, Egyptien, Capetien, Diocletien, Domi- 
tien, Gratien, Le Titien, and some few others. 

T final is always sounded in apt, rant, fat, malt, 
mat, pat, opiat, exeat, transeat, vivat, spa't, spath, Goli- 
ath, net, fret, tacet^ Thibet, aconit, deficit, grand, intro'it, 
preterit, transit, subit, dot, Astaroth, azitnut, brut, com- 
put, chut, bismuth, indult, luth, lid, occiput, sinciput, and 
both s and t are articulated in Le Christ, Vest (east), 
Voucst, Brest, lest, test, Pest, toast, and tntrt le zist et le 
zest ; but neither of these letters is heard in Jesus Christ, 
which is pronounced Jem Cri. 

T final is likewise generally heard, when the follow- 
ing word begins with a vowel or h mute^ as e'est un petit 
homme, &c. &c. ; however, there are many words in 
which it always remains silent, as mort, tort, goiit, 



34 THE SOUNDS 

court, bdt, mat, lit, respect, instinct, navet, assassinat, 
artichaut, defaut, debout, brulot, statut, &c. so that a 
person would almost be regarded with astonishment 
who should affectedly sound it in these sentences : 
Dassaut a tie terrible. — he contrat est signe et le depot 
est chez moi. — Le gigot est cuit et le ragout aussi. — Avant 
de pecker mettez Pappdt a la ligne. — J'ai fait un bon 
marche ; voyez, P achat est la ; such a pronunciation 
would be barbarous and often equivocal. 

T is always silent in the conjunction et, pronounced e, 
therefore to avoid what is called hiatus in French verse> 
this word is never placed before a vowel. 

For words ending in ct, see page 18. 

When this letter is doubled, only one is heard, except 
in atticisme, attique, Atticus, battologie, guttural, and pit- 
toresque. 



V, v, has the same sound in French as in English. 

EXAMPLES. 

Val-ve valve vi-vre to live 

val-vu-le valvule vi-vo-ter to live poorly 

vau-de-vil-le ballad vi-re-vol-te \ qU ) cJ l irr ^*~ 

I tar walk 

ver-ve poetic fire vi-re-veau windlass 

vi-va-ce vivacious veu-ve widow 

vis-a-vis opposite veu-va-ge widowhood 

This letter, when doubled, is represented by the 
character rv, which is met with in some foreign words, 
and is always pronounced as a simple v,as in Wigh, 
Wolfram, Warwick, Windsor, Walcourt, Walton, War- 
sovie, Westphalif, Wirlemberg, Wolga, Weser, Wendover, 
Ryswick, &c. except in wist and wiski, where it has the 
English sound ; but in Newton, the first syllable ?iezv is 
pronounced as neu in ?i<?2ttralite. 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 



35 



X, ar, has the five 
different sounds of 



r ks, in axe, expense 
gz, in exhibit, exhale 
k, in excellent, exsiccative 
ss, in bliss, mossy 
z, in Xenophon, 



EXAMPLES 



Ax-e 

sex-e 

ri-xe 

box-er 

lu-xe 



Of the first sound, ks. 



axis 
sex 

altercation 
to box 
luxury 



A-lex-an-dre 

Xan-tip-pe 

ox-y-ge-ne 

pa-ra-do-xe 

flu-xi-on 



Alexander 

Xantippe 

oxygen 

paradox 

defluxion 



EXAMPLES 



Xa-vi-er 

Xe-ao-phon 

ex-il 

ex-or-de 

ex-u-be-ran-ce 



Of the second sound, gz. 



Xaverius 

Xenophon 

exile 

exordium 

exuberance 



ex-a-men 

ex-au-cer 

ex-haus-ser 

ex-hiber 

ex-hu-mer 



examination 
( to hear favoura- 
\ hly 

to raise 

to produce 

to disinter 



EXAMPLES 



Of the third sound, k. 



Ex-ce-der 


to exceed 


ex-sic-ca-ti-on 


exsiccation 


ex-cel-ler 


to excel 


ex-suc-ci-on 


exsuclion 


ex-ces 


excess 


ex-su-da-ti-on 


exsudation 


ex-cep-ter 


to except 


ex-su-der 


exude 
( to plead an ex* 
I ception 


ex-ci-se 


excise 


ex-ci-per 






EXAMPLES 





Of the fourth sound, t$. 

Arx - Aix Soixante Sixty 

Aix-la-Chapelle Aix-la-Chapellc Bruxelles Brussels 

Auxerre Auxerre Luxeuil Luxeuil 

Aaxonne Auxonne and some few more. 



36 THE SOUNDS 

« 

EXAMPLES 
Of the fifth sound, z. 

Deuxieme second dix ecus ten crown* 

dixieme sixth dix homraes ten men 

dixieme tenth deux aunes two tils 

dix-huit eighteen beaux yeux fine eyes 

dix-neuf nintlten &.c. &lc. 

The first sound of this letter ks is by far the most ge- 
aeral. 

The second sound gz takes place in all words begin- 
ning with x or ex followed by a vowel, or the letter h, 
as le Xanthc, Xenocrates, Ximenes, exorable, and seve- 
ral others with those already mentioned in the second ex- 
emplification. 

The third sound k is limited to words beginning with 
exce, exci, and exs. 

The fourth sound ss is only found in the above quota- 
tions, and in six and dix when unaccompanied by sub- 
stantives, as in de seize Stez six, resle dix, where six and 
dix are pronounced with the hissing sound of ss in the 
English word bliss. 

Final x is generally pronounced as z, when the next 
word begins with a vowel or li mute, otherwise it is 
silent, as // est heureux aupres de vans, et malfuureux 
loin de vous : le Jinx et reflux de la mer, &c. except in 
the following words, where it has always the sound of 
ks. Jljax, Astiunax, borax, storax, Halifax, Hippo- 
nax, Dax, climax, thorax, Pertinax, Syphax, index, per- 
plex, Beatrix, Erix, Felix, prefix, phenix, Fox, Palafox, 
Coysevox, lynx, sphinx, larynx, syririx, onyx, Styx, and 
Pollux. 

N. B. X takes the sound of sh only in Don Quixote, 
generally pronounced Don Kishot, or rather ghishot. 



Z, z, is 
rose. 


generally 


pronounced as z 
EXAMPLES. 


in zone, or s in 


Zi-sa-nie 

ze^nith 

zo-oe 


tare 

zenith 

sone 


zig-zag ^ 

zin-zo-lin 

Zuy-der-z^e 


zigzag 

reddish purple 
Zuyder~ze* 



OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 37 

Except some few words, as assez, chez, nez, sonnez, 
(two sixes), and some proper names, as Alvarez, Sua- 
rez, Mete, Senez, Rhodcz, &c. z final is the distinctive 
mark of almost all the second persons plural in the 
French verbs, where it is generally heard, when followed 
by a word beginning with a vowel, or h mute, otherwise 
it is only sounded in the proper names already mentioned. 

Z is doubled in a few words taken from the Italian lan- 
guage, as lazzi, (dumb show), mezzanine, mezzo terming 
mezzo-tinto, and in some names of towns, or provinces, 
as Arezzo, PAbruzze, &c. 



OF GENDER. 

Gender in all languages marks the distinction of sex, 
and as there are only two of these, the French agree- 
ably to this view have but two genders, the masculine 
and feminine : the neuter they do not admit. 

The masculine gender expresses the male kind, as un 
komme, a man : un lion, a lion. 

The feminine gender denotes the female kind, as une 
femme, a woman ; une lionne, a lionness. 

The gender of nouns, in inanimate objects, is gene- 
rally expressed by their termination ; thus, final e mute 
is the distinctive mark of the feminine gender, every 
other final letter is the sign of the masculine. This 
would be an excellent rule, were it universal ; but 
this is far from being the case from the number of ex- 
ceptions, and it is with the intention of affording the learn- 
er a tolerable clue on this head, that we have here laid 
down the following concise rules, which will clear up 
some of the chief difficulties. 



38 



THE GENDERS 



A TABLE OF SUBSTANTIVES 

That are Masculine in one signification, and Feminine hi 

another. 



Masculine. 



Assistant, helper 


Aide 


eagle ; a great genius 


aigle 


an angel 


ange 


an alder-tree 


aune 


barb, a Barbary horse 


barbe 


bard, a poet 


barde 


red-breast 


berce 


a sort of privateer 


cdpre 


a scroll, or ornament in ? 
painting $ 


cartouche 


a caravan, a hoy 


coche 


cornet, a standard-bearer 


cornelte 


a couple, a man and wife 


couple 


Croat, a Croatian soldier 


cravat e 


a crape 


crept 


an echo, the return of > 
sound ) 


tclto 


ensign, astandard-bear- > 
er 5 


enseignc - 


example, model, instance 


exemplc 


a gimlet, a piercer 


foret 


a large tun 


fcudre 


keeper, warden 


garde 


hoar-frost 


givre 


the rolls, a register 


trreffe 


gules in heraldry 


queule 


guide, director 


%uide 


heliotrope, sunflower , 


heliotrope 


iris, the rainbow ; iris ) 
of the eye $ 




iris 


lacker, a kind of varnish 


r aque 


a book 


l ivre 


a hat of otter's hair i 


'outre 


handle of a tool i 


nanche 


a labourer i 


naruzuvre 


memoir; a bill 


nemo ire 


thanks > 


nerci 



Feminine. 



Aid, help, support 
a Roman standard 
a kind of thornb&ck 
om ell, a sort of measure 
beard 

a slice of bacon ; 
horse-armour 
cow-parsnip 
caper, an acid pickle 

cartouch, cartridge 

a notch; a sow 

a woman'shead-dresswhen 
in dishabille 
a brace, a pair, two of a sort 
a cravat, a neckcloth 
a pancake 

Echo, a nymph 



a sign post 

a copy for writing 
a wood, a forest 
lightning, thunderbolt 
watch ; hilt ; nurse 

S a snake, or serpent (in he- 

i ral dry) 
a graft 

the mouth of beasts 
rein, for governing a horto 
heliotrope ; jasper 

< sprig-crystal ; a proper 

( name 
lacca, gum-lac 
a pound 
an otter 

a sleeve ; English channel 
the working of a ship 
memory 
pity, mercy 



N. B. Ol" this table it is to be remarked, that the French word stands in the 
middle column, and its signification on the right band and on tbe left. When 
it has the meaning which stands on the left, it is masculine ; when that which 
at&ads to the right, it is feminine. 



OF THE FRENCH NOUNS. 



39 



Masculine. 


i 


Feminine. 


mood ; mode 


mode 


fashion 


a pier, or mound 


mole 


mole, moon-calf 


mould, cast, form 


moule 


muscle, a shell-fish 


a ship-boy 


mousse 


moss, a plant 


the philosopher's stone 


ceuvre 


action ; an author's works 


office, business ; prayers 


office 


pantry, larder, buttery 


ombre, a game at cards 


ombre 


shade, shadow 


page of a prince, &c. 


page 


page in a book 


a merry an drew 


paillasse 


a straw-bed 


a hand's breadth 


palrne 


( the branch of a palm 
I tree ; victory 


pantomime 


pantomime 


a dumb show 


easter, easter-day 


pdque 


the passover 


a comparison 


parallele 


a parallel line 


pendulum 


pendule 


a clock 


le Perche, in France 


perche 


pole ; perch, a fish 


summit, highest pitch 


periode 


period, epocha 


any body, nobody (a > 
pronoun) ) 


per sonne 


a person (a houri) 


spade, at cards 


pique 


a pike 


gnatsnapper, a bird 


pivoine 


peony, a flower 


a plane-tree 


plane 


plane, an instrument 


a stove ; a canopy 


poile 


a frying-pan 


post ; a military station 


poste 


the post for letters 


punto at cards 


ponte 


the laying of eggs 


purple colour; purples > 
(a disease) $ 


pourpre 


purple fish; purple dye 


a pretence 


prktexte 


pretexta [figment 


quadril at cards 

the calling back a hawk 


quadrille 


party of horse in a tour- 


reclame 


a catch-word (in printing) 


rest, relaxation 


rtldche 


harbour [tance 


a glass coach 


remise 


a coach-house; a remit- 


a sort of pear-tree 


sans-peau 


a sort of pear 


Satyr, a sylvan god 


satyre 


a satire, a lampoon 


serpentarius 


serpent aire 


snake-root, dragon's wort 


nap, slumber 


so mine 


sum; load* name of a A- 


a smile 


souris 


a mouse [ver 


a porter 


Suisse 


Switzerland 


holder, a book-keeper 


teneur 


tenor, purport, conterijt 


a tour; turn ; trick 


tour 


tower; rock at chess 


triumph 


triompht 


a trump 


trumpeter 


irompette 


trumpet 


space 


vague 


a wave, surge 


a vase, vessel 


vase 


( the slime in ponds, 
I lakes, &c. 


a bat of vigonia wool 


vigogne 


a vigon, a llama 


a veil 


voile 


a sail 



40 THE GENDERS 

SUBSTANTIVES DENOTING SPECIES, 

which have a fixed Gender independently of termination. 



1 



21 



3 



( God, his angels, cherubim and seraphim, are of 

I masculine gender. 

All terms seeming to constitute an appellation, and 
all proper names of men and women are of the gen- 
der of the sex to which they respectively belong, as 
are likewise all names of animals, when the male is 
distinguished from the female by a different denomi- 
nation ; but when the same name is used for both 
male and female, as un elephant, un zebre, une pan- 
there, un vauiour, un cygne, une caille, une perdrix, 
un barbeau, une truite, un congre, its gender must 
then, like that of any inanimate object, be determin- 
ed by its termination. Here the only difficulty re- 
spects substantives ending in e mute, all the rest be- 
ing of the masculine gender, with such exceptions as 
will be seen in page 45. 

All diminutives of animals, when there is but one 
common denomination for both sexes, are of the 
masculine gender, whatever may be the gender of 
the original from which they are derived, as un lion- 
ceau, un souriceau, un perdreau, un cornillas, un 
carpillon, un couleuvreau, un vipereau, un becasseau, 
&c. except une becassine ; but these two latter, 
although derived from the word becasse, and belong- 
ing to the genus, are not of the same species. In 
other cases, the diminutives follow the gender their 
eex indicates, as un poulain, une pouliche, vn cochet, 
une poulette. 

Diminutives of inanimate objects more generally 
follow the gender of their roots, as batelet, maison- 
nette, globule, from bateau, maison, globe, &c. how- 
ever, corbillon, soliveau, cruchon, savonneite, trout- 
seau, from corbeille, solive, cruche, savon, and trous- 

^8e, and many others do not. 



OF THE FRENCH NOUNS. 



41 



' All the names of the days, months, and seasons of 
the year, are of the masculine gender, except au- 
tomne, which is of both genders ; when, however, 
the diminutive mi (half) is prefixed to the name of a 
month, the compound word then takes the feminine 
gender, as la mi-mai, la mi-aout, &c, except also la 
mi-car ime and saint- days, as la saint- Jean, la Tous- 
saint, &c. 

of trees, except yeuse, a sort of " 
oak, 

of shrubs, with some exceptions, 



6 All names 



7 All names < 



of metals, without excepting/>/a- 
tine, formerly feminine. 

of minerals, a few excepted, 

of colours, without excepting 
VIsabelle,leFeuille-morte, &c. 
though they have a feminine 
termination, 

of mountains, except those 1 
chains which have no singular, 



are 
► mascu* 

line. 



of winds, except la bise, la tra- 
montane, la bnse, and les 
moussons, 

of towns, except those which 
necessarily take the article la 
before them, as la Rochelle, la 
Ferte-sur-Aube, &c. and some 
others, 



are 
► mascu 
line. 



42 THE GENDERS 

Ordinal, distributive and proportional numbers, 
adjectives and infinitives of verbs, prepositions and 
adverbs, all these, when used substantively, are 
masculine, as le tiers, le quart, un cinquitme, le qua- 
druple, le beau, le sublime, le boire, le manger, le 
mieux, le pour, le contre, un parallele (a compari- 
son), &c. except la moitie, and the elliptical forms 
of speech, une courbe, une tangente, une perpendicu- 
laire y une parallele, une antique, used for une ligne 
courbe, une ligne tangente, &c. Antique is feminine, 
for the same reason ; the word medaille, or statue 
„ appearing to be understood. 

g < All names of virtues are of the feminine gender, 
I except courage, merit e. 



Si 



GENDERS OP NOUNS MOSTLY DEPENDING ON THEIR 
TERMINATION* 

!It will be recollected that final e mute constitutes 
the feminine gender, and every other final letter the 
masculine. 

All names of states, empires, kingdoms, and 
provinces, are of the gender which their termi- 
nations indicate ; except le Bengale, le Meocique, 
le Peloponese, le Maine, le Perche, le Rouergue, le 
Bigorre, le Tallage, la Franche-comte, and perhaps 

,a few more. 

f The names of fruits, grain, plants, and flowers, 
12 ) follow pretty generally the gender of their termi- 

\ nations, but there are too many exceptions to be in- 

\ troduced here. 



ni 



OF THE FRENCH NOUNS. 



4S 



TABLE 



SHEWING THE GENDER OF ALL WORDS THAT DO NOT END IN 
6 MUTE. 



Masculine. 



Feminine. 



11 

40 

15 

30 

10 

200 

6 
3 

100 

200 



f Aparte\ arrete, be 

nidicit£, comte, 
< cote, £te, pate\ 

traite, t£, the, 

Lethe" 

alibi, biribi, lundi, 
grand merci, 



( alibi 



convoi, efFroi, &c. 
ergo, vertigo, indi- 
go, he. 

fichu, cru, £cu, tis- 
su, he. 

aloyau, anneau, he. 
he. 

( bref, chalef, chef, 
( fief, grief, relief 
( daim, essaim, abat- 
l faim 

San, ban, cran, e- 
cran, pan, he. 
^bain, baise-main, 
avant-raain, garde- 
J main, tourne-main 
J essuie-main, gain 
^frein, basin, he. 




{ amitte, inimide\ 
\ moiti£, pitie* 

absurdite, beauts, 
charity, cite\ dig- 
nit6, fidelity, g6n£- 
rosit£, he. he. 

Fournii, 'merci, 
gagui, apres-midi 

foi, loi, paroi 

albugo, virago 

bru, glu, tribu, 

vertu 

eau, peau, surpeau, 

sans-peau 



•i 



clef, nef , soif 
faim, male-faim 
maman 

in fin, main, nonnain 



30 



scion, bastion, 
tion, Ixion 



bes- 



' gabion, taudion, 
million, lion, ard6 
lion, fourmilion, 
tr^mion, capion, 
turion, oamion, 
lampion, septen- 
trion, brimborion, 

k gavion, &c. 



-cion 
•^ion 
-tion 
-gion 
-nion 
-xioo 



succion, cession, 
friction, gestion, 
region, opinion, 
reflexion, fluxion, 
he* he. he. 



rebellion, dent-de- % 
lion, alluvion > 



5X50 



1100 



44 



THE GENDERS 



Masculine. 



Feminine. 



8 



11 



15 

4 

20 

30 

150 

70 

15 

12 

700 

260 



alcyon, clayon, cra- 
yon, rayon, sayon, 
trayon, lamproyon, 
Amphictyons 

brise-raison 

peson, bison, gri- 
| son, groison, hori- 
zon, tison, oison, 
I poison, contre-poi- 
fc son, buson 

f basson, caisson, ca- 

j vesson, taisson, po- 

I isson, cosson, buis 

J son, frisson, heris- 

son, maudisson 

nourrisson, palis 

son, polisson, unis- 

son, saucisson 

< arcanson, echan- 
\ son, tenson, pinson 

( charancon,cavecon 
I pin9on, sucon, &.c. 

brrdon, gueridon, he. 

tendron, jeune ten- 
dron, baron, he. 

abattis, appentis, 
iris, tourne-vis, he. 

C bois, mois,carquois. 
( harnois, he. 

Sadent, chiendent, 
liondent, claque- 
\ dent, cure-dent, oc- 
( cident, trident, he. 

( acharnement, as- 
\ sortiment,&c. 

"ballet, billet, bos- 
quet, minuit, con- 
i duit,reduit, he. bil- 
j lot,brul©t, coraplot, 
he. bout, gout, ra- 
gout, he. 



^ir 



-yon 



y -sson 



-gon 

-don 

•Ion 
-ron 



-dent ) 
-gent $ 

-ment 




cargaison, he. he. 

garnison, gue>ison, 
prison, trahison, j 
cloison,foison, moi- 
son, pamoison, toi- \ 
son, camuson 



30 



paisson, boisson 
moisson, cuisson 
salisson, mousson 



: S 



chanson 

fa^on, contrefac.on, ' 
lecon, 



raalfacon. 

rancon 

dondon 

laideron, 
tatillon 



souillon, i 



brebis, souris, chau- 
ve-souris, vis, iris 

fois 



dent, surdent, gent 
jument 

foret, nuit, dot, glout 



OF THE FRENCH NOUNS. 



45 



Masculine. 



i 



Feminine. 



15 



20 



40 



900 



faix, choix, cruci- 
I fix, prix, &c. taux, 
i houx, courroux, e- 

poux, &.C 

art, depart, cham- 
| part, rempart, ef- 
fort, port, fort, tort, 
&c. 

fer, ver, hiver, &c. 
air, Eclair, &c. tour, 
contour, four, &c. 

"bonheur, malheur, 
labeur, honneur, 
deshonneur, cceur, 
anticceur, creve- 
cceur,chceur,chou- 
fleur, pleurs,equa- 
teur, secteur, &c. 
&c. &c. 



paix, croix, noix, 
poix>voix,perdrix, 
chaux, faux, toux 



hart,part,mort,ma- 
lemort 



cuiller, mer, chair, ) 
cour, tour $ 

aigreur, ampleur, ar- 
deur, blancheur, can- 
deur, chaleur, chan- 
deleur, clameur, cou- 
leur, douceur, dou- 
leur, epaisseur, er- 
reur, fadeur, defa- 
veur, ferveur, fleur. 



76 



passe-fleur, sans -fleur, fraicheur, frayeur, froideur, fureur, gran- 
deur, grosseur, hauteur, horreur, humeur, laideur, langueur, lar- 
ge ur, lenteur, liqueur, longueur, lourdeur, lueur, maigreur, moi- 
teur, noirceur, odeur, paieur, pesanteur, peur, primeur, profon- 
deur, puanteur, pudeur, impudeur, rigueur, roideur, rondeur, 
rougeur, rousseur, rumeur, saveur, senteur, soeur, souleur, splenl 
deur, sueur, teneur, terreur, tiedeur, torpeur, touffeur, tumeur, 
valeur, non- valeur, vapeur, verdeur, vigueur, and mceurs ; be- 
sides basseur, rancoeur, tremeur, three words now obsolete, making 
in the whole the number of seventy-six. 

There are a great many proper names of females, which 
though they may not have the feminine termination, are of that 
gender, as the learner, from their nature, will easily comprehend 
such are, among the heathens, Pnllas, Ctrts, Thltis, Vtnus, Ju'- 
non, Dxdon, &c ; amongchristian names, Sarah, Deborah, Elizabeth, 
Agnte, &c. and many of these are contractions, as Fanchon for 
Fanny, Lison, Louixon, Marion, Manon, Nanon, Jeanneton, Ma- 
delon, Tonlon, Cataut, Margot, Golon, Babet, Babeau, Isabeau 
&c. [See Article 2. p. 40.] 

As this list of exceptions will be found pretty accurate, all 
other nouns, that belong to this termination, must be strictly con- 
sidered as being of the masculine gender, since they are not enu- 
merated in this Table. 



A 
VOCABULARY 

FRENCH AND ENGLISH. 



*#* In the following Vocabulary, the Gender has been affixed 
only to those Nouns that are not comprised in the preceding 
Rules. 





Of the Universe in General. 




Dieu 


God 


soleil 


sun 


cr^ateur 


creator 


rayon du soleil 


sun-beam 


Jesus -Christ 


Jesus Christ 


lune 


moon 


trinite 


trinity 


Eclipse 


eclipse 


Saint-Esprit 


Holy Ghost 


orage, m. 


storm 


ange 


angel 


tonnerre, m 


thunder 


arcbange 


archangel 


Eclair 


lightning 


prophete 


prophet 


brouillard 


f°g 


messie 


messiah 


pluie 


rain 


sauveur 


saviour 


arc-en-ciel 


rain-bovo 


r^dempteur 


redeemer 


on dee 


shower 


Vierge-Marie 


Virgin Mary 


neige 


snow 


apotre 


apostle 


grele 


hail 


£vangel!ste 


evangelist 


glace 


ice 


martyr 


martyr 


gelee 


frost 


saint 


saint 


cUgel 


thaw 


paradis 


paradise 


rosee 


dew 


ciel 


heaven 


creature 


creature 


enfer 


hell 


globe, m. 


globe 


diable 


devil 


sphere 


sphere 


nature 


nature 


hemisphere, m. 


hemisphere 


univers 


universe 


horizon 


horizon 


monde, m. 


world 


degre" 


degree 


eminent 


element 


longitude 


longitude 


terre 


earth 


latitude 


latitude 


eau 
feu 


water 
fire 


points cardi- } 
naux, pi. J 


I cardinal points 


air 


air 


orient, or est 


east 


firmament 
e"toile 


sky 
star 


Occident, or < 
ouest < 


>wett 


plan£te 


planet 


septentrion, or < 


y north 


com^.te 


comet 


nord J 




constellation 


constellation 


midi, or sud 


south 





VOCABULARY. 


47 


climat 


climate 


r£cif* 


reef of rocks 


region 
continent 


region 
continent 


brisans* 


} breakers, 
I surf 


Europe 


Europe 


cime 


top 


Asie 


Asia 


pierre 


stone 


Afrique 


Africa 


pont 


bridge 


Am£rique 


America 


chauss£e 


causeway 


empire, m. 


empire 


gue" 


ford 


royaume, m. 


kingdom 


quai 


warf, or quay 


republique 


republic 


route 


road 


pays 


country 


sentier 


path 


colonie 


colony 


fosse" 


ditch 


principaute 


principality 


gravier 


gravel 


£lectorat 


electorate 


sable, m. 


sand 


province 


province 


sablon 


small sand 


comte 


shire or county 


poussiere 


dust 


lie 


island 


ocean 


ocean 


presqu'ile 


) 


mer 


sea 


p^ninsule 


^peninsula 


golfe, rn. 


gulf 


chersonese 


s 


baie 


bay- 


cap 


cape 


rade 


road {for ships) 


promontoire, 


m. promontory 


anse 


creek 


isthme, m. 


isthmw 


canal 


channel 


montagne 


mountain 


d^troit 


strait 


mont 


mount 


courant 


current 


colline 


hill 


maree 


tide 


sommet 


summit 


flux 


flowing 


pente, or 
penchant 
hauteur 


> declivity 


reflux 
vague 


ebbing 
wave 


eminence 


flots, pi. or 


billowe 


vallee 


valley 


ondes, pi. 


waves 


vallon 


vale 


havre, m. 


haven 


pblme, m. 


abyss 


port 


harbour 


desert 


desert 


lac 


lake 


plaine 


plain 


riviere 


river 


marais 


marsh, or fin 


fleuve, m. 


great river 


rive 


> bank (of a 
j river) 


embouchure 


) mouth of a 
J river 


rivage, m. 


shore 


ruisseau 


brook 


cote 


coast 


d£bordement 


overflow 


rocher* 


rock 


deluge, m. 


deluge 


roche* 


rock 


inondation 


inundation 


rod* 


rock 


£cluse 


) flood-gate 


£cueil* 


shoal 


$ sluice 


banc* 


ledge of rocks 


digue 


dike 



# These seven words do not convey in French the same idea : 
«oe four latter relate to the sea. 



48 


VOCABULARY. 




e*tang 


pond 


nuage, m. 


cloud 


vivier 


fish-pond 


nielle 


blight 


reservoir 


bason 


humidite 


dampness 


abreuvoir 


horse-pond 


serein 


mildew 


bain 


bath 


tourbillon 


whirlwind 


citerne 


cistern 


orage, m. 


storm 


fontaine 


fountain 


tempete 


tempest 


source 


spring 


calme, m. 


calm 


puits 


well 


eternite 


eternity 


pompe 


pump 


temps 


time 


bateau 


boat 


siecle, m. 


age or century 


barque 


bark 


epoque 


epoch 


bac 


ferry boat 


pdriode, m. 


period 


coche d'eau, m. barge 


date 


date 


gab are 


lighter 


an, ann£e 


year 


navire, m. 


ship 


mois 


month 


vaisseau 


vessel 


Janvier 


January 


paquet-bot 


packet-boat 


fevrier 


february 


flamme 


blaze 


mars 


march 


etincelle 


spark 


avril 


april 


ehaleur 


heat 


mai 


may 


fum£e 


smoke 


juin 


june 


incendie, m. 


conflagration 


juillet 


July 


chauffage, m. 


fuel 


aout 


august 


charbon 


coals 


septembre 


September 


charbon-de- 


> pit-coal 


octobre 


October 


terre 


novembre 


november 


charbon- de- 
bois 


> charcoal 


ddcembre 
semaine 


december 
week 


braise 


small coal 


jour 


day 


tourbe 


turf 


journ^e 


day 


mottes, pi. 


peat 


aujourd'hui 


to-day 


bois 


wood 


demain 


to-morrow 


buche 


log of wood 


hier 


yesterday 


fagot 


faggot 


lundi 


monday 


coupeaux, pi. 


chips 


mardi 


tuesday 


cendre 


ashes 


mercredi 


Wednesday 


suie 


soot 


jeudi 


thursday 


feu 


fire 


vendredi 


friday 


atmosphere 


atmosphere 


samedi 


Saturday 


vent 


wind 


dimanche 


sunday 


eephyr 


zephyr 


heure 


hour 


vapeur 


vapour 


demi-heure 


half an hour 


lumTwre 
t^nebres, pi. 


light 
darkness 


quart- d' heure 


C quarter of an 
I hour 


ehaleur 


heat 


aurore 


aurora 


froid 


cold 


aube 


dawn 


cue, nude 


cloud 


matin 


morning 



VOCABULARY. 



49 



matinee 

midi 

l'apres-midi 

Papres-dinee 

soir 

soiree 

crepuscule m. 

nuit 

minuit 

minute 

seconite 

moment 

instant 

saison 

printemps 

ete 

automne 

hiver 



forenoon 
noon 

> the afternoon 

> evening 

twilight 

night 

midnight 

minute 

second 

moment 

instant 

season 

spring 

summer 

autumn 

winter 



earn aval 

careme, ?n. 

mi-careme 

paque 

pentecote 

la Saint-Jean 

l'avent 

noel 

fete 

equinoxe, m. 

solstice, m. 

canicule 

fenaison 

moisson 

vendage 

tonte 

semailles, pi. 

conge 



carnival 
lent - 

midlent 
easier 

whit-sunday 
midsummer 
advent 
Christmas 
festival 
equinox 
the solstice 
the dog- days 
hay -harvest 
harvest 
vintage 
shearing4imt 
sowing-time 
holiday 



OF MAN. 



genre-humain 

homme 

femme 

sexe 

enfant 

garc,on 

fille 

vierge 

virgin ite 

entance 

jeunesse 

adolescence 

virilite 

vieillesse 

decrepitude 

jeune homme 

jeune fille 

vieillard 

geant 

nain 

pigme'e, m. 

mari 

femme 

veuf 

*euve 



mankind 

man 

woman 

sex 

child 

boy 

girl 

virgin 

virginity 

infancy 

youth 

adolescence 

manhood 

old age 

decrepitude 

youth or lad 

young girl 

old man 

giant 

dwarf 

pigmy 

husband 

wife 

widawer 

widow 



orphelin 

orpheline 

be'ritier 

h^ritierc 

maitre 

maitresse 

hote 

hotes.se 

domestique 

servante 



compagnon 

compagne 

corps 

rnembre, m. 
tronc 
tete 

crane, m. 
front 

visage, m. 
traits, pi. 



orphan (boy\ 
orphan (girl) 
heir 
htiress 
master 
mistress 
landlord 
landlady 
man servant 
maid servant 
neighbour 
( neighbour 
I (female) 
companion 

S companion 
(female 

body 

member 

trunk 

head 

scull 
forehead 
face 
feature* 



ceil 
yeux, pi. 


eye 
eyes 


iiULAKI. 

cerveau 
cervelle 


{ brain 


sourcils, pi. 


eye-brows 


squelette, m. 


skeleton 


paupiere 


eye- lid 


cceur 


heart 


nez 


nose 


poumon 


lungs 


narines, pi. 


nostrils 


foie, m. 


liver 


bouche 


mouth 


rate 


spleen 


levres, pi. 


lips 


estomac 


stomach 


dent 


tooth 


entrailles, pi. 


entrails 


gencives, pi. 


gums 


sang 


blood 


machoire 


jaw-bont 


humeurs, pi. 


humours 


langue 


tongue 


glande 


gland 5 


pala.is 


palate 


poil 


hair 


joues, pi. 


cheeks 


chair 


flesh 


fossette 


dimple 


peau 


skin 


menton 


chin 


pores, m. pi. 


pores 


barbe 


beard 


nerf 


nerve 


tempes, pi. 


temples 


artere 


artery 


oreille 


car 


veiue 


vein 


cheveax, pi. 


hair 


OS 


bone 


cou 


neck 


moelle 


marrow 


gosier 


throat 


ride 


wrinkle 


sein 


bosom 


bouton 


pimple 


mamelle 


breast 


sante 


health 


ventre, m. 


belly 


temperament 


constitution 


ceinture 


waist 


embonpoint 


plumpness 


cote 


side 


maigreur 


leanness 


hanche 


haunch 


teint 


complexion 


cuisses, pi. 


(highs 


rougeur 


redness 


genou 


knee 


paleur 


paleness 


j arret 


ham 


port 


countenance 


rotule 


knee*pan 


demarche 


gait 


jambe 


leg 


geste, m. 


gesture 


mollet 


calf of the leg 


vivacite 


liveliness 


pied 


foot 


enjoument 


sprightliness 


talon 


heel 


gaiety 


gaity 


orteil 


toe 


beaute* 


beauty 


bras 


arm 


charmes, m. pi 


. charms 


coude, 7ii. 


elbow 


attraits, pi. 


attractions 


aisselle 


the arm-pit 


appas,p/. 


beauties 


epaule 


shoulder 


agrement 


pleasantness 


main 


hand 


laideur 


deformity 


poing 


fist 


taille 


shape, size 


poignet 


wrist 


voix 


voice 


doigt 


finger 


parole 


speech 


pouce, m. 


thumb 


silence, m. 


silence 


ongle, m. 


nail 


action 


action 


c6te 


rib 


mouvement 


motion 





VOCABULARY. 


i 


repoa 


rest 


vertige m. 


dizziness 


grimace 


grimace 


evanouisse- 


> swooning 


ris, rire m. 


laughter 


ment 


souris 


> smile 


defaillauce 


fainting 


sourire m. 


faiblesse 


swoon 


humeur 


ill temper 


deraangeaison 


itching 


soupir 


sigh 


pesanteur 


heaviness 


g^missement 


groan 


engourdisse- 


> numbness 


assoupisse- 
ment 


> drowsiness 


ment 
insomnie 


toant of sleep 


sonimeil 


sleep 


coup 


blow 


songe m. 


vision 


contre-coup 


counter-blow 


reve m. 


dream 


egratignure 


scratch 


souffle m. 


blast 


ecorchure 


excoriation 


haleine 


breath 


entorse 


sprain 


respiration 


respiration 


foulure 


strain 


£lernuement 


sneezing 


enflure 


swelling 


yue 


sight 


tumeur 


tumour 


ouie 


hearing 


meurtrissure 


bruise 


odorat 


smell 


contusion 


contusion 


gout 


taste 


blessure 


wound 


toucher 


touch 


cicatrice 


scar 


sentiment 


sense 


ulcere in. 


ulcer 


obscurite 


darkness 


gangrene 


mortification 


ombre 


shade 


coupure 


cut 


son 


sound 


brulure 


burn 


bruit 


noise 


cor 


corn 


odeur 


smell 


durillon 


callosity 


puanteur 


stench 


enrouement 


hoarseness 


saveur 


relish 


rhume m. 


cold 


sensations pi. 


sensations 


toux 


cough 


chatouillemenl 


tickling 


coqueluche 


hooping-cough 


plaisir 


pleasure 


surdite 


deafness 


joie 


joy 


freoesie 


frenzy 


douleur 


pain 


folie 


lunacy 


faim 


hunger 


rage 


madness 


soif 


thirst 


goutte 


gout 


dugout 


surfeit 


convulsions;;/ 


convulsive-fits 


maladie 


disease 


vapeurs pi. 


vapours 


mal 


complaint 


fievre 


fever 


incommodite* 


illness 


frisson 


shivering 


infirmity 


infirmity 


acces 


p 


indisposition 


disorder 


ddlire m. 


delirium 


mal-de-dents 


tooth-ache 


crise 


crisis 


mal-de-tete 


head-ache 


m£decine 


physic 


mal-aux-ycux 


( complaint in 
\ the eyes 


me'decin 


physician 




cbirurgien 


surgeon 


migraine 


megrim 


apothicaire 
6 


apothecary 



51 



52 



VOCABULARY. 



accoucheur 

«age«femrne 

consultation 

ordonnance 

remede m. 

drogues pi. 

po ud res pL 

pillules/*/. 

saignee 

lancette 

gouttes pi. 

bain 



man-midwife 

midwife 

consultation 

prescription 

remedy 

drugs 

powders 

pills 

bleeding 

lined 

drops 

bath 



regime m. 

sirop 

agonie 

mort 

cadavre m. 

vie 

gu orison 

rechute 

symptome m. 

convalescence 



diet 

syrup 

dying how 

death 

corpse 

life 

recovery 

relapse 

symptom 
k fair way of 
( recovery 



OF THE MIND AND ITS FACULTIES. 



&me 


soul 


souvenir - 


esprit 


mind 


oubli 


genie m. 


genius 


slupidite 


raison 


reason 


passions pi. 


entendement 


understanding 


affections/?/. 


jugement 


judgment 


amour 


sens 


sense 


amours/, pi. 


pensee 


thought 


haine 


idee 


idea 


desir 


imagination 


imagination 


crainte. peur 


fantaisie 


fancy 


apprehension 


caprice m. 


caprice 


esp ranee 


volonte 


will 


confianee 


liberte 


liberty 


honte 


bel-esprit 


wit 


timidite 


opinion 


opinion 


h a rd i esse 


sentiment 


sentiment 


assurance 


verite 


truth 


coiere 


erreur 


error 


courroux 


vraisemblance 


likelihood 


fureur 


probabilite 


probability 


rage 


apparence 


appearance 


ressentiment 


me prise 


mistake 


vengeance 


bevue 


oversight 


depit 


science 


science 


d«plaisir 


connaissance 


knowledge 


tristesse 


penetration 


penetration 


chagrin 


sagacity 


sagacity 


peine 


disposition 


disposition 


d£sespoir 


inclination 


inclination 


doute m. 


capacite* 


capacity 


soupcon 


m^moire 


memory 


envie 



remembrance 
for gelf illness 
stupidity 
passions 
affections 
love 

amours 
hatred 
desire 
fear 

apprehension 
hope 

confidence 
shame 
bash fulness 
boldness 
confidence 
anger 
id rath 

f ir y 

rage 

resentment 

revenge 

spite 

displeasure 

sadness 

g™f 

sorrow 

despair 

doubt 

suspicion 

envy 



VOCABULARY. 



53 



jalousie 
pi tie 

misericorde 

compassion 

terreur 

epouvante 

indignation 

verta 

charite 

justice 

temperance 

sobriete 

force 

modestie 

civility 

pudeur 

polites?e 

bonnetete 

complaisance 

douceur 

bonte 

amitie 

union 

Concorde 

paix 

tranquillite 

patience 

prudence 

£conomie 

habilete 

industrie 

soin 

diligence 

exactitude 

liormeur 

probity 

ddsinteresse- 

ment 
sagesse 
Constance 
bienveillance 
Emulation 
faveur 
valeur 
bravoure 
courage m. 
finesse, ruse 



jealousy 

pity 
mercy 
compassion 
terror 
frigid . 
indignation 
virtue 
charity 
justice 
temperance 
sobriety 
fortitude 
modesty 
civiii'y 
bash fulness 
politeness 
honesty 
complaisance 
sweetness 
goodness 
friendship 
union 
concord 
peace. 

tranquillity 
patience 
prudence 
economy 
skill 
industry 
care 

diligence 
exactness 
honour 
probity 

> disinterestedness 

icisdom 

constancy 

benevolence 

emulation 

favour 

valour 

bravtry 

courage 

cunning 



adresse 

cha«tete 

innocence 

liberalite 

gen ero site 

reconnoissance 

frugalite 

prosperite 

adversite 

mceurs pi. 

bonheur 

recompense 

prix 

present 

don 

prtt 

grace 

reputation 

vice m. 

defaut 

imperfection 

avarice 

avidite 

orgueil 

paresse 

fain ear. tise 

lachete 

nonchalance 

luxe m. 

mollesse 

impurete 

debauch e 

dissolution 

libertinage m. 

desordre.wi. 

dereglement 

mepris 

raillerie 

moquerie 

modisance 

calomnie 

crime m. 

malice 

mechancete 

tromperie 

parjure m. 

friponnerie 



dexterity 

chastity 

innScenct 

liberality 

generosity 

gratitude 

frugality 

prosperity 

adversity 

manners 

happiness 

reward 

prise 

present 

gifl 

loan 

grace 

fame 

vice 

defect 

imperfection 

avarice 

greediness 

pride 

idleness 

slothful n ess 

sluggishness 

carelessness 

luxury, pomp 

effeminacy 

lewdness 

revel 

dissoluteness 

libertinism 

disorderly lift 

licentiousness 

contempt 

jest 

mockery 

slander 

calumny 

crime 

malice 

wick td nets 

deceit 

perjury 

knavery 



54 


VOCABULARY. 




fourberie 


roguery 


exil 


exile 


enchantement 


witchcraft 


banissement 


banishment 


injustice 


injustice 


pusillanimity 


pusillanimity 


tort 


wrong 


trahison 


treat hery 


mure 


usury 


perndie 


perfidiousness 


achat 


purchase 


punition 


punishment 


vente 


sals 


chatiment 


chastisement 


troc 


barter 


legerete* 


levity 


gage m. 


pledge 


coquetterie 


coquetry 


depot 


trust 


badinage m. 


sport 


contrat 


contract 


larcin 


robbery 


marche* 


bargain 


vol 


theft 


bassesse 


meanness 


fripponnerie 


knavish trick 


impudence 


impudence 


tromperie 


deceit 


effronterie 


effrontery 


ivroguerie 


drunkenness 


audace 


audaciousness 


ivresse 


ebriety 


t£m6rite* 


temerity 


assassinat 


murder 


pohronnerie 


cowardice 


meurtre m. 


manslaughter 


qniniatrete* 


stubbornness 


mensonge m. 


lie 


obstination 


obstinacy 


faussete 


falsehood 


cruaute 


cruelly 


conte m. 


tale 


dispute 


dispute 


serment 


oath 


querelle 


quarrel 


malheur 


misfortune 


brouillerie 


broil 


folie 


folly 


babil 


babbling 


extravagance 


madness 


caquet 


prating 


coutume 


custom 


inconstance 


inconstancy 


usage m. 


use 


ingratitude 


ungratefulness 


pratique 


practice 


ambition 


ambit ion 


liabitude 


habit 


prodigality 


prodigality 


licence 


licentiousness 


gourraandise 
impolitesse 


gluttony 


exees 


txcess 


rudeness 


tour 


trick 


incivility 


incivility 


bagatelles pi. 


trifles 


dissention 


dissension 


faute 


fault 


impatience 


impatience 


faiblesse 


weakness 


imprudence 


imprudence 


faible m. 


foible 


negligence 


negligence 


affront 


affront 


malhonn&tete 


rudeness 


outrage wi. 


outrage 


d£shonneur 


disgrace 


insulte 


insult 



OF MEATS AND DRINKS. 



nourriture 
uTimens pi. 
vivres m. pi. 



nourishment 

food 

victuals 



provisions 
re pas 
dejeuner 



provisions 

meal 

breakfast 





VOCABULARY. 


i 


diner 


dinner 


verjus 


verjuice 




j afternoon's 


ancbois 


anchovies 


gouter 


I luncheon 


Apices/?/. 


spices 


souper 


supper 


poivre. m. 


pepper 


collation 


collation 


gingembre m. 


ginger 


festin 


feast 


muscade 


nutmeg 


re"gal 


treat 


macis 


macs 


pain 

croute 


bread 

crust 


girofle m. 
(clous de) 


> cloves 


mie 


crumb 


canelle 


cinnamon 


farine 


flour 


oublies pi. 


wafers 


son 


bran 


sucre m. 


sugar 


pate 


dough 


caDsonade 


moist sugar 


levain 


leaven 


dessert 


dessert 


morceau 


bit, morsel 


fruit 


fruit 


tranche 


slice 


pate 


pie 


bouchee 


mouthful 


gateau 


cake 


viande 


meat 


tourte, tarte 


tart 


bouilii 


boiled meat 


biscuit 


biscuit 


rot, roti 


roast meat 


macaron 


macaroon 


boeuf 


beef 


crepe 


pancakes 


mouton 


mutton 


confitures pi. 


sweetmeats 


tgneau 


lamb 


gelee 


jdly 


»eau 


veal 


marmelade 


marmalade 


pore 


pork 


conserve 


conserve 


venaison 


venison 


tablettes pi. 


lozenges 


Tolaille 


fowls 


dragees pi. 


sugar -plums 


gibier 


game 


pralines pL 


crisp -almonds 


gigot 


a leg of mutton 


\ from age m. 


cheese 


andouille 


chitterlings 


beurre m. 


butter 


saucisse 


sausage 


lait 


milk 


jambon 


ham 


creme 


cream 


lard 


bacon 


ceuf 


e gg 


/noutarde 


mustard 


coque 


shell 


soupe 


SOU]) 


blanc 


white 


potage m. 


pottage 


jaune m. 


yolk 


bouillon 


broth 


boisson 


drink 


consoram^ 


jelly broth 


liqueur 


liquor 


ragout 


ragout 


the 


tea 


fricassee 


fricassee 


cafe 


coffee 


jus 


gravy 


chocolat 


chocolate 


sauce 


^auce 


limonade 


lemonade 


poisson 


fah 


ponche m. 


punch 


salade 


sallad 


vin 


wine 


sel 


salt 


biere 


beer 


huile 


oil 


eau-de-vie 


brardy 


vinaigre m. 


vxntgar 


nectar 


nectar 



55 



6* 



56 



VOCABULARY. 



ambroisie 
cidre m. 
poire* 



ambrosia 

cider 

perry 



hydromel 

sirop 

lie 



mead 
syrup 
dregs 



OF DRESSING APPAREL, &C. 



habilleroent 


dress 


guetres pi. 


gaiters 


hardcs 


clothes 


souliers 


shoes 


habit complet 


a suit of clothei 


i escarpinsp/. 


pumps 


habit 


coat 


semelle 


sole 


veste 


waistcoat 


bottes pi. 


boots 


gilet 


under -waistcoat boucles pi. 


buckles 


manches pi. 


sleeves 


cuir 


leather 


poches/?/. 


pockets 


chapeau 


hat 


bouton 


button 


perruque 


wig 


doublure 


lining 


jape 


petticoat 


couture 


seam 


jupon 


under-petticoat 


calotte 


breeches 


satin 


satin 


pantalon 


pantaloon 


taffetas 


taffety 


gousset 


fob 


gaze 


gauze 


drap 


cloth 


coiffure 


head-dress 


soie 


silk 


coiffe 


hood 


velours 


velvet 


collier 


necklace 


serge 
basin 


serge 
dimity 


boucles 

d'oreilles^/. 


> ear -rings 


flanelle 


flannel 


gants pi. 


gloves 


aoffe 


staff 


mitaines pi. 


mittens 


manteau 


cloak 


tablier 


apron 


surtout 
redingote 


surtout 
riding-coat 


mules pi. 
pantoufles pi. 


S slippers 


linge m. 


linen 


bague 


ring 


toile 


linen-cloth 


bijou 


jewel 


batiste 


cambric 


bracelet 


bracelet 


mousselin 


muslin 


dentelle 


lace 


linon 


lawn 


blonde 


blond-lace 


chemise 


shirt 


eventail 


fan 


jabot 


frill 


manchon 


muff 


cravate 


cravat 


agrafe 


clasp 


bas pi. 


stocking* 


ep ingle 


pin 


jarretieres pi. 


garters 


aiguille 


needle 


laine 


ivool 


etui 


case 


m 


thread 


de 


thimble 


coton 


cotton 


masque m. 


mask 


maille 


slilch 


voile m. 


veil 


trou 


hole 


tabatiere 


sniff- box 


chffiissons pi. 


socks 


tabac 


snuff 



tabac (afumer) tobacco 
bourse purse 

argent money 

porte -feuille m. pocket-book 
ciseauxp/. scissars 

crayon pencil 

mouchoir handkerchief 

lunettes pi. spectacles 

lorgnette opera-glass 



VOCABULARY. 




conserves pU 


preserves 


bouquet 


nosegay 


canne 


cane 


ok cordon 


string 


epee 


sword 


montre 


watch 


lief boite 


case 


chaine 


chain 


ss cachet 


seal 



57 



OF A HOUSE AND FURNITURE. 



maison 


house 


Salle 


{parlour 


h Atol 


< nobleman's 


salon 


llOlcJ 


\ house 


escalier 


stair-case 


hotcllerie 


inn 


office 


pantry 


chateau 


castle 


cuisine 


kitchen 


palais 


palace 


garde-man- 


i store-room 


conronne 


crown 


ger m. 


s 


trone m. 


throne 


bouiangerie 


bake house 


sceptre in. 


sceptre 


brasserie 


bre.w-house 


aile 


wing 


lingeiie 


laundry 


pavilion 


pavilion 


ecurie 


stable 


fondemens pi. 


foundation 


remise 


coach-house 


mur, muraille 


wall 


puits 


well 


batiment 


building 


etage m. 


fiory 


materiaux pi. 


materials 


appartemenl 


apartment 


pierre 


stone 


chambre 


room 


brique 


brick 


antichambre 


aniichamber 


mortier 


mortar 


salle-a-raanger 


• dining-room 


chaux 
pi at re m. 


lime 
plaster 


salon-de-com- 
pagnie 


> drawing-room 


ciment 


cement 


eabinet-de- 


) 


tuile 


tile 


toiletle 


> aresnng-room 


ardoise 


slate 


charnbre-a- 


> bed-room 


charpente 


timber work 


coucher 


poutre 


beam, 


galerie 


grit try 


solive 


joist 


cabinet 


closet 


6chelle 


ladder 


boudoir 


lady's closet 


cave 


vault 


garde-robe 


wardrobe 


cellier 


cellar 


porte 


door 


tonneau 


cask 


porte-ccchere 


gale 


futaille 


vessel 


seuil 


lli r ahold 


boutique 


shop 


jalousie 


blinds 


atelier 


work-shop 


gond 


h inge 


magasin 


warehouse 


marteau 


knocker 


vestibule m. 


hall 


scrrure 


lock 



58 


VOCABULARY. 




cle\ or clef 


key 


amidon 


starch 


verrou 


bolt 


balaia 


broom 


fenetre 


window 


banc 


bench 


vitre 


glass 


escabeau 


stool 


volet 


shutler 


planeher 


floor 


balcon 


balcony 


parquet 


inlaid floor 


store m. 


blind 


plafond 


ceiling 


grenier 


garret 


lambris 


wainscot 


toit 


roof 


cloison 


partition 


gouttiere 


gutter 


tapisserie 


hangings 


malle 


trunk 


tapis 


carpet 


boite 


box 


lit 


bed 


caisse 


chest 


alcove 


alcove 


cassette 


casket 


chalit 


bedstead 


coffre m. 


coffer 


chevet 


bolster 


logement 


lodging 


oreiller 


pillow 


ameublement 


furniture 


paillasse 


straw-mattress 


cheminee 


chimney 


matelas 


mattress 


atre m. foyer 


hearth 


draps pi. 


sheets 


soufflet 


bellows 


couvertures pi. 


bed-clothes 


pelle 


sho vel 


courte-pointe 


counterpane 


pincettes pi. 


tongs 


rideau 


curtain 


fourgon 


poker 


tringle 


curtain-rod 


garde-cen- 
dre m. 


>fender 


anneau 

sofa 


ring 
sofa 


coquemar 
bouilloire 


> boiler, copper 


fauteuil 
siege m. 


elboio-chair 
seat 


couvercle m. 


lid 


chaise 


chair 


poele 


frying-pan 


coussin 


cushion 


poelon 


skillet 


armoire 


press 


casserole 
fourneau 


saucepan 
stove 


commode 


( chest of draw' 
\ crs 


allumette 


match 


trumeau 


pier-glass 


pierre-a-fusil 


flint 


toilette 


toilet 


briquet 


steel 


miroir 


looking-glass 


four 


oven 


peigne m. 


comb 


essuie-main 


towel 


pomade 


pomatum 


bassinoire 


v: arming-pan 


poudre 


powder 


panier, cor- 


> basket 


bouppe 


P u ff 


beille 


parfum 


perfume 


porcelaine 


china-ware 


tableau 


picture 


faience 


delft-ware 


dessin 


drawing 


poterie 


earthen-ware 


coioris 


colouring 


pot 


pot 


portrait 


portrait 


eruche 


pitcher 


pay sage m. 


landscape 


lampe 


lamp 


miniature 


miniature 


lanterne 


lantern 


chandelier 


candlestick 


savon 


soap 


bougeoir 


fiat candlestick 





VOCABULARY. 


5< 


bobeche 


socket 


cuiller, or cu- ) mdnm ^ Lmm 


chandelle 


candle 


Mere 


£ a^wun 


bougie 


wax-light 


saliere 


sail cellar 


cire 


wax 


huillier 


oil- cruet 


moiichettes pi 


. snuffers 


moutardier 


mustard-pot 


porte-mou- 
chettes m. 


> snuffer-pan 


aiguiere 
coupe, tasse 


ewer 
cup 


eteignoir 


extinguisher 


gobelet 


goblet 


vergettes^Z. 


brush 


verre m. 


glan 


buffet 


cup-board 


bouteille 


bottle 


cabaret 


tea-board 


bouchon 


cork 


tasse 


cup 


tire-bouchon 


77i. cork-screw 


soucoupe 


saucer 


carafe 


decanter 


theiere 


tea-pot 


bibliotheque 


library 


cafetiere 


coffee- pat 


bureau 


bureau 


chocolatiere 


chocolale-pot 


tiroir 


drawer 


sucrier 


sugar-basin 


cachet 


seal 


jatte 


bowl 


Jettre 


letter 


table 


table 


enveloppe 


cover 


nappe 


cloth 


adresse 


direction 


serviette 


napkin 


signature 


signature 


assiette 


plate 


sonnette 


bell 


plat 


dish 


estampe 


print 


couteau 


knife 


mddaille 


medal 




OF THE CITY. 




v»Ie 


town, city 


fronti3pice m. 


frontispiece 


village m. 


village 


portail 


porial 


bourg 


borough 


colonne 


column 


rue 


street 


pilastre »?. 


pilaster 


c aire four 


cross- way 


base 


base 


passage m. 


passage 


pedestal 


pedestal 


place 


square 


statue 


statue 


cul-de-sac 


J no thorough- 

I f are 
pyramid 


arcade 


arcade 


pyramide 


portique m. 


> portico, or pU 
5 azza 


obeMisque m. 


obelisk 


aqueduc 


aqueduct 


pave 


pavement 


dome m. 


dome 


ruisseau 


kennel 


paroisse 


parish 


marchfj 


market 


corned ie 


play-house 


denizes pi. 


provisions 


theatre m. 


stage 


boacherie 


meat-market 


coulisses pi. 


scenery 


poissonnerie 
friperie 


fish-market 


decorations 


decor utiont 


old clothes shop 


toile 


curtain 


edifice m. 


edifice 


foyer 


gree7i-room 


facade 


front 


orchestre m. 


orchestra 



60 


VOCABULARY. 




parterre m* 
loge 


pit 


tr£sorerie 


treasury 


box 


amiraute 


admiralty 


amphiteatre m. 


first gallery 


arsenal 


arsenal 


paradis 
billet 


upper gallery 


faubourgi 


suburbs 


ticket 


boulevards pi. 


bulwarks 


couvent 


convent 


remparts pi. 


ramparts 


inonastere m. 


monastery 


barriere 


turnpike 


cellule 


cell 


guinguette 


tea-garden 


hermitage m. 


hermitage 


forge 


forge 


solitude 


solitude 


verrerie 


glass-house 


retraite 


retirement 


fonderie 


foundery 


university 


university 


carrosse m. 


coach 


college m. 


college 


imperiale 


roof 


e*cole 


school 


portiere 


coach door 


pension 


boarding school 


glaces pi. 


windows 


pari e men t 


parliament 


timon 


coach-pole 


chambre-haute, 
ou des pairs 


' > house of lords 


roue 
essieu 


wheel 
axle-tree 


chambre basse. 


(house of 


equipage m. 


equipage 


ou des com- 


harnais pi. 


harness 


munes 


I commons 


r&nes pi. 


reins 


prison 


prison 


bride 


bridle 


cachot 


dungeon 


licou 


halter 


hopital 


hospital 


selle 


saddle 


innrmerie 


infirmary 


bat 


pack-saddle 


taverne 


tavern 


argon 


saddle-bow 


cabaret 


public-house 


sangle 


girth 


auberge 


inn 


etriers pi. 


stirrup 


cafe 


coffee-house 


eperons pi. 


spurs 


enseigne 


sign 


berline 


berlin 


affiche 


bill 


cabriolet 


gig 


pont 


bridge 


chaise 


chaise 


arche 


arch 


nacre m. 


hackney-coa 


pilier 


pillar 


charrette 


cart 


bateau 


boat 


fourgon 


waggon 


quai 


key, on a river 


remise 


coach house 


bourse 


exchange 


rasoir 


razor 


banque 


bank 


cuir 


strap 


agiotage m. 


stock-jobbing 


moule 


mould 


douane 


custom-house 


machine 


machine 


poste 


general post 


moulin 


mill 


petite-poste 


twopenny post 






OF 


TRADES, ARTS 


!, PROFESSION, 


&C. 


boul anger 


baker 


relieur 


book-binder 


perruquier 
iorgerou 


hair-dresser 


libra ire m. 


bookseller 


blacksmith 


chaudronnier 


brazier 



brasseur 

boucher 

^beniste 

charpentier 

charron 

sculpteur 

chimiste 

horloger 

confiseur 

carrossier 

tonnelier 

corroyeur 

coutelier 

fourbisseur 

teinturier 

distillateur 

droguiste 

graveur 

marechal 

poissonnier 

iondeur 

fruitier 

fniirreur 

jarJinier 

do rem* 

verrier 

viuier 

gantier 

orfevre 

joaillier 

bijou tier 

epicier 

armurier 

chapelier 

aabei \ 

menuisier 



VOCABULARY. 


( 


brewer 


serrarier 


locksmith 


butcher 


mac, on 


bricklayer 


cabinet-maker 


maitre d'hotel 


steward 


carpenter 


rnercier 


mercer 


wheel-wrighl 


meunier 


miller 


carver 


peintre 


painter 


chymist 


patissier 


pastry-cook 


clock-maker 


paveur 


pavtour 


confectioner 


colporteur 


pei*ar 


coach-maker 


parfumeur 


perfumer 


cooper 


medecin 


physician 


turrier 


platrier 


•plasterer 


cutler 


piombier 


plumber 


sword-cutler 


potier 


poller 


dyer 


imprimeur 


printer 


distiller 


sellier 


saddler 


druggist 


lingere 


sempstress 


engraver 


couturiere 


mantua-make. 


farrier 


tailleur 


tailor 


fishmonger 


cordon nier 


shoe-maker 


founder 


pelletier 


skinner 


fruiterer 


forgeron 


sm ith 


furrier 


chirurgien 


surgeon 


gardener 


apothicaire 


apothecary 


gilder 


arpenteur 


surveyor 


glass-maker 


tanneur 


tanner 


glazitr 


- tourneur 


turner 


giover 


entrepreneur 


undertaker 


goldsmith 


tapissier 


upholsterer 


> jeweller 


horloger 
tisserand 


watch-maker 
wearer 


grocer 


perruquier 


wig-maker 


armourer 


ouvrage 


work 


halter 


ouvrier 


work-man 


innkeeper 


ouvriere 


work-uoman 


joiner 


manoeuvre 


labourer 



61 



OF THE COUNTRY, HUSBANDRY, FLOWERS, TREES, &C. 



campagne 


country 


hameau 


hamlet 


chemin 


way 


enclos 


close 


sentier 


foot -way 


chateau 


castle 


bone 


mud 


terre 


estate 


fange 


mire 


cour 


yard 


pou«siore 


dust 


basse-cour 


poultry-yard 


bo ur nier 


slough 


colombier 


pigeon-house 


oruiere 


cart-rut 


laiterie 


dairy 



vz 


VOCABULARY. 




e'curie 


stable 


jardin 


garden 


fruiterie 


fruit-loft 


jardinagc m. 


gardening 




OF HERBS 


AND PLANTS. 




aloes 


aloe 


moutarde 


mustard 


angelique 


angelica 


capucina 


nasturtium 


artichaut 


artichoke 


optie 


nettle 


asperge 


asparagus 


oignon 


onion 


melisse 


balm 


persil 


parsley 


basilic 


basil 


panais 


parsnip 


feve 


bean 


pois 


peas 


haricot 


french-bean 


partetaire 


pellitory 


poiree 


beet 


plante 


plant 


betterave 


beet-root 


plantain 


plantain 


boarrache 


borage 


pavot 


poppy 


bardane 


burdock 


pomme-de-terrepo/a/oe 


primprenelle 


burnet 


courge 


pumpkin 


chou 


cabbage 


pourpier 


pur slain 


carotte 


carrot 


rave 


radish 


celeri 


celery 


radis 


Spanish radish 


cerfeuil 


chervil 


roseau 


reed 


choux-neurs/)Z 


. cauliflowers 


rue 


rue 


maches pi. 


corn-sal lad 


jonc 


rush 


cresson 


cresses 


rhubarbe 


rhubarb 


concombre m. 


cucumber 


safran 


saffron 


dent-de-lion 


dandelion 


sauge 


sage 


patience 


dock 


sarette 


sav-ery 


chicoree 


endive 


ciboule 


scallion 


fenodil 


fe?ine I 


echalote 


shallot 


fougei>e 


fern 


oseille 


sorrel 


ail 


garlic 


veponique 


speedwell 


calebasse 


gourd 


epinards pi. 


spinage 


eigne 


hemlock 


tanaisie 


tansy 


her be 


herb 


ivraie 


tare 


raifopt 


horse-radish 


estragon 


stragon 


joubarbe 


house-leek 


chardon 


thistle 


Herre m. 


ivy 


thym 


thyme 


poireau 


leek 


s*rpolet 


wild thyme 


la-Hue 


lettuce 


tretle m. 


trefoil 


reglisse 


licorice 


navet 


turnip 


mauve 


mallows 


Valeriana 


valerian 


guimauve 


marsh-mallows 


vegetauxp/. 


vegetables 


m.iijc laine 
rtseda 


marjoram 

mignonette 


legumes rn.pl. 


{ vegetables, 
\ greens 


menthe 


mint 


verveine 


vervain 


gui 


misleloe 


absynthe 


wormus \)d 


mousse 


moss 


raille-feuille 


yarrow 



VOCABULARY. 



63 



FLOWERS. 



fleuriste 
parterre 
fl em- 
iris 

prim eve re 
narcisse m. 
jacinthe 
tulipe 
violette 
pens^e 
marguerite 
imperiale 
martagon 
lis 

muguet 
oreille-d'ours 
anemone 
renoncule 
jonquille 
giroflee 
oeillet 
campanule 
gantel6e 
rose 
jasmin 
tubereuse 



florist 

flower garden 

flower 

crocus 

cowslip 

narcisms 

hyacinth 

tulip 

violet 

pansy 

daisy 

turk's cap 

mountain-lily 

my 

may-lily 

auricula 

anemone 

ranunculus 

jonquil 

stock- gilli flower 

pink 

> bell flower 

rose 

jasmine 

tuberose 



chevre-feuille ^ honty . mckit 

seringa 

lilac 

marigold 

amaranth 

poppy 

wild-poppy 

blue-bell 
sun-floicer 
camomile 
C great night- 
I chade 

cassidony 

balsam 

columbine 

hollyhock 

hepatica 

lark-spur 

piony 

scabious 

rocket 

bed 

flower-border 



Ml. 

seringat 

lilas 

souci 

amaranthe 

pavot 

coquelicot 

ponceau 

bluet, barbeau 

tournesol 

camomille 

belle-de-nuit 

eternelle 

immortelle 

balsamine 

ancolie 

passe-rose 

bepatique 

pied-d'alouette 

pivoine 

scabieuse 

julienne 

planche 

plate-bande 



OF TREES AND SHRUBS. 



arbre nu 


tret 


*eau 


shrub 


^corce 


bark 


branche 


branch 


feuille 


leaf 


graine 


ited 


rejeton 


sucker 


abricotier 


apricot-tree 


cerisier 


cherry-tree 


chataignier 


chesnut-tree 


citronnier 


lemon-tree 


coignassier 


quince-tree 


figuier 


Jig-tree 


noyer 


walnut-tree 


oranger 


orange-tree 


pGcber 


peach-tree 



pommier 

poirier 

prunier 

arbousier 

fr£ne 

tremble 

hetre 

bouleau 

buis 

genet 

sureau 

orme 

sapin 

coudrier 

houx 

lilas 

7 



apple-tree 

pear-tree 

plumb-tree 

arbutus 

ash-tree 

aspen 

beech-tree 

birch-tree 

box 

broom 

elder-tree 

elm 

fir-tree 

hazel4ru 

holly 

lilac 



64 



VOCABULARY. 



UUeul 
myrte 

chene 
Osier 
romarin 
fglantier 



lime-tree 

myrtle-tree 

oak 

osier 

rosemary 

sweet briar 



£pine 

buisson 

aub^pine 

vigne 

saule 

if 



thorn 

thorn-bush 

white-thom 

vine 

willow-tree 

yew-tree 



amands 
porarae 
abricot 
cerise 

guigne 

chataigne 
marron 
groseilles pi, 

froseille 
gae 
aveline 
raisin 
prune 

reine-claude 
citron 
ananas 
nefle 



FIIUITS. 




almond 


melon 


melon 


apple 


mure 


mulberry 


apricot 


bru^non 


nectarine 


cherry 


noisette 


nut 


C black-heart 
I cherry 


orange 


orange 


peche 


peach 


chcsnut 


poire 


pear 


horse chesnut 


citrouille 


pumpion 


currants 


coin 


quince 


gooseberry 


framboise 


rasberry 


# 


fraise 


strawberry 


filbert 


noix 


walnut 


grapes 


epine-vinerte 


barberries 


plum 


grenade 


pomegranate 


green-gage 


olive 


olive 


lemon 




C kernels of 
I walnuU 


pine-apple 


cerneaux 


medlar 


raisins-secs 


raisins 



PROMISCUOUS WORDS. 



grange 

hutte 

chaumiere 

seigneurie 

dime 

metairie 

sill on 

pr£, prairie 

arpent 

fosse 

champ 

paturage m. 

terroir 

Earc 
aie 
bruyere 
dunes 
laade 



barn 

hut 

thatched- house 

manor 

tithe 

farm 

ridge 

meadow 

acre 

ditch 

field 

pasture-ground 

soil 

park 

hedge 

heath 

downs 

toast e-land 



commune 

plaine 

garenne 

fondriere 

marais 

plate-bande 

serre 

serre-chaude 

boulingrin 

berceau 

bosquet 

grotte 

vignobie iH. 

pepiniere 

taillis 

hallier 

paysage m. 

perspective 



common 

plain 

warren 

bog 

marsh 

border 

green-house 

hot-house 

bowling-green 

bower 

grove 

grotto 

vineyard 

nursery 

coppice 

thicket 

landscape 

prospect 





VOCABULARY. 


6 


me 


view 


millet 


millet 


cascade 


cascade 


lin 


flax 


canal 


canal 


chanvre m. 


hemp 


agriculture 


agriculture 


chenevis 


hemp-seed 


labourage m. 


tillage 


epi 


ear (of corn) 


betail 


cattle 


gerbe 


sheaf (of corn) 


fumier 


dung 


tige 


stalk 


terreau 


mould 


tuyau 


blade 


r^colte 


crop 


paille 


straw 


moisson 


harvest 


chaume w. 


stubble 


vendange 


vintage 


foin 


hay 


houblon 


hops 


fourrage m. 


fodder 


grain 


corn 


fermier 


farmer 


bl£ 


wheat 


paysan 


peasant 


orge 


barley 


laboureur 


ploughman 


avoine 


oats 


moissonneur 


reaper 


riz 


rice 


faucheur 


mower , 


seigle m. 


rye 


berger 


shepherd 



65 



OF QUADRUPEDS. 



tame beast 



bete beast 

animal animal 

animal domes- 

tique 
bete-de-somme beast of burden 

f beast for the 

I saddle 

horse 

mare 

mare 

stallion 

coil 



monture 



cheval 

oavate 

jument 

6 talon 

poulain 

pouliche 

bidet 

ane 

anesse 

anon 

mulet 

mule 

bete-a-cc 

bflBUf 

buffle 7/i. 

taureau 

vache 

g£nissc 

reau 



My 

poney 

ass 

milk- ass 

young ass 

mule 

she-mule 

homed beast 

ox 

buffalo 

bull 

cow 

heifer 



heifei 
calf 



bouvillon 

renne m. 

brebis 

mouton 

b^Iier 

agneau 

chevre 

bouc 

chevreau 

cocbon 

pore 

pourceau 

truie 

cochon-de-lait 

cochon-d'inde 

verrat 

sanglier 

laie 

marcassin 

bete-fauve 

cerf 

biche 

faon 

daim 

daim-male 

daim-femelle 



bullock 
rein-deer 
ewe 
wether 
ram 
lamb 
she-goat 
he-goat 
hid 
hog 
Pig 
P*g 
sow 

sucking pig 
guinea pig 
boar 

wild boar 
wild sow 
young wild bottr 
deer 
stag 
hind 
fawn 

fallow-deer 
buck 
doe 



66 



VOCABULARY. 



chevreuil 

chevrette 

cbamois 

lion 

lionne 

lionceau 

tigre 

tigresse 

ours 

ours on 

zebre m 

giraffe 

leopard 

cameleopard 

rhinoceros 

hippopotame m. 

Elephant 

chameau 

dromadaire m, 

lama 

buffle m. 

hyene 

panthere 

once 

licorne 

elan 

lo-jp 

louve 

louveteau 

lynx 

renard 

laisson 

blaireau 

castor 

hemiine 

marte, zibeline 

£cureuil 

lierisson 

pore-epic 

loutre 

raton 

furet 

lievre 

'hase 

levraut 

kipin 

lapine 

chien 

chienne 



roe-buck 

roe 

chamois 

lion 

lioness 

lion's whelp 

tiger 

tigress 

bear 

bear's cub 

zebra 

giraffa 

leopard 

camelopard 

rhinoceros 

river-horse 

elephant 

camel 

dromedary 

lama 

buffalo 

hyena 

panther 

ounce 

unicorn 

elk 

wolf 

slie-wolf 

wolf's cub 

lynx 

fox 

brock 

badger 

beaver 

ermine 

marten- sable 

h'edge-hog 

porcupine 

otter 

rackoon 

ferrei 

hare 

doe-hare 

leveret 

rabbit 

doe-rabbit 

dog 

bitch 



lice 
le>rier 
levrette 
dogue 
doguin 
matin 
limier 
bichon 
epagneul 
basset 
barbet 

chien-d'arret 
meute de 
chiens 
chat, matou 
chatte 
chaton 
minon 

minet, minette 
singe m. 
guenon 
magot, babouin baboon 



hound-bitch 

greyhound 

greyhound bitch 

bull dog 

whelp 

mastiff 

blood-hound 

lap-dog 

spaniel 

terrier 

shagged-dag 

pointer 

I pack of hounds 

cat, tom-cat 

cat, puss 

kitten 

puss 

young kitten 

monkey 

ape 



gazelle 

belette 

poutois 

fouine 

genette 

muse 

loir 

marmote 

taupe 

rat 

souris 

tortue 



antelope 

weasel 

polecat 

pole-cat 

wild cat 

musk-oat 

dormouse 

marmot 

mole 

rat 

mouse 

tortoist 



betail, bestiaux cattle 
troupeau flock, herd 

patre, berger shepherd 
bergere shepherdess 

vaclier, bouvier cow-herd 
porcher swine-herd 

chasse hunting 

chasseur hunter 

braconnier poacher 

gibier, venaison gams 
fusil gun 

gibeeiere pouch 

tire shooting 

tireur shooter 

garde -chasse gamekeeper 



VOCABULARY. 



67 



OF BIRDS. 



oweaa bird 

oiselet, oisillon little bird 



volaille 

coq 

poule 

poalet 

pouss^n 

cochet 

poularde 

chapon 

coq-d'Iiide, 
din don 

dinde 

dindonneau 

oie 

jar 

oison 

canard 

cane 

caneton, ca- 
nette 

pigeon 

colombe 
serin, canari 

perroquet 

perruche 

moineau, 

passceau 
hirondelle 
martinet 
rossigncl 
chardonneret 
pinson 
verdier 
bouvreuil 
linot, linote 
rouge-gorge tn. 
merle m. 
grive 
geai 
pie 

alouette 
bergeronnette 
alcyon, ou mar- 

tin-pe*cheur 
pivert 



fowl 

cock 

hen 

chicken 

young chicken 

cockerel 

pullet 

capon 

> turkey-cock 

turkey-hen 

young turkey 

goose 

gander 

gosling 

drake 

duck 

> duckling 

pigeon 
dove 

canary bird 
parrot 
paroquet 



> sparrow 

swallow 

mart in 

nightingale 

goldfinch 

chaffinch 

greenfinch 

bullfinch 

linnet 

redbreast, 

blackbird 

thrush 

magpie 

lark 

wagtail 

( kingfisher 

woodnecker 



robin 



mesange 

pluvier 

roitelet 

vanneau 

butor 

bec-figue r». 

£tourneau 

sansonnet 

bruant 

coucou 

freux, grolle 

corbeau 

corneille 

hibou 

chouette 

buse 

choucas 

aigle 

aiglon 

£pervier 

emouchet 

milan 

faucon 

cormoran 

plongeon 

heron 

cigogne 

outarde 

pelican 

autour 

vautour 

griffon 

huppe 

mouette 

perdrix 

bartavelle 

perdreau 

caille 

cailleteau 

faisan 

faisandeau 

b^casse 

b^cassine 

ortolan 

tourtereHe 

7* 



tit 

plover 

wren 

lapwing 

bittern 

beccafico 

starling 

starling 

yellow-hammer 

cuckoo 

rook 

raven 

crow 

owl 

screech-owl 

buzzard 

chough 

eagle 

eaglet 

sparrow-hawk 

musket-hawk 

kite 

falcon 

cormorant 

diver 

heron 

stork 

buskard 

pelican 

gos-hawh 

vulture 

griffin 

lapwing 

partridge 
? large red par- 
5 tridge 

young partridge 

quail 

young quail 

pheasant 

young pheasant 

woodcock 

snipe 

ortolan 

turtle-dove 



68 


VOCABULARY. 




ge*linotte 
francoHn 


wood-hen 


autruche 


ostrich 


heath-cock 


pintade 


pintado 


ramier 


wood-pigeon 


fou-de-bassan 


gannet 


macreuse 


sea-duck 


pingoin 


razor-bill 


sarcelle 


teal 


chauvre-souris 


bat 


grue 
courlis 


crane 
curlew 


chasse-aux- 
oiseaux 


> fowling 


foulque 


> cooti moorcock, 


appeau 


bird-call 


I or hen 


gluaux 


Ixmt twigs 


poule-d'eau 


moor-hen 


trebucbet 


birdrtrap 


paon 


peacock 


filets 


nets 


paonne 


pea-hen 


o-iseleur 


bird-catcher 


paonneau 


young peacock 


oiselier 


bird-sell* 


eigne m. 


swan 


voliere 


aviary 




OF FISHES, 




poisson 


fish 


homard, lan- 


\ lobster 


esturgeon 


sturgeon 


gouste 


turbot 


turbot 


ecrevisse-de- 


saumon 


salmon 


mer 


rouget 


roach 


ecrevisse 


crawfish 


brochet 


pike 


crabe m. 


crab 


carpe 


carp 


crevette 


prawn 


truite 


trout 


chevrette 


shrimp 


perche 


perch 


anguille 


eel 


cabillaud 


fresh cod 


anchois 


anchovy 


morue 


stockfish 


goujon 


gudgeon 


raie 


skate 


veron 


minnvw 


tanche 


tench 


lotte, barbottc 


\ eel-pout 


eperlan 


smelt 


loche 


( loach, groundt 


maquereau 


mackerel 


\ ting 


surmulet 


mullet 


morue salee 


salt-fish 


carrelet 


flounder 


barbue 


dab 


barbeau 
alose 


barbel 
shad 


marsoin 


S sea-hog, por 
\ poise 


sole 


sole 


espadon 


sawfish 


sardine 


sprat 


r ircelaine 


sea-snail 


thon 


tunny 


tortue 


tortoise 


plie 


plaice 


huitre 


oyster 


congre m. 


conger 


petoncle 


cockle 


merlan 


whiting 


moule 


muscle 


merluche 


haddock 


baleine 


xchale 


hareng 


herring 


cachalot 


cachalot 


seche 


cuttle Jish 
burt, hretfish 


requin 


shark 


liraande 


dauphin 


dolphin 


lamproie 


lamprey 


chien-raarin 


sea-dog 



VOCABULARY. 



69 



loup-marm 
herisson-de- 

mer 
frai 
fMtin 
laite 

CEufs 

maseau 
ouies 



sea-wolf 
sea-urchin 

fry 

young fish 

soft roe 
j spawn, hard 
I roe 

snout 

gills 



nageoires 
ecailles 



fint 
scales 
c o quill es shells 

arrites bones 

pinces, braques claws 
appat, amorce bait 
pecheur fisherman 

peche fishery 

peche a-la- > ,. 
ligne I angling 





OF REPTILES AND INSECTS 




grenouille 


f r og 


pou 


louse 


serpent 


serpent 


lente 


nit 


couleuvre 


adder 


puce 


flea 


vipere 


viper 


punaise 


bug 


scorpion 


scorpion 


chenille 


caterpillar 


spic 


aspic k 


papillon 


butterfly 


basilic 


basilisk 


mouche 


fly 


dragon 


dragon 


abeille 


bee 


tarentule 


tarantula 


frelon 


hornet 


crapaud 


toad 


bourdon 


drone 


lizard 


lizard 


guepe 


wasp 


sang-sue 


leech 


taon 


°xfly 


limace 


slug 


cousin 


gnat 


ver 


worm 


cantharide 


Sp&nish-fly 


ver-luisant 


glow-worm 


hanneton 


cockchafer 


ver-coq«in 


tine- grub 


sauterelle 


grasshopper 


ver-i-soie 


silk- worm 


cigale 


balm-cricket 


escargot 


snail 


araign£e 


spider 


escarbot 
grillon 


beetle 

cricket 


toile-d'araig- 
nee 


i cobweb 


perce-oreill< 
teigue 


i m. ear-wig 
moth 


essaim-d'a- 
beilles 


I swarm of bee 


ciron 


hand- worm 


mlel 


honey 


fourrai 


ant 


cire 


wax 


cbarancon 


weevil 


rayon-de-raiel 


honeycomb 


cloporte m. 


wood-louse 


ruche 


hive 


tique 


tick 


fourmiliere 


ant-hill 



or 

argent 



gold 
silver 



OF METALS, &C. 

platine 
vermeil 



platina 
silver-gilt 



70 

cuivre 

air am 

laiton 

bronze 

slmilor 

fer 

fil-d'archal 

acier 

fer-blanc 

etain 

plonib 

mercure 

vif-argent 



VOCABULARY. 



copper 

brass 

laU en-wire 

b reuse 

pinchbeck 

iron 

wire 

steel 

iron-tinned 

tin, pewter 

lead 

mercury 

quicksilver 



soufre 

nitre 

saltpetre 

bitume 

antimoine 

arsenic 

alum 

couperose/. 

vitriol 

carmin 

pastel 

ocref. 

vermillion 



sulphur 

nitre 

saltpetre 

bitumen 

antimony 

arsenic 

alum 

copperas 

vitriol 

carmine 

pastel 

ochre 

red-lead 



blanc 

noir 

bleu 

vert 

gris 

orange 



diamant 

topaze 

6meraude 

saphir 

escarboucle 

rubis 



OF COLOURS. 


white 


rouge 


black 


iaune 


blue 


brun 


green 


pourpre 


grey 


e carl ate 


orange colour 


indigo 


OF PRECIOUS STONE! 


diamond 


amethyste 


topaz 


comaline 


emerald 


onyx 


sapphire 


agathe 


carbuncle 


corail 


ruby 


perle 



red 

yellow 

brown 

purple 

scarlet 

indigo 



amethyst 

cornelian 

onyx 

agate 

coral 

pearl 



OF THE PRINCIPAL COUNTRIES. 



France 

Italie 

Espagne 

Portugal 

Turquie 

Allemagne 

Suisse 

Prusse 

Pologne 

Boheme 

Hongrie 



France 

Italy 

Spain 

Portugal 

Turkey 

Germany 

Switzerland 

Prussia 

Poland 

Bohemia 

Hungary 



Hollande 

les Pays-Bas 

Angleterre 

Ecosse 

Irlande 

Russie 

Dan em arc 

Suede 

Norvdge 

Tartarie 

Arabie 



Holland 

the Netherlands 

England 

Scotland 

Ireland 

Russia 

Denmark 

Sweden 

Norway 

Tartary 

Arabia 



Perse 

Inde 

Chine 

Mogol 

Ben gale 

Malabar 

Japon 

Barbarie 

Egypte 

Biledulgerid 

Zaara 

Nigritie 

Guinee 

Etbiopie 

Zanguebar 

Monomotapa 



VUUi 

Persia 


Mono6mugi 


Monoemugi 


India 


Caffrerie 


Caffraria 


China 


Abyssinie 


Abyssinia 


Mogul 


Canada 


Canada 


Bengal 
Malabar 


Pensylvanie 


Pennsylvania 


Maryland 


Maryland 


Japan 


Virginie 


Virginia 


Barbary 


Caroline 


Carolina 


Egypt 


Georgie 


Georgia 


Biledulgerid 


Perou 


Peru 


Zaars, 


Paraguay 


Paraguay 


Nigritia 


Chili 


Chili 


Guinea 


Bresil 


Brazil 


Ethiopia 


Guiane 


Guiana 


Zanguebar 


St. Domingue 


St. Domingo 


Monomotapa 


Jama'ique 


Jamaica 



71 



INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES 



The learner is to render the English definite article 

!le before a noun masculine ^ 

la before a noun feminine I in the singu- 

V before a noun masculine or feminine [ lar. 
begining with a vowel or h mute J 
I Us before nouns of either gender in the plural and the 
^ indefinite. 
, ( un before a noun masculine singular. 



the by 



une before a noun feminiue singular. 
EXAMPLES. 



the plants 
a man 
a worrxin 
a hero. 



Le livre the ho ok Its nlnntes 

la rue the street un hommo 

Tame the soul une fenirae 

Pbistoire the history un heros 

EXERCISES. 

The wood ; the forest ; the houses ; the men ; the court ; 

hois m. fortit f. maisons pi. lunnmes pi. our f. 

the foot ; the arms ; the room ; the garden ; the windows ; 

pied in. bras pi. chambre f. jardin m. fenitresp]. 

a history ; a novel ; a foreigner ; a walk ; a day ; 

histoircL roman m. Hr anger m. promenade f. jour m. 

a night ; the sun ; the moon ; tlie stars ; a body ; a card ; 

■Ml f. soleil m. liuie f. ttoiles pi. corps m. carte L 

a crown. 

6cu m. 

He will render the English prepositions 
of and/rcwi by de * 
by d 



[and when followed by the article, thus: 



72* 



INTRODUCTION 



u S a 1 

toah Y\cii 



' du before a noun masculine singular beginning witii 
i a consonant or h aspirated 

of the by < de la before a noun feminine singular 

) de V before any noun beginning with a vowel or h mute 
k des before any noun in the plural. 
" au before a noun masculine singular beginning with 
% a consonant or h aspirated 

to the by 2 a la before a noun feminine singular 

J a V before any noun beginning with a vowel or h mute 
\ aux before any noun in the plural. 
And when "these prepositions are followed by a or an, thus : 
* -U $ rf'Mn before a noun masculine 
°J a 7 J d*une before a noun feminine 
a un before a noun masculine 
i une before a noun feminine. 

EXAMPLES. 

Du pare of the park a l'esprit to the mind 

de la riviere of the river aux carrosses to the coaches 

de l'esprit of the mind d'un jour of a day 

des carrosses of the coaches d'une nuit of a night 

au pare to the park a un jour to a day 

a la riviere to the river a une nuit to a night 

EXERCISES. 
The palace of the king ; of the queen ; of the man ; of the 

palais m. roi m. reine f. homme h m. 

men ; to the king ; to the queen ; to the man ; to the men ; 
hemmes pi. 

from a balcony ; from a window ; of a prince ; to a princess ; 

balcon m. fenetre f. — m. princesse f. 

of the gardens ; of the evening ; to the courtiers ; of a table ; to 

jardins pi. soir m. courtisans pi. f. 

the master ; to a lady ; of the soul ; of the horse ; to a cat ; 

maiire m. damef. dme f. cheval m. chat m. 

of the houses ; of a carpet. 
maisons pi. tapis m. 

These same prepositions, when followed by the possessive pro- 
nouns, my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, and their, will be both ren 
dered thus : 



Smy a 

thy I 

his, her, or xts I 

your \ 

their J 



their 
• my 
, thy 

I his, her, its 
i our 
' your 

their 



by de 



by d 



Ingular 
in. 


plural 
f. m. axd i. 


mon 
ton 


ma 
ta 


me* 
tes 


son 
notre 
votre 
leur 


sa 

notre 
votre 
leur 


ses 

nos 
vos 
leurs 


mon 
ton 


ma 
ta 


mes 
tes 


son 

notre 

votre 

leur 


sa 

notre 
votre 
leur 


tes 

net 

vos 
leurs 



TO THE EXERCISES. 



73* 



and likewise, when followed by the demonstrative this or that, 

these or those : 

{ ce before a noun masculine beginning 

r*L- ,l * v. a* \ with a consonant or /i aspirated 

of this or that, by de i ^^ & Qoun u beginning 

to ihu or that, by a \ with a vowel or A mute 

V cette before a noun feminine 
of these or those, by de ces > before ^ f ei h d 

fo these or Mo.se, by a c« J ■ & 

EXAMPLES. 

de mon pere of my father a leur travail to their work 

a ta mere to thy mother de cette terrasse from this terrace 

de son frere of his brother de ce lieu of that place 

dfe notre ville of our town de cette homme of this man 

k votre maison to your house de ces arbres of these trees 

EXERCISES. 

Of my clothes' ©/ f/u/ handkerchief ; of his pocket: of your 
habits pi. mouchoir m. 2?oc/ie f. 

letters; of our treasure; to their house; of this steeple; of that 
letters pi. trisor m. maisoni. clocher m. 

hero ; of this tower; of these models ; 0/ my sister; To 

Aero* m A asp. /our f. modtles pi. sceur f. 

your relations ; the top of this mountain ; to my friend ; 
parens pi. sommet m. moniagne f. ami m. 

of thine pleasures; of our duties; to their connexions ; of 

plaisirs pi. devoirs pi. liaisons pi. 

fcw acquaintances ; to my neighbours. 
connaissances pi. voisins pi. 

The Apostrophe (') marks, we have said, page 3, the 
suppression of a vowel before another vowel, or h mute, 
as in Peglise for /a eglise, &c. 

This suppression is called elision ; a, e, i t are the 
only vowels liable to be thus cut off, and even of the 
suppression of the last of these, only two instances oc- 
cur, viz. in the conjunction si before the pronoun, singu- 
lar and plural, il, ils. 

The a is suppressed only in la feminine, both when an 
article and a pronoun. 

But the elision of e occurs, not only in the mas- 
culine article and pronoun /e, but also in many other 
monosyllables, such as je, me, te, se, de, ce, ne, que. 



72 



INTRODUCTION. 



and in the compound of que, such as, parceque^quoiquey 
puisque, jusque, vu que, &c. 



EXAMPLES. 



ia 

la 
It 
It 

je 

me 

tt 



It 
la 
ce 
de 
nt 



j qut 

si 



SI 

parceque 

quoique 

puisque 

jusque 

vu que 

desque 

quelque 



ramitie* 

1'herbe 

l'oiseau 

l'honneur 

j'ai 

il m'oublie 

je t'aime 

il s'habille 

vous l'aidez 
vous l'obligez 
c'est \Tai 
un coup-d'oeil 
n'oubliez pas 
' qu'attendez 

vous ? 
s'il arrivait 
s'ilspouvaient 

parceqirilfaut 

quoiqu'il fasse 

£ puisqu'on 
\ vous dit 
( jusqu' a de- 
l main 

£ vu qu'il ob- 
\ tiendra 
i desqu'on 
I saura 
J quelqu'un 
( vient 



for* 



'la auntie" 
la herbe 
le oiseau 
\e honneur 
je ai 

il me oublie 
je te aime 

il se habille 

vous le aidez 
vous la obligez 
ce est vrai 
un coup de ceil 
ne oubliez pas 
que attendez " 
vous? 

si il arrivait 
si ils pouvaient 
parceque il 
faut 

quoique il 
fasse 

puisque on 
vous dit 
jusque a de- 
main 
vu que il 
obtiendra 
desque on 
saura 

quelque un 
vient 



the friendship 
the grass 
the bird 
the honour 
I have 

he forgets me 
I love thee 
j he dresses 
I himself 
you help him 
you oblige her 
it is true 
a glance 
do not forget 
what do you 

expect ? 
if it happened 
if they could 
because it is 

requisite 
whatever he 

may do 
since they tell 

you 

till to-morrow 

since he will 

obtain 
as soon as il 
will be known 
somebody 

comes 



It is allowable either to retrench, or to retain the final 
e of the preposition entre, between, among, when it is 
placed before the pronouns ewrr, elles, and autres ; but 
it is always rescinded in the following compound words : 



Entr'acte 
«'entr'aider 
entr'ouir 
entr'ouvrir 



an interlude 
to help one another 
to hear imperfectly 
to half open 



>for 



entre-acte 
I se entre-aider 
i entre-ouir 



{ entre-ouvTir 
and in a few others ; but it is indifferent to. say : 



TO THE EXERCISES. 



73 



entre eux 

entre elles 

entre autres choses 



entr'eux between them 

entr'elles between them 

entr'autres choses among other things 



EXERCISE. 

The soul ; the heroine ; the mind ; he loves him ; she 
time f. heroine f. esprit m. il dime 2 le 1 : elh 

loves her ; I love this man ; you do not understand 

2 /al; je aime homme m. vous * ne'entendez 2 pas 3 
me ; he esteems thee ; he goes away ; it was the golden age ; 
me \ : il estime 2 te 1 ; se en-va ce Hail de or 2 age 1 ■; 

do not go there ; if he comes: if they please : what has he 
* ne allez pas la ; si vienl ; Us veulent ; que a-t-il 

said 1 till night ; though he says ; since he knows 

dit ? jusque au soir m. quoique dise ; puisque- sail ; 

f.-hen he saw : between them ; somebody is come. 
lorsque vit ; entre eux; quelque un est vcnu. 

N. B. In the following French negative modes of 
speech, which answer to the accompanying English 
translation, the caret points out the place which the 
French verb must occupy, whenever it is not in the in- 
finitive mood. 



ne 
ne' 



pas 
point 



ne 
ne 



Net 

ntvtr 
nothing 

nobody 



not a jot ne * goutte 
niille 



■no where 



ne 



f je ne suis pas, &c. lam not, &c. 

nous n'avons } . , 

. . > we nave not 

point ^ 

jamais il ne joue jamais he never plays 

rien vous ne dites } ., . 

rien • 5 you sa V nothm S 

ne'personne j.as ^ je ne vox* per- I j see nobod 
sonne 5 

CI do not see, or 
je ne vois goutte < / see not in tke 

( least 
je neraisnulle > r . , 

part j I part \I go nowise 

But in compound tenses, it is the auxiliary verb that 
parts the negative ne from the pas, or point, &c. that 
accompany it, as nous tfavons point parle, we have not 
spoken ; on tfaurail jamais cru, one could never have be- 
lieved. 

N. B. The addition of pas, or point, to the negative particle n& 
must not be considered as a second negation : but only as a com- 
plementary part of it. For in such cases, pas, point, goutte, ate 
mere restrictive terms, nearly resembling the English words, jp^ 
bit, tittle, sometimes added to not, with this difference, that pa$ 
and point in French have nothing trivial in them. 



74 



INTRODUCTION 



EXERCISE. 

I do not say , I have not said ; I have never seen ; I nevei 

* dis ai (lit ai vu 

(tell a falsehood) ; I do nothing ) I have done nothing ; is he 

mens fais fait est-il 

not arrived ? does not he come ? I see nothing ; has he never seen ? 

arrive * 2 vient 1 vols a-t- vu 

he never loses his time ; that (is worth) nothing ; I met nobody. 
perd temps m. ccla vaut rencontrai 

There are many words which are alike in both lan- 
guages, and others which differ only in their termina- 
tion. 

The expressions, which are perfectly arfike, are par- 
ticalarly those that have the following terminations : 

S animal, cardinal, fatal, general, local, moral, natal, 
original, principal, fee. 
< capable, fable, he. bible, eligible, he. noble, double, 
( soluble, insoluble, &,c. 

{ face, grimace, grace, place, preface, race surface, 
( trace, he. 

chance, complaisance, extravagance, ignorance, 
lance, temperance, &c. 
( abstinence, conference, continence, diligence, elo- 
( quence, patience, he. 

( artifice, auspices, edifice, justice, injustice, office, 
I orifice, precipice, solstice, he. 

miracle, oracle, obstacle, receptacle, tabernack, 
spectacle, he. 
i ambuscade, cavalcade, brigade, esplanade, sere- 
( nade, retrograde, he. 

i age, adage, bandage, cage, cordage, image, page, 
I plumage, rage, he. 

i college, privilege, sacrilege, siege, sortilege, 
{ &c. 

( vestige, doge, barge, charge, orange, forge, rouge, 
( refuge, deluge, &c. 

S globule, ridicule, animalcule, corpuscule, formule, 
module, mule, pustule, valvule, he. 
i bile, d6bile, agile, docile, ductile, facile, fragile, 
I nubile, reptile, versatile, he. 
c carabine, fascine, doctrine, heroine, machine, ma- 
l rine, famine, mine, rapine, &c. 
i action, fraction, legion, nation, opinion, passion, 
I question, religion, Sic. 



-al 
-ble 
-ace 
-ance 
ence 
-Ice 
-acle 
-ade 
-age 
-ege 

-£ e 

-ule 

-fle 

4ne 

fon 


as 




1 










TO THE EXERCISES. 



75 



-ant 



-ent 



arrogant, constant, elegant, elephant, petulant, 

piquant, poignant, vigHant, &c. 
absent, accident, compliment, augment, content, 

Element, frequent, serpent, &c. 



Many other English words require only the change 
of termination, in the following manner : 



•gy 

-ary 
-ory 

-<</ 

-ous 

-cur 

-or 

-ine 

-ive 

-ry 
•dy 



into 



-aire 

-oire 

-ce 

-te 

-eux 

-eur 

-eur 

-in 

-if 

-rie 

-die 



N. B. Adjectives in- 



energy 

— military 

— glory 

— clemency 

— beauty 

— dangerous 

— favour 

— error 

— clandestine 

— expressive 

— fury 
perfidy 



-eux i 
-in ) 



energie 

militaire 

gloire 

clemence 

beaute* 

dangereux 

faveur 

erreur 

clande3tin 

expressif 

furie 

perfidie 



make their feminine in 




EXERCISE. 



the horror of vice ; the utility 

f. f. h. m. art. m. f. 

the atrocity of this action ; the violence of his 
f. f. f. 

the simplicity of that machine ; an audacious 

t f. 2. 

the absurdity of that opinion ; the military 

f. f. pi. 2 

an industrious nation ; an important victory ; an 
2 f. 1. 2 f. 1 

a dangerous animal ; a figurative 

2 m. 1 2 

his constant generosity, he Is 
m. 2 f. 1 il tsj 

his imprudence is visible ; his fidelity 
50 n f. 

is indubitable ; she is very attentive ; your clemency is 

elle est tres- f. f. 

admirable; the destruction of his fortune was the consequei^ie 
f. f. fut i 



The beauty of that fable; 
f. 
of science ; 
art. f. 
passions ; 

pi. 
conspirator; 

m. 1 
evolutions ; 

,,1.1 
alimentary pension ; 

2. f. 1 

expression ; a famous general ; 

f. 1. 
incapable of attention ; 



76 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE 

of his temerity ; she is very scrupulous ; his condition is horrible ; 

f. tres- f. f. 

his parents are very miserable ; this history is incontestable ; 

pi. sont trie- pi. f. 

your facility is prodigious ; his perfidy is odious ; it was an hor- 

f. f. f. ce etait 

rible famine : the sublimity of his sentiments is still preferable 

f. f. m. encore 

to the energy of his expressions ; it was a decisive action ; the 

f . f . 2 f . 1 

carnage was terrible ; that obstacle is invincible ? this 

m. Jut cet m. 

instrument is not harmonious ; the prosperity of the wicked is 
m. f. medians pi. 

not durable ; your insidious presents are not acceptable ; his 

2 pi. sont pi. 

memory is truly extraordinary ; that is his principal occupation : 

f. vraiment ce est f. f. 

a central position ; his extravagance is visible ; these argu- 

f. 2. f. 1 son f. ces m. 

raents are insoluble. 

pi. 



PART I. 



OF WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE 
AND INFLECTIONS. 



There are, in French, nine sorts of words, or parts of 
speech, namely, 

T. Substantive, or Noun, 4. Pronoun. 7. Preposition, 

2. Article, 5. Verb, 8. Conjunction, 

3. Adjective, 6. Adverb, 9. Interjection. 

CHAP. I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN. 

The substantive is a word, which serves to name a 
person, or thing, as Pierre, Peter ; livre, book> &c. 
There are two sorts of substantives, the svhrtajitive 



OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 77 

proper, or proper name, and the substantive common, al- 
so called appellative. 

The proper name is that which is applied to a par- 
ticular person, or thing, as Cesar, Cesar ; la Tamise, the 
Thames. 

The substantive common is that which belongs to a 
whole class of objects. The word homme, man, is a sub- 
stantive common, as it is applicable to any individual, as 
Peter, Paul, John, &c. 

Of these nouns, some are collective, and others ab- 
stract. 

Collectives express either a whole mass, as une armh, 
an army : une foret, a forest : or a partial assemblage, 
as une quantile de, &c. a certain quantity of; la plupari, 
most part, &c. 

Abstract nouns are the names of qualities abstracted 
from their subjects, as, surface, rondeur, science, sagesse$ 
surface, roundness, knowledge, wisdom, &c. 

In substantives, are to be considered Gender and Num- 
ber. 



OF GENDER. 

There are only two genders, the masculine and femi- 
nine. 

The masculine belongs to the male kind, as un hon*- 
me, a man ; un lion, a lion, &c. 

The feminine belongs to the female kind, as une fern- 
me, a woman ; une lionne, a lioness, &c. 

This distinction has, through imitation, been ex- 
tended to all substantives, as, un livre, a book, is mas- 
culine ; une table, a table, is femiaine, &c. see p. 37, 
40, &c. 



OF NUMBER. 

There are two numbers ; the singular and the plvr 
ral. 

The singular expresses one single object, as tin hommt t 
un livre. 

8* 



78 



OF THK SUBSTANTIVE. 



The plural announces more objects than cnc, as des 
hornmes, des livres. 

Proper names have no plural, as Londres, Paris, Mil- 
ton, &c. 



OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF FRENCH 
SUBSTANTIVES. 

GENERAL RULE. 



TJie singular is ge- 1 
nerally changed I 
into a plural, by ( as 1 
adding an 5. J I 



Singular. 
le roi the king 



Plural. 
Its rots the kings 



la reine the queen les reines the queens 



EXCEPTIONS. 
FIRST EXCEPTION. 



Sing-. 

" s ) remain i 
~* t alterable. 



Plural. 



Singular. 

^ le fils, the son ; 
as \ la voix, the voice ; 



le nez ike nose 
SECOND EXCEPTION. 



Plural. 

les fils, the sons. 

les voix, the voice*. 

les nez the noses. 



S'vng. 
-a-x 
-eu 
•am 
-ou 



Plural. 



f take an 
( and make 




Plural, 
bateaux, 
feux, 
voeux, 
bijoux, 



boats. 
Jires. 
voros. 
jewels. 



THIRD EXCEPTION. 



Sing-. Plural. Singular. 

-al t \ are changed I -aux > j cheval, 
-ai# 5 into I -aux I ( travail, 



Plural. 
horse ; cievaux, horses, 
work ; travaux, works. 



* Those in -cu, that take x in their plural, are chou, caillou-bijov, 
genou, hibou,joujou, pou; the others now follow the general rule 
and take 5, as clou, clous ; verrou, verrous, Sic. 

t Several nouns in -al, as bal, cal, pal, regal, carnaral, local, &c. 
follow however the general rule, simply taking s. 

t Those in -ail, making their plural in aux, are particularly bail, 
sous-bail, coral/, email, wupirail, travail, v ant ail, ventail ; the rest 
as attirail, ditall. tvt ntail, gtmvernail, portail, serazl&c. follow the 
general rule. 



79 



OF THE SUBSTANTIVE 

FOURTH EXCEPTION. 

S'vag. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

-ant* ? now drop taeir < -ansC "> enfant, child; enfans, children, 

-cnt* ) t in polysyllables { -ens "£ Jmoment, moment ; momens, moments. 



Singular. 




Plural. 






fail 


garlick 


aulx 


heads of garlick 


These 


bewail 


cattle 


bestiaux 


cattle 


aieul 


grandfather 


aieux 


ancestors 


six are <, 
irregular 


ciel 


heaven 


cieux 


heavens 


oeil 


eye 


yeux 


eyes 




• bercail 


sheep fold 


has no plural 



EXERCISE. 



The flowers of the gardens ; 
Jleur jar din 

the palaces of the kings ; 

pal fiis roi 

the walnuts of their orchards : 

noix verger 

the feathers of these birds ; 
plume oiseau 

gods of the pagans ; 
di"u paicn 



of our gardens ; 
jar din 



the niceties of the languages ; 
delicalesse langue 
the woods of those countries ; 
bois pays 

the pictures of those painters ; 
tableau pcintre 

the melody of their voices ; the 
=f. s voix 

the jewels of my sisters ; the cabbage* 
bijou sozur chou 



these charming places ; 
char mans 2 lieu 1 



stables ; 
{curie 
churches; 
igHu 

lit- : 
vie 

architects ; 
' — tide 
those times ; 

temps-la 

combs ; the playthings of our children : 
feigne joujou enfant 

nails. 
cluu. 



the horses of my 
cheval 



the fans of these ladies ; the (front gates) of those 
eventail dame portail 

the actions of my ancestors ; the evils of this 

— aieul mal 

tbe victories of those generals ; the works of those 
=» — travail 

the corals of those seas ; the (learned men) of 



co rail mer 

the presents of my parents ; 



savant 
th?. teeth of your 
dent 
the heads of these 
tltt 



'uly polysyllables in ~nt drop the/, but monosyllables retain 
chant, chants ; gant, ganls; dent, dents; &c.exc< j>t, howevea 
g* nt, gens. 



80 OP THE ARTICLE. 

CHAP. II. 

OP THE ARTICLE. 

The Article is a small word prefixed to substantives, to 
determine the extent of their signification. 

( le before a mascu. \ 
The French 1 substantive f the plural is les for 

article is \ la before a femin. f both genders. 
\ substantive j 

EXAMPLE. 

c- (Zejour the day \ . < les jours (he days 

g ' I la nuit the night 5 rlnr * \ Its nuits the nights. 

EXERCISE. 

The sun, the moon, and the stars, are the glory of 

soleil m. lune f\ e.toile, f. pi. sont =f. 

nature. 77ie king, the queen, and the princes are well 

art — f. roi m. mne f. — m. pi. tris- 

pleased. The rose, the violet, the tulip, the narcissus, 
satisfaits. — f. violeite f. tulipe f. narcisse m. 

Me hyacinth, Me gilliflower, Me jasmine, Me lily, Me 

jacinthei. girojttei. jasmin m. lism. 

honeysuckle, the ranunculus, are Me delight of the sight, 

cJievre-feuille m. renoncule f. dllices f. pi. vue f. 

Poetry, painting, and music, are (sister arts). The 

art. potsie f. art. peinture f. art. musique f. sceitr f. pi. 
day and the night are equally necessary. 
jour m. rata* f. dgalement nicessaires. 

The article is subject to elision and contraction. {Set 
p. 73* and 72.) 

Elision of the article is the omitting of the e in /e, or 
the a in la, when these articles precede a noun begin- 
ning with a vowel, or h mute. 

EXAMPLE. 

I'argent > . . •, f We argent themsney 
l'histoirej insteaG01 \ \ a histoire the history 

But in this case the place of the letter thus omitted is 
supplied by an apostrophe. 



OF THE ARTICLE. 
EXERCISE. 



81 



The soul of man without cultivation is like a 

dme f. art. homme h m. sans culture f. est comme 

diamond (in the rough). The history of Spain is sometimes 
diamant m. brut ' =/i m. Espagne est quelquefoh 

very interesting. (Look at) the amaranth and the anemone; 
tres-intirtssante. Consider cs amarantht f — f. 

what beauty ! Self-love and pride are always the 

quelle=i. art. amour-propre art. orgueil sont toujours 

offspring of a weak mind. Honesty, inno- 

partage m. faible 2 esprit m. 1. art. Honnetete, h. m. art. 
cence, honour, and the love of virtue are 

— art. honneur hm'.' amour art. vertu f. 

(very much; esteemed. Summer, autumn, and winter, 

tres-estimis art. ete art. avtomne art. hiver h m. 

are very changeable. France is separated from Italy by the 

variables art. — Sf'paret de art. Jlalie par 

Alps, and from Spain by the Pyrenees. 
Alpes, pi. art. — pi. 

Contraction in grammar is the reducing of two syl- 
lables into one, and takes place, when the preposition 
a, or de precedes the article ; in which case, instead 
of putting de le before a masculine singular, beginning 
with a consonant, or h aspirated, du must be employed ; 
instead of a le } au must be used ; and before the plural 
substantives of both genders, de les is changed into des, 
and a les into aux. 



Thu* 



Du roi 
du heros 
au roi 
au heros 
des rois 
des reines 
aux rois 
aux reines 



is instead of 



de le roi 
de le heros 
a U roi 
a le h£ros 
de les rois 
de les reines 
a les rois 
a les reines 



of the ki?ig 
of the hero 
to the king 
to the hero 
of the kings 
of the queens 
to the bugs 
to the tautens 



EXERCISE. 

Tlit- top of the mountains, and the bottom of the vallies 

sommei in. mo4itag?ie fond m. vaUU 

are equally agreeable. Silk is soft to the touch. The 

igalcment ggrtablcs art. Soie f. douce toucher in. 

happiness of a feeling m :i i- 'o relieve the wants of the 

bonheur m. sensible 2 1 desubvenira be<*oin 



82 OF THE ARTICLE. 

poor. A man given to pleasure was never a great man. 

pauvre m. s. livri art. plaisvr m. fat grand 

He obeyed the orders of the king. The warbling of birds, 

// obeit a ordres gazouillement m.art. oiseau 

the murmuring of streams, the enamel of meadows, the 

— rem. art. ruisseau email m. art. prairie 

coolness of woods, the fragrance of flowers, and the sweet 
fraicheur f. art. bois parfum m. art fleur douce 

smell of plants, contribute greatly to the pleasures of the 
odeur f. art. plante contribuent beaucoup 
mind and to the health of the body. 
esprit sante f . corps m. 

De and a are never contracted with la, before a femi- 
nine substantive singular beginning wkh a consonant. 

EXAMPLES. 
De la reine of the queen a la reine to the queen 

Nor are de and a contracted with le or la, before any 
substantive singular, beginning with a vowel, or h mute, 
but then the article suffers elision. 
EXAMPLES. 

De Vesprit of the mind de Vhommc of man 

A Vesprit to the mind a l x homme to man 

De Vdme of the soul a Vdme to the soul 

De Vhistoire of the history a Vhistoire to the history 

Contraction likewise does not take place, when the 
adjective tout, all, every, intervenes between de, or a, 
atid the article. 

EXAMPLES. 

De tout le monde, of every body. 

De tous les hommes, of all men. 

A tout le monde, to every body. 

A tous les hommes, to all men. 

De toutes les verius, of all virtues. 

A loutes les maisons, to all houses. 

EXERCISE. 

The hope of success strengthened the cause of 

esperance f. art. rtussite f. fortifia — f. 

virtue, and weakened the audaciousness of rebellion^, 

art. vtrlu f. affaiblit audace f. art. — f. 

Fire of imagination, strength of mind, and 
art. Feu m. art. — f. art./orce f. art. esprit art. 

firmness of soul, are gifts of nature. We saw 

fermtUi. art. awe desdonsm.pl. art. — f. NousvUnes 



OF THE ARTICLE. 83 

with horror that man given up to avarice and vo- 

avec = livre * art. — a art. vo- 

luptuousness. Good cultivation is that which contributes 

lupti f. art. Bonne culture f. ce qui conlribue 

most to the fertility of Vie soil. More or less pain 

le plus = terrei. Plus ou moins dt peine 

is the lot of every body. The history of man under 

partagc m. tout art. mondcm. =■■ art. dans 

all the circumstances of life, is the study of the 

toutes art. circonstance f. art. vie f. Uude 

wise. Playfulness does not become all ages 

sage m. art. Enjouement m. * ne sied ni a art. — m. pi. 
nor all characters. 
ni a art. caractere> m. pi. 

I. General Rule. In French, the article always 
agrees in gender and number with the substantive to 
which it relates. 

EXAMPLES. 

Le Hire que je ckerche, The book which I am looking 

for. 
La/ewme queje vois, The woman whom I see. 

Les homines qui ttudient, The men that study. 



EXERCISE. 

The father, mctheT, brothers, sisters, 

pirt m. art. mere f. art. frere m. pi. art. s&urs f. pi. 

uncles, aunts, and several other relations 

art. oncles m. pi. art. tante f. pi. pleusieurs autres parens m. pi. 
w^re present. What we value is health, frugality, 

etaient present. C& que nous estimons, c'est art. santt f. art. = f. 

liberty, vigour of mind and body ; it is the love of 
art. -— f. art. vigueuri. art. art. corps m. ce amour m. 

virtue, reverence for the gods, fidelity to all 

art f. art. crainte f. de dieu m. pi. art.=f. envers 

mankind, moderation in prosperity, ibr- 

art. monde m. art. — f. dans art. = f. art. for- 

titude in adversity, courage, good morals, and the 

ce f. art. = f. art. — m. art. bonnes-m&urs, f. pi. 

abhorrence of flattery. 
horreur f. h. m. art. =f. 

II. General Rule. The article and the prepositions 
a and c/e, whether contracted or not, are invariably to bo 
repeated before every substantive. 



84 OF THE ARTICLE, 

EXAMPLES. 

L'csprit, les graces, et la beautt Wit, grace, and beauty, capti- 

noxis captivent- vate us. 

Je vis frier le roi, la reine, et les I saw yesterday the king, queen, 

princes. and princes. 

LHgnoronce est la mere de Ver- Ignorance is the mother of er- 

reur, de Vadmiration, et des ror, admiration, and prejudi- 

prtventions de toule esjyice. ces of every kind. 

EXERCISE. 

Innocence of manners, sincerity, obedience. 

ar t # — f. art. mceurs, pi. art. =f. art. obeissance f. 

and abhorrence of vice, inhabit this happy region. 

art. horreur h. m. art. — m. habitent heureuse — f. 

The plants of the gardens, the animals of the forests, the minerals 

plante jardin m. — fortt f. — 

of the earth, the meteors of the sky, must all concur 

terre f. meteore del m. doivenl tons concovrir 

to store the mind with an inexhaustible varieiy. Neither 

a enrichir par inepuisable 2 =f. I * 

suffering, punishment, nor kindness make any 
art. peine, f. art. chdtiment m. * art. carresse \. pi. ne font nullc 
impression on those minds. The lily is the emblem of 

— sur time pi. lis m. symbole m. 

virginity, candour, innocence and 

art. =f. de art. =f. de art. — f. de art. 

purity. 
purete f. 

Du, de la, de V, des, answering to the English partitive 
some expressed, or understood, have by way of ellipsis 
passed into habitual use. 

EXAMPLES. 

Je mcuige du f,ain. I eat bread. 

LLprend de la peine. He takes some trouble. 

Nous tnangeons du hachis. We eat some hash. 

Ellc congoit de la halne. She conceives a hatred. 

Vous avez de Vatnitie. You have some friendship. 

Vous prenez de Vhumeur. You go into an ill humour. 

Nous cueillons des pommes. We gather apples. 

lis vendent des oranges. Tbey sell oranges. 



EXERCISE. 

Give me some bread and butter. Offer him some 

donnez-moi pain m. pr. art. buerre m. Offirt*~M 



OP THE ADJECTIVE. 85 

meat. Take some salt. (There is)~ mustard. W> 

viande f. Prenez sel m. Voilapr. art. moutarde f. A r cua 

have some girkins. Shall I offer you some chicken 1 Shall I 

«ro7w cornidwns pi. Foii5 offrirai-je poulet m. Fbas 

help you to some fruit ? 1 will take (with pleasure) some 

serviraije * — m. /e prendrai volontiers 

broth. Bring me some bread. Pour me out some beer. 
bouillon m. Apportez-moi Versez-moi * oiere F. 

Drink some wine. Take some tea. Put (in) some sugar 
Buvez tin m. Prtnez the m. Meitez-y sucre m. 

and milk. I hear some noise. There falls some hail. 

pr. art. lait m. J'enltnds bruit m. // fom&e gre7e f. s. 

She has some pride. Have you any ink and 

Elle a orgueil m. Avez-vous pr. art. encre f. pr. art. 

pens? Put some oil and vinegar to the salad. 

plumes pi. Mettes kuile, h m. pr. art. vinaigre m. sur salade f. 
Eat some lobster. He has received some gold and 

Mangez pr. art. homard m. ft. asp. 7/ a regu or m. 

silver, 
pr. art. argent m. 



CHAP. III. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

The adjective is a word, which is added to a substan- 
tive to express its quality, as, 

bon pere good father bonne mere good mother 

beau livre fine book belle image fine image 

These words bon 9 bonne, beau, belle, are adjectives, 
as they express the qualities of pere, mere, livre y 
image. 

A word is known to be an adjective, when it can be 
properly joined with the word personne, or the word chose. 
Thus, habile, skilful, and agrenble, agreeable, are adjec- 
tives, because we can say personne habile, skilful person ; 
chose agreable, agreeable thing. 

In French the adjective takes the gender and number 
of the substantive to which it relates. This difference 
of gender and number is generally marked by the termi- 
nation. 

9 



86 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



- 
OF THE FORMATION OF THE FEMININE OF FRENCH 
ADJECTIVES. 

Rule I. All adjectives ending in the singular in e mute, 

are of both genders. 

EXAMPLES. 

Un homme aimable, An amiable man. 

Unefemme aimable t An amiable woman. 

Rule II. Whenever the adjective does not end in e 
mute, the e mute is added to form its feminine. 

EXAMPLES. 

prudent 

sensible 

polite 

crooked 

informed 

Rule III. Adjectives in -el, -eil, -ten, -on, and -et, 
to form their feminine double their last consonant and 
take e mute. 

EXAMPLES. 



prudent 
sense 




f prudente 
\ sensee 


poli 


/• 


c polie 


tortu 
instruit 




1 tortue 
V. instruite 




of each 
termination. 



Rule IV. Adjectives ending in/, change this letter into 
-u, and take e mute. 

EXAMPLES. 

fbretfe short 

* j active active 

•''I naive ingenuout 

l^neure new 

Rule V. Adjectives ending in -x change -rr into t, and 
take e mute. 




EXAMPLES. 

honteux C honteuse ashamed 

yertneux /.< vertueuse virtuous 

jaloux ( jalouse jealous 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



87 



Rule VI. Adjectives, or rather substantives, ending 
in -eur, derived from verbs, generally change the r into s, 
and take e mute ; but several, mostly of Latin origin, 
require -eur to be changed into -rice, in others -eur is 
transformed into -eresse, and about twelve, as, anterieur, 
citerieur, exterieur, inierieur, inferiear, meilleur, mineur, 
majeur, posterieur, superieur, ulterieur, prieur, take on- 
ly an e mute, and follow the Second Rule. 





EXAMPLE. 






L trompeur 
m.< inenteur 
( parleur 


( troinpeuse 
/. ) menteu^e 
( parleuse 


deceitful 

lying 
talkative 




C acteur 
m. < accusateur 
( admirateur 


( actnce 
/.< accusatrice 
( admiratnce 


actor, actress 

accuser 

admirer 


* 


C enchanteur 
m.< pecheur 
( vengeur 


( enchanteresse 
/.< pecherewe 
( vengeresse 


enchanting 

sinful 

avenging 





EXERCISE. 

She is decent. . This house is well situated. This pear 

Elle — Cette maison, f. bien situe poire F. 

is too ripe. She is tall and \ve\\ formed. This story is 



grand hien fait histoire f. 

This person is very unsteady. This raouTi- 

personne f. bien leger mon- 

This road is not very safe. The door is not 
route f. sur forte f. 

It is 
Ce 



trop mur 
very entertaining, 
trts-amusant 
tain is steep, 
tngne f. escarp k 

open. This room is dark. This street is too narrow, 

ouvert. chambre f. obscur rue f. etroit 

an addent custom. She has carnation lips. His 

coutumei. a art. vermeil 2Zerref.pl. 1, Sa 
memory will be immortal. His manners are natural. The 

=f. sera — teL Ses manieres f. pi. naif 

engagement was warm. (That Is) an original thought. This 
action f. fut rif voiia neuf2 penstei.X. 

cloth is the best of all. They are. delusive prt>- 

tloffe f. meilhur f pi. Ce des trompeur 2 pro- 

mises. He seduces by his fawning mar.ners. T1ib 

messe f. pi. 1. stduit par flat t cur 2 manieres f. pi. 1. 

delightful valley of Tempe h> in Thessaly. 

dclicitux valllcf. Tempt dans art. =f. 



88 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



EXCEPTIONS TO THE SECOND RULE. 

The CoV owing adjectives double the last consonant in 
forming the feminine. 



m. 
bas 
cas 


/• 

basse 
casse 


low 

hoarse, broken 


m. 
£pais 
metis 


epaisse 
metisse 


thick 
mongrel 


gras 
las 


grasse 
lasse 


fat 
tired 


gros 
sot 


grosse 
sotte 


big 
silly 


eCspres 


expresse 


express 


vieillot 


vieillotte 


oldish 



protes professe professed 



monk nul nul/e none 

or gentil gentil/e genteel 



OTHER EXCEPTIONS TO THE SECOVD AND FIFTH RULES. 

The following adjectives form their feminine by doub- 
ling the I in the masculine before a vowel. 



m. 

beau 

bel 

nouveau 

nouvel 

vieux 

vieil 



<belte 
S nouvel/e 
> vieilte 



fine 



old 



VI. 

fou 
fol 



raou 
mol 



\io\le 



- molfr 



mad 



soft 



The following are entirely irregular. 



m 

blanc 

franc 

LVais 

sec 

Grec 

public 

caduc 

Turc 

lonsr 

b6nin 

malift 



n.bA 



blanc/ie 
franc/ie 
fraicAe 
seche 
Grecque 
publicize 
enduque 
Turfite 
longue 
benigne 
malig?ie 
m. 
concret 
discret 
indiscret 
inquiet 
complet 
incomplet 
replet 
suret 
pret 



white 
frank 
fresh 

dry 

Greek 
public 

decrepit 

Turkish 

long 

benign 

malignant 



m. 
faux 
roux 
doux 

aigre-doux 
tiers 

tors 



► make 



J 



coi 
favori 
jumeau 
tratire 

/• 

concrete 
discrete 

indiscrete 

inquitte 
{ complete 

incomplete 

re pi it e 

surete 
[prete 



fausse 
rousse 
douce 

aigre- douce 
tierce 

J torse, or 

I torte 

coite 

favorite 

jnme//e 

truitresse 



false 
red 
sweet 
tart 
third, he 

twisted 

still, mug 

favorite 

twin 

traitor 



follow the second 
rule, except in the 
additional accent, 
and differing from 
the numerous ter- 
minations in ~et*, 

Of the THIRD RULE- 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 89 

Prefix m. makes prefix e f. and is the only adjective in 
-£, which preserves this letter and follows the second 
rule. 

Some adjectives have no feminine, as bische, dispos, 
fat, paillet, &c. ; others have no masculine, as blette^ 
&c. 

EXERCISE. 

The grass is very thick. That soup is very good, but too fat. 

herbe f. soupe f. mais trop 

It is a. foolish undertaking. There is no truth in all that. 

sot enterprise f. Jl rty a nul verite f. dans tout cela 

This water is not clean. It is a very silly history. It is in the 

eauf. net. Ce 2 fol3=f. 1. a 

newest fashion. It is a fine statue. The law is express upon 
nouveau mode f. beau =f. loi f. sur 

that point. He lives in a state of luxurious idleness. This wax 
— m. 11 vit dans * * mou oisiuett f. cire f. 

is not very white. She is as fresh as a rose. The paint 

com me — f. peinture f. 

on that wainscot is not dry. His answer is a m*re evasion. 
de lambris m. riponse i. franc defaite f. 

The thing is public. That plant possesses a pernicious 

chose f. herbe f. a malin 2 

property. She is of a benevolent character. The avenging 
qualitti.\. a * benin 2 humeur f. vengeur2 

thunderbolt smote that impious wretch. He extended to 

Joudre(,\. frappa impie m. * tendit 2 * 

us a. protecting hand. This woman is jealous and deceit- 
nous 1 — ttur 2. main {.I. femmei. jaloux faux, 
ful. His temper is mild. This colour is too red. These old 

Son humew; f. doux couleur f. trop roux. 

clothes are good for nothing. 

hardes f. pi. ne a rien. 



OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF FRENCH AD- 
JECTIVES. 

General Rule. Every adjective forms its plural 
by the simple addition of s, as, bon, bons, bonne, Lonnes^ 
poll, polis, polie, polie?. This rule is without exception 
as it regards the feminine termination ; but the masculine 
has the four following exceptions. 

9* 



90 OF THt ADJECTIVE. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

1. Adjectives ending in -s or -x, do not change 
their termination in the plural masculine, as gros, gras, 
hideux. 

2. Those ending in -au, take x in the plural, as beau, 
beaux, nouveau, nouveaux. 

3. Some adjectives in -al, change this termination 
into aux, as, egal, equal, egaux ; general, generaux ; 
but most of these have no plural masculine, as amical, 
austral, boreal, canonial, conjugal, diametral, fatal, filial, 
final, frugal, jovial , lustral, rnatinal, naval, pastoral, pec- 
toral, special, venal, and some others. 

4. Polysyllables ending in -nt, according to the most 
general practice, drop the t in the plural masculine, as 
excellent, excellens ; but monosyllables retain it, as lent, 
slow," lents. The adjective tout, all, makes tous. 



EXERCISE. 

They are envious and jealous. Those fowls are big and 

Us = poulet m. pi. 

fat. Owls are frightful birds. (There 

art. Hibou m. pi. des hideux 2 oiseau m. pi. 1. Voita 

are) some beautiful jewels. The two new operas 

de beau bijou m. pi. deux r.ouvcau — m. pi. 

have succeeded. Men are only equal in the 

out reussi art. 2 ne 1 que 4 3 par 

infirmities of nature. The general officers are 

= art. — f. — 2 officitrs m. pi. 1. 

assembled. This fruit is excellent. His proficiency 

— bU — m. pi. 5071/ — Ses progris m. pi. 

is slow, but solid. All his friends have been very glad to 
sont solide ami m. pi. onl tie bien-aise dt 

see him. Those ladies are tired with walking. You 

voir 2 lei. rfamef.pl. las de marcher. Fous 

have powerful enemies, but their efforts will be vain 

avez de ennemi m. pi. mats leurs — m. pi. seront — 

and useless. The four cardinal points are the east. 

inutile. quatre point m. pi. 1. oriznt m. 

west, south, and north, 

art. Occident m. art. mi dim. art. nord m. 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 91 



OF THE DEGREES CF SIGNIFICATION OF THE ADJEC- 
TIVE. 

Grammarians commonly reckon three degrees ot 
comparison ; the positive, the comparative, and the su* 
perlntive. 

The positive is the adjective expressing the quality 
of an object, without any increase, or diminution, as 
beau, belle. 



EXERCISE. 

A child gentle, amiable^ and docile, is beloved by every 
enfant m. doiix, cimable — aimt de tout 

body. An ingenuous candour, an amiable simplicity and a 

Umonde. — nu 2 =f. 1. =f. 

lively artlessness are the charm of youth. The 

piquant 2 naivete i. 1 charme m. art. jeun esse f. 

sight of an agreeable landscape is a varied and rapid source 
vue f. agr table pay sage m. varic 2 rapideS — f . 1 

of delightful sensations. 
delicituz 2 — f. pi. 1. 

The comparative is so called, because it draws a com- 
parison between two or many objects. When two things 
are compared, the one is either superior, inferior, or equal 
to the other ; hence three sorts of comparison, that of 
superiority, inferiority, and equality. 

N. B. The adverbs plus, moins, and aussi, which 
mark these three kinds of comparison, are to be repeat- 
ed before every adjective, when several are joined to the 
same substantive, and are followed by the conjunction que, 
rendered in English by than or as. 

The comparative of superiority is formed by putting 
plus, more, before the adjective, and que, than, after it. 

EXAiMPLE. 

La rose est plus belle que la no- The rose is more beautiful than 
lette, the violet. 



92 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



EXERCISE. 

The republic of Athens was more illustrious than that 

republiquei. Athene* a ete illustre ctlh 

of Lacedemon. Homer was perhaps a greater genius 

Lacidemone. Horn ere claii peut-etre . grand ginie m. 

than Virgil ; but Virgil had a more delicate and more refined 

Virgile ; mais avait Jin 2 delicat 

taste than Homer. Milton appears (to me) more sublime 

3 gout m. 1 h m. parait 2 me 1 

than all the other epic poets. 

autre 1 epique 3 poete m. pi. 2. 

The comparative of inferiority is formed by prefix- 
ing moins, less, to the adjective, and adding que, than, * 
after it. 

EXAMPLE. 

La violette est moins belle que la The violet is less beautiful than 
rose. the rose. 

EXERCISE. 

Shipwreck and death are less fatal than the pleasures 
art. Naufrage m. art. morl f. funestes pi. m. 

which attack virtue. The violet is less brilliant to tke 

qui attaquent art. f. f. brillant 

eye than the lily, a true emblem of modesty 

m. pi. lis m.* veritable 2 embleme m. 1. art. = f. 

and of pride. Autumn is less varied than 

de art. orgueil m. art. Automne f. varti art. 

spring, but it is richer. 

printemps m. elle riche. 

The comparative of equality is formed by placing aus- 
si, as, before the adjective, and que, as, after it. 

EXAMPLES. 

La tulipe est aussi belle que la The tulip is as t/eautiful as the 
rose, rose. 



EXERCISE. 

Pope's images are as perfect as his style is har- 

de Pope 2 art. — f. pi. 1 par fait son — m. 

mouious. Delicacy of taste is a gift of na- 

= art. Dilicatcsse f. art. gout m. don m. art. 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 93 

ture, as scarce as true genius, The love of our neighbour 
— f. rare art. vrai genie m. amour du* prochain 

is as necessary in society for the happiness of life, 

= dans art. =f. pour bo'hturm. art. vie f. 
as iu Christianity for eternal salvation. It is as easy 

art. — nisme m. art. — nel 2 salut in. 1. aise 

to dp good, as to do evil. 

defaire art. bien m. de art. ?»a/ m 

The three following adjectives, meillevr, better, pire, 
worse, moindre, less, are comparatives in themselves. 

N. B. As most beginners are apt to confound these 
comparative adjectives with the comparative adverbs, 
mieux, pis, and moins, because they are generally ren- 
dered by the same English words better, worse, and less, 
it may be adviseable to subjoin here tnese comparative 
adverbs with their positives, that the difference of mean- 
ing may serve as a distinction. 

Meilleur, better, is the comparative of bon, good, 
and is used instead of plus bon, which is never said. 

Pire signifies plus mauvais, worse, or more wick- 
ed, and is used instead of this. 

Moindre means plus petit, less, or smaller, and is 
^used instead of these terms. 

f Mieux*, better, is the comparative of bien, well, 
and is used instead of plus bien, more well, which is 
said in neither language. 
o { Pis* is the comparative of tnal, badly, and is used 
for plus mal, worse, which is likewise employed. 
Moins is the comparative of pew, little, and is used 
„for plus peu, which is never heard. 

EXAMPLES. 

Ce fruit-la est bon, mais celui- That fruit is good, bat this is bet 

ci est meilleur. ter. 

Sa condition est mauvaise, mais His condition is bad, but 'it has 

ellc a ete pire. been worse. 

Ma depeuse est petite, mais la My expense is small, but yours is 

votre est moindre. smaller. 



> 



o- 



y - There are some instances of pis and mieusc used adjectivtlv, 
but this i> not the place to notice them. 



94 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

II se conduit bien, mais elle se He behaves welly but she behaves 

conduit encore mieux. still better. 

II se portait raal, mais il est pis He ivas unwell, but he is worse 

que jamais. than ever. 

Jeparle peu,vousparlez encore J speak little, you speak still 

moins. less. 

EXERCISE. 

His reasoning is not better than yours. Your style is 

Son raisonnement m. le votre. Voire m. 

(a great deal) better than that of bis brother. The thickness of 
de beaucoup celui son epaisseur f. 

this wall is less than that of the next wall. This column 

mvr m. celle voisin2 1 colunne f. 

is less than the other in height and thickness. The remedy 

autre en hauteur f. en grosseur f. remede m. 

is ivorse than the disease. Your horse is worse than mine. 

mal m. cheval m. le mien. 

The adjective is in the superlative degree, when it 
expresses the quality in a very high, or in its highest 
state : hence there are two sorts of superlatives, the ab- 
solute and the relative. 

The superlative absolute is formed by putting tres, 
fort, bien, very, before the adjective ; it is called abso- 
lute, because it does not express any relation to other ob- 
jects. 

EXAMPLE. 

Londres est une trcs-belle ville. London is a very fine city. 

Remark. The adverbs extremement, extremely, irtfi- 
niment, infinitely, are likewise marks of the superlative 
absolute, 

EXAMPLE. 

Cet homme est extremement sa- That man is extremely learn- 

vant. ed. 

Dieu est infinimenl heureux. God is supremely happy. 



EXERCISE. 

That landscape is v&ry divcrsifiedj very extensive, and infi- 
paysage m. varit elendu 

nitely agreeable on every side. The Alps are very high and 

agr table de tout cote m. f. pi. haut 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 93 

very steep. The style of Fenelon is very rich, and very 

escarp e. — m. — 

harmonious, but it is sometimes prolix ; that of Bossuet is 

= il quelquefois prolixe ; celui 

extremely sublime, but it is sometimes harsh and unpolished. 
Sieve dur rude. 

The superlative relative is formed by prefixing the ar- 
ticle le to the comparatives meilleur, moindre, pire, and 
to the adverbs plus and moins ; it is called relative, as it 
expresses a relation to other objects. 
EXAMPLES. 

Londres est la plusbelle des villes. London is the finest of cities. 
Je pre/ere une tnaison de cam- I prefer a country-house to the 
pagne au plus beau palais. finest palace. 

Plus and moins with the article are repeated before 
every adjective. 

EXERCISE. 

The most beautiful comparison, that there is perhaps in 

compuraison i. que il y ait peut-etredans 
any language, is that which Pope has drawn from the Alps, 
aucun langue f. celle que tire f. de 

in his Essay on Criticism. The most able men are 

dans son Essai sur art. Critique f. habiU gens m. pi. 

not always the most virtuous. The most ancient and most 

toujours vertucux f. 

gtneral of all kinds of idolatry, was the worship ren- 

f. art. espece f. pi. = Hail culle m. ren- 

dered to the sun. The least excusable of all errors is 

du soleil m. art. = f. 

that which is wilful. 
celle qui volontaire. 



AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUBSTAN- 
TIVE. 

Rule I. The adjective always agrees in gender and 
number with the substantive to which it relates. 
EXAMPLES. 

Lt bonpere, The good father. 

La bonne mere, The good mother. 

De beaux jar dins, Fine gardens. 

De btlles promenades, Fine walks. 



96 OF THE ADJECTIVE, 

Bon is masculine singular, because pere is masculine, 
and in the singular ; bonne is feminine singular, because 
mere is feminine, and in the singular ; beaux is in the 
masculine plural, because jardins, is masculine, and plu- 
ral, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

These hills are covered with trees loaded with 

coteau m. pi. couvert de arbre m. pi. charge de 
fruit, already ripe. A pure stream rolls its limpid 

— id. pi. deja mur. chair ruisseau m. route son limpid c 2 

water through the midst of meadows enamelled with 

crisial m. 1 a milieu m. prairie f. pi. emailli de 

flowers. (Every thing) interests the heart in this abode, 

fleur i. pi. tout intcresse cosur m. sejour m. 

which is full of charms. Fly, inconsiderate youth, 

* * plein altraicm.pl. Fuyez, — dire 2 jeunessef. 1 

fly from the enchanting allurements of a vain w T orld : 

* — tcur 2 altrait 1 — 2 monde m. 1. 

its perfidious sweets are a slow poison, which (would 

ses — de 2 douceur f. pi. 1 lent 2 — m. I qui de- 

destroy) in your soul the noble enthusiasm of goodness, 

truirait dans dme — enthousiasme m. art. Hen m. 

and the precious seeds of sublime virtues. 
=s= germe m. art. — 2 vertu 1. 

Rule II. When the adjective relates to two substan- 
tives singular of the same gender, it must be put in the 
plural, and agree with them in gender. 

EXAMPLE. 

Ijjp, vox et le berger sent egaux The king and the shepherd are 
apres la mort, equal after death. 

EXERCISE. 

Uprightness and piety are much esteemed, even by 

art. Droiturei. &rt.pietef. tret estimi mime de 

the wicked. A man in the most elevated, 

michant pi. *art. dans ilcvS 2 art. Stat 1 

and a man in the most obscure situation, are equally 

*art. obscur 2 art. Stat m. 1. Sgalement 

precious in the eyes of God. Pilpay and Confucius are very 

= a m. pi. Ditu — — 

celebrated among the nations m. of Asia. 
eclcbre parmi p tuple pi. art. 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



97 



Rule III. When the two substantives, to which the 
adjective relates, arc of different genders, the adjective is 
to be put in the masculine plural, 

EXAMPLE. 

Monpere et ma mere sont con- My father and mother are cob- 
tens, tented. 



EXERCISE. 

His probity and disinterestedness are known (every where) 

= f. son dtsintirtssement m. connu partout 

The love of life, and the fear of death, are 

amour m. art. vie f. crainte art. mort f. 

natural to man. Ignorance and self-love are 

— rel art. art. — f. art. amour-propre m. 

equally presumptuous. My sister and brother were very 

prisomptueux f. mon m. ont Itt 

attentive to the instructions of their masters. 
== — maitre m. pi. 



NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 

Numbers are divided into five classes, viz. cardinal, ordinal, 
collective, distributive, and proportional. 



CARDINAL 
NCMBER. 


ORDINAL NUMBER. 


NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 
NOUNS. 


lun, une 


premier 


first 


unite' 




unit 


2 


deux 


( deuxieme, > 
I second J 


2d 


couple, paire 




couple 


3 


trois 


trois ieme 


3d 


trio 




trio 


4 


quatre 


quatv ieme 


4th 


cleux couples 




two couple 


5 


cinq 


cinqui'eme 


5th 








?> 


six 


sixieme 


6th 


( demi- 
\ douzaine 


i 


half a dozen 


: 

8 


sept 
huit 


septieme 
buiticme 


7th 

8th 


huitaine 




tieek 


9 


neu/ 


neuviime 


9th 


neuvalne 




< nine dayt of 
I prayer 
half a tcore 


10 


dix 


dixtemc 


10th 


dizaine 




11 


onze 


onzieme 


11th 








13 


douze 


douzteme 


12th 


douzaine 




dozen 



10 



93 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



CARDINAL 
NUMBER. 



13 
14 

15 
16 
17 
18 
19 
20 

21 

22 
SO 
31 
40 
41 
50 
51 
60 
61 

70 

71 

72 

80 
81 
90 
91 



treize 

quatorze 

quinze 

seize 

dix-sept 

dix-huit 

dix-neu/ 

vingt 

vingt-et-un 

vingt-deux 

Irente 

(trente*et- 

<un, &c. 
quarante 

Squarante- 
et-un 
cinquante 
< cinquante- 
( et-un 
soixante 
( soixante- 
> et-un 
S soixante- 
( dix 

{ soixantc- 
fonze 
soixante- 
douze, &c. 

jquatre- 
} vingt 

I quatre- 
: vingt-un, 
[ &c. 

{quatre- 
( vingt-dix 

C quatre- 
1 vingt- 
( onze 



ORDINAL NUMBER. 



trcizieme 

quatorz?e7rte 

quinzieme 

seizieme 

dix-seph'ewie 

dix-huitieme 

dix-neuvieme 

vingtieme 

! vingt-et- 
un ieme 
Jvingt-deux- 
( i£ me, &c. 
trentieme 
c trente- 
( unieme 
quaranu'eme 

< quarante- 
( unieme 

cinquantieme 
( cinquante- 
( unieme 

soixauU'eme 

Ssoixante- 
unieme 
Ssoixante- 
dixzeme 
Ssoixante- 
onzieme 
{ soixante- 
( douzieme 

< quatre- 

( vingfcieme 

( quatre- 

< vingt- 
( unieme 
C quatre- 

1 vingt- 

( dixQme 
L quatre- 

2 vingt- 

( onzteme 



13th 
14th 
15th 
16th 
17th 
18th 
19th 
20th 

21st 

22d 
30th 
31st 
40th 
41st 
50th 
olst 
60th 
61st 

70th 

71st 

72d 

80th 
81st 
90th 
91st 



NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 

NOUNS, 



quinzame 



vingtaine 



trentaine 



quarantaine 



, cinquan- 
1 taine 



soixantaine 



fortnight. 8c c 



a score 



a score fyahalf 



two score 



( two score k 
I a half 



three scort 



four score 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



99 



CARDINAL NUMBER. 



100 
101 

200 
1000 

2000 



10,000 
1,000,000 

Un milliard, or 



cent 

eent- 
un, he, 

\ deux 
( cents 

miile 

C deux 
1 miile, 
f&c. 

( dix 
\ mil 



mille 

( mille 
2 fois 
( mille 



ORDINAL NUMBER. 




NUMERICAL COLLEC- 
TIVE NOUNS. 



centame 

2 centaines 

1 millier 

2 miiliers 

1 myriade 
1 million 



1 hundred 

2 hundred 

1 thousand 

2 thousand 

1 myriad 
1 million 



( itme 
billion, a thousand millions, un trillion, &c 



The formation of the ordinal number from the cardinal 
does not require any explanation, except that -unieme is 
only found in compound numbers, where premier and se- 
cond are inadmissible. 

When mentioning the days of the month, the French 
make use of the cardinal instead of the ordinal number, 
and say, le onze d'avril, not le onzieme, &c. le vingl-cinq 
du mais prochain, and not le vingt-cinquieme, &c. except, 
however, that instead of Vun du mois, they say, le pre- 
mier, the first day of, &c. and sometimes le second^ 
though not so well, for le deux ; but this mode proceeds 
no farther. 

Mille never takes s in the plural, thus, vingt mille is 
twenty thousand, and not vingt milles, which would 
mean twenty miles ; and when mentioning the christian 



100 OF THE PRONOUN. 

aera, it is customary to curtail this word into mil, and to 
write, for example, Van mil huit cent seize, and never Van 
mille, &c. 

There are many other numerical expressions used in 
poetry, music, games, &c. as distique, tercet, Quatrain, 
sixain, huitain, &c. solo, duo, trio, quatuor, quinque, 
quinte, octave, &c. beset, sonnez, &c. 

Un millier is very often employed for one thousand 
weight, but quintal is never used except in the sense of 
one hundred weight. 

The distributive numbers are those which express the 
different parts of a whole: as, la moitie, the half; le 
quart, the quarter ; un cinquieme, a fifth, &c. 

The proportional denote the progressive increase of 
things ; as, le double, the double ; le triple, treble ; le 
centuple, a hundred-fold, &c. 



CHAP. IV. 

OF THE PRONOUN. 

A pronoun is a word substituted in the place of a 
noun. 

There are several kinds of pronouns, as the personal^ 
possessive, relative, absolute, demonstrative, and indefi- 
nite. 



OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Personal Pronouns are used for the names of persons, 
or things. 

There are three persons : the first who speaks ; the 
second who is spoken to ; and the third is the person, or 
thing spoken of. 



OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



101 



PROJTOUNS OF THE FIRST PERSON. 


Singular. 








Subject, je 


/ 


je loue Dieu 


I praise God 


. r me for a moi 


to me 


il me donne 


he gives me 


| J me moi 


me 


il me blesse 


he hurts me 


Lfi» j moi a moi 


to me 


donnez-moi 


give me 


f moi moi 


me 


aidez-moi 


help ftie 


Plural. 








Subj. nous 


we 


nous louons Dieu 


tee praise God 


nh . ( nous for a nous 
? I nous nous 


to us 


il nous donne 


he gives us 


us 


il nous blesse 


he hurts us 



They are both masculine and feminine, that is, of the 
same gender as the person, or persons they represent. 

In general, je and me are put before the verb ; moi 
after it ; and nous before, but sometimes likewise afteT 
it. 

EXERCISE. 

I cast my eyes upon the objects which surrounded me, 

portai vue f. s. sur objet qui environnaient me, 

and saw with pleasure that all was calm and tranquil. Do 

je vis avtc que ttait calme tranquille * 

you not see in all the features of my father that he is 

3 14 voyez 2 dans trait m. pi. que 

satisfied with me ? We have told the truth. What were 

content de moi ? avons dit veriie f. Qwe * 

they saying of us ? If we desire to be happy, we musj 
on 2 disait 1 Si desirous de devons 2 

not deviate from the path of virtue. 

1 3 nous icarter de sentier m. art. 







PRONOUNS 


OF THE 


SECOND PERSON 




Singular. 






Subj. tu 




thou 


tu trains Dieu 




te 


for a toi 


to thee 


il te parle 


Obj.< 


te 

toi 

. toi 


toi 

a toi 

toi 


thee 
to thee 
thte 


il te voit 

( donne-toi la 

I peine 
habille-toi 



5 thou feartil 
I God 
( he speaks to 
I thee 
he sees thee 
( give thyself 
> the troubtt 
aresi thyself 



102 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Plural. 
„ , . C i/e, or ( vous louez ? you praise 

kubj. vous Yyou \ Dieu \ God 

,. *S vous for a vous to you il vous parle \ l 6 ^ a 

^ vous vous you il vous respecte he respects you 

In general iu and (e are put before the verb ; toi af- 
ter ; and vous before, but sometimes after it. 

Remark. Politeness has led to the use of the plural 
vous, instead of the singular tu : as, vous etes bien bon, 
you are very good, for tu es bien bon. 

EXERCISE. 

Thou art greater than I ; and from thee I have (at once) 

es moi toi at en mtme 

learnt humility and wisdom. I (was telling) 

t emps 2 appris 1 art. = f. art. sagesse f. disais 

thee that dancing is to the body what taste is to the mind. 
te que art. dansef. m. ce que art. m. 

You have shown us great talents ; when (will you show) 

aves 2 montri 3 1 de — m. quand montrerez-vous 2 

us great virtues ? How amiable you are ! How good you are 
1 de f. pi. Que 3 1 etes 2 3 12 

to have thought of us ! (It was said) of you the other day, 
de. vous etre occupe On disaii autre jour m. 

that you intended to spend a winter in London (in order to) 

rolM vousproposiez de passer m. a —dres pour 

see every thing curious which that city presents, 
voir tout ee =(> que 1 cette 2 title 3 offre 4 de 5. 



PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON. 



Sub 



Singular. 

. il m. he 



i il perd son \ he loses his 



temps J time 

U f . ( elle travaille / she is always 

•" I to uj ours ) at work 

i diies-lui qne }tell him that 

lui m. for a lui to him < je lui par- V / will speak 

( lerai ) to him 

^ ] ( dites-lui que ) tell her that 

lui/. a elle Jo tor < vous/uidon- > you will 

f nerez ) give her 



OF THE PERSONAL PROSOUNS. 



103 



Singular, 
lui St. for le him 



le m. 
la/. 

elle/. 



lui 
elle 



him 
her 



r 



je ne connais 
que lui de 
capable 
je le meprise 
je la respecte 



elle her 



le m. for cela 27 



Plural. 




elles/. 



— they 



leur m. /or a eux to them 



leur/. /or a elles Jo /frfim 



les m. 


or eux 


them 


les/ 


or elles 


them 


eux in. 


— — 


them 


elles 


— 


them 



i". 

( je ne le savais > / 

I P as s 



i / How 6u£ 
/iim capa- 

/ despise him 
J respect her 



ne commit J /ie knows but 
quelle S 



Us ch ante ut 



her 

did 
know it 



not 



i 



i payez leur 
< que vo 
( leur deve: 



elles rient ? 

ce C 

rous ? 

• devez ( 

C dites-ffwr, que % 
< je desire /eur<^ 
( parler f 

$ vous /es trou- ) 
\ verez j 

il les admire < 



i" 



je ne vois 
qu'eux 
ne connait 



qu'elles 



they sing 

(gentlemen) 
they laugh 

(ladies) 
pay them what 

you owe to 
them (to men) 
fe//them that 

I wish to 
speak to them 

(to ladies) 
you will find 

them (men) 
hz admires 
them (ladies) 
1 I see but them 
\ (gentlemen) 
he knows but 
them (ladies) 



All the personal pronouns je, tu, il, vous, ils, and 
elle, tiles, when subjects, are put after the verb in inter- 
rogations, as, 



Singular, 
je / okm-je payer? 



Subject. 4 



tu thou as-tu dit ? 

il he | 
•lie she 



chante-t-iZ 
bien ? 

travaHie-t- 
elle ? 



must I pay ? 

hast thou said 7 

J does he sing 
\ well ? 

dees she u&rk f 



104 OP THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Plural, 
fnous vet irons nous ? shall we go ? 



vous you vlendrez-vous ? willyou come t 

J c ' pis an. they chantent-i7s ? do they sing? 

Relies/, they J ^ttt?^' { do the ^ " or * ? 

II, le, Us, eux, are always masculine : elle, la, elles, 
feminine ; and les, leur, of both genders, as well as lui, 
when meaning to him, or to her ; in other cases, lui ex- 
clusively belongs to the masculine. 

All personal pronouns, when subjects, are placed 
before their verbs, except in interrogative sentences, 
and most of them likewise, when objects precede them, 
except in the imperative affirmative. But the objective 
eux, elles, lui for le, and moi, toi, soi, with one exception 
of this last, in soi disant, styling himself, are invariably 
placed after the verbs by which they are governed. 



EXERCISE. 

He loved them, because they were mild, attentive* and 
aimait m. parce que doux = 

grateful. He (was saying) (to them), do you not know 
reconnuissant disait ■* 3 1 4 saves 2 

that the property of merit is to excite envy 1 She 

que propre m. art. merile m. de exciter art. envie f. 
often exhorted me to the study which is the most useful, 

sovvent 2 exhorlait 1 itude f. * * utile 

that of the human heart. They make us love virtue, more 

celle 2 m. 1. font aimer art. f. 

by their examples than by their words. What has been 

par Uurs exemple pi. parole f. pi. Que 1 on 3 at-Z* 

said of them ? Did they speak ot them ? Do you not see 
dit eux ? * on 2 parlail I elle ? * 4 1 5 voyes 3 

her ? With what pleasure she plays ! 
3 quel pue ! 



OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 105 



REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD 
PERSON. 

Singular. examples. 

!. ( with a preposi- ) . ' .. n \- ( wtrv one draws 
501 \ tion l $ chacun taC asei \ to himself 
C 1'ee-oisme fait( e Sotism makes a 
. < governed by the S ' § s -l) person see 

501 { S verb Y 9 UM ne vo,t i none but him- 

( que soi { se , f 

r se for 5 ^ 501 '' ^ ^" 5 ^ ^ C donne ^ es S h e g™ es himself 
' I mime ( louanges ( praises 



• w < 

O 



for $ ^ elle-me- ( elle se fait illu-Js/ie imposts on 

5 ^ ^ wte J sion £ herself 

^ C soi, or /iu"- > 

se J or i meme \ ^ se P er d ^ e rw ™ 5 himself 

- f° T \ "££•*■ j elle « bit. { *£*» "» 



Plural. EXAMPLES 

£ ils s'attribuent ) they attribute to 
se for a eux-memes 1 la gloire de, \ themselves the 

( he. ) glory of &c. 

{ elles se prescri- Uhey prescribe to 
se for a elles-m&mes 1 vent pour re- V themselves as a 

( gle de, &c. ) ru/e fo, &c. 

f ils s'entredon- i 

se/o, FunaFautr* \ ^•de "^^ 



deaux 



p. (they ex 

5 ils «e sont dfc-f^ ST***" 

se for eux-mtmes I honores ) graced them- 

1 f selves 

1' ' 



, elles « sont flat- < /A '* *«f /«'" 
se for elles-memes < ,, •> lered them- 

f selves 
se for Fun Fautre ils s'eutr'aident j '*$* e r °" e a "' 



/orj' 



frf* ) rent " "£ eaf each other. 



Remark. &> is placed before a verb, and soi, after a 
preposition, and sometimes after a verb. 



106 



OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



EXERCISE. 

In a thousand instances we do not watch sufficiently over 

* mille occasion f. on * veille assez sur 

ourselves. The glory of the world (passes away) in an instant. 

soi = f . monde m. s'evanouit en — m. 

He gives himself (a great deal) of trouble. She tires herself. 

donne se beaucoup peine f. lasse se 

People should (very seldom) speak of themselves. Virtue is 
On doit rarement parler soi art. f. 

amiable in itself. We must take upon ourselves the care 

de soi On doit prendre sur soi soin m . 

of our own affairs. 
ses propre affaire f. pi. 



OF THE PRONOUN RELATIVE en. 



de lui of him « 
d'elle of her 

d'eux of them 
r^ d'elles of them 
de cela of that 
d'ki hence 



ifor-i 



' cet hommevous 
I plait, vous en I 
| parLez sou- j 

vent 
' je ne crois pas 
) cette femme 
| sincere, je m' 

en mefie 
* ces fruits parais- 
) sentbons, j'cw 
\ manger aisvo- 
I lontiers 
f voila de belles 
) oranges, vou- 
\ lez-vous m'e?i 
I donner ? 



( on ne ma 
trompe, 
suis eur 

' il arriva 
comme 
' part a is 



pas 
j 7 en 



ici, 

yen 



de la thence 



vousallez a Pa 
ris, et monsi- 
1 eur en vient 



1 



'that man pleases 
> you, you speak of 

I him often 

I I do not believe 
that woman sin- 
cere, I distrust 

) her 

| these fruits look 
good, I should 
I like to eat some 
) of them 

i these are beautiful 
oranges, will you 
give me some 

) 1 ' have not been 
I imposed \ipon % 
C I am sure of 
) it 

ihe arrived here 
as I was set- 
ting off from 
hence 
\you are going to 
Paris, this gen- 
tleman comes 
from thence. 



yfor^ 



OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 107 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN, OR ADVERB 7/. 

C C c'est un honnete ) , • r ; 

^ , . . , . ) i /• (he is an honest man* 

a lui to htm < homme, fiez-vous- \ . . . ,. ' 

(y S 

v ,, . - beetle raison est so- \ that reasoii is good, 

a elle ro Acr ^ Hd ^ je m ,^ refids £ JyieW tQ ^ 

I ces argumens sont f these argumenhare 

a eux to /Acm < P lt r 5ian ^ J e n V \ cogent J see no re- 
Yvoa point de re-f ?/ | to \ bem . 
( plique J r * 

£ accable de vos ci- \ loaded ithh your ci- 
* vilites, je ne sais f vilitits, I do not 
comment 3/ repon- ( know how to ac- 
dre ) knowledge them. 

( j'ai eprouve cette ) / experienced that 
a cela to it < perte quand j'y > loss, when I least 
( pensais le moins ) thought of it. 
C nous partons de Ywe set off from Lon 
ici here < Londres, quand > don, when you 

vous y venez ) camehither. 



a elles to them 



c'est un endroit ) // w aj??ie p/ece, / 
> intend to settle 



la Mere < charmant, je 

( compte m'3/ fixer ) there 

Remark. Y and en are always put before the verb, ex- 
cept with the imperative affirmative. 



EXERCISE. 



They speak (a great deal) of it. You like French 

On parlc beaucoup aimez art. Francais 2 

authors, you are always speaking of them. That is a delicate 
auteur 1 * 2 parlez 1 Ce delicat 2 

affair; the success of it is doubtful. See them ; I consent 
=-. { . 1 succcs m. douteux Voyez \co?istns3 

to it, but do not trust them. That is a fine appoint- 

2 * 1 5 vouj 2fiez 4 3/ 3 Ce charge 

ment : be bad long aspired to it. He has done 

f. * depuis long-temps 3 — rait 2 1 a/ai/ 

it ; but he will get nothing by it. 

ne 1 gagnera 3 rien 4 y 2 



108 OP POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

These pronouns are adjectives, which denote the pos- 
session of things. When we say, mon habit, my coat ; 
votre maison, your house ; son jar din, his or her gar- 
den ; it is the same as saying Vhabit qui est a moi, the 
coat which belongs to me ; la maison qui est a vous, the 
house which belongs to \ou ; Ic jar din qui est a lui, or a 
elle, the garden which belongs to him or to her. 

Of these pronominal adjectives, some always agree 
with a noun expressed, and the others with a noun under- 
stood ; hence there are two sorts of possessive pronouns. 

Of those that always agree with a nojn expressed, 
some relate to one person, and others' to several. 

PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES RELATING TO ONE PERSON, 



for the 


PERSON. 

Cist 

(2d 
(2d 


Singular, 
mon, m. ma,/, 
ton, m. ta,/. 
son, m. sa,/. 


Plural, 
mes, m.f. my 
tes, m. / thy 
ses, m.J. his, her, 


its 


PRONOMINAL ADJP:CT1VES 


RELATING TO MANY PERSONS. 


of the 


PERSON. 

{ 1st 

2%d 

( 3d 


Singular, 
notre, m. / 
votre, m.f, 
leur, m.f. 


Plural, 
nos, m.f. 
vos, m.f. 
leurs, m.f. 




our 

your 

their 





N. B. These possessive pronouns in French always 
agree in gender and number with the object possessed, 
and not with the possessor as in English, for which rea- 
son they must be repeated before every noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

Mon pere, ma mere, et mes My father, mother, and bro- 
frer*8 mnt a la camfagne avec thers are in the country, with 
vos amis et leurs enfans, your friends and their children. 

Mon cousin est alle consoler sa My cousin is gone to visit and 
saur, qui a perdu son fils, console his sister, who has lott 

her son. 



OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 109 

Mon, ton, son, are also used before a noun feminine, 
when beginning with a vowel, or h mute ; thus, mon 
dme, my soul ; ton humeur, thy humour ; son amitie> his 
friendship ; must be said instead of ma dme, ta humeur, 
sa amitie. 

EXERCISE. . 

My principles, my love of retirement, my taste 

— pe gout m. pour art. retraiie f. amour m. 

for (every thing) thit (is connected) with learning, and 

tout ce qui tient a art,, instruction, 

my detestation of all spirit of party, (every thing) has 

haine f. h. asp. pour tsprit parti tout a 

induced me to prefer a life passed in the closet, to the 
porti prSferer * art. vie f. * de * cabinet 

active life of the world. Do not think, my daughter, that thy 
= 2 f . 1 m, * pense que 

candour, thy ingenuousness, ihy taste, so delicate and so 
= f. ingenuite f. m. — cat 

refined, and even thy graces, can shelter thee from 

Jin meme — puissent mettre a Vabri de 

censure. His wit, his talests, his honesty, 

art. — f. esprit in. — m. honntteti f. h. m. 

and even hU (good nature) make him beloved by every body. 

mime bonhomie f. font aimer de tout le monde. 

Our constancy and our efforts will (at last) surmount aH 

= f . — m. * enfin 2 surmonteront 1 

obstacles. I see nothing that can (be cen- 

art. — m. pi. vols 2 nt 1 rien 3 que on puisse re* 

sured) in your conduct. Their taste for the fantastical, !he 

prendre daris conduite t. pour bizarre, m. 

monstrous, and the marvellous, gives to all their compo- 
monstrueux, m. merveilleux^ m. donne — 

sitions, although very fine in themselves, an air of deformity, 
f. quoiqut en elles-mlmes } — m. difformiU f. 

which shocks at first sight. 
qui choque a art. coup-d'ceil. 

Of the pronouns, which, always agree with nouns tm- 
derstood, some relate to one person, and others to several 
persons. 

Those which relate only to one person are : 

m. Sing. f. Sing. m. Plur. f. Plur. 

Iff, Le rntan, lamiennt y les miens, les miennes, mine 

2d. Le lien, la limine, lis thus, les tiennes, thine 

3d. Le Hen, lasicnnc, lessiens, Its iitnnts, his, hep, »U 

11 



110 OP POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Those which relate to several persons are : 

m. Sing. f. Sing. PI. of both Gen. 

1st Le ndtre, la noire, Its nbtres, ours 

2d. Le voire, la vdtre, les vdtres, yours 

3d. Le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs 

N. B. The real use of these pronouns is to spare the 
repetition of the nouns, which have been expressed a lit 
tie before. 

EXAMPLE. 

Avez-vous toujours votre che- Have you still your horse ? 1 
val t je n'oi plus le mien. have disposed of mine. 

EXERCISE. 

Is it your temper or hers, that hinders you from living well 
ce humeur f. qui empeche de tivre 

together ? If it be yours, it is easy for you to remedy 

ensemble ce est il 2 aise 3 * 1 de porter remede 

it, by mastering (your temper) ; if it be hers, redouble your 
y en prenant sur vous-mtme ; ce redoubles de * 

complaisance, attention, and good behaviour ; it is 

— de — de proce'de m. pi. il 

very seldom that this method (proves unsuccessful). If my 

iris -rare ce moyen ne reussisse pas Si 

friends had served me with the same zeal as yours, it 

avaient servi meme sHe m. que il 

is very certain that I (should have) succeeded : but yours have 

ires-sur aurais riussi ont 

been all fire, and mine all ice. All the pictures which we 
eti de deglace tableau m. que 

expected from Rome are arrived : there are some that are a 
atlendions arrivis il y en a qui 

little damaged ; but yours, his, and mine, are in good 

peu endommagis «n 

condition. We know perfectly well what are your 

Hat m. savons parfaitement * quels 

amusements in town, and I assure you we are very 

— a art. ville f. — que sommes bien 

far from envying you them ; but if you knew 

Moigni pi. envier 3 1 2 connaissiez quels 

ours in the country, it (is most likely) you 

sont a campagne f. il y a toule apparence que 

(would not be long) in giving them the preference. You 

ne tarderiez pas a donner leur — f. 

have opened your heart to me with that noble franknea6 
avez ouvtrt — franchise f 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



Ill 



which so well becomes an honest man : this confidence well 
qui si 2 3 sied 1 a honnete eonfiance f. 3 

deserves mine, 
mirite 1. 

Remark. When through politeness vous is used for 
tu 9 then votre, vos, must take the place of ton,ta, tes, and 
le votre, kt votre, les votres, be used for le tien, la tienne, 
les tien$) les tiennes. 

EXAMPLES. 

Que vous ressenxhles peu a vos How little you resemble your 

ncUres ! ancestors ! 

Quand vous aurez entendu nos When you have heard our 

*vison.i f nouttc9uteronsles votres. reasons, we will listen to yours. 



§m. 

OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Relative pronouns are those which relate to a pre- 
ceding noun, or pronoun, called the antecedent. In the 
phrase, Vhomme qui joue, the man who plays ; qui re- 
lates to the substantive homme ; V homme is then the an- 
tecedent to the pronoun relative qui. 



Qui 



Que 



Dont 

or 

de qui 



who 

which 

whom 

which 

of which 

whose 

of whom 



Dieu qui voit tout 



< God who 
I thing 

leschevaux qmcourent \ the ho F ses 
1 I running 

' '"homme que vous $ the man whom 



Liquet, 

Laqutllt 
Auzquels | 
Auxquelles*- 



u<, 

I cherchez 

Sles lois que nous ob- 
servons 
$ liamlte dont vous 
I vous plaignez 
( la nature dont nous 
I ignorons Ze* secrets 
£ les gens de qui vous 
\ parlez 

C c'est une condition 

< sans laquelle il ne 

( vtut rien /aire 

< to whomC ceux auxquels il s'est 

adresse, ont refuse" 

de le diftndre 



which 



sees every 

which are 

you 
seek 

the laws which we ob- 
serve 

the insult of which you 
complain 

nature whose secrets 

are unknown to us 
| the people of whom 
you speak 

it is a condition, with- 
out which he will do 
nothing 

those to whom he ap- 
plied, refused to pr«*~ 
tect him 



112 



OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. 



Qttoi 



I ce soul des choses a I 

what < quoi v ous ne pen-< 

( sez pas ( 

L la cause, pourquoif 

which < on Va arrets esU 

I connue i 



these are things of 

which you do not 

think 
the reason why he 

was arrested, is 

known 



Qwt, que, and dont, are of both genders and both num- 
bers. 

Lequel is a compound of quel, and the article le, la, 
les, with which it coalesces in the following manner : 



Plural. 

lesquels lesquelles which 

desquels desquelles of which 

aux quels auxquelhs to which 

This pronoun always agrees in gender and number 
with its antecedent. Quoi, which sometimes supplies its 
place, is always governed by a preposition. 



Singular. 
lequel laquelle 
duquel de laquelle 
auquel a laquelle 



§iv. 



OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. 



Pronouns absolute are those which have no relation to 
They are >be five following : 

( je vous dirai qui Va J 1 will tell you who 
> fait \ has done it 

\ vous pouves consult er < you may consult 
qui vous voudrcz ( whom you please 
qui consulterez- J whom will you con- 
vows ? I suit ? 
( il ne suit que resou- ( he does not know on 
I dre I what to determine 
que ferez-vous ? what will you do ? 
en quoi puis-je vcus ( in what can T servo 
servir ? \ you ? 

. ( there is in it, I do 
it ne sots] notknowtf/w/ob 

I scurity 




] il y a la 
j quoi do 



OP DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 



113 



Quel 



Lequel * 



what 

what 

which 
which 



( quelle instabiKtt j 

< dans les choses ! 
( humaines ! ) 

Sil ne sait quel parti S 
prendre } 

C lequel aimes-vous ( 

< le mieux de ces < 
( tableaux ? ( 
J je sais bizn lequel X 
\ je choisirais \ 



what instability in 
human affairs I 

he does not know 
what resolution 
to take 

which do you pre 
fer of those pic- 
tures ? 

I know well which 
I would choose 



Qui applies only to persons. Que and quoi to 
things. 

Quel, masc. quelle, fern. sing, quels, m. quelles, f. pi. 
always precede a substantive, the gender and number 
of which they take. 

Lequel, duquel, auquel, &c. are used to mark a dis- 
tinction between several objects. 



§v. 



OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, &C 

Demonstrative pronouns are those which point, as it 
were, to the objects spoken of. These are, 



Singular. 


Plural. 






masc. 


fern. 


masc. fern. 






ce, cet* 


cette 


this, or that ces ces 


these, 


Or tfl08€ 


celui 


celle 


this, or thai ceux celles 


these, 


or thou, 


•elui-ci 


celle-ci 


this ceux-ci celle3-ci 


these 




eelui-la 
ceci 
eel a 


celle-la 


that ceux-la celles-la 
that k taese nave no plural. 


those 















ce before a consonant ce litre th& book 

1 ce before an h aspirated cf heros that hero 

■ cet before a vowel cet enfant this child 

i cet before an h mute cet homme that man 

•ette before any feminine noun cette femme that woman 
li* 



114 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

C when without a noun, ) C qui est-ce ? ) who is it ? 

ge < intimates a person, or > as < ce que je vou* > whatl tell you 



thing spoken of ) ( dis est vrai ) is true 



EXERCISE. 

Nothing is so opposite to that true eloquence, the office 

he 2 rien 1 oppose veritable — f. fonc~ 

(of which) is to ennoble (every thing), as the use 

tion f. 2 1 de 1 ennoblir 3 tout 2 * que e?nploi m. 

of those refined thoughts, and hunting after those light, 

fin 2 pensee f. 1. art. recherche f. de /£ger 2 

airy, unsolid ideas, which, like a leaf of 

delie 2 sans consislance 4 idee f. 1 comme feuille f. 

beaten metal, acquire brightness only by losing 

baltu2 — m. 1 ne prennent de art. iclat m. <7«e en perdant 
part of their solidity. This man has nothing in common 

* * art. = f . hm. de csmmun 

with that hero. This long restrained hatred broke 

h asp. 1 long-temps 3 contenu 4 /jajne f. 2 Aetata 
out, and was the unhappy source of those dreadful events. 

fut malheureux — f. terrible iv&ne- 

Jt is a great pleasure to me. ft was a great 

ment m. pi. Ce plaisir m. * fut 

pain to us. 

d&plaisir m. * nous. 



§vi. 

OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

Indefinite pronouns are those which are of a vague 
and indeterminate nature. 
They are of four sorts. 



FIRST CLASS. 

Those that are never joined to a substantive. 

one on aime a se flatter J one J s f a P l to flatter one ' S 

a man J on n ^ esi V as toujours ( a man is not always mas- 
( maitre de soi \ ter of his own temper. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



115 



a woman 

somebody 

people 

they 



you 



they 



[ on n'est pas toujours ' 

maitresse d'aller ou*< 

j Ton veut 

on frappe a laporte 

on pense et * Ton ditj 

tout haul I 

C oh raconte diversementX 

I cette histoire \ 

on acquiert Vexperi-S 
ence a ses dipens \ 

( on trouve partout desS 
£ imp or tuns S 

on privient qu'on 
point eu VintenV 
de, &.c. 
Quand on vous dit 
que * Ton compte 
sur vous 

l'on vous blame 
* on It loue, on 
tort 



iVal 
Hon< 



i si * 1 
<? e/ si ! 
( a ton 



it is not always in 
the power of a wo- 
man to go where 
she wishes 

somebody knocks at 
the door 

people think and say 
openly 

they relate that story 
differently 

we acquire experi- 
ence at our own 
expense 

you will find trou- 
blesome people 
every where 

J beg to observe 
that / had no in- 
tention to, &c. 

when /tell you that 
/ depend upon 
you 

if they blame you 
and praise him, 
they are wrong. 



t one 

<%uelqu y un 1 somebody 
( some one 



Chaeun 



each 
every one 



Iquelqu'un m'a dit, somebody 
I told me. 

\ quiconque connaii Its hzmmes^ap- 
f prend a s^en defier, whoever 
f know T s mankind, learns to dis- 
) trust them. 

S chaeun s r en plaint, every one 
complains of him. 



feton \ it is better for > 

• In- \ / euphony to | 
stead lo\xon\ part these 

of i V words with i * 

V si on J an /' 

les habitudes qu'on con- 
and ( trade 

• In- j ce apres quoi on court 
•tead \ quoiqu'on croie 

of / un homme a qui on re- ' 
^ proche 



' et /'on \ when the next 
/ word does not 

! ou /'on \ begin with an 
V /, as is seen by 

, si /'on J the examples 

. les habitudes que Von con- 

traote 
1 ce apres quoi Von court 
| bien que Von croie 
un homme a qui Von re- 

proche 



H6 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



Aulrux 



Personne 



Rien 



other people 



others 

nobody 
no one 

nothing 

not any thing 

any thing 



'n'enviez pas le bien d'autrui, do not 
covet the property of others. 

ne faiies pas a aulrui ce que vous ne 
voudritz pas qu'on vous fit, do 
not do to others what you would 
not have done to you. 

Slafierte ne convient a personne, pride 
becomes nobody. 
rien ne lui plait, nothing pleases 

him. 
y a-Uil rien qui puisse lui plaire ? is 
there any thing that can please 
him? 



EXERCISE. 

If you (behave yourself) (in that manner), what w T ill people 
vous conduisez ainsi # on 2 

say of you ? It (is thought) that this news is true. 

dira-t 1 On croit nouvetle f. 

They write me word from Ispahan that thou hast left 

ecrit * — as quitli art. 

Persia, and art now at Paris. One cannot read 

Perse f. que tu es actuelhment a ne peut lire 

Telemachus, without becoming better : we there find (every 
Telemaque m. sons devenir meilleur, on y trouce par- 

where) a mild philosophy, noble and elevated sentiments : we 
tout ctoux =f. des—2 eleve 3. — 1 

there find in every line the effusions of a noble soul, and %ec 

y voit a chaque ligne &panchement m. beau f. 
admire precepts calculated to effect the happiness of 

des precepte pi. propre /aire bonheur m. 

the world. 

mondem. 



SECOND CLASS. 



Those which are always joined to a substantive. 



Quelqu* 



Chaque 



Qutlconque 



each, every 



whoever 
whatever 



!si cela itait rrai, quelque historien 
en aurait parte, if that were 
true, some historian would have 
mentioned it. 
C a chaque jour suffit sa peine, the 
? trouble of each day is sufficient 
( of itself. 

( il n'y a raison quelconque qui pu- 
\ isse Vy obliger, no reason what- 
f ever can oblige him to it. 



OP INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



117 



Certain 

Vn 



\ certain 
\ some 



a, an 



certain homme, a certain man. 

certaines nouvelles, some news. 
(fat vu un homme, I saw a man; 
2 prenez une orange, take an 
( orange 



THIRD CLASS, 

These which are sometimes joined to a substantive, and 
sometimes not. 



Nul no, none 



Pasun no, not one 



Aucu* no, none 



Autre other 



Mime same 



Tei. 



Plusieurs 



such 
like 

several 



C sev 
( mai 



many 



C all 
T§ut / every 

( every thing 



C nutie raisonnepeut It convaincre, no 
1 reason can convince him ; 
j nul d'eux ne Pa rencontre, not one 
£ of them has met him. 
'il n'y a pas une erreur dans cet ouv- 
rage, there is no error in that 
I work ; 
pas un ne It dit, not one says 
so. 

!je ne connais aucun de vosjuges, I 
know none of your judges ; 
iln'afatt aucunt difficult, he has 
made no difficulty. 
' strvez-vous d'une autre expression, 
make use of another expres- 
i sion ; 
je vous prenais pour un zu/re, I took 

you for another. 
'c'esl le meme homme qui je vis hier r 
he is the same man I saw yester- 
day ; 
cet homme n'est plus le meme, that 

man is no longer the same. 
r il tint a peu pris un tel discours, 
he delivered nearly such a dis- 
course ; 
je ne vis jamais rien de lei, I never 

caw any thing like it. 
il est arrivi plusieurs vaisstaux, se- 
veral vessels are arrived ; 
il ne faut pas (pie plusieurs putis- 
sent pour un seul, many must not 
suffer for one. 
( tons les ctrcs cries, all created be- 
; ings; 

\ tout disparuil devant Dieu, every 
f thing vanishes before God. 



118 



OF THE VERB. 



FOURTH CLASS. 



Out que 

Quoi que whatever 



Of those which are followed by quel. 
whoever 



Que/ que 



( whoever 
\ whatever 



Tel que such as 



Quelque — 
que 



C whatever 
\ however 



Tout — que however 



L qui que tu sois, whoever thou may- 

2 est be ; 

( qui que ce soit, whoever it may be. 

Squoi que ce soit, whatever it may 
be ; 
quoi que vous disiez, whatever you 
may say. 
Squel que soit eel hemme, whoever 
that man may be ; 
quel que soit votre courage, what- 
ever your courage may be. 
C cette etoffe est telle que vous la vou- 
< lez, this stuff is such as you wish 
( for. 

fquelque raison que vous donniez, 
i whatever reason you may give", 
j quelque puissant que vous soyzz, 
L however powerful you may be. 
( tout savant qu'il est, however leara- 
I ed he may be. 



CHAP. V. 



OF THE VERB. 



The Verb is a word, the chief use of which is to ex- 
press affirmation : it has persons, moods, and tenses. 

In the phrase, la vertu est aimable, virtue is amiable, 
it is affirmed that the quality aimable, belongs to la 
rertu ; likewise in this sentence, le vice n'est pas aima- 
ble, vice is not amiable, it is affirmed that the quality 
aimable, does not belong to le vice ; the word est express- 
es this affirmation. 

That concerning which we affirm, or deny a thing, is 
called the subject, and what is affirmed, or deaied, is call- 
ed its attribute. In the two preceding sentences vertu 
and vice are subjects of the verb est, and aimable is the 
attribute affirmed respecting the one, and denied with re- 
spect to the other. 



OF THE VERB. 119 

There are in verbs two numbers, the singular and plu- 
ral, and in each number three persons. 

The first person is that who speaks ; it is desig- 
y nated by je, I, in the singular, and by nous, we, in 
i the plural : as, je pense, I think ; nous pensons, we 
think. 

The second is the person spoken to, expressed 
by tu, thou, in the singular, and by vous, you, in the 
plural ; as, tu pensti, thou thinkest ; vous pensez, 
you think. 

The third is the person spoken of, known by il, 
he, or elle, she, in the singular, and by Us, or elles, 
they, in the plural ; as, il, or elle pense, he, or she 
thinks ; Us, or elles pensent, they think. 

All substantives, either common, or proper, are of the 
third person, when not addressed, or spoken to. 

£ A word is known to be a verb, when it admits 
Rfm < ^ e P ersona ^ pronouns ; thus, jSmY, to finish, is 
\ a verb, because we can say, je finis, tu finis, il, 
'or ellefinit, &c. 

There are five moods, or modes of conjugating 
verbs. 

C The infinitive mood affirms, in an indefinite man- 

1 / ner, without either number, or person ; as, aimtr, 
( to love ; avoir aime, to have loved. 

!The indicative simply indicates and asserts a 
thing in a direct manner ; as, faime, I love ; il 
aima, he loved. 

2 { The conditional affirms a thing with a condition, 
\ as, j'aimerais, si, &c. 1 should love, if, &c. 

i The imperative is used for commanding, exhort- 
4 / ing, requesting, or reproving ; as, aime, love (thou) ; 
( aimons, let us love. 

ictive subjects a thing to what pre- 

vous voulez, quHl aime, you wish that 

que nous aimions, that we may 




120 OF THE VERB. 

There are three tenses, the present, which declares 
a thing now existing, or doing, as, je lis, I read ; the 
past, or preterit, denoting that the thing has been done, 
as,j'ailu,I have read; the future, denoting that the 
thing will be done, as, je lirai, I shall read. But these 
are subdivided, so that there are several preterit, and two 
future tenses. 

There are five kinds of verbs, the active, passive, neu- 
ter, pronominal, and impersonal. 

The verb active is that which expresses an action, 
the object of which is either declared, or understood. 
Aimer, to love, is a verb active, as it expresses an ac- 
tion, the object of which may be quelqu'un, some per- 
son, or quelque chose, some thing ; as, aimer Dieu, to 
love God ; aimer V etude, to love study. The object of this 
action is called the regimen, or goverment of the verb active* 

C A simple question will show this regimen, as, 
N "R • qu*est-ce que faime ? what do I love ? answer, 
\ Dieu, God. Dieu is then the regimen of the 
* Verb faime. 

In the French language the passive verbs are sup- 
plied by the verb etre, as they are in English by the 
verb to be, and the participle past of the verb active 
followed by the preposition de, or par, the subject and 
regiment of the verb active being reversed. Thus to 
change the verbs from active to passive in these 
sentences, mon pere m'aime, my father loves me ; le 
milan a enleve le canari, the kite has carried off the 
canary ; tiiey must be reversed in this way, je suis 
aime de mon pere, I am loved by my father : le canari. 
a ete enlevg par le milan, the canary has been carried off 
by the kite. 

The verb neuter, is that which has no direct regimen^ 
as the verb active has. Alter, to go ; marcher, to walk, 
are verbs neuter, because wc cannot say, oiler quel- 
nu'un, to go somebody ; marcher quelque chvse, to walk 
something. Plaire to please, is likewise a verb neuter, 
as we cannot say in French plaire qttelqu'un, to please 
somebody, but plaire a quelqu'un. 



OF THE VERB. 121 

The pronominal verbs are those in which each person 
is conjugated through all the tenses, with a double per- 
sonal pronoun. 

fje me t I myself nous nous we ourselves 

jtute, thou thyself vans vou,{ >' 8U ^flL, 

as < (or ye yourselves 

il se, he himself lis se \ ./ Al _ , 

[e^e, she herself erte se $ they themselves 

There are four sorts of pronominal verbs. 

The pronominal verb active, when the action of 
the verb falls upon the subject, as, je mefiatte, I 
natter myself; il se lone, he praises himself. Al- 
most all the active verbs are susceptible of being re- 
^fleeted. 

C The pronominal verb neuter, which indicates 
1 only a state, a disposition of the subject, as, se re- 
\pentir, to repent, se desisier, to desist, s'enfuir, to 
{ run away. 

The reciprocal verb expresses a reciprocity of 
action between two, or more subjects, and conse- 
quently has no singular; such are s'entr'aidcr, to 
help one another, s'entre-donner, to give each other. 
The pronominal verb impersonal, is only used in 
the third person singular. Active verbs frequently 
assume this form, in a passive sense, for the sake of 
brevity and energy ; as, il se batit, there is building; 
il se faisait, there was doing ; il se conclut, there 
was concluded ; il s'est dit, it has been said ; il se 
donnera nne grande bo faille, a great battle will be 
„ fought. 

The impersonal verb is only used in the third person 
singular, with the pronoun il, and has no relation to any 
person or thing. JSfciger, to snow, is an impersonal 
verb, as it cannot be applied to any person, or thing ; H 
7icige, it snows, il neigeait, it did sno^- 

Though the greatest part of the French verbs are 
12 



122 OF CONJUGATIONS. 

regular, there are, however, as in other languages, some 
that are irregular, and others that are defective. Regu- 
lar verbs are those which are conjugated conformably to 
a general standard. Irregular verbs are those which do 
not conform to the verb employed as a model ; and de- 
fective verbs are those which, in certain tenses, or per- 
sons, are not used. 




OF CONJUGATIONS. 

To conjugate a verb is to rehearse it with all its differ- 
ent inflections, 

The French have four conjugations, -which are easily 
distinguished by the termination of the present of the in- 
finitive. 

-er as, parler, aimer, chanter, donnfi?', &c 
-ir as, finiV, sentir. ouvrir. iem'r, £ 
-oir as, recevosr, aperccvo?r, devoir, &ce. 
-re as, rendre, plaire, paroitre, reduire, 
joindre, he. 

The French, like most modern nations, not having a 
Sufficient number of inflections in their verbs to represent 
the great variety of their tenses, supply this defici 
With two auxiliary verbs, avoir and etre, to have and to 
be. 

Those tenses in a verb, whose inflections are dei: 
pure and unmixed from the parent stock, are called 
pie tenses, and are always in French expressed by i; 
gle word. But the -tenses, which are formed by the uni- 
on of those of the verbs avoir, or tire, with a par 
pie past, are called compound, and n 
of not less than two; or three words. Thus 
j 9 avais, feus, &c. parler, je parle, je 
simple tenses ; but avoir c 

avoir parte, fai parte, fc\ ,'....' &c. are 

compound tenses. 



AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 123 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB Avoir, TO HAVE. 

INFINITIVE. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 

PRESENT. PAST 

avoir to have avoir eu io have had 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

ayant having 



past. > ayant eu 


having 


had 


eu, m, eue, /. had ) 




INDICATIVE. 




PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE, OR COMPOUND 


OF THE PRESENT. 




j'ai I have j'ai "| 


I have 


" 




tu as thou hast tu as 


thou hast 




■ 


il, or elle a he, or she has il a 1 


he has 




*had 


nous avons we have nous avons ( ett 


we have 




vous avez you have vous avez J 


you have 






ils, orelles ont they have ila ont J 


they have 







EXERCISE. 
C In the following exercises, the substantive be- 
■o 2 m & ta ^ en m a partitive sense, it will be neces- 

ysary to use the article, according to the direc- 
V. tion given, page 84. 

Present,— I have books. Thou hast friends. He has 
livre. ami 

honesty. She has sweetness. We have credit. You have 

honnlteti f. h m. douceur f. — m. 

riches. They have virtues. They have modesty. 

riches se pi. m. vertu f. = f. 

Preterit Indefinite. — I have had pleasure. Thou hast had 

plaisir m. 
gold. He has had patience. She has had beauty. We have 
or in. — f. = f. 

had honours. You have had friendship. They have had 

honneur amitit f. m. 

sentiments. They have had sensibility. 

Imperfect. — I had ambition. Thou hadst wealth. He had 
. bien m. 



124 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSfclS. 



PLUPERFECT, Or COMPOUND OF THE 



IMPERFECT, 
j'avais / had, or did j'avais 

have 
tu avais thou hadst, or tu avais 

didsl have 
il avait he had, or did il avait 

have 
nousavions we had, or did nous avions 

have 
vous aviez youhad,ordid vous aviez 

have 
ils avaient they had, or ils avaient 

did have 



Veu 



IMPERFECT. 
I had 

thou hadst 

he had 

we had 

you had 

they had 



had 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, OV COMPOUND 
PRETERIT DEFINITE. OF THE PRETERIT. 



j'eus I had 

tu eus thou hadst 

il eut he had 

nous eumes we had 

vous efites ycu had 

ils eurent they had 



j'eus 




I had 


tu eus 




thou hadst 


il eut 


>eu 


he had 


nous efimes 


we had 


vous eutes 




you had 


ils eurent 




they had 



>had 



sincerity. She had graces. We had oranges. You had pears. 
= f. -j- — poire 

They had apples. Th^y had lemons 
m. pomme f. J citron. 

Pluperfect. I had had apricots. Thou hadst had nectarines, 
abricot brugnon 

He had had walnut*. . She had had hazel-nuts. We had had 

noix & noisette. 

chesnuts. You had had figs. They had had medlars. They 
chataigne figw na. nejle f. 

had had filberts. 
aveline. 

Preterit definite. 1 had plums. Thou hadst cherrie? 

prune cerise 

He had strawberries. She had pine-apples. We had almonds* 

fraise ananas amande 

V'ou had currants. They had raspberries. They had 

groseille ra. framboise f. 
grapes. 
raisin m. pi. 



AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 126 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES, 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



j'aurai / shall, or will have j'aurai ") 

tu a?iras Ihsu shalt, or wilt in auras 

have 
il aura he icill have 



nousauronswe shall have 
vous aurez you shall have 
ils auront they mil hace 



il aurat 
nous aurons 
vous aurez 
ils auront 



feu 



I shall, or > 
will have 
thou wilt 

have 
he will 

have 
we shall 

have 
you will 

have 
they will 

have 



Vhad 



In the following exercises, the addition of 
o J an adjective, after the substantive, will make 
) no change in the remark on the preceding ex- 
_ ercise. 

Preterit anterior. — I had bad very black ink. Thou 

fori 2 noir 3 encre f I. 
hadst had honest proceedings. She had had uncommon 

honnUe 2 procLdi 1 rare 2 

graces. We had had very ripe grapes. You had had exquisite 
1. 2 mur 3 1. exquis2 

melons. They baa had ready money. 
— m. 1. comptant 2 argent m. 1. 

Future absolute. — I shall have studious pupils. Thou 

appliquS 2 eleve m. 1. 
wilt have horrid pains. He will have ridiculous ideaa, 
horrible 2 peine f. 1. ridicule 2 idee f. 1. 

We shall ha*e useless cares. You will have true and real 

inutile 2 soin m. 1. 2 reel 3 

pleasures. They will have poignant griefs. 

m. 1. cuisant 2 chagrin m. 1. 

-o ( But if the adjective precedes the substantive, 
( then de 7 or d\ only is to be used. 

Future anterior. — I shall have had good paper. Thou 

papier m. 
wilt have had excellent fruit. She will have had charming 
m. pi. charm ant 

flowers. We shall have had good pens. You will have had 
fleurs f, plume f. 

12* 



126 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 

CONDITIONAL. 
SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 



PAST, Or COMPOUND OF THE CON- 
DITIONAL. 



j' aurais I should^could, j'aurais 

or would have 
tu aurais thou should'st tu aurais 

have 
il aurait he should havp il aurait 

nousaurions we should have nousaurions 

vous auriez youshouldhave vous auriez 

ils auraient they should have ils auraient 



should ~) 

have 
thou should* 

est have 
he should 

have 
we should 

have 
you should 

liavt 
they should 

have 



had 



large buildings. They will have had fine clothes. 
grand bailment m. supcrbe habit m. 

Present of the conditional. — I should have fine engrav- 
er aru re 
ings. Thou should'st have pretty playthings. He should 
f. joli joujou m. 

have immense treasures. We should have beautiful pictures. 

— tresorxa. tableau m. 

You would have pretty houses. They should have long con- 

f. — 

versations. 
f. 

The preceding remark holds good likewise 
after a word expressing quantity, such as 
.p Jbeaucoup, a great deal, great many ; pen, 
Mittle, few ; plus, more ; mouis, less ; irop, too 
much, too many, &c. except bien, much, ma- 
ny, which requires du, de la, de P, des. 

Conditional past. — I should have had a great deal o/trouble. 

peine f. 
Thou would'st have had more pleasure. He would have 

de 
had (a vast deal) of knowledge. We should have had more 
infiniment connaissance f. pi. 

opportunities of succeeding. You would certainly 
de oceddon f. pi riussir cerlainemcnt 



N. B. ) 



AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 127 

J'eusse eu, tu eussts eu, il exit eu, nous eussions ev, vov* 
eussies eu, Us eussent eu, I should have had, &c. is also 
used for the conditional past. 

IMPERATIVE. 



Aie, or aye Have (thou) 

Qu'il ait Let him have 

Ayons Let us have 

Ayez Have (ye) 

Qu'ils aient Let thzm have 



have had many advantages over him. They would have 

1 beaucoup de avantage sur lui 

had many enemies. 

^ bicn ennemi* 

Observe that, when the verb is followed by several 
substantives, the proper article and preposition must be 
repeated before each. 

Imperative. — Have complaisance, attention, and 

— f. egard m. pi. 

politeness. Let bim have modesty, and more correct ideas, 
pulitesse f. — f. 2 juste 1. 

Let her have more decency. Let us have courage and firmness. 
dicence — m. fermetef 

Have gravy soup, nice roast-beef, and a pudding. Let 

un gras 2 soupe f. i unhon rosbif m. pouding m. 

them have a ] e, rum, and punch. Let them have manners, 
m. aile f. rum m. ponche. m. f. rnceursi. pi. 

and conduct. 
conduile f. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. — That I may have many friends. That thou 

beaucoup 
may'st have good reasons to give him. That he may have 

donner lui 
elevated sentiments. That we may have courage and mag- 

'•2 — m. 1. bravoure f. 

nanimity. That you may have delightful landscapes, and 
= f. dilicieux 2 paysagt m. pi. 1. 

beautiful sea-pieces. That they may have more condescension 
marine f. pi. — dance 

and more prepossessing manners. 

2 prevenant 3 manicre f. pi. 1. 

Preterit.— That I may have had wine, beer, and cider. 

inn m. biere f. cidre m. 



128 



AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 

Que* 



PRETERIT, Or COMPOUND 

^1 



That Que 

j'aie I map have j'aie 

tu aies thou may' 'st have tu aies 

il ait he may have il ait 

nous ayons we may have nous ayons 

vous ayez you may have vous ayez 

ils aient they may have ils aient 



► eu 



OF THE PRESENT. 

That 



I may have 



thou may'st 

have 
he. may have 

we may have 

you may have 

they may have 



had 



That thou may'st have had a good horse, and a fine dog. 

cheval m. chien in. 

That he may have had enlightened judges. That we may have 

eclair e 2 jwge m. 1. 
had snow, rain, and wind. That you may have liad a great 

neige f. pluie f. vent m. 
dining-room, a beautiful drawing-room, a pretty 

salle-a-manger f. superbe salon-de-compagnie ra. joli 

dressing-room, and a charming bed-room. That 

cabinet de toilette m. — mant chambre-a-coucher f. 

they may have had vast possessions, fine meadows, and de- 
vaste — f. prairie f. de- 

lightful groves. 
licieux 2bois m. 1. 

Imperfect. — That I might have a sword, musket, and 

ipie f. fusil m. 
pistols. That thou might'st have a knife, a spoon, and a 
pistolet'm, couteau m. cuillere f. 

fork. That we might have a penknife, pencils, and good 

fourcheltei. canifm. pinceau m. 

copies. That he might have a coach, a good house, and 

modele m. carrosse m. f. 



< 1 

Rem. < the 
/En 



The subjunctive, in French, is always preceded by 
e conjunction que, that, which is often suppressed in 
glish. 



AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 120 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 





PLUPERFECT, OT COMPOUND 


IMPERFECT. 


OF THE IMPERFECT. 


Que That 


Que 




That 




j'eusse I had, or might 


j'eusse 




I might 




have 


- 




have 




tu eusses thou mighVst 


tu eusses 




thou might- 




have 






est have 




il eut he might have 


il eut 


► eu 


he might 
have 


► had 


nous eussions we might have 


nous eus- 
aions 




we might 
have 




vous eussiez you might have 


vous eus- 
siez 




you might 
have 




Us eussent they might have 


ils eussent 




they might 






- 




have 





furniture, simple but elegant. That you might have 

meuble, m. pi. — mats — 

health and great respect. That they might have fruitful 

saute f. un consideration f. fertile^ 

lands. 

terre f. 1. / 

Pluperfect. That I might have had friendship. That thou 

amitU f. 
might'st have had gloves, boots, and horses. That he 

gant m. hotte f. cheval m. 

might have had zealous and faithful servants. That we 

zelS 2 fidtle 3 domestique m. 1. 

might have had fine clothes, precious jewels, and magnificent 

= 2 bijou m. 1 magniftque 2 
furniture. That you might have had warm friends. That 

1 chaude 2 1 

they might have had greatness of soul and pity. 

grandeur f. pitiS f. 



N.B.5 



The verb avoir^ serves not only as an auxiliary tu conju- 
gate its own compound tenses, but likewise the compound 
tenses of the verb tirt, and those of the active, the imper- 
sonal, and almost all the neuter verbs. 



130 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 

SENTENCES ON THE SAME VERB, WITH A 
NEGATIVE. 

In the following sentences, the preposition de or d y , is 
put before the substantive, according as it begins with a 
consonant, or a vowel, ne between the personal pronoun 
and the verb, and pas or point, after the verb in the sim- 
ple tenses, and between the verb and the participle in the 
compound tenses ; as, 

Je n'ai pas de livres, J have no bonks. 

Tu n'avafc pas de bien Thou hadst no wealth. 

Elle n'eut pas d'honnetetd, She had no honesty. 

Nous n'avons pas eu d'amiti£, We have had no friendship. 

Vous n'aviez pas eu de puissans You had not had powerful 

amis, friends. 

lis n'auront pas d'ennemis re- They will not have formidable 

doutables, j enemies. 



EXERCISE. 

INDICATIVE. Present. I have no precious medals. 

= 2 medaille f. 1. 
We have no useless things. Preterit indefinite. 

inutile 2 chose f. 1 
I have had no constancy. We have had no generosity. 

== f . = f . 

Imperfect. Thou hadst not a beautiful park. You had no 

pare m. 
good cucumbers. Pluperfect. He had had no fine houses. 

concombre m. 
They had had no money. Preterit definite. He had not 

argent m. 
a skilful gardener. They had no carpets. Preterit an- 

habile jar dinier ra. tapis m. 

terior. Thou hadst had no complaisance. You had had no 

— f. 
great talents. Future absolute. I shall have no great bu- 
— m. co- 

siness. We shall have no uncommon prints. Future 

faire L pi. rare 2 eslampe f. 1. 

anterior. Thou shalt have had no consolation. You shall not 

— f. 
have had quiet days. 

tranquille2, m. 1. 



AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 131 

CONDITIONAL. 
Present.— He should not have bad pictures. They 

mauvais tableau m. 
sfiould have no leisure. 
loisi* m. 
Past. — I should have had no griefs. We should have 

chagrin m. pi. 
had no troubles. 
peine f. pi. 

IMPERATIVE. 
Have no impatience. Let him not have absurd 

sing. — absurde 2. f. pi. 

ideas. Let us not have dangerous connexions. Have no such 

1. =2 tamonf.pl. tel 

whims. Let them not have 50 whimsical a project. 
caprice m. bizarre 2. projtt m. 1. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. —That I may have no protectors. That we may 

= m. 
have no success. 
succh m. 
Preterit. — That he may have had no perseverance. That 

= f. 
they may have had no valour. 

bravQure f. 
Imperfect. — That thou might'st have no principles of taste. 

principem. gov! m. 
That you might not have a just reward. 

juste recompense f. 
Pluperfect. — That I might have had no good advice. That 

avism. pi. 
we might have had no news. 

nouvelle f. pi. 



THE VERB Avoir, INTERROGATIVELY AND AFFIRMATIVELY. 

In interrogations, the personal pronoun, accompa- 
nied by a hyphen (-), is placed after the verb, in the 
simple tenses, and between the verb and the participle, 
ie compound tenses, and, when the third person sin- 
gular of the verb ends with a vowel, for euphony a t is 
tvveen it and the pronoun, preceded and follow- 
ed by a hyphen, thus (-*-). See likewise the remarks, 



132 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 

Ai-je des Iivres ? Have I books ? 

Avais-tu du bien ? Hadst thou wealth ? 

Eut-elle de l'honnetet^ ? Had she honesty f 

Avons-nouseude bonsconseils? Have ut had good advice t 

Aviez-vous eu de la prudence / Hid you had prudence 1 

Aura-t-il de l'argent ? Will he have money ? 

Aura-t-elle eu des protecteurs? Will she have had protectors ? 

EXERCISE. 

INDICATIVE. Present.— Hast thou needles ? Have you 

aiguille f. 
coloured maps ? Preterit indefinite. — Have I had pens ? 
enlumini 2 carte f. 1. plume^ f. 

Have we had convenient houses ? Imperfect. — Had she silk ! 
commode 2 f. I . soie f. 

Had they large buildings ? Pluperfect. — Had she had pins ? 

grand bailment m. ep ingle f. 

Had they had extensive fields? Preterit definite. — Had 

spacieux 3 champ m. 1. 
he good shoes ? Had they looking-glasses ? Preterit ante- 

soulier m. f. iniroir m. 

rior. — Hadst thou had lace ? Had you had odoriferous 

dentelle f. odttriferant 2 

shrubs. Future absolute. — Shall I have gold, silver, 
arbuste m. 1. m. argent m. 

and platina. Shall we have (good luck) ? Future anterior. — 

platine m. bouheur m. 

Will she have had joy ? Will they have had company ? 
joie ? compagnie f. 

CONDITIONAL. Present— Shouldst thou have happy 

heureux 
moments ? Should you have good wine and nice cordials ? 

— m. vin. m. Jin 2 liqueur f. 1. 

Past.— Should he have had uncommon fruits 1 Should they 

rare 2 m. 1. 

have had rich clothes ? 



THE SAME VERB INTERROGATIVELY AND NEGATIVELY. 

In sentences of this form observe the different rules 
that are prefixed to the exercises on the verb, and in 
sentences simply interrogative, always place nc at the be- 
ginning of sentences, and pas, or point, after the person- 
al pronoun, whether in the simple, or compound tenses. 



AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 133 

ITai-je pas de3 livres ? Have I no books f 

N'avais-tu pas des amis ? Hadst thou no friend* ? 

N'a-Uellepas beaucoupd'esprit? Has she not a great deal of wit t 

N'avons-nous pas eu de bons Have we not acted fairly ? 

proc^des ? 

N'aviez-vous pas eu de nouvel- Had you not had new gowns ? 

les robes ? 

N'aura-t-il pas des ressources 1 Will he have no resources ? 

N'auront-elles pas eu des conso- Will they have had no consola- 

lations? lions ? 



EXERCISE. 

INDICATIVE. Present.— Hast thou no diamonds? Have 

diatnant m. 
you no indulgent parents ? Preterit indefinite. — Hast thou 

— 2 — m. 1. 
not had contempt, and even hatred, for that man ? Have 

mipris m. mtme haine f. h asp. pour cet 

you not had better examples ? Imperfect. — Had he not a 

meilleur exemple m. 
rigid censor 7 Had they not inattentive children ? 

shire 2 censeur m. 1. =2 enfant m. 1. 

PiUPERFECT. — Had I not had other views 7 Had we not had 

autre vue ? f. pi. 
amethysts, rubies, and topazes ? Preterit definite. — Had I 
amilhyste f. rubis m. topaze 9 f. 
no great wrongs ? Had we not perfidious friends 7 Preterit 

tori m. perf.de 2 1 

anterior. — Had he not used far-fetched expressions ? Had 

eu 2 recherchiS — f. 1. 
they not excellent models ? Future absolute. — Wilt thou 

— modele m. 

not lead a more regular life 7 Will you uot have 

avoir plus 2 regie 3 conduitc f. 1. 
fashionable gowns ? Future anterior. — Shall I have had no 
a la mode 2 robe f, i. 

sweetmeats 7 Shall we not have had a good preacher 1 
confitures 7 f. predicateur ? m. 

CONDITIONAL. Present.— Should she not have ciear 

clair 2 

and just ideas 7 Would they not have more extensive know- 

3 f . 1 2 itendu 3 c©»- 

ledge 7 Past. — Should she have had no patience f 

nuissances f. pi. 1. 

Should they have had no rectitude 7 
f. droiture ? f. 

13 



134 



AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB, 

etre, to be % 
INFINITIVE. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



A 


PRESENT. 


PAST. 


Etre 




to be 


Avoir 6te to have been 
PARTICIPLES. 




PRESENT. 


PAST. 


Etan 




being 


) 




PAST 




> ay ant £t<§ having been 


ete 




been 


s 

INDICATIVE. 




PRESENT. 


PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 


je suis 




lam 


j'ai 1 




I have "1 


tu es 




thou art 


tu as 




thou hast 1 


il, or elle est 


he* or she is il a 


i 6t6 


***** [been 


nous sommes 


we are 


nous avons 




we have f uecn 


vous etes 


you are 


vous avez 




you have J 


elles 


> sont 


they are 


ils ont 




they have j 








EXERCISES. 







As interrogative and negative sentences will now be 
promiscuously intermixed, the scholar will observe, 
that the adverb, in the following exercises, is to be 
placed before the adjectives ; and that whenever in in- 
terrogative sentences a substantive is the subject, it 
is to be placed at the head of the sentence, adding a 
pronoun for the interrogation immediately after the verb, 
as, monfrere est-il venu ? is my brother come 1 

Present. — I am very glad to see you. Art not thou pleased 
aise de voir satisfait 

with that book ? Is she really amiable ? We are happy. 

de veritablement heureux 

Are not you too condescending ? Are your friends still in 

complaisant f encore a 

London ? 
Londres ? 

Preterit indefinite. — Have not I been constant? Haf* 



AVXILIART VERB ETRE. 



135 



SIMPLE TENSES. 


COMPOUND TENSES. 




IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 


fetais / was 


j'avais 




Thad \ 


tu etais thou wast 


tu avais 




thou hadst J 


il etait he was 


il avait 


► ete* 


he iiad I . 


nou3 e*tions we were 


nous avions 


we had ( bem 


vous etiez you were 


voss aviez 




you had 1 


ils 6taient they were 


ils avaient 




they had J 


PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 


je fus J was 


j'eus " 




I had 




tu fus thou wast 


tu eus 




thou hadst 




il fut he was 


ilent 


>ete 


he had 


>been 


nous fumes we were 


nous eumes 


we had 


vous futes you were 


vous eutes 




you had 




ils furent they were 


ils eurent j 




they had J 





thou always been steady ? She has been faithful. Have we 

posi fidele 

feeen firm and courageous ? You have been charitable. Have 

ferme = — 

those men always been good and benevolent ? 

bienfaisant ? 

Imperfect. — I was too busy to see you. Wast not thou 
occupe pour recevoir 
troublesome ? Was this girl idle ? Were we not too un- 

importun jille paresseux in- 

tractable ? You were not quiet enough. They were vain, 

docile '? tranquille 2 asses 1. L — 

frivolous, and coquettish. 
frivole coquette. 

Pluperfect. — I had hitherto been very indifferent. Hadst 
jusqu y alors insouciant. 

not thou been too imprudent ? Had his wife been sufficiently 

— epouse asses 

modest and reserved ? We had not yet been sufficiently 

asses reserve" encore 



Pret. ant. — Exercises upon this tense would be 

as yet too complicated, as may be seen by this sen- 

Rem.<( tence ; a peine y eus-je ele cinq ou six minutes, quHl ar 

riva % I had scarce been there five or six minutes,, when 

Jxe arrived. 



136 



AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



1 shall or will j'aurai 

be 
thou wilt be tu auras 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE 

je serai 

tu seras 

il sera he will be il aura 

nous serous we shall be nous aurons 

vous serez you shall be vous aurez 

ils seront they shall be ils auront 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



ete 



J shall or' 
will have 

thou wilt 
have 

he will have 

we shall 

have 
you will 

have 
they will 

have 



been 



attentive. Had you been envious and jealous ? They had not 
applique = jaloux 

been grateful. 

reconnoisant. 

Preterit definite. — Perhaps 1 was not sufficiently 

Peut hire que asses 

prudent. Wast thou discreet enough on that occasion ? Was 

— discret 1 en — f. 

not that princess too proud ? We were very unhappy. Were you 

— cesse fier 
not too hasty ? They were not much satisfied. 
prompt fort satisfait. 

Future absolute- — To-morrow I shall be at home till 

Demain ches-moijusqu-a 

(twelve .o'clock). Wilt thou always be restless, brutal, and 

m idi inquiet, bourru 

sour? Will your father be at home this evening? 

chagrin Monsieur chez-lui soirm. 

Shall we not be more diligent ? Will you always then be 
_ 3 done 2 1 

capricious, obstinate, and particular ? Will not your scholars be 
quinteux opiniatre, pointilleux ? holier 

troublesome ? 
incommode ? 

Future anterior.— Shall not I have been too severe ? Thou 

wilt have been too distrustful. Will not his sister have been 

defiant saur 

whimsical and capricious ? Shall not we have been eager 
funiasque =s* etnprtssi 2 



AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 



137 



CONDITIONAL. 
SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 

je serais I should, would, j'aurais 

or could be 

tu serais thou would'st tu aurais 

be 

il serait he would be il aurait 

nous serions we should be nous aurions 

rous seriez you would be vous auriez 

Ms seraient they would be ils auraient 



>m 



PAST. 
I should 

have 
thou would'st 

have 
he would 

have 
we should 

have 
you should 

have 
they would 

have 



f s 



The conditional past, J'eusse ete, tu eusses eti, il eU ite, nous 
mssions Hi, vous eussiez ite, ils eussent ite, is also used. 



enough ? Will^^i not have been inconsiderate ? Will not the 

1 ^9 indiscret 

judges have been just ? * 

Conditional present. I would not be so rash. 

'^fc temeraire. 

Would'st thou be as consistent in thy behaviour as in thy Ian- 
consequent dans conduits f. pro- 

gnage ? Would not his son be ready in time ? Should we be 
pos m. pi. fits pret a 

always incorrigiblBr You would not be disinterested enough. 

disinteressi 2 1 
Would not those lsldies be always virtuous ? 
dame veriueux 1 

Past. (Had^nSt been for) your instructions, I should have 
j?:s conscil m. pi. 

been proud ^htd haughty. Would'st not thou have been 

didaigneux I hautain 
malicious and sarcastic ? Would that man have been so 
matin ricanpur . tellement 

destitute of common sense ? Certainly we should not have been 
depourvu bon sens 

so ridiculous. Would 1 ! not you have been more kind and 
si ridicule doux plus 

indulgent ? They would not have been so ungenteel. 
complaisant ? malhonniU. 

13* 



138 



AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 
IMPERATIVE. 



Sois 

Qu'il soit 
Soyons 
Soyez 
Qu'ils soient 



Be (thou) 
Let him be 
Let us be 

Be (ye) 
Let them be 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE TEKSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



que 
je sois 
tu sois 



PRESENT. 
that 



que 



/ ma y, can, or j'aie 

should be 
thou may'st tu aies 
be 
il soit he may be il ait 



>dte 



nous soyons we may oe nous ayons 

vous soyez you may be vous ayez 
ils soient they may be ils aient 



PRETERIT. 

that ^ 

J may, can, or 

should have 

thou may'st 

have 
he may have 

We may hate 

you may have 

ihty may have. 



\bten 



Imperative. Be liberal. Do not be so lavish. Let 
sing. — sing, prodigue 

as be equitable, humane, and prudent. Letups not be covetous. 

— humain, — avide. 

Be economical and temperate. Do not be tljjbughtless. 
pi. tconome sobre pi. l£gcr 

As the third person singular and plujaflbf the impera- 
tive mood belong rather to the subjunctirc, they are there 
exemplified. 

It has already been observed, that" before the sub- 
junctive can form a complete sense, it must be pre- 
ceded by another verb. For the sake of brevity, 
therefore, complete sentences will only be given on the 
present tense. This remark applies alike to the four 
conjugations. 



AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 159 

S1MPLB TBKSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 




que 


that 


que 




that 




je fusse 


I mighty or 


j'eusse 




I might or 






could be 






could 


2r 


tu fusses 


thou might' &t be 


tu eusses 




thou might's! 


» 


il fat 


he might be 


il eut 


► ete 


he might 


► £ 


UOU3 ftlS- 


we might be 


nous eus- 




we might 




sJt>D3 




sions 






S 


vcus fussiez 


you might be 


vouseussiez 




you might 




ils fussent 


they might be 


ils eusaent J 




they might 





Present. Is it possible I can be so credulous ? They wish 

— * — le On desire 
thou may'st be more modest. Is it possible she can be so ob- 

modeste * en- 

stinate ? They wish us to be more assiduous. It is not 

Mi assidu On * 

expected you should be timid. It is feared they may 

s' attend timide. On* craint ne 
be guilty. 
coup able. 

Preterit. That I should have been so hasty and impatient. 

empcrte si — 
Thou should'st have been so puffed up with pride. That she 

bouffi de 
should have teen so fickle. That we should have been so head- 
■ - volage Utu 

strong. That you should have been so avaricious. That they 

avare 
should have been so unreasonable. 
diraisonnable. 

Observe, the vfcrb elre serves as an auxiliary to conjugate the 
passive verbs through all their tenses, the compound tenses of the 
pronominal verbs and those of about fifty neuter verbs. 

Imperfect. That I should not be humane and generous. 

humain =s 

That thou might'st be more careful. That she might not be so 

soigneux. 
arrogant. That we might be victorious. That you might not be 

so stern. That they might not be so cruel. 
Uvere. 



140 OF THE REGULAR YERBS. 

FIRST CONJUGATION. 

IN ER. 

In verbs ending in -ger, the e is preserved in 

) those tenses where g is followed by the vowels a, 

) or o, in order to preserve to this letter its soft sound ; 

as, mangeant, jugeons, je n&gligeai. 

C In verbs ending in -cer, &r the same reason, a 

2 1 cedilla is put under c, when followed by a, or o ; as, 
{ siigant, plagons, j'effagai. 

I In verbs ending in -oyer and -uyer, the y is chang- 

3 7 ed into i before a mute e ; as, j'emploie, il essuie, 
{j'appuierai, il nettoierait. 

( This practice is extended by some to verbs in 

4 < *vyer and -eyer, as, z7 paie } j'essaierai, elle grasseye, 
f or grasseie. 

In some few verbs ending in -eler and -eter, the 
/ and £ are doubled in those inflections, which re- 
ceive stn e mute after these consonants, as, from ap- 
peler, il appelle, from jeter, je jetterai } &c. 

The first person singular of the present of 
the indicative changes e mute into acute e in in- 
terrogative sentences. The remark is also ap- 
plied to some verbs of the second conjugation end- 
ing in -vrir, -frir, and -lir ; as, neglige-je ? aimS- 
s/ e ' °jf T z-jt ' cueille-je ? 



EXERCISE, 

Pluperfect. That I might have beon more studious. That 

thou might'st have been more circumspect. That she might 

circonspect. 
have been more attentive to her duty. That we might have 

= devoir ra. pi. 

been less addicted to pleasure. That you might have been 

livre a art. m. pi. 
more assiduous and more grateful. That they might havft 

assidu plus reconnaissant 

been less daring. 
hardi. 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



141 



PARADIGM, OR MODEL. 

INFINITIVE. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 




FAST. 


parl-er 


to speak 


avoir pari-! 


to have spoken 




PARTICIPLES. 




PRESENT. 




PAST. 


pari-on* 


speaking 


> 




PAST. 


\ ayant parl-e* 


hating spoken 


parl-e* m. -ee f. 


spoken 


REMARKS. 




( All the regular 


verbs of the First Conjugation 


\ adopt the terminations of the verb 


parler ; Exam. 


pari -er 


aim-er 


expliqu-er 


avou-er 


parl-anf 


annong-anf engag-eanf 


deTray-arcf 


parl-e 


agre-e' 


d^cri-^ 


d£dommag-e* 


je parl-e 


dans-e 


ignoT-e 


renvoi-e 


tu parl-e* 


din-es 


rejet-fes 


renouveWes 


il parl-e 


chant-e 


begai-e 


grass ey-e 


nous parl-ons 


berq-ons 


choy-ons 


chang-eons 


vous parl-es 


regn-es 


essuy-es 


epel-es 


ils parl-enf 


caress-en/ 


ennu-ie?if 


appel-Jenf 



And so on through the whole verb. 

Adverbs, with few exceptions, must be placed 
I after the verb, in simple tenses, and between the 
| auxiliary and the participle in compound tenses, 
when this adverb is only a single word. 

SThe remarks prefixed to the exercises on the 
verb avoir, when de is to be placed between the 
verb and the substantive, ought to be attended to. 
i The article the, after the verb, must always be 
4 I expressed in French, though often understood in 
( English. 



EXERCISE. 

Indicative prhsbitt. I willingly give that plaything to 
volontiers donner joujou m. 



142 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



INDICATIVE. 

COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 



je parl-e I tpeak j'ai 

tu parl-e* thou speakest tu a9 
il parl-e he speaks il a 

nousparl-om we speak nous avons 

vous parl-es you speak vous avez 
ils parl-erif they speak ils ont 



parl-e' 



/ hare 
thou hast 
he has 
we have 
you have 
ihey have 



your sister. Do I prefer pleasure to my duty ? Dost 

f. * pre/erer art. m. devoir m. 

thou not irritate thy enemies ? He does not propose salutary 
irriter ennemi proposer un = 2 

advice to his friends. We sincerely love peace and 

avis m. 1 sincerement art. paix f. art. 

tranquillity. We do not neglect (any thing) to please you, 

= f. * nigliger rien pour plaire 

Do you not admire the beauty of that landscape ? Do not 

admirer = f. 

your parents comfort the afflicted ? 

— consoler offiigi m. pi. 
means to succeed, 
art. moyen m. pour rtussir. 

Preterit indefinite. 



pay sage m. 
They (make use of) all 
employer 



horse to my cousin. 

cheval m. 1 — m. 

with my sister 1 



I have (given up) my favourite 
cider favori 2 

Hast thou not exchanged watches 
changer dt montres 
Has the tutor given fine engravings to his 
pricepteur de gravure f. pi. 
pupil ? We have spoken (a long while) of your adventure. 
pupille m. long-lemps aventure L 

Have you not insisted too much upon that point ? Have your 

insist £ * sur — m. 

aunts prepared their ball dresses ? 
tanlt preparer de bal 2 habit m. pi. 1. 

Imperfect. I unceasingly thought of my misfortunes. 

sans cesse penser a malheur m. pi. 
Didst thou dread his presence and firmness 1 He ex- 
redouter — f. pron. fermeti f. re- 

lubited in his person all the virtues of his ancestors. Did not 
tracer en f. f. aucetre 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 143 



SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 



jc parl-ai$ I did speak, or j'avais "*) 

was speaking 
tu parl-ais thou didst speak tu avais 
il parl-atf he did speak il avait j> parI-£ 

nousparl-ioni ice did speak nous avions 
vous parl-tez you did speak vous aviez 
ils parl-aien/ /Ae^/ rfirf speak ils avaient J 



I had 

thou hadst 
he had 
we had 
you had 
they had 



© 

S 



that woman accuse her friend of levity ? We did not protect 

accuser ami f. legerete f. * proteger 

that bad man. You despised a vain erudition. Did fhe 

mecha/it mtpriser — 2 — f. 1. * 

Romans disdain so weak an enemy ? The bees were there 
Romain dtdaigner faible 2 m. 1. abeille * y 

sucking the cups of the flowers. 
sucer calice m. fleur. 

Pluperfect. — I had drained an unwholesome marsh. 

dessicher mat sain 2 marais m. 1. 
Had'st thou not married a man rich, but unluckily without 

epouser ?na!heureusement sans 

education ? Had his father rejected these advantageous 

— f. rejeter avantageux 2 

offers ? We had not long listened to the singing of the 

offre f. 1. long-temps ecouter * chant m. 

birds. Had you already studied geography and history T 
oiseau m. deja ttudier art. = f. art. = 

Had not his friends procured him a troop of cavalry? 

procurer 2 lui 1 comvagnie f. cavalerieP 

There is a fourth preterit, called preterit anterior in- 
definite, which is used instead of the preterit anterior, 
when speaking of a time not entirely elapsed ; as j'ai eu 
acheve mon ouvrage ce matin, cette semaine, &c. and not 
pens acheve : as it is found in every conjugation, I shall 
insert it here ; fax eu parle, tu as eu parity il a eu parity 
nous avons eu parte , vous avez eu parle, ils ont eu parle. 



144 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

je parl-ai I spoke j'eus 

tu parl-aJ thou spokest tu eus 

il parl-a he spoke il eut 

nou3 parl-nmC5 we spoke nouseumes 

vous parl-o/cJ you spoke vous eutes 

ils parl-emif they spoke ils eurent 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 



► parl-e 



I had 
thouhadst 
he had 
ice had 
you had 
Ihey had 



-5 

© 

S 



Preterit definite. — Did I not gladly give peaches 
* avec plaisir de art. piche f. pi. 

and flowers to my neighbours ? Thou forgottest an 

pr. art. flturs f. pi. voisin m. pi. oublier 

essential circumstance. Did not your cousin relate that 

e$sentiel2 circonslance f. pi. * raconler 

charming history with (a great deal) of grace ? He lightly 
— mant = f. avec beaucoup legerement 

judged of my intentions. Did we not shew courage, 

juger # — * montre de art. — m. pr. — 

constancy, and firmness? Did you visit the grotto 

art. = f. pr — art. f. * visiter grotte f. 

and the grove ? They did not generously forgive their 

bois m. * genireusement pardonner a 

enemies. 



Preterit anterior. — I had soon wasted my money, and 

bientbt manger argent m. 
Hadst thou very soon reinforced thy 
ressource f. * vite r enforcer 

Had not Alexander soon surmounted all obstacles? 

Alexandre surmonter to us art. =m. pi. 

Hot soon enough shut the shutters, and (let down) the 
tdl 2 assez 1 j'trmer volet b&isser 

curtains. Had you not quickly dined ? In the twinkling 
rideau promplemcnt dhier. Dans * un clin 

of an eye, they had disponed the mob. 

* tdl disj)crser populace f. 



exhausted my resources. 
ipuiser - 
party ? 
parti m. 
We had 



Future abs LUTE. — 1 shall relieve the poor. Wilt 

soulager pauvre m. pi. 

thou faithfully keep that secret ? WH1 he consult 

fidelement garder — m. consulter de art. 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 145 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

je parl-era* J shall , or j'aurai 

will speak 
tu parl-eras thou shall tu auras 

sptah 
il parl-era he shall il aura 

speak 
nous parl-erons we shall nous aurons 

speak 
vous parl-eres you shall vous aurez 

speak 
ils parl-eroTif they shall ils auront 

speak 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



> parl-s 



I shall, or^ 

will 
thou shalt 

he shall 

xce shall 

you shall 

they shall 



>■! 



enlightened judges ? He will support you with all his credit. 
eclair e 2 juge I. appuyer de — m. 

We shall not prefer pleasure to glory, and riches to 

prbfirtr art. m. art. f. art. pi. art. 

honour. By such conduct, will you not afflict your father 

tel 2 1 conduile f. 3. a fflig*r 

and mother ? Will they astonish their hearers 1 

pron. etonner auditeur m. pi. 

Foture anterior. — I shall soon have finished this book. By 

achever m. 

thy submission, wilt thou not have appeased his anger ? Will 

soumission f. appaiser colere f. 

the king have triumphed over his enemies ? We, perhaps, shall 

triompher de 2 1 

not have rewarded enough the merit of this good man. 

recomptnser merite m. de bitn 2 1 

Will you not have flown to his assistance ? Will our servants 

voler sccours m. domeslique m. 

have brought money ? 

appoTter de art. argent. 

Conditional present. — Should I form conjectures 

former de art. — f. pi. 
without number ? Thou would'st not avoid so great a danger. 

nombrem. eiiler 2 3 1 4 

Would not his attorney (clear up) that business ? We would 

procureur dkbromller affaire f. 

(drrve away) the importunate. Would you not discover 

chasser importun m. pi. de'voiler 

14 



140 OP THE REGULAR VERBS. 

CONDITIONAL. 
SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 


PAST 




je parl-craw I should, j'aurais 




I should, 




would, or 




would, or 




could speak 




could 




tu parl-erai* thou skould } st tu aurais 




thou should' st 




speak 






S 


il parl-erart he should il aurait 




he should 




speak 


• parI-£ 




>* 


nous pari- we should nous aurions 




we should 




trions speak 






a 


vous pari- you should vous auriez 




you should 




tries speak 








ils pari- they should ils auraient 




they should 




traient speak 




J 





J'eusse parte, tu eusses parte, il eut pane, nous eussions parU, 
vous eussies parlt, ils eussent parte, is also used for the conditional 
past. This remark holds good for every verb. 



that atrocious plot ? They would not unravel the clue of 

atroce 2 complot m. 1. dSmiler fil m. 

that intrigue 

Past. — I should have liked hunting, fishing, and the 

aimer art. chasst f. art. piche f. 
country. Would'st thou not have played ? Would he not have 
campagne f. jouer 

bowed to the company ? Would we gladly have praised his 
salaer * compagniei. avec plaisir 2 louer 1 

pride and incivility ? You would have awakened 

orgueil m. pron. malhonneteti f. eveiller 

every body. Would those merchants have paid their debts ? 
tout le mondt marchand payer dtlle f. pi. 

Imperative. — In all thy actions, consult the light of 

Dans — f. pi. consult tr lumiere art. 

reason. Never yield to the violence of thy passions. 

f. te abandonner — f. — 

Let us love justice, peace, and virtue. Let us not 

art. — f. art. f. art. f. 

cease to work. Sacrifice your own interest to the 

cesser de travailler. Sacrificr * inter it m. pi. 



OP THE REGULAR VERBS. 



147 



parl-e* 

qu'il parl-e 

parl-orw 

paries? 

qu'il s parl-e?tf 



IMPERATIVE. 

speak (thou) 
let him speak 
let us speak 
speak (ye) 
lei them speak 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 

que that que 

je parl-e / may, or can j'aie 

speak 
tu parl-e* thou may J st tu aies 

speak 
il parl-e he may speak il ait 

nous parl-ions we may speak nous ayons 
vous parl-ies you may speak vous ayez 
ils parl-C7i£ they may speak Us aient 



PRETERIT. 

that 

Imay^ or can 



► parl-e 



thou may'st 

he may 
we may 
you may 
they may 



public good. Do not omit such useful and interest- 

2 Men 1 * negliger de art. si utile 2 intirts- 

ing details. 
sani 3 — m. pi. 1. 

Subjunctive Present. — That I may not always listen to 

icouter * 

a severe censor of my defects. That thou should'st find 

— 2 = m. 1 defaut m. pi. trouver 

real friends. That he would adorn his speeches with the graces 

de vrai parer discours de 

of a pure diction. That she would remain in her boudoir. 

— 2 — f. 1. tester — m. 

That we should so hastily condemn the world. That 
legerement condamner monde m. 



* Rem. The second person singular of the imperative of this 
conjugation, and likewise of some verbs of the second ending in 
mr,yWr, -Ur t take * after e, before the word y and 411, as, porles- 
en a ton frere, cany some to thy brother ; offrts-en a ta scsur, 
offer some to thy sister ; cueilles-en aussi pom toi, gather some 
alike for thyself; apportes-y tes livres, bring there thy books. 



146 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 




erne 

je parl-awe 


that que 




\fhat 




I might, cou ld : j'eusse 




I mighty could, 






or would 




or would 






speak 








tu parl-a**es 


thou might y st tu eusses 
speak 




thou mighVst 


0» 


il parl-a* 


he might speak il eut 


► parl-^ 


he might 


>* 


nous parl- 


we might nous eus- 




we might 




assions 


speak sions 






3 


vous parl- 


you might vous eus- 




you might 




assies 


speak siez 








ils parl-oweni 


they might ils eus- 




they might 






speak sent 


- 





you may pout incessantly. That they may work more 

bouder sans cesse travailltr plus 

willingly. 
volontiers. 

Preterit. — That I may have caressed insolence, and 

caresscr art. — f. 
flattered pride. That thou would'st have added nothing to 
flatter art. ajouter 

that work. That he should have carried despair into 

owvrage m. porter art. desespoir m. dans 

the soul of hi3 friend. That we may have blamed a conduct 

time bldmer conduiie f. 

so prudent and so wise. That you may have exasperated so 

— • sage exasperer 

petulant a character. That they may not have taken advan- 
— 2 car act ere ra. 1 profit er 

tage) of the circumstances. 
cir constav.ee f. pi. 

Imperfect. — That I should not copy his example. That 

imiler exemple m. 
thou migbt'st (give up) perfidious friends. That he 

abctndonner de art. — de 2 1 
might inhabit a hut instead of a palace. That we 

habiter chaumiere f. (tu litv palais m. 

should Tall at the feet of an illegitimate king. That you 

tomber a pied m. UUgitime 2 1 

would respect the laws ot ycur country. That they would 
respecter loi f. pi, pays m. 



OF THE JIEGULAR VERBS, 



149 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 

IN -IR. 

This conjugation is divided into four branches. 

The first branch contains upwards of two hundred 
and eighty regular verbs in -ir, exclusive of fifty-three 
more comprised in the three other branches, which 
may be considered as exceptions, and may be reduced 
to thirteen roots, with thirty-nine derivatives. By 
presenting some of the regular verbs of the first 
branch, which nearly resemble the three following lists 
of exceptions, the scholar will evidently see that the 
terminations in -mir, -vir, -tir, and -mV, are not ab- 
solutely the distinctive marks of the three other 
branches, the lists of which ought to be learned by 
heart. 



Ibr. 



' ralent-ir 
retent-fr 
app£sant-ir 
nant-ir 
renform-ir 
afferm-ir 
repart-tr 
avert-tr 
sert-tr 
dessert-zV 
sort-tr son 2 
plein et > 

| entiereffet ) 

[ assoit-ir 



to slacken 




to resound 


ressort-tr 


to make heavy 




to pledge 


asserv-ir 


to plaster 


sev-ir 


to strengthen 


assouv-tr 


to distribute 


appauvr-ir 


to inform 


tern-ir 


to set a stone 


vern-ir 


to unset a stone 


garn-ir 


to obtain a 


fourn-ir 


full effect 


b£n-ir 


(by law) 


henn-ir, &c 


to match 





C to be under the 
< jurisdiction 
I of a court 

to inslave 

to use hard 

to glut 

to impoverish 

to tarnish 

to varnish 

to garnish 

to furnish 

to bless 

to neigh 



not speak at random. 

a-tort et a -tr avers. 

Pluperfect. That I should not have burnt that work. That 

bruler m. 

thou might'st not have contemplated the beauties of the coun- 
contempler = cam* 

try. That he should have perfected his natural qualities. 
pagne perfectionner — rel 2 =f. pi, 1. 

That we might not have gained the victory. That you 

remporter =f, 

bad enchanted the public. That they would have struck 
— ter — m. frapp er 

their enemies with fear. 
de crainte 

14* 



150 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



ROOTS. 



2br.< 



dor-wir 

men-tfr 
sen-/ir 



par-h'r* 

sov-tir* 
ser-wr 
.se repen-hY 



DERIVATIVES. 
( redor-mir to sleep again 
J endor-rtiir to lull asleep 
j se rendor-mir to fall asleep 
again 
to give the lie 
to consent 
to foresee 
to resent 
io divide 
J to set out 
\ aga in 

to go out again 
( to clear the 
l table 
to repent % has no derivative. 



to sleep 

io lie 
to fid 

to set out 

to go out 
to serve 



demen-/ir 

consei\-tir 

pressen-<ir 

ressen-/ir 

depar-/ir 

repar-fir 

ressor tir 

desser-i'ir 





ouv-rtr 


to open 


( rou v-rir to open again 
I entr'ouv-nr lo half open 


3br.- 






I d6co\iv~rir to discover 
I recouv-rtr to cover again 


couv-rir 


to cover 








off-rir 


to offer 


mesoff-Wr to underbid 




souff-r/r 


to suffer, 


has no derivative. 



ROOT, 

r 



DERIVATIVES. 
av-enir to happen 



circonv- tto circum- 

enir $ vent 
contrev- ) to contra- 

enir ) vene 
cony -enir* to agree 
dev-e?iir to become 
disconv- 

enir 

intee-vemr to intervene 
venir parv~e/*ir to attain 
})rev-enir to prevent 
prov -enir* io proceed 
come 
gain 
snrv-cnir to befall 
suhv -enir* io relieve 
se souv- \ to remem- 

cnir } ber 
se ressouv- ( to recol- 

enir ) Uct 



rev-emr 



> to deny 



Uo c 



ROOT. DERIVATIVES. 

f 

s ? abst-e?it> to abstain 



appart-entr to belong 
cont-en*r to contain 
det-e?uV to detain 
entret-C7ifr to keep up 



tenir 1 



maint-cntr to maintain 
obt-enir to obtain 
ret-ertr to retain 
sout-eutr to uphold 



* N. B. Partir, repartir, sortir, and rtuortir, of the second branch, fake the 
auxiliary Hre. Venir, and its derivatives, are likewise conjugated with ftrc, 
except circonvenir, conl rcvcnir, prtvcntr, ar.d subrenir, which take avoir : con- 
vtnir also takes avoir, when it meafis te suit, but it takes ttre, when it signifies 
to a^ee. Jivenir Is a defective and obsolete verb, only used impersonally. 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



151 



BRANCH 1. 
. , Uo punish 



PARADIGMS. 

INFINITIVE. 

PRESENT. 

BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. 
to feel to open 

sen-tir ouv-rir 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 



pun 



■issant 



feeling 
sen-tant 



PARTICIPLE PAST. 



Simple I P unis ? lin s 

. , < puniahed 

Comp. < to have punished J 
pres. \ avoir pun-i f felt 

Comp.'l hacirtg punished tsen-ti 
partic. \ ayantpun-* J 



opening 
ouv-ranf 



felt 
sen-ti 



opened 
ouv-ert 

opened 
ouv-ert 



' 1 punish 

je pun-i* 

tu pun-is 

Sim. 1 il pun-if 

nous pun-issons 
vous pun-utefl 
[ ils pun-is*enf 
c 



INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

feel open 

sen-s ouv-re 

sen-s ouv-res 

sen-/ ouv-re 

sen-tons ouv-rons 

sen-tez ouv-rez 

sen-tent ouv-rent 



BRANCH 4. 

to hold 
t-enir 



holding 
Uenant 



held 

t-enu 

held 
t-enu 



hold 

t-iens 

t-iens 

i-ienl 

t-enons 

t-ene2 

t-iennent 



Indicative. Present. I choose this picture. I feel all 
choisir tableau m. 

the unpleasantness of your situation. Whence comest thou f 

disagrkment m. — d'ou venir 

Does he thus define that word ? Does his mother (go out) so 
ainsi dtfinir mot m. sortir 

Do we not (set off) for the country ? Do you not 

partir campagm f. 

his sorrows ? Do you not (tell a lie ?) They are 
compatir a mal ra. pi. mentir 

finishing at this momeut. They (act contrary) to your 



soon ? 

tot 

pity 



finir 

orders. 

ordre. 



dans 



art. 



contrcvenir 



Imperfect. 



fortified his 
primunir 



sou! 



against 
contre 



the dangers of 



152 



OP THE REGULAR VERBS. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 



r 


| I have punished 


felt 


opened 


held 


uomp. ^ j, a1 pun { 


sen-li 


ouv-ert 


t-enu 




IMPERFECT. 






Simple \ ! did ! ,Unish 


feel 


open 


hold 


sen-tais 


ouv-rais 


t-enau 




PLUPERFECT. 






Comp. \! had Punished' 
C J avais pun-i 


felt 


opened 


held 


sen-ti 


ouv-ert 


t-enu 


PRETERIT DEFINITE. 






[* J punished 


felt 


opened 


held 




je pun -15 


sen-tis 


ouv -ris 


t-ins 




tu pun-f* 


sen-tis 


ouv -ris 


t-in* 


Simple < 


il pun-t/ 


sen-tit 


ouv-ri£ 


i-int 




nous pun-zme$ 


sen-times 


ouv- rimes 


X-inmes 




vous pun-to 


sen-tites 


ouv-rites 


X-intes 




Jls pun-irent 


sen-tirent 


onv-rireiit 


t-inrent 


sed 


uction. I serve 


d my friends 


warmly. 


Did'st not 



art. — f. servir avec chahur 

thou amuse him with fair promises ? He complied (at last) 
entretenir de beau promesse f. pi. consentvr tnfin 

Did we not frequently 



with the wishes of his family 
a desir m. pi. famille f. 

warn our friends of the bad state 
avertir etai 

sleep then ? Did you not belie 
dormir alors ? dtmenlir 



friquemment 
of their affairs ? Did we 



your character ? 
car act ere m. 



Did 



not the enemies invade an immense country? Did the 



envahir 
wild beasts often 

sauvage 2 bete f. 1. souvent 
their mountains ? 
montagne. 

Preterit. I softened my father by my submission. I 
fitchir soumission f. 

foresaw that terrible catastrophe. Thou did'st not (come again) 
presse.ntir — 2 — f . 1 revenir 

as thou had'st promised. He did not succeed through 

eommc le ind-2 promis rcussir par 



— 2 pays m. 1. 
(come out) from the bottom of 
sortir fond m. 



N. B. Only the first person of those tenses, which are invari- 
ably conjugated alike, will now be given, the scholar will easily 
supply the rest. 



Comp. i . 
Simple 5 i 
Comp. $ f 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 15$ 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

I had punished felt opened held 

#, eus pun-i sen-ft ouv-«rf t-enu 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

I shall punish fed open hold 

*e pun-iVflt sen-ft7ai ouv-nrai i-iendrax 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have punished felt opened held 

o\iY-ert t-ewu 



CONDITIONAL 

PRESENT. 

5* nle $ * should punish feel open hold 

%m P {jepun-traw sen-brat's buv-rirat* t-iendrais 



thoughtlessness. Did his daughter not (set out again) 

itourdtrie f. repartir 

immediately ? Did not Alexander sully his glory by his pride ? 
sur-le-champ ternir 

Did we (go out of the city) before him ? We never betrayed 

title I. «.vant lui trahir 

that important secret. Did you not agree to trust 

— 2 — m. 1. consentir de vous en rapporter 

to me ! They served their country with courage. Did the 

moi pays — 

ancient philosophers enjoy great consideration ? 

philosophe m. pl.jouir de un — f. 

Future. Shall I not obtain this of you ? What will be- 

obtenir ccla de que de- 

cora* of thee, if I forsake thee. Will he not embellish 

venir * tu abandonner embellir 

his country-seat ? He will not sleep quietly. 

maison dt campagne tranquillemtnt 

Shall we consent to that ridiculous bargain ? With 

2 marche m. 1. arec de art. 

time and patience, you will compass your end. We 

m. pr. art. f. venir a-bout de dessein m. 

shall not sully the splendour of our life by an unworthy action. 

iclat m. indigne 2 — l 

Will those men enrich their country by their industry 7 Will 

enricher pays Industrie 

not our friends offer us their assistance ? 
offrir secours 



164 OF THE REGULAR VERES. 



PAST. 

Comv £ I should have punished felt opened held 

P' l j'aurais pun-i sen-f* ouv~ert t-e*u 







IMPERATTVE 


• « 






' punish (thou) 


fed 


open 


hold 




pun-is 


sen-5 


ouv-re 


t~iens 


-,. 


qu'il pun-twe 


sen-/e 


ouv-rg 


t-ienne 


nm. < 


pun-issons 


sen-tons 


ouv-ron* 


t-enons 




pun-isses 


sen/ear 


ouv-rez 


t-enez 




^qu'ilspun-issejz/ 


ssn-tent 


ouv-rent 


t-iennent 



Conditional. I would open the door and the window, 

porle f. fenetre f. 

I should still cherish lite. Would'st not thou interpose in 

chirir art. intervenir 

that affair ? Would my brother £et off again) without taking 

f. repartir sans prendre 

leave of us ? You would not succeed in injuring him in the 
conge parvenir a nuire lui 

public opinion. Could'st thou soften that flinty heart 1 

— 2 — f. 1. attendrir de rocker 2 1 

Could they foresee their misfortune ? Would men always 

pressentir malheur art. 

(grow old) without growing wiser, if they reflected on tne 

vieillir sans devenir inf-1 refltchir ind-2 sur 

shortness of life ? 
brieveti f. art. 

Imperative. Shudder with horror and terror. Support 

Fremir de = deeffroim. Soutenir 

thy character in good and bad fortune. Do not 

art. dans art. mauvais — f. 

obtain thy point, but by means consistent with 
parvenir a Jin f. pi. que par des moyens que avoue 2 * art. 
delicacy. Let us feed the poor. Let us again 

delicatesse 1 nourrir m. pi. obtenir art. 

glory by our perseverance. Let us not divulge our secrets 

= f • — dicouvrir 

to every body. Never submit to so unjust a yoke. Do not 

tout-le-monde flechir sous 2 joug m. 1. 

maintain so absurd an opinion. Do not (come upon us) again 
soutenir — de 2 — f. 1 surrcnir plus 

(in that unexpected manner.^ 
ainsi a Vimprovisle. 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



155 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Sim. < 



r that I may punish 
que je pun-isse 
que tu pun-wses 
qu'il pun-fsse 
que nous pun-issions 
que vous ymn-issiez 

.qu'ilspun-isse/iJ 



PRESENT. 

feel 

sen-te 

sen-tes 

seu4s 

sen-iions 

sen-tiez 

sen-tent 



open 

ouv-re 

ouv -res 

ouv-re 

ouv-rions 

ouv -ries 

Q\iv-rent 



PRETERIT. 



Co n S that I may have punished felt 
P' I que j'aie pua-i sen-tf 



opened 
ouv-ert 



IMPERFECT. 



Sim. < 



that I might punish 
que je pun-tue 
que tu pun-isses 
qa'il pun-i£ 
que nous pun-issions 
que vous pun-issiez 
[ qu'il s pnn-issent 



feel p 

sen-tisse 

sen-tisses 

sen-tit 

sen-tissioiis 

sen-tissiez 

sen-tissent 



open 

ouv-risse 

ou v-risses 

ouv-rit 

onv-rissions 

onv-rissiez 

ouv-rissent 



PLUPERFECT. 



r $ that I might have punished felt 

om P- £ q Ue j'ensse puni senti 



hold 

t-ienne 

t-iennes 

t-ienne 

X-enions 

t-eniez 

t-iennent 



held 
t-enu 



hold 

t-insse 

t-insses 

t-int 

t-inssiont 

t-inssiez 

t-inssent 



opened 
ouvert 



held 
teau 



Subjunctive present. — That I may never blemish my re* 

fletrir 
putation. That I may (be before-hand) with such dangerous 

f. privenir de art. si = 2 

enemies. I will not have thee (go out) this morning. That he 

1 veux que tu sub-1 maiin ra. 

may not enjoy his glory. That he may not obtain his 

de = f. parvenir a 

ends. That we may become just, honest, and virtuous. 

fin f. pi. devenir honnete verlueux. 

That you may punish the guilty. That you may return 

coupable pi. revenii 

covered with laurels. That they may establish wist 

couvert de laurier m. pi. itablir de art. 2 

and just laws. That they may agree about the conditions. 
8 1 convenir de — 



156 OP THE REGULAR VERBS. 

THIRD CONJUGATION. 

IN -0//2. 

PARADIGM. 

This conjugation contains only seven regular verbs, 
which are : 

perc-evoir tjp receive dkc-evoir to deceive 

aperc-eioir to perceive d-evoir to owe 

conc-evoir to conceive red-evoir to owe again 

And rGcevoir, which serves as paradigm. Percevoir is a law 
term, and apercevoir is often reflected. 

Observe. In verbs ending in -cevoir, the c, to pre- 
serve the soft sound of that letter, takes a cedilla, when 
followed by o, or w. See page 3. 
INFINITIVE. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

rec-evoir to receive avoir rec-u to have received 



PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT. \ 

relevant Receiving f ayant re<? . M having received 

rec-u received J 

Imperfect. — That I migkt stun the whole neighbourhood. 
etour»lir2 tout 1 voisinage m. 
That I might not (bring about) my designs. That thou 

venir a-bout de pro jet m. pi. 
would'st (tell a wilful lie.) That he might not bear 

mentir de dessein premSdile. souienir 

his disgrace with firmness. That we might disobey the law?. 

— f. fermete disobtir. a 

That we should belong to that great king. That you might 

appartenir 
renounce your errors and prejudices. That they might 

revenir de = pr. pron. prtjugi 

weaken the force of their reasons. That they might hold 
affaiblir f. raisotinement ttnir k 

the most absurd ideas. 
2 1. 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 157 

INDICATIVE. 
SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

/ receive, &c. we receive, he. 

je veq-ois nous rec-evons j'ai reg-u 1 have received 

tu req-ois vous rec-eres tu as, &c. thou, &c. 

il revolt ils req-oivent 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

I did receive we did receive j'avais rec,-u I had received 

je rec-cvais nous rec-evions 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

/ received we received 

je rec-itt nous req-umes j'eus, req-u I had received 

tu req-us vous req-utes tu eus, &.C. thou, &c. 

il req-ui ils req-urenl 



EXERCISE. 

Indicative present. — I perceive the summit of the Alps 

apercevoir sommet Alpes f. pL, 

9 covered with perpetual snow. What gratitude dost 

de tternel 2 neige f. pi. 1 reconnaissance f. 

thou not owe to her who (has discharged) the duty of a mother, 

devoir edit 1 remplir 3 6 

(to thee) (in thy infancy) ? Does your scholar understand 

pres de 4 2 kcolier concevoir 

well that rule which is so simple ? We do not owe a large 
b ten regie f . * * devoir gros 

sum. Do you not perceive the snare ? Ought firm 

soinme f. piege m. Devoir 6 des 1 3 

and courageous men to yield to circumstances ? 
= 4 2 * c^rfer art. circonstance ? 

Imperfect. — Did I not receive him kindly ? Did he 

le avec amitid ? 
see the castle from such a distance? We did not re 

ttpercevoir chateau si * loin per- 

ceive our income. Did you not receive great civilities? 
cevovr revtnu m.vl de ftonnelett f. pi. 



15 



158 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

I shall receive we, he. j'aurai rec, u I shall have 

je ve$-evrai nous rec-evrons received. 



CONDITIONAL. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

I should receive we should^ &c j'aurais reg-u I should have 
je Tec-evrais nous rec-evrions tu, &c received 



IMPERATIVE. 

rec-evons let us receive 
req-ois receive thou vec-evez receive ye 

qu'il req-oive let hfrn receive qu'ils req-oivent let them receive 



Did those tyrants conceive all the blackness of their crimes 1 
tyran concevoir noirceur f. — 

Preterit. — I perceived him walking by moon 

le qui se promenait a art. clair dt 
light. Did the queen conceive a great esteem for that 

lalune m. estimei. 

honest man. Did we not immediately perceive the snare ? 

de bien 2 1 

You did not receive his letters in time. Did the ministers con- 

lettres a-temps. — tre 

ceive the depth of his plan. 

profondeur f. — m. ~~ 

Future. — Shall I receive visits to-day ? He will 

de art. visitc aujourd'hui f 
not discover the spire of his village. We shall conceive 
apercevoir clocher m. — m. 

well founded hopes. Will you never conceive so 

de art. fondS2 espirajicef. pi. 1. 

luminous a principle ? Shall men always owe their mis- 

= 2 1 art. mal- 

fortunes to their faults 1 
hew faule 9 

CoNDrrioKAL.— Should I receive the offers of my ei.emy 7 

offre 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 1 59 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

that J may receive that we, &c. que j'aie req~u that I may 

que je req-oive que nous rec-evions que tu, &c. have r»- 

que tu rec-otre* que vous rec^eviez qu'il, &c. ceived 
qu'il req-oivz qu'ils req-oivent 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT, 

that I might f &c. that we might, &c- que j'eusse thatlmight 

que je req-nsse que nous req-ussions rec-w have re- 

que tu req-usses que vous req-ussies que tu, &c. ceirerf 

qu'il req~ut qu'ils rec-wwenf 



Should a wise man thus (give himself up) to 
devoir 4 1 3 2 ainsi 6 s'abandonner 5 art. 

despair ? Should we conceive such abstract ideas 1 

dhespoir m. - de art. si 2 abstrait 3 1 

You would easily perceive so gross a trick. Would not 

grosrier 2 ruse f. 1 
my sisters receive their friend with tenderness ? 

tendresse ? f. 

Imperative. Conceive the horror of his situation. Do not 

receive that mark of confidence with indifference. Let us 

marque f. confiance — 

entertain a horror of vice. Let us never owe (any 

concevoir * de art. pour art. m. 

thing). Receive his advice with respect and gratitude. Re- 
rien. avis — — 

ceivc no more of his letters. 

lettre f. pi. 

Subjunctive present. That I may receive consola- 

de art. 
tions. That he should not conceive a thought so well explained. 

pensie f. diveloppL 

That we may always receive false news. That you 

de nouvelle f. pi. 

may not perceive the danger of books which are contrary 

— art. * * contre 

to good morals. That they may not collect unjust 
* art. mecur* f. pi. percevoir de injuste 2 

taxes. 
— f. pi. 1 



160 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

IN -RE. 
Remark. — This conjugation has five branches. 




The first ends 



the second ends 



the th IRD ends g!»;f« 

the fourth ends in -wire 

C in -aindre 

the fifth ends < in -eindre 
{ in -oindre 



as, vipandre 
as, vendre 
as, rSpondre 
as, pen/re 
as, mordre 

( as, plairc 

( as, {aire 
as, repaftre 
as, connaitre 
as, instiwe 
as, contraindre 
as, p eindre 
as, joindre 



to spill 
to tell 
to answei 
to lose 
to bite 
to please 
to keep secret 
to feed 
to know 
to instruct 
to constrain 
to paint 
to join 



PARADIGMS. 

INFINITIVE 
PRESENT. 



BRANCH 1. 

to render 
rend-re 
rendered 
avoir rend-w 



BRANCH 2. 
to please 
pl-aire 
pleased 
pl-i* 



BRANCH 3. 
to appear 
par-ctffre 
appeared 
par-u 



BRANCH 4. 
to reduce 
reduire 
reduced 
redui-/ 



BRANCH 

to join 
joi-ndrc 
joined 
joi-rU 



Imperfect. That I might conceive such a project. That 

pro jet m. 
he might perceive the secret designs of the enemy's general. 

cache, 2 dessein 1 2*1 

That we should not receive ever/ body with civility. That you 

honneteU. • 
could not conceive the depth of this book. Thfct they 

profondeur f. 
might not perceive the masts of the ship. 

mat m. pi. vaisseau m. 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



161 



BRANCH 1« 
rendering 

vand-ant 



rendered 
rend-w 



PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. 

pleasing appearing reducing 
^[•aisant -par-aissant redm-sant 
PARTICIPLE PAST. 

pleased appeared reduced 
pl-u par-w redui-f 



INDICATIVE. 



1 render please 

je rend-5 pl-at* 

tu rend-s -p\*ais 

il rend pi-ait 

nous rend-ons ip\-aisons 

vous rend-es p\-aisez 

ils rend-ent p\-aisent 

PRETERIT 



rendered 
j'ai rend-u 



pleased 
pl-u 



PRESENT. 

appear 

par-ais 

par-ais 

par-ozf 

pa.r-aissons 

par-aisses 

p&v-aissent 

INDEFINITE 

appeared 

par-u 



reduce 

redui-5 

redui-s 

redui-£ 

redui-sons 

redai-ses 

redui-senf 

. (I have) 
reduced 
redui-f 



BRANCH 5. 

joining 
jol-gnant 



jomea 
joi-nf 



join 

joi-ns 

joi-ns 

joi-nf 

joi-gnons 

jol-gnez 

joi-gnent 



joined 
joi-?if 



Indicative present. I know his fiery and impetuous 
connaitre bouillant 2 =3 
temper. I wait his return with impatience. Does he 

caractere m. 1 attendre retour 

fear death ? Does not virtue please every body ? We do 

craindre art. f. a 

not force you to adopt this opinion. We suppress Jbr 

contramdre de adopter — f. taire 

the present several interesting circumstances. Do you not 

— m. inliressanl 2 f . 1 

confound these notions one with another? You seduce 
confondre art. art. siduirz 

your hearers by your modest exterior. Do your sons 

audileur m. pi. 2 = m. 1 

acknowledge their errors 7 Do not those workmen waste their 
reconnaitre =s ouvrier perdre 

time about trifles ? 

a de art. bagatelle pi. 

Imperfect. I did not displease by my conduct. 1 was 
dip lair e 
pitying those sad victims of the revolution. Did not 
plaindre triste victime f. pi. — f. 

15* 



\$2 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



IMPERFECT. 



BRANCH 1. BRANCH 2 


. BRANCH 3. 


BRANCH 4. 


BRANCH 5 


/ did render 


please 


appear 


reduce 


join 


je rend-ais 


pl-aisais 


par-aissais 
PLUPERFECT 


r€dui-sais 


joi-gnaw 


/ had rendered 


pleased 


appeared 


reduced 


joined 


j'avais rend-u 


pl-u 


par-u 


r£dui-f 


joi-nf 




PRETERIT DEFINITE. 




/ rendered 


pleased 


appeared 


reduced 


joined 


je rend-is 


pl-us 


par-us 


redui-sts 


joi-g?iw 


tu rend-is 


pi -us 


par-us 


redui-m 


joi-gnis 


il rend-il 


pl-u/ 


par-u£ 


redui-sif 


jo'i-gnit 


nous rend-imes \A-umes 


par-umes 


r£dui-siwes 


joi-gnimes 


vous rend-ftes 


\)\-vie$ 


par-iMes 


vedui-sites 


jo\-gnites 


ils rend'irent 


\A-urent 


par-urerc£ 


redm-sirent 


jo'i-gnirent 




PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 




I had rendered 


pleased 


appeared 


reduced 


joined 


j'eus rend-u 


pl-u 


par-u 


redui-f 


joi-nt 



this dog bite ? Did that man (at last) acknowledge his 

chien mordre enfin 

injustice? We did not appear convinced. We joined our 

— f. convaincu pi. 

sighs and tears. Were you painting an historical 

soupir m. pi. pron. larme f. pi. peindre d'histoirt 2 

subject ? Did those orators throw the graces of 

tableau m. 1 = repandre — 

expression into their speeches ? They led the people 

art. — discours induire m. 

into an error. 
en * 

Preterit. I aimed at an honest end. Did his prudence 

tendre a 2 but m. 1 — f. 

extinguish the fire of a disordered imagination ? Did not your 
tteindre dertgU 2 — f . 1 

conduct (do away) his prejudices ? We led our 

— duite f. detruire prevention f. pi. reconduire 

friend back to his country-house. Did we offer our in- 
* de campagne 2 f . 1 tendre en- 

cense to the pride of a blockhead? Did you feign to think 
cens sot feindre de 

as a madman ? Did you conduct your children from truth to 
on * fou conduirt on 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 168 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

BRANCH 1. BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. BRANCH 5» 

I shall render please appear reduce join 

je rend-rai pl-crirai -pav-aitrai r£dui-rat joi-ntfrat 

future anterior. (/ shall have) 

rendered pleased appeared reduced joined 

j'aurai rend-u pl-w par-u redui-* )o\-nt 



CONDITIONAL. 



PRESENT. 

I should render please appear reduce join 

je rend-rais pl-airais par-ai/rai* redui-rats joi-ndrais 



truth 1 Did those frightful spectres appear again ? 

effrayant 2 — m. pi. 1 apparailre de nou- 
Did not the children (come down) at the first sum- 
veau desctndre a or- 

mohs ? 
dre m. sing. 

Future. Shall I hear the music of the new opera ? 

entendre musique f. 

I shall not conceal from you my mind. ' Will the ge- 

taire faijon de penser. 

neral constrain the officers to join their respective corps ? 

contraindre ojfficier rejoindre =■ 

Will not a thought, true, grand, and well expressed, please 

f. exprimi 

at all times ? We shall (make our appearance) on this great 
dans art. m. pi. paraitre sur 

theatre, next month. Shall we describe all the 

— m. art. prochain 2 mots m 1 depeindre 

horror of this terrible night ? Will you not new-model a 

— 2 nuit f. 1 refondre 

work so full of charming ideas ? Will you know your 

pleine 2 1 reconnailre 

things again ? Will they always reduce our duties to 

effet m. pi. * devoir m. pi. 

beneficence ? They will assiduously correspond with 
art. bienfaisance f. assidumcnt correspondre 

their friends. 

Conditional. ' Should 1, by these means, gain the 

moyen m. s. atteindre a 
desired end? I should (carry on) the undertaking with suc- 
dcsiri2 but m. 1. conduit e entreprise f. 



164 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



past. (/ should have) 



BRANCH 1. : 


BRANCH 2 


. BRANCH 3. 


BRANCH 4. 


BRANCH 5. 


rendered 


pleased 


appeared 


reduced 


joined 


j'aurai? rend-u pl-u 


par-u 


r6dui-f 


joi-nf 






IMPERATIVE. 




render (thou) 


please 


appear 


reduce 


join 


rend-5 


pl-ais 


par-etis 


redui-j 


joi-n* 


qu'il rend-e 


Y>\-aise 


par- aisse 


redui-se 


joi-g?ie 


rend-on* 


yhaisons 


u&v-aissons 


re dui -so ns 


joi-gnons 


rend-es 


phaisez 


par-aisses 


r£dui-ses 


joi-gnez 


qu'ilsrend-enf 


pl-aisent 


ItdLT-aissent 


r£dui-senf 


joi-gnent 



cess. Would his mother wait with (so much) patience ? Could 

tant de 

sincerity displease the man (of sense) ? Should we sell 

art. «= f. a sense vendre 

our liberty ? Should we build our house upon that plan ? 

construire — m. 

Would you oblige young people to live as you 

astreindre de art. gens pi. vivre comme 

do? Would you reduce your child to despair ? They 

art. desespoir m. 
should dread the (public) censure. Would my pro- 

craindre 1 du public 3 f. 2. 
tectors introduce an unknown person into the world ? 
= introduire inconnu m. # 

Imperative. Depict in thy idyl all the charms of a 

peindre idylle douceur f. 

rural life. Expect not happiness from exter- 

champetre 2 1 altendre art. art. exte- 

ndi objects; it is in thyself* Know the powers of thy mind 
neur 2 m. pi. I force f. 

before thou writest. Let us unite prudence with 

avant de * ecrire joindre art. f. d art. 

courage. Let us not descend to useless particulars. 

m. descendre dans des 2 — larrle 1 

Let us not (give offence) by an air of haughtiness. Seem 

deplaire * des m. pi. paraitre 2 

neither to cheerful nor too grave. Ye sovereigns, make 
ne 1 ni gai ni sirieux * souverain pi. rendre 

the people happy. Do not despise his friendship. Sweet 

d&daigtier doux 



OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



165 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

present, (that I may) 

1. BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. BRANCH 5. 



BRANCH 

render 



tu 

il 

nous 

vous 

ils 



rend-e 

rend-es 

rend-e 

rend-ions 

rend-ies 

rend-enJ 



please 

•phaise 

p\-aises 

pl-azse 

pl-amons 

\)\-aisiez 

p\-aisent 



PRETERIT, 
rendered pleased 

que j'aie rend-u pl-w 



appear 

par-aisse 

par-ame$ 

p&r-aisse 

p&r-aissions 

Tpa.r-aissiez 

ydT-aissent 

(that I may have) 
appeared reduced 
par-u- r£dui-f 



reduce 

r£dui-se 

r6dui-ses 

r£dui-se 

redui-«o?i5 

rddui-sies 

redui-sen£ 



join 

joi-gne 

joi- gnes 

joigne 

joi-gnions 

jol-gnies 

jo'i-gnent 

joined 
joi-7if 



(Keep to yourself) such 
taire certain 



illusions, vain phantoms, vanish. 

— f. — fantdme m. disparaitre 
truths a3 may offend. 

f. pi. qui peuvent offtnser. 

Subjunctive present. That I may fear that cloud of ene- 

nuee f. 
mies. That I should please everybody, is impossible. 

a ce 

That he may not reply to such absurd criticism. That 

repondre un si 2 3 critique f. pi. 
he may lead his pupil step by step to a perfect knowledge 
conduire eleve pas a connaissance 

of the art of speaking and writing. That we may entice by an 

ini-1 pr. inf-1 seduire 

enchanting style. That we may confound the arts with the 

— teur 2 m. 1 
sciences. That you may have the same end in view. That 

but m. 2 tendre a 1 
they may not depend on any bedy. That they may not in- 
dipendre de personne cc- 

crease our sufferings. 
croitre peincs. 

Imperfect. That I might not melt into tears. That 

fondre en larme 
I would acknowledge the truth. That he might (draw a picture) 

reconnaitre peindre 

of distressed virtue. That he might please by her accom- 

art. malheureux 2 1 grace 



166 OP THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 

imperfect, (that I might) 

BRANCH 1. BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. BRANCH 5. 

render phase appear reduce join 

que je rend-isse p\-usse par-uwe redui-suse joi-gmwe 

tu rend-me.? p\-usses psr-usses redul-sisses joi-gnisses 

il rend-i/ y\-ut par-u£ r6dui-si£ jo\-gnit 

nous rend-issions pl-iissions par-nssions redm-sissions \oi-gnissions 

vous rend-issies p\-ussiez p&v-ussiez redm-sissies joi-gnissie2 

ils rend-issent pl-ussent pav-ussent redm°sissent joi-gnissent 

pluperfect, (that I might have) 

rendered pleased appeared reduced joined 

guej'eusse pl-w par-u redui-/ joi-nf 

rend-u 



PARADIGM, OR MODEL FOR PRONOMINAL 
VERBS. 

Se repentir to repent. 



Pronominal verbs, as was said page 121, are con- 
jugated throughout, in each person, with a double per- 
sonal pronoun, and as all their compound tenses are 
formed by means of the auxiliary verb Ure, their par- 
ticiple past must always agree in gender and number 
with the objective pronoun, when it is direct, otherwise 
not. Their inflections all follow the conjugations to 
which they belong. 



plishments more than by her beauty. That we might conduct 
f. pi. conduire 

him to court. That we should affect such low 

art. cour f. feindre de art. si bas 2 

sentiments. That you might hear their justification. 'I hat 

1 entendre 

you might know your real friends. That they might (wait for) 
vrai aitendre 

the opinion of sensible persons. That they would not ap- 
art, stnsi 2 f. pi. 1. f. 
pear so scornful and vain. 

dedaigneux f. pi. ni si f. pi. 



OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



161 



In all participles past, except absous 7 dissous, r€sous 9 
which are to be seen in their places, the feminine is 
formed by adding e mute to the masculine, and the 
plural by adding s to the singular, both masculine and 
feminine, when it does not already end with this letter, 
the French language not admitting a final double conso- 
nant. 

As there is some difficulty in conjugating pronomi- 
nal verbs, some few are here selected, which it will prove 
advantageous to practise. 



s' alarmer 
s 7 assoupir 
$' apercevoir 
se defendre 
se hater 
se depecher 
se ressentir 
se pouvoir 
se taire 
se promener 
se coucher 
se lever 
s J asseoir 
s 1 arroger 
se procurer 
se visiter 



s' abstemr 
se servir 
se souvenir 
se prevaloir 
se repaitre 
se conduire 
s* enrhumer 
a' ennuyer 
a' orienter 
a' endormir 
se morfondre 
se perdre 
a' evanom'r 
s 1 applauch'r 
a' attribuer 
$' entr'aider 



a' habituer 
se nanttr 
se contraindre 
se rendre 
a' evertuer 
s 3 impatienter 
st foe her 
se reposer 
s* enquere'r 
se mefier 
se formaiiser 
se rapetisser 
se r£concilie-r 
se s avoir gr6 
se prescrire 
a' entr'ouvrir 



a' enorgueilhV 
se meconnaitre 
s' immortaliser 
se dorloter 
a' ingenier 
a' obliger 
se recueillir 
se blesser 
a' enrouer 
se rejouir 
a' embarrasser 
a' habiller 
a' emanciper 
se dire 

•se rendre compte 
a' entre voir 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



INFINITITE. 

COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 

te repentir to repent 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

se repentant repenting 

PAST. 

3£* W«<* 



PAST. 



a' etre 



repent 



Wo 



or 
repentie ) 



have repented. 



PARTICIPLE PRESENT and PA3T. 

repen 1, ) having rCm 
repentie \ ***** 



>s' etant? 



168 



OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS, 



INDICATIVE. 
SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 





PRESENT. 


PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 




I repent. 


/ have repented. 




J* 


me repens 


je me suis 


) repenti, 


tH 


te repens 


tu V es 


? or 


il, or 


elle se repent 


il, or elle s y est 


) repentie 


nous 


noie$repenton3 


nous nous sommes 


) repenti*, 


vous 


vous repentez 


vous vous lies 


> or 


ils, or 


elles se repentent 


ils, or elles se sont 


Jrepenties 




IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 






J did repent. 


/ have repented. 




je 


me repentais 


je m 1 itais 


) repenti, 


tu 


te repentais 


tu V itais 


i 0T 


il, or 


elle se repentait 


il, or elle $' etait 


^repentie 


nous 


nous repentions 


nous nousitions 


) repentw, 


vous 


vous repentiez 


vous vous itiez 


> or 


ils, or 


elles se repentaient ils, or elles s' itaient 


)repentie» 



we not (nurse our- 
s'icouttr 
They mean to 
se proposer de 



Indicative present. — I commonly walk by moon- 
d' 'ordinaire se promener a art. clair 
light. Dost thou not deceive thyself ? He (is never happy) 

de la lune m. se tromper * ne se plaire 

but (when he is doing) wrong ! Do 

que a faire de art. mat m. 

selves) too much ? How do you do 1 

se porter 
travel in the spring. 
voyager a m. 

Preterit indefinite. — I (have been) tolerably well for 

se porter asses bien depuis 

sometime. Didst thou not lose thyself in the wood ? (It is 
s'egarer * On 

said) that he killed himself (out of) despair. Have we nattered 
dit se tuer * de se flatter 

ourselves without foundation ? Ladies, have you walked 

* fondement Mcsdames, se promener 

this morning ? Did those ladies recognise themselves in 



this portrait 1 



dame se reconnoitre 



OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 169 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

[repented. I had repented. 

je me repentis je me fus } repenli, 

tu te repentis tu te fus > or 

il, or elle se repentit il, or elle se fut ) repentic 

nous nous repentinies nous nous fumes ^repentis, 

vous vous repentites vous vous fides > or 

ils, or elles se repentirent ils, or elles se furent jrepentie* 



Imperfect. — I tormented myself incessantly about the 
se tourmenter * sans cesse pour 

affairs of others. Wast thou not (laying the foundation for) 

autrui se preparer 

much sorrow by thy foolish conduct? He made himself 

bien des regrets se rendre * 

more and more unhappy (every day.) We despaired without 

dejour en jour se dtsesptrer 
reason. Did you not laugh at us ? They ruined them- 

se moquer de se verdrc * 

selves wantonly. 

de gaiete de cceur. 

Pluperfect. — I had trusted myself to (very uncertain) 
se livrer a des ptu sur 2 

guides. Didst thou not confide too inconsiderately in this 
m. pi. 1. se conjier legerement a 

man ? Had that officer rushed rashly into this 

— cier s„ precipiler timer air ement dans 
danger? We had condemned ourselves. Had you not (been 
— m. se condamner nous-memes. s'ofr 

engaged) in trifles ? Had those travellers (gone out) of 

cuper de bagatelle f. pi. voyageurs se ditourner 

the right way ? 
droit chemin m. 

Preterit. — I repented but too late of having taken such a 

tard inf-2 fait 2 1 
step. Wast thou not well entertained yesterday even 

d-marche f. s^amuser hier au 

ing ? He suffered for his imprudence. We 

ne se trouver pas bien de 
met in the street, but did not speak. Did you say 

$t rencontrer rue te parier dites-vous 

nothing (to each other) ? Did not those rash children ap- 

Umiraire 2 1 #' ap- 
plaud themselves for their folly ? 
plaudir * de sottist. 

16 



170 OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall repent. I shall have repented. 

je me repentirai je me serai }repenti, 

tu le repentiras tu te stras \ or 

fl, or elle se repentira il, or elle se sera jrepentie 

nous nous repentirons nous nous strons 5 repents, 

vous vous repcntirez vous vous seres > or 

lis, or elles se repentiront ils, or elles se seront jrepentie* 



Preterit anterior. — (As soon as) I discovered that they 
des-que s'apercevoir on 

sought to deceive me, I was on my guard. 

chercher in d-2 tromper se tenir ind-3 garde-f.pl. 

What didst thou, when thou saw'st thyself thus forsaken 1 
Jis quand se trouver * ainsi abandonni 

When she recollected all the circumstances, she was quite 
se souvenir de f. ind-3 toute 

ashamed. When he had rejoiced sufficiently, we parted. 
honteux se rejouir asses se siparer ind-3 

When you had amused yourself sufficiently at his expense, 

s'amuser * a depensm. pi. 

did you not leave him quiet ? When they had walked 

laisstr ind-3 tranquille se prornener 

enough, they (sat down) at the foot of a tree. 
s J assirent a 

Future absolute. — I will yield, if they convince me 

se rendre on convainc 

Wilt thou remember the engagement that thou makest ? What 

se souvenir de prends 

will not he reproach (himself for) ? We shall not forget our- 

se reprocher a lui-meme s'oublier 

selves (so far as) to (be wanting) in respect towards him. Will 

* jusque manquer de * lui 

you employ the means I (point out) to you ? Will not 

seservirde que indiquer * 

these flowers fade ? 

f. se fl&trir. 

Future anterior. — Skall I have betrayed myself? Wilt 

se trahir moi-meme 
thou not have degraded thyself in his eyes ? He will have 

s'avilir * a 

(been proud) of this trifling advantage. We shall have 

t'enorgueillir foible avantage m. 



OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 171 

CONDITIONAL. 
SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 




PAST. 


I should repent. 




I should have repented. 


je me repentirais 


je 


me serais } repenfi, 


tu te repentirais 


tu 


te serais > or 


il, or elle se repentirait 


il, or 


ell3*e serait ) repentie 


nous nous repentrrions 


nous 


now tenon, \ . 

vous series f r ' 


vous vous repentiriez 


vous 


ils, or elles se repentiraient 


ils, or 
elles 


> se seraient irepentiej 



fatigued ourselves (to no purpose). In the end, you will have 
se fatiguer * inutilement a 

(been undeceived). Will your children have (loved each other) 
se desabuser s'entr'aimer 

too much ? 

# 

Conditional- Present. Should I suffer myself to 

se lasser * * 

(be drawn) into the party of the rebels ? Wouldst thou be 
entrainer parti m. 2 * 

(so easily) frightened ? Would not the nation sub- 

de si peu de chose 3 s'effrayer 1 — f. se son- 

mit to so just a law ? We should not rejoice to see the 

mettre 3 4 12 se plaire voir 

triumph of guilt. Would you dishonour yourselves by 
triomphe art. crime m. se dishonorer * 

such an action ? Would those lords (avail themselves) of 

2 1 seigneur se prevaloir rf« 

their birth and fortune, (in order to) hurt 

naissance f. de leurs richesses pour /aire rig- 

our feelings ? 
lence a sentiment. 

Past. Should I not have devoted myself entirely to 

se devouer * entierement 
the service of my country ? (Had it not been for) thy careless- 
pays m. sans insouci- 

ness, thou would'st certainly have (grown rich). Would this 
ance f. s'enricher 

pleasing hope have vanished so soon ? Should we have 

ioux espoir m. s'foanouir 

degraded ouiselves to such a degree ? You would have 
it dSgrader * 2 1 point m. 



172 



OP THE PRONOMINAL VKRBS, 



IMPERATIVE. 



AFFIRMATIVE. 

Repent (thou). 
repens-/oi 

quelle 1 " }' ere P ente 

repentons-r.ous 
repentez-vous 

gar}— f-r- 



qu'elle 



NEGATIVE, 
Do not repent, 
ne te repens 
^ ne se repente 



ne nous repcitons 
ne vous repentez 



► pas 



SUBJUNCTIVE, 
SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 

That I may repent. 

que 

je me repente 

tu te repentes 

il, or elle se repente 

nous nous repentions 

vous vous repentiez 

ils, or elles se repentent 



PRETERIT. 

That I might have repented. 

que 

je m e sois }repenti, 

tu te sois > or 

il, or ejie se soit jrepentie 

nous noussoyons 

vous soyez 

se soient 



vous 
ils, or i 
elles 



repentis, 

or 
repentie* 



reduced yourselves to every kind of want. They 

se reduire * sorte f. privation f. pi. 

would have (been drowned,) if (they had not had assistance). 
se noyer on ne les avcit secourus. 

Imperative. O man, remember that thou art mortal. Do 
se sowenir 
not flatter (thyself that thou wilt succeed easily). Let 

tc promels un succtsfr.cile 

us take an exact account of our actions. Let us not deceive 
serendre — 2 eompte 1 se seduire 

ourselves. Rest yourself under the shade of this tree. 

nous-mimes. Sc reposcr * a ombre 

Do not expose yourself so rashly. 



s expos tr * 
Subjunctive present. 



i itre i I 

I must rise to-morrow at 

flfaut que se lever at 



OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 173 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

That I may repent. That I might have repented. 

que que 

ie me repentisse je me fusse }repenti, 

tu te repentisses tu it fusses \ or 

il, or elle se repentit il, or elle se fut )repentie 

nous nou* repentissions nous nous fussions ) repentis, 

vous vous repentissiez vou* vous fussies > or 

ils, or elles se repentissent ils, or elles se fussent ) repenfie* 



an earlier hour. I wish that thou may'st be 

* meilleur heure f. souhaiter se porter 

better. I wish him to conduct himself better. Is it not es- 

mieux veux qu'il * se conduire * 

sential that we should contain ourselves ? They wish that 

— tiel se contenir * On desirer 

you should accustom yourselves early to labour. 

s'habiluer * de bonne hture art. travail m. 
It is time that they should (have relaxation) from the fatigue 

se dilasser — f. 

of business, 
art. f. pi. 

Preterit. Can I have (been deceived) so grossly ? 

Se peut-il que se tromper grossiere- 

It is astonishing that thou hast determined to stay. Jt U 
ment ? Honnant se decider rester On* 

not said that he interfered in this business. It will never be 
dit se meler de On * 

believed that we have conducted ourselves so ill. It is not 
croira se comporter * mat. On * 

suspected that you have disguised yourselves so ingeniously. 
soupconner se aeguiser * adroitemint 

It is not feared that they have behaved ill. 
craindre se conduire. 

Imperfect. They required that I should (go to bed) at ten 
On exigeait se toucher a 

o'clock. They wish that thou should'st walk often e*. 

heure On voudrait sepromener 

Did they not wish that h« should practise fencing ? 
On veulait s'exercer a faire des arms* 

Was it necessary that we should (make use) of this method ? 
=» se serrir moytn m. 

16* 



174 



OF THE PASSIVE VERBS. 



CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VERBS. 

There is but one mode of conjugating passive verbs ; it is by 
adding to the verb etre, through all the moods and tenses, the 
participle past of the verb active, which then must agree in gen- 
der and number with the subject ; as, 



Je suis aim£, or ainiee 

tu etais 6stim6, or estiniee 

ce roi fut cheri cie son peuple 

elle fut toujours che>ie 

nion p£re fut respects 

ma m£re fut r£v£r6e 

uous serous loues, or loupes 

vous en serez blames, or blamees 

ils seroient craints et redout^s 

je voudrais que les portes fussenl ) 

ouvertes 5 

tu en avais ^te averti, or avertie 
lorsqu'il eut £te" mordu 
je soup^onne que la ruse aura ete" 

d^couverte 
vous auriez £t£ ape^us, or apercues 
bien qu'elles aient ete reconnues 
supposez que les lumieres eussent > 

ete eteintes. > 



/ am loved 

thou wast esteemed 

that king was beloved by his peoplt 

she was always beloved 

my father was respected 

my mother was revered 

xve shall be praised 

you will be blamed for it 

they would be feared and dreaded 

I wish the doors were opened 

thou hadst been apprised of it 
when he had been bitten 
i suspect the artifice will have been dis- 
covered 
you would have been perceived 
although they were recognised 

suppose the lights had been put out. 



Did they wish that you should complain without reason ? 

on voulait se plaindre 

Did they not wish them (to make more haste) ? 

on desirer ind-2 que ils se hater davantage ? 

Pluperfect. Would they have wished that I had revenged 

voulu se venger 

myself? I could have wished that thou hadst shewn 

* desirer se montrer 
thyself more accommodating. 1 could have wished that this 

* moins difficile voulu 

painter had (been less negligent). Would you have wished that 
peintre se negliger moins voulu 

we should have ruined ourselves in the public opinion, (in order 
seperdre * 2 f . 1 pour 

to) satisfy your resentment ? I could have wished perhaps 
satisfaire ressentiment desirer ptut-itrt 

that you had applied yourselves more to your studies. 

s'appliquer * davantage 

We could have wished that they had extricated themselves 

se tircr 
more skilfully from the difficulties (in which) they (had 

adroiiement embarras &u 

involved themselves). 
s^taient mis. 



0"F THE NEUTRAL VERES. 



175 



In the following exercises upon the verbs, the 
tenses will now be promiscuously intermixed. 

EXERCISE ON THE PASSIVE VERBS. 
That young lady is so mild, so polite, and so kind, that 

jeune demoiselle doux honnete bon 

she is beloved by every body. He performed with (so much) 
aime de jouer ind-4 tant de 

ability, that he was universally applauded. He is know T n 

intelligence ind-4 applaudi 

by nobody. How many counties, unknown to the ancients, 
de que de pays incunau 

have been discovered by modern navigators ? 

art. 2 navigaleur m. pi. 1. 



CONJUGATION OF THE NEUTER VERBS. 
There are in the French language about six hundred neuter 
verbs, which are conjugated with the auxiliary avoir in their 
compound tenses; the only excepted are the following, which 
take etre ; even some of them, and particularly those marked with 
an asterisk, take either, according to the sense. 



Aller 


to go 


venir 


to come 


accourir 


to run to 


revenir 


to come back 


arriver 


to. arrive 


devenir 


to become 


choir 


to/all 


redevenir 


to become again 


deehoir 


to decay 


avenir 


to happen 


eckoir 


to become due 


intervenir 


to intervene 


monter* 


to go up 


parvenir 


to attain 


descendre * 


to go dozen 


proven ir 


to come from 


remonter * 


to go up again 


survenir 


to befall 


redescendre 


to go down again 


discon venir 


to deny, or disovm 


entrer 


to enter 


naltre 


to be born 


rentrer 


to come in again 


inourir 


to die 


retourner 


to return 


deceder 


to die 


tomber 


to fall 


eclore 


< to be hatclud, i 
\ blow 


retomber 


to fall again 


partir 


to set out 


accoucker 


\ to be brought i 


repartir 


to set out again 


( bed 


rester 


to stay 


demeurer * 


to stay, or remain 


£chapper * 


to escape 


apparaltre * 


to appear 


expirer * 


to expire 


perir * 


*o perish 


passer * 


to pass away 


resulter* 


to result 


sortir 


to go out 


convenir * 


to agree, to suit 


ressortir 


to go ovt again 


contrevenir * 


to contravene 


aborder * 


to land, kc. 







Remark. The participle of these neuter verbs, which take 
tlrt for auxiliary, must accordingly agree both in gender and 
number with their subject ; as, 



Je suit tombe, or tombee 
quand tufas venu, or venue 
il titait arrive avant moi 
elte it ait deja arrivee 
ma saeur itait partie avant lui 
nous serons revrnm, or revenue* 
quand vous serez descenduo, or > 
desceuduo > 



/ have fallen 

when thou hadst come 

he had arrived before m»*~ 

she had already arrived ^v 

my sister had set off before him 

rue shall have returned 

when you shall have come down 



/ 



176 



OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



lis aeraient reparti* ") 

elles seraient repartiea $ 

vos soeurs itaient sorties, sent-elles a 

present rentrees ? 
cela lui est echu en partage 
cette maison nj'a convenu et je suis 

convenu du prix 
il n'en est pas discern venu 



they would have set off again 

your sisters went out, are they now com* 

back ? 
t hut fell to his lot 
thai house suited me and 1 have agreed 

about the price 
he did not deny it 



cette chose mhst echappee de !a m& that thing escaped from my memory. 



moire, de la main 
la tre>e est expiree 
les delais sont expires 
elle a expire dans les bras de sa m6re 
qu' a-t-il rebuild de la ? qu'en est il re- 

sulte ? 
tous ceux qui etaient sur ce vaisseau 

ont peri, ou sont peris 
a-t-on descendu le vin a la cave ? > 



dropped from my hand 
the truce has expired 
the delays have expired 
she expired in the arms of her mother 
what has been the result, o«- consequence 

of it ? 
all those that were on board of that ship 

have perished 
have they carried down the wine into the 

cellar 7 



le barom£tre a descendu de quatre de- the barometer fell four degrees during 



gres pendant la journ£e. 
les actions ont mont£ beaucoup. 
je n'ai pas remonte" ma montre 
il a monte quatre fois a sa cbambre 

pendant la journee. 
il est mont£ dans sa chambre, et il y 

est rest£. 



the day 
the stocks rose very much 
1 have not wound up my watch 
he went up to his room four times in the 

course of the day 
he is gone up to his room, and has re 

mained there 



And so on through all the compound tenses of the other verbs. 

EXERCISE. 
They came to see us with the greatest haste. When 

ind-4 * voir empressemeiit Quand 

did they arrive ? That estate fell to his 

esl-ce que arriver ind-4 terre f. lui est echu en * 

lot. He fell from his horse, but happily received 

partage tomber ind-4 * il — ind-4 

only a slighi contusion on the knee. 
ne que legtr — f. a genou m. 







OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 


Observe that 


, in impersonal 


verbs, il has 


no 


relation to a sub- 


stantive, 


i as may be seen by the impossibility 


of substituting a 


noun in its place. 












IMPERSONAL VERBS. 






il pleut 




it rains 


il bruine 




it drizzles 


il neige 




it snows 


il importe 




it matters 


U grfcie 




it hails 


il semble 




it seems 


il tonne 




it thunders 


il parait 




it appears 


il eclaire 




it lightens 


il suffit que 




it suffices 


il gele 




it freezes 


il convient 




it becomes 


il degele 




it thaws 


il s'ensuit que 




it follows the* 


tl arrive 




it happens 


il est a propos 




it is proper 


il sied 




it is becoming 


il taut 




it is necessary 


il messied 




it is unbecoming 


il y a, &c. 




there is, or art 






EXERCISE. 






Does i 


t rain 


this morning 1 Did it hail 




pleuvovr matin 


m. 


grii 


\er ind- 4 art. 



OF THE IMPERSONAL VERES. 177 

last night? It does not snow. I thought it had thun- 

der nier 2 f . 1 neiger croyais que ten- 

dered. Does it not lighten 1 Do you think it freezer. T 

ner ind-6 eclair er croytz que geler 

It is a remarkable thing. It was a terrible hurricane. 

ce ce ind-2 2 ouragan 1 

It is ten o'clock. It (was not my friend's fault) that it 

heure pi. ne lenir itid-3 pas a nion ami la chose 

was not so. It will freeze long. I do not think so ; it 

subj-2 ne ainsi long-temps ^ crois 

seems, on the contrary, that it thaws. It (is fit) to act 

sembler a contraire degeler convenir de 

so. It (was of great importance) to succeed. Would it be 

importer bcaucoup ind-2 de rhissir Hre 

proper to write to your friends? It appears that he has 

ct prop os de 
not attended to that business. Perhaps it (would be N i better to 

s'occuper de vaudrait 

(give up) the undertaking. It (was sufficient) to know his 

abandonner entreprise suffisait de 

opinion. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB 

Falloir, ilfaut, it must, it is necessary, 

INFINITIVE. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 

present falloir past avoir fallu 

partic. pres. wanted past fallu, ayant fallu. 

INDICATIVE. 

present. il faut preterit ind. il a fallu 

imperfect. il falloit pluperfect, il avait fallu 

PRETERIT DEF. il fallut PRETERIT ANT. il eut fallu 

future absol. il faudra future anter. il aura fallu. 

CONDITIONAL. 
present il faudrait past il aur ait fallu 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

present qu'il faille preterit qu'il ait fallu 

iiipep.fect qu'il fallut pluperfect qu'il eut fallu 

Remark. The English verb, must, not being im- 
personal, may take any noun, or pronoun, for its sub- 
ject, whereas the French verb f<ill>ir, being always 



178 OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

impersonal, a change of construction in the translation 
becomes necessary, and this may be done in two differ- 
ent ways. 

The most common method is by putting the con- 
junction que after il faut, il fallait, &c. then transport- 
ing the subject of the English verb must to the second 
verb, which is to be put in the subjunctive in French : 
thus, I must sell my house, il faut que je vuide ma 
maison. 

The other way is by allowing the second verb to 
remain in the infinitive, as in English, and substituting 
in the place of the personal pronoun, which is the 
subject of the verb must, its corresponding objective 
me, te, lui, nous, vous, leur, which are to be placed 
between il and faut, fallait, &c. as, I must begin that 
work to-day, il me faut commencer cet ouvrage au- 
jourd-hui. 

Observe. That all expressions implying necessity, 
obligation, or want, may be rendered by falloir ; as, I 
want a new grammar, il me faut une nouvelle gram- 



EXERCISE. 

You must speak to him about that affair. It was necessary 

sub-1 de f. ind-2 que 

for him to consent to that bargain. We were obliged to (set 
* it * sub-2 marche m. ind-3 partir 

out) immediately. Children should learn every day sorae- 
sub-2 sur-le-champ art. cond-1 sub-2 

thing by heart. Shall I suffer patiently such an insult ? He 

ind-7 sub-1 2 1 

must have been a blockhead not to understand 

cond-2 * sub-2 sot 2 pour 1 comprendre inf-1 des 

such easy rules. (How much) do you want ? He does 

si 2 3 regie f. 1 combien fait 

what is requisite. Do that as it (should be). What must he 

failes ind-1 que 2 lui 1 

have for his trouble ? You are the man I want. Do not 

* peine f. que 

give me any more bread, I have already more than I 

* de en deja ne 

want. 1 need not ask you whether you will come. I do not 
m'tn * inf-1 si 



OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



179 



think that it is necessary to be a conjurer to guess his motives. 
crois il sub-1 * sorcier pour deviner motif 

I could not suspect that I ought to ask pardon for a fault 
pouvais soupgonner sub-2 * inf-1 — de fault f. 

I have not committe 
que commise. 



Present 
Past 
Participle Pres. 
Participle Past 



CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB 

Y avoir, there to be. 
INFINITIVE. 

y avoir there to be 



y avoir eu there to have been 

y ay ant there being 

y ayant eu there having bem 

INDICATIVE. 



Present 
Preterit Indef. 

Imperfect 
Pluperfect 
Preterit Def. 
Preterit Ant. 
Future Absolute 
Future Anterior 



Present 
Past 



il y a 

il y a eu 

il y avait 
il y avait eu 
il y eut 
il y eut eu 
il y aura 
il y aura eu 

CONDITIONAL. 

il y aurait there would be 



there is, or there are* 

there has been, or there have 

been* 
there was, or there were* 
there had been 
there was, or there were* 
there had been 
there will be 
there will have been 



il y aurait eu there will have been 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present qu 'il y ait that there may be 

Preterit qu'il y ait eu that there may have been 

Imperfect qu'il y eut that there might be 

Pluperfect. qu'il y eut eu that there might have been 

N. B. This verb in English is used in the plural, when 
followed by a substantive plural ; in French it remains 
always in the singular. 



EXERCISE. 

There must be a great difference of age between those two 
il doit — f • 

persons. There being (so many) vicious people in this world. 
taut de =2 gens m. pi. 1 



180 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



is it astonishing that there are so many persons who become 

itonnant sub-1 devenir 

the victims of the corruption of the age ? It is a thousand 

pervtrsile f. siecle m. * mille a 

to one that he will not succeed. There would be more 

parier con're rtussir 

happiness if (every one) knew how to moderate his desires, 
de bonheur chacun savait * * moderer disir 

I did not think that there could be (any thing) to blame in 

croynis sub-2 rien reprendre 

his conduct. There would not be so many duels, did people 

conduitei. — si Con 

reflect that one of the first obligations of a Christian is to 

lefltchir in d-2 f. — f. Chretien de 

forgive injuries. Could there be a king more happy 

pardonner art. Pourrait-il 

than this, who has always been the father of his subjects ? 
celui-ci sujet 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS* 
IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 

INFINITIVE. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 





To (go away) 


To &ar>e gone (envay) 


PRESENT. 


en) aller (s' 


en) etre ) 


1 aUe, alle« 


PARTICIPLE PRES. (s» 


en) allant \ 

en)alle 5 (s ? 






PARTICIPLE PAST. ( 


en) etant ( 


1 ailee, alleei 






INDICATIVE. 








je (m» 
tu (t> 


en) vais* je (m* 
en) vas tu (t' 


en) suis 
en) es 


?alle, or 


PRES. 1 


il, or elle (s' 


en) va il, or elle (s' 


en) est 


i alle< 


, nous (nous 


en) allons nous (nous 


en) somraes ) _„ ,_ 




' vous (vous 


en) ftllez vous (vous 


en) et*s 


gilt's, or 
} allecs 




. ils, or elles (s' 


en) vont ils, or elles (s' 


en) sont 


IMP. 


je (m» 


en) allals je (m' 


en) £tais 


alle, &C 


PRET. 


J« (m» 


en) allai je (ra' 


en) fus 


alle.fcc 


FUTURE 


, j« <m' 


en) iuai je (m' 


eii) serai 
en) serais 


alle, fcc 


OOND. 


je (m» 


en) irais je (ra' 


alle, kc 



* Or je (m' en) vas. 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

IMPERATIVE. 
AFFIRMATIVE. NEGATIVE. 



181 



qum 



quHls 



va 


(V en) 




(s' en) aille 


allons 


(nous en) 


allez 


(vous en) 




£s' en) aillent 



qu'il 



qu'ils 



ne (t> 
ne (s* 
ne (nGus 
ne (vous 
ne (s 1 



en) va 
en) aille 
en) allons 
en) allez 
en) aillent 



pas. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 





f je (m' 


en) aille je (m' 


en) sois 


)alle, or 
? ollee 




I tu (t' 


en) ailies tu (t' 


en) sois 


PRES. 


J il, or elie (s' 


en) aille il, or elle (s' 


en) soit 


que 


j nous (nous 


en) allions nous (nous 


en) soyoof 


f all£s, or 
J alle« 




/ vous (vous 


en) alliez vous (vous 


en) soyez 




*• ils, or elles(s' 


en) aillent ils, o relies (s' 


eu) soient 


Imp. 


je (m' 


en) allasse je (m' 


en) fusse 


all 6, &c 



REMARKS. 

Je fusy j'ai ete, j'avais ete, j'aurais ite, are some- 
times used for j 'a llai, je suis alle, j'etais alle, je serais 
alle* 

The imperative va takes an s when followed by y, 
or by en ; as, vas-y, vas en savoir dc$ nouvelles, go thi- 
ther, go to hear some tidings of it ; however it takes no 
s when the y is followed by a verb ; as, va y donner or- 
dre, go and order that affair. 



EXERCISE. 
Will you go this evening into the country ? 



soir a 

pay some visits, and if I be 
faire ind-1 

shall certainly go home. 

s'en aller chez-moi 
Go and do that errand. 

* faire commission f. 

thing in order. Let him go to 

en art. eglise f. 

By being loaded with scents, 



campagne f. 
early 

de bonne heure 2 " libre I 
Go there with thy brother 



I am going to 
(at liberty) I 



Go there and put every 
* meltre 
church on holidays. 

art. /our pi. de 

and particularly 
fH: a force de inf-f charge de odeur f. pi. surtout 

amber, he (offends the smell.) They have woven 

pr. ambre m. sentir mauvais. de art f. 

17 



182 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Puer, to stink, is by no means irregular, but simply 
defective in the preterit of the indicative, and in the im- 
perfect of the subjunctive. 

TVsser, to weave, is a verb defective, which, to form 
its compound tenses, borrows the participle past tissu, 
from the obsolete verb tistre. 

Envoyer and renvoyer, make in their future absolute 
and conditional present, j'enverrai, j'enverrais, and je 
renverrai, je renverrais. 



IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION 

branch i. Punir. 

Benir, to bless, has no irregularity, except in one of 
its two participles past, bgnit, benite ; as, pain benit, 
hallowed bread ; eau benite, holy water. The other, 
beni, bdnie, being regular ; as, benie entre toutcs lesfem- 
mes, blessed among all women. 

Fleurir, signifying to blossom, is regular ; but when 
it means to flourish, to be in repute, honour, esteem, 



silk and cotton together, and made a very pretty 

pr-art. m. en ont fait 

stuff. I shall send spring flowers to those 

eloffe f. dc art. printanier2 f. pi. 1 

ladies. I would go to Rome, if I could. We would 

dame f. pi. _ pouvois 

(send back) our horses. Why do they go away so soon ? 

pourquoi 
My brother and sister went yesterday to Windsor. I 

pron. ind-4 

will not go (any more) a hunting. 
plus a * art. chasse f. 

EXERCISE ON BRANCH I. 

May the name of that good king be blessed from generation 
nom m. 
to generation ! These trees bloswmed twice every 

en ind-2 deux fois tout art. 

year; The arts and sciences flourished at Athens in the 

an pi. — art. — ind-2 a. Athtnes 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 183 

it makes, in the participle present, florissant, and in the 
imperfect of the indicative, jlorissait, florissaient. 

In hair, to hate, the letters -ai form throughout two 
syllables, except in the three persons singular of the 
present of the indicative, je hats, tu hais, il hait, and 
in the second person singular of the imperative hais* 
which are pronounced as one syllable, as if written, je 
hes, iu hes, il hit. 

Gesir, to lie, is a defective verb* and has only pre- 
served gisant, git, nous gisons, ils gisent, il gisait> used 
in familiar discourse, or poetry, and particularly in 
monumental inscriptions : ci-git, here lies. 



branch ii. on Sentir. 
bouillir, to boil, courir, to run. 

Par.pres. Bouillant — Past, bouilli Courant — couru 

C bous, bous, bout cours, cours, court 

Ind. pres $ < bouillons, bouillez, courons, courez, courenl 

( bouillent 

Imperf, bouillais — Pret. bouillis courais — courus 

Future. bouillirai— Cond. bouil- courrai — courrais 

lirais 

Imp. bous, bouillons, bouillez rours, courons, courez 

Sub. pres. bouille — Imp. bouillisse coure — cournsse 



Rebouillir, to boil again, and ebouillir, to boil away, 
are conjugated like bouillir ; this latter is only used in 

time of Pericles. Horace and Virgil flourished under the 

Pericles Virgil e ind-2 sous 

reign of Augustus. We discovered from tbe top of the 

regne Augvste. dtcouvrir haut 

mountain a vast plain full of flowery meadows. 

plaine f. rempli de flearissant 2 pre m, pi. 1 
The empire of the Babylonians was long a/ou- 

— — nien ind-3 long-temps * 

risking one. We did not hate the man, but his vices. Does 

ehe really hate that vain pomp and all the parade of 

pompe f. appareil ait 

grandeur i 



184 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

compound tenses, and the infinitive ; as, cette sauce exi 
trop ebouillie, this sauce has boiled away too much. 

Like courir are conjugated, 
accourir to run to far courir to run over 

concourir to concur recourir to have recourse 

discourir to discourse secourir to assist 

encourir to incur 

Faillir, to fail. 
Part. pres. faillant* Past, failii. 

Ind. pres. faux,* faux,* faut,* faillons,* faillez,* faillent.* 
Imp erf. faillais.* Prel. faillis, he. Fut. faudrai.* 
Cond. faudrais.* Subj. imp erf. que je faillisse. 

Defaillir, to faint, has now only the plural of the 
IffD. pres. nous defaillons, ils defaillent. Imperf. defaillo»s. 
Pret. defaillis. Pret. indef. j'ai defailli, and Ixf. pres. defaillhr. 

N. B. The tenses marked with an asterisk are obsolete. 

EXERCISE ON BRANCH II. 

Take that water off the fire, it boils too fast. Do not 

Retirer f. de dessus m. f. fort 

let the soup (boil away) (so much). That sauce has 

laisscr 1 pot 3 taut 2 f. est 

(boiled away) (too much). Boil that meat again ; 

f. ' trop Faites rebouillir viandei.* 

It has not boiled long enough. He runs faster than I. He 

f. 2 * asses 1 vile moi 

ran about uselessly all the morning. We ran at the 

ind-4 * inutilement matinee f. ind-3 

voice of that honest man, and assisted him. (The moment) he 

f. des-que 

saw us in danger, he ran to us and delivered us. By so 

vit en * delivrer ind-3 2 

whimsical a conduct, should we not contribute to our destruc- 
biearre 3 1 concourir perte f. 

tion? He discoursed so long on the immortality of the soul, 

sur = 

and the certainty of another life, that he left 

certitude f. laisser ind-3 

nothing unsaid. If we (were to act thus), we should 

en arriere agir ind-2 ainsi 

certainly incur the displeasure of our parents. I would not 

disgrace f. 
huve recourse to so base a method. Will men always 

bas 2 moyen m. I art. 

mn after shadows ? 

de art. chbnere f. pi. 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. t8S 

Fuir, tojly, to run away. 

Part. pres. fuyant. Past. fui. 

Ind. pres. fuis, fuis, fuit, fuyons, fuyez, fuient. 

Jmperf. fuyais. Pret. fuis. Fut. fuirai. Cond. fuiraia. 

Imp. fuis, fuie, fuyons, fuyez, fuient. 

Subj. pres. fuie, fuies, fuie, fuyions, fuyiez, fuient. 

Imperf. je fuisse, or rather, prisse la fuite. 

Mourir, to die. 

Part. pres. mourant. Past. mort. 

Ind. pres. meurs, meurs, meurt, mourons, mourez, meurent* 

Imp. mourais. Pret. mourus. Fut. mourrai. Cond. mourraii. 

Imp. meurs, meure, mourons, mourez, meurent. 

Subj. pres. meure, meures, meure, mourions, mouriez, meurent, 

Imperf. mourusse. Comp. tenses, je suis mort, j'£tais mort, &«. 

Rem. S'enfuir, to run away, is conjugated after ftiti%. 
Mourir takes the auxiliary etre ; and when reflected, 
se mourir signifies to be dying, or at the point of death- 
It is seldom used except in the present and imperfect of 
fhe indicative. 



EXERCISE ON FAILLIR, &c. 

He (was near) losing his life in that rencounter. He 

faillir perdre * art. rencontre f. 

(was near) falling into the snare which was laid for Kim. 

faillir \nd-4 donner piege m. qu'onavait tendu * ttti 

His strength fails . him every day. Let us 

* art. f. pi. difaillir lui art. m. pi. Donnez-iipu* 

have something to eat directly ; we are fainting with 

* * manger 2 vile 1 de 

fatigue and hunger. I cannot meet him, he shuns 

— pr. faim ne puis rencontrer 

me. When we have no employ, we endeavour to 

o?i salt s'occuper chercher st 

fly from ourselves. Would he not avoid flatterers* 

* soi-meme fuir art. flatteur m. pL 

if he knew all their falsehood ? He diedby a (very painful) 

ind-2 faussete f. de cruel 2 

disease. She died of grief (for the loss of) her ion. 

maladie f. 1 ind-4 chagrin m. d 1 avoir perdu 

He is dying. She was expiring with grief, when the fear 

ie mourir se mourir de craintt f. 

of death at last wrested her secret from her 

art. enfln arracher ind-3 — m. * lui. 

17* 



186 OF TB£ IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Querir, to fetch, is used in familiar conversation af- 
ter venir, envoyer, a tier, as, eir^yez querir, send for ; 
allez querir, go and fetch. 

Acquerir, to acquire. 
Part. pres. acqu£rant. Past, acquis. 
Ind. pres. acquiers, acquiers, acquiert, acqu^rons, acquerez, ao 

quierent. 
Imper. acque'rais. Pret. acquis. Fut. acquerrai. Cond. acquerrais. 
Imp. acquiers, acquiere, acquerons, acquerez, acquierent. 
Subj. pres. acquier-e, -es, -e, acquer-ions, -iez, acquidrent. 
Imperf. acquisse. 

S'enquerir, to inquire, and requerir, to request, are 
conjugated as acquerir. 

Conquerir, to conquer, is seldom used but in the 
Ind. pret. je conquis, &c. and in the Subj. imperf. je 
conquisse. Its chief use is in the compound tenses. 

Ou'ir, to hear, is only employed in the Inf. pres. 
oui'r. Part. past. oui. Ind. pret. j'ou'is, tu ouis, &c. 
and Subj. imperf. j'ouisse, tu ouisses, &c. Its princi- 
pal use is in the compound tenses , when it is generally 
accompanied by another verb ; as, je Pai, or je I'avais 
oui dire, I have, or I had heard it said. 

Vetir, to clothe. 
Part. pres. vetant* Past. vetu. 
Ind. pres. vets,* vets,* vet,* vetons, v£tez, vetenf. 
Imperf. vetais. Prel. vetis. Fut. v&tirai. Cond. v&irais. 
Imp. vets,* vete,* vetons, vetez, vetent. 
Subj. pres. vete. Imperf. vetisse. 

N. B. Vetir, is seldom used in the forms marked 
with an asterisk, and is most frequently reflected. 

Revetir, to clothe, to invest, is used through all the 
tenses ; devetir, to divest, is principally used as a re- 
flected verb, and in some forms only. 

~ EXERCISE ON QUERIR, he. 

Send for the physician and follow exactly his advice. Go 

rnidecin suives 

and fetch ray cane- Every day he acquired 

* canne f. art. jour m. pi. ind-3 de art. 

celebrity by works calculated to fix the atteiv- 

s f . de art. ourrflgem.pl. fait pour 

tion of an enlightened public. That I would acquire 

2 1 subj-2 de art. 

riches at the expense of my honesty ! He had acquired 

dtpens m. pi. pi obit t f. 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 187 

branch in. Ouvrir. 
Cueillir, to gather. 

Part. pres. cueillant. Past, cueilli. Ind. pres* cueille. 

Imperf. cueillais. Pret. cueillis. Fut. cueillerai. 

Cond. cueillerais. Imper. cueille. Subj. pres. cueille. 

Imperf. cueillisse. 

Thus, accueillir, to welcome, and recueillir, to col- 
lect. 

Saillir, to project, has only soillant, sailli ; and the 
following forms : il saille, il saillait, il saillera, il sail- 
lerait, qu y il saille, qvMl saillit. But saillir, to gush 
out, is regularly conjugated like Jlnir : saillissant, je 



by his merit great influence over the opinions of his con- 
m. line — f. sing. con- 

temporaries. I have inquired about that man (every where) 
tempormn dc — la par I out 

and have not (been able) (to hear any thing of him). Who 
je pu en avoir de, nouvdles Qui est- 

has requested it of you ? Sesostris, king of Egypt, 
ce qui 3 4 e?i 2 * " 1 

conquered a great part of Asia. The formidable empire 

art. 2 1 

which Alexander conquered did not last longer than 

— dre ind-6* durer plus long-temps 

his life. I have heard that important news. He dressed 

f. ouir-dire 2 sing. I se vilir 

himself in haste and (went out) immediately. I wish 

a art. hate f. soriir sur-le-champ. voudrais 

she would drest the children with more care. If his 

que vilir subj -2 de 

fortune permitted him, be would clothe all the poor of his 

permellait le lui 
parish. Two servants clothed him with his ducal 

paroisse f. donustique revttir de 2 

mantle. He only passed for a traveller; but 

tnanteau m. 1 ne ind-2 que voyageur 

lately he has assumed the character of an envoy. It 

depuis pen revttir nn * envoy 6 

begins to be very warm ; it is time to (throw off 

commencer /aire chaud; de u d6~ 

some clothing.) 
Utir. 



188 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

saillis, &c. Us saillissent, &c. Its principal use is k the 
third persons. 

Assaillir, to assault. 

Part. pres, assaillant. Past, assailli. Ind. pres. assaille-. 

Imperf. assaillais. Prtt. assaillis. Fut. assaillirai. 

Cond. assaillirais. Imper. assaille. Sub. assaille. 

Imperf. assaillisse. 

EXERCISE ON BRANCH III. 

I will gather with pleasure some of these flowers and 

pr-pron. 
fruits, since you wish to have some. Do not gather 

puisque etre bien-aise de en 

these peaches, before they are ripe. That is a 

f. pi. av ant que de subj-1 mur. Ce 

country where they neither reap corn, nor (gather) 

pays oil on ne recueillir ni ble ni 

grapes. We shall collect in ancient history important 

vin recueillir 2 1 de art. — 2 

and valuable facts. He received us in the most polite manner. 

pricieux 3 fait I. accueillir de 2 maniere 

Poverty, misery, sickness. persecution, in a 

f. 1 art f. art. f. art. maladie f. art. f. en 

word, all the misfortunes in the world have (fallen uvori) 

malheur m. pi. de accueiuir 

him. You will give six inches to that cornice ; it will 

voules pouce m. pi. cornicheL f. 

project too much. That balcony projected too much ; it 

balconm. ind-2 
darkened the dining-room. When Moses struck 

obscurcir ind-2 Quand Mo'isefrapper ind-3 

the rock, there gushed out (of it) a spring of (fresh running) 

rocher m. il ind-3 en source f. n/2 

water. The blood gushed from his vein with impetuosity. 
f. 1 ind-2 veine f. = 

We shall assault the enemy to-morrow in their entrenchments, 
pi. demain rttranchemeni. 

Were we not overtaken by a horrible storm ? At every word 
ind-3 assailli lempete f. a chaque 

they said to him concerning his son, the good (old man) 
que on disait • de rieillard 

leaped for joy. Shall you not shudder with fear 1 

tressaillir ind-2 de joie. tressaillir peur f. 

N. B. Tressaillir, to start, conjugated like assaillir, 
makes in the fut. je tressaillirai, or tressaillcrai, &o. 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 189 

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Avoir, to have, is conjugated at length, p. 123. 

Ravoir, to have again, and se ravoir, to recover, are 
only used in the present of the infinitive. 

Choir, to fail, has only the participle past, chu, chue, 
formerly chute, preserved in chape-chute. 

Dechoir, to decay. 

(No Part, pres.) Part. past, dechu. 

Ind. pres. d^chois, dechois, dechoit, dechoyons, d^choyez, d£- 

cboient. 
(No Imp erf.) Pret. dechus. Fid. decherrai. Cond. decherrais. 
Imper. dechois, dechoie, dechoyons, dechoyez, dechoient. 
Sub. pres. dechoie, dechoies, dechoie, dechoyi-ons, ■ — ez, decb •'*. 

ient. Imperf. dechusse. 

Echoir, to fall to, to expire, has only now in use, the 
•L\d. pres. il echoit, sometimes pronounced il echet ; the 
pret. il echut ; fut. il echerra ; cond. il echerrait ; the 
imperf. Subj. que j'echusse, &c. and Inf. echoir, gcheant, 
Schu. 

]JT. B. Choir, dechoir, echoir, take the auxiliary elre. 

Falloir, to be necessary, is an impersonal verb, tho 
conjugation of which has been given, p. 177. 



EXERCISE ON AVOIR, RAVOIR, &c. 

I had apartments that I liked ; I will endeavour to have them 
ind-2 un logement aimer veux essayer de s. 

again. Beware of falling. How has he fallen into 

prenez-garde inf-1 comment en 

poverty 7 Since the publication of his last work, he has 
pauvreti? Depuis dernier 

much, fallen in the esteem of the public, if he do not alter 
dechoir changer 

his conduct, he will decline every day in his reputation 
de * dechoir de jo ur-en-jour de — f. 

and credit. He has put in the lottery, and he hopes 

pr. pron. — m. mis a loterie f. 

that a capital prize \\W\fall ^to his share). That bill 

* art. gros lot m. d. choir lui lettre f 

of exchange has expired. The first term expires at Mid 

change tchoir. ttrme m. a la Saint 



I$0 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Mouvoir, to move. 
Part.pres. mouvant. Part. past. mu. 

Ind. pres. meus, meus, raeut, mouv-ons, — ez, meuvenL 
Jmperf. mouvais. Prtt. mus. Fat. mouvrai. Cond. mouvrais. 
Imper. meus, meuve, mouvons, mouvez, meuvent. 
Subj. pres. meuv-e, — es, — e, mouv-ions, — iez, meuvent. 
Imperf. musse. 

In the same manner are conjugated, emouvoir, to stir 
up, to move ; promouvoir, to promote ; and demouvoir, 
to make one desist. 

The first, whether in an actual or figurative sense, is 
much used. The second, is employed in speaking of a 
dignity. The third, is a law term, and is only used in the 
Inf. pres. 

Pleuvoir, to rain {impersonal). 
Part.pres. pleuvant. Past. plu. Ind. pres. il pleut. 

Imperf. il pleuvait. Pret. il plut. Fut. il pleuvra. 

Cond. ilpleuvrait. Sub. pres. qu'il pleuve. Imperf. qu'il plut. 

summer. You have drawn on me a bill of exchange ; when 

Jean. Urer sur moi 

is it payable ? I did not believe that I must so soon (have taken) 

echoir ind-1 croyais sub-2 fairs 

tJiat journey. He must have sunk under the efforts 

voyage m. ind-4 que succomber sub-2 
of (so many) enemies. 

tant de 

EXERCISE ON MOUVOIR, &c. 

The spring which moves the whole machine is very inge- 

ressort m. 2 tout 1 — f. 

nious, though very simple. It was passion which moved 

= quoique — Ce ind-1 art. f. ind-4 

him to that action. Can you doubt that the soul, though it 

— f. Pouvez f. 

is spiritual, moves the body at pleasure ? That is a man 
* — iuel ne sub-1 a sa volonte f Ce 

whom nothing moves. We had scarcely lost sight of 

emouvoir ind-3 a peine perdu vue f . 3 2 art. 

land when there arose a violent tempest. We 

terre } f. 1 que il s 1 emouvoir ind-3 grande tempite f. 
were moved with fear and pity. When the famous 

ind-2 imus de crainte f. pr. pitti f. Qnand cHebre 

d'Aguesseau was promoted to the dignity of chancellor, all 

= f. ckancelier oft. 



OF IH-: I AR VERBS. 191 

PouvOiR, to bt able. 
Part. pres. pouvanl. Part. past. pu. 

Ind. pres. puis or peux, peux, peut, pouv-ons, — ez, peuvent 
Imperf. pouvais. Fret. pus. Fut. pourrai. Cond. pourrais. 
{No imperative) . Sunj.pres. puisse. Imperf. pusse. 

Remark. Conversation and poetry admit je peux ; 
but in interrogations, puis-je ? and not peux-je ? must be 
used. 

Savoir, io know. 
Part. pres. sachant. Part. past. su. 

Ind. pres. sais, sais, sait, savons, savez, savent. Imperf, savais. 
Pret. sus. Fut. saurai. Cond. saurais. 

Imper. sache, sache, sachons, sachez, sachent. 
SuBj.pres. sache. Imperf susse. 

Seoir, to become, to befit, has only the part, pres 
seyant ; and the third person of the simple tenses, 
il sied, ils siecnt, il seyait, il siera, il sierait, quHl siee. 
But seoir, to sit, is used only in the two participles, seant 
and sis. This verb is also use-d impersonally. 

France shewed the greatest joy. That bishop well 

f. en temoigncr ind -3 f. eveque 

deserv r ed by his talents and by his virtues, that the king 

mtriter ind-2 
should promote him to the dignity of primate. The people 

sub-2 primat sing. 

thirik that it rains frogs and insects 

croit de art. grenouille f. pi. pr-art. insecte m. pi. 

at certain seasons. It will not rain to-day, but I 

en — temps pi. d'aujourd'hui 

(am fearful) of its raining to-morrow. 
craindre que * ne sub-1 

EXERCISE ON POUVOIR, SAVOIR, &c. 

When he arrived at home, he (was quite ex 

ind-5 with tire chez-lui rten pouvoir 

hausted). The minister had (so many) people art his 

ind-2 plus ministre ind-2 tant de monde a. 

levee, that I could not speak to him. Are you afraid 

audience, ind-2 * 2 craignez 1 

that he will not accomplish that affair? I know 

pouvoir sub-1 venir a bout de 

that he is not your friend, but I know likewise that he is a 
de pi. aussi * 



192 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS* 

Asseoir, to set. 
Part. pres. asseyant. Pari. past, assis. 

Ind. pres. assieds, assieds, assied, assey-ons, — ez, — ent. 
Imperf. asseyais. Prtl. assis. Fut. assierai, or asseyerai. 
Cond. assiirais, or asseyerais. Imper. assieds, asseyc, asseyons> 
— ez, — ent. Subj. pres. asseye. Imperf. assisse. 

N. B. This verb is more frequently reflected, as 
s'asseoir, to set down. Its compound rasscoir, to set 
again, to calm, or to sit down again, is conjugated in the 
same manner. 

Voir, to see. 
Pari. pres. voyarit. Part. past. vu. 

Ind. pres. vois, vois, voit, voyons, voyez, voient. 
Imperf. voyais. Pret. vis. Fut. verrai. Cond. verrais. 
Tmper. vois, voie, voyons, voyez, voient. 
Subj. pres. voie, voies, voie, voyions, voyiez, voient. Imp. visse. 

man of probity. Let them know that their pardon depends on 

bien grace dependre de 

their submission. \ could wish that he knew his lessons 

soumission. dtsirer con 1-1 sub-2 

a little better. Let us see if this new-fashioned 

voyons d'un nouveau gout 2 

gown become* you, or not. Be assured that too gaudy 

robe f. 1 71071 art. toy ant 

colours will not become you. The head-dress which that 

f. coiffure f. que 

lady wore became her very ill. These colours become 

porter ind-2 ind-2 lui inf-3 

you so well, you (would do wrong) to wear any others. 

avoir tort cond-1 de en porter de 
Set that child in this arm-chair, and take care lest he 

asseoir m. fauttuil m. prenez-garde que 

fall. I will sit down on the top of that hill, 

ne subj-1 s'asseoir sommet m. coteau m. 

whence I shall discover a prospect (no less) magnificent 

decouvrir scene f. aussi — que 

than diversified. We (were seated) on the banks of the 

varie s'asseoir ind-6 bord m. pi. 

Thames, whence we (were contemplating) myriads of 

Tamise f. ind-2 de art. millitr 

vessels, which bring every year, the riches of the two 
vaixeau apporter art. pi. 

hemispheres. 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS, 193 

Revoir, to see again, and entrevoir, to have a glimpse 
of, are conjugated in the same manner ; but prevoir, to 
foresee, makes in the future and the conditional, je pr€- 
voirai, &c. je prtvoirais, &c. 

Pourveir, to provide, differs in the pret. je pourvus, 
tu pourvus, &c. fut. je pourvoirai, &c. cond. je pour- 
voiraisy &c. and imperf. subj. que je pourvusse, &c. 

Surseoir, to supersede, though a compound of seoir, 
is conjugated like voir, except that it makes fut. je sur~ 
seoirai, &c. gond. je surseoirais, &c. and part, past, 
sursis. 

Valoir, lo be worth. 
Pari. pres. valant. Part, past. vain. 

Ind. pres. vaux, vaux, vaut, valons, valez, valent. 
Imperf. valais. Pret. valus. Fut. vaudrai. Covd. vaudrais. 
Lmper. vaux, vaille, valons, valez, vaiilent. 
Subj. prts. vaille, vailles, vaille, valions, valiez, vaiilent. 
Imperf. valusse. 

Revaloir, to return like for like, and equivaloir, to be 
equivalent to, follow valoir; but privaloir, to prevail, 
makes in the sub J. pres. que je private, que tu privates, 
qu'il prevale, que nous privations , &c. 
Vobtloir, to be willing. 
Part. pres. voulant. Part. past, voulu. 
lxD.pres. veux, veux, veut, voulons, voulez, veulent. 
Imperf. voulais. Pret. voulus. Fut. voudrai. Cond. voudrais. 
Subj. pres. veuill-e, — es, — e, voulions, vouliez, veuillent. 
Imperf. voulusse. 

N, B. The imperative veuille,- veuillons, veuillez, is 
also used, particularly veuillez, with the sense of, be so 

good as y so kind as to, &a. 



EXERCISE ON VOIR, &c. 
See the admirable order of the universe : does it not announce 
2 m. 1 

a supreme architect ? Has he again seen with pleasure his 

— 2 artisan m. 1. 

country and his friends ? (Had he hid a glimpse of) the dawn 

pays aurort 

of this fine day? To finish their affairs, it would be neces- 

Four falloir 

18 



194 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

branch i. on Rendre. 

Soudre, to solve, now obsolete, and replaced by 
Resoudre, to resolve. 
Part. pres. resolvant. Part. past. r£solu, or r6sous. 
Ind. pres. resous, resous, resout, resolv-ons, — ez, — ent. 
Imperf. r^solvais. Pret. resolus. Fut. resoudrai. 
Cond. resoudrais. Imper. resous, resolve, resolv-ons, -ez, -ent. 
Subj. pres. resolve. Imperf. resolusse. 

This verb has two participles past, resolu, when it 
means determined ; and resous^ when it means resolved 
into ; in this last sense it has no feminine. 

Absoudre, to absolve, is conjugated like resoudre ; 
but has neither pret. ind. nor imperf. subj. ; its parti- 
ciple past is absous, m. absoute, f. 



sary for thern to (see one another). I clearly foresaw t (from 
que * Us * s'entrevoir subj-2 bien des- 

thattime), all the obstacles he would have to surmount. Would 
lors — m. surmonter. ind-2 

you have the judge (put off) the execution of the 

* que surseoir subj-2 

sentence that he had pronouneed ? I shall not put off the pur- 
arret rendu pour- 

suit of that affair. If men do not provide (for it), God 

suite T. pi. art. y 

will provide for it. Would this book be good for nothing ? You 

valoir * 
have not paid for this ground more than it is worth ; (are you 
* terre f. f. ne cretin- 

afraid) that it is not worth six hundred pounds ? Let ui 

dre que subj-1 livre f. pi. sterling ? 

take arbitrators. One ounce of gold is equivalent to 

prenons de art. arbitre once f. 

fifteen ounces of silver. Doubt not that reason and 

art. art. 

truth will prevail at last. I can and will tell the truth 

* ne subj-1 a la longue pron. dire 

If you are willing, he will be willing too. Let us resolve to 
le le aussi vouloir * 

resist our passions, and we shall be sure to conquer them. 

combattre de vmncrt 

{Be so good as) to lend me your grammar. 
vouloir * preler 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 195 

Dissoudre, to dissolve, has the same irregularities, and 
wants the same tenses, as absoudre. 
Coudre, to sew. 
Part. pre*, cousant. Part. past, cousu. 

I»d. pres. couds, couds, coud, cousons, cousez, cousent. 
Imperf. cousais. Prtt. cousis. Fut. coudrai. Cond. coudrais. 
Imper. couds. Subj. pres. couse. Imperf. cousisse. 

Decoudre, to unsew, and recoudre, to sew again, are 
conjugated in the same manner, so likewise sourdre y to 
issue from a fountain, which is only used in the infini- 
tive sourdre and present of the indicative il sourd. 
Mettre, to put. 

Part. pres. mettant. Part. past. mis. 

Ind. pres. mets, mets, met, mettons, mettez, mettent. 
Imperf. mettais. Pret. mis. Fut. mettrai. Cond. mettrais. 
Imper. mels. SuBj.p'es. mette. Imperf misse. 

In the same manner are conjugated the derivatives, 

admettre to admit permettre to permit 

commettre to commit promettre to promise 

compromettre to compromise remettre to replace 

se ddrnettre \ t0 P^ out of joint soumettre to subject 

\ to resign transmettre to transmit 

omettre to omit s'entremettre to intermeddle 



EXERCISE UPON RESOUDRE, kc 

Wood which is burned resolves itself into ashes 

art. bois m. on brultr ind-2 se resoudre * en cendre f. 

and smoke. Have they resolved on peace or war ? 

pr. fumit i. on * art. f. art. f. 

The fog has resolved itself into rain. Could that 

brouillard m. se risoudre ind-4 * pluie f. 

judge thus lightly absolve the guilty 1 Strong 

si ligerement cond-1 coupable m. pi. art. fort 2 
waters dissolve metals. Those drugs (were dissolved) 

f. pi. 1 art. on 1 drogue 3 ind-4 2 

before they were put into that medicine. My sister 

avant que de Its * mettre remede m. 

was serving all day yesterday. That piece is not w T ell sewed, it 
ind -3 * hier m. 

must (bt sewed over again.) Unpick that lace, and sew it 

la inf-1 Dicoudre dentelle f. 2 1 

again very carefully. Does he set a great value 

avec beaucoup de sain mettre prix m. 



196 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Moudre, to grind (corn, &c.) 

Part. pres. moulant. Part. past, moulu. 

Ind. pres. mouds, mouds, moud, moul-ons, — ez, — cnt. 

Imperf. moulais. Pret. moulus. Fut. moudraL 

Cond. moudrais. 

Imper. mouds, moule, moulons, moulez, moulent. 

Sdbj. pres. moule. Imperf. moulusse. 

In the same manner are conjugated the derivatives : 

, , J '° g™' 1 ^ remoudre to grind again (corn, &c.) 

I (knives, Sic.) remoudre to grind again (knives, &c.) 

Prendre, to take. 

Part. pres. prenant. Part. past. pris. 

Ind. pres. prends, prends, prend, pren-ons, — ez, prennent. 

Imperf. prenais. Pret. pris. Fut. prendrai. Cond. prendrais. 

Imper. prends, prenne, prenons, prenez, prennent. 

Subj. pres. prenn-e, — es, — e, pren-ions, — iez, prennent. 

Imperf. prisse. 



upon richest I never a dmitted those principles. Has 

a art. 
he committed that fault ? If he (would take my 

^aute f. me 

advice,) he would resign his charge in favour of his 

croyoit se dimettre cond-1. de f. en = 

son. He put his arm (out of joint) yester- 

se demeltre ind-3 * art. bras m. 
day. I will omit nothing that depends on me to 

de ce dependre ind-7 de pour 
serye you. God frequently permits the wicked to 

souvent que mechant m. pi. * 

prosper. Put this book in its place again. Under 

prospirer sub-1 remettre a — f. * 

whatever form of government you (may live), remem- 

quelque gouvernemenl m. que viviez sesou- 

berthat your first duty is to be obedient to the laws. It 

venir devoir m. de soumis 

frequently happens that fathers traiismit to their children 

arriver art. 

both their vices and their virtues. He has loHg meddled 

long-temps s'entre- 
with public affairs ; but his endeavours have Dot been 
mettre de art. 2 1 effort 

crowned with success. 
touronner de art. m. 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 197 

v In the same manner are conjugated, 

appre-ndre to learn entreprendre to undertake 

desapprendre to unlearn se m^prendre to mistake 

comprendre to understand reprendre to retake, to reply 

deprendre to separate surprendre to surprise 

Rompre, to break. 
Part. pres. rompant. Part. past, rompu. 
Ind. pres. romps, romps, rompt, romp-ons, — ez, — ent. 
Imperf. rompais. Pret. rompis. Put. romprai. Cond. romprais. 
Imper. romps, rompe, rompons, rompez, rompent. 
Subj. pres. 1 ompe. Imperf. rompisse. 

In the same manner are conjugated corrompre, to cor- 
rupt, and interrompre, to interrupt. 



EXERCISE ON MOUDRE, PRENDRE, &c. 

I took great pains : but, at last, I ground all the 

ind-3 beaucoup de sing. enfin 

coffee. Grind those razors with care. Those knive3 

cafe m. rasoir m. couteaum. 

(are just) ground. This grain is not sufficiently ground, it 

venir Metre asses 

should be ground again. I wish that you wonld take 

falloir ind- We inf-1 vouloir 

courage. What news have you learnt ? Philosophy com- 

f. pi. art. 
prehends logic, ethics, physics, and 

logique f. art. morale f. art. physique f. art. 

metaphysics. It is (with difficulty) that he divests himself of 
metaphysique f. Ce difficilement que se deprendre 

his opinions. He has forgotten all that he knew. I fear 
desapprendre ce que ind-2 que 

you will undertake a task above your strength. Could 

ne subj-1 tdche f. au-dessus de f. pi. * 

he have been mistaken so grossly ? I reproved 

cond-2 grossierement reprendre ind-2 

him continually for his faults, but (to no purpose). We 

sanscesse de defaut inutilement 

surprised the enemy, and cut them to pieces. In the middle 

ind-3 pi. tailler en a 

of the road the axletree of our carriage broke. Bad 

chemin essieu m. carosse se rompre art. 

company corrupts the minds of young people. Why do 

f. pi. sing. gens pourquoi 

you interrupt your brother, when you see him busy ? 
quand occupi 

18* 



198 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Sl/JVRE, to follow. 

Part. pres. suivant. Part. past, suivi. 

Ixv.pres. suis, suis, suit, suivons, suivez, suivent. 

Imperf. suivats. Pret. suivis. Fut. suivrai. Cond. suivrais. 

Imper suis, suive, suivons, suivez, suivent. 

Subj. pres. suive. Imperf. suivisse. 

N. B. S'ensuivre, to ensue, only used in the third 
person singular and plural of every tense , and poursui- 
vre, to pursue, are conjugated in the same manner. 

Vaincre, to conquer, to vanquish. 

Part. pres. vainquant. Part. past, vaincu. 

Ind. pres. vaincs,* vainc,* vainc,* vainqu-ons,* — ez, — ent. 

Imperf. vainquais. Pret. vainquis. Fut. vaincrai. Con. vaincrais. 

Imper. vaincs,* vainque, vainquons,* vainqu-ez, — ent. 

Subj. pres. vainque. Imperf. vainquisse. 

All the persons of this verb, marked with an asterisk, 
are very little used. But its derivative, convaincre, to 
convince, is used in all its tenses and persons. 



EXERCISE ON SUIVRE, &c. 

(For a long while) we followed that method, which was 
long-temps 2 ind-3 1 f. ind-2 

only calculated to mislead us. What (is the consequence .?) 
ne " que propre egarer que s^ensuivre 

See the errors that have sprung from this propo- 

s'ensuivre ind-4 f. pi. — f. 

sition, which appeared so true. We pursued our course 

ind-2 suivre ind-2 chemin 

when some cries, which came from the midst of the 
lorsque de art. cri, m. pi. * sortis fond m. 

forest, excited terror in our souls. The Greeks 

for It f. porter ind-3 art. «= f. Grec 

vanquished the Persians at Marathon, Sal am is, Platea, 

Perse a pr. Salamine pr. Platte 

and Mycale. I have, at last, convinced him, by such 
pr. de art. si 2 

powerful reasons, of the greatness of his fault, that [ (have 

fort 3 f. pi. 1 enormite faute f. ne 

no doubt) but he will repair it. It is during 

douttt nullement que ne reparer subj-1 Ce pendant 

winter that they thrash the corn in cold countries, 

art. o?i battre froid 2 art. pays m. pi. 1 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 199 

Battre, to beat. 

Part. pres. battant. Part. past, battu. 

Ind. pres. bats, bats, bat, battons, battez, battent. 

Imperf. battais. Pret. battis. Fut. battrai. Cond. battrais. 

Imper. bats. Subj. pres. batte. Imperf. battisse. 

Conjugate in the same manner, 

abattre to pull down combattre to fight 

rabattre to abate debattre to debate 

rebattre to beat again s'ebattre to be merry 

&tre, to be, is conjugated at full length, p. 134. 

Vivre, to live. 

Part. pres. vivant. Part. past. vecu. 

Ind. pres. vis, vis, vit, vivons, vivez, vivent. Imperf. vivais. 
Pret. v£cus. Fut. vivrai. Co>*d. vivrris. Imp. vis. 
Subj. pres. vive. Imperf. vecusse. 

In the same manner are conjugated, revivre, to re* 
vive ; and survivre, to survive. 



The enemy was so completely beaten in that engagement, that 

pi. — ment rencontre f. 

he was forced to abandon thirty leagues of the country. The 

pi. de lieue f. * pays 

cannon (beat doiori) the tower. They were fighting with 
canon abattre ind-3 tour f. * ind-2 un 

unexampled fury, when a panic terror made 

sans exemple 2 acharnemtnt m. 1 panique 2 = i\ 1 ind-3 

them take flight, and dispersed them in an instant. Beat 
leur art. fuite f. m. rtbattre 

these mattrasses again. Happy are those who live in soli- 
matelas m. pi. * * art. re- 

tude ! Long live that good king ! He 

traite f. que 1 long-temps 4 subj-1 3 2 

did not long survive a person who was so dear to him 

ind-3 a f. art. 

Fathers hve again in their children. He was in a strange de- 

ac- 
jection of mind ; but the news which he has received has 
cablement f. pi. f. pi. ontfail 

revived him. 
inf-1 



200 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

branch 11. Piaire. 

Braire, to bray, and il broit, ils braient, il braird*, 
ils brairont, il brairait, ils brairaient, are only used 
when speaking of asses ; though it may be used with 
propriety in the other persons by comparison. 
Faire, to do. 

Part. pres. faisant. Fart. past. fait. 

Ind. pres. fais, fais, fait, faisons, faites, font. 

Imp erf. faisais. Pret. fis. Fut. ferai. Cond. ferais. 

Imper. fais, fasse, faisons, faites, fassent. Subj. pres. fasse. 

Itnperf. fisse. 

In the same manner are conjugated, 



contrefaire 
defaire 
re defaire 
forfaire* 
rnalfaire* 


to counterfeit refaire 
to undo satisfaire 
to undo again surfaire 
tc trespass inefaire* 
to do ill parfaire* 


to do again 
to satisfy 
to exact 
to misdo 
to perfect 


EXERCISE ON BRANCH If. 

What will you have him do ? 


FAIRE, he. 

Do not make (so 



Que vouloir * que it subj-1 

much) noise. Do they never exact ? That woman mimicked 
tant de bruit ind-2 

all the persons whom she had seen ; this levity rendered 

f. pi. que f. pi. legerete f. ind-3 

her odious. It was with difficulty he (divested himself) of the 

f. ind-3 peine que se defaire 

false opinions which had been given him in bis infancy. 

— f. on * f. pi. lui f. 

Could it be possible that w T e should not again make a jcur- 

subj-2 art. * voy- 

ney to Paris, Rome, and Naples ? He says that you 

age de pr. pr. dit 

have offended him, and that, if you do not satisfy him quickly, 

offense" prompte- 

he will find means to satisfy himself. Every 

ment art. moyen sing, de se lui-mtme 

night, she milked her sheep, which gave her a (great 
art. joirra.pl. ind-3 brebis pi. ind-2 lui ubon- 

quantity) of wholesome milk. Have you milked your 

dant2 * etsain3 lait in. 1. 

* These four verbs are only used in this form, and the partic^ 
' past, forfait, malfait, nufait, and parfait. 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 201 

Traire, to milk (defective). 

Part. prts. trayant Part. past, trait. 

Ind. pres. trais, trais, trait, trayons, trayez, traient. 

Imperf. trayais. (No prci.) Fut. trairai. Cond. trairais. 

Imper. trais, traye, trayons, trayez, traient. 

Subj. pres. traye. (No imperf.) 

Conjugate in the same manner 



attraire 


to allure 


rentraire 


tofinedraw 


abstraire 


to abstract 


retraire 


to redeem 


distraire 


to dicert 


soustraire 


to subtract 


extraire 


to extract 







All these verbs are principally used in the compound 
tenses. 



branch in. Parcttre. 

NaItre, to be born. 

Part. pres. naissant. Part. past. ne\ 

Ind. pres. nais, nais, nait, naissions, naissez, nais3ent 

Imperf. naissais. Pret. naquis. Fut. naitrai. Cond. naftraia. 

Imper. nais. Svbj. pres. naisse. Imperf. naquisse. 

This verb takes the auxiliary lire ; but its derivative, 
renaitre, to be born again, has no participle past, and, 
consequently, no compound tenses. 



goats? Are the cowi milked? Salt is good to 

mtcre f. pi. vache f. pi. art. Sel m. pour 

entice pigeons. You will never know the nature ot 

attraire art. m. pi. connaitre 

bodies, if you do not abstract their necessary qualities from 
art. * ■.■»■;— 1.1 

those which are inherent (in them). The least thing (diverts 

— leur moindre le 

his attention.) Will you not extract that charming parage ? 
distraire — m , 

Have you darned your gown ? Should he not redeem that 

rtntraire 
land ? What ! would you have me screen those 

Quot / ind-1 * queje soustraire sub- 1 

guilty persons from the rigour of the laws ? 

coupable m. pi. * a rigueur f. 



202 OP THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Pa!tre, to graze (defective). 

Part. pres. paissant. Part. pest. pu. 
Ind. pres. pais, pais, pait, paissons, paissez, paissent. 
Imperf paissais. (No pre!.) Fnt. paitrai. Cond. paltrals. 
IairER. pais. Subj. pres. paisse. (No imperf.') 

Repaitre, to feed, to bait, is, like paraitre, regular in 
all its tenses, making in the pret. ind. je repus, &c. and 
in the imperf. subj. je repusse, &c. 



branch iv. Redtiire. 

Bruire, to roar, which is defective, has, besides this 
form, the part. pres. bruyant, oftener used as an adjec- 
tive, as, desjlots bruyans ; and the two third persons of 
the imperf. ind. il bruyait, ils bruyaient. 

Luire, to shine, and reluire, to glitter, make the part, 
past, lui, relui, neither the preu ind. nor imperf subj. 
are in use. 

Nuire, to hurt, making part, pres, nuisant, past, nui, 
has ail its tenses. 

EXERCISE ON BRANCH III. NAITRE, &c. 

Was not Virgil born at Mantua ? It is from that poisoned 

ind-3 Manloue ? Ce empoisonni 2 

source that have arisen all the cruel wars that have 

f. 1 que nailre f. pi. 2 f. pi. 1 

desolated the universe. The fable says that, as soon as 

dholer i. dit aussifdt que 

Hercules had (cut off) one of the heads of the hyd^ 
Herculehm. couper tele f. pi. hydre f. 

others sprang up. While their united 

d'autres 2 il en renaiire ind-2 1 Tandis que riuni 2 

flocks fed on the tender and flowery 

troupeau m. pi. 1 paitre ind-2 * 2 fleuri 3 

grass, they sung under the shade of a tree the 

herbei.l chanter ind-2 a ombre 

sweets of rural life. Your horses have not 

douceur f. pi. art. champelre 2. f. 1 

fed to-day ; you must have them fed. 

repailre d'aujourd'hui * • fairt 2 1 inf-1. 

He is a man who thirsts after nothing but blood 

Ce ne se repaltre dc2 * que 1 

and slaughter, 
pr. carnage m. 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. £Q3 

Confjre, to pickle. 
Part. pres. confisant. Part. past, confit. 
IsD.pres. conf-is, — is, — it, — isons, — isez, — isent. 
Imp erf. confisais. Pret. conns. Fut. confirai. 

Cond. confirai?. Imp. confis. Subj. pres. confise. 

Imperf confisse. 

Its derivative deconfire, to discomfit, is rather obsolete. 

Circoncire, to circumcise, and suffre to suffice, make 
in the part. past, circoricis and siiffi, the rest is as confire. 

Dire, to say. 
Part. pres. disant. Part. past. dit. 

IifD. pres. dis, dis, dit, disons, dites,* disent. 
Imperf. disais. Pret. dis. Fut. dirai. Cond. dirais. 

Imper. dis, dise, disons, dites,* disent. 
Subj. pres. dise. Imperf. disse. 

EXERCISE ON BRANCH IV. BRUIRE, &c. 
The thunder which roared from afar an- 

tonnerre ra. bruire ind-2 dans art. lointain m. 

nounced a dreadful storm. They heard roar the waves 

ind-2 terrible 2 orage ra. 1 On ind-2 inf-1 fid m. pi. 

of an agitated sea. That street is too noisy for those who 

agile 2 mer f. 1 rue f. bruyant 

love retirement and study- (I have a glimpse of) gome- 
art, relraile f. art. enfrevoir quelque 
thing that shines through those trees. A ray of hope 
chose au-travtrs dt ray an m. 
shone upon us in the midst of the misfortunes which over- 
ind-4 * a milieu malheur m. pi. ac- 
whelmed us. Every thing is well rubbed in that bouse; every 
caller ind-2 frotte 
thing shines, even the floor. Would he not have 

y reluire jusquea planch er m. * 

injured you in that affair ? Jesus Christ was circumcised eight 

cond-2 

* Redire, to say again, conformably to its primitive, makes re- 
dites, but 



contredire 


to contradict 


de*dire 


to unsay 


interdire 


to forbid 


m£dire 


to slander 


p rid ire 


to foretell 


maudire 


to curse 



"J f vous contredije* 

vous d6d\sez 
i vous interdises 
| vous m6(\\sez 
vous pr6d\sez 
^vohs matidis*eg 



I 

i 



make 



j 

This last makes part. pres. maudtoffnl, with two ss, and 1 conw 
quently oous maudi-Mons, &z,c. je rnaudiwais, Sic. 



204 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Ecrire, to write. 
Part. pres. ^crivant. Part, past, £crit. 

Ind. pres. £cris, ecris, ecrit, ecriv-ons, — ez, — ent. 
Imperf. ^crivais. Pret. ecrivis. Ful. ecrirai. Cond. £crirals. 
Imp. £cris. Subj. pres. icrive. Imperf. £crivisse. 

Conjugate in the same manner, 

circonscrire to circumscribe proscrire to proscribe 

d£crire to describe recrire to write again 

inscrire to inscribe souscrire to sub scribe 

prescrire to prescribe transcrire to transcribe 

Lire, to read. 
Part. pres. lisant. Part. past. lu. 

Ind. pres. lis, lis, lit, lisons, lisez, lisent. Imperf. lisais. 
Pres. lus. Fut. lirai. Cond. lirais. Imper. lis. 
Subj. pres. lise. Imperf. lusse. 

In the same manner are conjugated, 
elire to elect relire to read over again 

days after his birth. Will you preserve these peaches 

naissance f. confire 

with sugar, with honey, or with brandy? 

a art. sucre m. art.mielm. art. eau-de-vie f. 

Did you pickle cucumbers, purslane, 

de art- concombre m. pi. pr-art. pourpitr m 
and sea-fennel ? If he loses his lawsuit, all his 

pr. art. perce-pierre f. proces m. 

properly will not suffice, 
bien 

EXERCISE ON DIRE, &c. 
Always speak truth, but with discretion. Never eontra- 
dire art. f. 
diet (any one) in public. You thought you were serving 

psrsonne en penser ind-4 * * inf-1 

m-e in speaking thus: well, (let r be 50) ; you shall not 

en parler ainsi eh ! Men, soit en 

be contradicted. What ! would you forbid him all commu- 

dedire. Quoi ! * interdire 

nication with his friends ? That woman who slandered 

f. ind 2 de 

every one, soon lost all kind of respect. You had 

ind-3 espece F. consideration 

foretold that event. Let us curse no one ; let us remember 

ne ptrsonne se rappeler 

that our law forbids us to curse even those who persecute us. 
difendre * de persicuter 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 205 

Rire, to laugh. 

Part. pres. riant. Past. ri. Ind. pres. ris, ris, rit, rions, riez, nent. 
Imperf riais. Pret. rK Fut. rirai Cohd. rirais 

Imper. ris. Sub j. pres. rie- Imperf. risse. 

Sourire, to smile, is conjugated as rire. 

FWre, to fry, besides the present of the infinitive, has 
only the part. past, frit ; indic. pres. je fris, tu fris, fl 
frit ; fut. je fnrai, tu, &c. ; cond, je frirais, tu, &c. ; 
imper. sing. fris. But it has all the compound tenses. 
The forms that are deficient are fully supplied by fair e, 
prefixed tofrire, as faisant frire, je faisais frire, &c 



Boire, (o drink. 



Part. pres. buvant. Past. bu. 

Ind. pres. bois, bois, boit. buvons, buvez, boivent. 

Imperf. buvais. Pret. bus. Fut . boirai. Cond. boirais 

InrER. bois, boive, buvons, buvez. boivent. 

Sunj./?re5. boiv-e, — es, — e, buvious, buviez, boivent. 

Imperf busse. 

Write every day the reflections which you make on tbe 

arLpl. 
books you read. Did he not read that interesting his- 

ind-2 2 I 

tory with (a great deal) of pleasure ? God is an infinite being 

2 Itrt m. 
who is circumscribed neither by time nor place. 

1 ne ni art. ni pr. art. iieiiia.pL 

Will you not describe in that episode the dreadful tempest 

— m. horrible 2 f. 1 

which assailed your hero ? Get those soles and whitings 

ind-3 Jaire 1 — pron. merlan 3 

fried. If you wish to form your taste, read over and over, un- 
lnf-1 2 vouloir * * re lire 

ceasingly, the ancients. He was elected by a great majority of 
sans-cesse ind-4 a »— r 

voices. We have laughed heartily, and have rcsslveu 

de bon cceur nous rholu 

to (go on). He did not answer him (any thing ) : but 

de continuer repondre ind-3 lui rxtn 

he smiled at him, as a sign of approbation, in the kindest 

ind-3 # lui en * — de graticuxZ 

manner. 
air ra. 1 

19 



206 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

In the same manner are conjugated, 

reboire to drink again s'emboire to inbibe, a technical t&m 

used in painting. 

Clore, to close, ha? only the part, pasty clos ; ind. 
pres. je clos, tu clos, il clot ; fut. je clorai, tu cloras, &c; 
cond. je clorais, tu clorais, &c. ; and the imp. sing. clos. 

Declore, to unclose, enclore, to enclose, are defective 
in the same tenses as clore ; but forclere, to debar, a law 
term, is only used in the inf. and part, past, forclos. 

Eclore, to be hatched, as birds, or to blow like a flow- 
er, has only these forms ; inf. eclore ; part, past, eclos ; 
ind. pres. il eclot, ils tclosent ; fut. il £clora, ils eclo- 
ront ; cond. il eclorait, ils ecloraient ; and the subj. pres. 
qu'il eclose, qu'ils eclosent. But its compound tenses, 
which are formed with tire, are much used. 

Conclure, to conclude. 

Part. pres. con cluant. Past, conclu. 

Ind. pres. conclus, conclus, conclut, conclu-ons, — ez, — ent. 
Imperf. concluais. Pret. conclus. Fut. conclurai. 
Cond. conclurais. Imper. conclus. Subj. pres. conclue. 

Imperf. eonclusse. 

N. B. Ex dure, to exclude, is conjugated like con- 
dure, except that its participle past is either exclu, or ex~ 
clus. 



EXERCISE ON BOIRE, CLORE, &,e. 

Seated under the shade of palm-trees, they were milkwig 

Assis a art. palmier pi. * ind-2 

their goats and ewes, and merrily drinking 

chevre f. pi. pron. brebis f. pi. avecjoie2 ind-2 1 

that nectar, which (was renewed) every day. Should 

m. . se renouveler ind-2 art. pi. * 

they not have drunk with ice ? This window does not 

"-nd-2 a art. f. f. 

shut well ; when you have made some alterations (in it), 

ind-8 reparation f. pi. y 

it will shut better. He had scarcely closed his eyes, when 

f. tnieux. a peine ind-6 * art. que 

the noise which they made at his door, awoke him. 

que on ind-3 a rtvtillir ind-3 

Have they not enclosed the suburbs within the city ? 

on fa u b o u rg in . pi . villc f . 



OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 207 

Croire, to believe. 

Part. pre*, croyant. Past, cru. 

Ind. pres. crota, crois, croit, croyons, croyez, croient. 

Imperf. croyais. Fret. crus. Fut. croirai. Cond. croirais. 

Imper. crois, croie, croyons, croyez, croient. 

Sobj. pres. croie, croies, croie, croyions, croyiez, croient. 

Imperf. crusse. 

It has no derivative but accroire, which is only used 
with j aire, as, faire accroire, or en f aire accroire, to im- 
pose upon credulity ; and s 1 en faire accroire, to be setf- 
conceited. 

Poindre (upon joindre), v. a. to sting, and v. n. to 
shoot forth, to dawn, has, besides the inf. poindre, the 
ind. pres. il point, and theyW. il poindra. 

Will you enclose your park with a wall, or a hedge? 

pare de mur m. pr. haie f. 

Put the eggs of those silk-worms in the sun, 

mettes ozuf m. pi. rer-a-5oiem.pl. a soleil m. 

that they may hatch. Those flowers just blown, 

sub-1 nouvellement 

spread the sweetest fragrance. When did they conclude this 
reprandre doux parfum m. ind-4 

treaty ? His enemies managed so well, that he was unani- 
traite m. faire ind-3 ind-3 unani- 

mously excluded from the company. Did you think me 

mement compagnie f. croire ind-1 

capable of so black an act ? He possesses some kind of 

noir 2 trait m. 1. avoir espict 

knowledge ; but (not so much as he thinks.) 
savoir il Jen faire trop accroire. 



OBSERVATIONS 

UPON THE TWO FOLLOWING TABLES* 

The following Tables, which exhibit at one view all 
the primitive tenses, both of the regular and irregular 
verbs, and most of the defective, with reference to the 
pages, where the other tenses are to be found, will, it is 
presumed, prove useful to those who will consult them. 



208 



TABLE 


OF THE PRIMITIVE TENSES 


OF THE FOUR 




REGULAR CONJUGATIONS. 




INFIN. 


PARTICIPLES. f INDICATIVE. 


1 

Page 

| 141 


Present. j 


Present. Past. \ Present. 


Prtter. 1\ 


Parler. j 


Flf 

Variant. 


1ST CONJUGATION. 


Je parlai. 


Parle. | Je parle. 


PumY. 


SECOND CONJUGATION. 


Je punis. 


151 


Punissant. 


Puni. 


Je punis. 


Sentir. 


Sentant. 


Sent?'. 


Je sens. 


Je sentw. 


151 


Mentir. 


Mentant. 


Mentt. 


Je mem. 


Je mentis. 




Se repent ir. 


Se repentant. 


Repen ti. 


Je me repens. 


Je me repentis. 


167 


Par* ir. 


Part ant. 


Parti. 


Je pan. 


Je partis. 




SortzY. 


Sortant. 


Sorti." 


Je sor s. 


Je sort is. 




Dormir. 


Dormant. 


Dormi. 


Je dors. 


Je dormis. 




Sertur. 


Servant. 


Serri. 


Je sers. 


Je serris. 




Ouvrir. 


Ouvrant. 


Ouvert. 


J' ou\re. 


J* ouvrts. 


15: 


C ou vrir. 


Couvrant. 


Couvert. 


Je couvre. 


Je couvris. 




OfiWr. 


OfiVauf. 


Offert. 


J' offre. 


J* offris. 




SouflWr. 


Souffranr. 


Souffert. 


Je souffre. 


Je souffrir. 




Tenir. 


Tenant. 


T«mu. 


Je tiens. 


Je tins. 


151 


Venir 


Vennnt. 


Venn. 


Je \iene. 


Je vins. 




Recevoir. I 


TH] 
Recevant. 


RD CONJUGATION. 


Je reqtu. 


158 


Recit. j Je recois. 1 


De-eotY. 


Devant. \ Du. | Je doi's. 


Je dus. 




Repandre 


FOU 


RTH CONJUGATION 


Je repand is. 




Repandant. 


Repandu. 


Je repands. 


Rendr->- 


Rendant. 


Rendu. 


Je rends. 


Je rend is. 


160 


Fondr«. 


Fondant. 


Fondu. 


Je fonds. 


Je fondis. 




Repondre. 


Repondant. 


Repondu. 


Je reponds. 


Je r^pondis. 




Tondre. 


Tond«nt. 


Tondu. 


Je tonds. 


Je tondt's. 




Perdre. 


Perdant. 


Perdu. 


Je peril 5. 


Je perdis. 




Mordre. 


Mordant. 


Mordu. 


Je mords. 


Je moid is. 




Tordre. 


Tordanf. 


Tordu. 


Je to id s. 


Je to rd is. 




Plaire. 


Vlaisant. 


Plu. 


Je pi a is. 


Je plus. 


J 60 


Taire. 


Taisant. 


Tu. 


Je tais. 


Je tus. 




Paratfre. 


Paraissant. 


Pant. 


Je parai's. 


Je parus. 


160 


Croftre. 


Croissant. 


Cru. 


Je crois. 


Je crus. 




Connaitre. 


Conna issanf. 


Connu. 


Je connai's. 


Je connus. 




Repaitre. 


Repatssant. 


Repu. 


Je repau. 


Je repw.\ 




Require. 


R&luisant. 


Reduit. 


Je reduis. 


Je leduisis 


160 


Instruir*. 


Instruisant. 


Instruit. 


J' instruit. 


J' instruis/s. 




Craindre. 


Craig-uant. 


Craint. 


Je crains. 


Jc eraig-nis. 




Peindre. 


Peig-nant. 


Peinf. 


Je peins. 


Je peig-nts. 




Jolndre. 


Joig-nant. 


Joint. 


Je joins. 


Je joig-nis. 


160 



209 



PRIMITIVE TENSES OF THE IRREGULAR WITH 




SOME DEFECTIVE VERBS. 




INFIN. 


PARTICIPLES. 


! INDICATIVE. 




Present. 


Present. \ Past. 


Present. J Preter. Def. 


Alter. 


F 
| AUant. 


RST CONJUGATION. 


J' allai. 


Page 
|180 


Alie. | Je vais. 


Fleurir. j 
Hair. 


SECOND CONJUGATION. 




132 


Fleurissant. 
Florissant. 


> Fleuri. 


\ Je fleuris. 


Je fleuris. 


HaJssant. 


Hal. 


Je hals. 


Je hals. 


133 


Gesir.* 


Gisant. 




1 11 git. 




133 


Bouillir. 


Bouillant. 


Bouilli. 


' Je bous. 


Je bouillis. 


133 


Ebouillir. 




Ebouilli. 


i 




193 


Courir. 


Courant. 


Couru. 


Je cours. 


Je courus. 


183 


Faillir. 


Faillant.* 


Failli. 


Je faux.* 


Je faillis. 


134 


Defaillir. 




Defailli. 


Nous defaillons 


Je defaillis. 


184 


Fuir. 


Fuyant. 


Fui. 


Je fuis. 


Je fuis. 


1-5 


Mourir. 


Mourant. 


Mort. 


Je mours. 


Je mourus. 


185 


Acquerir. 


Acqueraut. 


Acquis. 


J'acquiers. 


J' acquis. 


136 


Conquerir. 


Conquerant. 


Conquis. 


Je conquiers. 


Je conquis. 


126 


Ouir. 


Oyant.* 


Oul. 




J' ouis. 


186 


Velir. 


Vetant. 


V6tu. 


Je vets. 


Je vetis. 


136 


Revetir. 


Revetant. 


Revetu. 


Je revets. 


Je revetis. 


186 


Cueillir. 


Cueillant. 


Cueilli. 


Je cueilla. 


Je cueillis. 


187 


Saillir. 


Sailiant. 


Sailii. 


11 saille. 


11 saillit. 


137 


Tressaillir. 


Tressaillant. 


Tressailli. 


Je tressaille. 


Je tressailhs. 


189 


Avoir. 


Tf 


IIRD CONJ 


UGATION. 




128 


Ayant. 


Eu. 


J'ai. 


J' eus. 


Ravoif. 










139 


Choir. 




Chu. 






139 


Dechoir. 




Decbu. 


Je dccbols. 


Je dechus. 


139 


Echoir. 


Eche.ant. 


Echu. 


11 echoit. 


J* echus. 


139 


Falloir. 




Fallu. 


11 fauU 


11 faJlut. 


177 


Mouvoir. 


Ziouvant. 


Mo. 


Je meus. 


Je mus. 


190 


Premouvoir. 




Promu. 




Je promus.* 


190 


Pleuvoir. 


Pleuvant. 


Plu. 


Ilpleut. 


11 plut. 


190 


Pouvoir. 


Pouvant. 


Pu. 


Je puis. 


Je pus. 


191 


Savoir. 


Sachant. 


Su. 


Je sais. 


Je sus. 


191 


Seoir.* 


Seyant. 




11 sted. 




191 


Seoir* 


Seant. 


Six. 






191 


Asseoir. 


Asseyant. 


Assis. 


J' assieds. 


J' assis. 


192 


Surseoir. 




Sursis. 


Je sursois. 


Je sursis. 


193 


Voir. 


Voyant- 


Vu. 


Je vois. 


Je vis. 


192 


Prevoir. 


Prevoyant. 


Prevu. 


Je prevois. 


Je previ6. 


193 


Pouvoir. 


Pourvoyant. 


Pourvu. 


Je pourvois. 


Je pourvus. 


193 


Valoir. 


Vulant. 


Valu. 


Je vaux. 


Je valus. 


193 


Vouloir. 


Voulawl. 


Voulu. 


Je veux. 


Je voulus. 


193 


1 


f. B. The forms niarked with 


an asterisk arp obsolete. 





~w 



210 



INF1N. 


PARTICIPLES. 


INDICATIVE. 






Present. 


| Present, 


| Past. 


Present. 


| Preterit. 


! 






FOl 


'RTH CONJUGATION. 


Page 










Soudre. 


Solvant.* 








194 




Resoudre. 


Resolvant. 


Resous, resolu. 


Je resous. 


Je resolus. 


194 




Absoudre. 


Absolvant. 


Absous. 


J' absous. 




194 




Dissoudre. 


Dissolvant. 


Dissous. 


J e di. c sous. 




195 




Coudre. 


Cousant 


Cousu. 


Je couds. 


Je cousis. 


195 




Sourdre. 






11 sourd. 




195 




Melt re. 


Metiant. 


Mis. 


Je mets. 


Je mis. 


195 




Moudre. 


Moulnut. 


Moulu. 


Je mouds. 


Je moulus. 


196 




Prendre, 


Prenaot. 


Pris. 


Je prends. 


Je pris. 


196 




Rompre. 


Rampant. 


Rompu. 


Je romps. 


Je rompis. 


197 




Suivre. 


Suivant. 


Suivi. 


Je suis. 


Je suivis. 


198 




S'ensuivre. 


S'ensuivant. 


Ensuivi. 


11 s'ensuit. 


11 s'ensuivit. 


198 




Valncre. 


Vainquant. 


Vaincu 


Je vaincs.* 


Je vainquis. 


193 




Battre. 


Battant. 


Battu. 


Je bats. 


Je battis. 


199 




Etre. 


Etant. 


Ete. 


Je suis. 


Je fus. 


134 




Vivre. 


Vivant 


Vecu. 


Je vis. 


Je v£cus. 


199 




JBraiie. 






II brait 




-200 




Faire. 


Faisant. 


Fait. 


Je fais. 


Je fis. 


200 




Traire. 


Trayant. 


Trait. 


Je trais. 




^01 




Naitre. 


Naissant. 


Ne. 


Je nais. 


Je naquis. 


201 




Renaitre. 


Renaissant. 




Je renais. 


Je renaquis.* 


201 




Paitre. 


Paissani. 


Pu. 


Je pais. 




202 




Bruire. 


Bruyant. 








282 




Luire. 


Luisant. 


Lot. 


Je luis. 




20 J 




Nuire. 


Nuisant. 


Nui. 


Je nuis. 


Je nuisis. 


202 




Confire. 


Oonfisant. 


Ccnfit. 


Je confis. 


Je confis. 


203 




Suffire. 


Suffisant. 


Suffi. 


Je sums. 


Je suffis. 


203 




Circoncire. 


Circoncisant. 


Circoncis. 


Je circoncis. 


Je circoncis. 


203 




Dire. . 


Disant. 


Dit. 


Je dis. 


Je dis. 


203 




Med ire. 


Medisanl. 


Medit. 


Je in6dis. 


Je mddis. 


203 




Maudire. 


Maudissant. „ 


Maudit. 


Je naudis. 


Je maud is. 


203 




Ecrire. 


Ecrivant. 


Ecrit. 


J' ecris. 


J' e*crivis. 


£04 




Lire. 


Lisant. 


Lu. 


Je lis. 


Je lus. 


204 




Rire. 


Riant. 


Ri. 


Je ris. 


Je ris. 


205 




Frire. 




Frit. 


Je fris. 




205 




Boire. 


Buvant. 


Bu. 


Je bois. 


Jebus. 


205 




Clore,clorre. 




Clos. 


Je clos. 




205 




Conclure. 


Concluant. 


Conclu. 


Je conclus. 


Je conclus. 


206 




Exclure. 


Excluant. 


Exclu, or exclus. 


J' exclus. 


J' exclus. 


206 




Croire. 


Croyant. 


Cru. 


Je cqois. 


Je crus. 


207 




Poindre. 






11 point. 




207 




N. B. Th< 


i derivatives, \ 


vbich are not in th 


is Table, will 


be found with 








the primitives 


, to which we bav 


i given relere 


nces. 







OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 211 

CHAP. VI. 

OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

Prepositions, which are so called, from being pre- 
fixed to the nouns which they govern, serve to connect 
words with one another, and to show the relation be- 
tween them. Thus, in this phrase, le fruit de Parbre, 
the fruit of the tree, de expresses the relation between 
fruit and arbre. Likewise in this, utile a Phomme, 
useful to man ; a forms the relation between the noun 
homme and the adjective utile. De and a are preposi- 
tions, and the word to which they are prefixed, is called 
their regimen. 

There are different kinds of prepositions. 

Some are used — to denote place, as : 
Chez. II est chez-/ui, he is at home. 
Daxs. 11 se pTomtne dans le jardin, he is walking in 

the garden. 
Devant. // eit toujour* devant mes yeux, he is always 

before my eyes. 
Derriere. // ne regarde jamais derriere lui, he never 

looks behind him. 
Parmi. Que defous parmi les hommes ! how many fools 

among men ! 
Sous. La taupe vit sous terre, the mole lives under 

ground. 
Sub. II a le ckapeau sur la teie, he has his hat on (his 

head.) 
Vers. Vaimant se tourne vers le nerd, the loadstone 

points towards the north. 

EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

We find less real happiness in an elevated condition than in 
On de 2 bonheur i 2 f. 1 

a middling state. One is never truly peaceful but at 

moytn 2 1 v'rilabienient tranquille que 

home. He walked before me to serve me as a guide. 

soi marcher pour de * 

There was a delightful grove behind his house Among 
ind-2 2 bosquet m. 1. 



212 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

Some — to mark order, as : 

Avant. La nouvelle est arrivee avant le courrier, the 
news is come before the courier. 

Apres. II est trop vain pour marcher apres les autres, 
he is too proud to walk after other people. 

Entre. Etle a son enfant entre les bras, she holds her 
child in (for between) her arms. 

Depuis. Depuis la creation jusqu'a nous, from the crea- 
tion to the present time. 

Des. Des son cnfance, from his infancy ; des sa source, 
from its source, "f 



Some — to denote union, as : 
Avec. Ilfaut savoir avec qui on se lie, we ought to 
know with whom we associate. 



(^so many) different nations, there is not one that has not a 

tantde 2 1 y en avoir subj-1 

religious worship. Nature displays her riches with mag- 

2 culte m. 1 art. diployer 

nificence under the torrid zone. Eternal snows 

iorride 3 f. 1 de art. 3 5 f. pi. 4 on 1 
(are to be seen) on the summit of the Alps. Towards the north, 
voir ind-1 2 sommtt 

nature assumes a gloomy and wild aspect, 
art. triste2 sauvage 3 aspect m. 1. 



t EXERCISE. 

We (were up) before day -light, (in order to) enjoy 

se lever ind-6 art. peur de 

the magnificent spectacle of the rising sun. After such great 

magnijique 2 — m. 1 levant 2 1 de si 

faults, it only remained for us to repair them (as 

faute f. pi. ne r ester ind-2 * que riparer 

well as we could). Between those two mountains runs a deep 
dt noire mieux est pro fond 3 

hollow road. Many very astonishing events 

et creux 2 chemin m. 1 * de art. 2 4 3 

(have taken place) within these ten years. From my earliest 

il se passer ind-4 1 depuis * art. tendre 

infancy I have had an abhorronce of lying. 

* horreur art. incnscnge m. 



OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 213 

Durant. Durant la guerre, during the war : durant 

Pete, during the summer. 
Pendant. Pendant Phiver, in winter ; pendant la 

paix, in time of peace. This preposition denotes a 

duration more limited than durant. 
Outre. Outre des qualites aimables, ilfaut encore, Sic. 

besides amiable qualities, there ought still, &c, 
Suivant. Je me decider ai suivant lea circonsfances, 

I shall determine according to circumstances. 
Selon. Le sage se conduit selon les maximes de la 

raison, a wise man acts according to the dictates of 

reason.]: 

Some — to express opposition, as : 

Contre. Je plaide contre lui, I plead against him. 

Malgre. II Pa fait malgre moi, he has done it in 
spite of me. 

Nonobstant. Nonobstant ce qu^on lui a dit, notwith- 
standing what has been said to him. IT 

X EXERCISE. 

JVith wit, politeness, and some (readiness to 

de art. pr. art. peu (& prevenance 

oblige), one generally succeeds in the world. We are fit 

reussir on prop re 

for meditation during winter. (In the course of) that siege 
a art. f. pendant sitgem. 

the commandant of the city made some very successful 

ind-3 de art. heureux 2 

sallies. Besides the exterior advantages of figure and 

sortie f. pi. 1 2 1 art. 

the graces of deportment, she possesses an excellent heart, a 

art. maintien m. avoir 2 1 

correct judgment, and a sensible soul. Always act 
sain 2jugement 1 2 1 5e conduirt 

according to the maxims which I have given you. 

* f. pi. incutquer f. pi. 

11 EXERCISE. 
We cannot long act (contrary to) our own character; 

savoir co ml- 1 agir contre * 

natuntlistanding all the pains we take to disguise it, it 

que pour 

shews itself, and betrays us on many ions. In 

se monlrer trahir en Oien de art. * 



£14 OP THE PREPOSITIONS. 

Some — to express privation, or separation, as : 

Sans. Des troupes sans chef, troops without com- 
manders. 

Excepte. Excepte quelques malheureux, except some 
wretches. 

Hors. Tout est perdu hors Vhonneur, all is lost save 
honour. 

Hokmis. Tous sont entres hormis monfrlre, they are 
ail come in except my brother!. 

Some — to denote the end, as : 

Envers. II est charitable envers les pauvres, he is cha- 
ritable to the poor. 

Touchant. // a ecrit touchant cette affaire, he has 
written respecting that business. 

Pour. II travaille pour le bien public, he labours for 
the public good. IT 

vain we dissemble ; in spite of ourselves, we are known at 

* avoir beau f aire on nous connait d 

last. . 
la tongue. 



t EXERCISE. 

{Had it not been for) your care, I should have been ig- 
sans pi. uii 

norant all my life. All the philosophers of antiquity 

art. 
except a few, have held the world to be eternal. All 

ires-petit nombre croire * * 

laid down their arms, except two regiments, who pre- 

mettre bas * art. 
ferred (making their way) through the enemy. Every 

sej aire jour au-travers de pi. 

thing is absurd and ridiculous in that work, except a chapter 
or two. 



IT EXERCISE. 

I have written to you concerning that business, in which I 

a laquelle 

take the most lively interest ; and as I know your benevo- 

vif connaitrc bienrtil- 

lence towards the unfortunate, I (make not the least doabt) 

lance f. malheureux ne douter nullcment 



OP THE PREPOSITIONS. 215 

Others — to mark the cause and means, as ; 
Par. // Pa flechi par ses prieres, he has softened him 

by hi3 entreaties. 
Moyennant. II rtussira moyennant vos avis, he will 

succeed by means of your counsels. 
Attexdu. // ne pent partir, attendu les rents contraires, 

he cannct sail on account of contrary winds, J 



The use of the prepositions, — a, — de, — en, is yery 

extensive. 

A is generally used to express several relations, as des- 
tination, tendency, place, time, situation, &c. being 
often a substitute for various other prepositions ; 
ex. : — destination -to : oiler a Londres, to. go to Lon- 
don. — Tendency -to, toward: count a sa perte, to 
hasten to one's ruin. — Aim -a£, for : aspirer a la 
gloire, to aspire to glory. — Residence -at, in : etre a 
Rome, to be at Rome. — Time -at : a midi, at twelve 
o'clock. — Concern -on : a ce sujet, on this subject. — 
Manner -with : supplier a mains jointes, to entreat 
earnestly. —Means -with: peindre a Vhuile, to paint 
in, or with oil; -with: bas a-irois-fils, three thread- 
stockings, that is, with three threads, — Situation -at, 

that you (will carefully attend; (to it), (not so much) for ike 

ne donner tous vos soiiis subj-1 y moinx 
satisfaction of obliging me, as for the pleasure of justifying 

inf-1 justijier inf-1 

innocence and confounding calumny, 
art. pr. covfondre art. f. 

t EXERCISE. 
Is there any man that has never been softened by tears 
aucun subj-1 jltchir art. 

or disarmed by submission ? Through the precautions 

ni desarmer art. 

which we took, we avoided the rocks of that dangeroui 

que ind-3 ind-3 icutil m. pi. 2 

coast. Owing to the bad state of my father's health, I shaH 
role Li 2 1 

not trarel this year. 
voyager annti f. 



216 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

with : etre a son aise, to be at ease. — Purpose for : une 
table a manger, a dining table. — Suitableness -for, to : 
homrne a rtussir, a man likely to succeed : — Desert : 
crime a ne pas pardonner, a crime not to be forgiven, &c 



De is generally used to express separation, extraction, 
possession, appartenance, cause, shift, result, &c. and 
supplies the place of several prepositions, as — from: 
je viens de France, I come from France ; d'un bout 
a-V autre, from one end to the other. — Of: lepalais du 
roi, the palace of the king; les facultes de Pdme, the 
faculties of the soul ; un homme ft esprit, a man of wit. 
ki a partitive sense — of : moitie de, quart de, &c. the 
half of, the fourth of, &c. : it is used for par — by : il 
est aime de tout le monde, he is beloved by every body ; 
for — through, or by, &c. ; mourir defaim, de soif, to 
die of hunger, of thirst : — on, upon, with : vivre de 
fruits, to live upon fruit. — On account of or for : sau- 
ter dcjoie, to leap for joy. IT 



t EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION a. 

Fathers ! give good counsels, and still better 

de encore 3 pr. meilltvr 1 

examples to your children. A good minister only aims 

2 ne aspire r 

at the glory of serving his country well. When we were 
que a inf-1 2 pays 3 1 ind-2 

hi the country, we devoted the morning io 

a campagne f. consacrtr ind-2 maitnee f. art 

study, we walked at noon, and at three or four 

se promener ind-2 midi 

o'clock we went a hunting, or fishing. Michael 

heure pi. ind-2 art. chasse f. pr. art. ptche f. Michel- 

Angelo has painted (a great deal) in fresco. It is a bed with 

Ange beaucnup art. fresque f. ce lit m. 

ivory posts and mahogany feet. That man, with his 
colonne d'ivoire pr. pied ef acajou * art. 

gloomy looks and surly behaviour, seems 

sombre 2 regard m. 1 pr. art. brusque 2 mainlien m. 1 ne sembU 
hi oniy /o serve as a scarecrow. 
propre que de * tpouvanlail. 



OP THE PREPOSITIONS. 217 

En serves lo mark the relations of time, place, situa- 
tion, &c. and is variously expressed, as, c'etait en 
hiver, it was during winter ; etre en Angleterre, to be 
in England ; aller en Italie, to go into Italy ; elle est 
en bonne sante, she is in good health ; il vaut mieux 
etre en paix, ^w'en guerre, it is better to be at 
peace than at war ; il Va fait en haine de lui, he did 
it out of hatred to him, &c. J 

H EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION de. 
I come from London, where I have spent a week very 
oil passi huit jours 

agreeably. From one end of the horizon to the other, the 

bout m. m. 

sky was covered icith thick black clouds. 

del m. Spais 2 et noir 3 nuage m. pi. 1 

The marble of Paros is not finer than that which we get 

qui nous vient 
from Carrara. Montaigne, Mad. de Sevigne, and la Fontaine, 

Carrarc. 
were writers of truly original genius. One half 

ind-2 rfe art. icritain un 2 3 1 moiiiti. 

of the terrestrial globe is covered with water, and above a 
terrestre2 globe m. 1 plus de 

(third part) of the rest is uninhabited, either through extreme 
tiers m. inhabite on par un 2 

heat, or through excessive cold. In that happy 

chaleur f. 1 un = 2 froid m. 1 

retreat, we lived an the milk of our flocks, and the delicious 
asile m. ind-2 brebis pr. 2 

fruits of our orchards. 
1 verger m. pi. 

; EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION en. 

He had for a (long while) lived in France ; the 

3 * dcpuis 1 * long-temps 2 vivre ind-2 
troubles which agitated that fine kingdom obliged him to 

ind-4 royaume m. ind-4 de 

retire to Switzerland, whence he soon after (set off) 

se retirer Suisse d'oil 3 1 2 se rendre ind-4 

for Italy. We were at peace, and enjoyed all 

ind-2 pron. en gouter ind-2 art. 

its blessings, when ambition rekindled the flames of 

# charme m. art. rallumer ind-3 feu s. 

war, and forced us to put our frontiers in a state 

art. ind-3 de mettre frontier e f. nl. * 

20 



218 OF THE ADVERB. 

CHAP. VII. 

OF THE ADVERB. 

The adverb, is a word which accompanies verbs, ad- 
jectives, or even other adverbs, to espress their man- 
ner, or circumstances. 

Remark. There are adjectives which are some- 
times used as adverbs, as, il chante juste, he sings 
well ; elle chante faux, she sings out of tune ; Us ne 
voient pas clair, they do not see clear ; cettejieur sent 
ban, this flower has a good smell, &c. The adjec- 
tives, juste, faux, clair, and bon, here supply the place 
of abverbs. 

Adverbs are of different kinds. 

The most numerous are those which express manner, 
and are formed from adjectives by the following method : 

Rule I. When the adjective ends, in the mascu- 
line, with a vowel, the adverb is formed by adding 
ment ; as, modeste-ment, modestly ; poli-ment, politely ; 
ingenii-ment, ingenuoush &c. 

Exceptions. Impuni /lakes impunlment, and traitre, 
traitreusement. 

The following six titce e close before -ment, instead 
of the e mute in the adjective. 

aveuglement blindly conform Anient conformably 

commod^ment commodiously enormement enormously 
incommodement incommodiously opiniatrement obstinately 

Observe that the adverbs, 
follejient foolishly bellement softly 

mollement effeminately nouvellement newly 

are to be considered as coming from the adjectives fol, mol, bel, 
nouvel, and accordingly belong to the following rule. 

Rule II. When the adjective ends witii a conso- 
nant, in the masculine, the adverb is formed from the 
feminine termination, by adding ment ; as, grand 

of defence. The savage is almost continually at war ; he can- 

presque toujours 
not remain at rest. He has acted, on this occasion, like 

en repos dans en 

a great man. 



OF THE ADVERB. 219 

grandement, greatly ; franc, franchement, frankly, 
naif, na'ivement, artlessly, &c. 

Exceptions. 1st. Genlil, makes gentiment, prettily. 

2nd. The following eight adverbs, 
comniunement commonly importuu^ment importunately 

confus^ment confusedly obscurement obscurely 

diffusement diffusedly precis6ment precisely 

expressement expressly profondement deeply 

take before ment the e close instead of the e mute, in 
the feminine of the adjectives from which they are 
derived : 

Rem. The six following adverbs are not derived 
from adjectives. 

comment how profusement lavishly 

incessamment presently nuitamment by night 

notamment especially sciemment knowingly 

3rd. Adjectives ending in -nt, form their adverbs by 
changing -nt into -mment, as consta-nt, consta-mmen%\ 
constantly ; eloque-nt, eloque-mment. Except lent and 
present, the only two of this class, that follow the se- 
cond general rule, making lentement and presejitement. 

Rem. Most adverbs denoting manner, and a few 
others, have the three degrees of comparison, as, pro~ 
fondement, aussi, plus, or moins profondement, fort, 
bien, or tres -profondement, and le plus profondement. 

The following degrees of comparison are irregular. 

POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE, 

bicn well mie*ix better le mieux the best 

mal bad pis worse le pis the worst 

peu little moirrslf less I e moins the least 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Bourdaloue and Masillon have both spoken very 

Vun et V autre 
eloquently on evangelical truths ; but the former has prin- 

„ art. izang clique 2 1 
oipally (proposed to himself) to convince the mind ; the latter 

se proposer deconvaincre 

has generally had in view to touch the heart. Several of 

en vuc de art. 

la Bruyere's characters are as finely drawn as they are deUr 
2 1 finement tract * 



220 OF THE ADVERB. 

There are likewise various other sorts of adverbs 



f Affirmation, [ as 
) Consent, 
°M Doubt, 



Certes, certainly : oui, yes. 
Soli, be it so ; volontiers, willingly. 
Peut-Ure, perhaps. 
(^Denial, — non,ne, tie-pas, tie-paint, no, not,t 

Order o • ^ Premtirement, first ; stcondement, 2dly, &c. 
Rank ' \ Wabord, at first ; ensuite, aprts, afterwards ; 
' ( auparavant, before. 

of^ r Oil, where ; id, here ; Id, there ; de-ca, on this 

Place, or I side ; de Id, on that side ; par-tout, every 

Distance, ) where ; prts, proche, near, nigh ; loin, far, 

L &c.t 

oately expressed. Bnft'on is one of the best writers of the last 

2 
century ; he thinks deeply, describes forcibly, and expresses 
siecle m. 1 peindre fortement 

himself (with dignity.) Corneille and Racine are the two best 

noblement 
French tragic poets ; the pieces of the former are strongly, 

3 tragique2 If. 2 

but incorrectly written ; those of the latter are more regularly 

3 1 

beautiful, more purely expressed, and more delicately conceived. 
beau pense. 

EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION, &c. 

Certainly, either I mistake, or the business passed (ia 

ou se tromper se passer ind-4 

that manner.) Do you think that he listens icillingly to this 

ainsi ecouter 

proposal ? Have you ever read in Racine the famous scene of 

f. 
Phaedra's delirium ? Yes, I have, and I own it is one 

Phedre 2 art. delire m. 1 la lue avouer que ce 

of the finest of the French theatre. Perhaps you will discover, 

.2 m. 1 
on a second perusal of la Fontaine's fables, beauties 

elans lecture f. 2 art. 1 de art. f. pi. 

which yon did not perceive at first. Will you have some ? 
que avoir apercue-s d art. f. * en 

No. Will you not have some ? The man who (is willing) to 
* vouloir * 

do good is not stopped by any obstacle. I will pay him 
* art.' arret 6 auctm lui 

what I owe, but not all at once. 
ce que lui von pas a art. fris f. 



OF THE ADVERB. 



221 



Of time. < 



Present. 
Past. 
Future. 
Indeterminate. 



Maintenant, now ; dprisent, at 
present ; actuellement, this mo 
ment, &c. 
Hier, yesterday ; avant-hier, the 
day before yesterday ; autre- 
fois, formerly, &,c. 
Demain, to-morrow ; apr&s-d»- 
main, the day after to-mor- 
row, &c. 
(Souvent, often ; d' ordinaire, gene*, 
rally ; quelquefois, sometimes; 
matin, early ; tot, soon ; tard, 
late, &c.1T 



% EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF ORDER, &<u 

We ought first to avoid doing evil ; afterwards we 
* falloir ind-1 * de inf-1 art. * 

ought to do good. Read books of instruction first, and 

* art. 1 art. 3 4 2 

then you may proceed to those of entertainment. If 

* passer ind-7 agriment 

you will go, settle first what is to be don« 

vouloir s'en alter rtgler auparavant falloir * * inf-1 

The painter had (brought together) in the same picture several 

rassembler un tableau 

different objects : here, a troop of Bacchants ; there, a troop of 

2 1 BaccJiante 

young people ; here, a sacrifice ; there, a disputation of philoso- 

gens dispute 

phers. Sesostris carried his conquests farther than Alexander 

pousser conquete ng 

did afterwards. Call upon your cousin ; he lives near here 
ind-4 dcpuis Passer chez loger 2 idl 

I cannot see that, if I be not near it. When he knew 

ind-1 aupres * Quand satoir ind-3 
where he was, he began to fear the consequence of hli 

ind-2 commencer ind-3 suite 

imprudence. Contemplate (at a distance ) lofty mountains, If 

de loin art. haut f. 

you wish to behold prospects ever varied and ever new. 

vouloir * dtcouvrir de art. site m. 



1f EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF TIME. 

I have finished the work you prescribed nae ; what do 

achever que ordonner ind-6 que 

20* 



222 OF Till. ADVERB. 

Quantity. 



OF< 

I Comparison, 



L Pck, little ; assez, enough ; trop, too 
3 much; bcaucoup, much, ve-ymuch; 
r tant, so much, &c. 
X Plus, more ; moins, less ; aussi, so ; au- 
I tant, as much, &c.t 



you wish me to do now? Formerly, education 

voulolr 1 que je * subj-1 3 2 
was aeglected; it is now (very much) attended to ; it is (to 

on 3 beaucoup 2 s T occuper en 1 faUoir 
be hoped) that new views will soon (be adopted.) They 

esperer on * 4 2 adopter in d -7 1 de 3. 0» 

grieved (at it) yesterday; now, they laugh (at it); 

s'affligcr ind-2 e?i aujourd'hui rire en 

to-morrow, h will no longer (be thought) of. It is one of 

ow ^Zms penscr ind-7 2/ 

those accidents which it is sometimes impossible to avoid. The 

de 
dew incommoded me (very much.) ; I shall not (in future) 
serein m. ind-4 desormats 

walk so late. Rude and coarse criticism 

sc promener Malhonnete 2 grossier Sun f . 1 

generally (does greater injury) to the person who indulges 

nuire plus sepermetire 

himself in it, than to him who is the object (of it.) 
* celle en 



I EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF QUANTITY, &c 

There are many people who have pretensions ; but very 
beaucoup de * * d 

few who have such as are well founded. To embellish a 

en sub-1 * * * * de fondei. pi. * 2 

subject too much, frequently betrays a want of judgment and 

'3 1 souvent etre faute 

taste. One very often experiences disgust in the midst ot 

trouver art. ennui d 
Khe most riotous pleasures. She is a giddy and thoughtless 

bruyant 2 1 Ce Icgcr 2 inconsequent 2 

woman, who speaks much and reflects little. She has so much 
1 rifl6chir 

kindness, that it is impossible not to love her. These stuffs 
de de kojfe L 

are beautiful ; consequently they are dear. This book has 
aussi couter chtr. 



OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

CHAP. VIII. 

OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

The conjunction is a word which serves to connect 
words, or sentences, as, II pleure et rit en meme temps, 
he cries and laughs at the same time ; the word et 
unites the first sentence, il pleure, with the second, il 
rit. Likewise in Pierre et Paul rient, Peter and Paul 
laugh ; the word et unites these two sentences into one, 
Pierre rit and Paul rit. 

There are different kinds of conjunctions. 

To unite two words under the same affirmation, or 
under the same negation, et is used for the affirmation, 
and ni, neither, nor, for the negation. 

To denote an alternative, or distinction, ou, either, or ; 
soit, que, whether, or ; tantot, sometimes, &c. 

To restrict an idea ; sinon, but, except ; quoique, en- 
core que, though, although ; a moins que, unless, till.f 



merit ; but there are others as good. If he has done that, 
du en * de 

I can do (as much.) What I say to you (about it) is meant 

en aidant en * 

less to give you pain, than to apprize you of the lan- 
jwur faire de art. avertir pro- 

guage that is used. She is six years younger than her bro- 
pos\)\. on tenir avoir de moins 

ther. Nobody is more interested than you are (in the 

ne * d ce que reussir 

success) of the affair. You do not offer enough for this garden : 
subj-1 2 * 1 offrir de 

give something more. TIic more ignorant we are, the less we 

de * 1 4 on 2 3 * 

(believe ourselves so.) 
croire Vttre. 

t EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. 

Gold and silver are metals less useful than iron, 
art art. de art. art. 



224 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

To express opposition, mats, but ; cependant, yet, 
nevertheless; neanmoins, for all that, however; pour- 
tant, however, thoagh ; toutefois, Men que, although. 

To express a condition ; si, if ; sinon que, except 
that ; pourvu que, provided that ; a condition que, on 
condition that. 

To express consent ; a la verite, indeed ; a la bonne 
heure, very well. 

For explanation ; savoir, c'esUa-dire, viz. that is to 
say ; , comme, as. j" 



To listen with joy to a slanderer, and to applaud him, is to 
* midisant * lui ce * 

cherish the serpent who stings, that he may sting more 
rechauffer p?,guer a fin que plus 

effectually. I like neither 8 ,terers nor the wicked. Those 
surement t 7 Uteur pi. 

who have never suffered, kn w nothing; they know neither 
savoir connaitre 

good nor evil. You may choose either a happy 
art. bienpl. art. mal pi. avoir d choisir de 

mediocrity, or a sphere more elevated, but exposed to many 

f. de f. bien de 

dangers. He is an inconsistent man ; he is sometimes of 
art. Ce inconsequent 2 1 tantot 

one opinion, and sometimes of another. I have (nothing more) 

avis ne autre chose 

to say to you, only that I will have it so. I shall not yet 

sinon que » vouloir * * encore 

proceed to the perusal of t^e authors of the second class, unless 

lecture f. ordre m. 

you advise me to do so. 

ne conseiller subj-1 * * le 

t EXERCISE. 

The serpent bites ; it is only a bite ; but from this bite 
ce ne que morsurc 

the venom communicates itself to the whole body ; the slanderer 

venin 
speaks ; it is but a word; but this word resounds every 

ne que parole f. rctcntir 

where. (That is) certainly a superb picture ; nevertheless, there 
Voild tablet: u 



OP CONJUNCTIONS. 225 

To express relation, or parity; comme, as, ainsi, 
thus, so ; de meme, as, just as ; crnisi que, as ; autant 
que, as much as ; si que, as, &c. 

To express augmentation, d'ailleurs, besides, more- 
over ; outre que, besides that ; de plus, au surplus, be- 
sides, furthermore. 

For diminution, au moins, du moins, pour le moins, at 
least. 

To express the ca *e, or the reason of a thing ; car, 
for ; comme, as ; parc^ que, because ; puisque, since ; 
pour que, that, in order mat, &c. % 



is some incorrectness in the design. Although Homer, accord- 

incorrection pi. dessin 

uag to Horace, slumbers (aft times), he is never- 

soinmeiller sub-1 qcjelquefois en 2 3 we 1 pas 
thdtss the first of all poets. You will succeed, provided 
moins art. riussir pourvu 

you act with vigour. We have within us two facultief 

que agir sub-1 ew 

that are seldom united, viz. imagination and judgment. 
* * art. 



X EXERCISE. 

The most beautiful flowers last but a moment : thus hu 
durer ne que art. 2 

man life passes away. The (greatest part) of mankind 

4 3 1 * plupart f. art. homme pi 

have, like plants, bidden qualities that chance 

pi. art. de art. cach6 2propriet6 f. 1 art. hasard 

discovers. Mad. de Sevigne's letters are mo- 

faire decouvrir 2 art. f. 1 de art. 

dels of elegance, simplicity, and taste ; besides, they are 

pr. pr. 

replete with interesting anecdotes. Nothing is more enter 
plein de 2 f . 1 * de emu 

taining than history ; besides, nothing is more instructive. 
sant art. * de 

Circumstances show us to others, and still 

art. occasion pi. faire connaitre encore 

more, to ourselves. I shall always advise you to take the 

consc tiler de 



226 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

To draw a conclusion ; or, now ; done, then ; par 
consequent, consequently ; e'est pourquoi, therefore. 

To express a circumstance ; quand, lorsque, when ; 
pendant que, tandis que, &c. whilst, while ; iant que, 
as long as ; depuis que, ever since ; avant que, before ; 
des-que, aussi-totque, d'abordque, as soon as ; a -peine, 
hardly, scarcely ; apres que, after that ; enfm, in fine, 
finally, to conclude, &c. 

To express a transition ; car, for ; en effet, indeed, 
in effect ; au reste, besides, otherwise ; a propos, now 
I think of it ; ay res tout, after all. f 

ancients as your guides ; at least, quit but seldom 

pour * pr. s'tcarter dene que 

the way which they have traced for you. We must, at 

route f. que trade * * falloir 

least, know the general principles of a language, before (we 

2 1 langue f. de 

take upon ourselves) to teach it. Certain people hate 

se miler de * enseigner f. gens art. 

grandeur, because it lowers and humiliates them, and 

— f, pron. rabaisser pron. 

makes them feel the privation of the advantages which 
que. elle leur bien pi. 

they covet. 
aimer. 

t EXERCISE. 

We ought to love what is amiable : note, virtue i* 

* falloir ind-1 * art. 

amiable ; therefore we ought to love virtue. We ousht to 

* * * falloir * 

practise what the Gospel commands us ; now it commands 

6vangUe m. 
us, not only to forgive our enemies, but also to love 

non de pardonner d encore de 

them. Despreaux was extremely particular in not 

de la plus grand exactitude d 
coming late, when he was invited to dinner ; he said that 
inf-1 trop ind-2 ind-2 

all the faults of those who (are waited for) present themselves 

difaut sc faire attend re 

to those who wait for them. The pride which possesses us; 
attendre ¥ posstder 



OP CONJUNCTIONS. 227 

The conjunction que is always placed between twp 
ideas, bi 'h necessary to complete the sense, as, II est 
tres -important que tout le monde soit instruit, it is of 
great importance that every body should be well in- 
structed. It differs from the relative pronoun que, as 
it can never be converted into lequel, laqueile. The 
conjunction que is generally repeated before every 
member of a period. U 



visible as it is, escapes our eyes, while it manifests itself 
tout que d 

to the eyes of the public, and displeases every one. 

choquer art. esprit pi. 

After we had examined that singular effect, we (inquired into) 
ind-5 2 1 recherclier ind-3 

its causes. We had hardly done, when he came in. Pride 
en ind-2 finir que entrer 

counterbalances all our imperfections ; for, whether it hides 
cvntre-peser misdre pi. ou cacher 

them, or whether it discovers them^ it glories in knowing them. 

si se glorijier de inf-1. 

None but an Englishman can (be a judge) of Shak- 
77 7i y a que qui subj-1 juger 

speare ; for, what foreigner is sufficiently versed in the English 

language to discover the sublime beauties of that author ? 
languei. pour 2 1 



1T EXERCISE. 

(As long as Hive), this image will be before my eyes 

tout ma trie — f. peirtt 

and, if ever the gods permit me to reign, I shall not forget, 

faire * 

after so terrible an example, tluit a king is not 

(pas not expressed) 
worthy to govern nor happy in his power, (but in 

de commander et ri'est puissance f. qu'- 

proportion as) he subjects it to reason. I am very glad to 
a u< ant que soumettre art. de 

si-e that you do not love flattery, and that one (runs no ribk) 

ne hasarder rien 
in speaking to you with sincerity, 
o inf-1 



228 



OF INTERJECTIONS. 



CHAP. IX. 



OF INTERJECTIONS. 



Interjections are words, which serve to express the 
sudden emotions of the soul. The only point to be 
attended to, is not to place them between words which 
custom has made inseparable. There are interjections 
for every feeling, viz. 



Of 



pain 


ahi, aie ! ouf ! ah ! 


grief 


helas ! mon Dieu, &c. 


fear 


ha ! he ! 


J°y 


ah ! bon, bon ! o ! 


aversion 


fi ! fi done ! oh, oh ! 


disgust 


pouah, pouah ! 
loin de. 


indignation 


imprecation 


peste de, la peste de. 


disbelief 


chansons, tarare. 


surprise 


ouais ; 


astonishment 


oh ! bon Dieu ! misericorde ! pest* 


warning 


gare ! hem ! hoi a, ho ! 


checking 


tout beau ! hola. 


encouraging 


alerte ! allons ! ca, courage ! 


applauding 


bravo, vivat ! 


encoring 


bis, bis. 


calling 


hola ! ho ! hem, hem ! 


derision 


oh ! eh ! zest 1 oh ! oh I oh ! 


silence 


chut! paix! st 



PART II. 



THE SYNTAX, 



OR 

WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 



CHAP. I. 

§1. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

There are some substantives which are never used 
in the plural ; such are — 1 . The names of metals, con. 
sidered in their original state ; as, Vor, gold, le platine, 
platina. 2. The names of virtues and vice ; as, la chas- 
tele, chastity, Fivrognerie, drunkenness. 3. Some 
words of a physical or moral nature ; as, route, hear- 
ing ; Vodorat, smelling ; le sang, blood, le sommeil, 
sleep, la pauvrete, poverty. 4. The infinitive of verbs 
and adjectives used substantively, together with some 
other words, which cannot be reduced to any particu- 
lar class. 

Others, on the contrary, which likewise cannot be 
reduced to any particular class, are never used in the 
singular ; as, annales, annals ; ancetres, ancestors ; 
couchettes, snuffers, &c. 

OF COMPOUND NOUNS 

Of the formation of their plural. 

1. When a noun is compounded of a substantive 
and an adjective, they both take the sign of the plural ; 
as, tin gentilhomme, a nobleman ; des gentilshommes, no- 
blemen. 

2. When a noun is compounded of two substantives, 
united by a preposition, the first only takes the sign of 
the plural ; as, arc-en-ciel, a rainbow ; des arcs-en-ciel, 
rainbows. 

21 



230 SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

3. When a noun is compounded of a preposition, or 
verb, and a substantive, the substantive alone is put in 
the plural ; as, un entresol (a low room between two 
floors,) des entresols ; un garde-fou (rails on bridges), 
des garde-fous. 

Remark. There is a small number of substantives 
composed of a verb and an adverb ; as, un passe- 
partout, a master or general key ; or of a verb repeat- 
ed ; as, passe-passe, sleight of hand : they never take 
the sign of the plural. 

EXERCISE ON SUBSTANTIVE AND COMPOUND 

NOUNS. 

'Gold is the most pure, the most precious, the most ductile, 
art. parfait 

and, after platina, the heaviest of all ^ metals. Chastity is an 

pesant art. 

obligation of all times, all ages, and all conditions. 

* art. pr. art. pr. art. etat m. pi. art 

Intoxication, which proceeds from beer, is of longer duration 
ivresse vcnir art. * * 

than that which proceeds from wine. It is the sense of 

art. Ce art. 

feeling, , which teaches to guard against the errors of sighL 
toucher apprendre se garantir de art. 

Sleep is the image of death. Early learn 

art. art. de bonne-heure 2 apprendre 1 

to distinguish truth from falsehood. That is more bitter 

— guer art. vrai art. faux arner 

than wormwood. Dignity of mind was 

de art. absinthe art. EUvation art. sentiment m. pi. ind-2 
formerly the (distinguishing mark of) noblemen. One of 

ce qui * distinguer iiid-2 art. 

the buttresses of the vault has fallen. He is always 

arc-boutant m. pi. tomber 

making (cock and bidl stories.) The Tartars always form 

fait de art. coq.d-Vdne m. pi. Tartarc etre 

the scouts of an army. The fish-carriers did 

avant-courier m. pi. ciiasse-marie ra. pi. 

not arrive in time. This door is only fastened with a 

ind-3 d nc que former d *art. 

latch ; ana all (the persons) in the house have each their 
loquet m. * ceux de 

key. 
passe-partout m. 



OF THE AETICLE. 5381 

CHAP II. 

OP THE AKTICLE. 

§1. 

1. The difficulty attendant on rendering into French 
the a, or an which precedes a substantive, when it fok 
lows the verb to be, will easily be removed by examin- 
ing whether that substantive be restricted by a particu- 
lar idea ; if it be not restricted, the a, or an is not ex- 
pressed in French ; thus, i* am a Frenchman, 1 am a 
prince, must be translated by je suis Francais,^je suis 
prince. But if it be restricted, then the a or an must 
be expressed by the word un placed before the substan- 
tive, as, / am a Frenchman of an illustrious family, I 
am a very unfortunate prince, must be translated by jb 
suis un Francais d'une illustre maison,je suis un prina 
tres-malheureux. 

2. When the verb &tre is preceded by the demon- 
strative ce, in phrases of this kind, un is always requir- 
ed before the substantive, as, e'est un tresor, &c. 

3. The French do not use the article before sub- 
stantives, expressing the quality of a preceding noun =: 
though, in cases of this kind, the English usually em- 
ploy the article the, and still more frequently a, or an ; 
as, Telemaque, fils d' Ulysse, roi d'ltaque, Telemachus, 
the son of Ulysses, king of Ithaca ; le Due oV Yorh> 
prince du sang, the Duke of York, a prince of the 
blood. 



t EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 

I am a Frenchman and a merchant ; after having (been at) 

negotiant inf-1 parcouru 

the most famous (trading towns) in the Levant, my commercial 

= 6chelle f. pi. de — m. les affaires 

concerns have brought me here. I am an unhappy 

de mon commerce conduire 

Frenchman who, a striking example of the vicissitudes of 
* memorable 2 1 — 

fortune, seek an asylum where I may end my days 

art. ckerchcr asile m. puissefinir 



232 SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. 

§2. 

Without entering more minutely into this subject, 
the following comparative table, in which the same 
words are exhioited, according to circumstances, both 
with and without the article, in conjunction with the 
phrases which have been inserted at the end of this 
grammar, will, it is presumed, be considered as a suf- 
ficient illustration of custom. IT 



in peace. He was a man of uncommon probity and of 

Ce un rare 2. f . 1 un 

tried virtue: (as a) reward for the services he had 

eprouve 2 1 pour le recompenser de que 

rendered to the church and state, the king has made him a 

m. pi. eglise pr. art, 

bishop. Neoptolemus had hardly told me that he was a Greek, 
6veque. N6optoleme eut d peine dit 

when 1 (cried out) : O enchanting words, after so many 
que s' eerier ind-3 doux parole f. pi. de 

years of silence and unceasing pain ! o my son, what 

sans consolation 2 pr. 1 
misfortune, what storm, or rather what propitious wind has 
malheur m. tempete f. plutot favorable 2 1 

brought you hither to end my woes ? He replied, 

conduire pour mat ? m. pi. repondre ind-3 

I am of the island of Scyros, I am returning thither ; (I am 

He retourner y on 

said) (to be^ the son of Achilles. 
dit que ind-I. 

If COMPARATIVE TABLE. 

WITH THE ARTICLE. WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 

The writings of Cicero are full The writings of Cicero are full 

of the soundest 2 ideas 1. of sound 2 ideas 1. 

Divest yourself of the preju- Have no prejudice (with regard 

se defaire prejugc to) this question. 

dices of childhood. sur 

The different kinds of animals There are different kinds of 

that are upon the earth. • animals upon the earth. 

He enters into a detail of the He enters into a long detail of 

rules of a good grammar. frivolous 2 rules 1. 

He affects circumlocutions. He affects long 1 cirrumlocu- 

chercher de detour. Hons 2 in order to explain 

the simplest 2 things 1. 



SYNTAX OP THE AETICLE. 



233 



WITH THE ARTICLE. 



WITHOUT THE AETICLE. 



He loads his memory with the 

verses of Virgil and the 

phrases of Cicero. 
Essays supported by strong 2 

discours sontenu. 

expressions 1 
He has collected precepts of 
recueiUir suf 

morality. 

■maurs pi. 
Make use of the tokens we 

se servir signe (dont) 

agreed upon.* 

etre convenu. 
The choice of studies, proper, 

&c. 
Knowledge has always been 
Connaissance pi. 

the object of the esteem, the 

praise, and the admiration of 

elogc pi. 

men. 
The riches of the mind can only 

(be acquired) by study. 

ne que s'acquirir. 
The gifts of fortune are un- 
certain. 

fragiles. 
The connexion of proofs 

enchainement preuve 

makes them please and 
qu'ellcs 

persuade*. 
It is by meditation upon what 

we read, that we acquire 

fresh 2 knowledge, 1. 

connaissance pi. 
The advantages of memory. 

The memory of facts is the 

most showy. 
briilant. 
The aim of good masters 

should be to cultivate the 

devoir ind-1 de 



He loads his memory with in- 
sipid 3 verses 1 and phrases % 

Essays supported by lively ] 
vive 
expressions 2. 
A * collection of precepts in 
recueil sur 

morals. 

We are obliged to use some ex- 
terior 2 signs 1, in order to 
make ourselves understood. 
nous entendre 

He has made a choice of books 
which are, &c. 

It is an object of esteem, of 

Ce 
praise, and admiration. 



There is in Peru a prodigious 
le Perou 
abundance ofuseles\2 riches 1. 
Gifts of fortune. 
Bien. 

There is in this trook an admi- 
rable connexion of solid 2 
proofs 1. 



It is by meditation that we ac- 
quire fresh 1 knowledge 2. 
nouveau. 

There are different kinds of 

memory. 
He has only a memory oT 

facts. 

He has an air of pedantry 
ton m. maitre 



2V 



284 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 



WITH THE ARTICLE. 



WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 



mind and reason of their pu- 
pils. 

The taste of mankind is liable 
homme pi. 
to great changes. 

He has no need of the lessons 
you wish to give him. 

France, Spain, England, &c. 

The isle of Japan. 
He comes from China. 
He arrives from America. 
The extent of Persia. 

He is returned from the East 
Indies, from Asia, &c. 

He lives in Peru, in Japan, in 
d 
the Indies, in Jamaica, &c. 

The politeness of France, &c. 

The circumference of England. 

The interest of Spain. 

The invention of printing is at- 
tributed to Germany. 

He comes from French Flan- 
ders. 



that shocks you at first sight. 
abord 
Society of chosen 2 men 1. 



Spam, 



He has no need of lessens, 
avoir besoin 

Kingdom of France, of 
of England, &c. 

Island of Candia. 

He comes from Poland 

He arrives from Italy. 

He is gone to Persia, 
en 

He is returned from 
from Persia, &c. 

He lives in Italy, in France, 
in London, in Avignon, &c 
d d 

The fashions of France. 

The horses of England. 

The wines of Spain. 

The empire of Germany is di- 
vided into a great number of 
states. 

He comes from Flanders. 



§111. 

ON MEASURE, WEIGHT, &C. 

1. The English make use of a, or an, before nouns 
of measure, weight, and purchase; as, wheat is sold 
for a crown a bushel; butter sells for sixpence & pound ; 
wine sold yesterday for forty crowns a hogshead, His 
more than a groat a bottle. But the French make use 
of the article le, la, as, le bU se vend un ten le boisseau ; 
le beurre se vend six sous la livre ; le vin se vendit hier 
quarante (cus le muid, Jest plus de quatre sous la 
bouteilJe. 

2. When speaking of time, a or an is expressed in 
French by the preposition par, as, so much a week, tant 
par semaine. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 235 

3. In English, a is sometimes put between the pro- 
noun which expresses admiration, and the substantive 
that accompanies it, as, what a beauty! but, in French, 
the un is never expressed in similar cases, as, quelle 
beautd ! 

4. In English, when the adverbs more and less are 
repeated to express a comparison, they must be pre- 
ceded by the article, as, the more difficult a thing is, 
the more honourable it is. But, in French, the article 
is omitted, as plus une chose est difficile, plus elle est 
honorabie.'f 



CHAP. III. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

It has been said (p. 95), that an adjective agrees in 
gender and number with the substantive which it qua- 
lifies ; from this rule, however, must be excepted nu, 
bare, and demi, half, when placed before a substantive, 
and feu, late, when before the article or a pronominal 

t EXERCISE ON MEASURE, &c. 

Corn sells for eight shillings a bushel. Veal and 

art. bti m. se vendre * schelling boisseau art. veau 

mutton cost ten pence a pound. This lace is sold at 
art. couter sou litre f. f. se vendre * 

half a guinea an ell. The best French wines are sold at 
demi 2 1 f. aune de France 2 1 ind-1 

from twelve to fifteen shillings a bottle. My father goes to 

boutcillc f. va en 

Ireland four or five times a year. He gives his son seven 
Irlande fois an 

shillings a day. It (Is necessary), if you desire to 

falloir * 

(improve fast) that you should take a lesson three times a 

faire des pro arks rapides prcniez * 

we.ik. The more I contemplate those precious remains of anti- 

= rests ru.pl. art. 
quity, the more I am struck with wonder. What a beautiful 
a=i frapp£ de Homement 

morning ! come, let us go and walk in the fields. 
malinfo £ st promener champ m.pl. 



236 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

adjective, as, il va nu-pieds, he goes barefoot; je suts 
a vousdansune demi-heure, I will be with you in half 
an hour ; feu la reine, the late queen ; feu ma mere, 
my late mother. But the agreement takes, place, rf nu 
and demi be placed after the substantive, and feu be- 
tween the article or pronominal adjective and the sub- 
stantive, as, il a les pieds nus, his feet are bare ; je suis 
a vous dans une lieure et demie, I will be with you in 
an hour and a half; lafeue reine, mafeue mere. 

2. An adjective frequently serves to qualify two, or 
more substantives expressing either persons, or things 
of different genders. 

If it be used to qualify more than two substantives, 
it must agree with them ; for, either these substantives 
perform the office of subject, as, la grammaire, la 
logique, et la rhetorique, methodiquement enseignees, 
ne s'oublient guere, grammar, logic, and rhetoric, when 
taught with method, are seldom forgotten; or they 
constitute the regimen, as, c'est un homme d'une valeur, 
d?une vertu et d'unefidelite, eprouve'es, he is a man of 
tried courage, virtue, and fidelity. 

If it be used to qualify only two substantives, the 
substantive of persons must be distinguished from the 
substantive of things; with the first, the rules of 
agreement are to be observed in all cases : with the 
second, custom allows, when the substantives form the 
regimen, to make the adjective agree with the last 
only ; as, die avoit les yeux et la boucJie ouverle. 
Nevertheless, modern grammarians prefer the agree- 
ment, even in this case. 

3. With respect to phrases like the following, les 
langues Anglaise et Franc aise sont fort cultivtes, 
though they are in opposition to the rules of grammar, 
yet, it is allowable to use them. However, in strict 
propriety, it seems better to say, la langue Francaise 
et V Anglaise sont tres-cidtiv^es.^ 

t EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVE" 

He ran through the streets like a madman, bare-(ooi and 
ind-2 * rue f. pi. 



8XNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 237 



II. 

DIFFERENCE OF CONSTRUCTION BETWEEN THE ENGLISH 
AND FRENCH LANGUAGES. 

1. In English, the substantive of measure is placed 
before the substantive, or adjective expressing the di- 
mensions, as, a tower two hundred feet high, or in 
height. In French, the word which expresses dimen- 
sion, is placed first, if it be an adjective, and the pre- 
position de be added to it as a regimen, as, une tour haute 
de deux cents pieds. But, if it be a substantive, or an 
adjective used substantively, it is placed after, with the 
preposition de, either before the noun of measure, or 
of dimension, as : une tour de deux cents pieds de haut, 
or de hauteur. This last mode is the most elegant. 

iare-headed. His leg3 were bare. Give me 

tete il * &rt.jambe, f. 2 avoir 1 

half a guinea, and then you (will only owe) me a guinea 

ne devoir plus que 
and a half. I shall he at home in half an hour. Come 

chez-moi dans 
before half past one. The late queen was idolized. The 

2 une heure et 1 2 1 ind-2 adore 

late queen was universally regretted. His impetuosity and 
ind-3 
courxge, long restrained, soon surmounted all obsta- 
pron. enchaine ind-3 art. 

cles. The imagination and genius of Ariosto, although ir- 

art. VArioste quoique 

regular In their course, yet interest, (hurry along,) and 

march* n&anmoins attacker cntraivcr 
captivate the reader, who can never be tired of admiring them. 

lecteur se lasser inf-1 

There are in Gessner's idylls sentiments and a 

2 art. idylle 1 de art. 

grace altogether affecting. The good taste of the Egyptians, 

tout-d-fait touchant 
(from that time) made them love solidity and unadorned 
des-lors ind-3 leur art. = tout nu 2 

regularity. In those climates, the dry and the rainy raon- 
=- 1 sec plurricux mou$~ 

aoons divide the year. 
son f. ph st diviser annte. 



238 SXNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE, 

2. The English manner of expressing dimensions, is 
to use the verb to be, as, the walls of Algiers are twelve 
feet thick, and thirty feet high; the French in general, 
make use of the verb avoir, when there are two con- 
structions : as, les murs (V Alger ont douze pieds d^pais- 
seur, et trente de hauteur ; or, les murs d) Alger ont douze 
pieds d^paisseur sur trente de hauteur. This second 
mode of expression is most generally adopted. 

3. In comparative sentences, to express difference, 
the English sentence often runs thus : she is taller than 
her sister by the whole head. The French, in this man- 
ner ; elle est plus grande que sa sceur de toute la tete.'f 

t EXERCISE ON THE DIFFERENCE OF CONSTRUC- 
TION. 

This trunk, which is six feet long, is very convenient. You 
coffre m. commode 

will be stopped in your march by a river three hundred feet broad. 

arreti f. 

This observatory, which is twelve hundred feet high, is very pro- 
per for knowing the true position of the stars. It is a terrace 

inf-1 astre m. pi. ce terrace f. 

a hundred and eighty feet broad, and twelve hundred 

large 
feet long. The walls of our garden are twenty feet high 

mur m. pi. 
and three broad. It is one of the finest stones that was 

on ait 
ever seen: it is twenty feet long and six thick. This 

jamais vices longueur Spaisseur. 

ditch is nine feet six inches deep and six feet 

foss i m. ponce m. pi. profondeur f. 

broad. My son is taller than yours by two inches. 



REGIMEN OF THE ADJECTIVES. 

Several adjectives have a regimen ; some require 
the preposition de, and others the preposition a before 
a noun, or a verb, which is then called the regimen or 
government of the adjective. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVES 289 

EXAMPLES. 

Digne de recompense, Worthy of reward. 

Utile a Vhomme, Useful to man. 

Digne de rtgner, Worthy of reigning. 

Content de son sort, de vivre, &c. Satisfied with hisiot, with living. 

Beau a voir, bon a manger, Fine to the sight, good for eat- 

ing. 

Apre au gain, avide d'tionneur, Eager after gain, greedy of ho- 
nour. 

Propre a fa guerre, Fit for war. 

Recompense is the government of the adjective digne, 

as it is joined to that adjective by the word de : Vhomme 

is the government of the adjective utile, because it is 

joined to that adjective by the word d, and so of the rest. 

EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF THE ADJECTIVES. 

Virtuous men are always worthy of esteem. A weak 
art. Vertueux 2 1 toujours estime f. faible 2 

mind is liahle to many contradictions. A heart free from 

1 m. sujet bien des — f. pi. caurm. libre de 

cores enjoys the greatest possible felicity. Voltaire was 

soin m. pi. jouit de 1 — 3 = f . 2 — fut 

always greedy of praise, and insatiable of glory. Rousseau, 

avide Iouangef.pl. — = — 

endowed with a strong and fiery imagination, was all hii 

done de fort 2 bouUlani 3 — f. 1 

(life-time) subject to frequent fits of misanthrophy, and 

vie f. enclin d de — acces m. pi. = 

liable to all the variations attendant upon it. 
sujet — f. pi. qui en sont la suite. 

PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE ARTICLE AND 
THE ADJECTIVES. 



THE FAULTS OF INFANCY. 

defaut m. pi. art. enfance. 



The amiable Louisa and her young brother Charles were 
Louise — ind 2 

gentle, humane, and sensible. To the most interesting 
doux sensible spirituel inttvessant 2 art. 

person, Louisa joined all the modesty, the pleasing ingenu- 
figure f. 1 ind-2 = f. keureux ingS- 

ousness and artless graces of her sex ; and Charles, the 
nuiti f. naif 9 art. — f. sexe m. 



240 SYNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE. 

yivacity, the fire, and the manly gracefulness of hit* 

b f. feu m. mdle agrSment m. pi. 

But these advantages, the precious gifts of nature, 

avantage m. pi. * =3 don m. pi. art. — f. 
were obscured by great defects. They were both 

ind-2 un peu obscnrci de dtfaut m. pi. ind-2 Vun ct 

inclined to idleness ; and liable to fits of sullenness 
V autre enclin a.rt.paressei. sujets des acces bouderie f. 
and ill humour when they were contradicted. Faults are 
de* h m. lorsque contredit art. Defaut 

diseases of the soul, the cure (of which) is the work 

des maladies guirison f. 2 dont I ouvrage 

of lime. 
xex. m. 

a good dispositions, it is generally the fruit of the deve- 

Les dmes bien nees elle d 'ordinaire — m. dive- 

lopement of reason, and the desire of pleasing. Though 

loppement m. art. de m. inf-1 Quoique 

their parents were persuaded (of this), they employed, 

— sub-2 2 — deS en 1 employer ind-3 

to hasten it, an expedient, which succeeded. If they 
pour hater 2 la 1 moyen m. leur reussir ind-3 * 2 

were satisfied with them, contentment and joy were 
ind-2 1 content de art. satisfaction f. art. f. 

painted in their countenances; if dissatisfied, they 

pcint sur figure f. pL * en etaient-Us micontent 

did not scold, but they received them with a sorrow- 

* lesgrondcr ind-2 ind-3 tnste 2 

fill air, a dejected countenance, and every sign of 

regard 1 abattu 2 maintienl tons art. sig?ie m. pi. 

chagrin and trouble. Louisa and Charles were natu- 

art. — m. de art. douleur natik- 

rally kind and feeling ; they could not long support 

rellement bon sensible ne pouvaient long-temps ri sister d 

the idea of havkig afflicted such tender parents. They felt 

%d{e iuf-1 afflig£ des si tendre 2 — 1 ind-2 

their error, burst into tears and asked pardon. All was 

fautei.fondrc en larmei.^X. — m. 2 3 

immediately forgotten, and satisfaction again smiled 

aussirtot 1 oublie art. cordentcment m. renaitre ind-2 

around. It was by this means that these amiable 

autour d'eux. Ce fut moyen sing, que 

children soon became models of docility, com- 

bientot 2 devenir 1 des modele m. pi. de 

plaisance and applioation. 
— de — 



BYlfTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 841 

CHAP IV. 

OF THE PRONOUNS. 

M- 

OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Of the Place of Personal Pronouns. — See p. 100. 

There is no difficulty in placing personal pronouns, 
when they act as subjects : the person who speaks al- 
ways names himself last, and the person addressed is 
generally named first. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vous et moi, nous irons d la You and I will go into the 

campagne, country. 
Nous irons ce soir d la promt- Will you take a walk this even- 
node, vous, votrefrire, si moi, H ing, you, your brother, and I. 



Rule. The pronouns il and Us always represent a 
substantive masculine, il, if it be singular ; and ils, if 
it be plural ; and elle and elles, on the contrary, repre- 

1T EXERCISE. 
My sistef and I were walking by the last rays of 

nous *" ind-2 d rayons m. pi. 

the setting sun, and we were saying, what a mild splendour 

couchant 2 1 * disions eclat m. 

does it still spread over all nature ! In the long 

* 2 pas 3 5 we rtpand 1 art. 

winter evenings, my father, my brothers, and I used 

de 2 soirie t. pi. 1 nous pas- 

(to spend) two hours in the library, and to read there, 

set ind-2 bibliotkdque f. nous lisions y 

(in order to) (unbend our minds) from «he serious studies of the 

pour se delasspr =2 1 

day, those amiable poets who interest most the heart, by the 

2 1 leplns 

charms of a lively imagination, and make us love truth, by 
riant 2 1 art. en 

disguising it under the mask of an ingenious fiction 

dcguiser inf-3 trait m. pi. =2 f . 1 

You and your friend shall accompany me to the museum, 

— pagner muste m. 

where we shall study nature in her three kingdoms. 
ob regne m. pi. 

22 



242 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

sent a substantive feminine, elle, if it be singular : elles, 
if plural. 

Thus in speaking of the rose: we should say, elle a 
un parfum exquis, aussi est-elle la fleur la plus recher- 
chie, it has an exquisite fragrance, and is indeed the 
choicest of flowers ; because rose is feminine and singu- 
lar ; and in speaking of several ladies : dies ont autant 
de modestie que de beaute, d* esprit et de grace, they have 
as much modesty as they have beauty, -wit, and accom- 
plishments ; because dames is feminine and plural, f 

With respect to pronouns, when used as a regimen, 
custom has established the following rules : 

Rule I. The pronouns me, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, 
and en, are generally placed before verbs, as are nous, 
wus, and lui, when without a preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 
U me dit he tells me Je lui parle I speak to him 

Je le vols I see him JTy songerai I will think of it 

Je les icoute I listen to them t J'tn suis ram I am delighted at it 

t EXERCISE. 
(Look at) that magnificent building ; it unites grace to 
Regarder — Jique bdtiment m. riunir art. grdce f. 

beauty, and elegance to simplicity. Ignorance is 
art. = f. art. — f. art. = f . — f. 

jealous, presumptuous, and vain : it sees difficulties in 
presompiueux — ne de = f. pi. d 

nothing, (is surprised) at nothing, and stops at nothing. 
rien ne s'itonner de nes'arreter d 

Let us gather these roses ; Heavens ! what a sweet fragrance 

cucillir Ciel! quel * parfum 

they exhale ! Never judge from appearances; they are often 

— lev sur art. f. 

deceitful : the wise man examines them, and does not decide 
* * se decider 

upon them till he has had time to fix his judgment 
d'aprts f. que lorsque art. m. de fixer 

X EXERCISE. 
(As soon as) he had explained to us the maxims of So- 

Dks que expliquer ind-5 * So- 

crates, he said : you see that it is not without reason he 

crate ind-3 ce que on U 



SYXTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 248 

Rule II. The pronouns moi, toi, soi, nous, vous, lui> 
tux, elle, and elles, are placed after verbs, when they 
are preceded by a preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 
Cela depend de moi, That depends on me. 

Jepense d toi, I think of thee. 

On s'occupe trop de soi, We are too attentive to ourselves 

Que dites-vous d'eux ? What do you say of them ? 

Rule III. In imperative phrases, when affirmative, 
moi, toi, nous, vous, lui, leur, eux, elle, elles, le, la, le&> 
y, and en, are placed after verbs ; but, with a negation, 



(is looked upon) as truly wise. He was continually saying to 

regarde un vrai ind-2 * 

me : yet a little patience, and you will disarm even envy 

de disarmer * art. 

itself. You have, no doubt, (some foundation) for reproaching 

etre sans doate fond€ d inf-1 

him with his faults : but is there (any man) on earth thajt 
lui de * art. m. pi. quelqiCun art. qut 

is exempt (from them) ? To please her, you must neve? 
subj-1 en Pour lui * 

flatter her. To abandon awe's self to metaphysical abstrao- 

des mitaphysique 2 — 
tions, is to plunge into an unfathomable abyss. 
1 ce * se jeter sans fond 2 abime m. 1. 

11 EXERCISE. ' 

My father loved me so tenderly, that bethought of none 

ind-2 penser ind-2 d ?j« 

but me, (was wholly taken up) with me, and saw none but m* 

que ne s'occuper ind-2 que de ind-2 

in the universe. If you wish to obtain that favour, you must 

de * 

speak to him himself It depended on you to excel 

ind-2 de de V importer sur 

your rivals, but you would not. Philip, father of 

It vouloir ind-4 Philippe 2 

Alexander, being advised to expel from his dominions 

comme on conseillait dl de chasser etat m. pi. 

a man, who (had been speaking) ill of him ; I shall take care nol 

parlcr ind-6 se garder Men * 

lo do that, said he, he would go and slander me every where. 
* * en ind-3 * midire de 



244 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

me, te, se, nous, vous, lui, leur, le, la, les, y, and en, are 
placed before verbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

AFFIRMATIVELY. NEGATIVELY. 

Dites-mo'i Tell me Ne me ditespas Do not tell me 

Donncz-m'en. Give me half Ne m'en don- Do not give me 

la moitii of it nez point any 

Songez-y se- Think of it se- Ny songezpas Do not think of 

rieusement riously it 

Rem. If the pronouns me, te, moi, toi, intervene be- 
twixt an imperative and an infinitive, me, te, are used 
when the imperative is without a regimen direct. 
EXAMPLES. 

Venez me parler, Come and speak to me. 

Va tefaire cogffer, Go and get thy hair dressed. 

But moi, toi, are used if the imperative have a regi- 
men direct. 

EXAMPLES. 

Laissez-moifaire, Let me do it. 

Fais-toi co&ffer, Get thy hair dressed. 

2. If moi, toi, when placed after the imperative, be fol- 
lowed by the pronoun en, they are changed into me, te. 

EXAMPLES. 

Donnez-m'en, Give me some. Retourne-Ven, Go back. 

3. When there are two imperatives joined together 
by the conjunctions et, on, it is most elegant to place the 
second pronoun before the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 
Polissez-le sans cesse et le repo- Polish and repolish it continu- 

lissez, ally. 

Gdrdez-ies, ou les renvoyez, t Keep them or send them back. 

t EXERCISE. 

Listen to me, do not condemn me, without a hearing. 

tcouter * * m'ccoutcr. 

Complain, thou hast just cause of complaint ; however, do 

stplaindre un sujct plainte 

not complain too bitterly of the injustice of mankind. Give 

amcremcnt art. homme pi. 

some. Do not give any. Think (of it.) Do not think of it. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 246 

Rule IV. When several pronouns accompany a 
verb, me, te, se, nous, vous, must be placed first ; le, la, 
les, before lui, leur ; and y before en, which is always 

the last. 

EXAMPLES. 

Pretez-moi ce livre ; je vous le Lend me that book ; I will re* 
rendrai 1 emain; si vous me turn it to you to-morrow; SF 
le refuscz, je saurai m'en you refuse me, I can make 
passer, shift without it. 

Aurez-vous la force de le leur Will you have resolution 
dire ? enough to mention it to themf 

II ria pas vovlu vous y mener, He would not take you there. 
Je vous y en porterai, I will bring you some there. 

Exception. In an imperative sentence, when afni- 
mative, le, la, les, are always placed first, as, donnez- 
le-moi, give it me, qffrez-la-lui, offer it to him ; con~ 
duisez-les-y, conduct them thither ; and moi is placed 
after y, as menez.y-moi, carry me thither; but nous will 
precede y, as, menez-nous-y, take us thither. ^ 

Repeat to them continually, that, without honesty, one can neve? 
succeed in the world. Do not repeat to them continually th* 
same things. Acknowledge him as your master, and obey 

rcconnaitre pour 

him. Tread upon that spider and kill it. 

lui marcher arraignii. ^eraser 

X EXERCISE. "~ 

You wish to make a present to your sister. (There is*) a 
vouloir * Voild 

beautiful fan ; you should present her with it 

eccjitail m. devoir cond-2 offrir lui * 

(How many) people are there (destitute of) merit and without oo- 
que de gens * * sans 

cupation, (who would be mere nothings) in society, did not 

ne tcnir d rien cond-1 art. si art- 

gaming introduce them (into it.) I shall speak to them 

jcu m. introduire ind-2 y 

(about it), and give you a faithful account of it It 

en je rendre ind-7 exact 2 cmnpte in. 1 

is certain that old Geronte has refused his daughter to Va- 

art. 
lere ; but because he does not give her to him, it does not foV 

s*m- 
low that he will give her to you. 
suivre 

22* 



S46 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

Remark. The word m£me is sometimes added to the 
pronouns moi, toi, sol, nous, vous, eux, lui, elle, elles, to 
specify the person, or thing spoken of. 

EXAMPLES. 
Es se sont perdus eux-memcs, They have ruined themselves. 

Le monde estlme bien des choses The world prizes many things 
qui, en elles-memes, sont fort which, in themsvives, are 
meprisables, worthless. 



§11. 

OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. P. 111. 

The relative pronouns are qui, que, dont, lequel, dec. 
see p. 111. 

Rule I. Qui, when a relative, is always of the num- 
ber, gender, and person of its antecedent, 

EXAMPLES. 
tyoi qui suis sonfils, I who am his son. 

Toi qui es sijeune, Thou who art so young 

V enfant quijoue, The child who plays. 

Nous qui etudions, We who study. 

Vous qui riez, You who laugh. 

Lea livres qui instruisent, • The books which instruct. 

In the first example, qui is singular, and of the first 
person, because the pronoun moi is in the singular, and 
of the first person. In the second, it is singular, and 
of the second person, for a similar reason, &c. IF 

U EXERCISE. 

I icho did not suspect (so much) falsehood, cuiv- 

* soupqonncr ind-2 tant de fausseti f. pr. ruse. 

ning, and perfidy, in a man whom I loved, blindly follow- 
f. pr. = f. ind-2 areugUment je sui- 

vd his counsels. Thou icho art candour and innocence 
vre iud-3 conseil m. art. = f. art. — f. 

itself, trust not too lightly. The great empire of the Egyp- 
rntme te conjie legdrcment — m. — 

tians tchich was, (as it were) detached from all others, was 
lien ind-3 comrne dStacJtt art. 

not of long duration. We who know the value of time 

durie, f. conn ait re priz m. art. 



SYNTAX OF THE PB0N0UN8. 247 

Rule II. Que, when a relative, is of the number and 
gender of its antecedent. 

EXAMPLES. 

Ctst max que Von demande, It is I whom they ask for. 

Cest toi qu'on appelle, It is thou whom they call. 

La fcmme que je zois si lien The woman whom I see so weD 

parte, dresse>L 

C'est nous que vous offensez, It is we whom you offend. 

C\st vous que je cherche, It is you I am seeking. 

Les dames que vous voyez, The ladies whom you see.t 

Dont sometimes represents dequi, duquel, de laqueUe+ 
desquels, desquelles, and even de quoi. 
EXAMPLES. 

Vhomme dont vous parlez est The man of whom you are 
parti, speaking is gone. 

ought to make a good use (of it), instead ®f wasting 

nous devoir ind-1 * emploim. aulieu perdre 

it in idleness and frivolity. What ! is it you, my 

dans art. oisivcte f. art. inutiliti f. Quoi ce 

daughter, who (would wish) that I (should love) you less ? The 

vouloir con-1 que sub-2 

greatest men, who were the ornament and glory of Greece, 
ind-4 orncment art. = f. art. Grece f. 

Homer, Pythagoras, Plato, even Lycurgus and Solon, went 
Homerc — gore Platon, mime — gue — ind-3 

to learn wisdom in Egypt. 

* apprendre art. sagesse f. en Egypt e. 

t EXERCISE. 

/ "horn temptation surrounded on every side 

art. seduction f. enrironnrr ind-2 de tout partf.p]. 
fell into the snare. It is thou whom the public voice 

jr. tombai dans pie gem. Ce 2 f . 1 

calls to that employ. A power which terror and 
appder ykice f. puissanr: f. art. = f. art. 

force have founded, cannot be of long duration. It is we whom 
— f. fond6 f. ne pent duree f. 

they persecute with unexampled rage. You whom 

Von poursuivre avec une sans cxemple 2 fareur f. 1 
every body respects, hasten to (come forward.) (Every 

tout It monJc respecter se hdtcr de paraitre Tout 

thing) in the universe alters and perishes ; but the writings 

dans univers m. s'alttrer ptrir icrit m. pi. 

ichick genius has dictated, shall be immortal, 
art. ginie in. dicl6 m. pi. — tel. 



248 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

La tour dont nous apercevons les The tower whose battlements 

crSneaux doit etre tres-elevie, we perceive must be very high. 

Ce dont je vous ai parte V autre, What I was speaking to you of 

jour rfa pas reussi, the other day did not succeed. 

Observe 1. — That qui, que, and dont, may equally 
apply to persons and things ; but qui, preceded by a 
preposition, can never apply to things ; in this case, 
lequel, duquel, auquel, &c. must be used. 

2. — Lequel, laquelle, &c. apply both to persons and 
things ; but — quoi applies only to things. 

The adverb oil is likewise employed as a relative pro- 
noun, for dans lequel, auquel, dans laquelle, &c. 

EXAMPLES. 
Voild le but oil il tend, That is the object he has in view- 

er sont das affaires, oil je suis Those are affairs with which I 

embarrasse, am perplexed. 

Remark. Ou admits the prepositions de and par. 
EXAMPLES. 

VGUd une chose d'oii depend le That is an affair on which th« 
bonheur public, public happiness depends. 

Tels sont les lieux par ou il a These are the places through 
passS, t which he passed. 

t EXERCISE. 
Persons of ordinary condition have not the same 

art. personne f. pi. commun 2 — f . 1 mhnt 

need of being cautioned against the dangers to ichich 

besoin m. inf-1 precautionnc f. pi. contre 6cueil m. pi. 

elevation and authority expose those who are des- 
art. — f. art. autoritSf. exposer ctux des- 

tined to govern mankind. The protection on which 

tin6 m. pi. gouverner ail. homme pi. — f. sur — 

he relied has been too weak. That after which a true 

compter ind-2 faible. Ce apres vrai 

philosopher sighs most ardently, is to spread that 

— phe m. soupirer art ardemmtnt derfpandre 

sentiment of universal benevolence which should unite and 

— m. — sel 2 bienveillance f. 1 devrait unir 

(bring together) all men. These are conditions without 

rapprocher art. Ce sont des sails 

which the thing would not have been concluded. Nature, 

fait f. art. — f. 
of whose secrets we (are ignorant) will be always a 

1 art. — m. pi. 4 2 ignorer3 



SYNTAX OF THE PBONOUNS. ■ 249 

§111. 
OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. P. 112. 

See p. 112, the pronouns absolute, qui, que, quoi, 
quel, lequel. 

Qui signifies quel homme, what man ; quelle personne, 
what person. 

EXAMPLES. 
Qui rous a dit celd ? Who told you that ? 

J'ignore qui a fait celd, I don't know who did that. 

Que signifies quelle chose, what thing. 
EXAMPLES. 
Que dit-on ? What do they say ? 

Je ne sais qu'enpenser, I don't know what to think of it. 

Quoi has the signification of que. 
EXAMPLES. 
A quoi s'occupe-t-on ? What are they engaged in ? 

Dites-moi en quoi je puis xous Tell me how i can serve you. 

servir, 

Rem:. If que, or quoi be followed by an adjective, 
it requires the proposition de before that adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

Que dit-on denouveau T What news is there ? 

Quoi de plus instructif et de What is more instructive and 
plus amusant ? 1f amusing ? 

source of conjecture to mankind. That of which we 

— f . 3 — f. pi. 4 pour 1 art. homme 2 Ce 

complain most bitterly is not always what affects uc 

seplaindre amtrement ce qui affect er 

the most. The only moments in which his soul still 

seul — m. pi. cncore2 

expands to pleasure, are those which he devotes to 
s'ontrir 1 art. ceux contact er art 

study. The mountains from whence gold (is extracted) 

Hudei. f. pi. ou 1 art. or 3 tire 2 

are not in general fruitful. The* different countries through 

* en — infertile pi. — pays in. pi. par 

which he has passed have furnished his pencil with ro- 

passi fourni d pinctau m. de art. 

niantic and picturesque scenes. 
— tique 2 pittorcsque 3 — 1. 

H EXERCISE. 
Who will not agree that life has few real pleasure* 
convenir art. f. peu de vrai 



250 SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUNS. 

In interrogations, or after a verb, quel is used to ask 
the name, or qualities of a person, or thing. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quel homme est-ce ? What man is it ? 

Quel temps fait-il ? What weather is it ? 

Je ne sais quel homme c'est, I don't know- what man it is. 

J/ salt quel parti prendre, He knows what steps to pursue. 

The adverb ou, it has been already seen, is employed 
as a relative pronoun ; it is likewise used as a kind of 
absolute pronoun. 

Ou represents en quel endroit, in what place, or a 
quoi, to what. 

EXAMPLES. 
Ou allez-vous ? Where are you going ? 

Oil cela nous mknera-t-il ? Where will that take us ? 

JF ignore ou Von me conduit, I don't know where they are 

taking me. 
II n'a pas privu'oil cette c§n- He did not foresee where such 

duite h menerait, conduct would lead him. 

Remark I. When ou is preceded by the preposition 
de, it marks the place, or cause, spoken of. 
EXAMPLES. 

D'ou vient-il f Where does he come from ? 

D'oil sa haine procede-t-elle ? Whenee proceeds his hatred 1 

and many dreadful pains ? (Some one) entered se- 

leaucoup d'affreux 2 peine f. pi. 1 On entra se- 

cretly ; guess who it was. What have you read in that 
cr&tement deviner * * 

book that can have excited in your soul emotion and 

m. qui puisse porti art. — f. 

enthusiasm? I know not what to think (of it.) At tchat 
art. enthousiasme m. savoir * * 

did you find them occupied ? There is in that dis- 

avez trouves occupe m. pi. dis- 

course I know not what which appears to me designing. What 
cours m. savoir sembler * insidieux. 

have you remarked good, beautiful, and sublime in Homer? 

remarqut pr. pr. pr. 

What more brilliant, and, at the same time, more false, than 

pr. hrillant en * mhne pr. 

the expressions of a man, who has (a great deal) of wit, but 

— beaacoup esprit qui 

wants judgment ? 
manque de jugement ? 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 251 

VoUd (Toil U vient, It was there he came from. 

Le mal me vient (VoU fatten- The evil proceeds from that 
dais mon rem&de, quarter whence I had expect- 

ed a remedy. 

Remark II. Ou preceded by the preposition par, sig- 
nifies through what place, or by what means. 

EXAMPLES. 

Par ou avez-vous passi 7 Which way did you come ? 

Par cu me tirerai-je d 'affaire ? Which way shall I extricate 

myself? 
Voildpar oiifaipass6, This is the way I came. 

Je, ne sais par ou je me tirerai I don't know which way I shall 
d 'affaire, extricate myself. 

By the manner In which these pronouns are employed, 
it will be seen they are only interrogative, when at the 
beginning of a sentence, and, consequently, the most 
proper name for them is that of pronouns absolute, f 

t EXERCISE. 

JVhat grace, what delicacy, what harmony, what co- 
grace f. delicatesse f . = f. co- 
louring, what beautiful lines in Racine ! What then 
loris m. -vers m. — 1 done 3 
must have been that extraordinaiy man, to whom seven cities 
doit 2 = 2 — 

contested the glory of having given birth ? He does 
se sont dispute — f. avoir aonni art. jour m. * 

not know what model to follow. I have told you what 

savoir modele m. * suivre 

man it is. lVfiich of those ladies do you think the 

ce f. dames f. * 2 trouvcr 1 

most amiable ? Choose which of those two pictures 

f. Clioisir m. 4 5 6 tableau m. 7 

you like best. Where am I ? He knows not 

1 aimer 2 art. mieux 3 en savoir 

whf-nce lie is. He is gone I don't know where. Where 

en altt ne savoir Be 

does he get that pride ? (It is) from there he derives hia 

lui vient orgueilm. Voila de tirer 

origin. (Which way) did you. come? (That is) (fh* 

originc. Par ites-vous arrive Voild par 

road) I came. 
oil venir ind-4. 



252 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

§IV. 

OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. P. 113. 

Ce, eette, ces, are often joined to the adverbs of place, 
ci, here, and la, there, in order to point out in a more 
precise manner the thing spoken of, the demonstrative 
pronoun is then placed before the substantive, and ci 
and la after it. 

EXAMPLES. 

Ce livre-ci this book Cet homme-ld that man 

Cettefleur-ci this flower Cesfemmes-ld those women 

Celui, celle, ceux, celles, are followed by the preposi- 
tion de, when placed before a substantive, and by a pro- 
noun relative, when placed before a verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

Les maladies de Vdme sont plus The disorders of the mind are 

dangereus-es que dies du more dangerous than those of 

corps j the body. 

Lliomme dont je vous ai parli, The man of whom I spoke to 

est celui que vous voyez, you is he whom you see 

De toutes les choses du monde, Oi all the things in the world, 

e'est celle quefaime le, moins, it is that which I like least. 

Remark. The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, 
when followed by a pronoun relative, are expressed in 
English, by the personal pronouns, he, she, they, or by 
that which, those which, such as, &c. IF 

IF EXERCISE. 

The pleasures of the wise resemble in nothing those of 

ressembler 2 3 1 4 d 
a dissipated man. He that suffers himself to (be ruled) by 

dissip6 2 1 se laisse * domincr 

his passions, must renounce happiness. This stuff 

doit renonctr d art. bonheur m. Stoffe-ci f. 

will become you wonderfully. That action is worthy of 

* siera d mcrvtille — f. -Id 

blame. Tlris scene is calculated to interest all men, 
bldme — f. -ci faite pour inter esser art. 

but that cannot succeed, 
-Id ne saurak riussir. 



SYNTAX OF THE PIICXOUXS. 253 

Celui-ci and celui-ld adopt the gender and number of 
the substantives whose place they supply. When op- 
posed to each other, celui-ci marks the nearest object ; 
and celui-ld the remotest. 

- EXAMPLE. 

Cdui-ci plait, mms celui-ld cap- This pleases, but that capti- 
tive, vates. 

Ci and la coalesce with ce, and form two other de- 
monstrative pronouns, ceci and cela, the first cf which 
signifies cette chose-ci, this object; the second, ceite 
chose-ld, that object. 

They may be used singly ; but when they are op- 
posed to each other, ceci expresses the nearest object, 
and cela the remotest. 

EXAMPLE. 

Je n'aime point ceci, donnez- I don't like this, gwe me 
moi cela, that. 

Remark. When cela is alone and not opposed to the 
pronoun ceci, it refers, like this last, to an object point- 
ed to. 

EXAMPLES. 

Que dkes-vous de cela ? What do you say of that t 

Cela est fort beau, t That is very handsome. 



t EXERCISE. 

(Here are) certainly two charming prospects ; this 

Voild certainerrunl beau perspective f. pi. 

has something more cheerful, but many people 

quelque chose de riant bun de wd.personnt 

think that more striking and more majestic. The body 

(. pi. trouver imposant majestueux m. 

perishes, the soul is immortal ; yet all our cares are for 

yfoir f. — tel cependant soin 

ttuit, while we neglect this. What means this? That 

tandis que nSgliger veut dire 

is true. It is not that. This is low and mean, but that k 
Ce bas rampant 

grand and sublime. 

23 



254 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS- 

§V. 

OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

FIRST CLASS. 

Of those that are never joined to a Substantive. — P. 114. 
QuelqxCun means un, une, one. 
EXAMPLES. 

Nous attendons des Iwmmes, il We expect men, some one win 

en viendra qudqu'un, come. 

Plusieurs femmes m'ont promis Several ladies have promised 

de venir, U en viendra quel- me to come, some one of them 

qu'une, will come. 

Quelqu'un taken absolutely and substantively, is of 
both genders, and means une personne, a person, 

EXAMPLE 
^attends ici quelqu'un, I wait here for somebody. 

Qnelques-uns signifies plusieurs dans un plus grand 
nombre several ouc of a great number. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quelques-uns assurent, Some people affirm 

Entre lea nouvelles qvCil a dibi- Amcmg the reports he has circu 

t6es, il y en a qudques-unes lated, several are true. 

de vraies, 

Quiconque, whoever, signifies quelque personne que ce 
soit, qui que ce soit, any person whatever. It takes no 
plural, and is never used but of persons. 

EXAMPLE. 

Ce discours s'adresse d quicon- This speech is addressed to 
que est coupable, whoever is guilty. 

Chacun, each, every one, is used either distributively, 
or collectively. It has no plural. 

Distributively, it means chaque personne, chaque chose, 
each person, or thing. It is then used likewise in the 
feminine, and requires the preposition de after it. 

EXAMPLES 

Cliacun de nous vit d sa mode, Each of us lives as ne pleases. 
Voyez styarlment chacune de ces Look at each of these medals 
medailles. separately. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 256 

Collectively, it signifies toute personne, every person. 
EXAMPLE. 
Ckacun a ses defauis, t Every body has his faults. 

Autrui, means les autres personnes, other people : it 
only applies to persons, is never accompanied by an 
adjective, has no plural, and is never used in a sentence 
without being preceded by a preposition. 
EXAMPLE. 

La charit6 se rejouit du bonheur Charity rejoices in the happi- 
d'autrui, ness of others. 

Personne, which is always masculine and singular 
means nul, qui que ce soit, nobody, whosoever. In this 
sense, it is preceded or followed by the negative ne 
which is placed after personne, when this word stands 
before the verb ; and before the verb, when personne 
stands after. The same observation applies to rien. 

t EXERCISE ON THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

Can any one (be still ignoraat) that it is from ttce 

Pourrait-il 2 1 ignorer encore ce des 

earliest infancy we ought to form the mind, the heart, and the 
tendre enfance f. on doit * former 
taste ? Will not some one of these ladies be of the party ? Somv 

* f. partie f. 

people like to read (every thing new.) (These are) beautiful 

aimer toutes les nouveautts Voild de superb* 

pictures ; I could wish to buy some. Whoever has stu- 

tableau m. roulbir en * acheter 

died the principles of an art, knows that it (is only) (by length 

— pes — m. savoir ce n'estque d la 

of time) and by deep reflections, that he can succeed m 
longue deprofond r [flexion f. ftus&iar d 

making it his own. All the ladies at the ball were 

se 2 rendre 4 le 3 * propre 5. bal m. ind-2 

very finely dressed, and each differently. 

* superbemcnt pare avail nne parurc different^. 

Every one should, for (the sake of) his own happiness, listen 
devrait pour * propre m. ritcon* 

only to the voice of reason and of truth. What is the 
terqne * voixi. art. rnison f. art. viriti f. 

price of each of these medals ? 
prix m. f. mtdaillc f. 



256 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

EXAMPLES. 

11 ne faut nuire d personne, We must injure nobody. 

Personne n'est assuri de vivre Nobody *s certain of living till 
jusqu'au lendemain, to-morrow. 

Rem. I. The negative is sometimes understood, as, 
y a-t-il quelqu^un ici ? is there are any body here ? per- 
sonne, nobody. Personne stands for il rfy a personne, 
there is nobody here« 

Rem. II. In interrogative phrases without negation, 
or in those expressing doubt, personne signifies quelqu'un, 
any body. 

EXAMPLES. 
Personne oserait-il nier ? Would any body dare deny ? 

Je doute que personnc soit assez I doubt whether any body be 

hardly bold enough. 

Rem. III. When personne is placed in the second 
member of a comparison, it means any tody, 
EXAMPLE. 

Cette place lui convient mieux That place suits him better than 
qu' d personne? any body. 

Rien, nothing, which is masculine and singular, is 
used with, or without a negation. When with a nega- 
tion, it means nulle chose, nothing. 
EXAMPLE. 
n ne s 'attache d rien de solide, He applies himself to nothing 

fixed. 

When used without a negation it means quelque chose 
something. 

EXAMPLE. 
Je doute que ricn soit plus pro- I doubt whether any thing be 
pre d faire impression que, more suited to make an im- 
&c. pression than, &c. 

The negation is sometimes understood, que vous a 
cottle* cela ? rien, how much did you pay for it ? nothing. 

It always requires the preposition de before the ad- 
jective, or participle that follows it, and then the verb is 
understood, as is likewise the negation, as, rien de beau 
que le vrai, nothing is noble but truth. IF 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 257 

SECOND CLASS. 

Of those which are always joined to a Substantive .-P. 116. 
Quelque, some, signifies un, une, enire plusieurs, one 
out of several ; it is of both genders, and takes the 
number of the substantive. 

EXAMPLE. 
Adressez-vous d qudque autre Apply to somebody else. 
personne, 

Chaque, each, every, which is of both genders, has 
no plural. 

EXAMPLE. 

Chaque pays a ses coutumes, Each countiy has its customa. 

Quelconque, aucun, any, quel que ce soit, whatever it 
be ; quel quHl soit, whoever he be, is of both genders, 

IT EXERCISE. 

To most men the misfortunes of others are opt 

Pour la plupart de art. mal m. ne qu% 

a dream. Do not to others what you would not wish (to~be 
* songe m. * vouloir qu y jm 

done to you.) No one knows whether he deserves love or 
xous fit savoir si est digne de 7k 

hatred. An egotist loves nolody, not even his own children-, 

tgoiste pas meme propre 

in the whole universe he sees no one but himself. He is move 
dans * univers ne voit * que lui seul. 

than (any body) worthy of the confidence (with which) the kfarg 

digne confiance f. dont 

honours him. I doubt whether anyone ever painted 

honorer que ait jamais peint art. 

nature in its amiable simplicity, better than the sentimental 
— f. = f . sensible 

Gessner. Has any body called on me this morning? 

— * 2 est-il venu 1 chez matin m. 

Nobody. There was nothing but what was great in the de- 
ind-2 que * de * grand dans dst- 

signs and works of the Egyptians. I doubt 

sein m. pi. art. ouvrage m. pi. — tiens 

whether there is any thing better calculated to exalt fhc 

que subj-1 2 1 plus propre 

soul than the contemplation of the wonders of nature. 
— f merveille f. art. — f. 

23* 



258 SYNTAX OF THE PKONOFffS. 

and always is placed after a substantive ; when used 
with a negative it is always singular. 
EXAMPLE. 

// ne veut se soumettre d aucune He will submit to no authority 
autorite qaclconque, whatever. 

Certain, signifies quelque, certain, some. In this 
sense it is used alike of persons and things ; but it is 
always placed before the substantive. 

EXAMPLE. 
Tai out dire d certain homme, I have heard some man say. 
d un certain homme, 

Un, line, a, or an, when used indeterminately for 
quelque, certain, some person, or some thing, takes the 
gender of the substantive to which it is joined. 

EXAMPLES. 
Tai vu un homme quicourait, I saw a man who was running. 

Je me suis protnenS dans una I walked in a large fine mea- 
grande et belle prairie, t dow. 

X EXERCISE ON THE SECOND CLASS. 

Some enlightened people among the Egyptians pre- 

6claire2 esprit m. pi. 1 parmi — tiens con- 

served the idea of a first being, whose attributes 

server in d-2 idie etre art. — butm.pl. 3 

they represented under various symbols ; this (is 

1 ' reprcsenter ind-2 2 different symbole m. c' est ce que 

proved) by the following inscription upon a temple, " I am 

prouve * * cette * — f. de — m. 

all that has been, is, and shall be : no mortal ever removed 
ce qui 3 mortel 2 1 lever ind-4 

the veil that covers me." Every nation has (in its turn) 
voile m. i. d son tour 2 

shone on the theatre of the world. There is no reason whatever 
brille 1 m. raison f. 

that can bring hrm to it. Some figures eppear monstrous 

puisse determiner — f. — trutuz 

and deformed, considered separately, or too near; but, if they 

difforme f. pi. s6parement de prts on 

are put in their proper light and place, the true point of 

les met * jour d leur — — m. 

view restores their beauty and grace. Yesterday 1 

vue f. leur rendre * art. = f. art. — f. 2 

saw a lady remarkably beautiful. 

1 d'une rare 2 beautt 1. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 259 

THIRD CLASS. 

Of those which are sometimes joined to a Substantive , and 
sometimes not. — Page 117. 

Nul, and pas un, not any, not one, are employed ei- 
ther alone, or in conjunction with a substantive. They 
are accompanied by the negation, assume the feminine, 
but have no plural, and may be followed by the preposi- 
tion de. 

EXAMPLES. 

Xul de t§us ceux qui y ont iti Not one of those who went 

w'era est revenu, there has returned. 

Pas un ne croit cette nouvelle, Not one believes that intelli- 
gence. 

Je iven ai nulle connaissance, I have no knowledge of it. 

// riy a pas une seule personne There is not a single person that 

qui le croie, believes it. 

Aucun signifies nul, no, not any, when accompanied 
by a negation, and may be followed by the preposition de. 
EXAMPLE. 

I'uus riavez aucun moyen de You have no means of succeed- 
riusirdans cette affaire, ing in that affair. 

This pronoun is seldom employed in the plural^ ex- 
cept before substantives, which, in some particular sense, 
are better employed in the plural. 
EXAMPLE. 
II ri a fait aucunes dispositions, He has made no dispositions. 

Rem. Aucun may be employed without a negation in 
liiterro^-ative sentences, or those which express doubt, 
or exclusion. 

EXAMPLES. 
Aucun hom'me fut-il jamais plus Was ever aoy man more suc- 

hcureux ? cestui ? 

On noute qu'aucane de ces affaires They doubt whether any of 

rtussisse, tiiose affairs will succeed. 

Leplusbtuumorceau d' eloquence The finest piece of eloquence 

fju'ily ait dans aucuneiangue, that exists in any language, 

Autre, other, ex; a difTerence between two 



260 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

objects, or between one and several ; as, quelle autre 
chose souhaitez-vous de moi ? what else do you wish of 
me ? 

Rem. Autre is sometimes used to express a person 
but indeterminate ; a.s,j'aime mieux que vous Vappreniez 
de tout autre que de moi, I had rather you learn it of any 
other person than me. 

Un is sometimes opposed to autre ; in which case, 
these two words are preceded by the article, supply the 
place of the substantives to which they relate, adopt 
their gender and number, and form the pronouns Vun 
V autre, Vun et V autre, and ni Vun ni V autre. 

Uun Vautre, each other, one another, applies both 
to persons and things : it takes both gender and num- 
ber, and requires the article before the two words of 
which it is composed. If there be any preposition, it 
must be placed before the last. When these two words 
are used in conjunction, they express a reciprocal rela- 
tion betw r een several persons or things. 

EXAMPLE. 

llfaut se secourir Vun Vautre, We ought to assist each other. 

U EXERCISE ON THE THIRD CLASS. 

No one likes (to see himself) as he is. No expression, no 
se voir tel que — f. 

truth of design and colouring, no strokes of genius in that 

f. dessein de colons trait 

great work. He is as learned as anyone. Not one of these 

ouvrage ra. savant 

engravings announces any^reat skill. None of his works 

gravure f. pi. annoncer un talent m. 

will descend to posterity. He is so ignorant, and at the same 
passer art. = f . — en * mime 

time so obstinate, that he will not (be convinced) by any reason- 
temps obstine * se rendre d raison- 
ing. Did any man ever attain to such a pitch ©f 
nement m. jamais 2 parvenir 1 ce * comblem. 
glory ! I doubt whether there be in any science a more evi- 
= que subj-1 — f. plus In- 
dent principle. 
mintux 2 — ptm.X. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 261 

When used separately, they denote a difference. 
EXAMPLE 

Las passions s'entendent lesunes Our passions have a relation 
avec les autres ; siVonselaisse with each other: if we in- 
aller aitz unes, on attire bien- dulge some, the others will 
tot les autres, soon follow. 

Rem. In the latter case/'tm is used for the person, or 
thing first mentioned, and V autre, for the person or thing 
last spoken of. 

L 'un et V autre, both ; these two words mark union. 
They require the verb to be Jn the plural. 

EXAMPLE. 
Vune et V autre sont bonnes, Both are good. 

Ni Vun ni V autre, neither ; these two words on the 
contrary mark separation. The verb must be in the 
plural. 

EXAMPLE. 
Ni Vun ni V autre n'on fait Itur Neither has done his doty. 

devoir, t 

t EXERCISE. 

Ask another. Would any other have been so 

D&mander d * aurait-il eu * assez 

self-conceited as to think that his private opinion could 
d amour-propre * pour penser particulicr2 — f . 1 put 

counterbalance the public sentiment? Reason and faith 

balancer 2 opinion ? f. 1 art. Raisonf. nii.foif. 

equally demonstrate thaj we were created for another life. 

2 dhnontrer 1 cr6eriud-i f. 

They speak ill of one another. The happiness of the people 

mat m. 

constitutes that of the prince ; their true interests are connected 
faire — m. intirct in. lie 

with each other. Presumption and pride easily insinuate 
d pi. pi. art. Prisomption f. art. orgueil 2 se g/issa 
themselves into the heart ; if we allow one the entrance, 

1 m. Von y donne d2 f. 3 * entrie 1 

it is much to (be feared) that we shall soon (abandon our- 

bicn craindre on * bicntut 2 ne sc litre 1 

telves) to the other. Both relate the same story, though 

rapporter fait m. 

neither believes it to be true. 

nepenser que * soit 



262 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

M&me signifies qui n'est pas autre, which is not diffe- 
rent. It is of both genders, and takes the plural. 
EXAMPLES. 

C'cst le mime homme, It is the same man. 

La mime personne, The same person. 

Ce sont les mimes raisons, They are the same reasons. 

Ce podme est le mime que celui This poem is the same that 1 
dontje vous aiparli, was mentioning to you. 

Tel means pareil, semblable, de m£me, such, like, si- 
milar. It takes both gender-s and both numbers. 

EXAMPLES. 
Un tel projet tie saurait reussir, Such a scheme cannot succeed. 
R n'y a pas de tels animaux, de There are no such animals, no 

telles coutumes, such customs. 

When used alone, it either preserves its proper sig- 
nification, or it expresses a person indeterminately. 

EXAMPLES. 
Vous ne sauriez me persuader You cannot persuade me of any 

rien de tel, such thing. 

Tel fait des libiralitis, qui ne The same man is liberal in giv- 

paye pas ses dettes, ing,who does not pay his debts. 

Plusieurs, several, which is plural and of both gen- 
ders, is used alike of persons and of things. When 
united to a substantive, or relating to it, it signifies an 
indeterminate number, without relation to another. 

EXAMPLES. 

Plusieurs motifs Vont ditermini, Several reasons determinedhim. 
Je crois cela pour plusieurs rai- I believe that for several rea- 
sons, sons. 

But it is likewise used as a part of a greater number. 

EXAMPLE. 

Parmi un si grand nombre de Out of so great a number of 
gens, U y en eut plusieurs qui persons, several objected to 
s'y opposdrent, it. 

When plusieurs is employed absolutely as a substan- 
tive, it always means plusieurs persounes, several per- 
sons. 

EXAMPLE. 

Plusieurs aimcnt micux mourir Many would rather die than 
que de perdre leurriputation, forfeit their character. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 263 

Tout is used either alone, or with a substantive. 
When employed alone, it signifies tout choses, all 
things ; toute sorte de choses, every kind of things ; 
EXAMPLE. 

Tout nous abandonne au moment Every thing forsakes us at the 
de la mort; il ne nous reste moment of death ; we retain 
que nos bonnes aeuvres, nothing but our good works. 

When united to a substantive, it is used either collec- 
tively, or distributively. 

Considered collectively, tout signifies the totality of 
a thing, and is then followed by the article. 

EXAMPLES. 

Tout Vunivers, The whole universe. 

Tous les corps ciltstes. All the celestial bodies. 

Considered distributively, tout signifies chaque, each ; 
in this case, it is not accompanied by the article. 

EXAMPLE. 
Tout bien est disirable, t Every good is desirable. 

t EXERCISE. 

Does he always maintain the same principles ? Yes, they are 
* soutenir —pe Oui ce 

absolutely the same. That general is the same that commanded 
— meat pi. — — der 

last year. Such a conduct is inexplicable. There 

art. dernier 2 annie f . 1 2 1 comduite f. — 

are no such customs in this country. I never heard 

de coutumes f. pays m. - ai entendu dire 

(anything) similar. The same man sows who often reaps 

rien de * semtr recueillir 

nothing. I this morning received several letters. Among those 

1 3 matin 4 ind-4 2 lettre f, pi. 

manuscripts, there are several much esteemed. Many 

— crits qu'on beaucoup 2 estime 1 

by endeavouring to injure others, injure themselves more 

en s'efforcer de nuire d art. se nuirea 

than they think. All is in God and God is in all. The whole 

nepenser en 

course of his life has been distinguished by generous actions. 
cours m. f. marqu6 des = 2 f I. 

Every vice is odious. 
— m. =» 



264 SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUNS. 
FOURTH CLASS. 

Of those which are followed by que. — P. 118. 

Qui, que, whoever, is only said of persons, and sig* 
nines quelque personne que, whatever person ; it requires 
the verb following to be in the subjunctive. 
EXAMPLES. 

Qui que ce soit qui ait fait cela, Whoever has done that, is a 

c'est un habile homme, man of talent. 

Qui queje sois, Whoever I may be. 

Qui que g } ait et6, Whoever it may have been. 

Qui que e'eut ete, Whoever it might have been. 

Qui que ce puisse itre, Whoever it may be. 

When qui que, followed by ce soit, is used with a ne- 
gative, it signifies aucune personne, nobody; as, je ri*y 
trouve qui que ce soit, I find nobody there. 

Quoi que, whatever it be, is only used of things, and 
signifies quelque chose que, whatever thing ; it requires 
also the verb following to be in the subjunctive 

EXAMPLES. 

Quoi que ce soit qu'U fasse, ou Whatever he doej or says, he 

qu'il dise, on se defie de lui, is distrusted. 

Quoi que vous disiez, je le Whatever you may say, I will 

ferai, do it. 

Rem. When quoi que, followed by ce soit, is used 
with a negation, it signifies aucune chose, not any thing. 

EXAMPLE. 
Sans application, on ne pent re- Without application it is in> 
ussir en quoi que ce soit, t possible to succeed in any 

thing whatever. 

t EXERCISE ON THE FOURTH CLASS. 

Whoever has told you so, he is mistaken. Pas- 

ce soit qui le se t romper ind-4 Pas- 

senger, whoever thou be, contemplate with religious veneration 
snnt contcmplr un =2 respect m. 1 

this monument erected by gratitude ; it is the tomb 

— m. ehevi art. re.connnissancei.ee toinbeaum. 

of a just and benevolent man. How can he hope to be 
2 bienfaisant 3 1 Comment esperer de 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 2G5 

Quel que signifies de quelque sorte, de quelque espice 
que ce soil, of whatever sort, or kind it may be, when 
relating to things ; or, qui que ce soit, whoever it may 
be, when relating to persons. It takes both gender and 
number according to the person, or thing it relates to, 
and requires the subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quelles que ^oient vos affaires, Whatever business you may 

vcnez, have, come. 

Je ri'en excepte personne, quel I except nobody, whoever he 

q\Cil soit, may be. 

Rem. Lequel que, whosoever, whichever, is also 
used ; as, lequel des trois que vous choisissiez, peu 
mHmporte, whichever of the three you choose, I care 
little. 

Quelque— que, of both genders, when united to a 
substantive, signifies quel que soit le, quelle que soit la, 
&c. whatever be the, &c. It has both numbers, and re- 
quires the subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quelque raison qxCon lux apporte, Whatever reason is adduced, 
il n'en croit rien, he believes nothing about it. 

Quelques efforts que vous fas- Whatever attempts you may 
siez, vous ne riussirez point, make, you will never succeed. 

When united to an adjective, it operates as an ad- 
verb, and signifies a quelque point que, however great 
a degree ; it then neither takes gender, nor number. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quelque belle qu J ellepuisse ttre, However beautiful she may be, 

elle ne doit pas ttre zaine, she ought not to be vain 

beloved who has regard for no one ? Wiatever he may do 

lid ne d'igards 
or say, he (will find it) very difficult to destroy pre- 

qu'il aura bicn de la peine dttruire des prt~ 

juaices so deeply rooted. A mind vain, .presumptuous, 

jug6 m. si profondiment enracine — presomptueux, 

and inconsistent, will never succeed in any thing whatever, 

sans consistance * riussir 

JVhatever a frivolous world may think of you, never swerve 

frivole 2 monde 1 puisse s§ ditoisnur 

from the path of virtue. 

chemin m art. f. 

24 



266 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

Quelque puissans qu'ils soicnt, However powerful they may 
je ne les crains point, be, I am not afraid of them. 

Tel que, such as, serves to mark a parity between 
objects by comparison. 

EXAMPLE. 

Cest un homme tel qu it vous He is just such a man as you 
Icfant. want. 

Tout — que signifies quoique, encore que> though, 
quelque, however. On this occasion, tout is considered 
as an adverb, and is employed with adjectives of every 
kind, and even with some substantives. 

EXAMPLES. 

Tout artificieux qu'ils sont, je Artful as they are, I doubt 

doute que le public soit long- whether the public will be 

temps leur dupe, l° n g their dupe. 

Toutefemme qu'clh est,\ Woman as she is. 

t EXEHCISE. 
Let the laws be (what they may), we must always 

Que 2 loi f. 4 subj-1 3 quel 1 il 

respect them. Whatever efforts you make ; I doubt whether 
respecter — m. subj-1 que 

you will succeed. All men, however opposite they may 

* riussir subj-1 art. opposS 

be, agree on that point. The »an who descends into 

subj-1 s'accorder — m. ne rentrer en 

himself only to discover his defects, and correct them, likes 

que pour y dimBler — m. se corriger en 

to see himself as he is. However surprising that phenomenon 

surprenant 2 phenom&nem. 3 
may be, it \g not against the order of nature. Children as 

1 contre ordre m. art. 

they are, they behaved remarkably well. 

se sont conduits fort hien. 

A GENERAL EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUNS. 

The Evening Walk, 

du 2 soir 3 promenade/. 1. 

On a fine summer evening, my brother, my sister, ana 

Dans de 2 soiree 1. 1 

myself. (were walking) (by the side) of a wood 

moi nous nous promenions le long bois m. qui n'est 



EXERCISE OF THE PRONOT7NS. 267 

not far distant fr«m the castle which we inhabit. We 

pas Men eloign^ chdteau m. habiter 

(were contemplating) with rapture the majestic scenery 

contempler ind-2 transport — tueux 2 scene f. 1. 

which nature exhibits at the approach of night, when we 

art deployer approclte f. art. nuit f. quand 

perceived at the foot of an ancient oak. a boy of a most 

apercevoir ind-2 d pied pi. vieux chenem. enfant art. 2. 
interesting countenance. His beauty, his air ofingenu- 

intiressant 3 art. figure f. 1 = f . — m. ingenu- 

ousness and candour, his gracefulness struck us, and we 
it6 de = grace pi. frapper ind-3 nous 

approached him. What ! alone here, my boy * said we ; 

approcher ind-3 en seid ici enfant lux dimes 

whence art thou ? Whence comest thou ? What art thou 
D % oi\ * 2 

doing here alone 1 I am not alone, answered he smiling, 

fais 14 3 repondre ind-3 d'un air riant 

I am not alone ; but I was fatigued, and I (have seated myself) 

ind-2 fatigue' s'asseovr ind-4 

under the shade of this tree, while my mother is busy 

d ombre f. arbre m. tandis que occupi 

in gathering simples to give some relief to the 

d cueillir des — pour apporter aoulagement m. 

pains which her aged father suffers. Ah ! (how many) 

douleur f. pi. 2 vieux 3 4 souffrir 1 que 

troubles my good mamma has ! How many troubles ! 
de peine f. pi. 2 8 maman 4 1 si 

Did you knew them, there is not one of you that would not 
* connaitre ind-2 qui * 

be touched with pity, and who could refuse the tribute 
subj-2 de pitie * l u i subj-2 un tribut 

of your tears. We said to him, lovely child, thy ingenu- 

* larme f. pi. ind-3 * aimable 

ousness, candour, innocence, (every thing), interests us 

pro. = f. pro. — f. intlresser 

in thy misfortunes and those of thy mother. Relate them to 
d mallieur m. pi. d Raconter 2 * 

us ; whatever they be, ( fear not to afflict us. (Woe be) to 

1 subj-1 de affliger malheur 
whoever cannot feel for the misfortunes of others! 

nesaitpas s'attendrir sur moZm.pl. 

He immediately related the history of his mother, with an ex- 

2 aussitot 1 ind-3 = 

pression, an artlessness, a grace, altogether affecting. Our 
— f. naivete f = f . tout-d-fait touchant f. s. 



268 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

CHAP. V. 

OF THE VERB. 

Agreement of tJie Verb with the Subject. 

The subject is that of which something is affirmed, 
and may always be known by the answer to this ques- 
tion, qui esUce qui ? who, or what is it ? as, Pierre 
vit, Peter lives ; Voiseau vole, the bird flies ; if it be 
asked, qui est-ce qui vit ? who is it that lives ? qui 
est-ce qui vole ? what is it that flies ? The answers 
Pierre and Voiseau, shew that Pierre and Voiseau are 
the subjects of the verbs vit and vole. 

Rule. The verb must be of the same number and 
person as its subject. 



hearts felt the liveliest emotions ; tears (trickled down 

Sprouver ind-3 vif — f. nos coultr 

our cheeks) and we gave him what little money we 
ind-3 lui * art. pen de argent que 

had about us. (In the mean lime) the mother returned. 
ind-2 sur cependant revenir ind-3 

(As soon as) he saw her, he exclaimed, (make haste,) 

Dts-que apercevoir s'tcrier accourir. s. 

mamma, make haste ; see what these good little folks have 

s. ce que gens f. pi. 

given me ; I have related to them thy misfortunes ; they have 

m. 
been affected (by them), and their sensibility (has not been 
iowcAem.pl. en = f . nes'estpas 

satisfied) with shedding tears. See mamma, see what they 

born6 d * des s. 

have given me. The mother was moved ; she thanked us, 

ind-3 attendri f. remcrckr 
and said : generous feeling souls, the good action 

nous = 2 et sensible 3 dme f. pi. 1 — f. 

which you (have just been doing) will not be lost. He who 

vencz defaire perdu f. 

sees (every thing) and judges (every thiug) will not let it go 
juger laisser * 

unrewarded. 
sans recompense. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 289 

EXAMPLES. 
Je lis, / laugh. Nous parlons, We speak. 

Tujoues, Thouplayest. Vous plaisantez, You jest, 

II aime, He loves. lis sontfous, They are mad. 

La vertu est aimable, virtue is amiable. 

Ris is in the singular number, and the first person, 
because je, its subject, is in the singular, and the first 
person. Joues is in the singular, and the second per- 
son, as tu is in the singular, and the second person, &C.TT 

Rem. I. When a verb has two subjects both singular, 
it is put in the plural. 

EXAMPLE. 

Mon ptre et ma mhre treatment My father and mother love me 
tendrement,i tenderly. 



Rem. II. When a verb relates to subjects of differ- 
ent persons, it agrees with the first, in preference to 
the other two, and with the second in preference to the 

H EXERCISE ON THE VERB. 
The most free of all men is he who can be free even In 
libre art. celui mem* 

slavery. Are we not often blind to our defects ? 

art. esclavage m. * s'aveugler ind-1 sur dSfaid 

All men (are inclined) to idleness, but the savages of 

art. tendre ind-1 art. sauvage .art 

hot countries are the laziest of all men. Do you think of 
chaud 2pays 1 * 

imposing long on the credulity of the public ? Thou 

en imposer long-temps d = f . m. 

canst not deny that he is a great man. 
pouvoir fixer ne sub-1. 

t EXERCISE. 

His uprightness and honesty, make him courted Tnr 

droiture f. pron. honnetetefaire reckercher <k 

every body. Strength of body and of mind 

art. f. art. celle art. s* 

meet not always together. A good heart and a noble soul 

rencontrer ensemble. m. beau T 

are precious gifts of nature. 

dt art. = 2 don m. pi. 1 art. — f. 

24* 



2<70 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

third, The person addressed is named first, and the 
person addressing last. On this occasion, the pronoun 
plural nous, is generally placed before the verb, if the 
first person has been mentioned before, or the pronoun 
plural vous, if no first person has been mentioned. 

EXAMPLES. 
Vous, voire frere, et moi, nous You, your brother, and I, read 

lisons ensemble la brochure together the new pham- 

nouvelle, phlet. 

Vous et votre ami, vous viendrez You^and your friend will come 

avec moi,X » with me. 



Rem. III. When a verb has the relative pronoun 
qui for its subject, it is put in the same number and 
person as the noun, or pronoun, to which qui relates. 

EXAMPLES. 

Est-ce moi qui ai dit cette nou- Is ft I who told this news t 

velle ? 
Est-ce nous qui Vavons voulu ? Is it we who desired it ? 
Ceux qui aiment sincerement la Those who sincerely love virtue 

vertu sont heureux,^ are happy. 

X EXERCISE. 
You, your friend, and I, have each a different opinion. In 
chacun 2 f. 1 

our childhood, you and I (were pleased) with playing together 

enfance f. se plaire ind-2 d inf-1 

Neither I, nor (any one else) has been able to understand 

ni ni oVauires ne pouvoir ind-4 * comprendre 2 
(any thing) in that sentence. (Take good care) you and your bra 

Hen 1 d phrase f. se garder Men 

ther, not to (give way) to the impetuosity of your character. 
* de s'abandonner = caracterem. 

IF EXERCISE. 
He that complains most of mankind, is not always he 
Celui se plaindrc le plus art. hommc pi. 
that (has most reason) to complain (of them.) You that wish 

etre leplusfend6 en voulorr 

to enrich your mind with thoughts vigorously conceived and 
* enrichir csjirit de f. pi. fortement concu f. pi. 

nobly expressed, read the works of Homer and Plato. 

noblement exprimc ouvragc. 

N. B. See the exercises. (Page 246.) 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 271 

OF THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 

A verb is active, when it will admit after it quelqu'un, 
or quelque chose ; and, the word, which is put after the 
verb, is called the regimen of that verb. Observe that 
this regimen may be known by asking the question, 
qu'est-ce que ? It is called direct, and may be either a 
noun, or a pronoun. 

Rule. When the regimen of the active verb is a 
noun, it is always placed after the verb ; when it is a 
pronoun, it is generally placed before it. 

EXAMPLE. 

Ma mbre aime tous ses enfans, My mother loves all her children. 

Je vous aime, and not as in English, Jaime vous, I love you, 
U m'aime, and not 11 aime moi, he loves me.t 

Besides this regimen direct, some active verbs may 
have a second, which is called indirect, and is marked 
by the words d or de. 

EXAMPLES. 

£1 a fait un prisent d sa sarnr, He has made a present to his 

sister. 

t EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 

He has discovered to all other nations his ambitious 

montrer art. * peupte m. pi. = 2 

design of enslaving them, and has left us 

dessein m. 1 mettrc dans Vesclavage inf-1 ne taisser 

no means of defending our liberty, but by endeavouring to 
aucun moyen inf-1 que en tdcher inf-3 de 

overturn his new kingdom. Homer represents Nestor as him 
renvcrser royaume m. c<lui 

that restrained the ungovernable wrath of Achilles, the 

mode'rer ind-2 bouiUant courroux m. 

pride of Agamemnon, the haughtiness of Ajax, and the impetuous 

fitrti f. =2 

courage of Diomed. He dared not (lift up) his eyes, lest 
— m. 1 Diomede. oscr ind-2 m lever * art. de 

they should meet those of his friend, whose 

yeur de * * rencontrer hif-1 

very silence condemned him. He caresses them, because 
art. mime 2 m. 1 ind-2 
he lov-es them. 



272 SYNTAX OF THE VEEB. 

U accuse son amid 1 imprudence^ He accuses his friend of im- 
prudence. 



The second regimen is known by the answer to these 
questions ; a qui ? to whom ? a quoi ? to what ? de qui ? 
of whom? de quoi ? of what ? 

EXAMPLES. 

A qui a-t'ilfait un present ? To whom did he make a present? 
A sa saiur, To his sister. 

Be quoi accuse-t-il son ami ? Of what does he accuse his friend ? 
D 1 imprudence. Of imprudence 

Passive verbs require de, or par, before the noun, or 
pronoun that follows them. 

EXAMPLES. 

La souris est mangie par le chat, The mouse is eaten by the cat. 
Un enfant sage est aimi de tout A good child is loved by evecy 
le monde, body. 

Rem. The French never use the word par, before 
Dieu, God ; they say, les medians serontpunis de Dieu, 

t EXERCISE. 

In submitting to the yoke of Asia, Greece would have 

En subir inf-3 * joug m. art. art. 

thought virtue subjected to voluptuousness, the mind 
croire art. 2 assujetiir iuf-11 art. volupt6 f. 
to the body, and courage to a senseless force, which consisted 

art. insensi 2 — f . 1 ind-2 

only in numbers. Three hundred Lacedemonians, hast- 
ne que art. multitude f. s. — niens, courir 

entd to Thermopylae to certain death, content in dying, to 
ind-3 art. — piles pi. un assurS 2 f . 1 en de 

have sacrificed to their country, an infinite number of barbarians, 

immoler pays in. 2 1 barbarc 

and to have left to their countiymen the example of an unheard 

de laisser compatriotc inoul 2 

of bravery. You knew the importance which your parents 
* hardiesse f. 1 savoir ind-2 — f. que — 

attached to the success of that affair : why have you not 

ind-2 riussite f. f. pourquoi 

hastened to announce it (to them ?) 

s' empress er ind-4 de f. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 273 

which, in ordor to avoid making use of by, may be thus 
Englished ; God will punish the wicked. IT 

Some few neuter verbs have no regimen ; as, dor- 
mir, to sleep ; but many of them have a government. 

Rule. Some neuter verbs require d, others de, be- 
fore their regimen. 

EXAMPLES. 
Tout genre d/excts nuit d la Every kind of excess is hurtful 

saute, to health. 

11 medit de tout It ?nondeA He slanders every body 

IT exercise" 

The city of Troy was taken, plundered, and destroyed by the 
Troie pris f. saccage detruit 

confederate Greeks, 1148 years before the Christian sera : this 
covfcderS 2 1 avant 2 ere f. 1 

event has been celebrated by the two greatest poets of Greece 

art. 
and Italy. You will only be beloved, esteemed, and 

pr. art. 
courted by men, (in proportion as) you join the 

rechercher de que atttant que jobidre ind-7 

qualities of the heart to those of the mind. God pu- 

= f. pi. pr. 3 pu- 

nished the Jews every time when, 

nir (passive voice ind-3 2) peuple Juif 1 toute's les fois que 

deaf to the voice of the prophets, they fell into 

sourd f. prophete sing, tomber ind-3 dans 

idolatry and impiety, 
art. = art. = 



t EXERCISE. 

This sentiment has pleased the king and all the nation 
d d 

In his retirement, he (has the full enjoyment) of the 
dans retraitei. jouir tout 

faculties of his soul. To slander (any one) is to assassinate 
= f. p). " medirede quelq wun c' est * 

him in cold blood. The honest man seldom (permits himself) 
de 2 sang 1 rarement 2 sc permettre 1 

to jest, because he knows the most 

de * art. plais ant trie f. pi. parcc que savoirqvc 

innocent jests may sometimes hurt the reputation. It is 

f. pi. * pouvoir qutlquefois nuire d f. ce 

only in retirement that one truly enjoys one's sett. 

ne que art. oji v entablement 2 jouir 1 dc siri. 



2T4 8YNTAX OF THE VEEB. 

Reflected verbs have for their regimen the personal 
pronouns me, te, se, nous, and vous, and this regimen is 
sometimes direct, asid sometimes indirect. 



OF THE NATURE AND USE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 

Of the Indicative. 

The indicative is that mood which simply declares 
and affirms a thing. It contains eight tenses, viz. the 
present, the imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit in- 
definite, the preterit anterior, the pluperfect, the future 
simple, and the future anterior. 

The present marks that a thing is now passing, that is, 
either existing, or doing. 

EXAMPLES. 
Jaime Hove Rsjouent They play 

The imperfect expresses a present with respect to 
something past. 

EXAMPLE. 
Tentrais au moment oik vous I came in at the moment you 

sortiez, were going out. 

Or it expresses something past, but habitual, without 
fixing the time of its duration. 

EXAMPLE. 
Cesar itait un habile giniral, Caesar was an able general. 

The preterit definite marks that a thing took place at 
a time completely past. 

EXAMPLE. 
J'icrivis hicr d Rome, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 

The preterit definite expresses a thing as having 
taken place at a time which is neither precise, nor de- 
terminate. 

His work has pleased every one, because it unites 

ouvrage m. d art. monde joindre 

to real utility the charms of style, and the beau- 

un 2 = f . 1 agriment m. pi. art m. sing, 

lies of sentiment, 
art. pi. 



SYNTAX OF THE VEEB. 275 

EXAMPLE. 

II m'a fait un vrai plaisir en He has given me real pleasure 
venant me voir, by coming to see me 

Or at a time which is not absolutely past. 

EXAMPLE. 

Tai vu cette semaine beaucoup de I have seen many people this 
monde,$ . week. 



t EXERCISE ON THE INDICATIVE. 

My sister is in her chamber, where she (is occapied) in reading 
ou s'occuper d inf-l 

ancient history, the study (of which) pleases her extremely, 
art. 2 1 2 dont 1 lui infiniment 

Benefits bestowed are (so many) trophies 

art. Bienfait que onrepandre ind-1 de zYt.trophie que on 

erected in the heart of those whose felicity (has been 

s'eriger ind-1 1 art. =* f. 4 on 2 /aire 

promoted) (by them.) The great Corneille was buoy in his 
ind-1 3 * — occupi 

study tracing the plan of one of his tragedies, wlien a ser- 
cabinet d inf-l — m. = do 

vant, terrified, came to tell him that his house was 

inestique m. tout effrayS ind-3 * lui * art. 3 prendre 

on fire : go and find my wife, replied he : I do 
d ind-6 2 * art. 1 * trouver repondre ind-3 

not understand household concerns. Some Hunga- 

entendre rien d art. affaire pi. du manage m. de art. Hon- 
rian noblemen revolted from the Emperor Sigismund ; 

grovj 2 seigneur 1 se rivolter ind-3 contre = — mond. 

this prince heard it, and marched boldly against 

apprendre ind-3 jidrementau-devantde 

them : which, among you, said be (to them), will lay hands 
(Ventre ind-3 mettre 1 art. f. 

upon his king first ? If there be one bold enouoii 
sing. 3 4 art. 2 en un Jiardi 2 1 

let him advance. This noble firmness struck the rebels 

en imposer d s6ditieux 

(with awe), who returned immediately to their duty. 1 have 

* rentrer aussi-tot dans h devoir 

travelled through almost all Europe, and I have visited the 
voyager dans art. — f. 

most celebrated places in Asia and Africa ; if, on the one 

— brt 2 lieu 1 de art. Asie pr. art. Afrique de * 
hand, I admired the master-pieces of art, of every kind, which 
cot6 m. ind-4 chefs-d'eeuvre art. en tout genre 



276 SYNTAX OP THE VEBB. 

The preterit anterior expresses that a thing had taken 
place immediately before a time which is passed, and 
this tense is either definite, or indefinite. There is the 
same difference between its two forms, as between the 
two preterits, definite and indefinite. 

EXAMPLES. 

feus dint hier d midi, I had dined yesterday at twelve. 

Qtiand feus dine hier, midi When I had dined yesterday, it 

sonna, struck twelve. 

Tai eu dejeuni ce matin d dix I had done breakfast this morn- 

heures, * ing at ten o'clock. 

The pluperfect is that past tense which expresses a 
thing as having taken place at any period antecedent to 
the time when another thing happened ; or it expresses 
a thing habitually done before another. 

EXAMPLES. 

Tavais soupe quand il ontra, I had supped when ke came in. 

Lorsque fttais d la campagne, When I was in the country, as 
dds quefavaisd&jeuni, fallais soon as I had breakfasted, I 
d la chasse, used to go a hunting. 

The future absolute, is that tense which expresses that 
an action or event will take place at a time which does 
not yet exist. 

EXAMPLE. 
J'irai demain d la campagne, I shall go to-morrow into the 

country. 

The future anterior is the tense which expresses that 
at a time when a thing will take place, another thing will 
have already taken place. 

EXAMPLE. 

Quand fauraijinije sorlirai,}] When I have done, I shall go 

out. 

the protection of enlightened governments has produced, on 

art. 2 1 faire naitre 

the other, I shed tears, (on seeing) the ravages of ig- 

ind-4 de art. sur — art* 

norance and barbarism, 

pr. art. barbarie f. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 277 

OF THE CONDITIONAL. 

The conditional is the mood which affirms on condi- 
tions ; it has two tenses, the present and the past. 

The present of the conditional is >hat tense which 
expresses that a thing would take place on certain con- 
ditions. 

EXAMPLE. 
Je ferais votrc affaire avant pen, I would settle your business be- 
si elle dependait uniquement de fore ?ong, if it only depended 
mui, upon me. 

The past of the conditional is that tense which ex- 
presses that a thing would have taken place at a time 
which no longer exists, dependant on certain conditions. 

EXAMPLE. 

Taurais, ou j'eusse fait votre I would have settled your bu» 
affaire, si vous mi'en amez, ou siness, if you had mentioned 
m'cn eussiez parle,\ it to me. 

1T EXERCISE ON THE PRETERIT ANTERIOR, <&c. 
I had done yesterday, at noon. I (went out) (as soon as) I 
Jinir midi sortir ind-4 des-que 

had dined. As soon as Caesar had crossed the Rubicon, he had 

passer — 

no longer to deliberate ; he (was obliged) to conquer or to die. 
pl'us devtir ind-2 * vaincre * 

1 had finished the task that you had imposed upon me, when 

tdche f. imposcr f. * 

yuu came in. Those who had contributed most to his elevation 

— bv<:T leplus 
tb the throne of his ancestors, were these who laboured with 
sur travailler 

the most eagerness to precipitate him (from it.) I shall 
de acJtarncmcnt en ne point 

shortly go into the country, where I intend to (collect 

tarder d d campagne sc proposer de herbo- 

plants), (in order to) (make myself perfect) in the knowledge 
riser inf-1 pour se p°rfectionntr 

>f botany. When 1 have done reading the di- 

art. botanique f. aclieicr ind-8 de inf-1 

vine writings of Homer and Virgil, and my mind has imbiV- 

2 lait m. 1 pr. que se pi- 
ad their beauties, I shall read the other epic poets. 
nttrer ind-8 de ind-7 2 1 

25 



278 SYNTAX OP THE VERB, 



OF THE IMPERATIVE. 

The imperative is that mood which commands, ex. 
horts, entreats, or reproves. It is a present with re- 
spect to the injunction, and a future with respect to the 
thing enjoined, 

In many verbs a compound of the imperative may be 
used to express an injunction to have a thing done pre- 
viously to another, ?£, ayez dine* avant que je revienne, 
have dined before I return.:]: 



t EXERCISE ON THE CONDITIONAL. 

What would not be the felicity of man, if he always sought 

Quel * — f. chercher ind-2 

his happiness in himself ? I shall be glad to see you harmo- 

um pi. 
nious, happy, and comfortable. A dupe to my imagination, I 

tranquille * de 

should have (been bewildered) (but for) you in my search 

s'Ggarer sans * art. rechercftc f. 

after truth. Enquire whether he would have consented to 
de art. sHnformer si constntir 

those conditions, in case he had thought himself able 

dans art. que se croire subj-4 capable 

to fulfil them. 
de remptir. 



t EXERCISES ON THE IMPERATIVE. 

Be not fond of praise ; but seek virtue, which 

sing. passionne pour art. louanget art. 

procures it. Let us remember that unless virtue guide 

attirer se souvenir d moins que art. ne 

us, our choice must be wrong. Let us not be deceived by 

d&voir in d-1 mauvais se laisser prendre d 

the first appearances of tilings ; but let us take lime to 

art. se dormer art. de 

fix our judgment. Arbiters of the destinies of men, do 

Arbitre — ne'e art. art. 

good if you wish to be happy; do good, if you wish that your 
Men vouloir * 

memory should be honoured ; do good, if you wish that 
subj-1 art. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 279 



OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



The subjunctive is that mood whieh expresses a sub- 
ordination to what precedes. With this dependance 
it forms a sense, and none without. Je voudrais quHl 
lut, forms sense, but quHl Ivt, alone and unconnected, 
does not. 

This mood contains four tenses, the present, ox future, 
the imperfect 9 the preterit, and the pluperfect. 

The present and the future of the subjunctive can 
only be distinguished by the sense ; in this phrase, 
Ufaut que je vous sois Men attache pour venir vous 
voir par le temps qu'ilfait, I must have a great esteem 
for you to come and see you in such weather as this ^ 
je sois, expresses a present time ; but in this, je ?i& 
crois pas que vous obteniez cela de lui, I do not think 
you will obtain that of him, vous obteniez expresses a 
future, and stands for vous obtiendrez. 

The imperfect, the preterit, and the pluperfect of 
the subjunctive express also a past, or future, ac- 
cording to circumstances : in this phrase, soupconniez- 
vous quHl ne le fit pas, did you suspect he would noi 
do it, fit expresses a past ; but in this, je de'sirerais 
qu'il vit du monde, I wish him to see company, vit marks 
a future. II 



heaven should open to you its eternal gates. Never forget thgil 

sub-1 2 porte f. 1 

the truly free man is he, who, superior to all fears, and 

vtritablement 2 3 1 dt'gagi de f-s. 

all desires, is subject only to the gods and to reason, 
pr. m-s. soumis ne que art. f. 

H EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Men must be (very much) blinded by their pa*- 

art. 3 ti 1 que 2 subj-1 bien avevgtt 

sions, not to acknowledge that they ought to (lovje 

2 pour 1 devoir ind-1 * 

one another) as parts of a whole ; and as (the members 
s'entr'aimer art tout 2 



380 SYNTAX OF THE VEHB. 

OF THE INFINITIVE . 

The infinitive is that mood which affirms indetermi- 
nately without either number, or person. 

It denotes of itself, neither present, past, nor future, 
except when it follows other verbs. The present al- 
ways expresses a present, relative to the preceding 
verT) ; as, je le vois, je le vis, je le verrai venir, I see, 
I saw, I shall see him come. The past always ex- 
presses a past, relative to the verb that precedes it, je 
crois, je croyais Vavoir vu venir, I think, I thought 
that I had se^n him coming. To express & future, the 



qf out body) (would do) if (everyone) had a particular vitality. 

1 cliacun ind-2 sa 2 tie 1 

You asked him to come with us ; but I doubt whether he 

prier ind-4 de que 

will have that complaisance. I could Hot persuade myself that 

subj-1 ind-2 

he was so vain as to aspire to that place. Though every 

subj-2 assez * pour — f. 

body says so, I do not believe that he is gone to Rome. 

subj-1 le subj-1 

(Is it possible) that he should let slip so good an oppor- 

sepouvoir laisser subj-3 ichapper beau occasi- 

tun/ty of acquiring immortal glory ? I could have wished 
anf un 2 1 

that he had availed himself of his abode in the country, to 

profiler subj-4 sijour d campagne pour 

perfect himself in the study of philosophy. 
m perfectionncr art. = f. 



t EXERCISE ON THE INFINITIVE. 

We only shut our eyes to truth, because we fear to 
ne * art. art. queparceque de 

see ourselves as we are. We were yet far from the castle, 
2 mo us 1 tel que ind-2 encore 

when one of our friends came to join U5. I did not think I 
ind-3 * ' ind-2 * 

was to set out so soou. He promises every day that he 
devoir * art. pi . de * 

will amend, but I do not rely upon his promises. 
* se corriger compter pramvsse f. pi. 



SYNTAX OF THE PABTICIPLE. 281 

infinitive must be preceded by the infinitive of the verb 
devoir ; as, je croyais devoir y aller, I thought I was 
to go there. , 

Remark. The infinitive also expresses a future 
after the verbs permettre, esperer, compter, s'attendm 
and menacer ; as, il promet de venir (qu'il viendra\ 
he promises to come (that he will come) ; il menace & 
s'y rendre (quHl s'y rendra), he threatens to go (that 
he will go) there. f 



OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

The participle is a part of the verb which partakes 
of the properties both of a verb and an adjective ; of a 
verb, as it has its signification and regimen, of an ad- 
jective, as it expresses the quality of a person, or thing. 

There are two participles, the participle present, and 
the participle past. 

OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

The participle present always terminates in ant ; as, 
aimant, jinissant, recevanL rendant* 

They talk of a secret expedition ; he- hopes to be (in it.) JFJe 

on 2 — f. 1 * en 

relies upon seeing you very soon, to terminate 

Qunipter * inf-1 au premier jour pour 

amicably his affair with you. You expected to take .a 

d I' amiable s'attendre ind-2 fdift 

journey this year ; but your father has changed his mind. 
voyage m. de * arts 

He threatens to punish us severely, if we (fall again) into .the 

de siverement retomber 

same error. 
fault. 

- ■ •■ >m • - 

EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
That mountain being very high, and thus commanding a 

ilccc ainsi domincr s*ur 

vast extent of country, was very well calculated for our 
gr and e Vendue pays ind-2 * proprc & 

25* 



282 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

Rule. The participle present remains unchanged, 
and takes neither gender nor number when it ex- 
presses an action, as, une montagne, or des montagnes 
dominant sur des plaines immenses, a mountain, or 
mountains commanding immense plains : un homme, 
des hommes, une femme, des femmes lisant, parlant, 
marchanty a man, men, a woman, women reading, 
speaking, walking. But whefx, like an adjective, it 
expresses simply a quality, it takes both the gender 
and number of its substantive ; as, un homme obligeant, 
an obliging man ; unefemme obligeante, an obliging 
woman ; des tableaux parlans, speaking portraits ; la 
religion dominante, the established religion ; a la nuit 
tombante, at night fall. 

What grammarians call gerund, is nothing but the 
participle present, to which the word en is prefixed ; 
on se forme V esprit en lisant de bons livres, we form our 
minds by reading good books. 



observations. This woman is of good disposition, obliging 

caractere m. 
every one, whenever she (has it in her power). They go 
tout le monde quand le ponvoir 

cringing before the great, that they may be insolent to their 
ramper devant pi. ajin de * * inf-1 pi. avec 

equals. The state of pure nature is that of the savage living in the 
egal 
desert, but living in his family, knowing his children, loving them, 

famille f. connaitre 
(making use) of speech, and (making himself understood.) 

user art. parole, se faire entendre 

An agreeable languor imperceptibly (laying hold) of my 

2 langueur f. 1 inscnsiblemcnt s'emparer 

senses, suspended the activity of my soul, and I fell (asleep.) 
sens suspendre ind-3 s'cndormir 

Time is a real blunderer, placing, replacing, ordering, 
ind-3 art. vrai hrouillon victtrc remcltre ranger 

disordering, impressing, erasing, approaching, removing, and 
dkr anger imprinter effacer approchrr Eloigner 

making all things, good and bad ; and almost always (impossi- 
rendre f. pi. presque 

ble to be known again.) 
m&connaissable. 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 283 

OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 

The participle past has various terminations ; as, 
aim€,jini, recu, ouvert, dissons, &c. 

This participle may either agree with its subject, or 
its regimen. 



AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST WITH 
ITS SUBJECT. 

Rule. I. The participle past, when accompanied by 
the auxiliary verb £tre, agrees with its subject in gender 
and number. 

EXAMPLES. 

Monfrere est torribi, My brother is fallen. 

Mesfreres sont lombts, My brothers are fallen. 

Ma soBiir est tomb6e, My sister is fallen. 

Mes soeurs sont tomhies, My sisters are fallen. 

La nuit sera bientot passee, The night will soon be over. 

Lea spectacles soncfrequt?it6s, The theatres are frequented. 

Ceitefleur est fort recherchic, This flower is much sought after. 

lis sont fort estimts, They are very much esteemed, 

EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 

Fire-arai3 were not known to the ancients. Ishmael, 

art. armc-d-feu f. pl» ind-4 connu de IsmaSl 

the son of Abraham, is known among the Arabs, as (the man) 

* — parmi Arabc celui 

from whence they sprung, and circumcision has remained 

etre sorti art. f. Itre dcmeuri 

(among them) as the mark of their origin. Heaven is that 

tear f. art. 

permanent city, (into which) the just are to be received after 
— 2 citi f. 1 ou pi. decoir * apr&s 

this life. In Abraham's time, the threalenings of the tru* 

de 2 art. 1 menace f. pi. 

God was dreaded by Pharaoh, king of Egypt ; but, in the time 

ind-2 redout 6 de Pharaon 
of Moses, all nations were corrupted, and the world, whicfc 

Moisc art. f. perverti 

God has made to manifest his power, was become a temple 

pour pouvoir m. devenu 

of idols. That dreadful crisis which threatened the state with 
terrible 2 arise f. 1 ind-4 de 



284 STNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

Rule. II. The participle past, when it follows the 
verb avoir, never agrees with its subject, 

Monfrtrea Sent, My brother has written. 

Mesfreres ont 6crit, My brothers have written. 

Ma scBur a Scrit, My sister has written. 

Mes sceurs ont ecrit, My sisters have written. 

Les Amazones ont acquis de la The Amazons have acquired 

ciltbrite, celebrity. 

J'ai contraint les soldats d mar- I have forced the soldiers to 

cher, march. 

Remark. The participle of the verb ttre, and of 
all the neuter varbs which are conjugated with the 
auxiliary verb avoir, never vary, as, it or elle a eU, he, 
or she has been ; Us or elles ont 6te, they have been ; 
il or elle a dormi, he or she has slept ; Us or elles ont 
nui, they have annoy ed.H 

instant destruction, was happily soon over. Ste is 

prochain 2 f . 1 ind-3 heureusement passi 

come to bring us all kinds of refreshments. The sciences 

* sorte f. sing. rafraichissement f. 

have always been protected by enlightened governments. 
protig6 art. eclaire 2 1 

II EXERCISE. 
The Romans successively triumphed over the most 

Romain successivement 2 ind-4 1 de 

warlike nations. Larapridius relates that Adrian erected 

bettiqucux 2 1 raconter Adrien elerer 

to Jesus Christ some temples, which (were still 
ind-6 de art. on encore 2 

to be seen) in his time. Happy those princes who have 
voir ind-2 1 de * art. 

never (made use) of their power but to do good! We 

user pouvoir que pour art. Ikn 

have spent the whole day in tormenting ourselves. One 

journ-'e f. d inf-1 2 7ious 1 

has seldom seen Q great stock of good sense in a man o4 
rarantnt fonds m. sens d 

Imagination. The errors of Descartes proved very useful 

— => — beaucottp sertir 

to Newton. 
ind-4 — 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 285 



AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST WITH ITS REGIMEN. 

Rule I. The participle past always agrees with its 
regimen direct, when that regimen is placed before the 
participle, whether the auxiliary verb that accompanies 
it be avoir, or &tre. 

EXAMPLES. 

Les ecoliers que fai eus, ont The pupils, whom I have had, 
fait de grands progres, have made rapid progress. 

Lucrece s r est tuie Lucretia has killed herself. 

Tai renvoyi, les livres que vous I have sent back the books 
rriariez pretes, which you had lent me. 

Que de soinsje me suis donnis ! What pains I have taken ! 

Quelle affaire avez-vous entre- What business have you under- 
prise ? taken ? 

Quand la race de Cain sefutmul- When the race of Cain had 
tipliee, multiplied. 

Ce yeuzque n'ont imusni soupirs Those eyes which neither sighs 
ni terreur, nor terror have moved. 

Le Dieu Mcrciire est un de ceux The God Mercury is one of 
que les anciens ont le plus mvX- those whom the ancients hare 
tiplies, multiplied the most. 



EXERCISE ON THE AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICI- 
PLE PAST WITH ITS REGDfEN. 

All the letters which I have received, confirm that iroport- 
r. pi. conjirmer 

*nt news. The agitated life which I have led till 

2 s. 1 agiti 3 f . 1 mener jusqu'd 

now, makes me sigh for retirement. The difficulties 

present soupirer aprts avt.retraitcf. f. pi. 

which the academies (have proposed to one another) do not 

st fair e ind-4 
seem easy to (be resolved.) The sciences which you have 
paraitre aisS rSsoudre f. pi. 

studied, will prove infinitely useful (to you.) The death whieh 

etre f. 

Lucretia (gave herself) has (made her immortal.) The 

se donner ind-4 immortaliser ind-4 

cities which those nations have (built for themselves) are 
villef. pi. peuple scbdtir ind-4 

but a collection of huts. The persons whom you have in 
ne que amas m. chaumiere f. pi. 



286 ' SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

Rem. The regimen which precedes the participle* is, 
either one of these pronouns, que, me, te, se, le, la, les, 
nous, and vous, or a noun sometimes joined to the pro- 
noun quel, sometimes preceded by the word of quantity, 
combien, or que, signifying combien, how much, as may 
be seen in the examples already given. f 

Rule II. The participle past never agrees with its re- 
gimen, either when that participle is without regimen di- 
rect, or when, having a regimen direct, that regimen is 
placed after it. 

gtructed appear to me possessed of reason and taste. Nothing 

pl&in pr. 

can equal the ardour of the troops which I have seen (setting off.) 

6galer f. pi. inf-1 

The chimeras which she has got in her head, (are beyond) 

chhnbre f. pi. fs mtftro * art. passer 

all belief. What measures have I not taken ! What fortunes 

croyamcef, demarches f. pi. fair§ f. pi. 

has not this revolution ruined I What tears has she not shed ; 
renverser Que de f. pi. vtrser 

what sighs has she not heaved ! The Amazons (made themselves) 

m. pi. pousser f. pi. se rendre in d-4 

famous by their courage. The city of London has (made itself.) 
cettbre f. 

by its commerce, the metropolis of the universe. I have thought 
— m. — le £, croira 

her agitated by the furies. This day is one of those which they 

=■ m. pi. 

have consecrated to tears. The language in which Cicero and 

consacrer art. langue f. * Ciciron 

Virgil have written, will live in their works. I could have wished 
par ouvrage * vouloir 

ts> avoid entering into those details, but I thought them neces- 
* iviter d'entrer — m. croire in d-4 

sary. The tribunes demanded of Clodius the execution of 

tribun m. pi. ind-3 d 
the promises which the consul Valerius had given them. 
f. faire leur. 

H EXERCISE. 
The persons whose. visit you had announced to me, are- not 
f. pi. 1 art. f. 5 2 4 * 3 



SYNTAX OF THE PAETICIPUS. 287 

EXAMPLES. 

La lettre dontje vous ai parle, The letter which I have men- 

tionedjto you. 
La perte et les profits auxquels The loss and profits which he 

il aparticlpc, has shared. 

Lcs acadimits se sontfait des ob- The academies have proposed 

jtctions, objections to one another. 

Vous avez instruit ces personnes You have taught these persona 

d dessiner, to draw. 

Lucrdce iest donne la mort,% Lucretia has put a period to her 

existence. 



Rule. III. The participle past takes neither gender 
nor number when the participle and the auxiliary verb 
to which it is joined are used impersonally, nor when 
that participle is followed by a verb, which governs the 
pronouns, or pronouns preceding it. 

EXAMPLES. 
Les chaleurs excessives qu'il a The excessive heats, which we 

fait cet ete, ont beaucoup nui have had this summer, have 

d la ricoltc. done great injury to the corn. 

Quelle fdck'iisa aventure vous What unpleasant adventure 

est-il arriit ? have you met with ? 

La maison que fai fait bdtir, The house which I have order- 

ed to be built. 
Imltez les vcrtus que vous avez Imitate the virtues which you 

cntendu Imier, have heard praised. 

Les muthematiques que vous The mathematics which you 

tVatezpas voulu quefetudiasse, would not permit me to study. 

come. Men built themselves cities. The Amazons 

art. se bdtir ind-4 de art. 

acnuire-d great celebrity. I have forced the soldiers 

ind-4 beaucoup de = contraindrc 

to march. That woman has bestowed on herself fine gowns. 

se donner * * de 

Letters and writing were inveiited to represent 

art. 4 art. ecriture oonla2 3 pour peindre 

speech. She has cut two (of her) fingers. Titus has made 

art. se couper * doigt m. pi. rmdre 

his wife mistress of his riches. I have given myself (a great deal) 

bien Men 

of trouble. Commerce has made this city flourishing 

art. peine f. art. m. rtnare f. flonssant 

They have made an appointment. 

se danner * rendcz-vous. 



288 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE, 

EXLt s'ert laissi stduire, She has suffered herself to be 

seduced. 

Remark. To make a right application of the second 
part of this rule, we ought to examine whether we can 
put the regimen immediately after the participle. As 
we cannot say ; Tax fait la maison, vous avez entendu 
les vertus, vous^avez pas vouhi les matMmatiques, it 
follows that the regimen belongs to the second verb. 
Sometimes, however, the regimen may relate either to 
the participle, or to the following verb, according to the 
meaning of the speaker. Thus, Je Vai vu peindre, 
means, I saw her picture drawn ; but Je Vai vue pein- 
dre, signifies, I saw her painting. 

Sometimes it happens likewise, that, in sentences 
which seem to resemble each other, the regimen in one 
belongs to the participle, and in the other to the verb 
which follows it. For instance, this question, Avez- 
vous entendu chanter la nouvelle actrice ? Have you 
heard the new actress sing ? should be thus answered, 
Qui, je Vai entendue chanter, yes, I have : but this ques- 
tion, Avez-vous entendu chanter la nouvelle ariette ? 
Have you heard the new song ? must be answered, Qui, 
je Vai entendu chanter, yes, I have.f 

t EXERCISE. 

The great changes which (have taken place) in admi- 
changement y avoir ind-4 art. 

nistration, have astonished many people. The heavy rains 
Men des personnes grand pluie 

which we have had in the spring, have been the cause 

f. pi. * il faire ind-4 

of many diseases. The scarcity which there icas last 

maladic f. pi. disette f. . ind-4 art. demur 2 

winter, has afforded the opportunity of doing much good. What 

1 donner occasion inf-1 bien 

news has reached you ? How many imprudent steps 

est-il vcnu Que de faux demarche f. pi . 

were taken on that occasion ! How many large ships have 
il s'est faire en gros il se 

been built in England within these fifty years ! The figures 
construire ind-4 depuis * — 

which you have hawed to draw are of great beauty. We 
apprendrc dessincr un * 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 289 

CHAP. VI. 

OF THE ADVERBS. 

Situation of the Adverbs. 

Rule I. In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally 
placed after the verb ; and, in the compound tenses, be- 
tween the auxiliary and the participle. 
EXAMPLES. 

Vhommt le plus cdairS est ordi- The man who is most learned 
nairement cclui qui pense le is generally he who thinks 
plus rnodestement delui-memt, most modestly of himself. 

Avez-vous jamais vu un pedant Have you ever seen a pedant 
jAus absurde et plus vain 1 more absurd and more vain ? 

Compound adverbs, and those which have preserved 
the legimen of the adjectives from which they are de- 
rived, are placed always after the verb, as, 

EXAMPLES. 

Cost a la mode, That is fashionable. 

// a agi consiquemmerti, He has acted consistently. 

Adverbs which denote time in an indeterminate man- 
ner are likewise placed after the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

II tut fallu se lever plus matin, It would have been necessary 

to rise earlier. 
On a vu cela autrefois, That has been seen formerly. 

Exceptions. 1. Adverbs of order, rank, and those 
which express a determinate time, are placed either be- 
fore, or after the verb. 

ought never to swprve from the good path which wc 

falloir ind-1 * s' Eloigner route f. on 

have begun to follow. The measures, which you advised 

mcsure f. pi. conseiller ind-4 

me to adopt, have not succeeded. The rule, which I have be- 
ds y,rendri>, rtussir rhgle f. 
gun to explain, seems to mc very easy to (be understood.) Yoi 

cxpliqmr scmbler saisir 

see that I have not (been mistaken) respecting the affaire which 

se trompcr in d-4 
I had foreseen you would have in hand. 
vr&coir (pie * * 

26 



290 SYNTAX OF THE VERB, 

EXAMPLES. 

Nous devons premierement/aire We ought, first, to do our duty; 

notre devoir ; seconderaent secondly, enjoy lawful plea- 

chercherlesplaisirspermis, sures. 

Aujourd'hui il fait beau ; il To-day, it is fine ; it will rain 

pleuvra peut-£tre demain. perhaps to-morrow. 

2. These adverbs, comment, on, d'ou, par oil, com. 
bien, pourquoi, quand, used with, or without interroga- 
tion, are always placed before the verb which they 
modify. 

EXAMPLES. 
Comme vous portez-vous ? How do you do ? 

On allez-vous ? Where are you going ? [it. 

11 tie sait comment s'y prendre, He does not know how to set about 
Rule II. The adverb is always placed before the 
adjective which it modifies. 

EXAMPLE. 
Cest une femmc fort belle, tres- She is a woman very beautiful, 
sensible, et infiniment sage, of great sensibility, and in« 

finitely prudent. 

Rule III. Adverbs of quantity and comparison, and 
the three adverbs of time, souvent, touj ours, jamais, are 
placed before the other adverbs. 
EXAMPLES. 

Si poliment, fort poliment, So politely, very politely. 

Tris-heureusement, Veiy happily. 

Le plus adroitement, The most skilfully. 

fls ne seront jamais 6troitement They never will be intimately 

unis, united. 

Us sont toujours ensemble, They are always together. 

Cest souvent d Vimproviste quHl He often comes unexpectedly. 

arrive, 

Souvent may, however, be preceded by an adverb of 
quantity, or comparison, as, si souvent, assez souvent, fort 
souvent, plus souvent, moins souvent, trop souvent. 

Rem. When adverbs of quantity and comparison meet 
together in a sentence, the following is the order which 
custom has established. 

Si peu Bien peu Beaucoup * trop Tant mieux 

Trop peu Bien plus Beaucoup plus Tant pis, 

Tres-peu Bien davantage Beaucoup moins &c. 

* Beaucoup is not as the English mrtcA, susceptible of being modified by 
any adverb preceding, thus, trts-btauconp, trop beaucoup, &c. would be 
barbarism. 



SYNTAX OP THE CONJUNCTIONS. 



291 



When bien stands before another adverb, it means 
very, much, &c. as in the preceding and following ex- 
amples. 

Bien assez Quite enough. Frapper bien fort To strike very hard. 
Bien moins Much less Bien tard Very late. 

But when it is placed after the adverb, it signifies 
well; as, 

Assez bien Pretty well. Fort bien Very welL 

Moins bien Not so well. Aussibien As well. 

These rules have been sufficiently exemplified. P. 141. 



CHAP. VII. 



OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 



The conjunction que serves to complete a compari- 
son ; it is elliptically used to express a restriction, when 
placed after ue, and it generally gives grac6, energy, 
and precision to sentences. 



expressing com-^ 
parison 

for rien que 



-jesouhaite que < 



— d moins que 
q,ue ^ — a cant que 

— sans que 



— des que I 

— aussitot que < 

— si, or quand ( 

f 

soit que < 

— jusqu'd ce que < 



EXAxMPLES. 

L'Asie est plus 

grande que 

V Europe. 
On ne parte que 

de la nouvelle 

victoire. 
QLvfilvivc, pour 

je souhaite 

quHl vive. 
Cela ne Jinira 

pus qu'iZ ne 

vicnnc. 
Q,u'i7 fasse le 

moindre excts, 

il est maladc. 

QuHl perde, on 

qu.Hlgu.gne son 

proces, e'est un 

homme ruin I. 

Attendez qu'iZ 

vienne 



f Asia is larger than 
t Europe. 

They talk of no- 
thing but the new 
victory. 
May he live, for / 
wish that he may 
live. 
There will be no 
end to it, unless he 
come. 
If he commits the 
least excess, he is 
ill. 
) Wteiher he gaiti6, or 
( loses his lawsuit, 
j he is a ruined 
J man. 

> Wait till he comes 



292 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

««i-p" { "y&sr } "ssr, be not 

— comme Mechantqu'ilcst. Wicked as he is. 

$ue ^ Que Dieu est > How great is the 

grand I \ Almighty ! 

, . , Que je hais les \ Hoic much I hate 

[y comDien • } medians ! < the wicked .' 

Another frequent use of this conjunction is to save 
the repetition of comme, parceqiie, puisque, quand, quoi- 
que, si, &c. when to phrases beginning with these words, 
others are added under the same regimen, by means of 
the conjunction et ; as, 

Si Von aimait son pays, et qu'on If we loved our country, and 

en desirdt sinctrementla gloire, sincerely wished its glory, we 

on se conduirait de maniere, should act so as, &c. 
<fcc.t 



EXERCISE ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

We have every thing to fear from his wisdom, even more 

encore 
than from his power. What men style greatness, glory, 

Ce que art. appeler 

power, profound policy, is in the eyes of God only misery, 

profond politique f. d 
weakness, and vanity. May they understand, at last, that without 

comprendre 
internal peace there is no happiness. May she 

avec soi-meme 2 art. 1 point de 

be as happy as she deserves to be ! Never write before you 

de It 
have thoroughly examined the subject which you pro- 

sows toutes scs faces 2 1 se 

pose to treat. Lei him but hear the least noise, his terrified 

proposer de traiter * bruit effraye 2 

imagination presents to him nothing but monsters Do 

f . 1 . * * lie que dt art. 

not sift this question, till I can (be your guide.) 

approfondir ne subj-1 vous mettresur la roic 

Do not go out till your brother comes in. Why does he not 

nercntrcr * 
(take advantage) of his youth, (in order to) acquire the know- 
profitcr pour am- 

ledge he wants ? 

naissance pi. dont avoir besoin ? 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 203 
GOVERNMENT OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

The conjunctions which unite sentences to one ano- 
ther are followed either by the infinitive, the indicative, 
or the subjunctive. 

Those that are followed by an infinitive, are, 

1. Such as are distinguished from prepositions, only 
by being followed by a verb ; as, 

II faut se reposer apres avoir One ought to rest after having 
travaillg, laboured. 

2. Those which have the preposition de after them ; 
as, 

// travaille afin de vous sur- He works that he may surpass 
passer,^ you. 

+ EXERCISE. 
Full as he was of his prejudices, he would not acknowledge 
Rempli ind-2 prejuge ind-3 contenir de 

(any thing.) Full of self-love (as he is), expect nothing 

ritn petri 13 2 de 

good (from him.) How beautiful is that cultivated nature ! 

en 16 5 2 4 3 

Hoic, by the care of man, is it brilliantly and richly adorned^ 
par f. pompevsement orrct 

Had profound philosophers presided at the formation of 
si * de « ind-6 d art 

languages, and had they carefully examined the elements of 
langue avec soin subj-4 — m. art. 

speech, not only in their relations (to one another), but also 
discours non entr'eux encore 

in themselves, it is not (to be doubted), that languages 
en m. douteux art. ?ie 

wculd present principles more simple, and at the 

offrir subj-2 de art. 
same time, more luminous. 

~~1F EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF CON- 
JUNCTIONS. 

They were going to spend a few days in town 

we * ind-2 * passer * quelques d art. 

only that they might return with more pleasure to 

que pour * * se relrouver inf-1 dans 

their charming solitude. Many persons work only (in order to) 

neque a Jin d» 
acquire consideration and riches, but the honest 

ae art pr. art. 2 de 

26* 



294 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS, 

Conjunctions that govern the indicative, 

bien attendu que, autant que, puisque, peut-etre que, 

a condition que, non plus que, lorsque, comme, 

a la charge que, outre que, pendant que, comme si, 

de meme que, parce que, tandis que, quand, 

ainsi que, attendu que, durant que, pourquoi, 

aussi bien que, vu que, tant que, comment, &c 

They are followed by the indicative, because the prin- 
cipal sentence, which they unite with that which is inci- 
dental, expresses the affirmation in a direct, positive, and 
independent manner. 

The use of the six following conjunctions, 
3i non que, de sorte que, tellement que, 

«i ce n'est que, en sorte que, de maniere que, 

varies according to the meaning expressed by the prin- 
cipal sentence. 

EXAMPLE OF THE INDICATIVE. EXAMPLE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Je ne lui ai repondu autre chose, Je ne veux autre chose, si non 

si non que f avals exicute ses que vous travailliez avec plus 

ordres. x d'ardeur. 

I made him no other answer, I desire nothing else, but that 

but that I bad executed his you would study with greater 

orders. ardour. 

The indicative is required in the first sentence, by 
the verb fax repondu expressing a positive affirmation, 
and the subjunctive in the second, because je veux ex- 
presses a compound, or desire. f 

numane man spends (so much) time in study, only 

sensible 3 1 ne employ tr tant de d art. que 

to be useful to his fellow-creatures. I reveal to you the 
your semblables. d&voiler 

plot which your enemies have concerted in secret 
trame f. ourdir art. Unebres f. pi. 

in order to warn you against their artifices. 
premumr 

t EXERCISE. 
When you have a more extensive knowledge of geometry 

ind-7 2 1 art. f. 

and algebra, I shall give you a few lessons in astro- 

pr. art. algebre f. ■ quel que de 

nomy, and optics. Form your mind, heart, and taste 
pr. optique pron. pron. 



FKoaiiscuous EXEKCISES. 295 

The conjunctions which govern the subjunctive are, 
soit que, jusqu'a ce que, suppose que, afin que, 

sans que, encore que, au cas que, de peur que, 

pour que, a moins que, avant que, de crainte que 

quoique, pourvu que, non pas que, &c. <fcc. 

They require the subjunctive, as they always impJ\ 
doubt, desire, ignorance. "jf. 

while you are still young. Do not keep truth a prisoner, 

encore retenir art. * captive 

though you should (draw upon you) a cloud of enemies. 

quand devoir cond-1 s'attirer nuee f. 

I will give you this fine picture upon condition that you 

tableau m. d 
keep it as a testimony of my friendship. 

conserver ind-7. temoignage m. 

~~X EXERCISE. ~ 

You know too well the value of time, to make 

connaitre prix m. art. pour que etre 2 

it necessary to tell you to (make a good use of) it. Study only 
il 1 de de bien employer 

great models, lest those which are but middling 

art. de peur que * mediocre ne 

should spoil your taste, before it be entirely formed. I 

gdter subj-1 
(make not the least doubt) that your method will succeed, 

ne douter nullemenl f. ne * subj-1 

provided it be well known. Several phenomena of nature are 

f. art. 

easy (to be explained), supposing the principle of universal 

(by the active) art. 2 

gravitation to be true, 
f. 1 

PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE NINE PARTS 
OF SPEECH. 

The Good Mother . 

What a fine morning ! said the amiable Charlotte to her 
matinie f. ind-3 
iter George. Come ; let as go into the garden and enjoy 
sing. t * inf-1 

the magnificent sight of rich and abundant nature, 

de 2 spectacle m. j une2 fertile 3 1 

We will gather there the freshest and sweetest Rowers 

cuciliir y fraU 2 art. adv. odornrd 3 f. pi. 1 



296 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 

We will make a nosegay, which we will offer to mamma. You 
bouquet m. maman sing, 

know she loves flowers. This attention will give her plea- 
savoir que art. faire lui 

sure. Ah! brother, it will obtain us a smile, a caress, perhaps 

mon f. valoir sourire m. f. 

even a kiss. Ah ! sister, replied George, your pro- 

baiser m. ma ripondre ind-3 sing, pro- 

posal delights me ; let us run, let us fly, that we may offer 
jet enchanter courir voter ajin de* * 

her (when she rises) this tribute of our gratitude and our love. 
lui d son lever hommage — pr. 

Full of this idea, Charlotte and George hastened 
plein se hater ind-3 de se rendre 

into the garden. Charlotte gathered violets, jessamine, 

ind-3 de art. pr. art. 

and young rose-buds which (had but just begun) 

pr. de 2 bouton m. 1 ne commencer queind-2 

to open their purple cups, while George prepared 

entr'ouvrir de pourpre 2 calicc 1 ind-2 

green sprigs of myrtle and thyme, intended 

de art. verd&yant 2 jet m. 1 myrte \>vAhym destine* 

to support the flowers. Never had these amiable children 

soutenir 1 ind-2 3 2 

worked with (so much) zeal and ardour. Satisfaction and 
travailler tantde zele pr. art. f. art. 

pleasure beamed in all their features, sparkled in their 

m. etre ind-2 peint trait m. pttilltr 

eyes, and added still to their beauty. 

While they (were employing themselves) (in this manner), 
s'occuper ind-2 ainsi 

their mother, who had seen them in the garden, came to join 

ind-3 * joindre 
them. (As soon as) they perceived her, they flew to her, and 
des que ind-3 ind-3 die 

said: Ah! mamma, how glad we are to see you! how 
lui que aise 3 1 2 de 

(impatient we were) for this pleasure ! In the 

qu'il tardait d notre impatience d 1 avoir ce 

pleasing expectation (of it) we (were preparing) this nosegay for 
douz attente f. * ind-2 

you. What satisfaction should we have had in presenting 

f. ne pas d ofrir 

it to you ! Look at these rose-buds, these violets, this jessamine, 

voir * 
this* myrtle, and this thyme. Well, we designed them for you. 

Eh'.bien, destines ind-2 * 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 29? 

These flowers, coming from us, would have been dear to you. 

cker 
When you wore them, you would have said : My children 

En * porter inf-2 

(were thinking) of me while I slept. I am always as 

s'occ.uper ind-2 dormir in d-2 

present to their minds as to their hearts. They love me, and it 

sing. sing. ce 

is by giving me every day new proofs of their affection, 

tn art. pi. de preuvcL 

that they acknowledge the care I have taken of them 

reconnaitre soin m. pi. que 

in their childhood, and all the marks of tenderness I am un- 

que ne 

ceasingly giving them. 

cesser de inf-1 leur. 

My dear children, replied the mother, embracing 

rtpondre ind-3 en embrasser 

them, how charming you render all my days ! your grati- 

quel eharme repandre sur * 

tude, your tenderness, your attention to me, make me forget 

pi. pour oublier 

my former misfortunes, and yield my heart again to the soft 

ancien malheur m. rouvrir * 

impressions of pleasure. May Heaven continue 

f. art. Pouvoir subj-1 art. continuer 

to bless my labour! May it be your guide and your support 
de soin Pouvoir — soutien 

in the career which (will soon be opened) to you ! may it 

carriere f. aller ind-1 s'ouvrir devant 

complete its kindness by preserving you from the 

meftre le comble d bienfait pi. en garantir inf-2 de 

dangers to which you cannot fail to be soon exposed ! 

* ve pas tarder in d-7 * 
Alas ! I shudder (at them) beforehand, my dear children ; the 

Jr.'mir en d'acance 

moment is come when you must enter the world. Your 

oil devoir dans 

persons, your birth, and your fortune call you there, and 
figure sing. naissance appeler y 

ensure you a distinguished rank (in it), I cannot always be your 
assurer 2 m. 1 y in d-7 

guide. Young and inexperienced, you will find yourselves 

sans txptrience aller ind-1 inf-1 

surrounded by every kind of temptation. (F.very thing), 
entouri. sorte f. seduction. Tout 

even vice presents itself there under an agreeable 

j usque d art. in. offrir y sous * deart. 2 



298 ^ PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 

form, and almost always in the shape of pleasure, which has 
pi. 1 sous image art. 

(so many) attractions for youth. They will try to 

tantde attraiti. art. jeunesse f. On chercher 

mislead you, to corrupt you ; they (will make use of) artifice 
igarer employer art. 

raillery, and even ridicule, and, if necessary, they 

art. = mime art. — it est 

will assume even the mask of virtue. If you abandon 

prendre jusque d masque m. art. se laisser 

yourselves to first impressions, you are lost The poison of 
alter art. 

example will insinuate itself into your hearts, will corrupt the 

se glisser altirer 

innocence and purity (of them) and will substitute violent 

C7i de art. dichirant 2 

passions for the mild affections which have hitherto formed your 
f. pi. 1 d doux faire 

happiness. 

Do not imagine, my dear children, that in placing before your 
croire en mettre sous 

eyes a picture of the dangers of the world, my intention 

art. tableau m. 
is to prohibit you every kind of pleasure. God forbid. 

subj-1 de interdire esptee f. d ne plaire 

Pleasure is necessary to man ; without it, our ex- 
subj-1 art. art. lui 

istence would be dreadful ; (and therefore) Providence, ever 

affreux aussi art. f. 

attentive to our wants, has multiplied the sources of it, both 

besoin -t-elle 
in and out of ourselves. But, in tasting the pleasures of 

en nous nous en gouter 

the world, never (abandon yourselves) (to them.) Take care 

se livrer y Avoir 

that they do not govern you ; know how to quit them the mo- 

dominer savoir * * de 

ment they have acquired (too much) sway over you. It is 

que prendre ind-7 trop de empire Ce 

the only way to enjoy with delight that exquisite pleasure 

moyen de vdupti de dil'icitux 2 1 

which we can only find in ourselves, and which has its source 

en 
in an upright and pure conscience. Ah ! why cannot I give 
dans droit 2 3 f . I que 

you all my experience ? Why cannot you, like me, read the 

dans 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 299 

depths of the heart 1 With what astonishment would you often 

abime sing. pi. 

see chagrin, agitation, and trouble, disguised under the 

ar t. — na. art. art. — m. diguisi sous 

appearance of joy and tranquillity ; hatred and 

apparence pi. art. pr. art. calme art. f. art. 

envy concealed under the air of confidence and friend- 

f. cachi art. conjiance f. pr. art. 

ship : indifference and selfishness, affecting the most lively 

art. tgo'isme vif 

interest ; the most dreadful and perfidious plots 

2 art. adv. 3 trame f. pi. 1 

contrived deliberately in the dark ; in a word, the most 

ourdi de sang f rend et ttnebresi.\A. en 

odious vices endeavouring to show themselves under the 

2 art. 1 s'efforcer de 

features of (their opposite) virtues ! In the world there 

traits qui leur etre opposi 2 art. 1 

is but one (moving principle ;) that is self-interest. To 
ne que scul mobile m. ce art. personnel 2 1 C'esi d 

that every action refers, every thing tends to that as 
lui que art. pi. se rapporter lui 

to its end. I know very well, my dear children, that your 

Jin f. savoir 

hearts will not be infected by this vice. The sentiments of 

de 
universal benevolence with which I (have always) 

2 lienveillance 1 * ne point cesser ind-4 de 

inspired you, and of which I have seen you give (so many) 
inf-1 tant de 

proofs, (remove already every fear) (I might have) upon that 
ptucrc r assurer d'avance me sur 

subject. : but will you not yield to other vices not less danger- 
point m. de non 

ous ? Cruel idea! terrible uncertainty! If this misfortune 

f. affrtux f. 

were to happen, ah ! my dear children, instead of being 

* * arriver ind-2 
the joy and consolation of my life, you would be the torment, 

art. f. 

the shame and the disgrace (of it.) You would poison my 

honte f. opprohre en ewpoisonner 

days, and you would plunge a dagger into the very bosom 

porter art. mort f. mcme2 sein m. 1 

which gave you life. But whither is my tenderness for you 

ind-3 art. oil * 

harrying me 7 N#, my children, no, I have nothing to fear; 
tmporter Non 



( 300 ) 

PART III. 

IDIOMS, 



WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR PARTICULAR 
RULES. 



CHAP. I. 



OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

The substantive performs three functions in language, 
that of the subject, the regimen, or the apostrophe. 

The substantive is the subject, whenever it is that of 
which something is affirmed. When we say, Voiseau 
vole, the bird flies ; le lion ne vole pas, the lion does not 
fly ; the substantives oiseau and lion are subjects ; be- 
cause it is affirmed of the first that it flies, and of the se- 
cond that it does not fly. 

It is to the substantive as the subject that every thing 
relates in a sentence. In the following, un homme juste 

vou love me (too much) to wish to afflict me so cruelly; and 

trap pour vauloir * 
I shall have the pleasure, (as long as) I live, of seeing you walk 

tant que ind-7 

in the ways of honour and virtue. 

sender art. pr. art. 

exercise^Tthe substantive. 

1. A king, who is inaccessible to men, is inaccessible to truth 
also, and passes his life in a ferocious 2 inhuman 3 grandeur 1 : 
as he is continually afraid of being deceived, he always 2 una- 
voidably 3 is I and deserves to be so ; besides, he is at the mercy 
of slanderers and tale-bearers, a base 2 malicious 3 tribe 1, who 
feed on venom, and invent mischief rather than Cease to injure. 

2. The good which a man does, is never lost; if men forget it, 
God remembers and rewards it. 



(1.) Is inuccessible also, I'est aussi ; ferocious, sauvage ; inhuman, ct farouche ; 
as he is afraid, craignant ; is, Test ; to be so, de 1'etre j besides, de plus j talc 
bearers, rapporteur j tribe, nation ; feed upon, se »ourrir de ; mischief, mal ; to 
injure, de noire. 

(2.) Good, bien j a man, on ; remember, s'eii souvenir. 



PAKTICULAR RULES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 301 

elferme n'est ebranl€, ni par les clameurs d'une popu- 
lace in juste, ni par les menaces d'un jier tyran ; qm 
me?ne le monde brise s^ecr outer ait, il en serait fra_ 
mais nonpas emu, the adjectives juste arAferme modify 
the subject homme, end all the rest modify un Jiomme 
juste et ferine. 

The substantive is the regimen, when governed, c 
by another substantive, by an adjective, by a verb, or 
by a preposition, asj 

laloideDieUf the law of God. aimer son pro to love o 

chain, neighbour. 

utile a Vlwmme, useful to man. chez son pere. at his fetl 

In French, a substantive cannot be governed by an- 
other substantive, but by the help of a preposition ; such 
as de, as, la dijficulte de Ventreprise, the difficulty of the 
undertaking ; or a, or pour, as, V abandon a ses passions, 
the giving way to one's passions; legout pour le plaisir, 
the love of pleasure. 

General Rule. When two substantives are found 
together, the one governing, the other governed, the for- 
mer is generally placed first. 

EXAMPLE. 

La beaute des sentiment, la vio- The beauty of sentiments, the 
lence des passions, la grandeur violence of passions, the gran- 
ges 6v6nemens et les succes mi- deur of events, and the procli- 
raculeux des grandes eptes des gious successes of the huge 
kiros, tout cela m'entraine com- swords of heroes, all these 
•mc unc petite Jillc. — Sevignc. transport me like a little girl. 

Remark. This order is not followed — 1. When, in 
English, two substantives are joined by an s and an 
apostrophe, placed after the first, thus, 's, as, the king's 
palace. 2. When the two English substantives form a 
compound word, as, silk -stockings.^ 

II EXERCISE. 
1. The silence of the night, the calmness of the sea, tho trem- 
bling 2 light 1 of the moon diffused over the surface of the 

(1.) Trembling, iremblant ; di/fused, repandu ; dim, sombre 5 b«t^mgl»d, 
pars<ni6 ; toith, dt } heighten, rehausser ; s.-tnc, spectac/e. 

27 



302 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

The substantive is an apostrophe, whenever it is the 
object addressed ; as, rois, peuples, terre, mer, et vous, 
cieux, ecoiUez-?noi ! In this sentence, the substantives 
rois, peuples, terre, mer, and deux, form an ipostropbc. 

N. B. It is only in highly oratorical language that 
the address is thus directed to inanimate, or absent 
objects, f 



water, and the dim azure of the sky bespangled with glittering 2 
stars 1, served to heighten the beauty of the scene. 

2. Nothing was heard but the warbling of birds, or the soft breath 
of the zephyrs sporting in Hie branches of the trees, or the murmurs 
of a lucid rill falling from the rocks, or the songs of the young 
swains who attended Apollo. 

3. A smiling boy was, at the same time, caressing a lap-dog, 
which is his mother's favourite, because it pleases the child. 

4. There are several gold and silver mines in this beautiful 
country ; but the inhabitants, simple, and happy in their sim- 
plicity, do not even deign to * reckon gold and silver among their 
riches. 



(2.) Nothing but, on r>e plus que ; breath, lialeine ; sporting, que se jouer 
ind-3 ; branches, rameaux ; lucid rill, eau claire ; falling, (which fell :) szuains, 
berg'er 5 attended, suivre, incl-2. 

(S.) Smiling boy, enfant d'un air riant ; was caressing, caresser, ind-2; lap- 
dog, bichon ; pleases, amuser, (4.) Reckon, compter. 



t EXAMPLE OF A BEAUTIFUL APOSTROPHE. 

O Hippias ! Hippias ! I shall never see thee again * ! O my 
dear Hippias ! it is I, cruel and * void of compassion, who taught 
thee to despise death. Cruel Gods ! ye prolonged my life, only ' 
that I might see the death of Hippias ! O my dear child, whom I 
had brought up with so much care, I shall see thee no more, O 
dear shade, summon me to the banks of the Styx, the light grows 
hateful to me ; it is thou only, my dear Hippias. whom I wish to 
see again. Hippias ! Hippias ! O my dear Hippias ! I live but 
to pay the last duty to thy ashes. 



Never, ne plus 5 void of compassion, moi improvable \ taught, apprentire, 
ind-1 ; prolonged, prolonger, ind- 1 ; only that I might, pour me fa ire ; brought 
up, nourrir, ind-4 5 mit h so much care, et qui me couter, ind-4, tant de soins 5 
shade, ombre ; summon, appeler ; to, surj banks, rive ; groivs hateful, 6tre 
odieux *, / live but to, ne vivre encore que pour j pay, rendre j ashes, cendre. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 303 

CHAP. II. 

OF THE ARTICLE, 

General Principle. The article is to oe used be- 
fore all substantives common, taken in a determinate 
sense, unless there be another word performing the same 
office ; but it is not to be used before those that are taken 
in an indeterminate sense. 



CASES IX WHICH THE ARTICLE IS TO BE USED. 

Rule I. The article necessarily accompanies all 
substantives common, which denote a whole species of 
tilings, or determinate things. 

EXAMPLES. 

L'homme sc repait trop souzent Man too often feeds on chi- 
de chimeresy meras. 

Les hommes a imagination aunt Men of fanciful dispositions are 

toujuurs malhcureuZy always unhappy. 

L'homme dont vous parlez est The man you speak of is very 

ires-instruit, learned. 

In the first example, the word homme is taken in its 
fullest sense ; it denotes a collective universality. In 
the second, les liommes a imagination, denotes a particu- 
lar class only. In the third, Vlwmme denotes but one 
individual, being restricted by the incidental proposition, 
don t vous parlez. 

Remark. In English, the article is not used before 
substantives taken in a general sense, as, Men of genius, 
women of sound understanding.* 

X EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 

1. The moment elegance, the most visible image of fine taste, ap 
pears, it is universally admired : men differ respecting the other 
constituent parts of * beauty, but they all unite without hesitation 
in acknowledging the power of elegance. 

2. Mtn of siqjerior genius 2, while 1 they * see 3 the rest of 

(1.) The moment, tlu moment que ;fme, delicat r appears, se montrer 5 is, die 
<*t ; respecting, surj constituent, (which constitute) ; hesitation, hesiter : in, 
pour. • ' ' 

H hile, tandis que ; struggling, se tourmenter ; obvious, qui s'oflrent d'elie- 
memes ; glance, As p<*n£trent en un instant 5 lightning, foudre, f. ; through, 
traverse ; track, espace ; that, qu'on ; be measured, aiesurer. 



304 PABTICULAR RULES OP THE ARTICLE. 

Rule II. The article is put before substantives em- 
ployed in the sense of an extract, or denoting only a 
part of a species ; but it is omitted, if -they be preceded 
by an adjective, or a word of quantity. 

EXAMPLES. 

Du pain et de l'eau me feraient Some bread and water would 

plaisir, please me. 

Je vis hieQ' des savans qui nepen- I yesterday saw some learned 

sent pas comme vous, men, who do not think as you 

do. 
Voild de beaux tableaux, There are beautiful pictures. 

J'achetai liter beaucoup de li- I bought yesterday many books. 

vres, 
Que de Yivresfachetaihier ! How many books I bought yes- 

terday ! 

Remark. Among the words of quantity must be 
reckoned phis, moins, pas, point, and jamais. 

EXAMPLES. 

II n'y eut jamais plus de lumi- There never was more learning, 

cres, 
Hy a moins d'kabitans d Paris. There are fewer inhabitants fa 

qu'd Londres, Paris than in London. 

4$ ne manque pas d'amis, I do not want for friends. 

Exceptions. Bien is the only word of quantity 
which is followed by the article. 
EXAMPLES. 

II a bien de I 'esprit, He has a great deal of wit. 

Elle a bien de la gr&ce, She is veiy graceful. 

Remark. The sense of extract is marked in En* 
lish by the word some, or any, either expressed or 
understood, which answers to quelques, a particular 
adjective, and consequently to du, de la, de V, des, 
which are elegantly used instead of quelque, quelques, 

mankind painfully * struggling to comprehend obvious 2 truths I t 
glance themselves * through * the most remote 2 consequences ] g 
like lightning through a track that cannot be measured. 

3. The man who lives under an habitual 2 sense 1 of the divine 2 
presence 1, preserves a perpetual cheerfulness of temper, and en- 
joys, every moment, the satisfaction of thinking himself* in com- 
pany with the dearest and best of friends. 

(3.) Under, dans ; sense, conviction; preserves, conserve ; perpeiual, con- 
stant/, cheerfulness, g-aietc ; temper, caractthc j enjoys, jouir de j of thinking, 
se oroire 5 in, dans, 9ft. \ with, de. 



OF THE IRREGULAR ARTICLE. 305 

These expressions : des petits-maitres, des sages-fern- 
mes, des petits-pdte's, &c. are not exceptions to this rule, 
because, in cases of this kind, the substantives are so 
united with the adjectives, as to form but one and the 
same word. We should likewise say : le propre des 
belles actions, les seniimens des anciens philosophes, &c. ; 
because, in expressions of this kind, the substantives are 
taken in a general sense. IT 

f EXERCISE. 

1. We could not cast our eyes on either shore, without seeing 
opultni cities, t mises agreeably situated, lands yearly 2 
covered 1 with a golden 2 harvest 1, meadows abounding in flocks 
and herds, husbandmen bending under the weight of the fruits, and 
shepherds who made 1 the echoes 5 around them 6 repeat 2 die 
sweet sounds 3 of their pipes and flutes 4. 

2. Provence and Languedoc produce oranges, lemons, jigs, olives, 
almonds, chesiw.ts, peaches, apricots, and grapes of an uncommon 
sweetness. 

3. The man who has never seen this pure light, is as * blind as 
one who is born blind : he dies without having seen any thing ; 
at most, he perceives nothing but glimmering and false lights, vain 
sluzdoics and phantoms that have no reality. 

4. Among the Romans, those who were convicted of having 
nsed illicit or unworthy means to obtain an employ, were excluded 
from it for ever. 

5. Those wno govern are like the celestial 2 bodies 1, which 
have nrcit splendour and no rest. 

G. What heady, sweetness, moelesiy, and at the same time ichat 
nobleness and greatness of soul ! 

7. Themistocles, in order to ruin Aristides, made use of many 
artifices, which would have covered him with infamy in the eyes 
of posterity, had 1 not 4 the eminent services 2 which lie render- 
ed his country 3 blotted out 5 that slain. 

(1.) Could, pouvoir, ind-2 ; our, art ; eithtr, les deux ; seeing, apercevoir ; 
yearly, t'iu> les MM 5 covered with, qui se couvrir de, ind-2 ; abounding in, 
ICmpilfl •!<-' *> flocks and herds, trotipeau ; bending, qui etaient accables ; zceight, 
jioiis : shepherds, bergeis ; pipes, chalumeau 5 the echoes, aux echos ; around 
them, d'ajentour. 

( :.) H ho is born blind, aveu£rle-ne ; vilhout having, rfavoir jamais, inf-3 ; any 
thing, rien ; at most, tout au plus ; perceives nothing from, apercevoir ne que ', 
glimmering, sombre ; HgfUs, lueur: no reality, rien de reel. 

(4.) Used, employer; illicit or unworthy means, moyen illicite, on vx>ie in- 
ditrne, pi. •, were, ind-2 ; from it, en. 

'irrut, be«UCO«p de •, splendour, eclat ; no rest, (that have no rest) repos. 

II hut. qui- lie. (7.) Ruin, |>evdre ", made vsc of many, employer 

bl^n : art ifl.es, iiiau'euvre- j covered, cond-3 ; with, de ; infamy, OpprobrC ; 
to, a 5 had, &« ; rendered, ind-3, a ; blotted onf,eflacer, cond-3 : slain, tachr. 

27* 



308 PAETICULAR RULES OP THE ARTICLE. 

Rule III. The article is put before proper names of 
countries, regions, rivers, winds, and mountains. 
EXAMPLES. 

La France a les Pyrenees et la France is bounded on the south 
Miditerranee au sud, la Suis- by the Pyrenees and the Me- 
st et la Savoie d Vest, les diterranean, on the east by 
Pays-Bas au nord, et Vocean Switzerland and Sa^'oy, on 
d Vonest, the north by the Nether- 

lands, and on the west by the 
ocean. 
La Tamise, le Rhone, Vaquilon, The Thames, the Rhone, the 
■es Alpes, le Canial, north wind, the Alps, the 

Cantal. 

Rem. By apposition we find the words : le mont 
Parnasse, le mont Valerien, &c. le jleuve Don, &c. 
But, we should say, la montagne de Tarare, &c. la 
riviere de Seine, &c. though never, le Jleuve du Rhone^ 
but simply, le Rhone, f 

8. The consequences of great passions are blindness of mind 
and depravity of heart. 

9. Noblemen should never forget that their high birth impose^ 
gxtat duties on * them. 

(9.) Of mind, of heart, de, art. 

(9.) JYoblemen, gentilhomme ; should, devoir, ind-1. 



t EXERCISE, 

1. Europe is bounded on the north by the Frozen Ocean ; oq 
tlie south by the Mediterranean Sea, which separates it from. 
Africa; on the east by the continent of Asia; on the west by 
the Atlantic Ocean. It contains the following 2 states 1 : on 
the north, Norioay, Sweden. Denmark, and Russia; in the 
middle, Poland, Prussia, Germany, the United Provinces, the. 
Netherlands, France, Switzerland, Bohemia, Hungary, the 
British Isles; on the south, Spain, Portugal, Italy, Turkey ia 
Europe. 

2. The principal rivers in Europe, are, the Wolga, the Dom or 
Tana'is, and the Boristhenes, or Nieper, in Muscovy ; the Danube, 

(1.) Bounded, born6 ; en, A; frozen ocean, mer glaciale, f . ; south, sud cr 
midi*, Mediterranean sea, Mediterran£e, f. ; east, est or orient ; west, ouest 
w Occident ; Norway, &.c. SEE P. 70. ; British hits, lies Britanniques ; Turkey 
rn,Turquie de. 

(2.) Muscovy, Moscovie ; Vistula, Vistule, t ; Loirt, f. ; Seine, f. ; Rhone, m. } 
tiaronne, f. -, Ebro, Eure ; Ta^us, Tage, m. j Tkavies, TanaUe, f.j S^acru^Sa*- 
vcrne, f. 



PABTICITIAR RULES OP THE ARTICLE. 307 

Exceptions. The article is not used before the 
names of countries : 

1. When those countries have the names of their ca- 
pitals, as, Naples est un pays delicieux, Naples is a de- 
lightful country. 

2. When these are governed by the preposition en^ 
as, il est en France, he is in France ; il est en Espagne, 
he is in Spain. 

3. When those names are governed by some preced- 
ing noun, and have the sense of an adjective, as, vins 
de France, French wines ; nchlesse d* Angleterre, the 
English nobility. 

4. When speaking of those countries as of places we 
come from, as, je mens de France, I come from France ; 
f arrive d'ltalie, I am just arrived from Italy. How- 
ever, when speaking of the four parts of the world, the 
present practice favours the use of the article, as,je mens 
de VAm€rique,f arrive de VAsie.% 



the Rhine, and the Elbe, in Germany ; the Vistula, or Wezel in Po- 
land ; the Loire, the Seine, the Rlione, and the Garonne, in France ; 
the Ebro, the Tagus, and the Douro, in Spain ; the Po, in Italy ; 
the Tluinics and the Severn, in England ; and the Shannon, in 
Ireland. 

3. The principal mountains in Europe are the Daarne Fields? 
between Norway and Sweden ; Mount Crapel, between Poland 
and Hungary ; the Pyrencan Mountains, between France and 
Spain ; the Alps, which divide France and Germany from Italy. 

4. The bleak north wind never blows here, and the heat of sun> 
i i tempered by the cooling 2 zephyrs 1, which arrive to refresh 

the air towards the middle of the day. 

(3.) Pyrencan Mountains, Pyrenees. 

(1.) Bleak, rigO UT C m ; north wind, aquilon j hextt, ardeur j cooling, t^» 
Cralchissant 5 arrive, venirj to refresh? adoucir. 

t EXERCISE. 

1. Naples may be called a paradise, from its beauty and fertility. 
From this country 2 some suppose 1 Virgil took the model of tha 
Elysian 2 Fields 1. 

2. I have been a * prisoner in Egypt, as a * Phoenician 

(1.) From, a cause de •, from this cowntry, que e'est la, od j *>rne tuppo*" 
quelque* psrsonnes penser. 

t~\) I'ruotur, capUf ) under that namty e'est souo oe ncra que (IjoUi alike' 



PARTICULAR RULES OP THB ARTICLE. 

The article is also used before the names of countries, 
either distant, or little known, la Chine, China ; le Ja- 
pon, Japan ; le Mexiqae, Mexico ; and before those 
which have been formed from common nouns : le Havre, 
le Perche, la Fleche, &c. 

Remark. In English the article is generally omitted 
before the names of countries. 



CASES IN WHICH THE ARTICLE IS NOT USED. 

Rule I. The article is omitted before nouns common, 
when in using them nothing is said as to the extent of 
their signification. 

EXAMPLES. 

Le sagen'a ni amour ni haine, The wise man has neither love 

nor hatred. 

Us out renverse religion, mo- They have overturned religion, 
rale, gouvernement, scien- morality, government, scien- 
ces, beaux-arts, en un mot, ces, fine arts, in a word, every 
tout ce qui fait la gloire et la thing which constitutes the 
force oVun Elat, glory and strength of a state. 

Hence the article is not employed before nouns, 

1. When they are in the form of a title, or an address* 

EXAMPLES. 

Preface, Preface. Ildemeure He lives In 

Livre premier, Book the 1st. Rue Piccadilly, Piccadilly. 

Ciiapitrt dix, Chap, the 10th. Quartier St. James, St. James'& 

2. When they are governed by the preposition en, 

EXAMPLES. 

Regarder enpitii, to look with pity. Vivre en Roi, to live as a kin^ 

under that name I have long suffered, and under that name I have 
been set at liberty. 

3. He has received French and Spanish wines, Italian silk% 
Provence oil, and English wool. 

4. We set sail/rom Holland for the Cape of Good Hope. 

5. I was but just arrived from Russia, when I had the misfor 
tune to lose my father. 

C. I had set off from America, when my brother arrived thertk "* 

(A.) Set sail, partir $ for, pourse rendxe. 

(5^ fwoj but just, ne faire que de. (8.) Set aff % path- j there, % 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 309 

3. When they are joined to the verbs avoir, or J aire, 
with which they form only one idea. 

EXAMPLES. 
Avoir peur, To be afraid. Fairepitii, To excite pity. 

4. When they are used as an apostrophe, or inter- 
jection. 

EXAMPLE. 

Courage, soldats, tenezferme, Courage, soldiers, stand firm. 

5. When they serve to qualify a noun, or pronoun. 

EXAMPLES. 

fois plus qu'kom- He is sometimes more than 
me, man. 

Son Altesse Royale le Due His Royal highness the Duke of 
d' York, Prince du sang, &c. York, Prince of the blood. 

6. The article is not put before the substantive be- 
ginning an incidental sentence, which is opposed to 
what has been said. 

EXAMPLES. 

Toils les peuples dtla. terre ont All the nations of the earth 

tine idee plus ou moins dive- have an idea more or less 

loppee d'un Etre-Suprime / clear of a Supreme Being j 

preuve evidente que le ptclii an evident proof that original 

originel n'a pas tout-d-fait ob* sin has not totally obscured 

scurci Ventendemcnt, the understanding. 

7. When they are governed by the words genre> 
Cspcce, sorte, or terms of this kind. 

H EXERCISE. 

1. The highways are bordered with laurels, pomegranates, jes* 
gamints, and c I Iiich * are * always green, and always in 
bloom. The mountains are covered with flocks, which yield a 
fine wool, in great request among all the known 2 nations 1 (of 
the world.*) 

2. The fleets of Solomon, under the conduct of the Phoeni- 
cians, made frequent voyages to the land of Ophir and Tharsis, (of 
the kingdom of Sophala, in Ethiopia) whence they returned at the 
end of three years, laden with gold, silver, ivory, previous 2 stones 
1, and other kinds of mercliandise. 

3. Costly furniture 2 is not allow T ed there 1, nor magnificent attirt\ 
nor sumptuous feasts, nor gilded palaces. 

(1.) Jlighwayt, cbemin ; with, de ; pomegranates, grenadier j in hlocm, fleurl 
;/, lainc pL ) in great revest, recherche J amon B , de. 
\A ; end, bout ; la den, charge. 
, /* not allowed there, on n'y souflre ni } jumitvre, meuble ; costly, pr4» 
cieux j attire, oroement ;ft.aits, reyas. 



310 



PABTICULAE RULES OF THE AETICLE. 



EXAMPLES. 



Sorte de fruity 
Genre d'ouvrage, 
Mpnceau d y argent, 



A sort of 

fruit. 
A kind of 

work. 
A heap of 

money. 



Bands de voleurs, 
Pile de livres, 
Meute de chiens, 



A troop of 
robbers. 

A pile of 
books. 

A pack of 
dogs. 



Rule II. The article is not used, either before nouns 
preceded by the pronominal adjectives mon, ton, son, 
notre, votre, leur, ce, nul, aucun, chaque, tout (used for 
chaque), certain, plusieurs, lei, or before those which are 
preceded by a cardinal number without any relation 
whatever. 

EXAMPLES. 
Nos mceurs metlent le prix d nos Our manners fix the value of 



richesses, 
Toute nation a ses lois, 
Cent ignorans, doivent-Us Vem~ 

porter sur un homme instruit ? 

% 



our riches. 
Each nation has its laws. 
Are a hundred blockheads to 

be preferred to one learned 

man I 



4. We contemplated with pleasure the extensive fields covered 
tsdth yellew ears of corn, the * rich gifts of bounteous Ceres 

5. He was in a kind of ecslacy, when he perceived us. 

6. In the most corrupt age, he lived and died a icise man* 

*7. Are you surprised that the worthiest 2 men 1 are but men, 
and betray remains of the weakness of humanity, amid the innu. 
merable 2 snares 1 and difficulties which * axe * inseparable fronj 
royalty 1 

8. He excited cur pity, when we saw him after Ms disgrace. 

9. Hear then, O nations full of valour ! and you, chiefs, BD 
wise and so united ! hear what I have * to * offer to you. 

10. Out of this cavern issued, from time to time, a black 2 
thick 3 smoke 1, which made a sort of night at mid-day. 

t EXERCISE. 
I. That good father was happy in his children, and his children 
were happy in tiim. 

(4.) Extensive, vaste 5 fields, campagne ; ears, epi ; 6 ounteau s, fecoud. 
''>.) J a a kind of, comme en. (6.) Age, siecle. 



% 



7.) That , de ce que ; worthy, estimable; but, encore; bet ray, montrer ) r» 
mains, reste ; snares, piege ; difficulties, embarras. 

(8.) He exoited our pity, il nous fit pitie. ■ ■ (9.) Hear, ecouter. 

(10.) Out of, de ; issued, sortir ; thiol; et epais ; smoke, fumee ; mid-da$, 
milieu du jour. 



PABTIOTLAB RULES OP THE ARTICLE. 311 

Rule III. Proper names of deities, men, animals, 
towns, and particular places, do not take the article, 

EXAMPLES. 
Dieu a credit chletla terre, God ha3 made heaven and 

earth. 

Jupiter etait le premier dcs Jupiter was the first of the 

d'mtx, gods. 

Bucephale 6tait le c.^i r d d'A- Bucephalus was Alexander's 

lexn horse. 

Rome est une ville d'une grande Rome is a city of great beauty. 
beautc, 

Exceptions Proper names, however, take the ar- 
ticle, when used in a limited sense. 

EXAMPLES. 
Le Dieu des Chrc- The God of Le Bucephale, Alexander's 

tiens, Christians, d 1 Alexandre, Bucephalus. 

Le Dieudepaix, The God of VAnciennc, Ancient Rome. 

peace. Rome, 

Le Jupiter d y Ho- Horner's Ju- La Rome Mo- Modern Rome. 
mere, piter. derne, 

N. B. In imitation of the Italians, the French use 
the article before the names of several painters and 
poets of that nation, by an elliptical mode of expres- 
sion, the words peintre, poete, or seigneur, being under- 
stood, i" 

2. Those imitative 2 sounds 1 are common to all languages, and 
form, as it were, their * real basis. 

3. I n has his foibiss, his moments of ill * humour, even 
his irregularities. 

4. I ' has virtues peculiar to it, the knowledge 2 of 
which 1 could not but be infinitely useful. 

In all his instructions, he is careful to remember that gram- 
mar, lo^ic, and rhetoric, are three sisters, that ought never to be 
disjoined. 

(2.) Common, fonclu ; to, dans *, and form as it were, et ils en sont comme , 
rtal, fondamentale. 

(4.) P§euliar t qui sont propres j to it, lui ; could, cond-1 •, not but, ne que. 

(5.) He is careful to remember, ne point perdre de vue } ought, on devoir, 
lnd-l •, to be disjoined, separer. 

t EXERCISE. 
1. Jupiter, son of Saturn and Cybele or Ops, after having e» 

(1.) Expelled, chasser ; divided, en partnger j inheritance, heritage. 



312 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

CHAP. III. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

I. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. 

Rule I. Adjectives used substantively, are like sub- 
stantives common, accompanied by the article, if the 
occasion require it. 

EXAMPLE. 

Les fous inventent les modes, et Fools invent fashions, and wise 
les sages s'y conforment,^ men conform to them. 

pelled his father from the throne, divided the paternal* inheritance 
with his two brothers, Neptune and Pluto. 

2. On a dispute at a feast of the gods, between Juno, Pallas, 
and Venus, for the pre-eminence of beauty, Jupiter, not being able 
to bring them to an agreement, referred the decision to Paris, a 
shepherd of Mount Ida, with directions that a golden apple should 
be given to the fairest. Paris assigned to Venus 2 the golden * 
prize 1. 

3. God said : let there * be 2 light 1, and there * was 2 light 1. 

4. The Apollo di Belvidere, and the Venus di Mtdicis, are valu* 
able 2 remains 1 of antiquity. 

5. May and September are the two finest months of the year in 
the south of France. 

6. Tfte God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob f was the only true 
God. 

(2.) On, dans ; at a feast, qu'il y eut a un festin ; being ahle, pouvoir ; to bring 
to an agreement, accorder ; referred, renvo3*er j directions, ordre j that a gold- 
en, &c. to give a golden apple to ; assigned, adjuger. 

(4.) Vi Belvidere, Belv^der ; di, de j valuable, precieux. 

(6.) Only, seul. 

If EXERCISE. 

1. Were the learned of antiquity to come to life again, they 
would be much astonished at the extent of our knowledge. 

2. The ignorant have, in a* large stock of presumption, what 
they want in real knowledge, and that is the reason they are axl- 
inired by /oo/s. 

(1.) Were the, si les ; to come again, revenir, ind-2 ; life, monde $ at, d» ) 
knowledge, connaissance, pi. 

(2.) Large stock, forte dose ; they want, il leur manquer •, knowledge, science ) 
the teuton, ce qui fait que ; they arc % &c. the fools admire them. 



PARTICULAR RULES OP THE ADJECTIVE. 313 

Rule II. When a noun is accompanied by two ad- 
jectives, expressing opposite qualities, the article must 
be repeated before each adjective. 
EXAMPLES. 

Les vieux et les nouveaux sol- The eld and the newly raised 
dats sont remplis d J ardeur, soldiers are full of ardour. 

11 faut frequenter la bonne com- We ought to frequent good and 
pagnic etfuir la mauvaise, shun bad company. 

Re:vi. But if those qualities be nearly similar, the ar- 
ticle is not repeated, as, Le sage et pieux Fenelon ; — if 
merely different, it is perhaps better to repeat it, as, Le 
sensible et Vingenieux Fenelon. 

N. B. In French the substantive must be joined to 
the first adjective, when governed by different words. | 

Rule III. The article is used before the adjective 
which is joined to a proper name, either to express its 
quality, or to distinguish the person spoken of from those 
who might bear the same name. 

EXAMPLES. 
Le sublime Bossuet, Le vcrtueux F6n£lon, Le tendre Racine. 
The sublime Bossuet. The virtuous Fenelon. The tender Racine. 
Louis le Gros, Louis le Juste, Louis le Grand, 

Louis the Fat. Louis the Just. Louis the Great. 

Rem. If the adjective, which is joined to a proper 
name, precede that name, it expresses a quality, which 
may be common to many ; if it follow, it expresses a 
distinguishing quality. Thus — Le savant Varron ; and 
Varron le savant ; do not convey the same meaning : in 
the first example, Varron merely obtains the quality of 

t EXERCISE. 

1. The ancient 1 and modern 3 writers 2 are not agreed upoi 
that point. 

'Z. The wise man preserves the same t/anquillity of mind in 
good or bad fortune. 

3. The man who is jealous of his reputation frequents good and 
shuns bad company. 

4. Grand and vigorous thoughts were always the offspring of 
genius. 

(1.) Writers, auteur ; are agreed, s'accorder. (2.) The wise mun, le Mge, 

(4.; Vigoroue, fort J ojfepring, fruit. 

28 



311 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

savant ; in the second, Varron is distinguished for his 
learning from all of the same name .J 

Rule IV. When a superlative relative precedes a 
substantive, the article serves for both ; if it follow, the 
article must be repeated before each. 

EXAMPLES. 
Les plus habiles gens font quelquefois les plus grande3 /awtes, or 
Les gens les plus habiles font quelquefois \esfautes les plus grandea, 
The ablest men sometimes commit the grossest blunders. IT 



II. 

THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 

Rule I. Pronominal and numerical adjectives pre- 
cede their substantive, as do generally the following six- 
teen, beau, bon, brave, cher, chetif, grand, gros, jeune, 

X EXERCISE. 

1. The great Corneille astonishes by beauties of the first order, 
and by faults of the worst taste. If the tender Racine does not of- 
ten rise so high, at least, he is always equal, and possesses the art 
of always interesting the heart. 

2. The more we read the fables of the good and artless La Fon- 
taine, the more we are convinced they are a book for all ages, and 
the manual of the man of taste. 

3. It was only under the reign of Louis the Just, (XIII.) that 
good taste began to show ftself in France : but it was under that 
of Louis the Great that it was carried to perfection. 

(1.) By, par des ; order, ordre ; is always equal, se soutenir ; possess**, avoir. 
(2.) The more we, plus on ; artless, simple ; are convinced, on se convaiucre j 
they are, que c'est ; a, le ; for, de ; manual, manuel. 
(3.) Only, ne que ; carried, porter &. 

11 EXERCISE. 

1. It has been said of the Telemachus of the virtuou3 Fenelon, 
that it is the most useful 2 present 1 the muses have made to man- 
kind ; for, could the happiness of man be produced by a poem, it 
would be by that. 

2. The smoothest 2 waters 1 often conceal the most dangerous 2 
gulfs 1. 

(1.) It has been said, on a dit, present, don que; have made, subj-S ; could\ 
(if the, &c. could, ind-2 $) be produced by, naitre de ; would be, nattre, cond-1. 
(2.) Smoothest, tranquUle. 



PABTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 315 

tnauvais, mechant, meilleur, moindre, petit, saint, vieux, 
and vrai, when taken in their literal sense. 
EXAMPLES. 

Monpere, My father. Plusieurs qfficiers, Several officers. 

Quel homme, Whatman. Grand homme, Great man. 

Vieillefemme, Old woman. Six arbres, Six trees. 

Dix guinees, 10 guineas. Chetitemine, Mean look. 

Exception 1. The pronoun quelconque. 

EXAMPLE. 

D'une maniere quelconque, In whatever manner. 

2. Adjectives of number, joined to proper names, 
pronouns, and substantives, as quotations. 

EXAMPLES. 

George Trois, George IEEd. Chapitre dix, Chapter 10th. 
Lui dixi&me, He the tenth. Page irente, Page the 30th. 

3. The above sixteen adjectives, when comiected by 
a conjunction with another adjective, which is to be 
placed after the substantive. 

EXERCISE ON THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. There have been ages, when a great man was a sort of prodi- 
gy produced by a mistake of nature. 

2. In almost all nations, the great geniuses that have adorned 
them were contemporaries. 

3. Young people, says Horace, are supple to the enticements of 
vice, lavish, presumptuous, and equally impetuous and light in 
their passions ; old people, on the contrary, are covetous, dilatory, 
timid, ever alarmed about the future, always complaining, hard 
to please, panegyrists of times past, censors of the present, and 
£reat givers of advice. 

1. Wliat man was ever satisfied with his condition, and dissatis- 
fied with his abilities I 

5. Thirty chambers, which have a communication one with an- 
other, and each of them an iron door, with six huge bolts, are the 
places where he shuts himself up. 

(1.) Ages, des si^cles ; uficn, oil ; produced, enfanter. 

(2.) In, chez ; nations, people ; adorned, illustrer, ind-4. 

p.) People, g"ens*, supple, souple ; lavish, prodigue ; impetuous, vif ; old, 
f. pi. (the following adjectives in. pi. :) covet-ous, avare ; dilatory, temporiseur J 
about, sur •, complaining, plaintifj hard, difTicile ; please, oontenter ; time$ 9 
ting. (J.) IJitsaiisJicrl, rneconiL-nt ; abilities, esprit. 

(5.) Have a communication, communiquer ; each of them, dont chacun avoir | 
huge, pros ; bol f s, verrou ; places, lieu, sing. ; shuts hinuelf, ^e unfcriner. 



316 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

EXAMPLE. 

C'est unefemme grande et Hen She is a tall well-made woman. 
faite, 

Rem. In English, two, or even several adjectives 
may qualify a substantive, without a conjunction : but 
in French, this is generally required, as, c'est un homme 
aimable et poli, he is an amiable well-behaved man ; 
except when custom allows the substantives to be placed 
between two adjectives ; as, c'est un grand homme sec, 
he is a tall thin man. 



Rule II. Adjectives formed from the participle pre- 
sent of verbs, are, generally, placed after the substan- 
tive ; ouvrage divertissant, entertaining work ; and from 
the participle past, always ; figure arrondie, round 
figure ; those expressing — form, table ovale, oval table ; — 
colour, maison blanche, white house ; — taste, herbe 
amere, bitter herb ; — sound, orgue harmonieux, harmo* 
nious organ ;— action, procureur actif, active attorney j 
— effect, coutume abusive, custom founded in abuse ; — 
arrangement, ordre grammatical, grammatical order ; — » 
species, quality occulie, occult quality ; — nation, ge'rie'ro- 
site Anglaise, English generosity ; — those ending in 
-esque, -il, -ule, -ic, -ique, -in ; 

Style burlesque, Buslesque style. Bien public, Public wel- 

fare. 
Jargon pueril, Childish jargon. Ris sardonique, Sardonic 

grin. 
Femme credule y Credulous wo- Vbix enfantine. Childish 
man. voice. 

but in this, custom is the best guide. f 

t EXERCISE. 

1. An affected simplicity is a refined impostuie. 

2. The smiling images of Theocritus, Virgil, and Gessner, ex- 
cite in the soul a soft sensibility. 

3. In that antique palace are to be seen neither icrcathed 
columns, nor gilded wainscots, nor valuable basso-relievoes, nor 

(1.) Refined, delicat. (-2.) Smiling, riant ; excite, porter ; soft, doux. 

(3.) Are to be seen, on ne voit ; wreathed, torse ; wainscots, lam h ris ; bnsstf 
relievoes, bas relief 5 tidings, plafond ; curiously, artisteraent J had txist&ncc\, 
existed 



*AKTICTTLAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE, 31? 

Pule III. Although it may seem that adjectives 
expressing moral qualities are placed indifferently be- 
fore, or after the substantive ; yet taste and a correct 
ear will assign them their proper situation. 

In conversation, or in a broken, loose style, it may be 
indifferent to say femme aimable, or aimable femme ; 
talens sublimes, or sublimes talens, &c. ; but in the dig- 
nified style, the place of the adjective may, in a variety 
of instances, affect the beauty of a sentence. i 



III. 

REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. 

Rule. A noun may be governed by two adjectives, 
provided these do not require different regimens, as ; 

ceilings curiously painted, nor grotesque figures of animals, 
which never had existence but in the imagination of a child or a 
madman. 

4. If human life is exposed to many troubles, it is also susceptible 
of many pleasures. 

5. A ridiculous man is seldom so by halves. 

6. Spanish manners have, at first sight, something harsh and un 
civilized. 

7. French urbanity has become a proverb among foreign na- 
tions. 

(4.) Many, bien de ; troubles, peine. (5.) So, le ; by halves, a ctemi. 

Espagnol; manners, moeurs ; at first sight, hu premier abord ; 
uncivilized, sauvage. 

(7.) Become, passer en ; among, chcz. 

t EXERCISE. 

1. An amiable woman gives to everything she says an inex- 
pressible grace ; the more we hear, the more we wish to hear her. 

2. The majestic eloquence of Bossuet is like a river, which car- 
ries away every thing in its rapid course. 

3. The sublime compositions of Rubens have made Ian English 
traveller 3 say 2, that this fa mo us painter was born in Flanders, 
th rough a mistake of nature. 

If 

(1.) Qivt to, repandre sur' we, on. 

(2.) Kn-er, fleuvp 5 carrits away, entralner ', its rapid course, la rapidity de 
•on cours. 
(J., >ay, dire a ; famous, celebre 5 through, par ; initials* , m^prise. 

28* 



318 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

Cei homme est utile el cher a sa famille, that man is 
useful and dear to his family. But it would be incor- 
rect to say : Cet homme ect utile el cheri de sa famille, 
that man is useful and beloved by his family : because 
the adjective utile does not govern the preposition de.lF 



IV. 

ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 

Vnieme is used only after vingt, trente, quarante, 
cinquante, soixante, quatre-vingt, cent, and mille. C'est 
la vingt-et unieme fois, it is the twenty-first time ; see 
page 99. 

Cent, in the plural takes s, except when followed by 
another noun of number, as, 

lis etaient deux cents, They were two hundred. 

Trois cents hommes, Three hundred men. 

lis etaient deux cent dix. They were two hundred and ten. 

Vingt, in quatre-vingt, and six-vingt, also takes «, 
when followed by a substantive, as, 

%ealrc-vingts hommes, Eighty men. 

Cent-vingt abricots, Six score apricots*. 

But it takes no s, when followed by another term ex- 
pressing number, quatre-vingt-un arbres, quatre-vingt-dix 
hommes. 

The ordinal numbers, collective and distributive, 
always take the sign of the plural : les 'premieres dou- 

t EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. 

l\ A young man, whose actions are all regulated by honour, 
and whose only aim is perfection in every thing, is beloved and 
courted by every body. 

2. Cardinal Richelieu was all his life-time feared and hated by 
the great whom he had humbled. 

3. A young lady, mild, polite, and delicate, who sees in the 
advantages of birth, riches, wit, and beauty, nothing but incite- 
ments to virtue, is very certain of being beloved and esteemed by 
every body. 

(1.) Actions arc regulated by honour, I'lumneur dirige les actions ; whose only 
aim is, qui ne se propose que ; courted, recherche. 

(2.) Young lady, demoiselle; delicate, decent; yxothivg but, ne que ; incite- 
ments, encouragement ; certain, assure. 



PAKTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 319 

zaines, the first dozens ; les quatre cinquiemes, the four 
fifths. 

For dates the French write mil, as mil sept cent-quo- 
tre-vingt-dix-neuf, one thousand seven hundred and 
ninety-nine, &c. see p. 100. 

Re:u. Cent and mille are used indefinitely, as, 

fl luifit cent caresses, He showed him a hundred marks 

of kindness. 
Faites-lui mille amities de ma Present him for me a Hwusand 
part,i compliments. 

The French say, le onze, du onze, au onze, sur les 
onze heures, sur les une heure, pronouncing the words 
onze and une, as if they were written with an h aspirated. 

The cardinal numbers are used for the ordinal. 

1. In reckoning time, that is, the hour of the day, 
the day of- the month, the year of an era, as, il est 
trols heures, it is three o'clock ; le vingt de Mars, the 

t EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVE OF NUMBERS. 

1. It was the thirty-Jirst year after so glorious a peace, when 
the war broke out again with a fury of which history offers few 
examples. 

2. There were only three hundred, and in spite of their infe- 
riority in numbers*, they attacked the enemy, beat and dispersed 
them. 

3. He has sold his country house for* two thousand Jive hundred 
and fifty pounds. 

4. Choose out of your nursery eighty fruit trees, and ninety 
dwarf-trees, divide them into dozens, and put in the two first 
djzens of each sort, those whose fruits are most esteemed. 

5. When Leuis the Fourteenth made his entry into Strasbourg, 
the Swiss deputies having come to pay their respects to him, Le 
Tellier, archbishop of Rheims, who saw among them the bishop 
of Basle, said to one near him : That bishop is apparently some 
miserable character. — How, replied the other, he has a hundrtd 
thousand livres a year. — Oh ! oh ! said the archbishop, he is then 
a respectable man ; and showed him a thousand civilities. 



(1.) Year, amiee 5 when, que; broke out again^ se rallumer. 

In/y, ne que-, in spite of, malgre. (o.) Pounds, livre sterling. 

y\.)Out of, <june ; nursery, pepiniere } Jruit trees, pied d'arbre fruitier} 
duarf -trees, arbre naki. 

Svm«, foftbe Swiss pay, presenter j respect, hommage, p). ; one mar 
him, son voLin j that bukov, Lc. e'est un miserable apparcment que cet 6vAqut 1 
a year, de reute \ shtued, la ire *, civilities, cau 



320 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS 

twentieth of March ; Van mil sept cent dix, &c. See 
pages 99, 100. 

3. In speaking of the order of sovereigns, as, Louis 
seize, George trois ; except the first two of the series, 
as, Henri premier, George second. Quint for cinq is 
only said of the Empereur Charles -quint, and the Pope 
Sixte-quint.i 



CHAP. IV. 

OF THE PRONOUNS. 
1. 

OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
I. 

Office of Personal Pronouns. 
The personal pronouns have the three characteristics 
of the substantive, that is, subject, regimen, and apostro- 
phe ; but with this difference, that some jdways form 
the subject ; two only are used as an apostrophe: some 
always form the regimen, and lastly, others are some- 
times the subject and sometimes the regimen. 

t EXERCISE. 

1. They made in the parish and in the neighbouring places a 
collection which produced a hundred and twenty-cne guineas. 

2.. William, surnamed the Conqueror, king of England and duke 
of Normandy, was one of the greatest generals of the eleventh cen- 
tury; he was born at Falaise, and was the natural son of Robert 
duke of Normandy, and of Arlotte, a furrier's daughter. 

3. Make haste ; it will soon be ten o'clock. We shall have a 
good deal of difficulty to arrive in time. 

4. The winter was so severe in one thousand seven hundred and 
nine, that there was but one olive tree that resisted it*, in a plain 
where there had been more than ten thousand. 

5. It was the twenty -first of January, one thousand seven hun- 
dred and ninety-three, that the unhappy Louis tht sixteenth was led 
to the scaffold. 

(I.) Thev, on ; neighbouring places, voisioage, sing. ; collection, quete. 
(2.) William, Guillauu.p ; farrier % Iburreur. 

(3.) Make haste, s=e depecher ; will ba, ind-J ; a good deal of difficulty, bier 
dc Ja peine ; in, A. (•*.) Severe, rude ; but, ne que 5 had been, iud-2. 



PAKTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 321 

Je, tUy U, and Us, are always the subject ; these four 
pronouns cannot be separated from the verb which they 
govern, but by personal pronouns acting as a regimen, 
or by the negative ne. 

EXAMPLES. 
Je ne lui en veuz rien dire, I will say nothing to him about 

it. 
Tu en apprendras des nouvelles,. Thou wilt hear news of it. 
II nous raconta son histoire, He told us his history. 

lis sont survenus d Vimproviste, They are come unexpectedly. 

The two acting as an apostrophe are toi n\d vous, 
whether they stand alone, or are preceded by the inter- 
jection 6 ; as, toi, 6 toi: vous, 6 vous.H 

Me, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, and en, are always used 
as a regimen : — direct, when acted upon by the verb : 
— indirect, when referable to the prepositions a or de y 
(see p. 271, 272.) They always precede the verb, ex- 
cept in the imperative when affirmative ; and can never 

IF EXERCISE ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

1. The better to bear the irksomeuess of captivity and solitude, 
/ sought for books ; for /was overwhelmed with melancholy, for 
want of some knowledge to cherish and support my mind. 

2. Since thou art more obdurate and unjust than thy father, 
mayest thou suffer evils more lasting and more cruel than his ! 

3. What ! say they, do not men die fast enough without destroy- 
ing each other ? Life is so short, and yet it seems that it appears 
too long to them. Are they sent into the world to tear each 
Other in pieces, and to raa^e themselves wretched ? 

4. O tftou, ray son, my dear son, ease my heart : restore me 
what is dearer to me than my life. Restore to me my lost son, 
and restore thyself to thyself. 

5. O ye, who hear me with so much attention, believe not that 
I despise men : no, no, I am sensible how glorious it is to toil to 
make them virtuous and happy *, but this toil is full of anxieties 
and dangers. 

(].) To bear, supporter ; irksomeness, ennui ; overwhelmed with, accable de j 
for want, faute ; to cherish, qui put nourrir ; support, soutenir. 

(2.) Obdurate, dur ; mayat, pouvoir, subj-1 ; lasting, long 1 . 

(3.) Die fast enough, 6tre assez niortel ; destroying each other, se donoer en- 
core une mort precipitee ; sent into, sur ; world, terre j tear in pieces, sede- 
chirer •, make themselves, se reudre. 

(-1.) f'.nst, Kxdager ; restore, rendre ; lost (whom I have lost), perdre. 

(5.) / am sensible, savoir ; glorious, grand ; to toil, travailler a ; toil*, travail \ 
anaicty, inquietude. 



322 PAKTICtJLAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

be separated from it by any other word, except tout, rien, 
and jamais, which may intervene before an infinitive. 

EXAMPLES. 

CPesi leur tout refuser, It is refusing them every thing. 

C'est ne me rien permettre, It is allowing me nothing. 

11 a jure de ne lui jamais par- He has sworn he would never 
donner, pardon him. 

Me, te, se, form a regimen sometimes direct, and 
sometimes indirect; — direct, when they represent moi^ 
toi, soi ; — indirect, when they supply the place of a moi, 
k toi, a soi. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vous me soupgonnez mal d pro- You suspect me unjustly 

pos, 

Te Ven remercie, I thank thee for it. 

U se perd de gaidf6 de caur. He ruins himself out of wanton 

ness. 

Vous me donnez un sage conseil, You give me prudent advice. 

Te te donne cela, I give thee that. 

U se donne bien du mouvement, He is an active stirring man. 

Leur is alwavs indirect, as it stands for a eux, or a 
tiles. 

EXAMPLES. 

Te leur representai le tort, qu'ils, I represented to them the inju> 
ou qiCelles sefaisaient,\ ly they did themselves. 

EXERCISE. 

1. He has been speaking to them with such energy, as has as- 
tonished them. 

2. Women ought to be very circumspect ; for a mere appear 
unce is sometimes more prejudicial to them than a real fault. 

3. He comes up to me with a smiling countenance, and pres- 
sing my hand, says : My friend, I expect you to-morrow at my 
house. 

4. He said to me: Wilt thou torment thyself incessantly for 
advantages, the enjoyment 2 of which 1 could not render thee 
more happy ? Cast thy eyes round thee : see how every thing 

(1.) Such energy as, une force qui. 

(2.) Aleve, simple : more prejudicial, faire plus de tort. 

(3.) Comes up— with, aborder— de \ pressing, serrer ; my hand, la main ; says, 
fl me dit *, at my house, chez mci. 

(4.) Incessantly, sans cesse ; advantages, des biens ; could, savoir, cond-1 } cast, 
porter ; thy, art. j smiles, sourirc. 



PAKTICCLAli RULES GT THE TKOXOUNS. 323 

Le, la, Us, are always direct ; as, 
jc le vois,je la vols, I for I je vols luL je vois elle. 

jt les vois, I — I je vois eux.je vols elles. 

But y and en are always indirect ; as, 

Je n'y intends rien, j for I jc nentends rlen a cela. 

- roa/ez-wiii d'iceux ? 

u« ^eit ime certaine som- 
mc, or quantity d' argent. 



vou- } | 
lez-voas 1 ) \ 






avez-vous regit de V argent ? 
— oni.j'en ai recu. 

Though seeming to perform the function of regimen 
direct, in this last and other phrases of the same kind, 
it is obvious that there is in the word en an ellipsis, 
which may be readily supplied. See p. 106.J 



smiles at thee, and seems to invite thee to prefer a retired and tran- 
quil life to the tumultuous pleasures of a vain 2 world 1. 

5. The ambitious man * agitates, torments, and destroys him. 
self to obtain the places or the honours to which he aspires ; and 
when he has obtained them, ha is still not satisfied. 

(5.) D earner j to, pour. 

t EXERCISE. 

1. I have known him since his childhood, and I always loved 
him on account of the goodness of his character. 

2. This woman is always occupied in doing good works : you 
sec her constantly consoling the unhappy, relieving the poor, re- 
conciling enemies, and promoting the happiness of every one 
around her. 

3. The more you live with men, the more you will be convinced 
that it is necessary to know them well before you * form a con- 
nexion with them. 

4. Enjoy the pleasures of the world, I consent to it ; but never 
give yourself up to them. 

5. 1 shall never consent to that foolish scheme ; do not mention 
it any * more. 

6. Have you received some copies of the new work ? Yes, I 
have, (received some.) 

(1.) Have known, eonnaitre, ind-1 j loved, lnd-4 ) on account, a cause ; the 
goodness of his, (his good.) 

(?•) In, a ; works, ceuvreg, f. pi, ; constantly, sans cesse ; consoling, kc. inf-1 •, 
nlieving, agister j promoting, faire ; <v< -y ont around hi ; tout ce qui Penv*- 
Konne. 

('J.) Live, in<]-7 ; be convinced, se convaincre : before, avaiit de 5 fonn a con- 
nexion, vous Her. 

(4.) Enjoy, jouir de ; give yourself vp, so livrer. 

f b.) Scheme, entreprise •, mention, psrler de. \Ck) Copies, ©xemplah*. 



324 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

The pronouns, which are sometimes the subject and 
sometimes the regimen, are nous, vous, moi, toi, lui, elle, 
eux, elles. 

Nous and vous are the subject in, nous aimons, vous 
aimez ; the regimen direct in, Us nous aiment, Us vous 
aiment; and indirect in, Us nous parlcnt, Us vous par - 
lent. 

In general, moi, toi, are only the subject by apposi- 
tion, or reduplication, whether they precede, or follow 
the verb, as, 

Moi, dont ildichire la reputation, I, whose reputation he is asper- 

je ne lui ai jamais rendu que sing, always did him acts of 

de boiis offices, kindness. 

Toi, qui fais tant le brave, tu Wouldsl thou, who pretendest 

oserais, &c. to be so brave, dare, &c. ! 

Je pritends, moi, I do maintain, I. 

Tu dis done, toi, Thou sayest then, thou. 

Rem. Sometimes the personal pronouns je and tu are 
not expressed, but understood, as, 

Mo:, trahir le meilleur de men I, betray my best friend I 

amis ! 
Faire une Idcheti, toi ! Thou, be guilty of such base- 

ness ! 

that is, Je voudrais, &c. ! tu pourrais, &c. ! 

They are likewise the subject, when they are placed 
in a kind of apposition expressed by ce and il in imper- 
sonal verbs, as, qui fut bien aise ? cefut moi ; ce ne pcut 
Hre que toi ; que vous reste-t-il ? — moi. 

After a conjunction, they are either the subject, or 
regimen, according to the nature of the phrase, as, nous 
y etions, mon pire et moi ; il ne craint ni toi ni moi. 

In phrases which are not imperative, toi and moi can 
only be the object by apposition before or after the 
verb, as, voudriez-vous me perdre, moi, votre allie', <kc. 
toi, je te soupconnerais de perfidie ! 

After a preposition, they alone can be employed, as, 
vous servirez-vous de moi ? selon moi, vous avez raison ; 
il est f ache' contre toi. 

What has just been remarked of toi and moi, is 
applicable to lui, but with tb»« difference, that lui can 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PROXOU^S. 925 

only be the object after ne — que, signifying only, cr in 
distributive phrases, as, 

JTaimez que lui, je ne le trouve That you should like only him, 
pas mauvais; mais ne me I do not disapprove, but do 
haissezpas. not hate me. 

So, p rote gez -nous, lui, a cause de, <fec. et inoi, parte 
que, &c. we may likewise say by apposition, aimez-le, 
lui qui, &c. 

Eux is employed in the same manner as lui, but dif- 
fers from it in this, that it cannot be the regimen indi- 
rect, except after a preposition, as, parliez-vous tfeux ? 
est-ce a eux que vous parlez ? 

Rem. Lui and eux may be the subject in distributive 
phrases without being in apposition, as, 

Mes frdres et mon cousin 'in'ont My brothers and cousin assist- 
secouru ; eux in'ont relev6, et ed me ; they took me up, and 
lui m'apanst, he dressed my wounds. 

The natural office of elle and elles is to form the sub- 
ject ; however they are susceptible of all the other uses 
just mentioned, except that they cannot be the regimen 
indirect, unless preceded by a preposition, as, c'est a elles 
que je parle.f 

t EXERCISE. 

1. In the education of youth, we should propose to ourselves 
to cultivate, to polish their understanding, and thus to enable 
them 10 fill with dignity the different stations assigned them ; but, 
above all. we ought to instruct them in that religious worship 
which God requires of them. 

2. What ! you would suffer yourself to be overwhelmed by ad- 
versity ! 

3. / / stoop to the man w T ho has imbrued his hands in the blood 
of h'13 king ! 

4. Thou! take that undertaking upon thyself? Canst * thoa 
think of it. 



(1.) Yout h, jcuties gens ; should, devoir, ind-1 5 to cultivate, (to tbem) ; to po- 
lish, (to them,) orner 5 understanding, Tesprit ; enable, disposer ; stations, plaot 
(tvhir h arc) assigned, (to) them ; worship, culte 5 requires, demander. 

(2.) buffer yourself, se latoer, cornl-1 ; to be ove)-w helmed, abattre. 

(•*.) *lonp to, s'abaisser devant, subj-1 ; imbrued, souiller ', in, de. 

(t.) Take upon thyself, se charger, cond-1 ; of it, y. 

29 



326 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 



II. 



ON THE PRONOUN SOt. 

Soi is generally accompanied by a preposition, and 
i<s used in phrases, where there is an indeterminate 
proaou , ei ter expresses rstood : on doit rare- 

ment parler de soi; il est essentiel de prendre garde a soi. 



5. Your two brothers and mine take charge of the enterprise ; 
they find the money, and he will manage the work. 

6. His /who have engaged him to undertake this journey. 

7. It is thou who hast brought this misfortune on thyself. 

8. When you are at Rome, write to me as often a? you can, 
and give me an account of every thing that can interest me 

9. He told it to thee thyself. 

10. Fortune, like a traveller, shifts from inn to inn : if she 
lodges to-day with me, to-morrow, perhaps, she will lodge with 
thee. 

11. Whom dost thou think we were talking of? — it was of 
thee. 

12. Descartes deserves immortal praise, because it is he who 
has made reason 2 triumph 3 over authority in philosophy. 

13. He is dissatisfied with himself. 

14. She is never satisfied zcilh herself 

15. The indiscreet often betray themselves. 

16. Saumaise, speaking of the English authors, said, that he had 
learned more from them than from any other. 

17. To love a person, is to render him, on every occasion, all 
the services in our power, and to afford him, in society, every 
comfort that depends upon us. 



(5.) Take charge, se charger ; fnd, fournir j money, fonds, pi. $ manage, con- 
luire,ind-l. 

(6.) Undertake, faire } journey, voyage. 

*7.) Hast brought on thyself, s'attirer, ind-4. 

(8.) Are, ind-7 5 can, ind-7 ; give, faire; an account, le detail. 

(9.S Told, dire, ind-4. 

(10.) Shift* from inn to inn, changer d'auberge ; with, chez j she will lodge, 
Jte £tre. 

(ll.J Were talking, parier, subj-2. 

(12.) Triumph over, triompher de. 

(13.) 75 dissatisfied with, se d^plaire. 

(14.) Satisfied with, content de. 

(15.) Betray, se trahir. 

(17.) In our power, dont on fitre capable 3 afford, procurer 6 ) comfort. agr6 
ment } depends upon, dependre de. 



ARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 327 

In this case, it is the regimen indirect ; but it may be 
employed without a preposition. 

1. With the verb itre, as, En cherchant a tromper 
les autres, c'est souvent soi qxCon trompe, or on est sou- 
vent trompe' soi-m&me, in attempting to deceive others, 
we frequently deceive ourselves. In tin's situation it is 
the subject. 

2. After ne que, or by opposition, as, 

N 1 aimer que soi, c'est rfetre Ion To love only ourselves, is being 

a rien, good for very little. 

Penser ainsi, c'est s'aveuglersoi- To think in this manner, is to 

meme, blind onp's-self. 

It is in these examples the regimen ; but when de 
soi and en soi are used in a definitive sense in speaking 
of things, they mean de sa nature, and dans sa nature.^ 



III. 

cases where the pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui, lear, 

MAY APPLY TO THINGS. 

The personal pronouns die and elles, when the regi- 
men, generally apply to persons only. Thus, in speak- 

t EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUN soi. 
1. To excuse in one's-self the follies which one cannot excuse in 
others, \ c to pre * fool o,<<,'s-sf.Ifi.o seeing others so. 

To be too much dissatisfied with ourselves, is a weakness^ 
but to be too m id (with ourselves) is (a) folly. 

3. We eught to despise no one : how often have we needed the 
assistance of one more insignificant than ourselves ? 

4. If we did not attend so much to ourselves, there would be 
less egotism in the world. 

5. Vice is odious In itself. 

6. The loadstone attracts iron (to itself.) 



(I.) Follies, sottiscs ; others, autrui ; prefer, aimer mieux )fool, sot ; to seeing, 
que de voir ; i 

(3.) We night, falloir, ind-1 ; how often, combien de fois ; we, on ; needed the 
assistance, n'avoir pas besoir) ; insignxjicmil , petit. 

(4.) W%, on •, attend to, s'occupcr de ; egotism, £golsme. 

'6.) Loadstone aim 



328 TAUTICULAR RULES OF THE PEOXOUXS. 

ing of a woman, we must say, Je m'approchai d'elle, je 
m'assis pr£s (Telle ; but, in speaking of a table, Je nCen 
approclmi, je m'assis aupres. 

However, with the prepositions avec, apres, a, de, 
pour, en, &c. they may be applied to things. Thus it 
is correct to say of a river, 

Cettc riviere est si rapide, quand That river is so rapid when it 

elle deborde, qu'clle entraine overflows, that it carries 

avec elle tout ce qiCellc ren- away every thing it meets 

centre ; elle ne laisse apres with in its course ; it leaves 

die que du sable et des cail- nothing behind but sand and 

loux, pebbles. 

— of an enemy V army, 

Nous marchdmcs d die. We marched up to it. 

— of things, reasons, truth, &c. as, 

Ces cluoses sont bonnes Welles- These things are good in thera- 

mtmes, selves. 

J'aimc la verite au point queje I love truth to that degree, that 

sacrijicerais tout pour elle^ I would sacrifice every thing 

for it. 

Ces raisons sont solides en elks- Those reasons are solid in them- 

mimes, selves. 

After the verb Hre, they are applied only to persons, 
and likewise when they are followed by the relatives 
qui and que, as, Cesta elle, e'est d'elles que je parte, 
e'est elle.mhne qui vienU 

The same may be said of the pronoun eux, which is 
aiso generally applied to persons only, yet custom al- 
lows us to say, 

Ce olden et ces oiseaux font lout This dog and these birds are my 
monplaisvr ; jen'aimequ'cuz; only pleasure, I love nothing 
cux seuls sont men amusement ; but them ; they alone are my 
je ne songe qu'd eux. diversion : I think of nothing 

else. 

Lui and leur are generally applied to persons, but are 
sometimes used in speaking of animals, plants, and even 
inanimate objects, as, 

Ces chcvmix sont rendus, faitcs- Those horses are exhausted, 

leur dormer un pen de r>n, give them a little wine. 

Ces orangers vont pf.rlr, si c:i ne Those orange-trees will die un- 

leur donne de Veau, less they have a little water. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 329 

Ces murs sont mat faits, on ne Those walls are not skilfully 
Uur a pas donn6 assez de built, they are not sufficiently 
talus, sloped upward. 

Upon these previous observations then may be found- 
ed the following 

Rule. The pronouns elle, dies, eux, lui, and leur, 
ought never to be applied to things, except when cus- 
tom does not allow them to be replaced by the pronouns 
y and enj\ 
' t EXERCISE. 

I. Virtus is the first of blessings ; it is from it alone we are to 

ie iaLyrlntL had been built upon the lake Maeris, and they 
had given it a prospect proportioned to its grandeur. 

3. Mountains are frequented on account of the air one breathes 
on them : how many people are indebted to them for the recovery 
of their health ? 

4. War brings in its train numberless evils. 

5. It is a delicate 2 affair 1 which must not be too deeply inves- 
tigated, it must be lightly passed over. 

6. I have had my house repaired, and have given it quite * a 
\- appearance. 

7. Those trees are too much loaded ; strip than of part of their 
fruit. 

8. This book cost mc a great deal, but I am indebted to it for 
my knowledge. 

9. Self-love is captious ; we, however, take it for our * guide ; 
to it are all our actions directed, and/ro??i it we take counsel. 

10. These arguments, although very solid in themselves, yet 
made no impression upon him, so powerful a chain is habit. 

II. These reasons convinced me, and by them I formed my d&- 
cision. 

12. Heave you the care of that bird ; do not forget to give it 

leu 5 art, devoir. 

(~.j Had bctn built, on batir, ind-o ; prospect, vue. 

(3.) On account, a cause ; brtath.es, respirer ; en them,y ; are indebted for, de- 
voir •, recovery, retablisseiuent. 

( (.; Urines, entrainer ; in its train, avec elle ; numberless, bien de. 

(5.) Affatr, matiere ; must, ind-1 ; be deeply investigated, approlbndir, inf-1 ; 
be passed, glisser ; over, dessus. 

'(re had, faire, ind-4 ; uppcaravce, air. 
trip, dter : of part, une paitie. 

(8.) A great deal, cber ; knowledge, instruction, 

( '.j >> '. (h is it that we :) to it, (h is to it tjat we direct all, be ;) direct, 
rappo: fc, (and it IB from it tlwit. 

(l<'.)..Vo, d« aucun ; so strong, fcc. (so much habit is a, tc.) habit, habitude 

(1 1.) And from, (and it is from then that :; by, d'ajaes .; formed my deciiion, 
»c decider. 

29* 



330 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS, 

IV. 

DIFFICULTY RESPECTING THE PRONOUN U EXPLAINED 

Le, la, les, arc sometimes pronouns, and sometimes 
articles. The article is always followed by a noun, le 
roi, la reine, les hommes ; whereas the pronoun is always 
joined to a verb, je le connais, je la respecte, je les estime. 

The pronoun le may supply the place of a substantive, 
or an adjective, or even of a member of a sentence. 

There is no difficulty, when it relates to a whole 
member of a sentence ; it is then always put in the 
masculine singular, as, 

On doit s'accommoder d Vhu- We ought to accommodate our- 
meur des autres autant qu'on selves to the temper of others 
lepeuf,§ as much as we can. 



Nor is there any difficulty when le supplies the place 
of a substantive ; it then always takes the gender and 
number of that substantive, as, Madame, etes-vous la 
mire de cet enfant ? — Oui,je la suis. Madame, are you 
the mother of that child ? — Yes, I am. Mesdames, 
£tez-vous les parentes doni Monsieur m'a parU ? — Qui, 
nous les sommes. 

Rem. Though the word relating to the following 
questions, is not expressed in English, yet it must 

§ EXERCISE. 

1. The laws of nature and decency oblige us equally to defend 
the honour and interest of our parents, when we can do it without 
injustice. 

2. We ought not to condemn, after their death, those that have 
not been condemned during their life. 



(1.) Decency , bienseance. 

(2.) IVe ought, falloir } condemned, 1 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 331 

always be so in French : this word is le, which takes 
either gender, or number, according to its relation. IT 

It only remains, therefore, to lay down the following 
Rule. The pronoun le takes neither gender nor 
number, when occupying the place of an adjective. 
EXAMPLES. 

Madame, etes-vous enrhumee 1 — Oui, je le suis. 
Mesdames, etes-vous contentes de ce disccurs ? — Oui, nous le 
sommes. 
Y eut-il jamais une femme plus malheureuse que je le suis ? 

Rem. This rule is observed, when the substantives 
are used adjectively, as, 

Madame, etes-vous mere ? — Oui, je le suis. 
Mesdames, etes-vous parentes ?— Oui, nous le sommes. 
Elle est filie, et le sera toule sa vie. 

But not if the adjectives be used substantively, as, 

Madame, etes-vous la malade ? — Oui, je la suis. 

Therefore this question ; Etes-vous jille deM. leduc? 

is to be answered, Oui, je le suis ; but this, Etes-vous 

Ui J Vie de M, le due ? — Oui, je la suis.^ 

H EXERCISE. 

1. Is that your idea ? — Can you doubt tliat it is ? 

2. Are you Mrs. Such-a-one ? — Yes, ! am. 

3. Are those your servants ? — Yes, they are. 

(l.) Irfta, pensee ; that il is, ce 6lfe,subj-l: 

(J.) *V7rs. Madame ; fxwh-a-ov.t, un tel. (3.) Those, ce Id *, they, ce. 

t EXERCISE. 

1. Ladies, are you glad to have seen the new piece / — Yes, we 
are. 

2. I, a * slave ! I, born to command ! alas ! it is but too true 
that I am so. 

3. She was jealous of her authority, and she ought to be so. 

4. Was there ever a girl more unhappy, and treated with more 
ridicule than I am ? 

5. You have found me amiable : why have I ceased to appear 
so to you ? 

(5. Have we ever been so quiet as we are ? 
7. Madam, are you married ! — Yes, 1 am. 
b. Madam, are you the bride I — Yes, I am. 

(1.) Ladies, Mewlames. (-'.) >/«rc, esciave •, but, m> que 

(3.) Ought, devoir, ind-^. (J.) H'ilh more ridicule, plus lidlculement. 



332 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

The same rule is likewise observed with the article 
placed before plus, or moins, and an adjective. It 
takes neither gender nor number, when there is no 
comparison, as, 

Le lune ne nous iclaire pas au- The moon does not give us so 
tant que le soleil, meme quand much light as the sun, even 
elle est le plus britlante, when it shines brightest. 

But it takes them when there is comparison, as, 
Be to ut&: lesplan&tes, la lune est Of all the planets, the moon is 
la plus brillanle pour nous,\ the most brilliant to us. 



REPETITION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Rule I. Pronouns expressing the first and second 
persons, when the subject must be repeated before all 
the verbs, if those verbs are in different tenses ; it is al- 
ways even better to repeat them, when the verbs are in 
the same tense. 

EXAMPLE. 
Je soutiens et je soutiendrai tou- I maintain, and (I) will always 

jours, maintain. 

Vous dites, et vous avez toujours You say, and (you) have always 

dit, said. 

Accable de douleur, je m'ecriai et Overwhelmed with sorrow, I 

je dis, exclaimed and (I) said. 

Nous nous promenions sur le haut We were walking upon the 

du rocher, et nous voyions sous summit of the r^ck, and we 

nos pieds, &c. saw under our feet, &c. 

1T EXERCISE. 

1. This father could not bring himself to condemn his children, 
even when they were most guilty. 

2. This woman has the art of shedding tears, even when she is 
least afflicted. 

3. Out * of so many criminals, only the most guilty should be 
punished. 

4. Although that woman displays more fortitude than the 
others, she is not, on that account, the least distressed. 

(].) Could, ind-9; bring hinuelf, se resoudre. 
(2.) Shedding, repandre de ; even when, dans le temps m£me que. 
(J.) Only the most, &c. (one must punish only the most guilty ;) only, ne que.' 
(4.) Displays, montrcr: foriit.de, fermete; on that account, pour cela ; 
distressed, afflige. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 333 

In all cases these pronouns must be repeated, though 
the tenses of the verbs do not change, if the first of these 
is followed by a regimen, as, 
Vous aimerez le Seigneur xotre You shall love the Lord your 

Dieu, et vous observtrez sa God, and (you shall) observe 

/oi, II his law. 

Rule II. The pronouns of the third person, when 
they form the subject, are hardly ever repeated before 
verbs, except when those verbs are in different* tenses, 
EXAMPLES. 

La honne grace ne gate rien ; A graceful manner spoils no- 
elle ajoute d la heauti, releve thing : it adds to beauty, 
la modestic, et y donne du lus~ heightens modesty, and gives 
tre, it lustre. 

II ri a jamais rien valu, et ne vau- He never was good for any 
dra jamais rien, thing, and never will be. 

U est arrici ce matin, et it repar- He arrived this morning, and 
tira ce soir, (he) will set off again this 

evening. 

However, perspicuity requires the repetition of the 
pronoun, when the second verb is preceded by a long 
incidental phrase, as — II fond sur son ennemi, et apres 

f EXERCISE ON THE REPETITION OF THE PER- 
SONAL PRONOUN. 

1. My dear child, /love you, and /shall never cease to love 
you : but it is that very love that I have for you which obliges me 
to correct you for your faults, and to punish you when you de- 
re it. 

/ hear-1 and admired these words, which comforted me a 
little, but my mind was not sufficiently at liberty to make him a 
reply. 

!). Thou art young, and doubtless thou aimest at the glory of 
surpassing thy comrades. 

4. God has said : you shall love your enemies, bless those that 
curse you, do good to those that persecute you, and pray for those 
who slander you. What a difference between this morality and 
that of philosophers ! 

(1.) Correct for, reprendre de. 

(2 .) H'ard, £couter, ind- ; words, diseours, sing - . ; mymivd, &c. (I had not the 
mini, Lc.) sufficiently at liberty, n^cv. libre •, to vuike a reply, r£pondre A. 
(3 ) .limert at, a«;jurer a ; surpasrincr, I'emporter, kc. 
(4.) Slander, calomnier ; bet-ween, de 5 and that, a. celle. 



334 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

Vavoir saisi d'une main victorieuse, il le renverse, com- 
me le cruel aquilon abat les tendres moissom qui dorent 
la campagne."\ 

Rule III. Any personal pronoun, when the subject 
must be repeated before verbs, when passing from an 
affirmation to a negation, and vice versa, or when the 
verbs are joined by any conjunction, except et and nu 

EXAMPLE. 
II veut et il ne veiU pas, He will and he will not. 

// donne d'exceilens principes, He lays down excellent princi- 
parce qxCil salt que les progres pies, because he knows that 
uithieurs en dependent, upon them depends all further 

progress. 
E donne et recoit, He gives and receives. 

11 ne donne ni ne reqoit,% He neither gives nor receives. 

t EXERCISE. 

1. He took the strongest cities, conquered the most consider- 
able provinces, and overturned the most powerful empkes. 

2. He takes a hatchet, completely cuts down the mast which 
was already broken, throws it into the sea, jumps upon it amidst 
the furious billows, calls me by my name, and encourages me to 
follow him. 

3. He marshals the soldiers, marches at their head, advances 
in good order towards the enemy, attacks and breaks them, and, 
after having entirely routed them, (he) cuts them to pieces. 

(1.) Overturned, renverser. 

(2.) Completely cuts dozvn, achever de couper ; jumps upon it, s'elancer des- 
sus 5 billows, onde. 

(3.) Marshals, ranger en bataille ; breaJcs, renverser ; entirely routed, achever 
de mettre eu desordre \ cuts, tailler. 

t EXERCISE. " 

1. It is inconceivable how whimsical she is; from one moment 

to another she will' and she will not. 

1. The Jews are forbidden to work on the sabbath ; they are 

as it * were * locked in slumber ; they light no fire, and carry no 

water. 

3. For nearly a week she has neither eaten nor drunk. 

4. The soldier was not repressed by authority, but stopped 
from satiety and shame. 

(1.) (She is of a whimsical cast inconceivable) whimsical east, bizarrerie, f. 

(2.) (It is forbidden to), jorbiddtn, defendre ; sabbath, jour du sab bat ; locked, 
enchain e ; sl.nnher, repos ; light, nllumer. 

(3.) For, depuis ; nearly, prvs de ; a week, butt jours ; has eatcn...drvnlc, 
ind-1. (J.) Repressed, vepriiner j stopped, s'arrtHer, ind-3 .from, par. 



PAETICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 335 

Rule IV. Pronouns, when they form the regimen, 
repeated before any verb. 

EXAMPLE. 
ViUede ses malheurs le poar- The ilea of Iris misfortunes 

suit, le tourmente et Vacca- pursues (him), tc-ments 
He } (him), and overwhelms him. 

Jl nous enniiie et nous olsede He wearies (us) and besets us 
s i ns cesse, an ceasingly. 

Exception. It is not repeated before such compound 
verbs as express the repetition of the same action, when 
the verbs are in the same tense, as, 

Je vous le dis et redis, il le fait et refait sans cesse. H 



VI. 

relation of the pronouns of the third person to 
a noun as expressed before. 

Rule. The pronouns of the third person, il, Us, elle, 
dies, le, la, les, must always relate to a noun, whether 
subject or regimen, taken only in a definite sense, before 
expressed in the same tense, but they must not be ap- 
plied to a subject and regimen at the same time. 

EXAMPLE. 
La rose est la reine des flturs, The rose is the queen of flow- 
aussi esf-elle Vemhlemc da La ers ; therefore it is the em- 
beautc, blem of beauty. 

IT EXERCISE. 

1. It is teste that selects the expressions, that combines, ar- 
ranges, and varies them, so as to produce the greatest effect. 

2. Horace answered his stupid critics not so much to instruct 
them, as to expose their ignorance, and let them see that they did 
not even know what poetry was. 

3. Man embellishes nature itself; he cultivates, extends, and 
polishes it. 

(I.) 8§ «t to, de manure a ce qu'elles, iabj-1. 

(2.) Stupid, lot ; not so much, moins ; as to, pour j shoiv, (to them,) their, Si*. 
let ste % faire entendre •, was, c'^tait que. 



336 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

3'ai'me Pananas ; il est exquis, I like the pine-apple ; it b d«. 

licious. 

But the two following sentences would be equivocal : 

Racine a imit6 Euripide, en Racine has imitated Euripides 
tout ce qu'il a de plus beau in all lb at he has most beau- 
dans sa Ph&dre, tiful in his Phedra. 

Le legal publia une sentence The legate published a sen- 
d'interdit ; il dura trois mois, tence of interdiction ; it last- 

ed three months. 

As in the first of these two sentences il may relate, 
either to Racine or to Euripides, and from the con- 
struction of the second sentence, il cannot, as it should, 
relate to interdit. Again, it is not altogether correct, 
to say, 

Nulle paix pour Vimpie ; il la No peace for the wicked : he 
cherche, e]\efuit, seeks it, it flies. 

Because, from the construction, the pronouns la and 
die seem to he used for nulle paix, whereas the mean- 
ing requires that they should supply the place of the 
substantive paix, in the affirmative. IF 

% EXERCISE. 

1. Poetry embraces all sorts of subjects ; it takes in every- 
thing that is most brilliant in history ; it eiders the fields of 
philosophy; it soars to the skies ; it plunges into the abyss: it 
penetrates to the dead ; it makes the universe its domain ; and 
if this world be not sufficient, it creates new ones, which it em- 
bellishes with enchanting abodes, which it peoples with a thou- 
sand various inhabitants. 

2. Egypt aimed at greatness ; and wished to * strike the eye 
at a distance, always pleasing it by the justness of proportion. 

3. Egypt, satisfied with its own territory, where every thing 
was in abundance, thought not of conquests ; it extended itself 
in another manner, by sending colonies to every part of the globe, 
and with them civilization and laws. 



(1) Subjects, marie 1 re 5 takes in. se charger de ; that is. r avoir tie ; (in) the 
fields, soaj-s to, s'elancer dans 5 plunges, s'enlbncer | to. chez ; (its domain of 
the universe ;) be sufficient, suflire ; ones, mondc, enchanting, enchant^ ; abode*, 
demeure ; various, divers- 

(2.) Greatness, grand ; wished, vouloir $ eyt, pi 5 at a distance, dans l^Iol- 
gnement ; (in) pleasing, contenter. 

(3) It as in abundance , abondcr ; thought r.f, longer a ', t'^de', by, en ) to- 
par ; part of the globe, terre. 



PARTICULAR BX7LES OF THE PKONOUN8. 337 

II. 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

EXPLANATION OF SOME DIFFICULTIES ATTENDANT ON 
THE USE OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

The possessive pronouns son, sa, ses, four, fours, relate 
either to pronouns, to things personified, or simply to 
things. If they relate to persons, or things personified, 
their place can never be supplied by others : but if they 
relate to things, the following rules must be observed. 

The possessive pronouns are always employed, 

1. When the object to which they relate is either 
named, or designated by a personal pronoun in the same 
member of a phrase. 

EXAMPLES. 
L'Angleterre itend son com- England extends her commerce 

mercepar toute la terre, over the whole globe. 

Elle enzoie ses flottes dans toutes She sends her fleets into every 

les mers, part of the ocean. 

2. Before a noun, when qualified even by a single 
adjective, unless the noun form the regimen. 

EXAMPLES. 

Ses ressources immenses sont Her immense resources are in- 
inSpuisables, exhaustible. 

3. After every preposition. 

EXAMPLE. 

C'cst par sa position, jointe d la It is by her situation, joined to 
_fsse dc son gouvernement, the wisdom of her govern- 
ijiCelle rtAinit dans son sein de ment, that she unites suck 
si grands avantages, vast advantages within her- 

self. 



4. The Messiah is expected by the Hebrews ; he comes and 
calls the Gentiles, as it had been announced by the prophecies ; 
the people that acknowledge him as come, is incorporated with 
the people that expected kirn, without a single moment of inter- 
ruption. 

(4.) Gentiles, Gentil ; (the prophecies had announced it j) acknowledge s t r«COtt- 
naltre ; with, a ; without, sans qu'il y ait } tingle, seul. 

30 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

4. Before all words which can govern the preposi- 
tion de. 

EXAMPLES. 
Son parlement est le sanctuaire Her parliament i3 the seat of the 

de la plus sage politique, wisest policy. 

Son roin'a de pouvoir que pour Her king possesses power only- 
Zaire lebien, to do good. 

On all other occasions, the article, with the pronoun 
en, placed immediately before the verb, must be substi- 
tuted. 

EXAMPLE. 
V*ut cnfin contribue d ra'en In short every thing conspires 
faire aimer le sejour ; j'en to make me love that resi- 
admire surtout Vexacte po- dence : I particularly admire 
lice, en mime temps que les the strictness of her police, 
lois w'en paraisstnt extreme- at the same time when her 
ment sagesj laws appear to me extremely 

wise. 



t EXERCISE ON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. A new custom was a phenomenon in Egypt : for which rea- 
son, there never was a people that preserved so long its customs, 
its laws, and even its ceremonies. 

2. Solomon abandons himself to the love of women : his un- 
derstanding declines, his heart weakens, and his piety degenerates 
into idolatry. 

3. That superb temple was -upon the summit of a hill : its co- 
lumns were of Parian marble, and its gates of gold. 

4. Laocoon is one of the finest statues in France : not only the 
whole, but all its features, even the least, are admirable. 

5. The Thames is a magnificent river : its channel is so wide 
and so deep below London-bridge, that several thousands of ves- 
sels lie at their ease in it. 

6. This fine country is justly admired by foreigners : its climate 
is delightful, its soil fruitful, its laws wise, and its government just 
and moderate. 

7. The trees of that orchard have sun enough, yet its fruits are 
but indifferent. 



(1.) Phenomenon, prodige ; for which reason, aussi ; a, de ; preserved, subj -3. 
(2.) Understanding, esprit : declines, baisser ; weakens, s aiiaiblir. 
(3.) Summit, haut 5 hill, colline ; Parian, de Pan*. 
?4.) In, qu'il y ait en 5 the whole, l'ensemble *, even, jusqu'd. 
(5.) Magnificent, superbe 5 channel, lit ; below, au desscv.s de ; lie at, £tre a j 
their, art. ; in it, y. (ri.) Justly, avec raison ', soil, 60I. 

(1.) Have sun enough, £tre bien expose ; but indijftrent, assez nuiuvaid. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 339 

Again, when there exists any doubt whether the pos- 
sessive pronoun ought to be used, or not before a noun 
that is the regimen, the following is the 

Rule. The article, not the possessive pronoun, must 
be put before a noun forming the regimen, when a pro- 
noun which is either subject, or regimen, sufficiently 
supplies the place of that possessive, or when there is 
no sort of ambiguity. 

EXAMPLES. 

Sm mat d la tdte t I have the head-ache. 

Ilfaudrait lui couper la jambe, It would be necessary to take 

off his leg. 
Ce cheval a pris le mors aux That horse has run away. 
dents, X 

8. The Seine has its source in Burgundy, its mouth is at Havre- 
de-Grace. 

9. The pyramids of Egypt astonish, both by the enormity of 
their bulk, and the justness of their proportions. 

10. Egypt alone could erect monuments for posterity ; its obe- 
lisks are to this day, as well for their beauty as for their height, the 
principal ornaments of Rome. 

11. History and geography throw mutual light on each other? 
a * perfect knowledge of them ought to enter into the plan of good 
education. 



(8.) Mouth, embouchure ', Havre y le Havre. 
(9.) Both, egttleinent et ; bulk, masse •, and, et par. 

(10.) Egypt alone could, il n'appartenait qu'a i'Egypte de ; erect, Slaver $ to 
this day, encore aujourd'hui ; as well for, autant par ; height, hauteur. 
(1 1.) Throw mutual light, &c. s'eclairer I'une par l'autre ; of them, (their.) 

X EXERCISE. 

1. During the whole winter he has had bad eyes. 

2. I had a fall yesterday, and hurt wy back and head. 

3. It would be better for a man to lose his life than forfeit * his 
honour by a criminal 2 action 1. 

4. In this bloody battle, he received a wound by a shot in hit 
right arm, and another in his left leg : by dint of care his arm wan 
%aved, but it was necessary to amputate his leg. 

(1.) Hat had bad, avoir nv.tl &. 

(■2.) Had a fall, se laisser tomber ; hurt, se faire mal a ; back, reins, pi. 
H ouhL be better, valoir mieux, cond-1. 

(4.) . 1 wound by a shot, un coup Ue feu ; in, a : by dint, A force ; his arm.k^ 
(they saved the arm to him •,) was necessary, falloir, ind-3 ; to * amputate,* to 
him. 



340 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

But should either the personal pronoun, or circum- 
stances, not remove all ambiguity, then the possessive 
pronoun must be joined to the noun, as, 

Je vols que m&jambe s'enfle, I see that rny leg is swelling. 

II lui donna sa main & baiser, He gave him 'his hand to kiss. 

Elle a donne hardimeut son bras She courageously presented her 
au chirurgien,^ arm to the surgeon. 

Ma, not la, because I may also see the leg of another 
person swelling. 

Rem. 1. Although verbs which are conjugated with 
two pronouns of the same person generally remove 
every kind of amphibology, yet custom authorizes some 
familiar expressions, in which the possessive pronoun 
seems to be redundant, as, 

II se tientferme sur ses pieds, He stands firm upon his feet. 

Je Vai vu, de mes propres yeux. I have seen it with my own eyes 

2. When speaking of an habitual complaint, the pos- 
sessive pronoun is properly used, as, 
Sa migraine I'a repris, His head-ache is returned. 

The possessive pronouns are subject to the same rules 
as the article ; they must therefore be repeated before 
all substantives which are either subject or regimen, and 
before adjectives which express different qualities, as, 

Son pbre, sa mere, el ses frdres His father, mother, and bro 

sont d% retour, thers are come back. 

Je lui ai montre mes plus beaux I hav r e shewn him my finest and 

et mes plus vilains habits, my ugliest dresses. 

IT EXERCISE. 

1. In this interview, they made each other presents; she gave 
him hor portrait, and he gave her his finest diamond. 

2. A young surgeon preparing to bleed the great Conde, this 
prince said to him smiling, do hot you tremble, to bleed me ? I, 
my lord, no, certainly ; it is not I, it is you who ought to trem- 
ble. The prince, charmed with the reply, immediately gave him 
his arm. 



(1.) Interview, entrevue ; made each other, se foire mutuellement. 

(2.) Preparing, se disposer ; bleed, saigner ; smiling, d'ua air riaut ; it is, 
not I, (it is not to me ;) it is you, (it is to you ;) u-ho ought to, de *, reply, re 
partie. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 341 

This rule, which is seldom observed in English, is 
common in French to all pronominal adjectives.y 



III. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Qui, when it is the subject, may very properly relate 
both to persons and things. 

EXAMPLES. 
L'hommt qui joue perd son The man who gaaies loses Ms 

temps, time. 

Le liv r re, qui plait le plus, rtest The book which pleases mostls 
pas toujours le plus utile, not always the most useful. 

But when it is the regimen, it can only be used of 
persons, or of things personified, whether the regimen 
be direct, or indirect. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quand on est dtlicat ct sage He who is wise and discriminate 
dans ses goitis, on ne s'at- in his choice, does not form 
tachtpas, sans savoir qui Von an attachment, withoutknow- 
aime, ing the person he loves. 

t EXERCISE. 

1. Whatever he may do, he always finds himself safe. 

2. Can you still doubt the truth of what I tell you? Would yon 
ask a stronger proof than that I give you, it is that I heard it, yes, 
heard it with my own ears. 

3. My gout does not allow me a moment's repose. 

4. It ifl in vain that I exhort you to work and study : your idle- 
ness, that cruel disease under* which you labour, renders useless 
all the exhortations of friendship. 

[f vou wish to be beloved, fail not to perform the promise* 
you have just made. 

6. In the retreat that T have chosen for myself, my study and 
my garden are my greatest delight. 

7. He brought me into his laboratory, and shewed me his large 
and small vessels. 

(1.) Finds himself, se retrouvcr ; safe, sur ses jambes. 

' 'cm, cond-1 ; doubt, douter de ; ask, exiger. 
(.5.) AUotD) kisser. 

(l.) h is in vain that I, je avoir beau ; you labour, vous travailler. 
(5.) Fail not, ne pas manquer ; perform, reuiplir ; have just made, venir <te 
faire. 
(tf.) For myself, (to roe ;) study, cabinet *, are, faire ; greatest, plus cber. 
(7.) Brought, mener ; laboratory, laboratoire *, vessel:, vaisseau. 

30* 



342 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

L'homme a qui appartient ce The man to whom this fine 

beaujardin est trds-riche, garden belongs is very rich. 

Lafemme de qui vous parlez, The woman of whom you are 

speaking. 

Rem. When the regimen indirect is expressed by 
the preposition de, then do?il should be preferred to de 
qui. It is better to say : la femme dont vous parlez ; 
however, when the verb expresses a kind of transfer or 
conveyance, de qui must be used, as, 
Celui de qui je tiens cette nou- The person from whom I had 
velle, that intelligence. 

Rule I. Qui must not be separated from its antece- 
dent, when that antecedent is a noun. 

EXAMPLE. 

Un jeune homme qui pst docile A young man who is obedient 
aux conseils avian lux donne, to the advice that is given 
et qui aime d en recevoir, him, and who loves to ne- 
aura infaiUiblement du mi- ceive this, will infallibly have 
rite, merit. 

Rem. In some phrases qui may be separated from 
the substantive* by several words : that is, when the 
sense obliges us to refer it to that substantive, as, 

II a fallu, avant toute chose, vous faire lire dans l'ecriture 
sainte, Vhistoire du peuple de Dieu, qui fait le fondement de la re- 
ligion. 

This sentence is very correct, because, as du peuple 
determines the kind of history, and de Dieu the kind of 
people, the mind necessarily goes back to the substan- 
tive histoire, to which it refers the incidental phrase. 

Qui may likewise hv separated from its antecedent, 
when this antecedent is a pronoun used as the regimen 
direct, as, 
II la trouva qui pleuraitd chaudes He found her crying bitterly. 

larmes, 
Jc le vols qui joue. I see him playing. 

Because, in ihis case, the true place of the pronoun is 
before the verb, and it is the same as saying, il trouva 
elle qui pleurait, &c. jevois lui qui joue. Also in these 
kinds of sentences, which are real gallicisms, 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRO'OUNS. 343 

Ceux-la ne sont pas les plus Those are not the most un- 
malheureux, qui se plaignent happy who complain the 
le plus t % most. 

Rule II. The relative qui must always have a re- 
ference to a noun taken in a determinate sense. 
EXAMPLES. 

U homme est un animal raisonnable, qui, &c. II me requt avcc une 
politesse, qui, &c. 

But we cannot say, Vhomme est animal raisonnable, 
qui, &c. II me recut avec politesse, qui, &c. 

Rem. Though in many phrases, the determinate 
nature of the nouns is not expressed, yet it is clearly 
understood. Thus, all these phrases are correct : ' 

77 n'a point de livre, qui ne soit He has not a book that is not of 

de son choix. his own selecting. 

Y a-t-U ville dans le royaume Is there a city in the kingdom 

qui suit plus favor is ee ? that is more favoured ? 

II sc conduit en homme qui con- He behaves himself like a man 

nait le monde, who knows the world. 



X EXERCISE. 

1. A young man who loves vanity of dress, like a woman, is un- 
worthy of wisdom and glory ; glory is only due to a heart that 
knows how* to * suffer pain and trample upon pleasure. 

2. Thyself, O my son, my dear son, thou* thyself that now en- 
joyest a youth so cheerful and so full of pleasure, remember that 
this delightful age is but a flower which will be 1 withered 3 almost 
as soon 2 as blown. 

3. Mei>pas9 away like flowers, which open in" the morning, and 

:it are withered and trampled under foot. 

4. You must have a man that loves nothing but truth and you, 
Uiat will speak the truth in spite of you. that will force all your en- 
trenchments ; and this necessary character is the very man whom 
you have sent into exile. 

5. We pe/ceived him waiting for us, quietly seated under the 
shade of a tree. 



(1.) Inanity of dress, a se parer vaineinent •, tmmple upon, fouler aux pieds. 

( -•) Cheerful, vif ,/u// oA feconde en ; remember, se souvenir ; delightful, belj 
withered, secber ; bluwn. ecloie. 

''pen, s'epanouir ; and, (whicb ;) at night, le soir ; withered, fletrir ; under 
a :f" f >t, art. pi. 

(I.) You mu$t have, il vous falloir J nothing but, ne que ; zvill speak, will 
force, subj-1 ; entrenchments, retranchement j character, homme } man t mdme } 
jm< into exile, exiler. 

(5. j Waiting fox , (who waited,) attendre-, under, a. 



344 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

11 est accabli de maux, qui ne He is overwhelmed with mis 

tui laissentpas un instant de fortunes that do not allow 

repos, him a moments rest. 

Cest unesorte de fruit, qui ne It is a sort of fruit that does not 

murit pas en Europe, ripen in Europe. 

From the translation of all the above examples, it is 
evident that livre, mile, maux, are really determinate, 
the meaning being : it n'a pas un livre qui, &c. y a-Uil 
une ville qui, &C.1T 

Que relates both to persons and things. It is always 
the regimen direct, and cannot subsist without an ante- 
cedent expressed, which it generally follows. L'homme 
que je vols, la peche que je mange. We say, generally, 
because, in some instances, it may be separated from 
the antecedent by several words : that is, when the 
mind necessarily goes back to that antecedent, as in 
this sentence of Flechier's, 

QiCest-ce qu'une armee ? — c'est un corps animi oVune infiniti de 
passions differentes, qu'«n homme habUefait mouvoirpour la defense 
de la pairie, 

Rem. There are instances where que is apparently 

1T EXERCISE. 

1. He received us with such goodness, civility, and grace, as 
charmed us, and made us forget all we had suffered. 

2. There is no city in the world where there are more riches and 
a greater population. 

3. Is there a man ca v n say ; I shall live till to-morrow ? 

4. He has no friend but would make for him every kind of sa- 
crifice. 

5. He is surrounded by enemies, who are continually observing 
him, and would be veiy glad to detect him in a fault 

6. In his retreat, he lives like a. philosopher, who knows mankind 
and mistrusts them. 

7. The pine-apple is a sort of fruit that in Europe ripens only in 
hot-houses. 

8. That man is a sort of pedant, icho takes words for ideas, and 
facts confusedly heaped together for knowledge. 

(1.) Such — as, un — qui ; civility, politesse. (2.) There arc, sub). 

<S.) JUan, (who •,) can, subj. (4.) But, qui ne ; would make, subj-2. 

(6.) Like a, en ; philosopher, sage j mistrusts, se defter de. 
(7.) Pine-apple, ananas ; hot-houses, serre chaude. 
(d.) Heaped together, entasser ; knowledge, savoir. 



PABTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 3-45 

used as regimen indirect for a qui, or dont, as : C'est a 
vous queje parte ; c'est de lui que je parle ; de la f aeon 
que fai dit la chose. But in this case, que is a con- 
j unction, f 

Lequel and dont relate both to persons and things. 
But lequel ought never to be used either as a subject, 
or object, except to avoid ambiguity; for, whenever the 
sense is evident, qui or que must be used. 

Lequel) with the preposition de, is either followed, or 
preceded by a noun, which it unites to the principal 
sentence. If it be followed, dont is preferable to du- 
quel, both for persons and things. Thus : 

La Tamise dont le lit, and not, de laquelle. 
Le prince dont la protection, and not, ditquel. 

If lequel be preceded by the noun, we can only make 
use of duquel when speaking of things, as, la Tamise, 
dans le lit de laquelle ; and it is always better to use it 
when speaking of persons, as, le prince a la protection 
duquel ; de qui would not be so well. 

With the preposition a auquel, when speaking of 

t EXERCISE. 

1. The God whom the Hebrews and Christians have always 
served, has nothing in common with the deities full of imperfection 
and even of vice worshipped by the rest of the world. 

2. The Epic poem is not the panegyric of & hero who is proposed 
as a* pattern, but the recital of great and illustrious actions, which 
are exhibited for imitation. 

)'. The good which we hope for* presents itself to us, and disap- 
pears like an empty dream, which vanishes when we awake : to 
teach us, that the very things which we think we hold fast in our 
hands, may slip away in an instant. 

4. Plato says, that, in writing, we ought to hide ourselves, to 
disappear, to make the world forget us, that we may present no- 
thing but the truths we wish to impress. 

(I.) (That the rest of the world worshipped.; 

(-.; Is proposed, on propose ; an, pour ; pattern, modele ; it exhibited, on 
donner; imitation, exemple. 

(3.) (iond, bien; disappears, s'envoler ; empty, vain ; vanishes, &.c. le r£vel] 
fait evanouir ; zve * hold fast > tenir le mitrux ; in our hands * ; slip away, nou« 
echanper. 

(4.) /<>, on j to make the world forget, se faire oublier ; that we may present 
but, pour ne produire que ; icish, vouloir ; impress, persuader. 



846 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUWS* 

things, as, les places aux-quelles il aspire, but we ought 
to prefer a qui, when speaking of persons, as, 
Les rois a qui on doit obSir. 

Auxquels would not do so well. 

So the relative qui, preceded by a preposition, never 
relates to things, but to persons only 4 



Quoi only relates to things* It is placed after the 
word to which it relates, but is always preceded by a 
preposition, and is generally followed by the subject of 
the phrase with which it is connected, as, 

La chose a quoi on pense ; voild les conditions sans quoi la chose 
ne peut sefaire. 

To this mode of expression are to be preferred, 
lequel, duquel, auquel, as being much better ; for 
quoi is never used with any degree of propriety, but 

t EXERCISE. 

1. The grand principle on which the whole turns is, that all * the 
world is but one republic, of which God is the common father, and 
in which every nation forms, as it were, one great family. 

2. Homer, whose genius is grand and sublime like nature, is 
the greatest poet, and perhaps the most profound moralist of an- 
tiquity. 

3. The celebrated Zenobia, tohose noble firmness 2 you have 
admired 1, preferred dying with the title of queen, rather* than 
accept the advantageous 2 offers 1 which Aurelian made her. 

4. The Alps, on the summit of which the astonished eye discovers 
perpetual snow and ice, present, at sun-set, the most striking and 
most magnificent spectacle. 

5. A king, to whose care we owe a good law, has done more for 
his own glory, than if he had conquered the universe. 

6. The ambitious man * sees nothing but pleasure in the posses- 
sion of the offices to which he aspires with so much eagerness, in- 
stead of seeing the trouble that is inseparable from them. 

7. Kings, lohnm religion makes it our duty to obey, are, upon 
earth, the true representation of the providence of God. 



(1.) Turns, rouler \ every, chaque ; as it were, comme. 

(3.) Preferred, aimer mieux 5 than, que de. 

(4.) Perpetual, eternel ; snoiv, ice, pi.; sun-stt, soleil, coucbant ; striking 
imposartf. (5.) Care, solicitude. 

(7.) (To) whom ; makes it our duty to, faire un devoir de j representation 
image. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 347 

when it relates to a vague and indefinite subject, such 
as ce, or rien, as, 

Ctst de quoi je irioccupe sans cesse. 

U n'y a rien a quoi je soisplus dispose. 

Ou, d'oii, par oil, relate only to things. They are 
never used, but when the nouns, to which they refer, 
express some kind of motion, or rest, at least metapho- 
rically, as, 

Voild It but ou il tend, That is the end he aims at. 

Cest une chosi d'oii dipend It It is a thing upon which the 

bonhtu public, public happiness depend*. 

Lts lieux par ou il a passi, The places through which he 

«I has passed. 



IV. 

ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 



Qui relates only to persons presenting but a vague 
indeterminate idea, as, 



1T EXERCISE. 

1. What a young man, who begins the world, ought principally 
to attend to, is not to give it a high opinion of his understanding, 
but to gain numerous friends by the qualities of his heart. 

2. A youth passed in idleness, effeminacy, and pleasure, lays up 
for ■ us nothing but sorrow and disgust in old age ; this, however, 
is what we little think of when we are young. 

3. There is nothing fo/ which we are more affected than the loss 
of fortune, although, being frail and perishable by its nature, it 
cannot contribute to our happiness. 

4. A grove, in which I defy the burning heats of the dog-star, a 
retired valley, where I can meditate in peace, a high hill, whence my 
eye extends over immense plains, are the places where I spend the 
happiest moments of my life. 



( 1 .) To what , ce a quoi; begin?, entrer dans ; to attend, s'attacher ; iff, v, 
opinion, idee ; understanding, esprit 5 to gain, B€ faire ; numerous, beaucoup de. 
Idleness, inutility-, effeminacy, mollesse ; pleasure, volupt6 ; lays up, 
preparer ; of, a ; we, on. 

(3.) liy, a; we, on ; affected, sensible ; frail, frele 5 by, de ; cannot, subj-l ; 
our (the). 

(40 Orove, bosquet ', defy, braver •, burning' heats, ardeur : dog-star, canicule ( 
spend, passer. 



348 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

Qui sera assez hardi pour V attar Who will be bold enough to at- 
quer ? tack him ? 

It is likewise used in the feminine, and in the plural, 
as, 

Qui est cette personnel ? Who is that person ? 

Qui sont cesfemmes-ld ? Who are those women ? 

Que and quoi relate to things only, as, 

Que pouvait la valeur en ce com- What could valour do in that 

batfuneste 1 fatal combat ? 

A quoi pensez-vous ? What are you thinking of ? 

Que is sometimes used for a quoi, de quoi, as, 

Que sert la science sans la ver- What avails learning without 

tu ? virtue ? 

Que sert a Vavare aVavoir des What use is it to tke miser to 

tresors ? possess treasures ? 

that is, a quoi sert, &c. de quoi sert, &c. 

Quoi, when relating to a whole sentence, is the only 
authorized expression that can be used, as, 

La vie passe comme unsonge ; c'est cependant a quoi on ne pense 
gu&res. 

Rem. Que and quoi require the preposition de before 
the adjective or substantive that follows them, as, 

Que dit-on de nouveau ? quoi de plus agreable i 
Que d J inconsequences dans sa conduite ! 

Quel relates both to persons and things, as, 

Quel liomme pent se promettre un bonheur constant ? 
Quelle grdce ! quelle beauti ! mats quelle modestie I 

Oil, (Pou, par ou, relate but to things. f 



t EXERCISE ON ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 

1. Who could ever persuade himself, did not daily experience 
convince us of it, (hat, out of a hundred persons, there are ninety 
who sacrifice, to the enjoyment of the present, all the best found- 
ed hopes of the future. 

2. Who would not love virtue for its own sake, could he see it' 
in all its beauty ? 



(1.) Did, si j out of , sur ; future, avenir. 

(2.) Its cum take, elle mAme ; could he, si on pouvoir, lnd-2. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS* "49 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Ce, joined to the verb &tre, always governs this verb 
in the singular, except when it is followed by the third 
person plural. 

C'ssi moi, c'eit tji, (test lui, c'cst nous, c'est vous. 

But in dii must say, 

Ce sont euz, ce sont dies, Sont-^e les Anglais, qui ont fait eel a 1 
Ce furent vos ancetres qui, Est-ce les Anglais que vous aimez f 
Fut-ce nos propnesjUs qui, Fut-ce nos propresfJs que. 

Ce, when relating to a person, or thing mentioned 
before, supplies the place of il, ©r elle. Ce must 
always be used, when the verb tire is followed by a sub- 
stantive, accompanied by the article, or the adjective 
tin. 



3. He who does not know how * to apply himself in his youth, 
does not know what to do when arrived at maturity. 

4. He was a wise legislator, who, having given to his country- 
men laws calculated to make them good and happy, made them 
swear not to violate any of those laws during his absence : after 
which, he went away, exiled himself from his country, and dfed 
poor in a foreign land. 

5. What people of antiquity ever had better laws than the Egyp- 
tians ? What other nation ever undertook to erect monuments 
calculated to triumph over both time and barbarism ? 

6. What more instructive and entertaining than to read celebrated 
authors in their own language ? What beauty, ichat delicacy, and 
grace, which cannot be transcribed into a translation, are discover- 
ed in them ! 

7. When Menage had published his book on tke Origin of the 
French language, Christina, queen of Sweden, said : " Menage 
is the most troublesome 3 man 1 in the world 2 : he cannot let 
one word 2 go 1 without its passport : he must know icfiencc it 
comes, where it has passed through, and whither it is going." 

O.) (To) what ; to do, s'occuper ; when arrived, &c, duns l'age raUr. 

(4.) lie, ce ; calculated, propre 5 not to, (that they would not ;) went away, 
partir. (5.) Calculated to, fait pour •, bo*h, egaleroent ; over, <ie. 

(6.) Language, langue ; delicacy, finesse ; which cannot, qu'on ne pent j be 
transcribed, faire passer; translation, traduction 5 are, kc. n'y U^couvrc-t-on 
pas. 

(7.) ft hen, apres que; Christina, Christine; troublesome, incommode j fAe, 
de, art. : cannot, ne saurait ; go, passer ; mutt, vouloir. 

31 



350 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

EXAMPLES. 

Lisez Homdre et Virgilc: ce sont Read Homer and Virgil: they 

les plus grands poetes de Van- are the best poets of anti- 

tiquitS, qui y. 

La douceur, Vaffabiiiii et une Gei tleneis, affabi'.ity, and a cer- 

certaine urhanite, dislinguent tain urbanity, drstingunish the 

I'homme quivit dans It grand man that frequents polite com- 

monde; les marques pany; these lto marks 

auxquelies on ie reconiiait, which he may.be k:io^ , u. 

Avez-vous hi Platon ? c'est un Have you read Plato ? he is one 

des plus beaux genies de Van- of the greatest geniuses of an- 

tiquite, tiqui ty. 

But, when the verb Ure is followed by an adjective, 
or by a substantive taken adjectively, il, or elle, must be 
used. 

EXAMPLES. 

Lisez Demoslhine et CicSron ; ils Read Demosthenes and Cicero; 
sont tres-eioquens. they are very eloquent. 

Xai vu Vhopital de Greenwich ; I have seen Greenwich Hospi- 
il est magnifique et digne tal ; it is superb and worthy 
dhme grande nation, of a great nation. 

Compterlez-vous sur Valhre ? ig- Would you rely upon Valere ? 
norez-vous qu'il est homme a do you not know that he is a 
ne jamais rmcmr de ses pre- • man who will never abandon 
mitres idees ?\ his first opinions ? 

Ce, followed by a relative pronoun, relates to things 
only. It is always masculine singular, as it only denotes 

X EXERCISE ON DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. It is we who have drawn that misfortune upon * ourselves 
through our thoughtlessness and imprudence. 

2. It ions the Egyptians that first observed the course of the 
stars, regulated the year, and invented arithmetic. 

3. Peruse attentively Plato and Cicero : they are the two phi- 
losophers of antiquity who have given us the most sound and lumi- 
nous ideas upon morality. 

4. If you are intended for the pulpit, read over and over again 
Bourdaioue and Massillon : they arc both very eloquent ; but the 
aim of the former is to convince, and that of the latter to per- 
suade. 



(1.) Have r7jvzu'n,s'attirer j thoughtlessness, legerete. 
(2 J First, les premier? ; stars, astre. 
(3/j Peruse, lire •, sound, sain ; morality, morale. 

(4.) Art intended for, se destiner a ',pulpit, chaire •, read over and over again, 
lire et relire sans cesse ; aim, but. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 351 

a vague object, which is not sufficiently, specified to 
know its gender and number. 

EXAMPLE. 

Ce qui flatte est plus dangereux What flatters is more dangerous 
que ce qui offense, than what offends 

Ce, joined to the relative pronouns, qui, que, dont, 
and quoi, has, in some instances, a construction pecu- 
liar to itself. Both ce and the relative pronoun that fol- 
lows it, form, with the verb which they precede, the 
subject of another phrase, of which the verb is always 
efre. Now, etre may be followed by another verb, an 
adjective, or a noun. 

When etre then is followed by another verb, the de- 
monstrative ce must be repeated, as, 

Ce que faimele plus, e'est d'etre What I like most, is to be 
seul, alone. 

When followed by an adjective the demonstrative us 
not repeated, as, 

Ce dont zous venez de me parler What you have been mention 
est horrible, ing to me is horrid. 

When it is followed by a substantive, the demonstra- 
tive may either be repeated, or not, at pleasure, except 
in the case of a plural, or a personal pronoun. Thu% 
we may say, 

Ce que je dis, est la vtriti, or, What I say is the truth, 
e'est la v6rit6, 

Though the former is best. But we must say, 
Ce qui m'indigne, ce sont Its What provokes me, are the in- 

injnsticcs, <ju'on ne cesse de juries which are continually 

fuire, committed. 

Ce fjui rrCarraclie au sentiment What alleviates the grief that 

qui nvaccabie, e'est vous, oppresses me, is you. 

Most of these rules contribute to the elegance of the 
language. 1F 

K EXERCISE. 
If What is astonishing is not always ichat is pleasing. 

(1.) h astonishing , £to»ner ; is pleasing, plaire. 



353 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

There arc two ways of employing celui. In the first 
it is followed by a noun, or pronoun preceded by the 
preposition de. 

EXAMPLES. 

Celui de vous qui, &c. Whichever of you that, &c 

Cette montre resscmbh d celle de That watch is like that of your 
votrefrere, brother. 

In the second, it is followed by qui, que, or dont, as, 
Celui qui nepense qu'd lui seul He who thinks of nobody but 
dispense les autres d'y penser, himself, excuses others from 

thinking of him. 
Voire nouvelle est plus sure que Your intelligence is more au- 
celle qiCon dtbitait hier, thentic than that which was 

circulated yesterday. 

In these two cases it is applied both to persons and 
things. 

In. the latter of these instances, celui is sometimes 
omitted, and this turn gives strength and elegance to 
the expression, as, 

Qui veut trop sefaire craindre, se He who wishes to make himself 
fait raremtnt aimer ; too much feared, seldom 

makes himself beloved. 

2. What the miser thinks least of, is to enjoy his riches. 

3. What pleases us in the writings of the ancients, is to see that 
they have taken nature as a model, and that they have painted her 
with a noble simplicity. 

4. JVJiat that good king has done for the happiness of his people, 
deserves to be handed down to the latest posterity. 

5. JVkat constitutes poetry is not the exact number and regu- 
lar cadence of syllables : but it is the sentiment which animates 
every thing, the lively fictions, bold figure?, and * beauty and 
variety of the imagery: it is the enthusiasm, .fire, impetuosity, 
force, a something in the words and thoughts which nature alone 
can impart. 

6. What we justly admire in Shakspeare are those characters 
always natural and always well * sustained. 

7. What keeps me attached to life, is you, my son, whose tender 
age has still need of my care and advice. 

(?.") If hat, (that to which ;) viise.r, avare. (3.) As a, pour. 

(4.) Deserves, tstie digne ; to be handed dozun, etre transmis ; latest, ia plus 
recuUe. 

(5.) Constitutes, faixe ; exact, fixe ; lively, vifj imagery, image, pi- ; a some- 
thing, unje nesais quoi j words, parole ; impart, dormer. 

(60 IVe, on \ justly, avec justice ; natx rut, dans la nature ; sustaiixeu, souteou. 

(7.) Kteps attached, attacker; care, advice, pi. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 353 

Ceci and cela apply only to things ; however, in the 
familiar style, custom authorises us to say, in speaking 
of one person individually, or of many collectively ; 
cela est heureux ! cela croupit dans lafange; cela est 
gucux etjier, &c.f 



CHAP. VI. 

PRONOUNS INDEFINITE-. 

Though on may generally be considered as a mascu- 
pronoun, as in the phrase, on rfcsi pas toujours mo 
dc ses pulsions, there are however occasions in wl 
it is evidently feminine, as, on n 'est pas toiiy ,e ei 

jolie : it may likewise be followed by a plural, as, en se 
batiit en desespere's ; esUon des iraitres ? 

This pronoun must be repeated before all the verbs 

t EXERCISE. 

1. Whichever of you shall be found to excel the others both in 
mind and body, shall be acknowledged king of the island. 

2. There are admirable pictures; these are after the manner of 
Rubens, and those after the manner of Van-Huysum. 

3. Why are the statues of the most celebrated modern sculp- 
tors, notwithstanding the perfection to which the arts have been 
carried, so much inferior to those of the ancients ? 

4. He whose soul, glowing, as it were, with divine fire, shall 
represent to himself the whole of nature, and shall breathe into 
objects that spirit of life which animates them, those affecting 
traits which delight and ravish us, will be a man of real genius. 

5. He that judges of others by himself, is liable to many 
■ 

6. He that is easily offended, discovers his weak side, and affords 
his enemies an opportunity of taking advantage of it. 

7. He icho loves none but himself, deserves not to be loved by 
others. 



(1.) Be found to excel the others, on juger valnqueur ; both in, et pour (re- 
peated. 

(2.) There are, voila tie; picture, tableau; are afttr, eire d;;ns ; manner, 
genre. 

(SO Are % (to be placed before so much inferior ;) have, hctn carriei. (r.cUve 
voic* ■.) with, on ; inferior, au-dessous. 

(4.) filming rvith, enflamme de ; as it ivcre, pour ainsi dire; the rokc 
tout ; shall breathe into, rtpandre sur j affecLmg, touchant ; delight * 

real, vraL (5.) .'V d'apra j UeMe% exjMfe ; mieiake % an pi 

(ft.) 1 s offended, s'offenser ; iLcak tide, fa ible ; affords., fournir d 
nofiter 

31* 



354 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PROXOUtfS. 

of a sentence, and refer to one ancTthe same subject. 
Thus, the sentence, 

On croit etre aime et Von ne nous aime pas. 
is incorrect ; it should be, 

On croit etre aimi et Von ne Vest pas* 
Quiconque is generally masculine, however it is femi- 
nine, when speaking of, or to females, as, quiconqiw de 
vous, Mesdames, &c. Though, perhaps, celle dc vans, 
&c. is preferable.^: 

Chacun, though always singular, may be followed, 
sometimes by son, sa, ses, and sometimes by leur, leurs, 
which, in many instances, is embarrassing. 

There is no difficulty in those phrases where chacun 
is not contrasted with a plural number ; for then son, 
sa, ses, must be used, as, 

Donnez a chacun sa part; Give to each his share. 

Que chacun songe a ses affaires, Let every one mind his own 

business. 

Rule. In phrases where chacun is contrasted with 
a plural to which it refers, son, sa, ses, must be em- 
ployed, when chacun is placed after the regimen ; but 

X EXERCISE ON PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 

1. Do you sincerely think, said Emily' to Lucilla, that when 
women are sensible and pretty, they are ignorant of * it : no, they 
know it very well : but if they are watchful over their character, 
they are not proud of these advantages. 

2. We are not slaves, to receive such treatment. 

3. Do you know what they do here 1 They eat, they drink, they 
dance, they play, they walk, in a word, they kill time in the gayest 
manner possible. 

4. Whoever of you is bold enough to slander me, I will make 
him repeat it. 

5. Whoever of you is attentive and discreet, shall receive a re- 
ward that will flatter her. 

(J.) Sinrerr?;;, (1? bonne foi ; Finily, Emilie j VMKK, on; thc\. on; knoxv, 
savoir; toulchfo! *v«r, jaloux de J character, ireputatii < J, s'enor- 

guejllir. , on j sleeves, (des) esclavcs ; to receive, pour essurerde 

(3.) They, on ; in the gayest manner, le plus gainient ; passible,(thz{ they can)- 

(i.) h, iud-'< ; to dander, pour nsWirc de j it (of it.) 
h, hicl-7; th.d w ;/.', fait j* ur. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 355 

leur, leurs, must be used, when chacun is placed before 

the regimen. 

EXAMPLES OF son, sa, ses. 

Remettez ces midailles ckacuna Return those medals each into 

en sa place, its proper place. 

Les liommes devraient Maimer, Men ou^ht to love one another, 

chacun pour son propre interet, each for his o wn interest. 
EXAMPLE OF leur, leurs. 
Lcs J'ommes devraient avoir, Men oujht for their own inte- 

chacim pour re in- rest, to have an affection for 

ttrct, de V amour Its uns pour each other. 

les <>• 

Rex. In phrases where chacun is contrasted with a 
plural, there are two senses, the collective and the dis- 
tributive* . When chacun is placed after the regimen, 
the collective sense expressed by the plural is finished ; 
and the distributive clw.cun acts separately the part of 
each individual : but when chacun precedes the regi- 
men, the collective sense remaining incomplete, must 
be carried on to the end ; and then the pronoun which 
follows chacun is put in the plural, as, 
La reiuc dit elle-mtmc aux deputes, qu'il etait temps qu 'Us s'en retour- 

nassent chacun ehez euz.*\ 

Per sonne, used as. a pronoun, is always masculine ; 

IT EXERCISE. 

1. Go into my library, and put the books which have been sent 
back to me, each into its place. 

2. They have all brought offerings to the temple, every one ac- 
cording to his means and devotion. 

- to carry his orders to the muti- 
. under his cole 
4. Each of them has brought his offering, and fulfilled his reli- 

duty. 
B. Had Ronsard and Balzac each, in hi3 manner of writing, a 
sufficient degree of merit to form after them any very great man in 
verse and in prose ? 

6. After a day so usefully spent, we went back, each to our own 
home. 

(2.) f {Jf"c rings, offrande. 

(3.) 7 o curry, aller porter ; mutineer*, mntln •, cr lours, drapeau. 
(4.) (They have brought each their, Lc.)fu/Jifltd, remplir. 
(0. ) J>tn.r\ner of writing-. j, r «>nre ; legrte, asst-z ; Merit, l>on ; any t uiw 

ty, J<>uniee> went back, retourner ; *p, chez •, pur ©am heme, (pron. 
personal.) 



356 PABTICTJLAB RULES OF THE PRONOUNS, 

of course' the adjective relating to it must be of that gen- 
der, as, 

Personne rtest aussi heureux Nobody is so happy as she. 
qu'elle, 

12 un et Vautre require the verb they govern to be in 
the plural. See p. 261. 

Ni Vun ni Vautre likewise generally govern the verb 
in the plural, when both may at the same time receive 
the action expressed by the verb : however, the two 
following modes 

Ni Vun ni Vautre irontfair leur devoir, or 
Ni Vun ni Vautre n' a. fait son devoir, 

are authorized ; but whenever this action applies only 
to a single object, the verb must be in the singular, as, 

Ni Vun ni Vautre n'est mon pere ; ni Van ni Vautre de sera nom- 
me d cette ambassade. 

But when ni Vun ni Vautre elegantly stand after the 
verb, the verb is always in the plural, as, 
lis ne sont marts ni Vun ni Vautre.i 

Tout, and rien, when the regimen direct, are placed 
after the verb, in simple tenses, and between the auxi- 
liary and the participle, in compound tenses, as, U 

7. Minds that possess any correctness, examine things with at- 
tion, in order to give a fair judgment of them ; and they place each 
2 of * them 1 in the rank it ought to occupy. 

(7. ) Possess any, avoir de *, correctness, just esse ; give a fair judgment, juger 
avec connaissauce ; place, mettre -, to occupy, avoir. 

~t EXERCISE. 

1. Nobody is so severe, so virtuous in public, as some women 
who practise the least restraint in private. 

2. Nobody could be happier than she ; but as a consequence of 
that levity which you know she has, she has lost all the advanta- 
ges that she had received from nature and education. 

3. Racine and Fenelon will be always the delight of feeling 
minds : both 2 possessed 1 in the highest degree the art of ex- 
citing in us at pleasure the most tender and the most lively emo- 
tions. 



(1.) Some, aussi 5 some, certain ; practise the least i jstraint, etre le moius re- 
tcnu. 
(2.) Could, ind-2 ; the, un ; levity, le^erefo, 1c nom she hns, lui conna!tre. 
(3.) Jilwajt dans tous les temps ; both, Van et I'autre 5 in fA«, au ; pleasure, gre - 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 357 

avoue tout ; il n'avoue rien ; il a tout avoue' ; il rCa rien 
avoue. But when they form the regimen indirect, they 
are always placed after the verb, both in simple and 
in compound tenses, as, il rit de tout ; il ne se ruble de 
rien ; il ajpense a tout ; il n'a pe?is£ a rien. 
Tout is sometimes used as an adverb, as, 

II lui dit toutfroidement, He told him quite coolly. 

Sometimes also, it represents quoique, encore que, en- 
ti~rement, quelque, in which case the following rule 
must be observed. 

Rule. Tout before' an adjective, or a substantive 
which is used adjectively, never takes either gender, or 
number, except when immediately followed by an ad- 
jective feminine beginning with a consonant, or h aspi- 
rated, as, 

Les enfans, tout aimables qu'ils Children, amiabie as they are. 

sont, 

lis sont tout interdits, They are quite disconcerted. 

La rerlu tout austere quelle Virtue, austere as it may ap- 

yarait, pear. 

Ces images tout anwsantcs artel- These images, entertaining as 

les sont, they may be. 

Ccst une tete toute vide, It is quite a vacant head. 

Ces dames, toutes sj0rituelles These ladies, witty as they may 

qu'elles sont, be. 

Ces Jleurs sont tout aussi frai- These flowers are quite as fresh 

ches que celles que vous as these which you have. 

azu, 

j sont, tout ainsi que These ladies, as well as you, 

vous, tout coiumc wnu, belles are handsome, young, and 

jcunes et spirituelles, ingenious. 

In this latter sense, tout is little more than a mere ex- 
pletive. § 



5. Balzac and Voiture enjoyed in their time great celebrity ; 
but neither 2 has been read 1 since by good taste 1 ; the native 
and simple graces 3 are preferred 2 to the bombast of the former, 
and the affectation of the latter. 



(A.) Enjoyed, ind-1 ; neither, ni Tun ni l'autre ; hasleen read, (they read 
rhem no more) ; native, du naturel ; simple, de la simplicity ; art yrf/errc/L, 
(active voice) depuisque lc ban I eferer les, kc. ; lombuit. boumJMXrOi 



358 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

Quelque — que, joined to a substantive, either alone, 
or accompanied by an adjective, takes the sign of the 
plural. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quelques richesses que vous Whatever riches you may pos- 



ayez, 



sess. 



Quelques bonnes ozuvres que vous Whatever good actions you 

fassiez, may do. 

Quelques peines affreuses que However dreadful pains you 

vous eprouviez, may suffer. 

But, when joined to an adjective separated from its 
substantive, it does not take the sign of the plural. 



§ EXERCISE. 

1. Children, amiable as they are, have, nevertheless, many 
faults which it is of importance to correct. 

2. The philosophers of antiquity, although very* enlightened, 
have given us but very confused ideas of the Deity, and very 
vague notions about the principal duties of the law of nature. 

3. Those flowers, inodorous as they are, are not the less 
esteemed.^ 

4. Virtue, austere as it is, makes us enjoy real pleasures. 

5. Fables, although very * entertaining, yej: 4 truly 5 interest 3 
us 2 only, when they convey instruction to us, under the disguise 
of an ingenious allegory. 

6. Although that absurd pedant is a# incessant 2 scribbler 1, 
yet his head is altogether empty. 

7. Far be from us those maxims of flattery, that kings are born 
with talents, and that their favoured souls come out of God's 
hands, completely wise and learned. 

8. Those fountains glide quite gently through a mead ena- 
melled with flowers. 

9. These peaches are quite as good as those of the south of 
France. 



(1.) Have nevertheless, ne laisser pas d 'avoir ; faults, defaut ; of importance, 
essentiel. (2.) Enlightened, eclaii^s qu'ils ^taient; of nature, naturel. 

(3.) Inodorous, inodore ; no*, n'en. (J.) Enjoy, gotiter de. 

(5.) Entertaining^ amusantes qu'ellcs sont ; truly, v£ritablement ; only, ne 1 
que 6 ; convey, offviv : disguise, voile. 

(6.) Incessant, infatigable ; scribbler, ecrivailleur ; his head is, (he has not le« 
the head :) not, o'en ; altogether, tout. 

(7.) Ear be, loin ; of, de, art. ; are 6om,naltre ', with talents, halile ; favoured, 
privileeie ;comc out, sortir ; learned, savant. 

($.) Ulide, couler ; gently, doucement ; through a mead, sur un gaion. 

(9.) South, midi. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 359 

EXAMPLES. 

Tous les hommes, quclque oppo- All men, however opposite they 
s6s qu'ils soient, may be. 

Ces actions, quelque belles qu'on Those actions, however bril- 
ls trci:. c, liant they may be found. 

Quelque — que and quel que, joined to a substantive, 
(p. 118), have the same meaning, although they are not 
used h iifferentiy for each other. If the pronoun 
stands before the substantive, we make use of quelque 
— que ; as, 

Qutfques richesses que vous ayez ; 

But, if the verb intervene, then we make use of quel 
que in two separate w r ords, as, 

Quelles que soient les richesses que vous ayez.1t 

U EXERCISE. 

1. Whatever talents you may possess, whatever advantages you 
may have received from nature and education, with * whatever 
perfections you may be endowed, expect only the suffrage of a 
small number of men. 

2. However great serrices you may have rendered mankind, 
rather look for their ingratitude than their acknowledgments. 

3. However useful, however well written the works which you 
have published, yet think not that you will immediately reap 'the 
fruits of your labours; it is but by slow degrees that light intro- 
duces itself among men. The course of time is swift : but it 
seem-; to lag, when it brings reason and truth along with it. 

4. Whatever may be the obstacles which ignorance, prejudice, and 
envy oppose to the true principles of an art, yet we ought never to 
be deterred lrom propagating them : the sun does not cease to 
shine, because its light hurts the eyes of night-birds. 

5. Whatever be your birth, whatever your riches and dignities, re- 
member that you are frustrating the views of providence, if you do 
not make use of them for the good of mankind. 



(1.) Possess, avoir; have received, tenir ; be endowed, posseder j expect, ne 
t'attendre a •, but, que. 

(2.) Mankind, homnie, pi. ; rather look for, compter plut6t ; acknowledg- 
ments, reconnaissance, sing. 

(3) Immediately, de suite ; reap, recueillir; by slow degrees, avecleiteur; 
among, cbez ; swift, rapide ; to lug, se «.rainer ; along xvith it, a sa suite. 

(4.) IVt, on: to be deterred, se rebuter ; propagating, repandre j shine, 
eckiirer ; its, the article; hurls, blesser ; night birds, oiseau de nuit. 

(5.) .he frustrating, frustrer. 



360 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

CHAP V. 

OF THE VERB. 

AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 

It has been observed that the verb which has two 
subjects, both singular, is put in the plural ; but to this 
rule there are the following 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. A verb with two subjects in the singu ar, is not 
put in the plural, when the two subjects are only joined 
together by the conjunctions, ou, comme, aussi-bien que, 
autanl que, &c. 

EXAMPLES. 
La seduction, ou la terreur, Vs. Either persuasion, or terror has 

entraine dans le parti des re- drawn him into the party of 

belies, the rebels. 

Le roi, aussi-bien que son mi- The king, as well as his mi- 

nistere, veut le bien public, nistry, wishes for the public 

good. 
Son honnitetS, autant que son es- His honesty, as much as his wit 

prif, le fait rechercher, makes him courted. 

L'envie, comme V ambition, est Envy, like ambition, is a blind 

une passion aveugle, passion. 

2. The verb is likewise put in the singular, though 
preceded by plurals, either when there is an expression 
which collects all the substantives into one, such as, 
tout, ce, rien, &c. or when the conjunction mais is 
placed before the last substantive, and this is in the sin- 
gular. 

EXAMPLES. 
Bwns, dignites, honneurs, tout Riches, dignkies, honours, every 

disparaft d la mort, thing vanishes at death. 

Jeux, conversations, spectacles,- Games, conversations, shows* 

rien ne la distrait, nothing diverts her. 

Perfidies, noirceurs, incendics, Perfidies, enormities, confla- 

massacres, ce n'est Id qa y une grations, massacres, all thu 

faille image, &c. is but a feeble representation, 

&c. 
Non-sculcment tou'a scs richrsses Not only all his riches and 

rXtousses honneurs. mais toute honours, but all his virtue 

sa vertu s'6vanonit,t vanishes. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 361 



OF THE COLLECTIVE PARTITIVE. 

The collectives general have nothing to distinguish 
them from substantives common, with regard to the 
laws of agreement ; but the collectives partitive appa- 
rently deviate from those laws, in some instances. 

Rule. The verb, which relates to a collective par- 
titive, is put in the plural, when that partitive is follow- 
ed by the preposition de and a plural ; but it is put in 
the singular, either when the partitive is followed by a 
regimen singular, or when it expresses a determinate 
quantity, or lastly, when it presents an idea independent 
of the plural which follows it. 



t EXERCISE ON THE VERB. 

1. Either fear or inability prevented them from moving. 

2. The fear of death, or rather the love of life began to revive 
in his bosom. 

3. Alcibiades, as wtll as Plato, was among the disciples of 
Socrates. 

4. Lycurgus, like Solon, was a wise legislator. 

5. Euripides, as much as Sophocles, contributed to the glory 
of the Athenians. 

6. Riches, dignities, honours, glory, pleasure, every thing loses 
its charms from the moment we possess it, because none of those 
things can fill the heart of man. 

7. The gentle zephyrs wiiicb preserved, in that place, not- 
withstanding the scorching heat of the sun, a delightful cool- 
ness : streams gliding with a swee'. murmur, through meadows 
interspersed with amaranths and violets; a thousand springing 
flowers which enamelled carpets ever green ; a wood of those 
tufted trees that bear golden apples, and the blossom of which, 
renewed every season, yields the sweetest of all perfumes; the 
warbling of birds ; the continual prospect of a fruitful country ; 
10 a word, nothing of what till then had made him happy, could 
assuage the feelings of his grief. 



(1.) Tnability, impuissance *, mov ing, remuer. 

(2.) iUgan to revive, se reveiller ; in, au fond de ; bosom, cceur. 

(3.) .1mong, au nombre de. 

(6.) We, on ; none, rien, those things, tout cela. 

(7.) Preserved, entretenir ; scorching heat, arrteur ; interspersed with, pa» 
seiner de ; springing, naissant ; carpets, tapis •, tufted, touffu ; golden, (of £o!d)| 
renewed, (which renews) se renouveler •, (in) every season ; yields, repandr»{ 
prospect, spectacle ; made, rendre ; a*sungt, Parracher a ; feeling, sentiment. 

32 



362 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB, 

EXAMPLES OF THE PLURAL. 

La plupart des homines sont The greatest part of men are 

lien prompts dans leurs juge- very hasty in their judg- 

menSy ments. 

Bien des philosophes se sont Many philosophers have been 

trompis, mistaken. 

EXAMPLES OF THE SINGULAR. 

Une infinite de peuple est ac- An immense number of people 

courue, (regimen singular), flocked together. 

La moitie des soldats a pSri, One half of the soldiers has 

(determinate quantity), perished. 

Le plus grand nombre des The greater number of the 

troupes a peri, (idea inde- troops has perished. 

pendent of the plural.) 

Thus the substantives partitive, la plupart, une infi- 
nite, tine foide, un nombre, la plus grande partie, une 
sorte, &c. and words signifying quantity, such as peu, 
beaucoup, assez, moins, plus, trap, tant, combien, and 
que used for combien, followed by a noun joined to them 
by the preposition de, have not the least influence on 
the verb, and consequently, it is not with them that the 
verb agrees, but with the noun which follows them. 

Remark. The words infinite and la plupart, used 
by themselves, require the verb in the plural, as : une 
infinite' pensent, la plupart sont d'avis.^ 



X EXERCISE ON THE COLLECTIVE PARTITIVE. 

1. Many persons experience that human life is, every where, 
a state in which much is to be endured, and little to be enjoyed. 

2. Many poets think that poetry is the art of uniting pleasure 
with truth, by calling imagination to the help of reason. 

3. Few persons reflect that time, like money, may be lost by 
unseasonable avarice. 

4. So many years of familiarity were chains of iron which 
linked me to those men who beset me every hour. 

5. How many wise men f have thought that, to seclude one's 
self from the world, was to pull out the teeth of devouring ani- 

(1.) Muck is, &c. (one has a great deal of pains, and little of real enjoyments.) 
(3.) Unseasonable, bors de propos. 

(4.) Familiarity, habitude ,• linked, lier ; beset, obs£der. 

(5.) Hoxu many, quede ; to seclude one's self, se retirer ; pull cut of, arracber 
& ; to take away from, 6tcr a. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 363 



PLACE OF THE SUBJECT WITH REGARD TO THE VERB. 

It has been seen that the subject of a verb is either a 
noun, or a pronoun, and that this subject must always 
be expressed in French. It remains to speak of the 
place of this subject with respect to the verb. 

Rule. The subject, whether a noun, or pronoun, is 
generally placed before the verb. 

L'ambition effrenee de quclques The boundless ambition of a 

homines, a, dans tous les few men has, in all ages, been 

temps, etc la vraie cause des the real cause of the revolu- 

r evolutions des itats, tions of empires. 

Quand nous nageons dans Va- When we roll in plenty, we 

bondance, it est Men rare que seldom think of the miseries 

nous nous occupions des maux of others. 
d'autrui,^ 

mals, to take away from the wicked, the use of his poniard, from 
calumny its poisons, and from envy its serpents ! 

6. A company of young Phoenicians of uncommon beauty, clad 
in fine linen, whiter than snow, danced a ■ long while the dances 
of their own * country, then those of Egypt, and lastly, those of 
Greece. 

7. A troop of nymphs, crowned with flowers, whose lovely 
tresses flowed over their shoulders, and waved with the wind,, 
swam in shoals behind her car. 

8. At the time of the invasion of Spain by the Moors, an innu- 
merable multitude of people retired into the Asturias, and there pro- 
claimed Felagius king. 

9. A third part of the enemy were left dead on the field of battle ; 
the rest surrendered at discretion. 

10. The innumerable crowd of carriages which are to be seen in 
London during the winter, astonishes foreigners. 

(~.) Company, troupe ; clad in, et vfitu cle ; linen, lin. 

(7.) Lovely , beau ; tresses, cheveu ; flo-wed, pendre ; waved, Hotter ; with, au 
gre de ', swam, nager ; shoals, foule ; car, clur. 

(8.) Moon, Maure $ retired, se retirer ; Jisturias, Asturies ; PclagiitSy Pelage. 
(9.) A third part, un tiers ; enemy, pi.; surrendered, se rendre. 
(10.) Crowd, quantite ; which are, (active voice, on.) 

f EXERCISE. 
I. Youth is full of presumption, it expects every thing from 



(1.) Full of presumption, presomptueux ; expects, se promettre ; itself all snJJU 
cient, pouvolr tout ; that it has, avoir. 



364 PARTICULAR RULES CU THE VERB. 
EXCEPTIONS. 

1. In these interrogative phrases the question is made 
either with a pronoun, or a noun : if with a pronoun, 
this is always placed after the verb, as, 

Que dit-oji ? irai-je d la campagne ? dc qui parlc-t-or. 1 

If with a noun, the noun is sometimes placed before, 
and sometimes after the verb ; it stands before, when 
the pronoun personal which answers to it, asks the ques- 
tion, as, 

Cetle nouvelle est-ette sure ? les kommes se rendent-ils toujours d 
la raison ? 

It stands after, when a pronoun absolute, or an interro- 
gative adverb, placed at the beginning of the phrase, al- 
low 7 the suppression of the personal pronoun, as, 

Que dit votre ami ? dquois'accupevotrefr&re? oil demeure votrt 
cousin ? 

\ Remark. In interrogative sentences, when the 
verb which precedes il, elle, on, ends with a vowel, the 



itself: although frail, it thinks itself all-sufficient, and that it has 
nothing to fear. 

2. Commerce is like certain springs ; if you attempt to * divert 
their course, you dry them up. 

3. It is enough that falsehood is falsehood, to be unworthy of 
a man who speaks in the * presence of God. and who is to sacri- 
fice everything to truth. 

4. The ambition and avarice of man are the sources of his un- 
happiness. 

5. Ttiey punished, in Crete, three vices which have remained 
unpunished in all other nations : ingratitude, dissimulation, and 
avarice. 

6. Like the Numidian lion, goaded by cruel hunger, and rush- 
ing upon a flock of feeble sheep, he tears, he slays, he wallows in 
blood. 



(-2.) "Spring's, source j attempt, vouloir ; dry wp, fa ire tarir. 

(3.) It is enough, suffire ; falsehood, mepsonge . ■ en ; U tn sacri- 

fice, doit. 

(.).) Punished, inil-- ; hoot remained, 6tic •, »>i, chex. 

(6.) Like the, semblable a un •, JVui x adsd fry, &c. (that 

cruel hunger goads) d^vorer ; rushing (which rusliec upon,) entree ilans \ tears, 
declarer -,'slays, ego'ger ; v:allorvs % nager. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 365 

letter -/- is put between that verb and the pronoun, 
as, 

ArrivG-t-il ? viendra-t-eUe ? aime-t-on les zauriens ? 
Whence stands after a verb, which ends with e mute, 
that e mute is changed into e acute, as, aime-je ? puissi. 
je ? But w r hen the transposition of je after the verb be- 
comes harsh, euphony then requires another turn, so 
instead of cours-je ? dors-je ? which would be intole- 
rable, we must say, est-ce que je cours ? est-ce que j* 
dors ?f 

2. Incidental sentences which express that we are 
quoting somebody's words, as, 

Je meurs innocent, a dit Louis I die innocent, said Louis XVL 

XVI 
Je le veux bitn, dit-il, I am very willing, said he, 

3. Impersonal verbs, and these words, tel, ainsi, &e. 

II est arrivS un grand malheur, A great misfortune has happen- 
ed. 

t EXERCISE. 

1. Have yon forgotten all that Providence has done for you.? 
how have you escaped the shafts of your enemies 7 how have yon 
been preserved from the dangers which surrounded you on all 
sides I could you be so blind as not to acknowledge and adore the 
all-powerful hand that has miraculously saved you ? 

2. What will posterity say of you, if, instead of devoting to 
the happiness of mankind the great talents which you have re- 
ceived from nature, you make use of them only to deceive and 
corrupt them. 

3. Do not the misfortunes which we experience often contribute 
to our ■ prosperity ? 

4. Why are th» works of nature so perfect ? Because each 
work is a whole, and because she labours upon an eternal plan, 
from which blie never deviates. Why, on the contrary, are the 
'productions of man so imperfect ? It is because the human mind 
being unable to create any thing, and incapable of embracing the 
universe at a single glance, can * produce only after having been 
enriched by experience and meditation. 

(1.) Escaped, echapper a \ shafts, trait ; prese>-ved } garantir ; on all si<ks t de 
pvti ; to as, assez pour ; suvcJ, conserve!*. 

sbnsacrer ; mankind, homme, pi. ; deceive, £garer. 
( '. Experience, eprcuver ; contribute to, tourner en. 

(4.) Because, e'esi que ; and because, etque ; being unable, ne pouvoir ; inca- 
pable, (not being able ;) at, -ie ;glancc, vue -, enriched, fecondc. 



366 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

Tel 6lait V acharnement du sol- Such was the fury of the sot- 
to, que, &c. dier, that, <fcc. 

Ainsi finit cette sanglanU tra- Thus ended that bloody tr& 

g6die,$ gedy. 

4. When the subjunctive is used to express a wish, 
or for quand mhne and a conditional, as, 

Puissent tous les peuples se con- May all nations be convinced 

vaincre dc cette veritS, of this truth. 

Dusse-je y p6rir,firai, Should I perish there, I will go. 

5. When the subject is followed by several words 
which are dependent upon it, and form an incidental 
sentence which, by its length, might obscure the rela- 
tion of the verb to the subject; perspicuity then requires 
that the subject should be displaced. 

Sometimes, however, this transposition of the subject 
is only the effect of taste, to avoid an inharmonious ca- 

t EXERCISE. 

1. True glory, said he, is founded inhumanity; whoever pre- 
fers his own glory to the feelings of humanity, is a monster of 
pride, and not a man. 

2. There have happened, for these * ten years, so many events 
exceeding all probability, that posterity will find it very difficult 
to credit them. 

3. Such was that incorruptible Phocion, who answered the de- 
puties of Alexander, who were telling him that this powerful mo- 
narch loved him as the only honest man : well, then 2, let hhn al- 
low me 1 to be and to appear so. 

4. Thus ended, by the humiliation of Athens, that dreadful war 
of twenty- seven years, to * which ambition gave rise, which hatred 
made atrocious, and which was as fatal to the Greeks, as their an- 
cient confederation had proved advantageous to them. 

(1.) Is founded, ne se trouver pas hors de ;feetinzs, sentiment. 

(2.) There have happened for, il se passer depuis ; exceeding, hors de j proba- 
bility, vraisemblance ; will find very difficult, avoir bien de la peine ; to credit, 
ajouter foi a. 

(.3.) Loved, cherir ; honest man, homme de bien ; wm, ho ! 5 to be so, d fitre 
tel ; appear so, le parattre. . 

(4.) Ended, se terminer ; gave rise, faire naitrc ; made, rendre ; had proved, 



etre. 



If EXERCISE. 
1. The gods grant that you may never experience such misfor- 
tunes ! 

(1.) Grant, faire ; experience, eprouver de. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 867 

dence : or it is used by an orator, who wishes to rouse 
the attention of his hearers by a bold and unexpected 
turn.1T 



GOVERNMENT OF THE VERBS. 

When the regimen of a verb is a noun, it is generally 
placed after the verb : but to this rule there is one 
exception, besides those which will hereafter be men- 
tioned. 

Exception. In an interrogative sentence, the regi- 
men is placed before the verb, when this regimen is 
joined to an absolute pronoun. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quel objet voyez-vous ? What object do you see ? 

A quelle science vous appliquez- To what science do you apply 

vous ? yourself? 

De quelle affaire vous occupez- About what business are you 

vous? employed? 

Remark. In French, a verb can never have two re- 
gimens direct ; therefore, when a verb has two regi- 
mens, both nouns, one of them must necessarily be pre- 
ceded by a preposition. 

2. May you, O wise old man ! in a repose diversified by pleas- 
ing occupations, enjoy the past, lay hold of the present, and charm 
your latter days with the hope of eternal felicity. 

3. What is not in the power of the gods ! were you at the low- 
est depths, the power of Jupiter could draw you from thence : 

i in Olympus, beholding the stars under your feet, Ju- 
pit. •!• could plunge you to the bottom of the abyss, or precipitate 
you int.) the flames of gloomy Tartarus. 

4. There, through meadows enamelled with (lowers, glide a 
thousand various rivulet?, distributing every where their pure 
(and) limpid waters. 

5. Already, for the honour of France, there * had come into ad- 
ministration a man more distinguished for his understanding and 
virtues than for his dignities. 

. : with, de. 
^ (3.) /* not in the po-a.-;r of, ne peuvent ; zvere, suhj-j ; lozcest depths, £>nd de 
ftbtnae; power, . o ..Id, pou\oir, cond-1 ; Olympru, Olympe ; ttars, 

astre : gl"oviy, noir ; Tartarus^ Taitaie. 

(4.) Through, au milieu de •, -,i:ih. <W j giiue, serpemtr ; rivuUtM, ruLseau ; 
distributing, 'which distribute); their, une. 

(5.) find come, etre em iration, (of affairs) \for, par j uruhrsltind- 

ing, esprit.. 



368 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

EXAMPLES. 

Donnez ce livre d votrefrere, Give that book to your brother 

On a accusi Ciceron <T impru- Cicero has been accused of im- 
dence et de faiblesse, prudenceandweakness. 

Though the natural order of the ideas seems to re- 
quire that the regimen direct be placed before the indi- 
rect, the perspicuity of the sentence does not allow it in 
all cases. 

Rule. When a verb has two regimens, the shorter is 
generally placed first ; but if they be of equal length, 
the regimen direct will precede the indirect. 

EXAMPLES. 
Les hypocrites s'itudient d parer Hypocrites make it their study 
le vice des dehors de la ver- to deck vice with the exterior 
tu, of virtue. • 

Les hypocrites s'ttudient d parer Hypocrites make it their study 
des dehors de la vertu les to deck with the exterior of 
vices les plus honteux et les virtue the most shameful and 
plus dicriSs, most odious vices. 

V ambition sacrijie le present d Ambition sacrifices the present 
Vavenir, mais la volupti sacri- to the future, but pleasure 
fie l'avenir aupresentj sacrifices the future to the 

present. 

Rule. A noun may be governed at once by two 
verbs, provided those verbs do not require different re- 
gimens. 

EXAMPLES. 

On doit aimer et respecter les We ought to love and respect 

rois, kings. 

Ce general attaqua et prit la That general attacked and took 

ville, the city. 

t EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF THE VERBS. 

1. Illustrious examples teach us, that God has hurled from 
their thrones princes who contemned his laws : he reduced to the 
condition of a beast the haughty Nebuchadnezzar, whe icantcd to usurp 
divine honours. 

2. Wretched is * the man who feeds his mind icith chimeras. 

3. Our interest should prompt us to prefer virtue to vice, wisdom 
to pleasure, and modesty to vanity 

(J.) Illustrious, faraeux ; teach, appi'endre ; hurled, renverser ; haughty, sn- 
perbe 5 Nabuchodonosor ; wanted, vouloir. 
(2.) Feeds, ivpaitre. 
(3.) Should, devoir, ind-1 •, prompt, porter ', pleasure, volupt£. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 369 

But we must not say, 
Cet officier ait aqua et sc rendit That officer attacked and made 
mailre de la wile, himself master of the city. 

A different turn should be given to the sentence, by 
placing the noun after the first verb, and adding en be- 
fore the second, as, 
Cet officier attaqua la ville et s'en That officer attacked the city 

rendit maUre,t and made himself master of 

it. 



OF THE USE PROPER, OR ACCIDENTAL, OF MOODS AND 

TENSES. 

Indicative. 

The present is used to express an existing state, as, 
Je suis ici f I am here. 

An invariable state, as, 
Dieu est de toute Sterniti, God is from all eternity. 

A future near at hand, as, 
H est demainfite, To-morrow is a holiday. 

Or even a preterit, when, to give a sort of animated 
picture, we relate a thing past as passing. Thus, we 
find in Racine, 
J" ax vu votre malheureux fits I have seen your unhappy sod 

traini par ses chccaux, dragged along by his horses. 

t EXERCISE. 

1 Luxury is like a torrent, which carries away, and overthrows 
every thing it meets. 

2. Nothing can * resist the operation of time : it, at length, un- 
dermines, alters, or destroys every thing. 

3. Among the Spartans, public education had two objects: the 
first, to harden their bodies by fatigue ; the second, to exciCe and 
nourish in their minds the love of their country, and an enthu- 
siasm for what is great. 

(I.) r arrics away, entralner *, overthrows, renverser ; every thing, tout ce 
que. 

ijitrat inn, action •, at length, a la longue ; undermines, miner. 
.hnong the Spartans, a S[wirte ', lo,de ; harden, endurcir •, by, a ; their 
must he rendered by the article for what is great, des graudes choses. 



370 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

But, suddenly passing from the preterit to the pre 
sent, the speaker adds, 

n veut les rappelcr, et sa voiz He calls out to stop them, hut 
les effraie, his voice frightens them. 

In English, the verb to be, is frequently used with 
the participle present, as, 

I am reading, I am translating, I shall be writing. 

This construction is not adopted in French ; and 
whenever found, it is to be translated in French simply 
by the verb, put in the tense expressed by the verb to 
be. Thus, J am reading, must in expressed by je lis : 
I shall be writing, must be rendered fecrirai, &c.1T 

The imperfect is used — 1. To denote the recurrency 
of an action at a time which is past, as, 
Qusmd fetais d Paris, fallais When I was at Paris, I often 

souvent am Champs Elysees, went to the Champs Elysies: 

IF EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF MOODS, &c. 

1. He is in his chamber, where he is relaxing his mind from 
the fatigue of business, by some instructive and agreeable read 
ing. 

2. Truth, eternal by its nature, is immutable as God himself. 

3. I never let a day pass without devoting an hour or two to 
reading the ancients. 

4. It is this week that the new piece comes out. 

5. The armies were in sight : nothing was heard on all sides 
but dreadful cries : the engagement began. Immediately a 
cloud of arrows darkens the air and covers the combatants ; no- 
thing is heard but doleful cries of the dying, or the clattering 
of the arms of those who fall in the conflict; the earth groans 
beneath a heap of dead bodies, and rivers of blood stream every 
where ; there is nothing in this confused mass of men enraged 
against one another but slaughter, despair, revenge, and brutal 
fury. 

(1.) Fi- relaxing, delasser ; reading, lecture. 

(2.) /?</,de*, immut able, immuable. 

(3.) .Let*' ; devoting, consacrer ; reading, la lecture de. 

(4.) Come out, on donner. 

(5. ) Sight, presence ; nothing was, fcc. on ne que, ind-2 ; the engagement began, 
on en venir aux mains, ind-3; cloud, nuee ; arrows, trait ; darkens, obscurcir ; 
nothing is, &.c. on ne plus que ; doleful, plaintif ; clattering, bruit ; conflict, 
mSlee ; groans, geniir 5 beneath, sous ; heap, monceau ', rivers, ruisseau ; stream, 
couler •, there is nothing in, ice. ce ne fitre dans *, mass, aiuas ; enraged, acharn£ ; 
but, que •, slaughter, massacre. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 371 

2. For a past which has some duration, especially in 
narrations, as, 

Rome ila.il aVahord gouvemtc par Rome was at first governed by 
des rois,\ kings. 

In French, the preterit definite and the preterit indefi- 
nite are not used indifferently. 

The preterit definite is used, when speaking of a 
time which is entirely past, and of which nothing re- 
mains, as, 

Je fis un voyage d Bath le mois I took a journey to Bath last 

demif, month. 

T6crivis hier d Rome, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 

To authorize the use of this tense, there must be the 
interval of, at least, one day. It is the most used in 
the historic style, and for that reason called parfait his- 
toriqne. 

t EXERCISE ON THE USE OF THE IMPERFECT. 

1. When I was at Paris, I went every morning to take a walk 
ifi the Champs Etystes, or the Bois de Boulogne : afterwards I 
came home, where I employed myself till dinmer, either in reading 
or writing ; and, in the evening, I generally went for amusement 
to the French Theatre or the Opera. 

2. Whenliflffsin the prime of life, like the light butterfly, I 
fluttered from object to object, without being able to settle to any 
thing : eager for pleasure, I seized every thing that had its appear- 
ance : alas ! how far was I then from foreseeing that I should de 
plore with so much bitterness the loss of that precious time. 

:• For a short time after Abraham, the knowledge of the true 

ired in Palestine and Egypt. MeJchisedec, king of 

•st of the Most High 2 God 1. Abimelech, 

k;u_ oi Gerar, and his successor of the same name, feared God, 

by lii> name, and reverenced hi? power. But in Moses' time, 

nations adored even beasts and reptiles. Every thing was God 

bat God himself. 



(!•) Take « walk, se promener •, in, a ; came home, rentier chez soi ; was busy, 
iper ; reading, (by tbe verb; ; for amusement, me delasser ; French 1'hca- 
Frun(jaise. 
M <>f Iff, fleur de Page 5 butterfly, papilloa ; fluttered, voler ; being 
it/e, me fixer ; eager for, avide de ; had its appearance, m'en 
, how, que ; with so much bitterness, (so bitterly). 
(i.) ^zuort, jurer ; reverenced, admirer, the nations, on ; even. jasqB'A; but, 
exec, 



372 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

The preterit indefinite is used either for a past inde- 
terminate, or for a past of which something still remains, 
as, 

Tax voyagi en Italic, I have travelled in Italy. 

Tai dejeunS cc matin d Londres, I breakfasted this morning in 
et dine d Richmond ,\ London, and dined at Rich- 

mond. 



The preterit indefinite is sometimes used instead of a 
future just approaching, as, 

Avez-vous bieniotfini ? Have you soon done 1 

Ouiyfaifini dans le moment, Yes I shall have done in a mo- 

ll ment. 

% EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF THE PRETERIT. 

Amenophis conceived the design of making his son a conqueror. 
He set about it, after the manner of the Egyptians, that is, with 
great ideas. All the children who were born on * the same day 
as Sesostris, were brought to court by order of the king : he had 
them educated as his own children, and with the same care as 
Sesostris. When he was grown up, he made him serve his ap- 
prenticeship in a war against the Arabs: this young prince learned 
there to bear hunger and thirst, and subdued that nation, till then 
invincible. He afterwards attacked Lybia, and conquered it. Af- 
ter these successes, he formed the project of subduing the whole 
world. In consequence of this. * he entered Ethiopia, which he 
made tributary. He continued his victories in Asia. Jerusalem 
was the first to feei the force of his arms : the rash Rehoboam 
could not resist him, and Sesostris carried away the riches of Solo- 
mon. He penetrated into the Indies, farther than Hercules and 
Bacchus, aod farther than Alexander did afterward. The Scy- 
thians obeyed him as far as the Tanais ; Armenia and Cappadocia 
were subject to him. In a word, he extended his empire from the 
Ganges to the Danube. 



Making, faire de ; set about it, sy prendre ; after, a } ideas, pensee ; brought, 
amener 5 had educated, faire elever ; g roxon up, grand ; made serve, fit faire ; ap- 
prenticeship, apprentissage *, in. par ; entered, entrer dans *, made, rendre ; as 
far as. jusqu'a ; Cappadocia. Cappadoce. 

H EXERCISE. 
1. Enflamed with the desire of knowing mankind, I have tra- 
velled, not only among the most polished nations, but even 
among the most barbarous. I hare observed them in the differ- 
ent degrees of civilization, from the state of simple nature to the 

(l.) IVith, de ; mankind, homme, pi. ; to, ehez ; polished nations, peuple 
police) barbarous, nilio.i sauvage ; fro»> depuis ; simple, pur ; to, jusqu'a , 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 373 

The two preterits anterior differ in the same manner 
•he two preceding preterits, but they are always ac- 
companied by a conjunction, or an adverb of time, as, 

Jc snis sorti des que fai eu I went out as soon as I had 

dined. 
I had done yesterday at noon. 

The pluperfect denotes that a thing took place before 
another, which had itself already taken place, as, 

rOji I had iienhe came in. 

most perfect state of society, and wherever I went, the result was 
the same : that is to say, I have every where seen beings occupied 
in drying up the different sources of happiness that nature bad 
placed within their reach. 

woe travelled this year in Italy, where I had an * opportuii - 
ty of seeing several master-pieces of antiquity, and where I made 
a valuable collection of scarce medals. I there admired the per- 
fection to which they have brought architecture, painting, and mu- 
sic ; but what pleased me most there, was the beauty of the cli- 
mate of Naples. 

wherever I -cent, danstoos les pays ; the result was the same, (I had the same re- 
sult :) in drying up, a tarir 5 rvithin their reach, a leur portee. 

'.unity, occasion ; tnaster-picces, chef d'oeuvre ; scarce, rare-, phased 
me moi,\ t'.iist- le plus de plalsir ; xcas, iod-1. 

t EXERCISE. 

1. As soon as I had examined this phenomenon, I tried to find 
out its causes. 

'Z. As goon as we had crossed the river, we found ourselves in a 
wood where there was not a Dingle foot-path traced. 

soon as the great Sesostris had satisfied his ambition by 
ihe conquest of so many empires, he returned into Egypt, where 
lie devoted the whole of the day to administering strict justice to 
bifl 1 i. in the evening, he recreated himself by holding 

conferences with the learned, or by conversing with the mosi up- 
right people of his kingdom. 

4. ! had only received, like most of the grandees, an education 
in which I had imbibed nothing bat sentiments of pride and in- 
sensibility ; that i-, they had done every thing in their power, 

(I.) As soon as, des que ; tried to find out, en rechercher. 

(2.) Crossed, traverser ; found ourselves, se trouver engage \ foot-path, sentier 
de. 

(3.) The whole of the day, jour entier ; administering, rendre, iaf-1 ; ttrit .', 
exact; recreated, delasser •, by holding conferences, a s'entretenir ; upright, 
honn^te *, people, v 

(\.) Qrandee, grand ; i.ii'iibid, p liser ; thty, on ; m their povcer, ce qu'au 
■b. etoufler ; benevolent, uienfaisant. 



374 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

As the use of these different preterits is attended 
with some difficulty, the following analysis is added, in 
order more clearly to explain the manner in which they 
are used. - 

We read in Marmontel the following extract ; 

Celicour, d Vdge de quinzc Celieour, at the age of nf 
ans, avail tHe dans lo rttonde ce ieeu, had been iu the world what 
qu J on uppelle un petit prodige. is called a iiitle prodigy. 

The author employs the pluperfect, as he speaks of 
a period of time anterior to all those which he is going 
to mention. 

II faisait des vers Us plus ga~ He composed the most agree- 

lans du monde ; il u'y avait pas able love-sonnets imaginable; 

dans le voisinuge une jolic there was not a pretty woman 

ftmme, qu'il rCeut celebrie : c'e- in the neighbourhood that he 

tait dommagc de laissertant de had not celebrated: it teas a 

talens enfouis dans une petite pity to let so many talents be 

ville ; Paris deVait en tire le buried in a little town ; Paris 

theatre. tens the theatre on which they 

ought to be exhibited. 

Here the author makes use of the imperfect, be 
cause he speaks of the habitual employment of Celi- 
cour. 

Et /'on fit si bien, que sonpbre And they contrived matters so 
se resolut de Vy envoy er. that his father determined to send 

him there. 

Now, the author passes to the preterit definite, be- 
cause he is no longer speaking of what Celicour used 
to do, but what he did at a time past, and of which no- 
thing remains. 

Ce fire etait un Iionnite This father was a good sort 

homme, qui aimait V esprit sans of man, who teas fond of wit, 

en avoir, et qui admirait, sans without having any, and ad- 

savoir pourqum, tout ce quive- mired, without knowing why, 

nait de la capitate. 11 avait eveiy tiling that came from the 

mime des relations lilUrairts, metropolis. Nay, he even had 

el du nombre de sos corrcspondans some literary connexions, and 

etait un connaisscur nomme M. among his correspondents icas 

de Fintac. a connoisseur of the name oc" 

Fintac. 

to stifle in me happy ami benevolent dispositions which I had re- 
ceived from nature. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 375 

Here, again, the author resumes the form of the 
imperfect, as he is now speaking of the habitual state 
of Celicour's father in his little town, and because, in 
this passage, he merely relates what that father was 
doing, at a time past, which has no kind of relation to 
the present. 

Ce fut princip dement d lui It was paaticularly to him that 
que Ctticourfut recommandS, Celicour was recommended. 

The form of the preterit definite is now resumed, 
because this is an action passed, at a time of which no- 
thing is left, &c.:j: 

There is this difference between the two future 



t EXERCISE. 

1. God, who had created his angels in holiness, would have 
their happiness depend upon themselves: they could insure 
their felicity, by giving themselves willingly 10 their Creator ; 
but they delighted in themselves, and not in God : immediately 
those spirits of light became spirits of darkness. 

2. There is a letter which Philocles has written to a friend of 
his, about his project of making himself king of Carpathus. I 
perused that letter, and it seemed to me to be the hand of Philo- 
cles. They had perfectly imitated his writing. This letter Ihrtxo 
me into a strange surprise. I read it again and again, and could 
not persuade myself that it was written * by Philocles, when I re- 
called to my mind the affecting marks which he had given me of 
his disinterestedness and integrity. 

3. Those who had shewn the greatest zeal for the state and my 
>n, did yiot think themselves obliged to undeceive me, after 

so terrible an example. I myself icas afraid lest truth should 
brcj b in spile of all my flatter- 

ould have raised in mebi '<* 
remorse. My cffeminaey inion which a treacherous 

minister lead gained over me, threw me into a kind of" despair of 
ever recovering my * liberty. 

(1.) Have their happiness depend, ss.) dtpendre, subj-3 ', 

could, pooToir 5 dtlighLtd in, se plaire en ; of Light, lumiueux ; darkness, ten^- 
bres. 

(2.) There is, voila ; about, sur ; Carpathus, Carpathie ; to be, de ; they, on , 
again »nd again, san9 cesse ; by, de ; when I recalled to, repasser dans, inf-J ; 
intrgrity, bonne foi 

ot think themselves oil ijed to, se croire dispense de ; was afraid 
hrt, craindre cpae •, break through, percer, snbj- ! ; reach, pan I ; in 

tpi'e of, maigTd ; raised in, causer a ; effaninacy, mollebse ;domiv.ion, ascendant^ 
treacherous, perfide j gained, prendre j threw, plonger , recovering, renirer 



376 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

tenses, that the period of time expressed by the future 
absolute, may, or may not be determined, as, 

Sirai a la campagnc, or firai demain d la ccmpagne, 
while, in the future anterior, the time is necessarily de- 
termined, as, 

Tauraijini, quand vous arriverez.il 



CONDITIONAL. 

The conditional is used — 1. To express a wish, as, 
Qtteje serais, or, quej'aurais ete How glad J should be, or should 
content de riussir dans cetle have been to succeed in that 
affaire / affair. 

2. With si, if, whether, expressing a doubt, as, 

Demandtz-lui sHl serait venu Ask him whether he would have 
acec nous suppos6 qiCil rfeut come with us, had he not 
pas eu affaire, been busy. 

3. Before, or after the imperfect, or pluperfect of 
the indicative, preceded by si> as, 

Nous nous epargnerions Men des We should spare ourselves 
peincs, si nous savions moderer much pain, did we know how 
nos desirs, to moderate our desires. 



IT EXERCISE. 

1. Remember that youth is~ but a flower, which will wither 
almost as soon as it * opens. Thou .izilt see thyself gradually 
changed. Smiling graces, sweet pleasures, strength, health, and 
joy, icill vanish like a pleasing dream ; nothing but the sad re- 
membrance will be left thee. 

2. I shall next ycur take a journey into Greece, and I am pre- 
paring my self for it by reading the travels'^ the young Atta- 
ch arpis. 

3. When you have read the celebrated discourse of Bossuct on 
Universal History, and studied in it the causes of the rise and fall 
of states, you ic'dl he less astonished at the revolutions, more or 
less sudden, that modern empires have experienced, which ap- 
peared to yon in the most flourishing state. 

(1.) Will wither, (will be almost as soon witli j opens, t'dose , 

gradually, insensiblemsnt ; lively, riant ', pleasing, bean ; nvthir.g will be hft, il 

n'en rener. 

(2.) 7'ttJfce, faire \for it, y ', reading, lecture de \(\ vlui.) 

(}.) Have read, wd-3 j ant/, que von^. i-: !eur ; /all, 

chute ; sudden, subite ; (that have experienced th< 

appeared ind--. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 377 

Vous auriez 6t6 plus hzureux. si You would have been more 
zous ariez suivimes conseils, happy, if you had followed 

my advice. 

4. With quand, used instead of si, qucique, or quand 
mtrne ; the verb preceded by quand is generally in one 
of the conditionals, as, 

Quand Vavare possiderait tout Were the miser to possess all 
I'or du mondc, il nc scraitpas the gold in the world, still he 
encore content, would not be satisfied. 

5. Lastly, for various tenses of the indi2ative, as, 

roiritz-vous voire fits ingrzt ? Co 

i 
:h means, croyez-vous, &c. 

T/auriez-vous soupconne d'un tel C 
vice ? 

which means, Vavez-vous, &c. 

Quelle raison pourrait m'empe- V\ 
cher daller vous voir ? 

which means, quelle cause pourra, &c.f 

t -EXERCISE ON THE CONDITIONAL. 

1. If it were even possible for men always to act conformably 

to equity, as it is the multitude that must judge their conduct, 

the wicked would always blame and contradict them from ma- 

I the good sometimes from mistake. 

, hat false steps I should have made but for you, at my en- 

to the world ! 
I it for your counsels, I should have failed In this undertak- 
ing 

4. How satisfied I should have been, if you had sooner informed 
me of your happiness 

5. If we gave to infancy none but just and clear notions, there 
would not 0e by far so many false wits in the world. 

G. Had Alexander conquered the whole world, his ambition 



C roiritz-vous voire fils ingrzt ? Could you think your son un- 
grateful ? 



T/auriez-vous soupconne d'un tel Could you have suspected him 
vice ? of such a vice ? 



Quelle raison pourrait m'empe- What cause could prevent me 
cher daller vous voir ? from coming to see you ? 



(1.) If even, quand meme 5 were, cond- 1 ;for men, (tlj.it men ;) to act, ?ub 
judgc, iuger de ; would b'nmt^ ird-7 j coy.trndict, c.oiser, ind-7. 
(j.) I'/hnt, <jue dc ; tlevs, demarche 5 bvtfor, sans. 
(i.) BulfTy >ans ;fuih'K <V!iouer. (4.) //W, q 

(5.) V.'e. on : there tuould not he by far so many, il y aurait bien moi 
(<>.) (When Alexander would have conquered ;) straitened, tror. a W 

33* 



378 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 



REMARK ON THE USE OF THE CONDITIONAL AND FUTURE. 

Foreigners are very apt to use the future, or the 
conditional after si, when meaning suppose que. They 

say, 

J'irai demain d la campagne, s'il I shall go into the country to- 

feua beau, morrow, if the weatherbe fine. 

Vous auriez vu le roi, si vous You would have seen the king 

seriez venu, if you had come. 

The impropriety of this construction will be obviated 
by attending to the following 

Rule. When a verb is preceded by si, meaning 
suppose* que, the present is used instead of the future 
absolute ; the preterit indefinite instead of the future 
anterior ; the imperfect instead of the conditional pre- 
ssnt, and the pluperfect instead of the conditional past. 

EXAMPLES. 

Tirai demain d la campagne, s'il I shall go to-morrow into the 

fait beau, country, if it be fine weather. 

U aura euVavantage, s'il a suivi He will have had the advan- 

vos conseils, tage, if he has followed your 

advice. 
Jt serais conlent, si je wwsvoyais I should be pleased, if I saw 

applique, you apply to study. 

Trmrais &e content, si je vous I should have been pleased, if 

avals vu applique*, I had seen you attentive to 

your studies. 



would not have been satisfied ; he xoould still have found himself 
straitened in it. 

7. Could you believe him vain enough to aspire to that high 
degree of honour? 

8. Could you Bvetf have thought him capable of deserting the 
good cause, to go and side with rebels ? 

9. Would yov. renounce being useful to the present generation, 
because envy fastens on you ? 



< I.) Dtserting, abandonner : to 50 and tide »&&, pour se ranger sous Vs dia- 
peaux de. 

(J ) fttuooiccj re-ioncer a } fastens, s'uitaclier ; o?i yu, A vos pas. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 379 

Remark. This rule does not hold good, either when 
si is placed between two verbs, the first of which im 
plies doubt, uncertainty* as, 
Je ne sais s'il viendra, 
Or, with the second conditional post, as, 

Vous m'eussiez trouve, sivousfussiez venu ce matin.\ . 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



There are conjunctions which govern the indicative, 
(p. 294), and others which govern the subjunctive, 
(p. 295). We call principal proposition the phrase 
which is followed by the conjunction, and incidental, or 



X EXERCISE. 

1. A voting man who is just entering the career of letters, 

mediate the goodwill of the public, if he consider his first 
successes only as an encouragement to do better. 

2. That absurd criticism will h I only fools or mali- 
cious people,* if attention Ita-s been paid to the spirit that per- 
vades the whole, and the manner in which it is written. 

3. Life mould possess many more sweets and charms, if men, 
instead of tearing one another to pieces, formed but one society 
of brethren. 

4. The Athenians would Juice found in the young Alcibiade3 
the only man capable of insuring their superiority in Greece, 
had not that vain thoughtless people forced him. by an unjust, 
or, at least, imprudent sentence, to banish himself from his 
country. 

ILDOW not ichellter reason will soon triumph over prejudice 
and ignorance, but I am certain it will be the case sooner or 
later. 

G. Rome would have nercr attain d that high degree of splen- 
dour and glory which astonishes us, had it not extended its con- 
quests as much by its policy as by its arms. 

(IJ (s just entering, tlebuter dans; career, carrieie \ conciliate, s'attirer ; 
good win, bienveillance ; emnrider, regarder. 

(2.") Fool", sot •, malicious, mechant ; paid, fair? \petveteU» the whole, r£gner 
U"n-i boill i r.nitrt' • in u-htch, don!. 

(3.) Possess, avoir ; tearing one another to jrieeee, s'entredeclurer. 

iicriority, preponderance ; thoughtless, ledger •, lenience! cotu*nawartnn 

(5 V Knmr, latolr ; it will be the case, cela fitre. 

:.tuincd. parrenir a \poli<-y, politique. 



380 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

subordinate proposition, that which is placed after the 
conjunction. In this sentence, 

Je crois que vous aimez d jotter. 

Je crois is the principal proposition, and vous aimez 
ajouer is the subordinate proposition : que is the con- 
junction that unites the two phrases. 

General Rule. The verb of the subordinate pro- 
position must be put in the indicative, when the verb of 
the principal proposition expresses affirmation, in a 
direct, positive, and independent manner ; but it is put 
in the subjunctive, when that c f the principal proposition 
expresses doubt, wish, or uncertainty. 

Je sais qu'il est surpris, I know he is surprised. 

Je erois qu'il viendra, I believe he will come. 

Jc do ute qu'il soit surpris, I doubt his being surprised. 

Jt doute qu'il vienne, I doubt his coming. 

Je souhaite qu'il reussisse, I wish he may succeed. 

Je tremble qu'il ne succombe,^ I tremble lest he should fail. 

IT EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. The glory which has been ascribed to the Egyptians of 
being the most, grateful of all men, shows that they icere likewise 
the most sociable. 

2. In Egypt, when it was proved that the conduct of a dead 
man* had been bad, they condemned his memory, and he was 
denied burial. 

3. I am sure that by moderation, mildness, and politeness, you 
will disarm even* envy itself. 

4. The new philosophers say that colour is a sensation of the 
soul. 

5. I beli&ce you are as honest and disinterested as you seem to 
be. 

6. I doubt whether the Romans icould ever have triumphed 
over the Gauls, if the different chiefs of this warlike people bad 
not been disunited. 

7. I could wish that the love, which we ought to have for one 
another, were the principle of all our actions, as it is the basis of 
all virtues. 

(t.) Which has, &c qu'on •, ascribed, dormer j (rrMcful, reconnaissant, sing. ; 
men, peuple (-.) IVas denial, priver tie j Wrial, «epulture. 

(3 ) By- avec •, politeness, honnttete. (5.) Seem to be, le paraltre. 

(o.) 11 hethcr, que. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 381 

Do, did, trill, would, should, can, could, may, and 
might, are sometimes, with respect to the French lan- 
guage, simply signs of tenses, at others they are real 
verbs. 

There can be no difficulty about do and did ; these 
are mere expletives, denoting interrogation, negation, 
or merely emphasis, when they are joined to a verb. 

J do love, J'aime. 

I did love, J'aimois, or, j'aimai. 

Do I love ? Aime-je ? 

Did I love ? Aimais-ie, or, aimai-je ? 

I do not lore, Je n'aime pas. 

1 did not love, Je ir ahnais pas, or, je n'airnai pas. 

In all these cases they are not expressed in French. 
But when they are followed by a noun, or a pronoun, 
then they are real verbs, and mean, f aire. 

Do me that favour, Faites-moi ce plaisir. 

He did it, II le fit 

In short, by any thing else, except the verb with 
which they are necessarily connected, as, 

He did more than could have H fit plus qu'on n'eflt pu esp6~ 
been expected, rer. 

Should is onty a sign of the conditional, when it ex- 
presses a thing which may happen upon some condition. 

J should like a country life, if my J'aimerais la vie champetre, si 
affairs would permit me to in- .mes affaires me permettaient 
didge my inclination, de suivre mon gout. 

But when it implies duty or obligation, it is a verb, 
and must be expressed by the verb devoir, as, 



8. Fear, lest it should be said that you feed upon chimeras, and 
that you take the shadow for the reality. 

9. The new philosophers will have colour to be a sensation of 
the soul. 

10. liritl have you to be a3 honest and disinterested as you 
seem to be. 



d vpo\, se reoaltre de. 

I be, (that colour be.) 



382 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

We should never swerve from the Nous ne devrions jamais noua 
path of virtue, ecarter du sentier de lavertu. 

Can, could, may, and might, are not so difficult as 
they appear at first sight ; because, in almost every in- 
stance, there is no impropriety in rendering them by 
the verb pouvoir. In general the first two imply a 
power, a possibility, a capability, &c. and the others, a 
permission, probability, &c. 

Do, did, shall, will, &c. in English, are sometimes 
used elliptically in the answers to interrogative sen- 
tences. The French answer with the repetition of the 
verb, accompanied with a pronoun expressive of the 
idea of the interrogative sentence, as, 

Will you do your exercise to- Ferez-vous votre theme an 
day ? — Yes, I will: jourd'hui ? — Oui, je le ferai. 



RELATIONS BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 

Rule. When the first verb is in the imperfect, the 
preterit, or the pluperfect, and the second denotes a 
temporary action, this second verb is put in the imper- 
fect, if we mean to express a present. 

EXAMPLE. 

Je croyais, fai cru, f avals cru I thought, I have thought, I bad 
que vous itudiez les miathima- thought that you were study 
tiques, ing mathematics. 

— In the >luperfect, if wo mean to express a past. 

EXAMPLE. 
11 rri'assura quHl rtavait jamais He assured me that he had 
tant ri, never laughed so much. 

— And in the present of the conditional, if we mean to 
express a future absolute. 

EXAMPLE. 

On rrCadit que votre frhre vien- I was told your brother would 
drait d Londres I'kiver pro- come to town next winter. 
chain, 

But, although the first verb may be in some of these 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 383 

tenses, yet the second is put in the present, when this 
second verb expresses a thing which is true at all times. 

EXAMPLE. 
Jci nu duaii, je o(S ai dit, je T told you, I have told you, I 
d dit, quela santtfnic had 'old you, thai ha 
la feticitS du corps, etlesavoir constitutes the happiness of 
cellc de I'dme, the body, and knowledge Chat 

of the soul. 

Remark. In phrases where (ke et is pre- 

ceded by que, it denotes, sometimes a past, sometimes 
a present, with respect to the preceding verb. It de- 
notes a past, when the verb which is joined to it by the 
conjunction que is in the present, or future. 

EXAMPLE. 
Votts savez, or vous saurez queh You know, or you must know 
peuple Ronuiineta.it aussiavidc that the Romans were a 
quC ambit ieux, people as covetous as they 

were ambitious. 

But it denotes a present, when the verb, which pre- 
cedes it, is in the imperfect, one of the peterits, or the 
pluperfect. 

EXAMPLE. 

On disuit. on a dit, on avail dit It was said, it has been said, 

que Phoeionvtiutlc plus grand it had been said, that Pho- 

ct If. phis honnete hommedeson cion was the greatest and 

tewps, most upright man of his age. 

/; q ■ a cut appris d Athene* As soon as it was known at 

qu Aieibia It ctait d Lacede- Athens that Alcibiades was 

>ne, on se rep c ntti de la pri- at Lacedemon, the Atheni- 

dpitation acec laqudle on ans repented of the procipi- 

iavait, condamni. tation with which they had 

condemned him. 

Nevertheless, the imperfect denotes the past, in 
this last instance, when it signifies an action which was 
past before that which is expressed by the lirst verb. 

EXAMPLE. 
En lisant Vhistoire des temps In reading the history of heroic 
li'ro'iques, vous detcz avoir times, you must have re- 
remarqu6 que ces hommes marked that those men Who 
dont on a fait des demi-dirvz, have been made demi-gods, 
etaient des clufs fbvees ft were ferocious and barbarous 
barbanft digues d peine du chiefs, scarcely deserving the 
nam d'/iomme.i . name of men. 



384 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

RELATIONS BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE 
AND THOSE OF THE INDICATIVE. 

Rule I. When the verb of the principal propo- 
sition is in the present, or future, that of the subordi- 
nate proposition is put in the present of the subjunctive, 
to express a present, or future ; but in the preterit, to 
express a past. We say, 

t EXERCISE. 

1. I thought you were not ignorant that, to teach others the 
principles of an art or science, it is necessary to have experience 
and skill. 

2. J. have been told that your sweetest occupation was to form 
your taste, your heart, and your understanding. 

3. Darius, in his flight, being* reduced to the necessity of 
drinking water muddy and infected by dead bodies, affirmed that 
he never had drunk with so much pleasure. 

4. Care has been taken to inculcate in me, from infancy, that 
I should succeed in the world, only in proportion as I should join 
to the desire of pleasing, a great deal of gentleness and civility. 

5. Ovid has said, that study softens the manners and corrects 
every thing that is found in us rude and barbarous. 

6. You know that those pretended heroes, whom Pagan an- 
tiquity has made gods, ictre only barbarous and ferocious kings s 
who overran the earth, not so much to conquer as to ravage it, 
and who left every where traces of their fury and of their vices. 

7. It has been said of Pericles, that his eloquence was Tike a 
thunderbolt, which nothing could resist. 

8. As soon as Aristides had said, that the proposal of Themis- 
tocles zcas mjust, the whole people exclaimed, that they must not 
think of it any longer. 

9. Had you read the history of the early ages, you would know 
that Egypt was the most enlightened country in the universe, and 
the original spot* whence knowledge spread into Greece and the 
neighbouring countries. 



(1.) Were ignorant, ignore r : tench, instruiie dans ; it is necessary, avoir be- 
soin *, skill, babilete. (2.) / have, «kc. (by the active voice) on. 

(3.) Flight, deroute *, muddy, bourbeux ; aj/i>vud, assurer. 

(4 ) Care has, tc. (active voice) on avoir ; in me, me ; in proportion, autartt 
civthty, honnetete. ( •"'•) Corrects, eflacor ; is found, se trouver de. 

(G.) Overran, parcourir ; not so much, moins. 

(7.) It, on ; thunderbolt, foudre, m. ; (to) which. 

(3.) Exclaimed, s'ecrier ; they must, t'alloir, ind-2; of it, y; any longes 
plus. 

(9.) Ages, temps ; the original spot * whence, celui d'ou ; n cig hb ouring,circOto 
voisiu ; countries, lieu. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 



386 



11 faut que celui qui parte se 
mette d la par tie de celui qui 
Vicoute, 

II voudra que zotre frere soit de 
lapartie, 
But we must say, 

Four s'ilre Sieve d ce point de 
grandeur, Ufaut que Rome ait 
eu une suite non interrompue de 
grands hommts, 



He that speaks should accom- 
modate himself to the un do- 
standing of bimthat listens. 

He will wish your brother to be 
one of the party. 

To have risen to that pitch of 
grandeur, Rome must have 
had an uninterrupted succes- 
sion of great men. 



Exception. Though the first verb be in the present, 
or future, yet the second may be put in the imperfect, 
or pluperfect of the subjunctive, when some conditional 
expression is introduced into the sentence. 

ft n'est point d'homme, quelque 
mtrite qu il ait, qui ne fut trcs- 
mortijil, s'il savait tout a qxi'on 
pense de lui, 



Oil trouvcra-t-on un homme 
qui ne fit la mime faute, s'il 
itait exposi aux mimes tenta- 
tions ? 

Je doute que zotre frere eut re- 
ussi sans voire assistance^ 



There is no man, whatever 
merit he may have, that 
would not feel very much 
mortified, were he to know 
all that is thought of him. 

Where will you find the man 
who would not have commit- 
ted the same error, had he 
been exposed to the same 
temptations ? 

I doubt whether your brother 
would have succeeded, had 
it not been for your assist- 
ance. 



t EXERCISE. 

1. He who wishes to teacli an art, must know it thoroughly, 
he must "ire none but clear, precise, and well-digested notions of 
it : he must instil them, one by one, into the minds of his pupils, 
and, above all, lie must not overburden their memory with use- 
less, or unimportant rules. 

2. He fun st yield to the force of truth, when they shall have suf- 
fered it to appear in its real light. 

3. There is no work, however perfect people may suppose it, 
that would not be liable to criticism, if it were examined with se- 
verity and in every point of view. 

(1.) It must (that he who, kc. know it) •, he must (not repeated), que ; instil, 
(aire entrer ; by, a ', overburden, aurcharger ; unimportant, insignificant. 

(?.) (It must, ind-7, that he) ; yield, se rendre ; vtffered, permettre ; it to ap- 
pear, (that it appear) ; real light, vrai jour. 

(3.) Would be liable, preter, suhj-J j with severity, a la rigueur ; in, touf T 
point of view, face. 



34 



386 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

Rule II. When the first verb is in the imperfect, 

either of* the preterits, the pluperfect, or either of the 

conditionals, the second is put in the imperfect of the 

subjunctive, if we mean to express a present, or future ; 

but it is put in the pluperfect, if we wish to express a 

past. 
Jevoulais, fai vouIu,feus voulu, je voudrais, or feusse voulu 

que vous finissiez cette affaire. 
Je ne savais pas, je n'ai pas su, &c. que vous eussiez etudie les 

mathimaiiques. 

Remark. With the preterit indefinite the second 

verb is put in the present, if it expresses an action which 

is, or may be done at all times, as, 

Dieu a entoure les yeux de tunU God has surrounded the eyes 
quesfort minces, transparentes with very thin tunics, trans- 
au dehors, afin qu'on puisse parent on the outside, that 
voir d travers, we may see through them. 

And in the preterit, if we mean to express a past, as, 

It a fallu qu'W ait sollicite ses He must have been obliged to 
juges,^ solicit his judges, 

4. I doubt whether his piece would have had the approbation 
of connaisseurs, if he had not determined to make in it the changes 
you judged necessary. 

(4.) Approbation, suffrage-, had determined, se decider j in if, y \ judged, 
Cnd-4. 

f EXERCISE. 

1. Mr. de Turenne never would buy any thing on credit, of 
tradesmen, for fear, he used to say, they should lose a great part 
of their demand, if he happened to be killed. All the workmen 
who were employed about his house, had orders to bring in their 
bill, before he set out for the campaign, and they were regularly 
paid. 

2. It would be belter, for a man who truly loves himself, to lost 
his life, than to forfeit his honour by some base and shameful ac- 
tion. 

3. Lycurgus, in one of his laws, had forbidden to light home* 

(1.) Would, vouloir, ind-- j buy on credit, prendre & creait •, nf, chez \ happen- 
ed, venir ; were employed, travailltr; about, pour } bills, memoire ; he, on ; ic* 
out for, se mettrc en. 

(2.) To lose, (that he zoould lose) ; forfeit, ternir. 

(3.) In, par; to light, que on eclairer, subj-J ; Mar, afin que ; reuch their houses, 
te render chez eux ; getting intoxicated^ s'emvrcr. 



PARTICULAR I LES OF THE VERB. 887 

In interrogative and negative sentences, the second 
verb is generally put in the subjunctive, as, 

Quel est Vinse?is6 qui tienne pour sur quHl xivra demain ? 
Vous ne vous persuadiez pas que les choses pussent tourner si 
mal. 

The verb is likewise in the subjunctive after the su- 
perlative relative, and frequently after an impersonal 
verb, as, 

Lc meilleur cortege qu'un prince puisse avoir, c'estlec&ur de ses 
sujets. 

The subjunctive is elegantly used in elliptical phrases, 
where the principal proposition is omitted, as, 

Qiiil vine ! (je souhaite quHl), May he live ! 

Qu'il se soit oublit jusqu'a ce That he should have so far ft>F- 

point ! (je suis surpris qu'il), gotten himself ! 

Qui nCaime, me suive ! (je veux Whoever loves me let him fol- 

que celui qui), low me. 

Heureux Vhomme qui ptut, ne Happy the man that can, were 

fat-ce que dans sa vieillesse, it only in his old age, enjoy 

jouir de toute la force de sa the whole strength of his rea- 

raison ! (quand ce ne strait son. 

q}ie),\ 

those who came from a feast in the evening, that the fear of not 
being able to reach their houses might prevent them from getting 
intoxicated. 

4. People used the bark of trees, or skins, to write upon^, be- 
fore paper teas known. 

5. Go and * ask that old man : for whom are you planting ? 
he will answer you : for the immortal gods, who have ordered both 
that I should profit by the labour of those that have preceded 
me, and that those who should come after me, should profit by 
mine. 

(4.) People, on ; bark, ecorce ; skins, peau ; known, en usage. 
(5.) Have ordered, vouloir ; both, et •, by, de. 

t EXERCISE. 

1. Is there any one who does not feci that nothing is more de- 
grading in a writer, than the pains he takes to express ordinary 
and common things in a singular and pompous style. 

2. Do you think that, in forming the republic of bees, God has 



(l.) It degrading in, degrader ; in, de. ( •) Had in view, vouloir. 



368 PAKTICULAK RULES OF THE VERB. 

Remark. The relative pronouns qui, que, quel, dont, 
and ou, govern the subjunctive in similar circumstan- 
ces.^: 



Further Observations upon the Conditional and 
Subjunctive. 
We have said the English auxiliaries should, would, 
could, may, and might, are not always to be considered 
as essentially and necessarily appertaining to the con- 
ditional and subjunctive*. Indeed it seldom happens 
that the French tenses are the same as the English, at 

not had in view to teach kings to govern with gentleness, and sub- 
jects to obey with love ? 

3. You will never be at peace, either with yourself or with 
others, unless you seriously endeavour to restrain your natural im- 
petuosity. 

(3.) Be at peace, avoir la paix ; either, ni ; or, ni j endeavour, s'appliquer. 

t EXERCISE. 

1. Who is the writer that does not sometimes experience moments 
of sterility and languor 1 

2. There is not in the heart of man a good impulse that God 
does not produce. 

3. Choose a retreat where you may be quiet, a post whence you 
may defend yourself. 

4. The most flattering reward that a man can reap from his la- 
bours, is the esteem of an enlightened public. 

6. May he live, reign, and long constitute the happiness of a 
nation which he loves, and by which he is adored J 

6. That he should thus degrade himself, is what posterity will 
find very difficult to believe. 

7. A man just and firm is not shaken, either by the clamours of 
an inconsiderate mob, or by the threats of an imperious tyrant : 
though * the whole world were \o fall into ruins, he would be 
struck by it, but not moved. 

(2.) Impulse, mouvement. (3.) May, pouvoir. 

(5.) (May he, repeated before every verb) •, constitute, faire j which kt loves, 
cherir. 

(6.) Find difficult, avoir de ia peine 5 believe, se persuader. 

(7,) Is shaken, ebranlcr ; inconsiderate, insense* mob, populace; imperiout t 
fier j were, devoir 5 to fall into ruins, s'eciouler. 



PARTICULAR BFLKS OF THE VERB. 389 

least in subordinate, though they may be in the princi- 
pal propositions. For instance. 

/ wish you would come to-night, 
Cannot be translated by 

Je souhaite que vous viendriez cesoir, 
Because, " when the verb of the principal proposition 
is in the present, the verb of (he subordinate proposition 
is put in the present of the subjunctive, if we mean to 
express a future." Therefore we must say, 

Je souJiaite que vous veniez. 
Or, " if the first verb is in either of the conditionals, 
the second must be in the imperfect of the subjunctive," 
For which reason we must also say, 

Je voudrais que vous vinssiez. (See Rule II.) 

New, in the first example, que vous veniez is marked 

in the conjunction of the verb by, that you may come, 

and in the second, que vous vinssiez, by, that you might 

come, neither of which is in the examples given. Agafn, 

R n'y apersonne qui le croie, 
Cannot be translated by, there is nobody who may be- 
lieve it, although may is the sign of the subjunctive in 
the meaning ; but the meaning is, 

There is nobody that believes it, or simply nobody believes U 



RELATIONS BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE 
DIFFERENT MOODS. 

Remark. Our intention is not to give the relations 
which all the tenses bear to each other, but simply to 
mention some of the principal. 



relations of the indicative. 

To the imperfect are subjoined three tenses. 
( quand vous 6cmmz 
Standard. — Je lisais < quand vous avez icrii 
( quand vous tcrwites. 



390 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

The preterit anterior requires the preterit definite, as f 
quand feus fni, vous entrates. 

To the pluperfect are subjoined the preterit definite, 
the preterit indefinite, the preterit anterior, and the im- 
perfect. 

f quand vous entrdtes 

T , ■ j } quand vous etes entri 
Standards.-./^™* J»<j H vmndvousJliUe8 entri 

(^ quand vous entriez. 
To the preterit anterior indefinite is subjoined the 
preterit indefinite, as, quand fax eu dint, vous £ies 
entre. 

In conjunction with si, for suppose que, the future ab- 
solute requires the present, and the future anterior, the 
preterit indefinite, 

• a ( Vous partirez, sije veux. 

standar . ^ User a parti, si vous Vavez voulu. 



Relations to the Conditional and of the Conditional. 
In conjunction with si, for suppose que, the condition- 
al present is accompanied by the imperfect, and the 
first conditional past by the pluperfect, or by the second 
conditional past. 

( Vous partiriez, sije It voulais. 
-Standards.-^ Vous serk arti \ si jeV avals voulu 
( r \ sije leusse voulu. 

The tenses of the conditional present, and of the two 
conditionals past are likewise accompanied by them- 
selves. 

C Quand I' 'avare possidercit tout Vor dumonde, 
il nc strait pas encore content. 
Standards. — I Quand Alexandre aurait conquis tout I'univcrs, 
il n'auratt pas 6te content. 

^ Vous fussicz parti, sije t'eusse voulu. 

It has been observed that when two words are join- 
ed by the conjunction que, the second verb is put 
sometimes in the indicative and sometimes in the sub- 
junctive. 



takticulah rules of the verb. 391 

Relations of tlie Present and Future Absolute, of the In- 
dicative to the Tenses of their ovm Mood and of the 
Conditional, 

These two tenses may be accompanied by all the 
tenses of the indicative and conditional. 

f vous parlcz aujourd'hui 
vous partirez dcmain 
vous serez parti, quand, &c. 
vous partiez hier 
vous par tit es hier 
a C On dit \ J vous etes parti ce matin 

Standard.— £ Qn dim j que ^ vous f{ ltesparl i hier, quand, &c 

vous eliez parti hier, quand, &c. 
vous par tiriez aujourd'hui, si, 

&c. 
vous seriez parti hier, si, &c. 
K vou$fussiezpariiplusl6t,si,&,c. 

Remark. The same relation subsists when the 
sentence is negative ; except that for the present ab- 
solute of the indicative, the present of the subjunctive 
is substituted. Instead of, on ne dit pas que vous par- 
tez aujourd'hui ; the genius of the French language re- 
quires that we should say, on ne dit pas que vous par- 
tiez aujourd'hui. 

The imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit in- 
definite, and the pluperfect, are accompanied ei*her by 
the imperfect, or by the pluperfect. 

Sol^lThier ) \ vous partiez aujourd'hui 

Standards.-^ ;' \ que 1 

( On avail dit ) { ™us 6txez partu 

The future anterior requires the preterit indefinite, 
as, on aura dit que vous avez menti. 

The conditional present may be accompanied by the 
present, the imperfect, the preterit indefinite, the plu- 
perfect, the future of the indicative as well as by the 
three conditionals. 



392 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB 

* qu'il se trompe 
quHl se trompait 
qu'il s'est trompi 

Sr^s.-Oncroirai, { f$ £*££?* 

qu'U se tromperait, si, &c. 
quHl se strait trompi, si, &c. 
< qu , il sefut trompe, si, &c. 

The first conditional past may be accompanied by the 
imperfect, the pluperfect, as well as by the two other 
conditionals. 

f qu'U tombait 

8TAm*EDs.-OnaM»»tcnti «"g *°* Tt 

I qwil serait tomoe 

[^quHlfut tombi 

The second conditional past may be accompanied by 
the same tenses. 



Principal Relations with the Subjunctive. 

To the present, the future absolute, and the future 
anterior of the indicative is generally subjoined the pre- 
sent of the subjunctive. 

C II veut } 

Standard. — 2 Ilvoudra >que vous particz. 

( II aura voulu ) 

To the imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit in- 
definite, the pluperfect, and the preterit anterior may 
be subjoined the imperfect of the subjunctive. 

( Je voulais 



t Jai voulu y q 

Tavais voulu 
[ feus voulu J 



Je voulus 
Standard. — I Tai voulu j> que vous partisziez. 



To the future anterior the preterit of the subjunctive, 
as : II aura voulu qu'U soit parti. 

The conditional present is accompanied either by the 
imperfect, or by the pluperfect of the subjunctive. 

a C r , . C vous partissioz 

Standard. — < Je voudrais que < aLu^u- ««^j 

£ ' ( vous tins siez part*. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 393 

To the first and second conditionals past is subjoined 
the pluperfect of the subjunctive. 

~ ( Taurais voulu ) r . . 

S™ D AKD.-| j, tMge mulu I que vous fmssiez parti, 

&c. &c. &c. &c. 



OF THE INFINITIVE. 

The preposition to before an infinitive, is, according to 
circumstances, rendered either by pour, by d, or by de ; 
sometimes even, it is not expressed at all. 

When to means in order to, it is expressed in French; 
by pour, as, 
He came to speak to me, H vint pour me parler. 

As for the other two cases, tiiere is hardly any fixed 
rule to distinguish whether d or de, is to be used ; the 
regimen which the preceding French verb requires af- 
ter it is the only guide. Thus, 

He Wees to play, will be expressed by it aime d jouer ; he told 
me to go, by time dit d'allcr / and he preferred dying, by il aima 
tnieuz mqurir. 

The participle present is used in English both as a 
substantive and an adjective, and frequently instead of 
the present of the infinitive. 

His ruling passion is hunting, Sa passion domiaante est la 

chasse. 

Heis gone a walking, II est alle se proraener. 

Prevent him from doing mis- Empechez-le de faire le mal. 

chief, 

There is a pleasure in silencing II y a plaisir a ferraer la bouche 

great talkers, aux grands parleurs. 

It likewise takes almost every other preposition. In 
the first of the above examples it is translated by the 
substantive ; in the second by the verbal adjective ; 
and in the others by the present of the infinitr e. But 
sometimes it must be expressed by the relative qui, 
with the verb in the indicative, especially when a differ- 
ent mode might create any ambiguity in the sense ; as, 



394 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 

I met them riding post, Je les ai rencontr6s qui cou 

raient la poste. 

Sometimes it must be expressed by the conjunction 
que, with the verb in the indicative, or in the subjunc- 
tive, as circumstances may require : this is when the 
participle present is preceded by a possessive pronoun, 
as, 
Tlie fear of his coming vexed La crainte qu'il ne vint nous 

us, tourmentait. 

I doubt his being faithful, Je doute qu'il soit fidele, &c. 

It may be proper to observe that, in French, the 
preposition en alone is followed by the participle pre- 
sent. All other prepositions require the present of the 
infinitive. 

Foreigners are apt to mistake in the use of the parti- 
ciple present, because they do not consider that, as it 
expresses an incidental proposition, it must evidently re- 
late to the word which it restrains and modifies. 

Rule. The participle present always forming a 
phrase incidental and subordinate to another, must ne- 
cessarily relate to the subject of the principal phrase, 
when- it is not preceded by another noun, as in this sen- 
tence : 

Je ne puis vous accompagner d I cannot accompany you into 

la campagne, ayant des af the country, having some 

f aires qui exigent id ma pr£- business that requires my pre- 

sence, sence here. 

The participle present ayant relates to the subject je, 
since the subordinate proposition, formed by ayant, could 
have no kind of relation to the principal proposition, if 
it could not be resolved into this, parce que fai des 
affaires qui, &c. But, in this sentence ; 

Combien voyons-nous dc gens, How many people do we see, 
qui, connaissant It prix du who, knowing the value of 
temps, le per dent maid-pro- time, waste it improperly ! 
pos ! 

Connaissant relates to the substantive gens, because 
this is the word which it restrains and modifies, and 
because the relative qui, placed between that substan- 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 395 

tive as the regimen, and the participle present, obviates 
every kind of ambiguity. 

Remarks. 1. Two participles ought never to be 
used together without being united by a conjunction, 
as, &c. 

C'est un homme aimant et craig- He is a man loving and fearing 
nant Dien, God. 

2. The relative en ought never to be put either be- 
fore a participle present, or before a gerund. We can- 
not say : 

Je vous ax remis monjils entre les mains, en voulant faire quelquc 
clwse de bon. 

Because the sense would be amblgtYous : for, the mean- 
ing is not : 

As I wish to do something good, or, as I wish to do well, I have put 
my son into your hands, 

But, 

I have put my son into your hands, as I wish to make something of 
him. 

We should say : Voulant en faire, &c. 
Likewise this sentence would b-3 improper : 

Lc prince tempere la rigueur du pouvoir, en en partageant Its 
fo notions, 

on account of the repetition of the word en, used in two 
different senses, via., as a preposition and a relative. 
Another turn must be then adopted, as, 

Cest en partageant lesfonctions du pouvoir, qu'un prince en tern* 
pere la rigueur. 



CHAP. vr. 

OF PREPOSITIONS. 

The office of prepositions is to bring the two terms 
between which they are placed, into a state of relation. 
And that relation is generally expressed by their own 
signification, as, 

Avec, sur, pendant, dans, &c. 



396 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

But a y de, and en, express it, either by their primi- 
tive and proper meaning, or figuratively and by exten- 
sion ; so that, in this last case, they are merely preposi- 
tions serving to unite the two terms ; whence it happens 
that they often express, either the same relations that 
others do, or opposite relations. For instance, in these 
two sentences : 

Approchez-vous dufeu, Come near the fire. 

Eloignez-vous dufeu, Go from the fire. 

De merely establishes a relation between the two 
terms, without expressing in the first, the relation of ap- 
proximation, or in the second, the relation of distance. 
In order, therefore, to form a just idea of these three pro- 
positions, it is of importance to consider only their pri- 
mitive and proper signification. „ 

En and dans have nearly the same meaning ; but 
they differ in this, that the former is used in a more 
vague, the latter in a more determinate sense, as : 
J'etais en Angleterre, dans la province de Middlesex. 

From what has just been said, it follows then that en, 
on account of its indeterminate nature, ought not to be 
followed by the article, except in a small number of 
phrases sanctioned by usage, such are, 

En la presence de Dieu ; en la grand 1 chambre du parlement ; en 
V absence d'un tel ; en Vannie mil huit cent dix-sept, &c. 

with respect to the expressions 

En Vhonneur, en Vdge, it is better to say, a Vhonneur, a Ydge. 

Avant is a preposition in this phrase : 
Avantlejour, Before day-light. 

But it is an adverb in this : 
N'allezpas si avant, Do not go so forward. 

Some other prepositions are likewise occasionally ad- 
verbs. 

Autour and alentour, must not be confounded ; autour 
is a preposition, and alentour an adverb, thus ; 

Tous les grands ttaient autour AM the grandees stood round 

du trone, the throne. 

he roi ttait sur son trone, ct les The king was upon the throne, 

grands ttaient alentour, «nd the grandees stood round. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 39T7 

Avant and auparavant are not used indifferently. 

Avant is followed by a regimen, as 3 

Avant Pdqnes, Before Easter. 

Avant ce temps, Before that time. 

Auparavant is followed by no regimen, as, 

Si vous partiz, vev.ez me voir an- If you set off, come and seo ne 
paravanty first. 

PrH a and pris de, are not the same expressions. 
Prit is an adjective : 

Je suis pret d faire ce que vous I am ready to do what yom 
voudrez, please. 

But prds is a preposition : 

Mon outrage est pr'es d'etre My work is nearly finished. 
fini, 

Au travers and a travers differ in this ; the first is 
followed by the preposition de, the second is not, as, 

II sefit jour au travers des en- He fought Ms way through &« 

nemis, enemy. 

II se Jit jour d travers les en- 

nemis, 

Avant denotes priority of time and order, as, 
II est arrivi avant moi, l'artiele se met avant le nom. 

Devant is used for en presence, vis-a-vis, as, 

II a paru devant lejuge ; U loge devant Viglise. 

Remark. Devant is likewise a preposition marking 
order, and is the opposite of apr£s, as, 

II ale pas devant moi, He has precedence of me. 

Si vous ites prtsst, coiirez de- If you are in a hurry, run h- 
vant, fore. 



THE USE OF THE ARTICLE WITH PREPOSITIONS. 

Some prepositions require the article before their re- 
gimen ; others do not ; and others again, sometimes 
admit, sometimes reject it. 

35 



198 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS, 

Rule I. The following prepositions, generally re- 
quire the article before the noun, which they govern. 

avant, depuis, ervers, nonobstaffl , selon, 

aprcs, devant, excepts, .mi, stdrant, 

cfiez, derriere, hors, pendant, touchant, 

dans, durant, liormis, pour, vers, 

avant Vaurore, chez h prii ;ce, enr rs les pant 

apris la promenade, dans la mvison, devant feglise, «&c. 

There are however exceptions, as, 

araatterme, avant diner, pour lit une paillasse, 

avant midi, aprds diner, depuis minuit, &c. 

Rule II. A noun governed by the preposition en, 
is not, in general, preceded by the article, as, 

En 'dlle, en campagne, en extase, en songe, en pi&ces, &c. 

Remark. ISarme'e est erctre'e en campagne, means the 
army has taken the field ; but Mr. N. est alU a la cam- 
pagne, means Mr. N. is gone into the country. 

Rule III. These eleven prepositions, a de, avec, 
contre, entre, malgre', outre, par, pour, sur, sans, some- 
times admit, sometimes reject the article before their re- 
gimen. 

If the article is used in these phrases : 

Jou&r sur le velours, 

St. Paul veut de la subordination entre \a.femme et le mart 

Sans les passions, oil serait le nitrite 1 

It is suppressed in, 

Etr$ sur pied ; un peu de facons ne gdte rien entre marl et 
femme. 

Vivre sans passions, e'est vivre sans plaisirs et sans peines. 



REPETITION OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

Rule I. The prepositions de, a, and en, must be re- 
peated before all the nouns which they govern, as, 

Voyons qui Vemporiera de vous, Let us see which of us will on- 
de lui, ou de moi, cei, you, he, or I. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 



399 



Ette a de Vhonnetete, de la dou- 
ceur, des grdces, et de V esprit, 

La loi, que Dieu a grav6e au 
fond de mon cceur, mHnstruit 
de tout ce que je dois a Can- 
teur de mon tire, au procliain, 
k moi-meme, 

En Asie, en Europe, en Afrique, 
etjusqu'en Am&rique, on trouve 
le mime prbjugt. 

Rule II. The other prepositions, especially those 
consisting of two syllables, are generally repeated — 
before nouns, which have meanings totally different ^ 
but seldom before nouns, that are nearly synonymous. 
Rien n'cst moins selon Dieu et 

selon le monde, 



She has politeness, sweetness, 
grace, and abilities. 

The law which God has deeply 
engraven on my heart, in- 
structs me in every thing I 
owe to the author of my be- 
ing, to my neighbour, and to 
myself. 

In Asia, in Europe, in Africa, 
and even in America, we find 
the same prejudice. 



Celte action est contre Vhonneur 
et Contre toute esphce de prin- 
cipes, 

But we ought to say, 

H perd sa jtunessc dans la mol- 
lesse et la voluptS, 

Notre loi ne condamne pcrsonne 
sans V avoir entendu et ex- 
amine. 



Nothing is less according to 

God and according to the 

world. 
That action is contrary to 

honour, and to every kind of 

principle. 



He wastes his youth in effemi- 
nacy and pleasure. 

Our laws condemn nobody 
without having heard and ex- 
amined him. 



OF THE GOVERNMENT OF PREPOSITIONS. 

Some prepositions govern nouns without the help of 
another preposition, as, 

Devant le maison, Before the house. 

Horniis sonfrtre, Except his brother. 

Sans son ep6e, Without his sword, &c. 

Others require the help of the preposition de, as, 
Prds de la maison, Near the house. 

A Vinsu desonfr&re, Unknown to his brother. 

Aw-dessus du pont, Above the bridge, &c. 

These four, jusque, par rapport, quant and sauf are 
followed by the preposition d, as, 

JusqxCau mou proem to, Till the next month. 

Quant d moi, As for me, &c. 



400 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

Practice alone can teach these different regimens. 

Rule. A noun may be governed by two preposi- 
tions, provided they do not require different regimens ; 
thus we may say with propriety, 

Qelui qui ccrit selon Its circon- He who writes according to 

stances, pour ct contre un circumstances, both for and 

parti, est un liomme bien tn6- against a party, is a very con- 

piisable, temptible man. 

But it would be wrong to say, 

Celui qui 6cril en laveur et contre un parti, &c. 

because enfaveur requires the preposition de. 

Rule. Prepositions which, with their regimen, ex- 
press a circumstance, are generally placed as nearly as 
possible to the word to which that circumstance relates, 
as, 

On voit dcs personnes qui, avec We see persons who, with a 

beaucoup d'esprit, commettent great deal of wit, commit 

de tres-grandes fautes. very great faults. 

Tai envoyS a la poste les lettres I have sent to the post-office the 

quevous avsz ecrites, letters which you have written. 

Groyez-vous pouvoir ramener Do you think you can reclaim 

par la douceur ccs esprits by gentleness, those mistaken 

6gar6s ? people ? 

If we attempt to alter the place of these preposi- 
tions, we shall find that the sentences will become am- 
biguous. 



CHAP. VII. 

OF THE ADVERB. 

OF THE NEGATIVE TIC 

Negation is expressed in French by ne, either alone 
or accompanied by pas or point. On this point the Aca- 
demy has examined the four following questions : 

1. Where is the place of the negatives? 

2. When is pas to be used in preference .o point, and 
vice versa t 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 401 

3. When may both be omitted ? 

4. When ought both to be omitted ? 

As this subject is of very material importance, wc 
shall treat it upon the plan of the Academy, and agree- 
ably to their views. 



First Question. Where is the place of the nega- 
tives ? 

Ne is always prefixed to the verb ; but the place of 
pas and point is variable. 

When the verb is in the infinitive, these are placed in- 
differently before, or after it ; for we say, 

Pour ne point voir, or, pourne xoir pas. 

In the other moods, except the imperative, the tenses 
are either simple, or compound. In the simple tenses, 
pas or point is placed after the verb. 

II ne parle pas ; ne parle-t-il pas ? 

In the compound tenses, it is placed between the 
auxiliary and the participle. 

E n 7 a pas parle ; n' a-t-il pas parU ? 

In the imperative, it is placed after the verb. 
Ne badinez pas. Ne vous en allez pas. 



Second Question. When is pas to be used in pre- 
ference to point, and vice versa ? 

Point is a stronger negative than pas : besides, it de- 
notes something permanent : II ne lit point, means, he 
never reads. 

Pas denotes something accidental : II ne lit pas, 
means, he does not read now, or he is not reading. 

Point de denotes an absolute negation. Thus : 

II rv a point aV esprit, is to say, he has no wit at all. 

Pas de allows the liberty of a reserve. So : 

77 n'a pas d'esprit, is to say, he has nothing of wha* 
can be called wit. 

35 



402 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 

Hence, the Academy concludes, that pas is more pro- 
per, 

1. Before plus, moins, si,autant, and other words de- 
noting comparison, as, 

Milton n'est pas moins sublime Milton is not less sublime than 
qu'Homere, Homer. 

2. Before nouns of number, as, 

U n J y a pas dix ans, It is not ten years ago. 

Point is elegantly used, 

1. At the end of a sentence, as, 

On s'amusait d ses depens. et it They were amusing themselves 
ne s'en apercevaU point, at his expense, and he did not 

perceive it. 

2. In elliptical sentences, as, 

Je croyais avoir affaire a un hon- I thought I had to deal with an 
nete homme ; mais point, honest man ; but no. 

3. In answer to interrogative sentences, as, 

Irez-vous ce soir au pare ? — Shall you go this evening to the 
point, park ? — no. 

The Academy also observes, that when pas. or point 
is introduced into interrogative sentences, it is with mean- 
ings somewhat different. We make use of point, when 
we have any doubt on our minds, as, 

N'avez-vous point iti Id ? Have you not been there ? 

But we use pas, when we are persuaded. Thus, 

XTavez-vous pas et6 Id ? But you have been there, have 

not you ? 



Third Question. When may both pas and point be 
omitted ? 

They may be suppressed, 

lo After the words cesser, oser, and pouvoir ; but this 
omission is only for the sake of elegance, as, 

Je ne cesse de in'cn occuper, I am incessantly attentive to it. 

Jen'ose vous en purler, I dare not speak to you about it. 

Je ne puis ypenscr sans frcmir, I cannot think of it without 

shuddering. 



PARTICULAR RTJLES OP THE ADVERB. 403 

We likewise say, but only in familiar conversation, 

Ne lougez, Do jot stir. 

2. In expressions of this kind, 

Y a-t-il un homme dont eUe ne Is there a man that she does not 

midise ? slander 1 

Atez-vous un ami qui ne soit des Have you a friend that is not 

miens ? likewise mine ? 



Fourth Question. When ought both pas and poii.t 
to be omitted ? 

They are omitted, 

1. When the extent which we mean to give to the ne- 
gative is sufficiently expressed either by the words which 
restrict it, by words which exclude all restriction, or 
lastly, by such as denote the smaller parts of a whole, 
and which are without the article. 

To exemplify the first part of this remark, we say, 
Je ne sors guere, I go out but seldom. 

Je ne sortirai de trois jours, I shall not go out for three days 

To exemplify the second, we say, 
Jz riy cats jamais, I never go there. 

Je riy -pev.se plus, I think no more of it. 

Nul ne saits'il est digned'aMour, Nobody knows whether he be 

oh de haine, deserving of love, or hatred. 

Nemploycz aucun de ces sirata- Use none of these stratagems. 

g&mes, 
II nc plait d personne, He pleases nobody. 

Rietl tiest plus cliarmant, Nothing is more charming. 

Je riy ptnse nulltmcnt, I do not think of it at all. 

To exemplify the third, we say, 
II riy roit goulte, He cannot see at all. 

Je a'cn ai cueilli brin, I did not gather a sprig. 

II ne dit mot, He speaks not a word. 

But if to mot we join an adjective of number, pas must 
be added, as, 
// ne dit pas un mot qui riintt- He speaks not a word but what 

resse, is interesting. 

Dans ce discours, il riy a jms In that speech, there are not 

trois mots d reprendre, three words that are excep- 

tionable. 

Pas is likewise used with the preposition de, as, 

II ne fait pas de d-marche inu~ lie does net take any useless 
tile, step. 



404 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 

Remark. If, after the sentences we have just men 
tioned, either the conjunction que, or the relative pro 
nouns qui or dont, should introduce a negative sentence, 
then in this last pas and point are omitted, as, 

Je nefais jamais d'exces que je I never commit any excess, 

w'en sois incommode, without being ill after it. 

Je ne vols personne qui ne vous I see nobody but what com- 

loue, mends you. 

2. When two negatives are joined by ni, as, 

Je ne Vaime wi ne Vestime, I neither love nor esteem him. 

And when the conjunction ni is repeated, either in the 
subject, as, 

Ni Vor nila grandeur ne nous Neither gold nor greatness can 
rcndent heureux, make us happy. 

Or, in the attribute, as, 
// n'est ni prudent ni sage, He is neither prudent nor wise. 

Or, in the regimen, as, 

U rta ni dettes ni procds, He has neither debts nor law 

suits. 

Remark. Pas is preserved, when ni is not repeated, 
a«nd when this last serves only to unite two members of a 
negative sentence, as, 

Je n'aime pas ce vain italage I do not like that vain display 
d" 1 erudition, prodigufe sans of erudition, lavished without 
choix et sans gout, ni ce luxe de choice and without taste, nor 
mots qui ne disent Hen, that pomp of words which 

have no meaning. 

3. With the verb which follows que, used instead of 
pourquoi, and with a moins que, or si, used instead of it, 
as, 

Que n'eteS'VOus aussi pose que Why are you not as sedate as 

votrefrere ? your brother ? 

Je nesortirai pas, d moins que I shall not go out, unless you 

vous ne veniez mt prendre, come to fetch me. 

Je n'irai pas chez lui, sHl ne m'y I shall not go to his house, if he 

engage, do not invite me. 

4. With ne — que used instead of settlement, as, 

line jeuncsse, qui sc tivre d ses Youth, which abandons itself 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 405 

passions, ne trajismet d la rneil- to its passions, transmits to 
lesse qu y un corps us6, old age nothing but a worn- 

out body. 

When before the conjunction que, the word rien is un- 
derstood, as, 
// nefait que rire. He does nothing but laugh. 

Or when that conjunction may be changed into sinon, 
or si ce rfest, as, 

U ne tient qu'd vous de riussir, The success wholly depends 

upon you. 
1 Trop de maitres d la fois ne Too many masters at once only 
strvent qu'd embrouiiler Ves- serve to perplex the mind. 
prit, 

5. With a verb in the preterit, preceded by the con- 
junction depuis que, or by the verb il y a, denoting a 
certain duration of time, as, 

Comment vous ites-vous porti de- How have you been since I saw 

puis queje ne vous ai vu ? you ! 

II y a trois mois que je ne vous ai I have not seen you for these 

vu, three months. 

But they are not omitted, when the verb is in the pre- 
sent, as, 

Comment vit-il depuis que nous How does he live now we do 

ne le voyons point ? not see him ? 

11 y a six mois que nous ne le We have not seen him these 

voyons point, six months. 

6. In phrases where the conjunction que is preceded 
by the adverbs of comparison plus, moins, mieux, &c. or 
some other equivalent term, as, 

On miprise ceux qui patient au- We despise those who speak 
trement qu'ils ne penscnt, differently from what they 

think. 

II icrit mieux qu'd ne parle, He writes better than he 

speaks. 

Cest pire qu'ou ne le disait, It is worse than was said. 

Cest autre rJwse que je ne croy- It is different from what I 
ais, thought. 

Peu s'cti faut qu'on ne rrCaii I have been very near being 
trompS, deceived. 

7. In sentences united by the conjunction que to tho 



406 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 

verbs douter, disesperer, nier, and disconvenir, forming 
a negative member of a sentence, as, 

Je ne doute pas quHl ne vunne, I doubt not that he will come . 

Ne distsptrez pas qut cc moyen Do not despair of the success of 

ne vous reussisse, these means. 

Je ne vie pas, or je ne disconviens I do not deny that it is so. 

pas que cela ne soit, 

The Academy says, that after the two last verbs, ne 
may be omitted, as, 

Je ne nie pas, or, je ne disconviens pas que cela soit. 

8. With a verb united by the conjunction que to the 
verbs emp£cher and prendre garde, meaning to take care, 
as, 

J'empicherai Men que vous ne I shall prevent your being of the 

soyez da nnmbre, number. 

Prenez garde qvCon ne vous si- Take cars that they do not cor- 
pse, - rupt you. 

Remark. The Academy observes, that in the above 
acceptation, prendre garde is followed by a subjunctive ; 
but when it means to reflect, the indicative is used with 
pas or point, as, 

Prenez garde que vous ne m'en- Mind, you do not understand 
tendezpaSf what I mean. 

9. With a verb united by the conjunction que, to the 
verb craindre, and those of the same meaning, when 
we do not wish the thing expressed by the second verb, 
as, 

B craintque son fr&re ne Vaban- He is afraid his brother should 

donne, forsake him. 

Je crains que mon ami ne I fear my friend will die. 

meure, 

But pas is not omitted, when we wish the thing ex- 
pressed by the second verb, as, 

Je crains que mon pdre n f arrive I am afraid my father will not 
pas, come. 

10. With the verb which follows de peur que, d# crainte 
que, in similar circumstances with craindre. Thus, 
when we say, 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 407 

De crainte qu'U ne perde son procds. 
We wish that he may gain it, and, when we say, 

De crainte qu'U ne soit pas puni, 
We wish that he may be punished. 
Re^iark. In these phrase:?, 
Je crains que mon ami ne I am afraid my friend will die. 

Vq; .h-mte. You prevent them from sing- 

ing. 

The expression ne is not a negation ; it is the ne, or 
quin of the Latins introduced into the French language, 
as may be seen by the English translation. 

11. After savoir, whenever it has the meaning ofpow. 
voir, as, 

Je ne saurais en venir d bout, I cannot accomplish it. 

When it means Hre incertain, it is the best to omit pas 
and point, as, 

Jcne sais oule prendre, I do not know whereto find 

him. 
// ne sail ce qu'il dit, He does not know what he 

says. 

Remark. But pas and point must be used when sa- 
voir is taken in its true meaning, as, 
Je ne sais pas le Francais, I do not know French. 

12. We also say 5 

Ne zous diplaise, ne votte en db- By your leave, under favour, 
plaise, or, let it not displease you. 

Plus and davantage must not be used indifferently. 
Plus is followed by the preposition de, or the conjunc- 
tion que, as, 

Jl a plus de brillant que de so- He has more brilliancy than so- 

lide, lidity. 

II se fie plus d ses lumi&rcs qu'd He relies more upon bis-own 

edits des autres, knowledge than upon that of 

others. 

Davantage is used alone and at the end of sentences, 

as, 

La science est estimable, mais la Learning is estimable, but vir- 
vertu Vest davantage, tue is still more so. 



408 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 

Though davantage cannot be followed by the preposi- 
tion de, it may be preceded by the pronoun en, as, 

Je n'en dirai pas davantage, I shall not say any more about 

it. 

It is incorrect to use davantage for le plus. We must 

say, 

Dp, toutes lesfleures a" 1 un parterre, Of all the flowers of a parterre 
Van6mon± est celle qui r,:e plait the anemone is that which 
le plus, pleases me most. 



Si, aussi, tant, and auiant, are always followed by the 
conjunction que, expressed or understood. 

Si and aussi are joined to adjectives, adverbs, and 
participles ; tant and auiant to substantives and verbs. 

V 'Angleterre ?i f estpas si grande England is not so large as 

que la France, ' France. 

II est aussi estimi qu^aimi, He is as much esteemed as he is 

belcved. 
Elle a autant de beaute que de She has as much beauty as vu> 

vcrtu, tue. 

Remark. Autant may, however, be substituted for 
aussi, when it is preceded by one adjective, and followed 
by que arxl another adjective, as, 
II est modeste autant que sage, He is as modest as wise. 

Aussi and autant are used in the affirmative ; si and 
tant in negative and interrogative sentences. The two 
last are, however, alone to be used in affirmative senten- 
ces, when they are put for tellement, as, 

E est detenu si gros, quHl a de la He is become so bulky that he 

peine d marcher, can hardly walk. 

11 a tant couru qu'il en est hors He has been running so fast 

dlialeine, that he is out of breath. 



Jamais takes sometimes the preposition a, and toujours 
the preposition pour, as, 

Soyez & jamais heurtux, Be for ever happy. 

C est pour toujours, It is for ever. 



OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 409 

CHAP. VIII. 

OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

Grammatical construction is the order which the 
genius of a Ian: is assigned, in speech, to the 

different sorts of words into which it is distinguished. 
Construe sometimes mistake]] for syntax ; but 

there is this difference, the latter consists in the n 
which we are to observe, in order to express the rela- 
tions of words one to another, whereas grammatical 
construction consists in the various arrangements 
which are allowed while w r e observe the rules of syn:ax. 
Now this arrangement is irrevocably fixed, not only as 
phrases may be interrogative, imperative, or exposi- 
tive, but also as each of these kinds may be affirmative 
or negative. 

In sentences simply interrogative, the subject is 
either a noun or pronoun. 

If the subject be a noun, the following is the order to 
be observed : first, the noun, then the verb, then the 
corresponding personal pronoun, the adverb, if any, and 
the regimen in the simple tenses : in the compound tenses, 
the pronoun and the adverb are placed between the 
auxiliary and the participle, as, 

Les lumicres sont-elles un Men Are sciences an advantage to 

pour les peuples ? ont-elles nations ? Have they ever 

jamais contriljut d leur bun- contributed to their happi- 

heur ? ness ? 

If the subject be a pronoun, the verb begins the se- 
ries, and the other words follow in the order already 
pointed out, as, 

Vous plairez-vous toujours d Will you always take pleasure 

mtdire ? in slandering? 

Aurez-vous bitntdtfir.i ? Shall you have soon done ? 

N. B. When the verb is reflected, the pronoun 
forming the regimen begins the series ; this pronoun 

36 



41 C OP GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

always preserves its place before the verb, except in 
sentences simply imperative. 

In interrogative sentences, with negation, the same 
ordt-r is ob -eived ; bi ine is placed be ton the verb, and 
pas P or point, after the verb in the simple tenses, and 
between the auxiliary and the participle in the compound 
tenses., as, 
Votre frere ne viendra-t-il pas Will not your brother come to- 

dtmain ? morrow? 

N'aurez-vous pas bientot fini? SbalJ you not have soon done ? 

Remark. There are in French several other ways of 
interrogating. 

1 . With an absolute pronoun, as, 

Qui vous a dit cela ? or, 

Qui eot-ce qui vous a dit cela ? Who told you that ? 

2. With the demonstrative pronoun ce, as, 
Est-ce-vous ? Is it you 1 Est-ce qiCil pleut '• Does it rain T 

3. With an interrogative verb, as, 

Pourquoi vs ment-il pas ? Why does he not come ? 

Comment vous trouvez-vous ? How do you find yourself? 

Hence we see that the absolute pronouns and the in. 
terrogative adverbs always begin the sentence : but the 
demonstrative pronoun always follows the verb. 

In sentences, simply imperative, the verb is always 
placed first, in the first and second persons ; but in the 
third, it comes after the conjunction que and the noun 
or pronoun, as, 

Allons Id, Let us go there. 

l r enez ici, Come here. 

Qu'ils y aillent, Let them go there. 

Que Pierre aille d Londres, Let Peter go to London. 

With negation ne and pas are placed as in interroga- 
tive sentences. 

For the place of the pronouns, (see p. 241.) 
Sentences are expositive, when we speak without 
either interrogating, or commanding. The following 
is the order of the words in those which are affirmative : 



OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 411 

the subject, the verb, the adverb, the participle, the re- 
gimen, as, 

Un ban prince mSrite V amour de A good prince deserves the lore 

ses sujets, et Vestime de tous les cf his subjects, and the esteem 

pcuplts, of all nations. 

Cesar eut inutilen.ent passe le Caesar would have crossed the 

Rubicon, s'z7 y cut eu de son Rubicon to no purpose, had 

te.nps des Fabius, there been Fabii in his time. 

The negative sentences differ from this construction, 
only as ne is always placed before the verb, and pas, or 
point, either after the verb, or between the auxiliary and 
participle, as, 

Un /uymme riche ne fait pas tou~ A rich man does not always df> 

jours le bien qu'il pourrait, all the good he might. 

Ciciron n'eiU peut-etre pas Ste un Cicero would not perhaps have 

si grand orateur, sile desir de been so great an orator, had 

s' clever aaz premieres dignites not the desire of rising to the 

n'eut enflamme son ante, first dignities inflamed his soqfe 

Sentences are either simple, or compound. They 
are simple, when they contain only one subject and one 
attribute, as, 

Vous lisez, You read. 

Vous itesjeune, You are young. 

They are compound, when they associate several 
subjects with one attribute, or several attributes with 
one subject, or several attributes wiih several subjects, 
or several subjects with several attributes. 

This sentence, Pierre et Paid sent l^urc-ix, is com- 
pound by having several subjects ; thi einme est 
joHe, spirituelle et sensible, Is compound by having se- 
veral attributes ; and this, Pierre et Paul sont spirituels 
et savans, is composed at once of several subjects and 
several attributes. 

A sentence may be compound in various other ways ; 
by the subject, by the vsrb, or by the attribute. 

By the subject, when this is restricted by an inciden 
tal proposition, as, 

Dieu, qui est bon. 



412 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

By the verb, when it is modified by some circum 
stance of time, order, &c, as, 

Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais. 

By the attribute, when this attribute is modified by a 
regimen which is itself restricted, as, 

Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais les hommes, qui mettent 
sincerement leur confiance en lui. 

These simple, or compound sentences, may be joined 
to others by a conjunction, as, 

Quand on aime V6tude, le temps When we 1 ")ve study t time flies 
passe sans qu'on s'cn apercoive, without our perceiving it. 

The two partial phrases here form but one. 

Rule. When a sentence is composed of two partial 
phrases, joined by a conjunction, harmony and perspi- 
cuity generally require the shortest to go first. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quand les passions nous quittent, When our passions leave us, we 

* nous nous flattens en vain, que It Y^ m flatter ourselves that 

e'est nous qui les quittons, it is w T e that leave them. 

On n^est point dplaindre, quand, He is not to be pitied, who for 

au defaut de plaisirs riels, on want of real pleasure, finds 

trouve le moyen de s'occuper de means to amuse himself with 

chimeres, chimeras. 

Periods result from the union of several partial 
phrases, the whole of which make a complete sense. 
Periods, to be clear, require the shortest phrases to 
be placed first. The following example of this is taken 
from Fie drier. 



N'attendez pas, Messieurs, 

1. Q,ue j'ouvre une scene tragique ; 

2. Que je represente ce grand homme etendu sur ses propres 
trophees ; 

3. Q,ue je decouvre ce corps pA|e ct sanglant, aupres duquei 
fume encore )a foudre qui l'a frappe ; 

4. Q,ue je fasse crier son sang comme cetui d'Abcl, et que 
j'expose a vos yeux les images de la religion et de ia pa trie 
eplorce. 



OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 413 

This admirable period is composed of four members, 
which go on gradually increasing. It is a rule not to 
give more than four members to a period, and to avoid 
multiplying incidental sentences. 

Obscurity in style is generally owing to those small 
phrases which divert the attention from the principal 
sentences, and make us lose sight of them. 

The construction which we have mentioned is called 
direct, or regular, because the words are placed in 
ling to the order which has been 
pointed out. But this order may be altered in certain 
c-u construction is called indirect, or 

Now, it may be irregular, b by 

ellipsis, by pleonasm, or by syllepsis ; these are what 
are called the four iigures of words. 



OF INVERSION. 



Inversion is the transportation of a word into a place / 
different from that which by usage is properly assigned 
to it. This ought never to be done except when it 
introduces more perspicuity, energy, or harmony into 
the language ; for it is a defect in construction, when- 
ever the relation subsisting between words is not easily 
perceived. 

There are two kinds of inversion : the one, by its 
boldness seems to be confined to poetry : the other is 
frequently employed even in prose. 

We shall speak here of the latter kind only. 

The following inversions are authorized by custom. 

The subject by which a verb is governed may with 
propriety be placed after it, as, 

Tout ce que lid promct Vamitit AW that the friendship of the 
des Romains, Romans promise? him. 

Remark. This inversion is a ride of the art of 
speaking and writing, whenever the subject is modified 

36* 



4] 4 GF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

by an incidental sentence, long enough to make us 
lose sight of the relation of the verb governed to the 
subject governing. 

The noun governed by the prepositions de and a 
may likewise be very properly placed before the verb, 
as, 
D'une voix entrecovpee de san- In a voice interrupted by sobs, 

glots, Us s'Scridrent, they exclaimed. 

A tant (['injures, qu?a-t-elle re- To so much abuse, what an 

pondu ? swer did slie give ? 

The verb is likewise elegeaitly preceded by the pre- 
positions apres, dans, par, sous, contre, &c. with their 
dependencies, as well as by the conjunction si, quand, 
parce que, puisque, quoique, lorsque, &c. as, 

Par la loi du corps, je tiens d By the law of the body, I am 
ce monde qui passe, connected with this passing 

world. 
Puisqu'il le veut 9 qu'il lefasse. Since he wishes it, let him do 

it. 



OF THE ELLIPSIS. 



Ellipsis is the omission of a word, or even several 
words which are necessary to make the construction 
full and complete. In order to form a good ellipsis, 
the mind must be able easily to supply the words omit- 
ted, as, 

J 'acccpterais ks offres de Da- I would accept the offers of 

rius, sifitais Alexandre : — et Darius, if I were Alexan- 

moi anssi, si fetais Panne- der: — and so would I, if I 

nion, were Parmenio. 

Here the mind easily supplies the words je les accep- 
ter ois in the second member. 

The ellipsis is very common in answers to interroga- 
tive sentences, as, 

Quand viendrez-vous ? — dc- When will yon come ? — to- 

rnain, morrow. 

that is, je viendrai demain. 

In order to know whether an ellipsis be good, the 



OP GRAMMATICAL CONSTBTJCTIOX. 415 

words that are understood must be supplied. It is cor- 
rect, whenever the construction completely expresses 
the sense denoted by the words which are supplied : 
otherwise it is not exact. 



OF THE PLEONASM. 

Pleonasm, in gen a superfluity of words ; in 

re good, it must be sane- 

d by custom, which never authorizes its use, but 
to give greater energy to language, or to express, in a 
clearer manner, the internal feeling with which we are 
affected. 

Et que m'a fait d moi cette Troie cu je cours ! 
Je me meurs. S'il ne veut pas vous le dire,je vous le d>rai, 
moi. 

Je l'ai vu de mes propres yeux. 

Je l'ai entendu de mes propres oreilles. 

— A moi, in the first sentence ; — me, in the second ; 
— moi, in the third ; — de mes propres yeux, iu the 
fourth ; and — de mes propres oreilles, in the fifth, are 
employed merely for the sake of energy, or to manifest 
an internal feeling. But this manner of speaking is 
sanctioned by custom. 

Remark. Expletives must not be mistaken for pleo 
nasms, as, 

Cest une affaire, oiiily va du It is an affair in which the 
salut de Vttat, safety ot the state is con- 

cerned. 

Which is better than e'est une affaire, ou ; l va, &c. 
by omitting y, which is in reality u D account of 

oil : but y here, is a mode of expression from which it 
is not allowable to deviate. 



416 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 



qt? THE SYLLEPSIS. 

The syllepsis is a figure by which a word relates 
more to our meaning, than to the literal expressions, as 
in these : 

II est onze heures ; Tan mil sept cent quatre-vingt-dis-neuf. 

When using it, the mind, merely intent upon a pre- 
cise meaning, pays no attention to either the number, 
or the gender of heure and an. 

There is likewise a syllepsis in these sentences : 

Je crains qu'il ne vienne. 
J'empecherai qu'il ne vous nuisc. 
J'ai peur qu'il ne m'oublie, &c. 

Full of a wish that the event may not take place, we 
are willing to do all we can, that nothing should pre- 
sent an obstacle to that wish. This is the cause of the 
introduction of the negative, which, although unne- 
cessary to complete the sense, yet must be preserved 
for the idiom. 

There is again a very elegant syllepsis in sentences 
like the following from Racine : 

Entre le peuple et vous, vous prendrez Dieu pour juge ; 
Vous souvenant, nion fils, que cache sous ce lin, 
Comme eux vousf£tes pauvre, et, comme eux, orphelin. 

The poet forgets that he has been using the word 
peuple : nothing remains in his mind but des pauvres 
and des orphelins, and it is with that idea of which he 
is so fully impressed that he makes the pronoun eux 
agree. For the same reason, Bossuet and Mezengui 
have said, 

Quand it peuple Htbreu entra dans la terre promise, tout y cel£- 
brait lews ancetres. — Bosquet. 

Moise eut recours au Seigneur, et lui dit: que ferai-je a ce 
peuple ? bieniot lie me lapideront. — Mezengui. 

Z»ewsand ils stand for Jes Hcbreux. 



OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 417 

CHAP. IX. 

OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES, AMPHIBdLOGIES, AND 
GALLICISMS. 

We have chiefly to notice two incorrect modes of 
construction, which are contrary to the principles laid 
down in the preceding chapters — grammatical discordan- 
ces, and amphibologies. 

OF DISCORDANCES. 

In general, there is a discordance in language, 
when the words, which compose the various members 
of a sentence, or period, do not agree with each other, 
either because their construction is contrary to analo- 
gy, or because they bring together dissimilar ideas, be- 
tween which the mind perceives an opposition, or can 
see no manner of affinity. 

The following examples will serve to illustrate this ; 

Notre reputation ne depend pas des louanges qu'on nous donne, 
mais des actions louables que nous faisons. 

This sentence is not correct, because the first mem- 
ber being negative, and the second affirmative, cannot 
ccme under the government of the same verb. It 
ought to be : 

Notre reputation depend, non Our reputation depends, not 
des louanges qu'on nous upon the praises which are 
donne, mais des actions bestoiced on us, hut upon the 
louables que, &c. praiseworthy actions ichich us 

perform. 

But the most common discordances are those which 
arise from the wrong use of tenses, as in this sentence : 

II regarde votre malheur comme une punition du peu de com- 
plaisance que vous avcz eue pour lui, dans le temps qu'il vous 
pria, &c. 

Because the two preterits, definite and indefinite, can- 
not well agree together ; it should be ; 



418 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 

Que vous eutes pour lui dans le temps qu'il vouspria. 

There is discordance in this sentence : 

On en ressentit autant de joie que d'une victoire complete dans 
un autre temps, 

Because the verb cannot be understood after the que 
which serves for the comparison, when that verb is to 
be in a different tense ; it should be : 

On en ressentit autant do joie qu'on en aurait ressenti, &c. 

This line of Racine, 

Le flot, qui Tapporta, recule epouvante, 
is also incorrect, because the form of the present cannot 
associate with that of the preterit definite ; it should 
have been : qui Va apporte. 

OF AMPHIBOLOGIES. 

Amphibology in language is when a sentence is so 
constructed as to be susceptible of two different inter- 
pretations : this must be carefully avoided. As we 
speak only to be understood, perspicuity is the first and 
most essential quality of language ; we should always 
recollect that what is not clearly expressed in any lan- 
guage, is no language at all. 

Amphibologies are occasioned, 1. i^j the misuse of 
— moods, and — tenses. 2. Of — the personal pronouns, 
il, le, la, &c. 3. Of — the possessive pronouns, son, sa, 
ses, &c. 4. By giving a wrong place to nouns. 



EXAMPLE. 

Of an Amphibology of the first Kind. 

Qu'ai-je fait, pour venir accabler en ces lieux 

Un heros, sur qui seul j'ai pu tourner les yeux ? Racine. 

Pour venir forms an amphibology, because we do not 
know whether it relates to the person who speaks, or to 
the person spoken to : it should have been : Pour que 
vous veniez. 



OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 419 

EXAMPLE. 

Of an Amphibology of the second Kind. 

Cesar voulut prernierement surpasser Pompee ; les grandes 
i ; Crassus [j.[ firer.t croire 3 quHl pounait partager la 
giji.-e tie ces deui grands horn I 

This sentence is faulty in its construction, because 
; Z and luz set m to relate to Cesar, although 
the sense obii^eo us to refer tnein to Crassus. 



EXAMPLE. 

Of an Amphibology of the third Kind. 

Valere alia chez Lcandre ; il y trouva son fils. 

The pronoun son is ambiguous, because we do not 
know to which it relates, to Valere, or to Leandre. 



EXAMPLE. 

Of an Amphibology of the fourth Kind. 

J'ai envoye les lettras, que j'ai ecrit.es, a la poste. 

A la poste, thus placed, is equivocal, because we do 
not know whether it is meant that the letters have been 
u at the post-office, or sent to the post-office. 



OF GALLICISMS. 

We have distinguished in our " Grammaire Philoso- 
phique et Litteraire," four sorts of gallicisms : we shall 
only mention here those of construction. 

The gallicisms of construction are, in general, irre- 
gularities and deviations from tke customary rules of 
syntax : there are some, however, which are mere 
ellipses, and others which can only be attributed to the 
caprice of custom. 



420 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 

General Principle. Every gallicism of construc- 
tion which obscures the meaning of the sentence, ought 
to be condemned. Those only ought to be preserved 
which do not impair perspicuity, by introducing irregu- 
laris of construction, '^rS which are, at the same time, 
sanctioned by long practice. 

According to this principle, this elliptic gallicism is 
now rejected : 

Et qu'ainsi ne soit, meaning : ce que je vous dis est si vrai que, 
because it obscures the sentence. For instance : 

J'etais dans oe jardin, et qv?ai7isi nesoit, voila. une fleur que j'y 
ai cueillie, that is : Etpour preuve de cela, voila une fleur, &c! 

Moliere and La Fontaine seem to have been the last 
great writers that have used this expression. 

One of the most common gallicisms is that in which 
the impersonal verb il y a, is used for il est, il existe. 
These expressions : 

II y ovait une fois un roi ; — il y a cent a parier contre un, 
are gallicisms. There are two in the following sen- 
tence : 

II n'y a pas jusqu'auz enfans, Even children will meddle with 
qui ne s'ew melent, it. 

The verb falloir forms a sort of gallicism with the 
pronoun en y when it is conjugated like pronominal verbs 
with the double pronouns, il se ; as, 

II s'en faut, il s'en fallait, &c. 
It then means to be wanting, and when preceded by an 
adverb of quantity, the first pronoun is omitted, as, 
Peu s'en faut, tant s'en faut. 
These several manners of using the verb falloir will 
be found in the following sentences : 

EXAMPLES. 

II s'en fant bien qu'il soi*! He is far from being so clever 

aussi habile qu'il croit l'e*re, as he thinks. 

Peu s'en est fallu qu'il n'ait He was very near failing in 

succombe dans cette entreprise, that undertaking. 

II ne s'en est presque rien He teas as near as possible be- 

fallu qu'il n'ait ote tuc, ing killed. 



OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 



421 



Vous dites qu'ii s ? en faut 
viugt livres que Id somme en- 
tiere n'y soit, mais vous vous 
trompez, i! ne peut pas s'en 
falioirtaDt, 

Son rhurae est entierement 
gueri, ou peut s T en faut, 

Q,ue s'en est-il fallu que ces 
deux amis ne se soient brouil- 
les ? ' 

Je ne suis pa? content de 
votre application a 1'etude, tant 
s'en faut, 

Tant s'en faut que cette co- 
medie me plaise, elle me sem- 
ble au contraire detestable, 

II s'en fallait beaucoup que 
je vous approuvasse dans cette 
circonstance, 

The sentences : 

II nest rien moins que ginSrcux, 
Vous avcz beau dire, 

A ce qu'il me semole, 

Nous voild d nous lamenter, 

Qu'est-ce que de nous, 



are also gallicisms. 



You say it wants twenfu 
pounds to complete the sum. but 
you are mistaken, it cannot 
want so mucli. 

His cold is entirely well, or 
very near. 

How near were these two 
friends quarrelling ? 

I aa not satisfied with your 
application to study, far from 
it. 

So far from this piny pleas- 
ing me, I think it insufferable. 

J was far from approving 
your conduct on that occasion. 



He is far from being generous. 

You may say what you please, 
but, &c. 

By what I can see, as the mat- 
ter appears to me, &c. 

We began to lament, here we 
are lamenting, crying, &c. 

What wretched beings we are ! 
&c. &c. 



The use which is made of the preposition en, in 
many sentences, is likewise another source of galli- 
cisms ; some of this kind will be found in the following 
expressions : 



A qui en avez vous ? 
Oil en reui-ilvenir ? 

II lui en veut, 



Whom are you angry with T 
What does he aim at? what 

wou!d he be at ? 
He has a quarrel with him, &c. 



The preposition en changes also, sometimes, the sig- 
nification of verbs, and then gives rise to gallicisms. 

37 



422 Oi GRAMMATICAL niSC^OAXCES. 

The conjunction que produces as great a number of 
gallicisms ; as, 
C'cst une terrible passion que Gaming is a terrible passion. 

le jeu, 
C'est done en vain que je tra- It is in vain then that I work. 

vaille, 
Ce n'est pas trop que cela, That is not too much. 

II n'est que d* avoir du courage^ There is nothing like having 

courage. 

Many others will be found in the use which is made 
of the prepositions d, de, dans, apres, &c. but enough 
has been said on the subject. 

Gallicisms are of very great use in the simple style, 
therefore La Fontaine and Mad. de Sevigne abound in 
them. The middling style has not so many, and the 
solemn oratorical but few, and these even of a peculiar 
nature. Only two examples of this kind, both taken 
from the tragedy of Iphigenia, by Racine, will be here 
inserted. 

A T ^ez-vous pu penser qu'au sang d'Agamemnon 
Achilie preferfit une fille sans nom, 
Qui de tout son destin ce qu'elle a pu comprendre, 
(Test qu'elle sort d'un sang, &c. 

And 

Je ne sais qui m'arrete et retient mon courroux, 
Que par un prompt avis de tout ce qui se passe. 
Je ne coure des dieux divulguer la menace. 

In the first instance, qui is the subject, though with- 
out relating to any verb ; and in the second, je ne sais 
qui m'arrete que j e ne coure, is contrary to the rules of 
common construction. " But," says Vaugelas, " these 
extraordinary phrases, far from being vicious, possess 
the more beauty, as they belong to a particular kind of 
language/' 



FREE EXERCISES. 



MADAME DE MAINTENON TO HER BROTHER. 

We can only be 1 unhappy by our own fault ; this shall always 
bo my text, and my reply to your lamentations. Recollect 2, 
my dear brother, th,- voyage to Ameri^, the misfortunes of our 
father, of our infancy and our youth T; and you will bless Pro- 
vidence instead of murmuring against fortune. Ten years ago, 
we were both very far {below our present situation 4 ;) and our 
hopes were so feeble 5, that we limited our wishes to an (income 
of three thousand livres 6.) At present we have four times that 
sum 7, and our desires are not yet satisfied ! we enjoy the happy 
mediocrity which you have so often extolled 8 ; let us be content. 
If possessions 9 come to us, let us receive them from the hand 
of God, but let not our views be 10 too extravagant^ 1. We 
have (every thing necessary 12) and comfortable 13 ; ail the rest 
is avarice 14 ; all these desires of greatness spring from 15 a^ 
restless heart. Your debts are all paid, and you may live ele- 
gantly 16, without contracting more 17. W 7 hat have you to 
desire ? must 18 schemes 19 of wealth and ambition occasion 20 
the loss of your repose and your health ? read the life of St. 
Louis ; you will see how unequal 21 the greatness of this world 
is to the desires of the human heart ; God only can satisfy 
them 22. I repeat it, you are only unhappy by your own fault 
Your uneasiness 23 destroys your health, which you ought to 
preserve, if it were 24 only because I love you. Watch 25 your 
temper 26 : if you can render it less splenetic 27 and less 
gloomy, (ycu will have gained a great advantage 28.) This is 
not the work of reflection only ; exercise, amusement, and a re- 
gular life* (are necessary for the purpose 29.) You cannot think 
well (whilst your health is affected 30 ;) when the body is debili- 
tated 31, the mind is without vigour. Adieu ! write to me more 
frequently, and in a style less gloomy. 

1 On ne etre... que. 2 Songer a. 3 The misfortunes of our in 
fancy and those of our, &c. 4 Du point ou nous sommes au 
jourd'hui. 5 Si peu de chose. 6 Trois mille livres de rente. 7 
That sum, en... plus. 8 Have so often extolled, vanter si fort, 
ihd-2. 9 Fossessions, biens, 10 Let us not have views. 11 Trop 
vaste. 32 Le necessaire. 13 Le commode. 14 Avarice, cupidity. 
15 Spring from, partir du vide de. 16 Delicieusement. 17 Con- 
tracting more, en faire de nouvelles. 18 Must, faut-il que. 19 
Projet. 20 Occasion, couter, sub-1. 21 Unequal, au-dessous de. 
22 Satisfy them, le rassasier. 23 Uneasiness, inquietude pi. 24 
If it were, quand ce etre, cond-1. 25Travailler sur. 26 Humeur. 
27 Bilieux. 28 Ce etre un grand point de gagn?. 29 II y faut 
de. 20Tantque vous se porter mal. Debilitated, dans l'abatte- 
ment. 



424 FREE EXERCISES. 

II. 

THE CONVERT. 

AN EASTERN TALE. 

Divine mercy 1 had brought a vicious man into a society of 
sages, whose morals were holy and pure. He was affected by 
their virtues ; it was not long 2 before 3 he imitated them and 
lost his old habits : he became just, sober, patient, laborious, and 
benevolent. His deeds nobody could deny, but they were attri- 
buted 4 to odious motives. Th-ey praised his good actions, with- 
out loving his person : they would always judge him by what he 
had been, not by what he was become. This injustice filled him 
with grief ; he shed tears in the bosom of an ancient sage, more 
just and more humane than the others. " O my son,''' said the 
old man to him, " thou art better than thy reputation ; be thankful 
" to God for it. Happy the man who can say, my enemies and 
" my rivals censure in me vices of which I am not guilty. What 
" matters 5 it, if thou art good, that men persecute thee as wick- 
" ed 1 Hast thou not, to comfort thee, the two best witnesses of 
" thy actions, God and thy conscience ?" Saint-Lambert. 

Mr. de Montausier has written a letter to Monseigneur upon 
the taking of Philipsbourgh, which very much pleases me, 
"Monseigneur, I do not compliment you on the capture of Phi- 
" lipsbourg : you had a good army, bombs, cannon, and Vauban ; 
" neither shall I compliment you upon your valour : for that is 
" an hereditary virtue in your family. But I rejoice that you 
" are liberal, generous, humane, and that you know how to 
" recompense the services of those who behave well : it is for 
this that I congratulate you." Sevigne. 



III. 
THE GOOD MINISTER. 

AN EASTERN TALE. 



The great Aaron Raschild began to suspect that his vizier 
Giafar was not deserving of the confidence which he had reposed 
in him. The women of Aaron, the inhabitants of Bagdad, the 
courtiers, the dervises, censured the vizier with bitterness. The 
calif loved Giafar ; he would not condemn him upon the clamours 
of the city and the court : he visited his empire ; every where 
he saw the land well cultivated, the country smiling, the cottages 
opulent, the useful arts honoured, and youth full of gaiety. He 
visited his fortified cities and sea-ports, he saw numerous ships, 

1 Mis£ricorde. 2 Ne pas tarder. 3 A, inf-1. 4 On donner 
des motifs. 5 Importer. 



FREE EXERCISES. 1^5 

which threatened the coasts of Africa and of Asia ; he saw war 
riors disciplined and content ; these warriors, the seamen and the 
peasantry, exclaimed: " O God, pour thy blessings upon the 
" faithful, by giving them a calif like Aaron, and a vizier like 
" Giafar." The calif, affected by these exclamations, enters a 
mosque, falls upon his knees, and cries out : " Great God, I re- 
u turn thee thanks ; thou hast given me a vizier of whom my 
fc courtiers speak ill, and my people speak well." 

Saint-Lambert. 



Providence conducts us with so much goodness through the 
different periods of our life, that we (do not perceive our progress 
1.) This loss takes place gently 2, it is imperceptible, it is the 
shadow of the sun-dial whose motion we do not see. If, at twen- 
ty years of age, we could see 3 in a mirror, the face we shall have 
at three-score, we (should be shocked at the contrast 4,) and 
terrified at our own figure ; but it is day by day w r e advance : 
we are to-day as we were yesterday, and shall be to-morrow as 
we are to-day ; so we go forward without perceiving it, and this 
is a miracle of that Providence whom I adore. Sevigne. 



IV. 

THE MAGNIFICENT PROSPECT. 

This beautiful house was on the declivity of a hill, from 
whence you beheld the sea, sometimes clear and smooth as glass, 
sometimes idly 1 irritated against the rocks on which it broke, 
bellowing 2 and swelling its waves like mountains. On another 
side was seen a river, in which were islands bordered with 
blooming limes, and lofty poplars, which raised their proud heads 
to the very clouds. The several channels, which formed those 
islands, seemed sporting 3 in the plain. Some rolled their limpid 
waters with rapidity ; some had a peaceful and still course ; 
others, by long windings, ran back again, to reascend as it were 
to their source, and seemed not to have power to leave these en- 
chanting borders. At a distance were seen hills and mountains, 
which were lost in the clouds, and formed, by their fantastic 
figure, as delightful a horizon (as the eye could wiSQ to behold 4.) 
The neighbouring mountains were covered with verdant (vine 
branches, 5) hanging in festoons ; the grapes, brighter than pur- 
ple, could not conceal themselves under the leaves, and the 
vine 6 was overloaded with its fruit. The fig, the olive, the 
pomegranate, and all other trees, overspread the plain, and made 
it one large garden. Fenelon. 

1 Ne le sentir presque pas. 2 Va doucement. 3 On nous faire 
voir. 4 Tomber a la renverse. 

1 Follement. 2 En gemir. 3 Se jouer. 4 A souhait pour )% 
okalsir de. 5 Pampre, m. 6 Vigne, f. 

37* 



426 FREE EXERCISES. 

Long hopes wear out 7 j.oy, as long illness wears out pain. 
All philosophic systems are only good when one (has no use 
for them 8.) Sevigne 



A GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 

With what magnificence does nature shine 1 upon earth ! A 
pure light, extending from east to west, gilds successively the 
two hemispheres of this globe ; an element transparent and light, 
surrounds it ; a gentle fecundating heat animates, gives being 2 
to the seeds of life ; salubrious running streams contribute to 
their preservation and growth ; eminences diversified over the 
level land, arrest the vapours of the air, make these springs in- 
exhaustible and always new ; immense cavities made to receive 
them, divide the continents. The extent of the sea is as great as 
that of the earth ; it is not a cold, barren element ; it is a new 
empire, as rich, as populous as the first. The finger of God has 
marked their boundaries. 

The earth, rising above the level of the sea, is secure 3 from 
its eruptions : its surface, enamelled with flowers,, adorned with 
ever-springing verdure, peopled with thousands and thousands 
of species of different animals, is a place of rest, a delightful 
abode, where man, placed in order to second nature, presides 
over all beings. The only one among them all, capable of 
knowing and worthy of admiring, God has made him spectator 
of the universe, and a witness of his wonders. The divine spark 
with which he is animated, enables him to participate in the di- 
vine mysteries ; it is by this light that he thinks and reflects ; by 
it he sees and reads in the book of the universe, as in a copy of 
the Deity. 

Nature is the exterior throne of the divine Majesty ; the man 
who contemplates, who studies it, rises by degrees to the inte- 
rior throne of Omnipotence. Made to adore the Creator, the 
vassal of heaven, sovereign of the earth, he ennobles, peoples, 
enriches it ; he establishes among living beings, order, subordina- 
tion, harmony; he embellishes nature herself; he cultivates, ex- 
tends, and polishes it; lops off the thistle and the briar, and mul- 
tiplies ffhe grape and the rose. Buffcn 

VI. 

ANOTHER GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 

Trees, shrubs, and plants, are the ornaments and clothing 1 of 
the earth. Nothing is so melancholy 2 as the prospect of a c«m- 

7 User. 8 N'en avoir que faire. 

1 Ne briller pas. 2 Faire ecloire. 3 A Tabri de. 

1 Vehement. 2Trtste 



FREE EXERCISES. 427 

try naked and bare 3, exhibiting to the eye nothing but stones, 
mud, and sand. But, vivified by nature, and clad 4 in its nup- 
tial robe, amidst the course of streams and the singing of birds, 
the earth presents to man, in the harmony of the three kingdoms, 
a spectacle full of life, of interest and charms, the only spectacle 
in the world of which his eyes and heart are never weary 5. 

The more a (contemplative man's soul is fraught with sensi 
biiity 0,) the more he yields to the extacies which this harmony 
produces in him. A soft and deep melancholy then takes pos 
session of his senses, and in an intoxication of delight, he loses 
himself in the immensity of that beautiful system, with which he 
feels himself identified. Then every particular object escapes 
him, he sees and feels nothing but in the whole. Some circum- 
stance must contract his ideas, and circumscribe his imagination, 
before 7 be can observe by parcels that universe which he was 
endeavouring to embrace. J. J. Rousseau. 

VII. 
CULTIVATED NATURE, 

How beautiful is cultivated nature ! by the labours of man, 
how brilliant it is, and how pompously adorned ! He himself 
il its chief ornament, its noblest part ; by multiplying himself, 
he multiplies the most precious germ ; she also seems to mul- 
tiply with him: by his art, he (brings forth to view J) all that 
she concealed 2 in her bosom. How many unknown treasures ! 
What new riches! Flowers, fruits, seeds brought to perfection, 
multiplied to infinity ; the useful species of animals transport- 
ed, propagated, increased without number; the noxious spe- 
cies reduced, confined, banished ; goid, and iron more neces- 
sary than gold, extracted from the bowels of the earth ; torrents 
confined 3, rivers directed, contracted 4 ; the sea itself subjected, 
explored 5, crossed, bom one hemisphere to the other ; the earth 
accessible in every part, and every where rendered equally 
cheerful and fruitful : in the vallies, delightful meadows ; i'n 
the plains, rich pastures and still richer harvests; hills covered 
with vines and fruits: their summits crowned with useful trees 
and young forests; deserts changed into cities inhabited bv an 
immense popiJation, which, continually circulating, spreads itself 
from these centres to their extremities; roads opened and" fre- 
quented, communications established every where, as so- many 
witnesses of the strength and union of society; a thousand other 
monuments of power and glory sufficiently demonstrate that 
man, possessing; dominion over the earth, has changed, renewed 
the whole of its surface, and that, at all times, he shares the em- 
pire of it with nature. 

3 Pel6, 4 Revetu. 5 Se lasser. 6 Contemplateur avoir Tame 
sensible. 7 Pour qu'il. 

1 Mettre au jour. 2 Receler. 3 Contenu. 4 Rcsserrc. 5 
Reconnu. 



428 FREE EXERCISES. 

VIIL 

THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 

However, man only reigns by right of conquest ; he rathei 
enjoys than possesses, and he can preserve only by means of con- 
tinual labour. If this ceases, every thing droops, every thing 
declines, every thing changes, and again returns 1 under the 
hand of nature ; she reassumes her rights, erases the work of 
man, covers with dust and moss his most pompous monuments, 
destroys them in time, and leaves him nothing but the regret of 
having lost, through his fault, what his ancestors had conquered 
by their labours. Those times, in which man loses his dominion, 
those barbarous 2 ages, during which every thing is seen to pe- 
rish, are always preceded by war, and accompanied by scarcity 
and depopulation. Man, who can do nothing but by number, 
who is strong only by union, who can be happy only by peace, is 
mad enough to arm himself for his misery, and to fight for his 
ruin. Impelled by an insatiable thirst of having, blinded by am 
bition still more insatiable, he renounces all the feelings of huma 
nity, turns all his strength against himself, seeks mutual destruction, 
actually 3 destroys himself; and, after these periods of blood and 
carnage, when the smoke of glory has vanished, he contemplates 
with a sad eye, the earth wasted, the arts buried, nations scattered, 
the people weakened, his own happiness ruined, and his real 
power annihilated. Buffon. 

IX. 

INVOCATION TO THE GOD OF NATURE. 

Almighty God ! whose presence alone supports nature, and 
maintains the harmony of the laws of the universe : Thou, who, 
from the immoveable throne of the empyrean, seest the celestial 
spheres roll under thy feet, without shock or confusion : who, 
from the bosom of repose, reproducest every moment their im 
mense movements, and alone governest, in profound peace, that 
infinite number of heavens and worlds ; restore, restore at length 
tranquillity to the agitated earth ! let it be silent at thy voice ; 
let discord and war cease their proud clamours ! God of good- 
ness, author of all beings, thy paternal eye takes in 1 all the ob- 
jects of the creation ; but man is thy chosen being ; thou hast 
illumined 2 his soul with a ray of thy immortal light : complete 
the measure of thy kindness by penetrating his heart with a ray 
of thy love : this divine sentiment, diffusing itself every where, 
will reconcile opposite natures ; man will no longer dread the 
sight of man ; his hand will ho longer wield the murderous 
steel 3 ; the devouring flames of war will no longer dry up 4 the 

1 Rentrer. 2 De barbaric 3 En effet. 

1 Embrasser. 2 Eclairer. 3 Le fer armer samain. 4 Tarir. 



FEEE EXERCISES. 429 

sources of population : the human species, now weakened, muti- 
lated, mowed down in the blossom, will spring anew 5 and 
multiply without number ; nature, overwhelmed under the weight 
of scourges 6, will soon re-assume, with a new Jife, its former 
fruitfulness ; and we, beneficent God, will second it, we will cul- 
tivate it, we will contemplate it incessantly, that we may every 
moment offer thee a new tribute of gratitude and admiration. 

Buffon. 



X. 

Happy they who are disgusted with 1 turbulent pleasures, and 
know how to be contented 2 with the sweets of an innocent life ! 
Happy they who delight in being instructed 3, and who take a 
pleasure 4 in storing their minds with knowledge ! Wherever 
adverse fortune may throw them, they always carry entertain- 
ment with them ; and the disquiet which preys upon others, even 
in the midst of pleasures, is unknown to those who can employ 
themselves in reading. Happy they who love to read, and are 
not like me deprived of the ability. As these thoughts were 
passing in my mind, I went into a gloomy forest, where I imme- 
diately perceived an old man, holding a book in his hand. The 
forehead of this sage was broad, bald, and a little wrinkled : a 
white beard hung down to his girdle ; his stature was talj and 
majestic ; his complexion still fresh and ruddy, his eyes lively 
and piercing, his voice sweet, his words plain and charming. I 
never saw so venerable an old man. He was a priest of Apollo, 
and officiated 5 in a marble temple, which the kings of Egypt 
had dedicated to that God in this forest. The book which he 
held in his hand was a collection of hymns in honour of the 
Gods. He accosted me in a friendly manner; and we discoursed 
together. He related things past so well, that they sGemed 
present, and yet with such brevity, that his account never tired 
me. He foresaw the future by his profound knowledge, which 
made him know men and the designs of which they are capable. 
With all this wisdom he was cheerful and complaisant, and the 
sprightliesl youth has not so many graces as this man had at so 
advanced an age. He accordingly loved young men when they 
were teachable 6, and had a taste for study and virtue. 

Fenelon. 



XL 
THOUGHTS ON POETRY. 

Wherever I went, I found that poetry was considered as the 



5 Germer de nouveau, G Flcau. 

1 Se degouter de. 2 Sc contenter de. 3 S'instruire. 4 Se 
plaire. 5 Servir. G Docile. 



430 FREE EXERCISES. 

(highest learning 1) and regarded with a veneration (somewhat 
approaching to 2,) that which men would pay to angelic nature. 

It yet fills me with wonder that, in almost all countries, the 
most ancient poets are considered as the best ; whether (it be 
that 3) every kind of knowledge is an acquisition gradually at- 
tained, and poetry is a gift conferred at once ; or that the first 
poetry of every nation surprised them as a novelty, and retained 
the credit by consent, which it received by accident at first ; or 
whether, as the province 4 of poetry is to describe nature and 
passion, which are always the same, the first writers (took pos- 
session 5) of (the most striking objects for description 6,) and 
(the most probable occurrences for fiction 7,) and left nothing to 
those that followed them, but transcription 8 of the same events, 
and new combinations 9 of the same images. Whatever be the 
reason, it is commonly observed, that the early Avriters are in 
possession of nature, and their followers 10 of art : that, the first 
excel in strength and invention, and the latter in elegance and 
refinement. 

I was desirous to add my name to this illustrious fraternity 11. 
I read all the poets of Persia and Arabia, and was able to repeat 
by memory the volumes that are suspended in the mosque of 
Mecca. But I soon found that no man was ever great by imita- 
tion. My desire of excellence 12 impelled 13 me to transfer 14 
my attention to nature and to life 15. Nature was to be my sub- 
ject, and men to be my auditors : I could never describe what I 
had not seen ; I could not hope (to move those with delight or 
terror 16) whose interests and opinions I did not understand 17. 

XII. 

THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 

Being now resolved to be a poet, I saw every thing (with a 
new purpose 18 ;) my sphere of attention was suddenly magni- 
fied : no kind of knowledge (was to be overlooked 19.) I ranged 
mountains and deserts for 20 images and resemblances, and 
(pictured upon my mind 21) every tree of the forest and flower 
of the valley. 1 observed with equal care the crags of the rock 
and the pinnacles of the palace. Sometimes I wandered along 
the mazes of the rivulet, and sometimes watched the changes of 
the summer-clouds. To a poet nothing can be useless. What- 

1 Partie la plus sublime de la litterature. 2 Qui tenoit de. 3 
Cela vienne de ce que. 4 But. 5. S'emparer. 6 Objets qui four- 
nissaient les plus riches descriptions. 7 Evenemens qui prctaient 
le plus a la fiction. 8 De copier. 9 Faire de nouvellcs combi- 
naisons. 10 Successeurs. 11 Famille. 12 Exceller. 13 En- 
gager. 14 Reporter... sur. 15 Tableau de la vie. 16 Reveiller 
le plaisir ou la terreur dans ceux. 17 Ne connaitre ni. 18 Sous 
un nouveau jour. 19 Je ne devais negliger. 20. Pour recueiller. 
31 Penetrer mon esprit du tableau de. 



FREE EXERCISES. 431 

ever is beautiful, and whatever is dreadful, must be familiar to 
his imagination : he must (be conversant 22) with all that (is 
awfully vast or elegantly little 23.) The plants of the garden, 
the animals of the wood, the minerals of the earth, and the me- 
teors of the sky, must all concur to store his mind with inex- 
haustible variety : for every idea is useful for the (enforcement 
or decoration 24) of moral or religious truth ; and he who knows 
most, will have most power 25 of diversifying bis scenes 26, and 
gratifying his reader with remote allusions and unexpected in- 
struction. 

All the appearances of nature I was, the refore, careful to study 
27, and every country which 1 have surveyed has contributed 
something to my poetical powers. 

In so wide a survey, interrupted the prince, you must surely 
nave left much unobserved. I have lived, till now, within the 
circuit of these mountains, and yet cannot walk abroad without 
the sight of something which I had never beheld before, or never 
beeded 23. 

XIIL 
THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 

The business of a poet, said Imlac, is to examine, not the indi- 
vidual, but the species ; to remark general properties and (large 
appearances 29 :) he does not number the streaks of the tulip, or 
describe the different shades in the verdure of the forest. He is 
to exhibit, in his portraits of nature, such prominent and striking 
features, as 30 recal the original to every mind ; and must neglect 
the minuter discriminations 31, which one may have remarked, 
and another neglected, for those characteristics 32 which are 
alike obvious 33 to vigilance 34 and carelessness 35. 

But the knowledge of nature is only half 36 the task of a poet : 
he must be acquainted likewise with all the modes 37 of life. 
His character requires that he estimate 38 the happiness and 
misery of every condition : observe the power of all the passions, 
in all their combinations, and trace the changes 39 of the human 
mind, as they are modified by various institutions, and acciden- 
tal influences of climate or custom : from the sprightliness of 
infancy to the despondence of decrepitude. He must divest 
himself 40 of the prejudices of his age or country; he must 
consider right and wrong 41 in their abstracted and invariable 
state 42 ; he must disregard present laws and opinions, and rise 

22 Bien connaitre. 23 Etonr.e par sa grandeur, ou charme paj 
son elegante petitesse. 24 Fortifier, ou embellir. 25 Ressource^ 
pour. 26 Tableau. 527 Etudier av< c soln toutes les, cv.c. 28 Re 
marquer. 29 Considerer les objets en grand. 30 De ces traits 
saillans et frappans qui, &c. 'M Ces petits details. 32 Pour 
s'appliquer a caracteriscr, &C &c. '.Y.\ Frappe egalement. 34 
(Eil observateur. 35 Esprit insouciant :;<> The half of. 37 
Tous les different aspects 3rt Apprecier. 3'J Suivre les vicis- 
situdes. 40 Se depoailler. 41 Ce qui e^t juste ou injuste. 48 



432 ' FttEE EXERCISES. 

to genera! and transcendent truths, which will always be the 
same ; he must, therefore, (content himself with the slow progress 
of his name 43,) contemn the applause of his own time, and 
commit his claims to the justice of posterity. He must write as 
the interpreter of nature, and the legislator of mankind, and con- 
sider himself as presiding 44 over the thoughts and manners of 
future generations, as abeing superior to time and place. 

His labour is not yet at an end : he must know many languages, 
and many sciences ; and, that his style may be worthy of his 
thoughts, he must, by incessant practice, familiarize himself to 
every delicacy of speech and grace of harmony. S. Johnson. 

XIV. 

.First follow nature, and your judgment frame, 
By her just standard, which is still the same : 
Unerring nature, still divinely bright, 
One clear, unchanged, and universal light, 
Life, force, and beauty, must to all impart ; ] 

At once ihe source, and end, and test of art, 2 

Art, from that fund, each just supply provides ; 
Works without show, and without pomp presides ; 
In some fair body thus tk' informing soul. 
With spirits feeds, with vigour fills the whole ; 
Each motion guides, and every nerve -sustains 
Itself unseen, but in th' effect remains. 3 

Some, to whom heav'n in wit has been profuse, 
Want as much more to turn it to its use : 
For wit and judgment often are at strife, 
Tho' meant each other's aid, like man and wife. 4 
'Tis more to guide, than spur the muse's steed, 
Restrain his fury, than provoke his speed : 5 

The winged courser, like a gen'rous norse, 
Shows most true mettle, when you check its course. 6 

Pope. 

Abstraction faite de ces divers prejuges. 43 Se rcsigncr a voir 

son nom percer difficilement. 44 Influer. 

I Light, clear, immutable, and universal nature, which never 

errs, and shines always with a divine splendour, must impart to all 

she does, life, force, and beauty. 2 She is at once the source, &c. 

3 So in a fair body, unseen itself, but always sensible by its ef- 
fects, the soul continually acting, feeds the whole with spirits, fills 
it with vigour, guides every motion of it, and sustai-ns every nerve 

4 Some to whom heaven has given wit with profusion, want as 
much yet to know the use they ought to make of it ; for wit and 
judgment, though made, like man and wife, to aid each other, are 
often in opposition. 

5 |( is more difficult to guide lhan spur the courser of the mu- 
ses, arid to restrain its ardour than provoke its impetuosity. 

6 The winged courser is like a generous horse : the more we strive 
to stop it in its rapid course,the more it shows unconquerable vigour. 



EXAMPLES OF PHRASES 



ON THE 



PRINCIPAL DIFFICULTIES OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 

Sur les Collectifs Partitife. 

La plupart des fruits verts sont d'lui 
gout austire. 

La plupart des gens ne se conduisent que 
par intiret. 

La plupart du monde 3e trompe. 



11 miprise par philosophic les honneurs, 
que la plupart du monde recherche. 

II dezait me fournir tant d'arbres ; mais 
fen ax rejctt la moitii qui ne valait rien. 

Un grand nombre de speclateurs ajou- 
tait a la bsaute du spectacle. 

Tout sorte de livres ne sont pas egale- 
mtnt bons. 

Beaucoup de personnes se sont presentees. 

Bien des personnes sc font des princives 

a leurfantaisie. 

Sur quelques Verbes qu'on ne peut con- 

juguer avec Avoir sans faire des bar- 

barismea. 

// lui est ichu une succession du chef de 
safemme. 

11 tsl bien dichu de son cridit. 

jV« sommes-noui pas convenus du prix ? 

JVcst-i! pas intervenu dans cette affaire, 
comme il Vavait promit .* 

// est turvenu a Vimproviste. 

La neige, qui est tjmbe'e cematin, a adou- 
ei It temps. 

Que de neige il est tomle" ce matin I 

Toutes les dents lui sont tombies. 

Ce apropos n'est pas tombi a terre. 

Etes-vous alii voir votre ami t 

lis sont arrive" s a midi et sont repartis de 
suite. 

t'csjlcurs sont a peine icloses. 

Us est ni de parens veriueux, qui n'ont 
run nigligi pour son education. 

Mademoiselle votre saeur est-elfe rentrie 7 

Madame votre mire n'est-elle pas encore 

venue ? 

Sur les Mots de Quantite. 

fl a beaucoup d'csprit, mais curore plus 
<Fimour-propre. 

llaassez d'argent pour ses menus plai- 

Il y avait bien du monde a VOpira. 

Tl y avait hiex au Pare je ne sais combien 
de gens. 

Il boit aulant (Teau que de vin. 

U a tant d'avxis qu'il ne manquera de 
run. 

>°er^onne n'y i P ; »J xVisttMt que lui. 

IX n'a pas plus (V esprit qu'il n'enfiut. 

Trop de loisir perd souvent lajeunesse. 

. Py ai bien moins tVirdirit que vnus. 

Sur les Pronoms Personnels. 
Giprc et te retire. 
Cours vite etr" -Vjmiue point. 



On the Collective Partitives. 
The greater part of green fruit is of a 
harsh taste. 
Most people are guided only by interest. 

The greater part of mankind live in er- 
ror. 

As a true philosopher he despises those 
honours which maukind in general court. 

He was to fnrnish me so many trees, but 
I refused half of them which were good for 
nothing. 

A considerable number of spectators ad 
ded to the splendour of the scene. 

Every kind of books are not equally good. 

Many people presented themselves. 
Many persons form principles to them- 
selves, according to their fancy. 
On some f^erbs which cannot be conjugated 
with the verb Avoir, without making bar- 
barous phrases. 
An estate fell to him in right of his wife. 

He has lost much of his credit. 

Have we not agreed about the price ? 

Did be not interfere in that affair as he 
had promised ? 

He came up unawares. 

The snow which fell this morning has 
softened the weather. 

How much snow has fallen this morning ' 

All his teeth have fallen out. 

That remark was not allowed to escape. 

Have you been to see your friend ? 

They arrived at nocu and set out again 
immediately. 

These flowers are scarcely blown. 

He was born of virtuous parents, who be- 
stowed on him the best education. 

Is your sister returned ? 

Is not your mother come yet ? 

On Words of fyu+itity. 
He has a great deal of sense, but still 
more vanity. 

He has sufficient pocket-money. 

There were a great many people at the 
Opera. 

There were I do not know how many 
peopie in the Park yesterday. 

lit: drinks as much water as wine. 

He has so many friends that he will war.t 
fur nothing. 

Nobody has more interest there than he. 

He is not overburdened with sense. 

Too much leisure time is frequently the 
'ion of youth. 

I am much lass concerned in it than you. 
On the Personal Pronouns. 

Go out and retire, withdraw 

Go quick and do not loiter. 



38 



434 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



II dit ttujouroVhui une chose et demain il 
te dimentira 

11 s 'est dementi lui-mime. 

Lajeutxcsjt est naturellement emportie ; 
tile a besoin de quelque entrave qui la re- 
tienne. 

11 nepeut voir personne dans la prospi- 
ritd sans lui porter envie. 

Ce que vous me dltes est une inigme pour 
snoi. 

CPcst un homme extreme en tout ; il aime 
et il hait avecfureur. 

Si vous n'y avez jamais ite\ je vous y mi- 
nerai. 

Je Vai connu doux et modeste ; il s'est 
bien gate" dans le commerce de ses nouveaux 
amis, 

E-lle n'est pas encore revenue du saisisse* 
mentf que lui causa cette nou-velle* 

11 menace de Vexterminer, lui et toute sa 
race. 

Si vous n'avcz que f aire de ce livre-ld^pre- 
te:-le-moi. 

Je lui avais envoy & un diamant, il Va re- 
fuse, je te lui at renvoyJ. 

11 apprend facilement et oublie de mime. 

Je lui pardonne facilement d'avoir voulu 
sefaire auteur ; mais je nt saurais lui pa r- 
donner toutes les pudriliUs dont il a farci 
ton livre. 

Je me plains a vous de vous mime. 

Si vous ne voulez pas etre pour lui } au 
moins ne soysz pas contre. 

Quand sera-ce que vous viendrez nous 
voir ? 

Sur soi, lui, soi-meme et lui-mfime. 

Quand on a pour soi le timoignage de sa 
conscience, on est bien fort. 

Meslime de toute la terre ne sert de rien 
a un nomine qui n'a pas le timoignage de 
sa conscience pour lui. 

Un homme fait mille fautes, parce qu'il 
Me fait point de rijltxions sur lui. 

On fait mille fautes, quand on ne fait 
aucune reflexion sur soi. 

11 aime mieux dire du mal de lui, que de 
n'en point parler. 

Ucgoiste aimerxt mieux dire du mal de 
soi, que de n'en point parler. 

On a souvent besoin d'un plus petit que 
soi. 

Un prince a souvent besoin de beaucoup 
de gens plus petit s que lui. 

C'est un bon moyen de s'ilever soi-mimc, 
que dPexalter ses partils ; et un homme 
adroit s'elevc amsi lui-meme. 

Sur let* Pronoms Reiatifs. 

// n y y a rien de si capable d^eff^miner le 
courage^ que Voisivetitt les ddlicei. 

llfaut empScher que la division, qui est 
dans ctttefamille, n'tclate. 

11 y u bien des evtnemens que Von sun- 
pose se passer pendant let entr'actes. 

Jt le trouvai qui s'habillait. 

Quile tirera de cet embarras, le tirera 
d?une grande misire. 



He advances a thing to-day, and will con- 
tradict himself to-morrow. 

He has contradicted himself. 

Youth is naturally hasty, it needs some 
check to restrain it. 

He can see the prosperity of nobody with- 
out envying" them. 

What you tell me is a perfect riddle to 
me. 

He is a man that carries every thing- to 
excess; he is alike violent in his love and 
io his hatred. 

If you have never been there, I will take 
you. 

I knew him when be was mild and mo 
dest ; he has been much corrupted by asso- 
ciating with his new acquaintances. 

She is not yet recovered from the con- 
sternation into which that intelligence threw 
her. 

He threatens to exterminate him and all 
his family. 

If you have done with this book, lend it 
me. 

I had sent him a diamond, and he refus- 
ed it, but 1 sent him it back again. 

He learns easily and forgets the same. 

I can easily parden him for having at- 
tempted to turn author ; but I cannot par- 
don him all the absurdities with which he 
has filled his book. 

I complain to you of yourself. 

If you will not be for him, at least do 
not be against him. 

When will you come to see us ? 

On soi, lui, soi-meme and lui-mSme. 

The approbation of our conscience ira 
parts great courage. 

The good opinion ef the whole world is 
of no use to a man who has not the appro- 
bation of his own conscience. 

A man commits a thousand faults, because 
he does not reflect on future consequences. 

We commit a thousand faults, when we 
neglect to reflect on ourselves. 

He had rather speak ill of himself than 
not talk of himself at all. 

The egotist prefers speaking ill of him- 
self rather than not be the subject of his 
own conversation. 

We frequently want the assistance o( one 
who Is below ourselves. 

A prince frequently needs the assistance 
of many persons inferior to himself. 

It is an excellent method of exalting our- 
selves to exalt our equals, and a man of ad- 
dress by this means exalts himself. 

On the Relative Pronouns. 

Nothing is so calculated t# enervate the 
mind as idleness and pleasure. 

The dissent ion in that family must be 
prevented from becoming public 

There are many events in a piece which 
ere supposed to happen between the acts. 

I found bim dressing. 

Whoever extricates bim frcm this difla 
culty will relieve hint from much distress. 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES, 



435 



Ceux Id tont viritablement heureux, qui 
croicnt Pitre. 

U n'y a que la vertu, qui puisse rendre 
un homme kcureux en cette vie. 

J I n'y a rigle si ginirale^ qui n'ait son 
exception. 

Cest un orateur qui se posside et qui ne 
se trouble jamais. 

IlrCy a pas dans le cceur humain de repli 
que Dtcu ne connaisse. 

On n*a trouvi que qutlques fragment du 
grand ouvrage quHl avait promis. 

La f ante, que sous avczfaitc, est plus im- 
portante que vous ne pensez. 

■Lts premieres demarches qu 1 on fait dans 
le monde, ont beaucoup cTinfluence sur le 
reste de la vie. 

Cette farce est une des plus risibles gu'on 
ait encore vues. 

Amassez-vout des trteors que les vers et 
la rouille ne puissent point getter, et que 
les voleurs ne puissent point dirobtr. 

/^incertitude, ou nous sommes de ce qui 
doit arriver, fait que nous ne saurions pren- 
dre des mesures justes. 

Je m'e' tonne quHl ne voie pas le danger 
ou il est. 

LP hommt dont vous parlez, n'est plus ici. 

Celui Je qui je tiens cette nouvelle ne 
vous est pas connu. 

Celui, a qui ce beau chateau appartient 
ne Vhabite presque jamais. 

Ce sont des ev&nemens auxquels il faut 
bien se soumettre. 

Cest ce a quoi vous ne pensez guire. 
Sur les Pronoms Demonstratifs. 

Ne point reconnoitre la divinite 1 , c^est rc~ 
noncer a toutes les lumiires de la raison. 

jyicntir, c*est mipriser Dieu et craindre 
les hommes. 

II y a des tpicUmies morales, et ce sont 
les plus dangereuses. 

Je crois que ce que vous dites est bien elo- 
ign^ de ce que vous pensez. 

Let hommes n'aiment ordinairement que 
ctux qui les flattent. 

Celui qui persuade d un autre de faire 
un crime, n'est ruere mo ins coupable que 
celui qui le commet. 

Penser ainsi, c'est s'aveugler soi-meme. 

Ce qu'on rapporte de lui est inconcevuble. 

Ce qui m'ajjflige, c'est devoir le triomphe 
du crime. 

Connaissez-vout la jeune Emilie ? c'est 
une enfant dont tout le monde dit du bien. 
Jmitez en toutvotre amie : elle est douce, 
appliquie, honnete et compaLissante. 
6ur le Verbe avoir employ 6 alTmperson- 
nel. 
Remarque. Quand le verbe avoir s'em- 
ploie a l'impersonnel, c'est dans le sens 
d'etre, et alors il se joint toujours avec y. 
II y a un an que je ne vous ai vu. 
Y a-t-il des nouvelles 7 
Wony U n'y en a pas t du moins que je sa- 



Tbose are really happy who think them- 
selves so. 

Virtue alone can render a man happy in 
this life. 

There is no rule so general but it admits 
of exceptions. 

He is an orator who is master of him- 
self, and who is never embarrassed. 

There is no recess of the human heart 
but God perceives it. 

Only some fragments of the great work 
he bad promised have been found. 

The error you have committed is of more 
consequence than you imagine. 

The first steps we take on entering the 
world have considerable influence on the 
rest of our lives. 

That farce is one of the most truly comie 
that ever was seen. 

Lay up for yourselves treasures which 
neither moth nor rust can corrupt, and 
which thieves cannot steal. 

Our uncertainty as to wbat shall happen 
makes us incapable of properly providing 
against it. 

I am astonished he does not see the dan 
ger he is in. 

The man whom you are speaking of is 
not here now. 

The person from whom I received the tn 
telligence is not known to you. 

The proprietor of that beautiful seat sel 
dom resides there. 

These are events to which we must sub- 
mit. 

It is what you seldom th ink of. 

On the Demonstrative Pronouns. 

Not to acknowledge the divinity, is total* 
ly to renounce the light of reason. 

To lie is to despise God and to fear man. 

There are moral contagious disorders, and 
these are the most dangerous. 

What you advance is, I think, widely dit 
ferent from your sentiments. 

Hen in general love only those who flat- 
ter them. 

He who persuades another to the commis- 
sion of a crime, is hardly less guilty than 
he who commits it. 

To think in this manner is to be wilfully 
blind. 

The reports concerning bim are hardly 
conceivable. 

What distresses me is to see guilt trim 
phant. 

Do you know little Emily ? she is a child 
of whom every body speaks well. 

Imitate your friend in every thing ; she 
is mild, assiduous, polite and companionate. 
On the Verb avoir, to have, employed 
impersonally. 

When the verb avoir is used impersonalhj 
it signifies etre, to be, and in this senst tC 
is always accompanied by the adverb y. 

It is a twelvemonth since I saw you. 

Is there any news ? 

No, there is none, at least that I know. 



436 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



J\T>y a-t-xl pas einquante-quatre milles de 
JLondres d Brighton 7 

II y avait dejd beaucoup de mondc lorsque 
j* arrival. 

Il n'y avait hier presque personne auparc. 

Y avait il de grands ddbats ? 

JY'y avait-il pas beaucoup de curieux 7 
J* Pavais vu il y avait a peine vingt-qua- 

tre heures. 
Il ii*y avait pas deux jours quHl avoit 

dind chez moi. 

Y avait ilsi long-temps que vous ne Pavi- 
ez vu 7 

II y out hier un bal chez M. un tel. 
11 n'y exit pas hier de spectacle. 

Y eut-il beaucoup de confusion et de di- 
sordre 7 

J\"'y eut-il pas un beau feu d?artifice 7 

II y a eu aujourd'hui unefoule immense & 
la promenade. 

J I n'y a pas eu dc bal, comme on Vavait 
annoncd. 

Est-ilvrai quHl y a eu, un duel 7 

JY'y a-t-il pas eudans sa conduiteunpeu 
trop cPemportement 7 

Quand il y eut eu une explication, les es- 
prit s se valmirent. 

N'y avait-il pas eu un plus grand nombre 
de spectateurs 7 

II y aura demain un simulacre de combat 
naval. 

II nhj aura aucun de vous. 

Y aur a-t-il une bonne rdcolte cette anne'e 7 
Jfy aura-t-il pas gue/gu'ur. de votre fa- 
mil I e 7 

A coup sur il y aura eu bien du ddsordre. 

Sur cent personnes, il n r y en aura pas eu 
dix de satisfaites. 

Y aura-t-il eu un bon soupd 7 
N^y aura-t-il pas eu de mecontens 7 

II y aurait de la malhonnetd dans ce pro- 
cddi. 

II n r y aurait pas grand mal a cela. 

Y aurait-il quelqu'un assez hardi pour 
fattaquer 7 

JV : y aurait-il pas quelquhin assez chari- 
table pour Vavertir de ce qu'on dit de lui 7 

II y aurait eu de V impudence d cela. 

II n'i/ aurait pas eu innt de mesintelli- 
gence, si Von mfen avait cru. 

11 n'y aurait pas eu dix personnes. 

Y aurait-il eu de V 'inconvenient 7 

JV'y aurait-il pas eu de jaloux pour le 
traverser dans res projets 7 

Je ne croi< mm gu'il y ait un spectacle 
plus magnifique. 

Je ddsirerais q\C\\ y cut mnins de faus- 
eti dans le commerce dc 

Je n y ai pas ou'i dire gu'il y ait eu hier 
des nouveltcs du continent. 

Jluriez-vous cru gtt'il y cut cu tant de 
persoymes compromises dans cette aft'aire 7 

Phrase* di\i 
Sa vie, ses actions, ses paroles, son air 
mime et sa demarche, tout prechc, tout idi- 
fa $n lui. 



Is not it fifty- four miles from London to 
Brighton ? 

There were already a great many people 
when 1 arrived. 

There was hardly any hody in the Park 
yesterday. 

Were there violent debates ? 

Were there not many curious people ? 

1 had seen him scarcely four-and-tweuty 
hours before. 

He had dined with me not two days be- 
fore. 

Was it so long since you had seeu him f 

There was yesterday a ball at Mr. A's. 

There was no play yesterday. 

Was there a great deal of confusion and 
disorder ? 

Were there not handsome fire-works ? 

There was an immense crowd to-day at 
the public walks. 

There has not been any ball as had been 
mentioned. 

Is it true that there has been a duel ? 

Was there not rather too much hastiness 
in his behaviour ? 

After the: e had been an explanation, tran- 
quillity was restored. 

Was not there a great number of specta- 
tors ? 

To-morrow there will be the representa 
tion of a sea-fight. 

There will be none of you. 

Will there be a good harvest this yeai ? 

Will not there be some of your family . ? 

There must certainly have been much dis- 
order. 

Out of a hundred persons there will not 
have been ten satisfied. 

Will there have been a good supper ? 

Will therenothave been some dissatisfied? 

Such a step would have been ungenteel. 

There would be no great harm in that 

Would there be any one bold enough to 
attack him ? 

Would there be nobody kind enough to 
acquaint him with what is said of him ? 

There would have been some imprudence 
in that. 

There would not have been so great a mis 
understanding had 1 been believed. 

There would not have been ten persons. 

Would there have been aj.y inconve- 
nience ? 

Would there not have been some envious 
person to tins art him in his designs ? 

I do not think there cau be a more superb 
spectacle. 

I wish there were less duplicity in the 
concerns of life. 

I have not heard that there was any news 
from the continent yesterday. 

Could you have 1 bought BO many persons 
would have been exposed in that artair ? 

Promiscuout I Erases. 
His life, his actions, his very look and de- 
portment, every thing in him instructs and 
edifies. 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



437 



On craignait qyfil nParrivdt quelque d&~ It was apprehended some disorder would 
sordre dans PassembUe, mais ioutes choses take place in the assembly, bui every thing 



i>y pass irent fort doucement 

La vigne et le lierre s'entortillent autour 
dts ormes. 

On ne disconvenient point quHl ne so it 
brave , mais il est un peu trop fanfaron. 

Le cadet est riche, mais Paine* Pest encore 
davantage. 

Le ciel est couvert de nuaget, et Porage 
est pret afondre. 

Apris q\Pil tut franchi les Alpes avec ses 
troupes, il entra en Halie. 

La frugality rend les corps plus sains et 
plus robustcs. 

Ce discours est peut-etre undes plus beaux 
morceaux d^iloquence, qu'il y ait jamais eu. 

Oest un homme qui aime la libtrte ; il ne 
se gene pour qui que ce soit. 

Il est plus haut que moi de deux doigts. 

Jrez-vous vous exposer a la barbarie et a 
Pinhospitalite" de ces peuples 7 

A la tongue, les erreurs disparaissent, et 
la viriti surnage. 

Si vous le prtnez avec moi sur ce ton de 
fierte", je serai aussijier que vous. 

C'est un homme rigide, qui ne pardonne 
rien, ni aux autres ni a lui-meme. 

Les uns montent, les autres descendent, 
ainsi va la roue de la fortune. 

Je ne vois rien de solide dans tout ce que 
vous me proposer. 

L^art nVt jamais rien produit de plus 
beau. 

I, e quel est-ce des deux qui a tort ? 

On aime quelquefois la trahison, mais on 
hait toujours les traftres. 

Continuation. 

L'e'liphant se sert de sa trompe pour pren- 
dre et pour enlever tout ce qu'il veut. 

Plus f 'examine cette personna, plus je 
erois P avoir vue qutlque part. 

La nuit vint, de fuQon que je fus con- 
iraint de me retirer. 

Ufaut vivre de faqon qyPon nefasse tort 
a, personne. 

Kile sut qu>on attaquait son mart et con- 
rut aussitdt tout eperdue pour le secourir. 

Je trouvai ses parens tout iploris. 

Cet urbre po*sse ses branches touta droi- 
tes. 

J'en ai encore le me'moire toute fraiche. 

II a voulu faire voir par cet esiai qu'il 



went off very quietly. 

The vine and ivy twist round the elms. 

They do not deny that he is brave, but he 
boasts rather too much. 

The youngest is rich, but the eldest is still 
more so. 

The sky is covered with clouds, and the 
storm is preparing to burst. 

After having crossed the Alps with his 
troops, he entered Italy. 

Temperance imparts an increase of health 
and strength to the body. 

This speech is perhaps one of the finest 
pieces of eloquence that was ever pronounc 
ed. 

He is a man foad of liberty, be will be 
restrained by nobody. 

He is taller than me by two inches. 

Will you go and expose yourself to the 
barbarity and inhospitality of those nations ? 

In time evrors vanish and truth survives. 

If you treat me with that haughtiness, I 
can be as haughty as you. 

He is a stern character, who pardons no- 
thing either in himself or others. 

Some mount, others descend ; thus goes 
the wheel of fortune. 

I see nothing certain in all you propose 
tome. 

It is one of the finest productions of art. 

Which of the two is in the wrong ? 

We sometimes love the treason, but we 

always hate the traitor. 

Continuation. 

The elephant makes use of his trunk to 
take and lift whatever he pleases. 

The more I look at that person, the more 
I think I have seen him (or her) somewhere. 

Night came on, so that I was obliged to 
retire. 

We must live in such a manner as to Jn 
jure nobody. 

She knew her husband was attacked, and 
in a state of distraction ran to his assistance. 

I found his relations all in tears. 

The branches of that tree grow quite 
straight. 

It is still quite fresh in my memory. 

He wished to shew by that attempt that 



pouvait rdussir en quelque chose de plus he could succeed in an enterprise of more 



grand, 

llfut blesse" au front et mourut de cette 
blessure. 

Ces chevaux prirent le mors aux dents et 
extrainirent le carrosse. 

Ctst un homme qui compose sans chaleur 



consequence. 

He was wounded in the forehead, and died 
of his wound. 

Those horses ran away with the carriage. 

He is a man that writes without the least 



ni immgination ; tout ce qu*il icrit est froid warmth or animation: all his productions 



et plat 

Ce bdtiment a plus de profondeur que de 
largeur. 

Cet homme est un prodige de savoir, de 
science, de valeur, cPcsprit, et de me'moire. 

II est attache* d Pun et a Pautre, mais plus 
a Pun qu'd Pautre. 

Hi ant bien de Pair Pun de Pautre, 



38* 



are cold and insipid. 

That building is deeper than it is broad. 

That man is a prodigy of knowledge* 
judgment, courage, sense, and memory. 

He is attached to both, but to one mors 
than to the other. 

They very much resemble each other. 



433 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



Si Von mine cet hommc-ld, le contre-coup 
retombera sur vous. 

II serait mort, si on ne Veut assists avec 
toin. 

Ce poime serait parf ait, si les incidens, 
qui It font languir, n"* inter rompaient la 
continuite de Paction. 

Continuation. 

Quand je levoudrais,je ne lepourroispas. 

Je serai toujours votre ami, quand mime 
vous ne le voudriez pas. 

Quand vous auriez reussi, que vous en se- 
rait-il revenu ? 

Quand on dicouvrirait votre demarche , 
on ne pourrait la blame r. 

Quand vous auriez consulte" quelqu'un sur 
votre marriage, vous n 1 auriez pas mieux re- 
us si. 

Le tonnerre et Veclair ne sont sensibles 
que par la propagation du bruit et de lalu- 
miere jusqxPd Vail et a Poreille. 

Le langage de la prose est plus simple et 
moins figure" que celui des vers. 

Le commencement de son discours est tou- 
jours assez sage ; mais, dans la suite, a 
force de vouloir s'elever, il se perd dans les 
nues : on ne sail plus ni ce qu'on voit, ni 
ce qu'on entend. 

&est un faute excusable dans un autre 
homme, muis dun homme aussi sage que lui, 
tile ne se pent par donner. 

line su fit pas de paraitre honnete hom- 
me, ilfaut Petre. 

_ 11 nous a reQus avec bonte, et nous a dcou- 
tis avec patience. 

Tout y est si Men peint, qu>on croit voir 
ce qu'il dicrit. 

On ne pense rien de vous, qui ne vous soit 
glorieux. 

Les eaux de citernes ne sont que des eaux 
de pluie ramassdes. 

S y il n'est pas fort riche, du moins a-t-ilde 
quoi vivre honnetement. 

Quel quantiime du mois avons-nous ? 

U lux tarde quHl ne soit majeur, il compte 
les fours et les mois. 

Des qualites excellentes, jointes d de ra- 
res talens,font le parfait mirite. 

il a une mauvaise qualiti, c'cst qxPil ne 

t aurait garder un secret. 

Modules de phrases dans lcsquelles, on doit 
faire usage de l'article. 

L'homme estsujet a bien des vicissitudes. 

Les hommes d>un vrai gdnie sont rares. 

Les hommes a imagination sont ra^ement 
heureux. 

L'homme, dont vous parhz, est un de mes 
ctmis. 

La vie est un melange ds biens et de maax. 

La perfection en tout genre est le but au- 
quel on doit tendre. 

La beaute, les grace*, et I'esprit sont des 
avantages bien precieux, quand ils sont re- 
UvSs par la modestie. 

Voild des tableaux d?une grande beaute. 

Faites-vous des principes, dont vous ne 
X>ou$ icartiez jamais. 

Cet arbre porte des fruits excellens. 

Ces jaisons sont des conjectures biznfai- 
blet. 



If that man is ruined, his misfortune will 
recoil upon you. 

He would have died, if he bad not been 
kindly assisted. 

That would be a perfect poem, if the in- 
cidents which give a heaviness to it, did not 

break the connecti on of the subject. 

Continuation. 

If I were disposed I could not do it. 

I will always be your friend, even though 
you should not wish it. 

Had you even succeeded, what were you 
to have derived from it ? 

Should the steps you have taken be dis- 
covered, they could not be blamed. 

Had you consulted somebody about your 
marriage, you could not have succeeded 
better. 

Thunder and lightning are only percep- 
tible by the transmission of sound and light 
to the ear and eye. 

Prose language is much more simple and 
less figurative than poetic. 

The beginning of his speech is always to- 
lerably sensible : but afterwards, by affect- 
ing the sublime, he loses himself, and we no 
longer understand either what we see or 
hear. 

This fault would be excusable in another 
man, but in a man of his sense it is unpar- 
donable. 

It is not enough to seem an honest man, 
we must be so. 

He received us with kindness, and heard 
us patiently. 

Every thing in it is so well delineated, you 
think you see what he describes. 

They think nothing of you but what is to 
your honour. 

Cistern water is only rain-water collect- 
ed. 

If he is not rich, at least he has enough to 
live upon respectably. 

What day of the month is it ? 

He longs to be of age, and counts the days 
and months. 

Excellent qualities, joined to distinguish- 
ed talents, constitute perfect merit. 

He has one bad quality, he cannot keep a 
secret. 

Examples of phrases in which the Article is 
used. 

Man is liable to a variety of changes. 

Men of real genius are scarce. 

Men of a visionary character are seldom 
happy. 

The man you speak of is a friend of mine* 

Life is a compound of good and evil. 

Perfection In every thing ought to be our 
object. 

Beauty, gracefulness, and wit, are vahia 
ble endowments when heightened by mo- 
desty. 

These are very beautiful pictures. 

Establish rules for yourself, and never de- 
viate from them. 

This tree bears very excellent fruit. 

These reasons are very idle conjectures 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



4S9 



Servez-vous des termes itablis par Vus- 
age. 

On doit loiter Pair de l'affectalion. 

Le Jupiter de Phidias etait d'v.ne grande 
bcaute". 

Continuation de$ meme phrases. 

La memoir t est le tre'sor de l'esprit, le 
fruit de l'attenlion et de la reflexion. 

J'acheiai hier des gravures precieuses et 
rares. 

La France est I e plus beau pays de PEu~ 
rope. 

& inter et de 1'Allemagne Hail opposi a 
celui de la Russie. 

La longueur de l'Angleterre du nord au 
sud est de 360 milles, et sa largtur de Pest 
a Pouest est de 300. 

It arrive de la Chine, du Japon, et des 
Indes Orientales, 6fc. 

J I arrive de l'Amerique, de la Barbade, 
de la Jamalque, 4fc. 

J I vient de la Flandre Frangaise. 

J I s'est itabli dans la province de ^Middlesex 

Des petits-maitres sont des etres insup- 
portables dans la sociiti. 

Cest V opinion des nouveaux philosophes. 

Kile a bien de la grace dans tout ce 
qu' tile fait. 

Cette etojfe se vend une guinee l'aune. 

Ce vin coute 70 li-jres sterling la pidce. 
Modules de phrases dans lesquelles on ne 
doit pas faire usage de Particle. 

JVos connoissances doivent etre tirees de 
principes evidens. 

Cet arbre porte d'excellens fruits. 

Cts raisom sont de faibles conjectures. 

Evitez tout ce qui a un air d'affectation. 

Ces extmples peuvent servir de modeles. 

Jl a une grande presence d'esprit. 

La me'moire de raison et d'esprit est plus 
utile que les autres sortes de memoire. 

Peu de personnes rijlechissuit sur la ra- 
pidity de la vie. 

Que d'eA'enemens inconcevables se sont 
succide's les uns aux autrts ! 

11 y a plus d'esprit, mait moins de conna- 
issances, dans ce siicle que dans le siicle 
dernier. 

On nevit jamais a< -taut d'< -flYonteri . 

Je pris hier beuueoup de peine pour ri'eiw 

Candie est une des ties Its plus agreables 
de la AUdilerranic. 

Jl arrive de Perse, dltalie, d*E 

11 est revenu de Suisse, d'Allemagnc, 6fc. 

Let vins de France scront chers cette anr 
nit ; les vignes ont couU. 

L^empire d'Allemagne est compose 1 de 
grands et de pet its ('tats. 

Lit chevaux d'Angleterre sont (xzccllens. 

Jlpritmon dipart de Suisse, je nu 
rai d Rome. 

Continuation des monies phra 

Vout trouverez ce passage page 120, liv- 
re premier, chapitre dim. 

Jl t\tt retire' en Angleterre. 



Use the expressions established by custom. 

We ought to avoid the appearance of af- 
fectation. 

The Jupiter of Phidias was extremely 

beautiful. 

The sayne Phrases continued. 

Memory is the treasure of the mind, the 
result of attention and reflection. 

I yesterday bought some valuable and 
scarce engravings. 

France is the finest country in Europe. 

The German interest was contrary to the 
Russian. 

The length of England from north to south 
is 360 miles, and its breadth from east to 
west is 300. 

He comes from China, Japan, and the 
East Indies. 

He comes from America, Barbadoes, Ja 
maica, &.c. 

He comes from French Flanders. 

He has settled in the county of Middlesex. 

Coxcombs are un suffer able beings in so- 
ciety. 

It is the opinion of the new philosophers. 

She does every thing most gracefully. 

This stuff sells at a guinea the ell. 

This wine cost? seventy pound s a pipe. 

Examples of phrases in which the Article is 

omitted. 

Our knowledge ought to be derived from 
evident principles. 

This tree produces excellent fruit. 

These reasons are idle conjectures. 

Avoid whatever bears the appearance ot 
affectation. 

These examples may serve as models. 

He has great presence of mind. 

The memory of reason and sense is more 
useful than any other kind of memory. 

Few people reflect on the rapidity of life. 

now many inconceivable events have fo!> 
lowed in succession ! 

There is more wit but less knowledge in 
this age than in the last. 

So much assurance never was met with. 
I took a great deal of trouble yesterday 
about nothing. 
Candle is one of the most agreeable is 

.ii the Mediterranean. 
J le (orncs from Persia, Italy, Spain, kc. 
fie is returned from Switzerland, Genua 
ny, tc. 

h vines will be dear this year ; the 
en blighted. 
Ill ■ German empire is composed of grea i 

: l!l Btat68. 

The English bor«=es are excellent 

r leaving Switzerland, I retired t»j 

Pome. 

nuation ■•/the same phrases. 

You will find thi> passage at i>age 10O, 

6 fust, chapter the tenth. 
He has retired to England. 



440 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES, 



llvxt dans sa retraite en vrai philoso- 
phe. 

Quand il rdfldchit sur sa conduite, il en 
cut honte. 

Cest un homme qui cherche fortune. 

J I intend malice a tout. 

JVe portez en vie dpersonne. 

Si vous promettez, tenez parole. 

Dans les affaires importantes ne vous dd- 
eidez jamais sans prendre conseil. 

Courage, soldats, tenons fermts ; la vio- 
toire est d nous. 

Cettefemme n^a ni grace ni beaute. 

Monseigneur le due de fyc. prince du sang, 
alia hier a la campagne. 

Montrer tant defaiblesse,c i est n'etre pas 
homme. 

Cet homme est une espice de misanthrope, 
dont les brusqueries sont quelquefois tris- 
plaisantes. 

Uananas est une sorte de fruit tris-com- 
mun aux Antilles. 

Cest un genre de vie qui ne me plait point. 

Continuation des memes phrases. 

Cette dame plait a tout le monde par son 
honnetete et sa douceur. 

Tout homme a des defauts plus ou moins 
sensibles. 

Cette conduite augmentait chaque jour le 
nombre de ses amis. 

Tous les biens nous viennent de Dieu. 

Venus it ait la diesse de la beaute" , et la 
mire de Pamour et des graces. 

Selon les patens, Jupiter itait le premier 
des dieux. 

Apollon etoit frere jumeau de Diane. 

Rubens a ite un grand peintre. 

Homere et Virgile sont les deux plus 
grands poites ipiques. 

Londres est la plus belle ville que je con- 
naisse. 

Ueau de riviere est douce, et Veau de 
mer est saUe. 

C'est un excellent poisson de mer. 

Voila une superbe table de marbre. 

iJeau de Seine est celle qu J on pref&re a 
Paris. 

Pauvrete n>est pas vice. 

Citoyens, etrangers, grands, peuples, se 
font montris sensibles a cette perte. 

Modeles de phrases sur le Pronom 7>c. 

Kst-ce la votre opinion ? — ne doutez point 
que oe ne la soit. 

Sont-ce lu vos domestiques? — out, ce les 
tont. 

Mcsdames, ites-vous les etrangeres quSon 
tn'a annoncees ? — oui, nous les sovtmes. 

Madame, etes-vous la malade pour la- 
mielle on m'a appeU ? — oui, je la suis. 

Madame, etes-vous la mere Je cet enfant f 
—oui,je la suis. 

Mesdames, etesoous contentes de cette 
musique ? — qui, nous le sommes. 

Elle est malheureuse, et je crains bien. 
ffXi'elle ne le soit toule la vie. 

Madame, Stei-vous mire ? — oui, je le suis. 

Mudamc, ites-vous malade ? — out, je le suis. 



He lives in his retreat like a real philo- 
sopher. 

When he reflected on his conduct, he was 
ashamed of it. 

He is a man that seeks to make a fortune. 

He puts a malicious construction oiueve- 
ry thing. 

Envy nobody. 

If you promise, keep your word. 

In matters of consequence, never decide 
without advice. 

Cheer up, soldiers, let us continue firm j 
the day is our own. 

This woman is destitute both of grace 
and beauty. 

The duke of &.c. a prince of the blood, 
went yesterday into the country. 

To shew so much weakness is not acting 
like a man. 

This man is a kind of misanthropist, whose 
oddities are sometimes comical. 

The pine-apple is a kind of fruit very com- 
mon in the Antilles. 
It is a kind of life that is not agreeable to me 

The same sentences continued. 

This lady pleases every one by her good 
breeding and mildness. 

Every one has defects more or less obvi- 
ous. 

This behaviour daily increased the num- 
ber of his friends. 

Every blessing comes from God. 

Venus was the goddess of beauty, and the 
mother of love and the graces. 

According to the Heathens, Jupiter was 
the first of the gods. 

Apollo was twin brother to Diana. 

Rubens was a great painter. 

Homer and Virgil are the two greatest 
epic pools. 

London is the finest city that I know. 

River water is sweet, and sea water is 
salt. 

It is an excellent sea-fish. 

There is a superb marble table. 

The water of the Seine is preferred at 
Paris. 

Poverty is not a vice. 

Citizens, strangers, grandees, people, have 
shewn themselves sensible of this loss. 

Forms of phrases upon the pronoun Le. 

Is that your opinion ? — do not question it. 

Are these your servants ? — yes they are. 

Ladies, are you the strangers that have 
been announced to me ? — yes, we are. 

Madam, are you the sick person for whom 
I have been called ?— yes, I am. 

Madam, are you the mother of this child ? 
— yes, I am. 

Ladies, are you pleased with this music ? 
— yes, we are. 

She is unhappy, and I much fear she will 
continue so for life. 

Madam, are you a mother ? — yes I am. 

Madam, are you sick ? — yes, I am. 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



44! 



Madame, depuis quel temps etes-vous ma- 
riee i—je le suis depuis un an. 

Y a-t-il long-temps que vous etes arrivee ? 
— je le suis depuis quinze jours. 

Aristote croyait que le monde etait de 
toute itemite ; maisPluton ne le croyait pas. 

Quoique cette ftmme montre plus defer- 
mete" que les autres, elle n'est pas pour cela 
la mo ins ajfligec. 

Cette femme a Part de repandre des lar- 
mes dans le temps vxeme qu'elle est le moins 

cfflige'e. 

Modeies de phrases sur les differentes re- 
gies du participe passe. 

La nouvelle piece a-t-elle ete applaudie ? 

Vos parens y seront-ils arrives d temps ? 

Elle s'est donne de belles robes. 

Elles nous ont apporte de superbes ailleis. 

Cette ruse ne lui a pas reussi. 

La vie traiquille que fai men ee depuis 
dix ans, a beaucoup contribae a me faire 
0ublier mes malheurs. 

Les lettres, qui fai recces, m'ont beau- 
-mup ajJligL 

Que de peines vous vous etts donnees ! 

Quelle tache vous vous etes imposee ! 

C>est une satire que fai retrouvee dans 
mes papiers. 

Les lettres qu'a ecrites Pline le jeune, 
qpelque agriables quhlles soient, se ressen- 
tent neartmoins un peu de la decadence du 
gout purmi les Komains. 

Je rte serais pas entri avec vous dans tous 
ces details de grammaire, sije ne les avais 
crus necessaires. 

L'Egypte s'etait rendue celebre par la 
tuges*c de ses lois long-temps avant que la 
Grese sortit de la barbaric 

Cest une des plusgrandes nierveilles quPon 
ait vues. 

Dhomme de lettres, dont vous nfavez, par- 
le, a un gout exquis. 

Vous avcz tris-bien instruit vos elives. 

Lucr&ce s'est donne la mart. 

La se'eheresse quHl y a eu au printemps a 
fuitpcrir tous lis fruits. 

Je n'ai point riussi, malgre les mesure3 
que vous wCavez conseille de prendre. 

Queile aveature vous est- it an i 

Cette femme s*esi ur n.odile a 

%es enfans. 

Cette femmr s^est propose d'enscigner la 
giographie et Vhistoire a ses enfans. 

'.es de phrasr- cipaux rap- 

•k-s modes et des U 
Je Valtendais depuis long-temps, <■ 
il vint me joindre. 

H sortit au moment mime que fentrais. 

Je commensals d voir des craintes sur la 
riussite de votre affaire, lorsque fai rtqx 
votre lettre. 

Vis que feus fait quelques visites indis- 
pensables, je rentrai chtx moi, et je ne sor- 
tit plus. 

J'avais dijb tout pripari pour mon di- 



Madam, how long have you been married ? 
—^ year. 
Is it long since you arrived ? — a fortnight. 

Aristotle believed the world to have been 
from all eternity ; but Tlato did not 

Although this woman shows more resolu- 
tion than the others, she is nevertheless not 
the least afflicted. 

This woman has the art of shedding tearr, 
even when she is least afflicted. 

Forms of Phrases upon the different rules 
of the participle past. 

Did the new piece meet with applause ? 

Will your relations arrive there in time ? 

She has given herself fine gowns. 

They have brought us beautiful pinks. 

He has not succeeded in this stratagem. 

The quiet life I have led these ten years 
has greatly contributed to make me forget 
my misfortunes. 

The letters I have received have afflicted 
me greatly. 

What a deal of trouble you have given 
yourself ! 

What a task you have imposed on your- 
self ? 

It is a satire that I have again met with 
in my papers. 

The letters which the younger Pliny has 
written, however agreeable they may be, 
savour, nevertheless, a little of the decline 
of taste among the Romans. 

I would not have entered into these gram- 
matical details with you, had I not thought 
them necessary. 

Egypt had become celebrated for the wis 
dora of its laws long before Greece had 
emsrged from barbarism. 

It is one of the greatest wonders that has 
ever been seen. 

The man of letters you spoke to me of has. 
an excellent taste. 

You have instructed your pupils extreme 
ly well. 

Lucretia lulled herself. 

The dry veather we had in the spring 
has destroyed all the fruit. 

I have not succeeded, notwithstanding the 
steps you advised me to take. 

What adventures have you nut with ? 

This woman proposed herself as a model 
for her children. 

This woman prop b geography 

and history to h«T children. 

Forms of phrases upon the prim ipal rcla- 

t lom of moods and u 
T had waited* a long time for him, i 

line to me. 
He was going out at the time I was cn- 

tning. 
1 u. 

the sne 

ed your letter. 

I went home and did n 

terwan 

I had already made ev ion for 



442 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



part, lorsque des a ff aires imprivues m'onc" my departure, when some unexpected bust- 
force" a It diffirer de quelques jours. 



Vous ititz dejd sorti, quandje me pre" - 
stntai chez vous. 

J'avais dijd livri d Pimpression mon ouv- 
rage. lorsque vous me demandiez, si je le 
donnerais bientdt an public. 

Lorsqut j'ai eu termini mon affaire vous 
avez commence" la vdtre. 

JLorsque feus dijeune" je montai a chtval, 
etjefus d Londres. 

Lorsque favrailu la nouvelle piice,je 
vous dirai avec franchise ce que fen pense. 

Iriez'vous d Home si vous le pouviez ? — 
oui, firais. 

Auriez-vnus consent i d ces conditions, si 
on vons les avait propose" es ? 

Irez-vous demain a Londres, si vous le 
pouvtz ? — oui, firai. 

11 sera surement parti , si vous Pavez vou- 
lu. 

Vous eussiez laissd dchupper une occasion 
si favorable, si Pon ne vous eut averti a 

temps. 

Continuation des memes phrases. 

On dit que vous partez aujourd'hui pour 
Paris. 

Tout le monde soutient que vous accepte- 
rez la place qu'on vous offre. 

On soupQonne que vous aviez hier regit 
eette agreable nouvelle quand on vous ren- 
eontra. 

Beaucoup de vos amis croient que vous 
partites hier pour la campagne. 

Le bruit se ripand que vous avez fait une 
grosse perte. 

J'apprends dans P instant que vousfus- 
siez parti il y a trois jours, si des engage- 
mens, que vous aviez iontractfs de puis long- 
iemps, ne vous avaient retenu. 

J^Pest-il pas vrai que vous partiriez au- 
jourd'hui, si vous le pouviez 7 

Est'il vrai que vous seriez parti depuis 
long-temps pour la campagne, si voire 
amour pour les arts ne vous avait retenu a 
la ville ? 

Je ne crois pas que vous partiez, quoique 
tout le monde P assure. 

Je ne croyaispas qu'ilfut si-tdt de retour. 

II afallu qu'il ait eu affaire a bien des 
personnel. 

Je doute que votre amifut venu d bout 
da tesprojets, s'il n'avait pasiti fortemtnt 
protdge". 

h n'est point tPhomme, quelque me" rite 
quhi ait, qui nefxLt trds-mortifd, s'il sa- 
voit toute ce qu'on pense de lui. 

Vous ne vous persuadiez pas que les af- 
faires pus sent si mal toumer. 

Modules de Phrases sur la Negative JV*#. 

// n'y a pas beaucoup tfargent chez ces 
gens de lettres. 

11 n'y a point d* ressource dans uneper- 
sonne qui n'o point CPcsprit. 

Cest d tort que vous Paccusez de jouer ', 
*c vous assure qu'il aejous point. 



ness occurred, that obliged me to defer it 
for somp days. 

You were already gone out when I called 
upon you. 

My work had been sent to be printed 
when you asked me if I should soon bring 
it out. 

When my business was over you began 
yours. 

When I had done breakfast, I got on 
horseback, and went to London. 

When I have read the new piece, I will 
candidly give you my opinion of it. 

Would you go 10 Rome if it were in your 
power ?— Yes, I would. 

Would you have agreed to those terms, 
had they been proposed to you ? 

Shall you go to London to-morrow, if you 
can ?•— yes, I shall. 

He will certainly have set out, if you 
v/ished it. 

You would have let so favourable an op- 
portunity slip, had you not been warned in 

time. 

The same phrases continued. 

It is said that you set off to-day for Parts. 

Every one maintains that you will accept 
of this place that is offered to you. 

It is suspected that you had received this 
agreeable intelligence when you were met 
yesterday. 

Many of your friends believe that yoo set 
out yesterday for the country. 

There is a report that you have met with 
a considerable loss. 

I have thb moment learnt that you would 
have set out three days since, had not en- 
gagements which you had formed long ago 
detained you. 

It is not true that you would set out to- 
day, if you could ? 

Is It true that you would have set out for 
the country long since, had not your love 
for the arts detained you in town ? 

I do not imagine that you will set out, al- 
though every body asserts it. 

I did not believe he had gone back so 
soon. 

He must have had business with a great 
many people. 

I doubt that your friend would have suc- 
ceeded in his plan, had he not been strongly 
patronised. 

There is not a man, whatever merit he 
may possess, that would not be very much 
mortified, were be to know every thing 
that is thought of him. 

You never persuaded yourself that mat- 
ters could have taken so unfortunate a turn. 

Forms of Phrases upon the Negative Ne. 

There is not much money to be found 
among men of letters. 

There are no resources in a person with- 
out sense. 

You accuse him wrongfully of gaming J 
I assure you he never games. 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



443 



Entrez dans le talon ; vous pourrez lui 
parler ; il nejouepas. 

Si pour avoir du bien, il en coute a la 
probite", je n'en vcutc point. 

Rien n'cet sur avec les capricieux ; vous 
croyez itre bitn enfaveur, point du tout: 
Vinstant de la plus belle humeur est suivi de 
la plus fdchcuse. 

Vous ne cessez de nous ripiter Its mimes 
ckoses. 

Je n'aurais os£ vous en parler le premier. 

Malgri ses protections, il n'a pu riussir 
dans ses projtts. 

Cet ouvrage seraitfort 6on, netait pour 
la negligence du style. 

Y a-t-il guc/gu'un dont elle ne midise. 

J'ai pris tant de gout pour une vie retU 
rt"e, que je ne sors presque jamais. 

yield ce qui s'ett pane ; n'en parlez a 
personne. 

JMon parti est pris ; ne m'en parlez plus. 

"N'employez aucun de ces moyens : Us sont 
indignes de vous. 

Rien n'es* plusjoli. 

Je ne dis rien queje ne pense. 

Je nefais jamais d'excis que je n'en sois 
incommode. 

Continuation des memes Phrases. 
C'est un homme pour qui je n'ai ni amour, 
ni estime. 

11 n' est ni ussez prudent ni assez eclaire". 

Je vous assure que ji ne le friquente ni 
ne It vois. 

Ne faire que parcourir Its diffe" rentes 
branches des connuissances humaines sans 
s'arreter a aucune, e'est moins cherchtr a 
i'instruire, qu'a tuer le temps. 

Que netes-vous toujour s aussi complai- 
sant ? 

Il ne lefcrapas, a moins que vous ne Py 
tngagitz. 

11 n\rapas, si vous ne Pen priez. 

Il nous a menaces de se venger ; nous 
rfavortsjuit qu'en rire. 

Trop d 1 insouciance ne peut que nuirc. 

Que dcccncz-vous ? il y a trois mois que 
nous ne vous arona vu 'J 

Comment vous etes-vous porti depuis que 
notes ne vous avons vu ? 

C'esi bien pire qu'on ne le disait. 

Pen s^en fautqut je n'a t'c donne" tiie bais- 
sit dans It pitge. 

Ditet la viriti en toute occasion ; on me 1 - 
prise toujours ccux qui par lent autrement 
qu?ilt ne pensent. 

Ne desesperez pas que la viriti ne sefas- 
se jour a la longue. 

Je ne disconviens pas que la chose ne soit 
ainsi. 

Prenex garde qu'on ne vous entraine dans 
quelqucfuutse d-marche. 

J'cmpficberai bien qu'on nc vous nuise 
dans cette affaire. 

Il craint (ju'on ne le soupgonne d 1 avoir 
trtmpi dans ce comptot. 



Go into the room, you may speak to him t 
he is not playing-. 

I do not wish to make a fortune, if it can 
only be done at the expense of honesty. 

Nothing is certain with capricious peo- 
ple; you think yourself in favour, by no 
means ; the moment of the best humour is 
followed by that of the worst. 

You are constantly repeating the same 
thing to us. | 

I should not have dared to be the first to 
speak to you of it. 

With all his interest he has not been able 
to succeed in bis plans. 

This work would be very good, were it 
not for the negligence of the style. 

Is there any one she does not slander ? 

I have acquired so great a taste for re- 
tirement, that I seldom go abroad. 

This is what has passed ; do not speak of 
it to any one. 

My resolution is fixed; talk to me no 
more of it. 

Do not employ any one of these measures j 
they are unworthy of you. 

Nothing is more beautiful. 

I never speak but what I think. 

I never conunit any excess without suf- 
fering by it. 

Continuation of the same i'hrases. 

He is a m?.n for whom I have neither 
love nor esteem. 

He is ne ither sufficiently prudent nor en- 
lightened. 

I assure you I neither associate with him 
nor see him. 

To go through the different branches of 
human knowledge only, without fixing upon 
any one of them, is not to seek for instruc- 
tion, but to kill time. 

Why are you not at all times equally com- 
plaisant ? 

He will not do it, unless you persuade him 
to it. 

He will not go, if you do not request it ot 
him. 

He has threatened us with vengeance ; we 
only laughed at him. 

Too great supineness cannot but be hurt* 
ful. 

What has become of you ? we have not 
seen you these three months. 

How have you been since we saw you f 

It is much worse than was said. 

1 was near running headlcng into the 
snare. 

Tell the truth on all occasions : those who 
speak what they do not think are always 
de-pised. 

Do not despair that truth will appear in 
time. 

1 admit that it is so. 

Take care that you are not led into some 
false step. 

I shall prevent them from doing you any 
harm in this business. 

He is apprehensive that he is suspected of 
being concerned in this plot. 



444 



PHRASES OX SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



On lux a donni d'excellens conseils, de 
crainte quHl ne manqudt V occasion de /aire 
connaitre ce quHl est en itat defaire. 

J'y at long-temps travailU ; je nesaurais 
en venir d bout, 

Vousferiez mieux de vous taire ; vous ne 
savez ce que vous dues. 

Vous ne sauriez me /aire un plus grand 
plaisir. 

Phrases sur quelques Delicatesses de la 

Langue Franchise. 
Irez-vous ce soir a Poptra ?—oui, firai. 

Iriez-vous aroec plaisir a Rome 7 — ouij J 
irais. 

La justice qui nous est quelquefois refu- 
sie par nos coutemporains, la posteriU soit 
nous la rendre. 

Cette grandeur qui vous 6 'tonne si forty il 
la doit a votre nonchalance. 

U perit, cc hdros, si cher a son pays. 

Je Pavais bienprevu que ce haut degre de 
grandeur serait la cause de sa ruine. 

Citoyens, etr angers, ennemis,peuples,rois, 
empereurs, le plaignent e.t le r&oertnt. 

^assembles fnie, chacun se retira chez 
soi. 

Heureux le psuple qu'un sage roi gou- 
verne. 

Il refusa les plus grands honneurs, con- 
tent de les mdriter. 

Priircs, remontrances, commandemens, 
tout est inutile. 

Lz vent renvcrse tows, cabanes, palais, 
iglises. 

Notre reputation ne ddpend pas da ca- 
price des hommes ; mate elU depend des ac- 
tions louables que nousfaisons. 

Il y a beaucoup de chosts quHl nHmporle 
point du tout de savoir. 

La vue de Pesprit a plus tTdtendue que la 
rme du corps. 

Ce qui sert a la vanite, n>est que vanite". 
Tout ce qui n'a que le monde pourfon- 
dement f se dissipe et s'evanouit avec le moii- 



They have given him excellent advice, 
lest he should lose the opportunity of shew- 
ing what he was capable of doing. 

I have been long employed about it ; I 
cannot accomplish it. 

You had better be silent, you do not know 
what you are saying. 

You cannot do me a greater favour. 



de. 

(Pest le privilege des grands hommes de 
vaincre Penvie / le mirite la fait naitre, le 
merite la fait mourir. 

L amour-propre est plus habile que le plus 
habile homme au monde. 

En quittant le monde, on ne quit it le plus 
souvent ni les erreurs, ni les f dies passions 
du monde. 



Phrases on some Uelicacies of the French 
Language. 

Shall you go to the opera this evening f 
—yes, I shall. 

Would you cheerfully go to Rome ?— ves, 
I would. * * 

Posterity knows how to do us that justice 
which is sometimes refused us by our con- 
temporaries. 

That greatness which so much astonishes 
you, he owes to your indifference. 

That hero, so dear to his country, perish- 
ed. 

I foresaw that the greatness of his eleva- 
tion would be his ruin. 

Citizens, strangers, enemies, nations, kings, 
emperors, pity and respect him. 

The assembly being over, each returned 
home. 

Happy are the people who are governed 
by a wise king. 

He refused the greatest honours, satisfied 
with having deserved them. 

Entreaties, remonstrances, injunctions 
are all useless. 

The wind overturns towers, cottages, pa- 
laces, churches. 

Our reputation does not depend on the ca 
price of men, but on the commendable ac 
tions we perfoum. 

There are many things which it is of no 
consequence at all to know. 

The eye of the mind reaches much far- 
ther thau the bodily eye. 

What promotes vanity is only vanity 

All that is confined to this lower world 
disperses and vanishes with the world. 

It is the prerogative of great men to con- 
quer envy ; merit gives it birth, and merit 
destroys it. 

Self-love is more ingenious than the most 
ingenious man in the world. 

In renouncing the world we general 1 ', re- 
nounce niether the errors nor giddy passions 
of the world. 



FINIS. 



d S*. #-k «*» 




















m^ * v ^ • ©US * &y ^ o v JIvM^ * -c? 





Deacidified using the Bookkeeper pro 



*^ 

O. Sji* 1 a0 **$► **'^ > J J ( Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 

**£* <y t • • » "Si Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

^• r ^ PreservationTechnologies 

y ^ A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 




c5* 



1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 1 6066 
(724)779-2111 












^0< 




. • • • . 





<$> .«, -\/\3><£*\* «£a a - * 










% '^^ vv* 








^°- 








